PROTECTION RELAYS & CONTROLS CATALOG PROTECTION RELAYS & CONTROLS CATALOG MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Littelfuse World Headquarters 8755 West Higgins Road, Suite 500 Chicago, IL 60631, USA Technical Support: Tel: +1-800-TEC-FUSE E-mail: techline@littelfuse.com Customer Service: Tel: +1-800-227-0029 E-mail: PG_CSG@littelfuse.com Fax: +1-847-787-5190 Littelfuse SymCom 222 Disk Drive Rapid City, SD 57701, USA Technical Support: Tel: +1-800-832-3873 E-mail: techline@littelfuse.com Customer Service: Tel: +1-800-227-0029 E-mail: PG_CSG@littelfuse.com Fax: + 1-605-348-5685 Littelfuse Startco 3714 Kinnear Place Saskatoon, SK S7P 0A6 Canada Tel: +1-306-373-5505 Fax: +1-306-374-2245 E-mail: techline@littelfuse.com ARC-FLASH PROTECTION Littelfuse products are certified to many standards around the world. To check certifications on specific product please refer to the product datasheet on Littelfuse.com. Specifications, descriptions and illustrative material in this literature are as accurate as known at the time of publication, but are subject to changes without notice. Visit Littelfuse.com for the most up-to-date technical information. (c) 2017 Littelfuse, Inc. FORM PF130N Rev: 2-E-112116 GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING PUMP CONTROLLERS FEEDER PROTECTION GROUND-CONDUCTOR MONITORING AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS TOWER AND OBSTRUCTION LIGHTING CONTROL TIMERS FLASHERS Over 1000 Littelfuse MotorSaver (R), PumpSaver (R), and SSAC parts added! Local Resources for a GLOBAL Market Trollhattan Swindon Saskatoon Bellingham Rapid City Chicago Champaign Piedras Negras Muzquiz Kaunas Norwich Bremen Lake Mills Boston Noida Matamoros Wuxi Suzhou Dongguan Shenzhen Seoul Shanghai Taipei Yokohama Hong Kong Lipa City Singapore New Arc-Flash Relays AF0500 with zone protection and AF0100 with compact, cost-effective design AF0500 Arc-Flash Relay Sao Paulo AF0100 Arc-Flash Relay Fuses and Fuse Holders Catalog (PF101N) Littelfuse offers a complete circuit protection portfolio of industrial power fuses, including time-saving indication products for an instant visual blown-fuse identification. New Smart Motor Protection Relay MP8000 with Bluetooth(R) capabilities MP8000 Motor Protection Relay MP8000 Motor Protection Smartphone Application (R) POWR-GARD Solar Catalog (PF140N) POWR-GARD Solar Products are designed specifically for photovoltaic applications where issues such as heat, efficiency, longevity and global standards impact the choices in selecting circuit protection. Visit Technical Resources at Littelfuse.com Technical information is only a click away. The Littelfuse Technical Resources contains datasheets, product manuals, whitepapers, application guides, demos, on-line design tools, and more. An Extension of Your Team Technical Hotline (800-TEC-FUSE or 800-832-3873) Littelfuse engineers are a phone call away to help identify potential issues and provide product recommendations to resolve problems. Application and Field Support Our experienced product and application engineers work step-by-step with customers from design to installation to determine the best solution. Your questions answered, any way you ask them. Choose your preferred product-selection method from the examples below. By Product Category & Part Number: Table of Contents ...................................................... Pg 2-5 7 MOTOR AND PUMP PROTECTION PGR-6100 Motor Ground-Fault & Insulation Relay.............................94 By Application ...................................................................................................................................Pg 6 APPLICATION COMMON PROBLEMS PRODUCT PROTECTION CATEGORY (PG NO.) GENERATORS - Insulation breakdown due to vibration and corrosion - Ground-fault currents often exceed short-circuit current - Arc-flash hazard from local and paralleled generators Ground Fault (pg 43) Resistance Grounding (pg 61) Arc Flash (pg 73) TRANSFORMERS - Overloading and overvoltage Resistance Grounding (pg 61) Feeder (pg 69) By Feature Set ..............................................................................................................................Pg 7-10 Arc-Flash Relays FEATURE Current detection Point sensors Fiber optic sensors PGR-8800 AF0100 AF0500 - By Product Category & Common Questions: Product Selection Guide..........................Pg 11-41 ARC-FLASH PROTECTION product STEP 1 Select category ARC-FLASH DETECTION Rapidly detect an arc flash to reduce damage to equipment and risk to personnel Designed use Designed forfor use inin Sensor Health Monitoring Sensor Health Monitoring OEM equipment OEM equipment Select the needed N Y STEP 2 features in each category Overcurrent Detection Y N PGR-8800 SERIES AF0500 SERIES Find the recommended STEP 3 product for your application pg. 75 pg. 77 D0920 pg. 74 By Keyword or Part Number: Alphanumeric Index ....................................................... Pg 517-520 Arc-Flash Protection pg 14, 73 ARP Series pg 157 ASQU / ASTU Series pg 270 Brackets & Clips pg 486 1 Protection Relays & Controls TABLE OF CONTENTS FIND THE RIGHT PRODUCT FOR YOUR APPLICATION 4 FEEDER PROTECTION FPU-32 Series Feeder Protection Unit .............................................. 70 FPS Series Feeder Protection System ......................................... 71 Typical Product Application ................................................................... 6 Product Feature Comparison .............................................................7-10 Product Selection Guide..................................................................11-41 Alphanumeric Index ....................................................................517-520 5 ARC-FLASH PROTECTION D0920 PGR-8800 Series AF0500 Series AF0100 Series A0220 Series PGA-1100 1 GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION Ungrounded AC Systems EL3100 Series Ground-Fault & Phase-Voltage Indicator.............. 44 PGR-3100 Series Ground-Fault Indication System ........................... 45 PGR-3200 Series Insulation Monitor ................................................ 46 6 SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS Ungrounded DC System SE-601 Series DC Ground-Fault Monitor ..................................... 47 PHS Series SIR Series SLR Series TCR9C Grounded AC/DC System EL731 Series AC/DC Sensitive Earth-Leakage Relay ................. 48 Solidly-Grounded Systems SE-701 Series Ground-Fault Monitor ........................................... 50 SE-703 Series Earth-Leakage Monitor ......................................... 51 SE-704 Series Earth-leakage monitor .......................................... 52 PGR-6100 Series PGR-6101-120 MPU-32 Series MPS Series MPU-32-X69X Series MPS-469X Series 111-Insider-P / 231-Insider-P 232-Insider 111P / 233P / 233P-1.5 Series 234-P 235P MP8000 Series 777 Series 777 / 77C Series 777-KW/HP-P2 Series 777-AccuPower 77C-KW/HP Series SIO-RTD-02-00 Generator and Single-Function Protection PGR-4300 Series Generator Ground-Fault Relay .............................. 55 2 GROUND-CONDUCTOR MONITORING Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor ...... 58 Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor ...... 59 3 RESISTANCE GROUNDING/ NGR MONITORING Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Sizing Chart ............................................ 61 SE-325 Series Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor ................ 62 SE-330 / SE-330HV Series Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor ................ 63 SE-330AU Series Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor ................ 65 NGR Series Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Packages .............. 66 NGRM-ENC Series Enclosed Neutral-Earthing-Resistor Monitor .... 67 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Phase Control................................................................. 84 Solid-State Relay - Isolated .......................................... 86 Solid-State Relay - Non-Isolated ................................. 88 Temperature Controller ................................................. 90 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters SB6000 Series Industrial Shock-Block .......................................... 53 SE-105 / SE-107 Series SE-134C / SE-135 Series Arc Detection Unit ................................................ 74 Arc-Flash Relay ..................................................... 75 Arc-Flash Relay ..................................................... 77 Arc-Flash Relay ..................................................... 79 Light Sensor .......................................................... 80 Diode Logic ........................................................... 81 2 Motor Ground-Fault & Insulation Relay ........ 94 Motor Ground-Fault & Insulation Relay ........ 95 Motor Protection Unit ................................... 96 Motor Protection System .............................. 98 Motor Protection Relay Retrofit Kit ............ 100 Motor Protection Relay Retrofit Kit ............ 100 Single-Phase Pump Monitor ....................... 101 Single-Phase Pump Monitor ....................... 104 Single-Phase Pump Monitor ....................... 106 Single-Phase Pump Monitor ...................... 108 Single-Phase Pump Monitor ....................... 110 Bluetooth(R) Current & Voltage Monitor....... 112 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor ........... 114 Single-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor ... 118 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor ........... 120 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor ........... 123 Single-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor ... 125 Temperature Input Monitor ......................... 128 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays & Controls TABLE OF CONTENTS 8 PUMP CONTROLS/ Voltage Monitoring Relays 50R Series Single-Phase Voltage Monitor .................. 188 201-XXX-SP Series Single-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ....... 190 201-XXX-SP-DPDT Series Single-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ....... 192 202-200-SP Series Single-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ....... 194 460-XXX-SP Series Single-Phase Voltage Monitor .................. 196 102A Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 198 201A Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 200 201A-AU Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 202 201-XXX-DPDT Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 204 202 Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 206 250A Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 208 350 Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 210 355 Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 212 455 Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 214 460 Series 3-Phase Voltage Monitor........................... 216 601 Series 3-Phase Voltage & Frequency Monitor ..... 218 601-CS-D-P1 3-Phase Power Monitor ............................. 220 WVM Series ................................................................... 222 DLMU Series ................................................................... 224 HLMU Series ................................................................... 227 PLMU11 Voltage Monitor......................................... 229 PLM Series Voltage Monitor......................................... 231 TVW Series ................................................................... 233 TVM Series ................................................................... 235 PLR Series ................................................................... 237 PLS Series ................................................................... 239 HLVA6I23 Single-Phase Monitor ................................ 241 KVM Series ................................................................... 243 LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS ACBC-120 Series PC-102 Series PC-105 PC-XXX-LLC-CZ Series PC-XXX-LLC-GM Series 201-100-SLD 460-15-100-LLS 460-15-100-SLD LLC1 Series LLC2 Series LLC4 Series LLC5 Series LLC6 Series LLC8 Series Alternating Relays ALT Series ALT-XXX-1-SW / ALT-XXX-3-SW Series ARP Series 50R-400-ALT Alarm Controller / Battery Charging Unit .. 130 Dual Channel Switch ................................. 132 5-Channel Pump Controller ....................... 133 Liquid Level Control Relay ......................... 134 Liquid Level Control Relay ......................... 134 Single-Channel Seal-Leak Detector .......... 136 Single-Channel Liquid Level Sensor .......... 137 Single-Channel Seal-Leak Detector .......... 139 Open Board Liquid Level Control ............... 141 Open Board Liquid Level Control ............... 143 Octal Plug-In Liquid Level Control ............ 145 Liquid Level Control .................................. 147 Low Level Cutoff Liquid Level Control ...... 149 Low Level Cutoff Liquid Level Control ...... 151 8-Pin Plug-in Alternating Relays ............... 153 Alternating Relays ..................................... 155 Alternating Relays ..................................... 157 Alternating Relay ....................................... 159 Intrinsically Safe Relays ISS-100 Intrinsically Safe Switch ......................................... 160 ISS-101 Intrinsically Safe Switch ......................................... 161 ISS-102 Series Two-Channel Intrinsically Safe Switch ................... 163 ISS-105 Series Five-Channel Intrinsically Safe Switch ................... 165 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 10 REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers CP5 Series Single-Phase Current Monitor ................... 168 LSR-0 Load Sensor, Low Cost Relay ................... 169 LSR-XXX Series Load Sensors ............................................. 170 LSRU Series Load Sensors ............................................. 171 LSRX / LSRX-C Series Load Sensors, Low Cost Relays ................ 173 ECS Series Current Sensors ........................................ 175 ECSW Series Current Sensors ........................................ 178 TCS Series Current Sensors ........................................ 181 TCSA Series Current Transducers .................................. 183 DCSA Series Current Transducers .................................. 185 LCS10T12 / LPM Series Current Indicators ..................................... 187 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 1 RM1000 Series RM2000 Series Informer Informer-MS Remote Monitor ................................................. 246 Remote Monitor ................................................. 248 Remote Diagnostics Tool .................................... 250 Remote Diagnostics Tool .................................... 252 3 13 14 11 COMMUNICATION MODULES RS485MS-2W CIO-MB/ CIO-120-MB CIO-DN-P/ CIO-120-DN-P CIO-777-PR CIO-EN COM 4-20 12 Communication Module .......................................... 254 15 Communication Module .......................................... 255 DevicenetTM Interface ............................................. 257 Profibus Interface .................................................... 259 Modbus-TCP and Modbus-RTU Interface ............... 260 Output Module for use with the 777-AccuPower ... 261 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 16 17 Protection Relays & Controls TABLE OF CONTENTS 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Single Shot HRDS Series ....................................................................................... 337 HSPZA22SL ........................................................................................ 339 KRDS Series ....................................................................................... 341 KSDS Series ....................................................................................... 343 ORS Series ......................................................................................... 345 PRS65 ................................................................................................. 347 TDS / TDSH / TDSL Series ................................................................. 348 TDUS Series ....................................................................................... 350 THC / THS Series ............................................................................... 352 THDS Series ....................................................................................... 354 TRS Series .......................................................................................... 356 TSDS Series ....................................................................................... 358 TSS Series .......................................................................................... 360 Interval ERDI Series......................................................................................... 362 HRDI Series ........................................................................................ 364 KRDI Series ........................................................................................ 366 KSD2 Series ....................................................................................... 368 KSPU Series ....................................................................................... 370 TDI / TDIH / TDIL Series..................................................................... 372 TDUI / TDUIH / TDUIL Series ............................................................. 374 THD2 Series ....................................................................................... 376 THD7 Series ....................................................................................... 378 TS2 / TS6 Series ................................................................................ 380 TSD2 Series........................................................................................ 382 TSD6 Series........................................................................................ 384 TSD7 Series........................................................................................ 386 Retriggerable Single Shot KRD9 Series ....................................................................................... 388 TSD94110SB ...................................................................................... 390 Recycle ERD3425A .......................................................................................... 391 ESDR Series ....................................................................................... 393 HRDR Series ....................................................................................... 396 KRD3 Series ....................................................................................... 398 KRDR Series ....................................................................................... 400 KSD3 Series ....................................................................................... 402 KSDR Series ....................................................................................... 404 KSPD Series ....................................................................................... 406 RS Series ............................................................................................ 408 TDR Series.......................................................................................... 410 THD3C42A0 ........................................................................................ 412 TSD3411S........................................................................................... 414 TSDR Series ....................................................................................... 416 Timer Function Guide ......................................................................... 264 Multifunction TRDU Series ....................................................................................... 265 TRU Series.......................................................................................... 268 ASQU / ASTU Series .......................................................................... 270 DSQU / DSTU Series .......................................................................... 272 Dedicated On Delay T10 Series .......................................................................................... 274 Delay-on-Make ERDM Series ...................................................................................... 275 HRDM Series...................................................................................... 277 KRDM Series ...................................................................................... 279 KRPS Series........................................................................................ 281 KSD1 Series ....................................................................................... 284 KSDU Series ....................................................................................... 286 KSPS Series........................................................................................ 288 MSM Series ....................................................................................... 291 ORM Series ........................................................................................ 293 TDM /T DMH / TDML Series ............................................................. 297 TDU / TDUH / TDUL Series ................................................................ 299 TH1 Series .......................................................................................... 301 THD1B410.5S ..................................................................................... 303 TMV8000 / TSU2000 Series .............................................................. 305 TRM Series......................................................................................... 307 TS1 Series .......................................................................................... 309 TSD1 Series........................................................................................ 311 Delay-on-Make, Normally Closed TS441165 ........................................................................................... 313 Delay-on-Break HRDB Series ....................................................................................... 315 HRPS / HRIS Series ............................................................................ 317 KRDB Series ....................................................................................... 319 KSDB Series ....................................................................................... 321 ORB Series ......................................................................................... 323 TDB / TDBH / TDBL Series ................................................................. 325 TDUB Series ....................................................................................... 327 THDB Series ....................................................................................... 329 TRB Series .......................................................................................... 331 TSB Series .......................................................................................... 333 TSDB Series ....................................................................................... 335 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 4 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays & Controls TABLE OF CONTENTS 14 ACCESSORIES Percentage PTHF4900DK....................................................................................... 418 Dual Function TDMB Series ...................................................................................... 420 ESD52233 ........................................................................................... 422 KRPD Series ....................................................................................... 424 HVAC CT Series ............................................................................................ 426 T2D120A15M ..................................................................................... 428 TA Series ............................................................................................ 430 TAC1 Series ........................................................................................ 432 TL Series............................................................................................. 434 TSA141300 ......................................................................................... 436 Coin Vending HRV Series ......................................................................................... 437 Software .......................................................................................... 468 Electrical .......................................................................................... 469 Ground Reference Modules, High-Tension Couplers, & Relay Testers .................................................................................. 472 Remote Indication .............................................................................. 473 Communication Adapters & Modules................................................ 476 Terminations & Adapters ................................................................... 477 Liquid Level Control............................................................................ 478 Current Transformers (CTs) CT Selection Guide............................................................................. 479 Current Transformers ......................................................................... 480 Instrumentation & Metering Transformers ........................................ 481 Current Transformer Sizing Chart....................................................... 482 Mounting Adapters and Enclosures Panel-Mount Adapters ....................................................................... 483 DIN Rail & Mounting Adapters .......................................................... 485 Brackets & Clips ................................................................................. 486 Enclosures & Watertight Covers........................................................ 487 Sockets ............................................................................................... 488 13 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS Flashers FSU1000 Series FS100 Series FS100 Series FS200 Series FS300 Series FS491 FS500 Series SC3 / SC4 Series ............................................................................ 440 Low Current Flasher ........................................... 442 Med Power Flasher ............................................ 444 ............................................................................ 446 ............................................................................ 448 ............................................................................ 450 ............................................................................ 451 Sequencing Controls........................................... 453 15 PROTECTION OVERVIEW 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Glossary of Terms............................................................................... 490 Introduction ........................................................................................ 493 I. Introduction to Protection Relays ............................................ 493 II. Relay Application.................................................................... 494 III. CT Application ....................................................................... 502 IV. Resistance-Grounding Conversion ........................................ 503 IEEE/ANSI Device Numbers and Typical Suffixes.............................. 506 Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls FA / FS Series ............................................................................ 455 FB Series Flasher & Incandescent Beacon Alarm Relay .... 457 SCR490D Obstruction Lamp Alarm Relay ........................... 458 SCR Series Universal Lamp Alarm Relay .............................. 459 FB9L Universal Lamp Alarm Relay .............................. 461 SCR9L Universal Lamp Alarm Relay .............................. 463 PCR Series Photo Control ...................................................... 465 1 10 11 12 16 APPENDIX Dimensional Drawings ....................................................................... 507 13 14 17 ALPHANUMERIC INDEX Alphanumeric Index ........................................................................... 517 15 16 17 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 5 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Protection Relays & Controls TYPICAL PRODUCT APPLICATIONS APPLICATION COMMON PROBLEMS PRODUCT PROTECTION CATEGORY (PG NO.) GENERATORS - Insulation breakdown due to vibration and corrosion - Ground-fault currents often exceed short-circuit current - Arc-flash hazard from local and paralleled generators Ground Fault (pg 43) Resistance Grounding (pg 61) Arc Flash (pg 73) TRANSFORMERS - Overloading and overvoltage Resistance Grounding (pg 61) Feeder (pg 69) SWITCHGEAR & MCCs - Highest average downtime (IEEE 493-1997) - Arc-flash risk to personnel maintaining and working on live equipment - A fault on one load or feeder trips the entire lineup Ground Fault (pg 43) Resistance Grounding (pg 61) Motor (pg 93) Feeder (pg 69) Arc Flash (pg 73) Pump Control (pg 129) SWITCHBOARDS & PANELBOARDS - Low-level leakage current undetected by typical OCPDs Ground Fault (pg 43) DRIVES - Switching frequencies cause nuisance tripping - Resistance grounded drives require sensitive, wide-frequency ground-fault protection Ground Fault (pg 43) Motor (pg 93) Arc Flash (pg 73) MOTORS & PUMPS - Winding faults due to overloading, water, dust and vibration - Pump damage due to dry running, deadheading, rapid cycling, seal failure (submersible pumps), over heating, plugged intake, jammed impeller, or voltage fault conditions. Ground Fault (pg 43) Motor (pg 93) Voltage Monitoring (pg 167) Pump Control (pg 129) FEEDER CIRCUITS - Temperature and mechanical stress lead to severe damage - Older electromechanical protection is difficult to maintain - Uncoordinated feeders causing unnecessary downtime Ground Fault (pg 43) Feeder (pg 69) PORTABLE EQUIPMENT - Movement causing broken conductors and failed insulation - Requirement to keep low ground-fault potential - Loss of ground or high ground resistance due to cable faults Ground Fault (pg 43) Feeder (pg 69) Arc Flash (pg 73) Ground-Conductor Monitoring (pg 57) Resistance Grounding/NGR Monitoring (pg 61) GROUNDING RESISTORS - Open-circuit resistors due to corrosion or loose connections Resistance Grounding (pg 61) WATER/WASTEWATER - Electrocution hazard due to personnel working on submersible pumps or in vicinity of water and electricity - Pump damage due to dry running, deadheading, rapid cycling, seal failure (submersible pumps), over heating, plugged intake, jammed impeller, or voltage fault conditions. - Higher risk of arc flash and steam blast due to moisture - Electrical conductors can cause explosions in explosive methane atmosphere - H2S causing premature electronics failure Ground Fault (pg 43) Motor (pg 93) Arc Flash (pg 73) Pump Control (pg 129) Time Delay (pg 262) Resistance Grounding (pg 61) HVACR - Voltage issues causing premature failure - Short cycling increasing wear and tear on compressors - Worn contactor causing voltage fault on compressor motor - Rapid cycling - Low voltage/brownout condition - Contactor chatter - Reverse phase in a 3-phase system - Overload Motor (pg 93) Time Delay (pg 262) www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 6 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays & Controls FEATURE COMPARISONS Use the feature tables below and the Product Selection Guide on pages 11-41 to choose the appropriate protection relay or monitor for your application. Ground-Fault Protection Relays SE-701 SE-703 SE-704 SE-105 SE-107 Remote Reset Analog Output Fail-Safe Option FEATURE SE-601 EL731 Detects GF via Current Detects DC GF Adjustable GF Pickup Adjustable Time Delay Detects GF via Voltage Harmonic Filtering CT-Loop Monitoring PGR-3100 PGR-3200 SE-502 SE-325 SE-330 SE-330HV SE-330AU Insulation Monitoring SE-134C SE-135 Ground-Check Monitoring Grounding-Resistor Monitoring PTC/RTD Overtemperature Communications Conformal Coating PGR-8800 AF0100 AF0500 Arc-Flash Relays FEATURE Current Detection Point Sensors Fiber Optic Sensors - Cable Monitoring on Sensor Inputs USB DC Supply AC Supply Data Logging Multi-Zone Communications (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls NOTE: Tables are for reference only and include standard and optional configurations. Please see the respective catalog page for exact product specifications. Optional 7 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Protection Relays & Controls FEATURE COMPARISONS Pump Controllers FUNCTION Supply Voltage Monitored Current HP Rating 777-KW 77C-KW Single-Phase or 3-Phase 90-690 VAC 0.5-1,000A (>100A w/external CTs) 3-Phase 200-480 VAC* Single-Phase 100-240 VAC* Overload Underload/Dry-well/Dead-head Undercurrent/Dry-well/Dead-head Overcurrent/Jam Reduced Overcurrent Mode Current Unbalance, Phase Loss/ Reversal Over/Undervoltage Voltage Unbalance Ground Fault Overtemperature Dynamic Thermal Model Over/Underfrequency Failure to Accelerate/Underspeed Power Factor Rapid Cycling/Jog Starter Control Differential Output Contact Rating Internal CT's On-unit Metering Remote Display Remote Reset Button Datalogging Local Communications Bluetooth(R) Communication to Smartphone App** Modbus TCP Modbus RTU DeviceNet Profibus Ethernet/IP Allen-Bradley DF1 Analog Output Analog Input (Prog.) Digital Input (Prog.) Conformal Coating Operating Temp Degree C Warranty Certifications - MPU-32 MPS 65-265 VAC, 80-275 VDC 2-800A (>90 A w/external CTs)* Accepts broad range of external CTs 871 Any Any Control Box Compatibility NETWORK COMS. (Optional) MP8000 - - - - Calculated Calculated Calculated 10 A at 240 VAC 10 A at 240 VAC* (up to 100 A)* (up to 90 A)* 8 A at 250 VAC 3 Digit display 4 line x 20 characters Via smartphone Last 1,000 faults Last fault RS-485 Last fault RS-485 100 events RS-232 64 events RS-485 -40 to 70 -20 to 70 5 year UL, CSA, CE -20 to 70 -40 to 60 -40 to 60 10 year UL Recognized, CSA, CE, RCM *Other versions exist with different voltage ranges, current monitoring ranges, output contact ratings, and temperature monitoring. Consult specific series datasheets for more details. ** iPhone (R) and select Android TM smartphones and tablets are supported via Littelfuse app www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 8 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays & Controls FEATURE COMPARISONS Pump Controllers 111P 111-INSIDER-P, 231-INSIDER-P 232-INSIDER 233P 234-P 235P Single-Phase 115 VAC Single-Phase 115 VAC or 230 VAC Single-Phase 230 VAC Single-Phase 230 VAC Single-Phase 230 VAC Single-Phase 230 VAC - - - - - / - 3hp 5 - 15hp (external CT required) FUNCTION Supply Voltage Monitored Current / - 1hp HP Rating 1 3 Control Box Compatibility - / - 1/2hp or / - 1hp FranklinTM, Pentek(R), CentriProTM, Flint & WallingTM, Grundfos(R) 1 3 1 3 / - 1.5hp or / - 3hp 1 3 1 3 / - 1hp 1 3 1 3 Grundfos(R) - Grundfos(R) - (prior to mid-2014) (mid-2014 or later) NETWORK COMS. (Optional) Overload Underload/Dry-well/Dead-head Undercurrent/Dry-well/Dead-head Overcurrent/Jam Reduced Overcurrent Mode Current Unbalance, Phase Loss/ Reversal Over/Undervoltage Voltage Unbalance Ground Fault Overtemperature Dynamic Thermal Model Over/Underfrequency Failure to Accelerate/Underspeed Power Factor Rapid Cycling/Jog Starter Control Differential Output Contact Rating Internal CT's On-unit Metering Remote Display Remote Reset Button Datalogging Local Communications Bluetooth(R) Communication to Smartphone App** -40 to 60 -40 to 60 Remote display capability when using the Informer via IR Remote display capability when using the Informer via IR Modbus TCP Modbus RTU DeviceNet Profibus Ethernet/IP Allen-Bradley DF1 Analog Output Analog Input (Prog.) Digital Input (Prog.) Conformal Coating Operating Temp Degree C Warranty Certifications -40 to 60 -40 to 60 -40 to 60 -40 to 60 5 year cULus cURus cCSAus, cURus cULus cULus *Other versions exist with different voltage ranges, current monitoring ranges, output contact ratings, and temperature monitoring. Consult specific series datasheets for more details. ** iPhone (R) and select Android TM smartphones and tablets are supported via Littelfuse app (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 9 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Protection Relays & Controls FEATURE COMPARISONS Motor & Feeder Protection Relays FUNCTION/FEATURE (IEEE#) Supply Voltage Monitored Current MP8000 777 77C Single or 3-Phase 90-690 VAC 0.5-1,000A (>100A w/ external CTs) 3-Phase 200-480 VAC* Single-Phase 100-240 VAC* MPU-32 2-800A (>90A w/external CTs)* Undercurrent (37) Current Unbalance, Phase Loss/Reversal (37) Over (59)/Undervoltage (27) Calculated Calculated Calculated Dynamic Thermal Model Over/Underfrequency (81) Failure to Accelerate/Underspeed Power Factor (55) Rapid Cycling/Jog FPS Accepts broad range of external CTs * FPU-32 65-265 VAC, 80-275 VDC Overload (49, 51) Underload Overcurrent (50, 51)/Jam Reduced Overcurrent Mode Voltage Unbalance (47) Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Overtemperature (49) MPS Starter Control Breaker Control Differential (87) Feeder Protection Definite-time Overcurrent NETWORK COMS. (Optional) Inverse-time Overcurrent Output Contact Rating Internal CT's On-unit Metering Remote Display Remote Reset Button Datalogging Local Communications Bluetooth(R) Communication to Smartphone App** Modbus TCP Modbus RTU DeviceNet Profibus Ethernet/IP Allen-Bradley DF1 10A at 240 VAC 10A at 240 VAC* (up to 100 A) (up to 90 A)* 8A at 250 VAC 4 line x 20 characters 3 Digit display Via smartphone Last 1,000 faults Last fault RS-485 Last fault RS-485 100 events RS-232 64 events RS-485 100 events RS-232 64 events RS-485 Analog Output Analog Input (Prog.) Digital Input (Prog.) Conformal Coating Operating Temp Deg C Warranty Certifications -40 to +70 5 year -20 to +70 5 year UL, CSA, CE -20 to +70 5 year -40 to +60 10 year -40 to +60 -40 to +60 10 year 10 year UL Recognized, CSA, CE, RCM -40 to +60 10 year *Other versions exist with different voltage ranges, current monitoring ranges, output contact ratings, and temperature monitoring. Consult specific series datasheets for more details. ** iPhone (R) and select Android TM smartphones and tablets are supported via Littelfuse app NOTE: IEEE Device Numbers are shown in parenthesis after the applicable features. www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 10 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Product Selection Guide PRODUCT SELECTION GUIDE Ground-Fault Protection ....................................................................... 12 Ground-Conductor Monitoring ............................................................. 13 Resistance Grounding / NGR Monitoring ............................................ 13 Feeder Protection ................................................................................. 14 Arc-Flash Protection ............................................................................. 14 Switching Relays & Controls ............................................................... 15 Motor & Pump Protection .................................................................... 16 Pump Controllers .................................................................................. 18 AC System Monitors / Load Sensors................................................... 22 Timers ................................................................................................... 26 Flashers, Tower and Obstruction Lighting Control............................... 39 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 11 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols STEP 1 Select product category GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION UNGROUNDED GROUNDED Detect ground faults on an ungrounded system Detect ground faults on a grounded system STEP 2 Select the needed features in each category DC Connectors Detect & Limit Type Ground Faults Y Convert System to Resistance Grounding AC DC + VFDs Connectors Connectors Detect Type Locate Ground Type Fault & Reduce Transient Overvoltage Low-Level Ground-Faults Currents N DC - 6kHz AC 3-Types Detect Insulation Control Logic Breakdown Y Connectors Type Resistance Grounded Solidly Grounded 3-Types Reduce Potential Control Logic for Arc Flash Y N N 3-Types 3-Types Detect Ground Fault Logic byControl Phase-Voltage Measurement Convert System to Resistance Grounding Personnel ControlProtection Logic Y N STEP 3 Find the recommended product for your application Connectors Detect AC/DC GroundType Fault in VFDs N Y Connectors Type Digital Metering & Communications Output Contact Y N Y N GENERATOR AS 2081:2011 WIDE RANGE SE-601 SERIES pg. 47 PGR-3200 SERIES pg. 46 EL3100 SERIES pg. 44 PGR-3100 pg. 45 EL731 SERIES pg. 48 PGR-4300 SERIES pg. 55 Ground-Fault Protection Relays 12 SE-701 SERIES pg. 50 10 mA - 5A SE-703 SERIES pg. 51 SE-704 SERIES pg. 52 SB6100 pg. 53 RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING GROUND-FAULT & GROUND-CHECK RESISTANCE-GROUNDED AC Ensure ground- conductor continuity for portable equipment and submersible pumps, and detect ground faults Solve problems commonly associated with ungrounded and solidly grounded systems and monitor the neutral-to-ground connection 3-Types Cable Voltage Control Logic <5kV Connectors Type Connectors Type Neutral-Grounding Resistance (NGR) Continuity Monitoring Implement Resistance Grounding >5kV Connectors Type Pulsing, Digital Filtering, Communications, or Software Y N 3-Types Identify Faulted Feeder Control Logic SE-105, SE-107 SERIES pg. 58 SE-134C, SE-135 SERIES pg. 59 Y N SE-330 & SE-701 SERIES SE-330 SERIES (use in combination) pg. 63 pg. 50 Ground-Conductor Monitoring Relays pg. 63 SE-325 SERIES pg. 62 Resistance Grounding Systems & NGR Monitors 13 NGR SERIES pg. 66 Product Selection Guide GROUND-CONDUCTOR MONITORING STEP 1 Select product category STEP 2 Select the needed features in each category FEEDER PROTECTION ARC-FLASH PROTECTION STANDARD ADVANCED ARC-FLASH DETECTION Protect distribution feeders in processing, manufacturing, petroleum, chemical, and wastewater treatment facilities Monitor voltage and current using a modular system with integrated protection, breaker control, metering, and data-logging functions Rapidly detect an arc flash to reduce damage to equipment and risk to personnel Connectors Type Connectors Type Current Protection, Voltage Protection, & Metering IEEE/IEC Overcurrent Sensor Health Monitoring OEM equipment Current Protection & Metering IEEE/IEC Overcurrent Designed for use in N Y Overcurrent Detection Y N STEP 3 Find the recommended product for your application Multiple Zones, Communications, & Data Logging FPU-32 SERIES FPS SERIES pg. 70 PGR-8800 SERIES pg. 70 pg. 75 Feeder Protection Relays Y N AF0500 SERIES AF0100 SERIES pg. 77 Arc-Flash Relays 14 pg. 79 D0920 pg. 74 SOLID-STATE RELAYS PHASE CONTROL TEMPERATURE CONTROL Designed for industrial applications requiring rugged, reliable operation Designed for changing lamp intensity, varying the speed of a fan, or controlling the temperature of a heater A single set point controller with high current, solid state output for resistive loads Designed for usethe in Control Optical Isolation Between OEM Voltage Input andequipment the Solid-State Output Y N Designed for use for in Random Switching OEM equipment Inductive Loads Designed for use for in Random Switching OEM equipment Inductive Loads Y N Zero Voltage Power Supply Switching for Resistive and Incandescent Loads SIR1 SERIES pg. 86 SIR2 SERIES pg. 86 Solid-State Switching Relays PHS SERIES TCR9C Phase Control Switching Relays Temperature Control Relays SLR SERIES pg. 84 pg. 88 15 pg. 90 Product Selection Guide SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS STEP 1 Select product category STEP 2 Select the needed features in each category MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION SUPPLEMENTAL PROTECTION (MOTOR) BASIC (PUMP) Protection for motors against insulation degradation, overheating, or ventilation failure Protection of single-phase pumps against dry-well, dead-head, jammed impeller, rapid-cycling and over/under voltage Power Supply Ground-Fault Protection & Insulation Monitoring Power Supply Mounting Options Temperature Monitoring Using RTDs Hand-Held Diagnostic Tool Helpful for Troubleshooting SURFACE MOUNT OPEN BOARD Power Supply Voltage Power Supply Voltage 115V 230V 115V Connectors HP Type <3HP FOR ALL BASIC SINGLE-PHASE UNITS ON THIS PAGE 230V Connectors HP Type >5HP 1/3 - 1HP 1/3 - 3HP Connectors STEP 3 Find the recommended product for your application Control Box Type Type FRANKLINTM, PENTEK(R), CENTRIPROTM GRUNDFOS(R) PGR-6100 SERIES pg. 94 SIO-RTD-02-00 SERIES pg. 128 111P pg. 106 233P SERIES pg. 106 235P pg. 110 111231INSIDER-P INSIDER-P pg. 101 Basic Motor & Pump Protection 16 pg. 101 232INSIDER pg. 104 234-P pg. 108 INFORMER pg. 250 STANDARD STANDARD WITH BLUETOOTH(R) Multi-function protection for low and medium voltage motors Multi-function protection for single-phase and three-phase low and medium voltage motors and pumps with real-time data, programming and troubleshooting via iPhone(R) or AndroidTM app Connectors Connectors Single-Phase Type Three-Phase Type UnderPower PowerSupply Protection for Pump Applications Power Supply Under Power Protection for Pump Applications Y N Y N 4-20mA Type Connectors Temperature Protection Connectors Type & Reduced Overcurrent Output Power 77CKW/HP SERIES pg. 125 77C SERIES pg. 118 Y N Y N 777-ACCUPOWER & COM 4-20 777-KW/ HP-P2 SERIES MPU-32 SERIES 777-P2 SERIES (use in combination) pg. 123 pg. 261 pg. 120 pg. 96 Standard Motor & Pump Protection pg. 114 MP8000 SERIES pg. 112 Standard Motor & Pump Protection with Bluetooth(R) 17 Product Selection Guide MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION PUMP CONTROLLERS ADVANCED RETROFITS Comprehensive voltage protection and starter control for medium voltage motors and pumps Pre-wired plug & play replacement for obsolete and competitors' relays STEP 3 Find the recommended product for your application SEAL LEAK DETECTORS Detect pump seal leaks & motor overheating on submersible pumps Designed for use in Controller Functionality OEM equipment STEP 2 Select the needed features in each category STEP 1 Select product category MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION SINGLE-CHANNEL DUAL-CHANNEL Designed for use in Mounting Option OEM equipment 3-Types Seal Leak & Control Logic Over Temperature Y 8-PIN SOCKET N DIN RAIL Dual Seal Leak MPS SERIES pg. 98 Advanced Motor & Pump Protection MPU-32-X69X SERIES pg. 100 MPS-469X SERIES pg. 100 Retrofits 201-100-SLD pg. 136 460-15100-SLD pg. 139 PC-102CICILT pg. 132 Seal Leak Detection 18 PC-102CICIDL pg. 132 Product Selection Guide PUMP CONTROLLERS LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS Control liquid pumping operations in a pump-up or pump-down application Power Supply Sensing Type PROBE FLOAT Power Supply Mounting Option 8-PIN SOCKET 8-PIN SOCKET OPEN BOARD 11-PIN SOCKET DIN RAIL/ SURFACE MOUNT Power Supply Probe Style Power Supply Compatibility GEM'S SERIES 16M LIQUID LEVEL CONTROL SINGLE PROBE DUAL PROBE Power ProbeSupply Style Low Liquid Level Cut-off Protection That Meets UL 353 SINGLE PROBE DUAL PROBE CROUZET'S PNR & PNRU SERIES LIQUID LEVEL CONTROL Low Liquid Level Cut-off Protection That Meets UL 353 LLC4 SERIES pg. 145 LLC5 SERIES pg. 147 PC-XXXLLC-GM SERIES pg. 134 PC-XXXLLC-CZ SERIES pg. 134 LLC6 SERIES 460-15100-LLS pg. 149 pg. 137 Liquid Level Controls 19 Y N LLC8 SERIES LLC1 SERIES pg. 151 pg. 141 LLC2 SERIES pg. 143 PC-105 pg. 133 STEP 1 Select product category PUMP CONTROLLERS ALTERNATING RELAYS Used in duplex pumping applications to balance the run time of both pumps Power Supply STEP 3 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 2 Select the needed features in each category Float Switch Configuration SINGLE 3-Types Mode Selector Switch N Y Connectors Type Debounce Delay Connectors Type Debounce Delay Connectors Debounce Type Delay N Connectors 8-Pin, SPDT Type Connectors 8-Pin, SPDT Type Y Y N 11-PIN, DPDT ALTXXXS-SW SERIES pg. 133 ALT-XXX1-SW SERIES pg. 155 Y N 3-Types Mode Selector Control Logic Switch Mode Selector Switch Control Logic Y Y DUAL PLUS STOP FLOAT DUAL N Y N N Y Connectors Debounce Type Delay Y N Debounce Delay Y Connectors 600VAC Rated Type Contacts Y N 50R-400ALT ALTXXX-S SERIES 11-PIN, DPDT ARPX1S SERIES pg. 157 ARPX2S SERIES pg. 157 pg. 159 pg. 133 ARP41 pg. 157 Alternating Relays 20 ALTXXXX-SW SERIES pg. 133 ARPX3S SERIES pg. 157 ALTXXX-X SERIES pg. 133 ARP43 pg. 157 ALT-XXX3-SW SERIES pg. 155 ALARM CONTROLS/ BATTERY CHARGERS INTRINSICALLY SAFE RELAYS INTRINSICALLY SAFE PUMP CONTROLLER Dual-purpose alarm control/battery charger for pump control panels Used to interface between hazardous and non-hazardous areas Programmable to control/equalize run time of 2, 3, or 4 pumps, with the ability to interface between hazardous and non-hazardous areas Power Supply 12-Pin Socket Included Y N PowerofSupply Number Channels SINGLECHANNEL TWO CHANNELS THREE CHANNELS FOUR CHANNELS FIVE CHANNELS ISS-102 SERIES ISS-105ISO-3 ISS-105ISO-4 ISS-105ISO Power Supply Mounting Option DIN RAIL/ SURFACE MOUNT 8-PIN SOCKET ACBC-120 -SD pg. 130 ACBC-120 pg. 130 Alarm Control/Battery Charger ISS-100 pg. 160 ISS-101 pg. 161 pg. 163 pg. 165 Intrinsically Safe Relays 21 pg. 165 pg. 165 ISS-105 pg. 165 Intrinsically Safe Pump Controller Product Selection Guide PUMP CONTROLLERS STEP 1 Select product category AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS VOLTAGE MONITORS (1 of 2) Highly accurate and precise voltage measurements to provide high sensitivity while minimizing nuisance tripping STEP 2 Select the needed features in each category Power Supply Three-Phase Y Power Supply Mounting Options 8-PIN SOCKET DIN RAIL/SURFACE MOUNT Y DesignedTrip for Delay use in& Adjustable OEM equipment Adjustable Unbalance SURFACE MOUNT 11-PIN SOCKET Designed for use in Designed for use in Reverse Phase Only Adjustable % equipment Voltage Unbalance OEM 2-8% RANGE N 2-10% RANGE Connectors Contactor Type Failure Power Supply Unbalanced Voltage Protection Y STEP 3 Find the recommended product for your application N Y Protection with/without Hand-held Diagnostic Tool N Designed for use in Reverse Phase Only OEM equipment 201A-AU SERIES pg. 202 PLMU11 pg. 229 201A SERIES pg. 200 PLM SERIES pg. 231 Y N PLS SERIES PLR SERIES pg. 239 pg. 237 Y 460 SERIES pg. 216 Voltage Monitoring Relays 22 DLMU SERIES pg. 224 201-XXXDPDT SERIES pg. 204 202-RP pg. 206 N 455 SERIES & INFORMER-MS (use in combination) pg. 214 pg. 250 Product Selection Guide AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS VOLTAGE MONITORS (1 of 2) (Continued from previous page) Connectors Type FORM C SCREW TERMINAL 2 FORM C Designed for use Adjustable % in OEM equipment Unbalance Y Power Supply 600V Rated Output Contacts N FORM C FAST-ONS Designed for use in Faultequipment Memory OEM N Y Designed for use in Universal OEM equipment 190-480 VAC N Y Designed for use in Frequency OEM equipment Monitoring HLMU SERIES pg. 227 250A SERIES pg. 208 Y N 601 SERIES WVM SERIES pg. 218 pg. 222 Adjustable Power Supply Trip Delays N Y N 355 SERIES 350 SERIES Adjustable Power Supply Voltage Range 102A SERIES 202 pg. 206 pg. 198 Voltage Monitoring Relays 23 Y N TVW SERIES TVM SERIES pg. 233 pg. 235 pg. 212 pg. 210 STEP 1 Select product category STEP 2 Select the needed features in each category AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS VOLTAGE MONITORS (2 of 2) CURRENT MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS (1 of 2) (Continued from previous page) Multi-purpose controls used for pump and motor protection, to provide closed-loop feedback in a system, as a proof relay to indicate a load is energized, and more... Power Supply Self Powered Power Supply Single-Phase Y Y DIN RAIL/ SURFACE MOUNT Power Supply Mounting Options SURFACE MOUNT 8-PIN SOCKET Designed for use in Screwequipment Terminals OEM Y N Y Connectors 2 Isolated Form C Type Contacts Y N Power Supply Relay Output N SPDT Form C N Y N SPST FORM A Designed for use in Adjustable Restart Delay OEM equipment STEP 3 Find the recommended product for your application Y N Designed for use in Power Relay Output OEM equipment Y Depluggable Terminal Block N Y N 0.25" QUICK CONNECTS 50R SERIES pg. 188 HLVA6I23 pg. 241 202-200SP pg. 194 KVM SERIES pg. 243 201-XXXSP-DPDT SERIES pg. 192 201XXX-SP SERIES pg. 190 Voltage Monitoring Relays 460-XXXSP SERIES pg. 196 LSR-0 pg. 169 LSRX-C SERIES pg. 173 LSRX pg. 173 Current Monitoring/Load Sensing Relays 24 Product Selection Guide AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS CURRENT MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS (2 of 2) (Continued from previous page) Designed for use in Loopequipment Powered OEM N Y CONTROL VOLTAGE 1 Amp Solid-State Output Y N LED CURRENT INDICATOR Connectors Type ACConnectors Current Transducer Type (4-20mA output) Single Trip Point N N Y REMOTE CURRENT SENSOR Designed for use in Adjustable Trip Delay OEM equipment Y ONBOARD TOROID Designed for use in Screw Block OEMTerminal equipment N Y Y 0.25" QUICK CONNECTS Designed for use in Screwequipment Terminals OEM TCS SERIES pg. 181 LCS10T12 & LPM SERIES (LPM required) pg. 187 TCSA SERIES pg. 183 DCSA SERIES pg. 185 Y N CP5 SERIES ECS SERIES pg. 168 Current Monitoring/Load Sensing Relays 25 pg. 175 N LSR-XXX SERIES pg. 170 LSRU SERIES pg. 171 ECSW SERIES pg. 178 STEP 1 Select product category TIMERS FACTORY PROGRAMMABLE Microprocessor based circuitry provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability Power Supply Relay Output STEP 2 Select the needed features in each category Y Power Supply Solid-State Output Power Relay SupplyOutput High Power Y N Connectors Type Isolated Contacts Power Supply Dual Function Y N Y Designed for use in Dualequipment Function OEM N Y N Power Supply Single Function DIP Switch Power Supply Adjustment Power Supply Single Function 1 of 12 DUAL FUNCTIONS Y 1 of 12 SINGLE FUNCTIONS STEP 3 Find the recommended product for your application N N DIP Switch Power Supply Adjustment HRIS SERIES pg. 317 HRPSD12HI pg. 317 KRPD SERIES pg. 424 KRPS SERIES HSPZA22SL pg. 339 pg. 281 Factory Programmable Timers 26 KSPD SERIES pg. 406 Y N KSPU SERIES KSPS SERIES pg. 370 pg. 288 Product Selection Guide TIMERS MULTIFUNCTION Universal and fully programmable timing relays Y Power Supply Relay Output N Supply TimingPower Functions Available Power Supply Solid-State Output 21 6 Designed for use in Timing Adjustment OEM equipment ON-BOARD KNOB DIP SWITCH Power Supply Termination Style Power Supply Termination Style QUICK CONNECTS QUICK CONNECTS TERMINAL BLOCKS TRDU SERIES pg. 265 TRU SERIES pg. 268 ASQU SERIES pg. 270 Multifunction Timers 27 ASTU SERIES pg. 270 TERMINAL BLOCKS DSQU SERIES pg. 272 DSTU SERIES pg. 272 STEP 1 Select product category TIMERS DEDICATED -- SINGLE FUNCTION Wide product offering to meet OEM and industrial requirements STEP 2 Select the needed features in each category DELAY-ON-MAKE Power Supply Package Style 8-PIN PLUG-IN SURFACE MOUNT 8-PIN OR 11-PIN PLUG-IN Power Supply DIP Switch Adjustment Y PC MOUNT/ STRANDED WIRE LEADS TO REPLACE BIMETAL TYPE TIMERS Connectors Type Relay Output OPEN PC BOARD N Y N Power Supply Isolated Power Ranges Supply Timing Y 1-1023 s in increments of 1 s N 0.1-102.3 s in increments of 0.1 s Power Relay with Supply Isolated DPDT or SPDT 10-10,230 s in increments of 10 s Power Isolated Supply DPDT Relay Power ContactSupply Type DPDT STEP 3 Find the recommended product for your application SPDT Power Supply 480/600V Contacts TDM SERIES pg. 297 TDMH SERIES pg. 297 TDML SERIES pg. 297 PRLM SERIES pg. 295 TRM SERIES pg. 307 ORM SERIES pg. 293 Delay-on-Make Timers 28 MSM SERIES pg. 291 ERDM SERIES pg. 275 Y N T10 KRDM SERIES pg. 274 pg. 279 HRDM SERIES pg. 277 Product Selection Guide TIMERS DEDICATED -- SINGLE FUNCTION (Continued from previous page) Power Supply Solid-State with Normally Open Contacts Connectors Type Normally Closed N FIXED Y High Current Power Supply (6, 10, or 20A) Power Supply Low Current (1A) N Y Power Ranges Supply Timing 0.1 s - 1000 m in 6 ranges FIXED/ONBOARD KNOB/EXTERNAL Power Supply Adjustment Style ONBOARD KNOB FIXED 0.1 s - 600 m in 4 ranges DIP SWITCH FIXED/ EXTERNAL EXTERNAL Power Ranges Supply Timing 0.1 s - 100 h in 7 ranges THD1B410.5S pg. 303 TH1 SERIES pg. 301 KSDU SERIES pg. 286 TDU SERIES pg. 299 TMV8000 pg. 305 TSU2000 Delay-on-Make Timers 29 pg. 305 TS1 SERIES pg. 309 TSD1 SERIES pg. 311 0.1 s - 1000 m in 6 ranges KSD1 SERIES pg. 284 TS441165 pg. 313 STEP 1 Select product category TIMERS DEDICATED -- SINGLE FUNCTION Wide product offering to meet OEM and industrial requirements STEP 2 Select the needed features in each category DELAY-ON-BREAK Power Supply Package Style 8-PIN OR 11-PIN PLUG-IN OPEN PC BOARD Connectors Type Relay Output Power Supply DIP Switch Adjustment Y N Y STEP 3 Find the recommended product for your application pg. 325 TDBH SERIES Power Isolated Supply pg. 325 TDBL SERIES pg. 325 Power Supply Solid-State with Normally Open Contacts SPDT 0.1-102.3 s in increments of 0.1 s 10-10,230 s in increments of 10 s TDB SERIES N Power Isolated Supply Power Ranges Supply Timing 1-1023 s in increments of 1 s SURFACE MOUNT TRB SERIES pg. 331 SPDT/DPDT 0.1 s to 100 m in 5 ranges 0.1 s to 1000 m in 6 ranges ORB SERIES HRDB SERIES KRDB SERIES pg. 323 Delay-on-Break Timers 30 Power Ranges Supply Timing pg. 315 pg. 319 Product Selection Guide TIMERS DEDICATED -- SINGLE FUNCTION (Continued from previous page) Power Supply High Current (6, 10, or 20A) N Power Supply Low Current (1A) Power Supply Extended Operating Temperature Range Y N Y Power Supply Adjustment Style FIXED/ONBOARD KNOB/EXTERNAL Power Supply Adjustment Style FIXED/EXTERNAL DIP SWITCH FIXED/ONBOARD KNOB/EXTERNAL Power Ranges Supply Timing THD7 SERIES pg. 378 THDB SERIES pg. 329 0.1 s - 1000 m in 6 ranges 0.05 s - 600 s in 4 ranges 1 s to 1000 m in 5 ranges TSDB SERIES TSB SERIES TSD7 SERIES pg. 335 pg. 333 Delay-on-Break Timers 31 pg. 386 KSDB SERIES pg. 321 TDUB SERIES pg. 327 STEP 1 Select product category TIMERS DEDICATED -- SINGLE FUNCTION Wide product offering to meet OEM and industrial requirements STEP 2 Select the needed features in each category SINGLE SHOT Power Supply Package Style 8-PIN OR 11-PIN PLUG-IN OPEN PC BOARD SURFACE MOUNT Connectors Type Retriggerable Power Supply DIP Switch Adjustment Y Y N Power Ranges Supply Timing Fixed/Knob/ Power Supply External Adjustment 1-1023 s in increments of 1 s 0.1-102.3 s in increments of 0.1 s Y 10-10,230 s in increments of 10 s Power Isolated Supply STEP 3 Find the recommended product for your application pg. 348 TDSH SERIES pg. 348 TDSL SERIES pg. 348 TRS SERIES Power Supply Relay Output N Y Power Supply Knob Adjust Only Power Ranges Supply Timing pg. 356 PRS65 pg. 347 ORS SERIES pg. 345 Single Shot Timers 32 KRD9 SERIES pg. 388 N Y Power Supply Isolated N 0.1 s to 1000 m in 6 ranges TDS SERIES Power Supply Relay Output N TSD94110SB pg. 390 Y N DPDT SPDT ERDI SERIES KRDS SERIES pg. 362 pg. 341 HRDS SERIES pg. 337 Product Selection Guide TIMERS DEDICATED -- SINGLE FUNCTION (Continued from previous page) Solid-State with Power Supply Normally Open Contacts Power (6, Supply High Current 10, or 20A) Y N Power Supply Low Current (1A) Power Supply Adjustment Style FIXED/ONBOARD KNOB/EXTERNAL Power Supply Coin Vending Applications Power Ranges Supply Timing N 0.1 s - 1000 m in 6 ranges 0.05 s - 600 s in 4 ranges Power Ranges Supply Timing Extended Power Operating Supply Temperature Range Extended Power Operating Supply Temperature Range Y 0.1 s - 1000 m in 6 ranges DIP SWITCH Y N TSDS SERIES KSDS SERIES 0.1 s - 600 s in 4 ranges THC421C pg. 352 THDS SERIES pg. 354 THS SERIES pg. 352 pg. 358 Single Shot Timers 33 pg. 343 TSS SERIES pg. 360 TDUS SERIES pg. 350 STEP 1 Select product category TIMERS DEDICATED -- SINGLE FUNCTION Wide product offering to meet OEM and industrial requirements STEP 2 Select the needed features in each category INTERVAL Power Supply Package Style 8-PIN PLUG-IN SURFACE MOUNT Connectors Type Relay Output Power Ranges Supply Timing 1-1023 s in increments of 1 s N Power Supply Solid-State Output Y 0.1-102.3 s in increments of 0.1 s 10-10,230 s in increments of 10 s High Current Power Supply (6, 10, or 20A) Power Supply Isolated Y N Y STEP 3 Find the recommended product for your application Power Ranges Supply Timing 0.1 s to 1000 m in 6 ranges 1 s to 1000 m in 5 ranges TDI SERIES pg. 372 TDIH SERIES pg. 372 TDIL SERIES pg. 372 DPDT SPDT ERDI SERIES KRDI SERIES pg. 362 pg. 366 Interval Timers 34 HRDI SERIES pg. 364 THD2 SERIES pg. 376 THD7 SERIES pg. 378 N Product Selection Guide TIMERS DEDICATED -- SINGLE FUNCTION (Continued from previous page) Power Supply Low Current (1A) Power Supply Adjustment Style DIP SWITCH FIXED/ ONBOARD KNOB/EXTERNAL FIXED/EXTERNAL Power Supply Input Voltage AC Power Ranges Supply Timing DC 0.1 s to 100 h in 7 ranges 0.1 s to 1000 m in 6 ranges Power Supply Input Voltage 1 s to 1000 m in 5 ranges AC 0.05 s - 600 s in 4 ranges TDUI SERIES pg. 374 TSD7 SERIES pg. 386 TS2 SERIES pg. 380 Interval Timers 35 DC TS6 SERIES pg. 380 TSD2 SERIES pg. 382 TSD6 SERIES pg. 384 KSD2 SERIES pg. 368 STEP 1 Select product category TIMERS DEDICATED -- SINGLE FUNCTION Wide product offering to meet OEM and industrial requirements STEP 2 Select the needed features in each category RECYCLING Power Supply Package Style SURFACE MOUNT 8-PIN PLUG-IN Power Supply Relay Output Recycling Power Supply Flashers Y Y Power Supply Isolated Power (6, Supply High Current 10, or 20A) Y N Power Supply Contacts Type Power Ranges Supply Timing SPDT STEP 3 Find the recommended product for your application Solid-State Normally Powerwith Supply Open Contacts N DPDT Y N Power Supply Low Current (1A) 0.1 s to 1000 m in 6 ranges Extended Power Operating Supply Temperature Range Power Supply Adjustment Style FIXED/ ONBOARD KNOB Y FIXED/ONBOARD KNOB/EXTERNAL N FIXED 0.1 s to 1000 m in 6 ranges TDR SERIES pg. 410 KRDR SERIES pg. 400 KRD3 SERIES pg. 398 ERD3425A pg. 391 HRDR SERIES pg. 396 Recycling Timers 36 THD3C42A0 pg. 412 TSD3411S pg. 414 KSD3 SERIES pg. 402 N DEDICATED -- SINGLE FUNCTION (Continued from previous page) PERCENTAGE Power Supply Adjustment Style DIP SWITCH KNOB/EXTERNAL/FIXED EXTERNAL Power Supply Input Voltage AC/DC AC RS SERIES pg. 408 KSDR SERIES pg. 404 ESDR SERIES pg. 393 TSDR SERIES pg. 416 Recycling Timers PTHF4900DK pg. 418 Percentage Timers 37 Product Selection Guide TIMERS STEP 1 Select product category TIMERS DEDICATED Wide product offering to meet OEM and industrial requirements STEP 3 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 2 Select the needed features in each category DUAL FUNCTION HVAC COIN VENDING DELAY-ON-MAKE/ DELAY-ON-BREAK DELAY-ON-MAKE/ INTERVAL Power Supply Lockout Delay Y N Anti-short Cycle with Connectors Type Random Start Connectors Type Start Anti-short Cycle with Random Y N Y Low Voltage Power Supply Brownout Protection TDMB SERIES pg. 420 ESD52233 SERIES pg. 422 Dedicated Timers - Dual Function T2D120A15M SERIES pg. 428 TSA141300 pg. 436 Y N TA SERIES TL SERIES pg. 430 pg. 434 Dedicated Timers - HVAC 38 N Power Supply Fan Delay TAC1 SERIES pg. 432 CT SERIES pg. 426 HRV SERIES pg. 437 Dedicated Timers - Coin Vending Product Selection Guide FLASHERS, TOWER AND OBSTRUCTION LIGHTING CONTROL FLASHERS Designed to cycle power to lamps and LEDs to turn them on and off repeatedly Y Solid-State with Power Supply No Moving Parts N 3 or 4 Channel Chaser PowerDesigned Supply for Sequential Circuit Flashing of Incandescent Lamp Loads 8-PIN SOCKET N Y Designed for use in Flashes Minute (FPM) OEMPer equipment 10-100 ON-BOARD ADJUSTABLE 45-150 (CUSTOM) 75 (FIXED) 10-180 (CUSTOM) 90 (FIXED) 45-150 (CUSTOM) 75 (FIXED) Connectors Type or Resistive Loads For Controlling Inductive, Incandescent, 24 or 120VAC LOW AMP 24-240VAC; 1, 6, 10 or 20 AMP Connectors Low Leakage Type for Controlling LED or Resistive Loads 60-150 (CUSTOM) 75 (FIXED) High Immunity to Connectors Type Line Noise and Transients for Moving Vehicle Applications 12VDC Power Supply Medium Amp 24VDC 12VDC 24, 120, or 230VAC SC3/SC4 SERIES pg. 453 FSU1000 SERIES pg. 440 FS126 FS127 FS146 pg. 442 FS143 FS152 FS162 24VDC FS219-45 pg. 446 FS224 pg. 446 pg. 444 Flashers 39 FS491 pg. 450 FS312 pg. 448 FS324 pg. 448 FS500 SERIES pg. 451 STEP 1 Select product category STEP 2 Select the needed features in each category STEP 3 Find the recommended product for your application FLASHERS, TOWER AND OBSTRUCTION LIGHTING CONTROL ALARM RELAYS Monitors any failures in flashers & incandescent beacons, obstruction and universal lamps FLASHER AND INCANDESCENT BEACON BEACON OR OBSTRUCTION LAMP UNIVERSAL LAMP Connectors Type Used to Monitor Connectors Type Used to Provide Power Supply Designed to Sense the Failure of Various Kinds of Lamps the Operation of One Two-lamp Incandescent Beacon and One Beacon Flasher Remote Monitoring of Steady Burning Incandescent Marker and Obstruction Lighting FLASHING LED BEACON LAMPS FLASHING/STEADY LED BEACON LAMPS/ OBSTRUCTION LAMPS BEACON LAMPS/ STEADY SIDE LIGHTS FB SERIES pg. 457 SCR SERIES SCR490D pg. 458 pg. 459 Alarm Relays 40 FB9L pg. 461 SCR9L pg. 463 BEACON TOWER FLASHERS PHOTO CONTROL Designed for use on communication towers, smoke stacks, cooling towers, tall buildings, bridges, and utility towers Designed to meet the demands of the most vigorous requirement tower & obstruction lighting control. Factory calibrated to meet FAA and FCC specifications FLASHER (OFF FIRST) AUXILIARY MODULES FS SERIES FA SERIES pg. 455 PCR SERIES pg. 455 pg. 465 Photo Control Beacon Tower Flashers 41 Product Selection Guide FLASHERS, TOWER AND OBSTRUCTION LIGHTING CONTROL Protection Relays & Controls www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 42 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION Ungrounded AC Systems EL3100 Series Ground-Fault & Phase-Voltage Indicator................ 44 PGR-3100 Series Ground-Fault Indication System ............................. 45 PGR-3200 Series Insulation Monitor .................................................. 46 Ungrounded DC System SE-601 Series DC Ground-Fault Monitor ....................................... 47 AC/DC Earthed System EL731 Series AC/DC Sensitive Earth-Leakage Relay ................... 48 Solidly Grounded Systems SE-701 Series Ground-Fault Monitor ............................................. 50 SE-703 Series Earth-Leakage Monitor ........................................... 51 SE-704 Series Earth-leakage monitor ............................................ 52 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters - Personnel Protection SB6000 Series Industrial Shock-Block ............................................ 53 Generator and Single-Function PGR-4300 Series Generator Ground-Fault Relay ................................ 55 For More Information... and to download our White Paper on Ground-Fault Protection with VFDs, visit Littelfuse.com/TechnicalCenter (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 43 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION Create safer working environments and reduce incidents of Arc Flash without affecting the uptime of critical operations. Vital in manufacturing and processing environments, sensitive ground-fault relays with advanced filtering will detect breakdown in insulation resistance without nuisance trips. Breakdown in insulation resistance can be caused by moisture, vibration, chemicals and dust. 1 Protection Relays Ground-Fault Protection - Ungrounded AC Systems EL3100 SERIES Ground-Fault & Phase-Voltage Indicator Description 1 GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION The EL3100 is a self-powered ground-fault and phase-voltage indication system for 3-phase systems. The EL3100 meets the National Electrical Code (NEC) and the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) requirements for ground detectors for ungrounded alternating-current systems. Voltage connections are provided on the EL3100 for 208, 240, 480, and 600-V systems. Three green LED's on the EL3100 indicate the presence of phaseto-ground voltage and one red LED indicates a ground fault. The EL3100 can operate stand-alone or with up to five remote LED indicators. A solid-state relay output provides indication of a ground fault. The output relay is closed when the 3-phase neutral voltage shifts as the result of ground leakage. Features & Benefits Simplified Circuit Diagram A FEATURES BENEFITS B NEC(R) and CEC Code compliant Meets National Electrical Code (NEC(R)) Article 250.21 and Canadian Electrical Code Part 1, Section 10-106 (2) requirements for ungrounded systems Low-voltage remote LEDs System voltage is not present at the remote LED location Phase-voltage indication Indicates the presence of voltage on both grounded and ungrounded systems Output relay Allows for remote ground-fault indication C AH AL G BH BL CH CL EL3100 (Ground-Fault & Phase-Voltage Indicator) DN DR DG DA DB DC A Remote LEDs Accessories Output Relay A Remote LEDs High-intensity 16-mm IP67 LED lamps available in red and green colors. Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER MOUNTING EL3100-00 DIN, Surface ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT RK-310X-0Y Optional Specifications Input Voltage Dimensions Approvals Note: X=R for red LED and G for green LED Y=0 for no label and 1 for a ground-fault label Conformally Coated Warranty Mounting Input L: 208/240 Vac Input H: 480/600 Vac H 87.0 mm (3.43"); W 112.5 mm (4.43") D 56.0 mm (2.2") CSA certified, UL Listed (E340889), RCM (Australia) Standard feature 5 years DIN, Surface Littelfuse reserves the right to make product changes, without notice. Material in this document is as accurate as known at the time of publication. Visit Littelfuse.com for the most up-to-date information. www.littelfuse.com/EL3100 44 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Ground-Fault Protection - Ungrounded AC Systems PGR-3100 SERIES Ground-Fault Indication System Description Simplified Circuit Diagram A Features & Benefits A UNGROUNDED SUPPLY FEATURES BENEFITS NEC(R) and CEC Code compliant C Meets National Electrical Code (NEC(R)) Article 250.21(B) and Canadian Electrical Code Part 1, Section 10-106 (2) requirements for ungrounded systems Phase LEDs Indicates presence of a ground fault and the faulted phase as well as phase-to-ground voltage on an energized bus Redundant LEDs Redundant long-life LEDs (two per phase) to ensure reliability B B C PGR-3100 Lamp test button PGR-3200 Verifies LEDs are operating (Ground-Fault Indication System) L1 (Insulation Monitor) L2 Accessories PGR-3100-PNL Panel-Mount Enclosure PGR-3100-PNL is the PGR-3100 integrated into compact stainless steel enclosure for ease of installation and retrofits. Options include visual alarm, audible alarm with silence and reset. Dimensions are 8"W x 8"H x 4" D. Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER MOUNTING PGR-3100 Panel mount ACCESSORIES ORDERING NUMBER PGR-3100-PNL - OPTIONS POWER SUPPLY A B 0 = No Options, customer supplied 120 V lamp test 0 = Low Voltage (120, 208, 240), c/w fusing 1 = Transformer 1 = High included for 120 Voltage V lamp test (480, 600), c/w fusing ENCLOSURE - C 0 = NEMA 4 Enclosure 1 = 316 Stainless Steel Specifications INDICATION Input Voltage Indicator Off Voltage Dimensions D Test Button Approvals Conformally Coated Warranty Mounting Future Options Up to 600 Vac 50/60 Hz < 30 Vac line to ground H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 108 mm (4.3"); D 54 mm (2.1") Local CSA certified, UL Listed Standard feature 5 years Panel Littelfuse reserves the right to make product changes, without notice. Material in this document is as accurate as known at the time of publication. Visit Littelfuse.com for the most up-to-date information. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 45 www.littelfuse.com/pgr-3100 1 GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION The PGR-3100 indicates the presence of voltage on each phase of a three-phase system. The LEDs on the panel illuminate when voltage is present. When a ground-fault occurs, the voltage on the faulted phase reduces to ground potential, causing the LEDs for the faulted phase to dim and the LEDs for the unfaulted phases to become brighter. Ungrounded ac systems are required by the National Electrical Code (NEC(R)) Article 250.21(B) and the Canadian Electrical Code Part 1, Section 10-106 (2) to have ground detectors, such as the PGR-3100, installed on the system. External potential transformers (PTs) can be used to step down system voltage, allowing the PGR-3100 to be applied to any system voltage. PTs are not required for system voltages up to 600 Vac. Protection Relays Ground-Fault Protection - Ungrounded AC System PGR-3200 SERIES Insulation Monitor Description The PGR-3200 detects ground faults by continuously monitoring the insulation integrity of ungrounded electrical systems. The relay monitors the insulation for damage and assists with predictive maintenance and troubleshooting of developing ground faults by providing two warning and an alarm level. The PGR-3200 operates on one- or three-phase ungrounded systems up to 6 kV. GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 The PGR-3200 can also be used on a grounded system to monitor the insulation for damage, while the power system is de-energized. The mode-of-operation terminals (27-28) are connected to the circuit breaker or contactor auxiliary contacts to toggle the relay off when the contactor or breaker is closed. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Meets National Electrical Code (NEC(R)) Article 250.21(B) and Canadian Electrical Code Part 1, Section 10-106 (2) requirements for ungrounded systems NEC(R) and CEC Code compliant Simplified Circuit Diagram A Output contact (50 k) Form C output contact for alarming when the insulation resistance is below 50 k B Output contact (10 k) Form C output contact for tripping when the insulation resistance is below 10 k Analog output (0 - 1 mA) DIN-rail or surface mount Provides means for connecting to an optional meter (PGA-0510) or control system C A Flexible options for ease of installation Accessories A PGR-3200 L1 (Insulation Monitor) L2 PGA-0510 Analog Ohm Meter Optional PGA-0510 Analog Meter allows for metering of insulation resistance. Specifications Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER PGR-3200 240 Vac(1) PGR-3200-120 120 Vac ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT PGH Series Required >1,300 V PGA-0510 Optional IEEE Device Numbers Input Voltage Dimensions Resistance Ratings Contact Operating Mode Test Button Reset Button Output Contacts Analog Output Conformally Coated Approvals Warranty Mounting Note: For optional conformal coating please consult factory. To convert to a resistance grounded system, see neutral-grounding-resistors packages. (1) UL Not Available www.littelfuse.com/pgr-3200 PGH Series High-Tension Coupler A PGH Series high-tension coupler is required for systems between 1,300 V and 6,000 V. 46 Undervoltage Relay (27) Ground Detector Relay (64) See ordering information H 75 mm (3"); W 100 mm (3.9"); D 115 mm (4.5") Insulation warning (30 k and 50 k ) Insulation alarm (10 k ) Non-fail-safe Local Local and remote Two Form C 0-1 mA Consult factory UL Listed (E183688) 5 years DIN, Surface (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Ground-Fault Protection - Ungrounded DC System SE-601 SERIES (PGR-2601) DC Ground-Fault Monitor Description Features & Benefits FEATURES Adjustable pickup (1 - 20 mA) Adjustable time delay (50 ms - 2.5 s) Analog output (0 - 5 V) Non-volatile trip Memory BENEFITS Ten settings provide a wide range of low-level protection Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection or delayed response Form A and Form B output contacts for operation of separate annunciation and trip circuits Provides means for connecting to a meter (PGA-0500) or a control system Retains trip state when de-energized to simplify troubleshooting Selectable contact operating mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating modes allow connection to shunt or undervoltage breaker coil Microprocessor based No calibration required saves on maintenance cost Output contacts Simplified Circuit Diagram + A SE-GRM SERIES UNGROUNDED SUPPLY GROUND-REFERENCE MODULE Accessories - A SE-601 L1 SE-GRM Series Ground-Reference Module Required accessory, used to connect the SE-601 DC Ground-Fault Monitor to the DC bus. PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter Optional panel-mounted analog meter displays ground-fault current as a percentage of 22 mA. (DC Ground-Fault Monitor) L2 Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Input Voltage Dimensions Trip Level Settings Trip Time Settings Output Contacts Contact Operating Mode Test Button Reset Button Analog Output Conformally Coated Approvals Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER SE-601-OU 120/240 Vac/Vdc SE-601-OD 12/24 Vdc SE-601-OT 48 Vdc ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT SE-GRM SERIES Required PGA-0500 Optional PMA-55 Optional PMA-60 Optional Warranty Mounting DC Overcurrent Relay (76G) See ordering information H 75 mm (3.0"); W 55 mm (2.2"); D 115 mm (4.5") 1-20 mA 0.05 -2.5 s Isolated Form A and Form B Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe Local Local and remote 0-5 V Consult factory CSA certified, UL Listed (E340889), CE (European Union), C-Tick (Australian) 5 years DIN, Surface (standard) Panel (with PMA-55 or PMA-60 adapter) Note: For optional conformal coating please consult factory. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 47 www.littelfuse.com/se-601 1 GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION The SE-601 is a microprocessor-based ground-fault relay for ungrounded dc systems. It provides sensitive ground-fault protection without the problems associated with nuisance tripping. Ground-fault current is sensed using an SE-GRM Series Ground-Reference Module--a resistor network that limits ground-fault current to 25 mA. The SE-601 is used on ungrounded dc systems ranging from industrial 24-Vdc control circuits to 1000-Vdc solar and transportation systems. Protection Relays Ground-Fault Protection - AC/DC Earthed System EL731 SERIES AC/DC Sensitive Earth-Leakage Relay Description GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 The EL731 is a microprocessor-based AC/DC Sensitive Earth-Leakage Relay that offers complete coverage for all frequencies from 0 to 6,000 Hz. Two CTs are required for the entire frequency range, or one CT can be used for only low- or high-frequency detection. An RTD/PTC sensor input allows over-temperature protection for a motor or drive. The EL731 offers metering, password-protected alarm and trip settings and optional network communications. It is primarily used to add low-level ground-fault protection to variable-speed drives, and to dc circuits. Simplified Circuit Diagram CT1 A CT2 A A GROUNDED AC SUPPLY CT1 B GROUNDED DC SUPPLY C - EL731 SERIES L1 A + EL731 SERIES (AC/DC Sensitive Earth-Leakage Relay) L1 L2 (AC/DC Sensitive Earth-Leakage Relay) L2 AC Mode DC Mode For detailed wiring diagram, see adjacent page. Ordering Information Accessories ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER COMMUNICATIONS EL731-00-X0 120/240 Vac/Vdc None EL731-01-X0 120/240 Vac/Vdc DeviceNetTM EL731-02-X0 120/240 Vac/Vdc Profibus(R) EL731-03-X0 120/240 Vac/Vdc EtherNet/IPTM EL731-04-X0 120/240 Vac/Vdc Modbus(R) TCP EL731-10-X0 48 Vdc & 24 Vac None EL731-11-X0 48 Vdc & 24 Vac DeviceNetTM EL731-12-X0 48 Vdc & 24 Vac Profibus(R) EL731-13-X0 48 Vdc & 24 Vac EtherNet/IPTM EL731-14-X0 48 Vdc & 24 Vac Modbus(R) TCP EL731-20-X0 24 Vdc None EL731-21-X0 24 Vdc DeviceNetTM EL731-22-X0 24 Vdc Profibus(R) EL731-23-X0 24 Vdc EtherNet/IP EL731-24-X0 24 Vdc Modbus(R) TCP A EFCT Series Earth-Fault Current Transformer Required zero-sequence current transformer specifically designed for low level detection. AC700-CUA Series Communication Adapter Optional network-interface and firmware-upgrade communications adapters field-install in EL731. AC700-SMK DIN-rail & Surface-mount Adapter EL731 plugs into adapter for back-plane mounting. TM ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT EFCT Series CT One Required AC700-CUA Series Com. Unit AC700-SMK Surface-Mount Kit Optional Optional AC700-CVR-00 Watertight Cover (IP66) for Panel-Mount Applications Optional PGA-0520 Analog Meter Optional Note: When building a part number, replace the "X" with "1" for AS/NZS 2081:2011 Compliant product, "0" otherwise. www.littelfuse.com/EL731 48 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Ground-Fault Protection - AC/DC Earthed System EL731 SERIES AC/DC Sensitive Earth-Leakage Relay Features & Benefits BENEFITS Adjustable pickup (30-5,000 mA) Adjustable trip setting provides a wide range of low-level protection and system coordination Frequency range (0-90 Hz, 20-6,000 Hz) Operate in either AC or DC mode or both. Use single or combined ranges. Separate metering 32-char OLED display Earth-leakage metering, setup and programming Local LED indication Visual Trip, Alarm, CT connection indication CT-Loop monitoring Alarms when CT is not connected Analog output (4-20 mA) Connect to DCS. Allows connection to an optional meter (PGA-0520) or control system Adjustable time delay Adjustable trip delay for quick protection and system coordination Alarm and trip settings Detect a deteriorating condition before damage occurs Temperature-sensor input Drive or motor temperature protection Output contacts 3 programmable: Operate 2 alarm and 1 trip circuit Network communication Optional connection to plant network Harmonic filtering Eliminates nuisance tripping due to harmonic noise Microprocessor based No required calibration saves maintenance cost Universal power supply Provides flexibility for numerous applications Wiring Diagram LINE 1 Specifications OPTIONAL NETWORK COMM 14 L1 AC/DC SENSITIVE EARTH-LEAKAGE RELAY EL731 K1 16 20 FAULT 18 K2 21 22 23 K3 24 25 EFCT-X 26 20-6000 HZ CT NC 17 10 S22 TC 5 TC RTD/PTC TB 4 TB TA 3 TA 9 SH2 EFCT-X 8 S11 7 S12 DC-90 HZ CT 13 RST PTC TC RTD t +t TB TA SUPPLY 6 SH1 REMOTE RESET AC ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N), DC ground fault (79G), PTC overtemperature (49), RTD temperature (38, 49) Supply Voltage 120/240 Vac/Vdc, 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc/24 Vac Trip Level Settings 30-5,000 mA AC and DC Alarm Level Settings 30-5,000 mA AC and DC Trip Delay 0.05-2 s Output Contacts 3 Form C (programmable) Contact Operating Mode Fail-safe & non-fail-safe Reset Front panel and remote Freq. Response, CT1 0-90 Hz Freq. Response, CT2 20-6,000, 190-6,000, 20-90, 20-3,000 Hz; selectable Current Transformer EFCT-x series CT Detection Open & short detection Terminals Plug-in, wire clamping, 24 to 12 AWG (0.2-2.5 mm2) Communications EtherNet/IPTM, DeviceNetTM, Profibus(R), Modbus(R) TCP (optional) Analog Output 4-20 mA (selectable 0-5 A or 0-100% trip-level setting) Conformal Coating Standard feature Dimensions H 48 mm (1.9"); W 96 mm (3.8"); D 129 mm (5.0") Approvals UL Listed (E340889), CSA, RCM (Australia), CE Warranty 5 years Mounting Panel; Surface and DIN (with optional AC700-SMK) L2/N 15 GND 19 11 S21 IEEE Device Numbers LINE 2/N ANALOG OUT +- AB 2 4-20mA PGA-0520 AA 1 12 GND Littelfuse reserves the right to make product changes, without notice. Material in this document is as accurate as known at the time of publication. Visit Littelfuse.com for the most up-to-date information. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 49 www.littelfuse.com/EL731 1 GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION FEATURES Protection Relays Ground-Fault Protection - Solidly Grounded Systems SE-701 SERIES (PGR-5701) Ground-Fault Monitor Description The SE-701 is a microprocessor-based ground-fault relay for resistance- and solidly-grounded systems. In addition to common systems, it is uniquely suited for use on systems with significant harmonic content. The SE-701 can provide main-plant protection, feeder-level protection, or individual-load protection. Proper current transformer selection provides the desired pickup range. The output contacts can be connected for use in protective tripping circuits or in alarm indication circuits. The analog output can be used with a PLC or a meter. GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Adjustable pickup (1-99%) Adjustable time delay (50 ms - 2.5 s) Analog output (0 - 5 V) Trip setting based on input CT primary, allows use with any CT. Minimum 50 mA with EFCT Series. Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection and system coordination Form A and Form B ground-fault output contacts for operation of separate annunciation and trip circuits Allows for connecting an optional meter (PGA-0500) or a control system CT-Loop monitoring Alarms when CT is not connected Selectable DFT or peak detection filtering Compatible with variable-speed drives Harmonic filtering Eliminates nuisance tripping Non-volatile trip memory Retains trip state while de-energized to simplify troubleshooting Microprocessor based No calibration required, saves on maintenance cost Universal power supply Allows operation in application where one side of PT is faulted, provides flexibility for numerous applications Output contacts Simplified Circuit Diagram CT A A GROUNDED B SUPPLY C Accessories SE-701 SERIES L1 A (Ground-Fault Monitor) L2 B Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER SE-701-OU 120/240 Vac/Vdc SE-701-OD 12/24 Vdc SE-701-OT 48 Vdc SE-701-O3 24 Vac ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT Current Transformer Required PGA-0500 Optional PMA-55, PMA-60 Optional SE-EFVC Voltage Clamp Optional PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter Optional panel-mounted analog meter displays ground-fault current as a percentage of the CT primary rating. Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Input Voltage Dimensions Trip Level Settings Trip Time Settings Contact Operating Mode Harmonic Filtering Test Button Reset Button CT-Loop Monitoring Output Contacts Approvals Analog Output Conformally coated Warranty Mounting Note: For optional conformal coating please consult factory. www.littelfuse.com/se-701 Ground-Fault Current Transformer Required current transformer model depends on application. We offer a variety of sensitive CTs with 5- and 30-A primaries. 50 Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) See ordering information H 75 mm (3.0"); W 55 mm (2.2"); D 115 mm (4.5") 1-99% CT-Primary Rating 0.05-2.5 s Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe Standard feature Standard feature Standard feature Standard feature Isolated Form A and Form B CSA certified, UL Listed (E340889), CE (European Union), C-Tick (Australian) 0-5 V Consult factory 5 years DIN, Surface (standard) Panel (with PMA-55 or PMA-60 adapter) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Ground-Fault Protection - Solidly Grounded Systems SE-703 SERIES Earth-Leakage Monitor Description Features & Benefits FEATURES Adjustable pickup (25 - 500 mA) Adjustable time delay (INST- 500 ms) Analog output (0 - 5 V) CT-Loop monitoring BENEFITS Adjustable trip setting provides a wide range of lowlevel protection and system coordination Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection and vsystem coordination Form A and Form B ground-fault output contacts for operation of separate annunciation and trip circuits Allows for connecting an optional meter (PGA-0500) or control system Alarms when CT is not connected Contact operating mode Fail-safe operating mode for undervoltage applications Harmonic filtering Non-volatile trip memory Microprocessor based Eliminates nuisance tripping Retains trip state while de-energized to simplify troubleshooting No calibration required, saves maintenance cost Universal power supply Allows operation in application where one side of PT is faulted, provides flexibility for numerous applications Output contacts Simplified Circuit Diagram CT A GROUNDED SUPPLY A B C Accessories SE-703 SERIES L1 A EFCT Series Ground-Fault Current Transformer Required zero-sequence current transformer specifically designed for low-level detection. B PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter Optional panel-mounted analog meter displays groundfault current as a percentage of the set-point or 5 A. (Earth-Leakage Monitor) L2 C Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER SE-703-OU 120/240 Vac/Vdc SE-703-OD 12/24 Vdc SE-703-OT 48 Vdc SE-703-O3 24 Vac ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT EFCT Series Required PGA-0500 Optional PMA-55 Optional PMA-60 Optional SE-EFVC Voltage Clamp Optional (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls PMA-60 Series - Mounting Adapter Required when panel mounting for AS/NZS 2081:2011 compliance Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Input Voltage Dimensions Trip Level Settings Trip Time Settings Contact Operating Mode Harmonic Filtering Test Button Reset Button CT-Loop Monitoring Output Contacts Approvals Compliance Analog Output Conformally Coated Warranty Mounting 51 Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) See ordering information H 75 mm (3.0"); W 55 mm (2.2"); D 115 mm (4.5") 25-500 mA INST-500 ms Fail-safe Standard feature Standard feature Standard feature Standard feature Isolated Form A and Form B CSA certified, UL Listed (E340889), CE (European Union), RCM (Australian) AS/NZS 2081:2011 0-5 V Yes 5 years DIN, Surface (standard), Panel (with PMA-55 or PMA-60 adapter) www.littelfuse.com/se-703 1 GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION The SE-703 is a microprocessor-based earth-fault relay for resistance- and solidly earthed systems. It offers sensitive earth-fault detection as low as 25 mA and can be used on systems with significant harmonic content. The SE-703 provides feeder-level protection or individual-load protection. The output contacts can be connected for use in protective tripping circuits or in alarm indication circuits. The analog output can be used with a PLC or a meter. The SE-703 is specifically designed to be AS/NZS 2081:2011 compliant. Protection Relays Ground-Fault Protection - Solidly Grounded Systems SE-704 SERIES (PGR-4704) Earth-Leakage Monitor Description The SE-704 is a microprocessor-based ground-fault relay for resistance- and solidly-grounded systems. It offers very sensitive ground-fault detection as low as 10 mA and can be used on systems with significant harmonic content. The SE-704 provides feeder-level protection or individual-load protection. The output contacts can be connected for use in protective tripping circuits or in alarm indication circuits. The analog output can be used with a PLC or a meter. GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 Features & Benefits FEATURES Adjustable pickup (10 mA - 5 A) Adjustable time delay (30 ms - 2.0 s) Analog output (0-5 V & 0-1 mA) CT-Loop monitoring BENEFITS Adjustable trip setting provides a wide range of low-level protection and system coordination Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection and system coordination Form A and Form B ground-fault output contacts for operation of separate annunciation and trip circuits Allows for connecting an optional meter (PGA-0500) or control system Alarms when CT is not connected Selectable contact operating mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating modes allows connection to shunt or undervoltage breaker coil Harmonic filtering Non-volatile trip memory Microprocessor based Eliminates nuisance tripping Retains trip state when de-energized to simplify troubleshooting No calibration required saves maintenance cost Universal power supply Allows operation in application where one side of PT is faulted, provides flexibility for numerous applications Output contacts Simplified Circuit Diagram CT A A GROUNDED SUPPLY B C Accessories A SE-704 SERIES L1 (Earth-Leakage Monitor) L2 B SE-CS30 Series Ground-Fault Transformer Required zero-sequence current transformer specifically designed for low level detection. Flux conditioner is included to prevent saturation. PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter Optional panel-mounted analog meter displays groundfault current as a percentage of the set-point or 5 A. Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Input Voltage Dimensions Trip Level Settings Trip Time Settings Contact Operating Mode Harmonic Filtering Test Button Reset Button CT-Loop Monitoring Output Contacts Approvals Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER SE-704-0U 120/240 Vac/Vdc SE-704-0D 12/24 Vdc SE-704-0T 48 Vdc SE-704-03 24 Vac ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT SE-CS30 Series Required PGA-0500 Optional PMA-55, PMA-60 Optional Analog Output Conformally coated Warranty Mounting Note: For optional conformal coating please consult factory. www.littelfuse.com/se-704 52 Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) See ordering information H 75 mm (3.0"); W 55 mm (2.2"); D 115 mm (4.5") 10 mA-5.0 A 30-2000 ms Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe Standard feature Standard feature Standard feature Standard feature Isolated Form A and Form B UL Listed (E340889), CSA, CE (European Union) C-Tick (Australian) 0-5 V & 0-1 mA Optional 5 years DIN, Surface (standard) Panel (with PMA-55 or PMA-60 adapter) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Ground-Fault Circuit Interruptors - Personnel Protection SB6000 SERIES Industrial Description Enclosed Model* Equipment Ground-Fault Protective Device (EGFPD) ISB is also available with adjustable protection settings as an EGFPD. The EGFPD models can be set to trip at 6 mA or from 10-100 mA in increments of 10 mA. This offers more flexibility since GFCI devices are not allowed to have an adjustable trip level. Rating and Models ISB (GFCI & EGFPD) is available for voltages from 208 to 600 V with a maximum full load current of 100 A, and a built-in overcurrent protection supplied by Littelfuse Class T fuses. The load can be 1-phase (line-to-line) or 3-phase, however, cannot have a neutral. The power system can either be solidly-grounded or high-resistance grounded. Operator Interface* *Patented Simplified Circuit Diagram Two options for enclosures are available: UL-recognized open-chassis models are available for installation in existing electrical enclosures and UL-listed enclosed models include a NEMA-4X enclosure for standalone installations. A SB-OPI (Operator Interface) GC K B L1 Ground Wire (Load-Ground) Monitor The ISB also monitors the ground wire (load-ground) connection between the ISB and load. This is a required feature for GFCI devices and is optional for EGFPD devices. If the connection is broken, the ISB will provide an alarm by changing the state of the alarm contacts. This monitoring circuit includes an extra wire (pilot wire) between the ISB and load (since the monitoring current is low, only a small wire is required). At the load, the pilot wire is connected to a termination device. The other end of the termination device is connected to the load ground (typically the enclosure). TERMINATION DEVICE LOAD L2 * L3 G G AUXILIARY CONTACT Features & Benefits SB6100 ENCLOSED SB6100 MODELS * For a single-phase load; Jumper L2 & L3 & use L1 & L2 as the input terminals Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER VOLTAGE (V) SB6100-00X-0 208 SB6100-10X-0 240 SB6100-20X-0 480 SB6100-30X-0 600 SB6100-01X-0 208 SB6100-11X-0 240 SB6100-21X-0 480 SB6100-31X-0 600 TRIP LEVEL (mA) 20(Fixed) UL CATEGORY/CLASS UL 943C Class C special-purpose GFCI UL 943C Class D special-purpose GFCI 6, 10-100 in increments of 10 UL 943/UL 1053 Equipment groundfault protective device (EGFPD) Note: x=0 for open-chassis models and 1 for enclosed models (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 53 FEATURES BENEFITS UL 943 inverse time trip curve Detects and interrupts to protect people and reduce the probability of nuisance tripping Minimum trip time < 20 msec Reduces the risk of ventricular fibrillation for leakage current of 250 mA and above UL 943C fixed trip level (GFCI 20 mA) Personnel protection for systems with leakage current higher than the standard 6 mA required by UL 943 Class A Selectable trip levels (EGFPD) Provides extra safety when a customer is able to operate with a setting below 20 mA (GFCI) and the settings above 20 mA can reduce nuisance tripping on systems with high leakage current. UL 943C ground monitor/ interrupt Protects from shock by tripping if continuity of ground wire between Industrial Shock-Block and load is broken. Undervoltage, brownout, chatter detection Ensures proper operation and prolongs the internal contactor lifetime 3 x Class T, 600 V incoming fuses The fuses provide overcurrent protection for a 100 A circuit and a higher short-circuit current rating (SCCR) of 50 kA. Conformal coating Internal circuits are conformally coated to protect against corrosion and moisture, yet still repairable Operator Interface Shows unit status, alarm types, percentage of leakage current, and allows for Test and Reset capabilities Auxiliary Contact Provides a normally-open contact for remote indication Automatic Self-Test All ISB options (revision 01 or higher) include an automatic self-test feature Motor Starter Allows the user to start and stop the motor from the interface www.littelfuse.com/IndustrialShockBlock 1 GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION Special-Purpose Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI), Class C and Class D Industrial Shock Block (ISB) is a personnel protection device designed to meet the new requirements for special-purpose GFCIs defined by UL 943C. ISB is the first and only permanently connected Class C and Class D GFCI on the market. Class C GFCIs are intended to be used on systems where the line-to-line voltage is 480 V or less with a trip level of 20 mA, while Class D GFCIs are intended to be used on 600 V systems. These improvements to the standard Class A GFCI (6 mA trip level used on 240 V systems or less) were made to allow the use of GFCIs in industrial facilities. The ISB includes an automatic self-test feature and is compliant to the UL1998 Software in Programmable Components standard. Open-Chassis Model* Protection Relays Ground-Fault Circuit Interruptors - Personnel Protection SB6000 SERIES Accessories GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 Connection Diagram The SB6100 is installed in-line between incoming power or existing over-current protection device and the load. Operator Interface (AC6000-OPI-00) A The open-chassis SB6100 can be installed in electrical equipment and the enclosed version is typically wall-mounted. 1N5339B - Termination Device B Axial-lead ground-check termination, included with SB6000 series Incoming Power SE-TA6 - Termination Assembly Optional termination assembly with terminals and mounting holes Circuit Breaker SE-TA6-SM Stud-Mount Termination Assembly Optional ground-check termination for submersible pumps SB6100 Industrial Shock-Block Open-Chasis Model Circuit Breaker SB6100 Industrial Shock-Block Enclosed Model AC6000-CART-00 Two-wheeled Cart Optional for mounting ISB to allow for moving the unit while power is off Specifications Voltage Rating AC6000-MNT-00 Mounting Frame Optional for mounting ISB to a cart or other surface. Included with the AC6000-CART-00. See ordering information Current Rating 100 A (continuous) Load 3-phase, 3-wire (no neutral) or 1-phase (line-to-line), 60 Hz Short-Circuit Current Rating 50,000 A Trip Level Settings Selectable (6, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 mA), or fixed at 20 mA Trip Time Setting Inverse time trip curve Enclosure NEMA 4X, Polyester, Lockable Operating Temperature -35C (-31F) to +40C(104F), up to +66C (151F) with derating Ordering Information - Accessories ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT PAGE* PAGE AC6000-OPI-00 Included N/A 1N5339B Included 477 120 SE-TA6 Optional 477 120 SE-TA6-SM Optional 477 120 SE-TA6ASF-WL Optional 477 120 AC6000-CART-00 Optional N/A AC6000-MNT-00 Optional N/A Wiring Requirements 2/0 AWG (maximum) Approval GFCI: UL Listed (enclosed models) and UL Recognized component (open-chassis models) EGFPD: cULus Listed (enclosed models) and cURus Recognized Component (open-chassis models); UL1998 Compliant (revision 01 or higher); All models CSA Certified Dimensions Enclosed: H 453.8 mm (17.9"); W 406.2 mm (16.0"); D 223.3 mm (8.8") Open-chassis: H 455.0 mm (17.9"); W 340.7 mm (13.4"); D 174.9 mm (6.8") * Page in Protection Relay & Controls Catalog Warranty 1 year Littelfuse reserves the right to make product changes, without notice. Material in this document is as accurate as known at the time of publication. Visit Littelfuse.com for the most up-to-date information. www.littelfuse.com/IndustrialShockBlock 54 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Ground-Fault Protection - Generator and Single-Function PGR-4300 SERIES (GFA300) Generator Ground-Fault Relay Description Features & Benefits Simplified Circuit Diagram FEATURES BENEFITS No CTs required Saves space and simplifies installation Adjustable pickup (100 - 1200 A) Adjustable time delay (0 - 1.0 s) Adjustable trip setting provides a wide range of protection and allows system coordination Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection and system coordination Form C ground-fault output contacts for alarming or tripping purposes Provides means for connecting to an optional meter (PGA-0500) or control system Monitors neutral-to-ground integrity and alarms if ground path becomes open circuit Eliminates nuisance tripping Output contacts Analog output (0 - 1 mA) G N-G continuity alarm Passive filtering Control Power Accessories PGR-4300 (Generator Ground-Fault Relay) PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter Optional panel-mounted analog meter displays ground-fault current as a percentage of the set-point. Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Input Voltage Dimensions Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER PGR-4300-12 12 Vdc PGR-4300-24 24 Vdc PGR-4300-120 120 Vac ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT PGA-0500 Optional PMA-55 Optional PMA-60 Optional Trip Level Settings Trip Time Delay Settings Contact Operating Mode Test Button Reset Button Output Contacts Analog Output Conformally Coated Approvals Warranty Mounting Note: For optional conformal coating please consult factory. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 55 Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N) See ordering information H 75 mm (3.0"); W 55 mm (2.2"); D 115 mm (4.5") 100-1200 A 0-1.0 s Non-fail-safe Local Local and remote Form C 0-1 mA Consult factory UL Listed (E183688) 5 years DIN, Surface (standard) Panel (with PMA-55 or PMA-60 adapter) www.littelfuse.com/pgr-4300 1 GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION The PGR-4300 Generator Ground-Fault Relay provides a simple method for detecting a ground-fault condition on generators without the need for current transformers (CTs). This greatly simplifies the installation. In addition, it is compatible with both three- and four-pole transfer switches. This relay also monitors the neutral-to-ground path for continuity. The PGR-4300 is ideal for any generator or application where there is not sufficient space to install CTs. Protection Relays www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 56 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays GROUND-CONDUCTOR MONITORING SE-105 / SE-107 Series Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor ....... 58 SE-134C / SE-135 Series Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor ....... 59 For More Information... and to download our technical note on Ground-Fault Ground-Check, visit Littelfuse.com/Ground-faultPaper (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 57 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 2 GROUND-CONDUCTOR MONITORING Continuously monitor the integrity of the ground conductor to protect portable equipment from hazardous voltages caused by ground faults. Protection Relays Ground-Conductor Monitoring SE-105 / SE-107 SERIES Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor Description The SE-105/SE-107 is a combination ground-wire monitor and ground-fault relay for resistance-grounded systems. It continuously monitors the integrity of the ground conductor to protect portable equipment from hazardous voltages caused by ground faults. The SE-105/SE-107 is an excellent choice for trailing cables 5 kV and under in underground mining applications. For higher voltages or long-cable applications, see the SE-134C/SE-135. Features & Benefits FEATURES Adjustable pickup (0.5, 2.0, 4.0 A) Adjustable time delay (0.1 - 2.0 s) Harmonic filter Zener-characteristic termination assembly Fail-safe ground-check circuit Simplified Circuit Diagram CT A GROUNDED SUPPLY TRAILING CABLE A B Ensures ground-check circuit remains safe even in the event of equipment failure Additional coating protects circuit boards against harsh environment GC SE-105: selectable UV- or shunt-trip mode G SE-107: UV-trip mode only TERMINATION DEVICE SE-105 SERIES SE-107 SERIES L1 L2 Provides reliable ground-check loop verification Conformal coating M C BENEFITS Unit can be used on a wide variety of trailing cable applications Adjustable trip delay for quick protection and system coordination Prevents false operation A B Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER SE-105 120 Vac SE-105D 120 Vac/Vdc SE-105E 240 Vac SE-107 120 Vac SE-107D 120 Vac/Vdc SE-107E 240 Vac REQUIREMENT CT200 Series Required 1N5339B Included SE-TA6, SE-TA6-SM Optional SE-TA6A Series Optional RK-102, RK-105, RK-105I Optional RK-13 Optional PPI-600V Optional www.littelfuse.com/se-105, www.littelfuse.com/se-107 CT200 Series Current Transformer Required CT detects ground-fault current. 1N5339B Termination Device 5 W axial-lead ground-check termination; included with SE-105/SE-107. SE-TA6 Termination Assembly Optional termination assembly with convenient terminals and mounting holes SE-TA6-SM Stud-Mount Termination Assembly Optional 50 W ground-check termination that is robust and compact for submersible pumps. Wire lead simplifies installation. Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Input Voltage Dimensions Consult manual online for additional ordering options. ACCESSORIES Eliminates chance of unauthorized change to trip circuit Accessories B (Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor) Provides flexibility for different applications Trip Level Settings Trip Time Settings Contact Operating Mode Harmonic Filtering Reset Button Output Contacts Approvals Conformally Coated Warranty Mounting 58 Checking or Interlocking Relay (3GC), Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N) See ordering information H 150 mm (5.9"); W 109 mm (4.3"); D 100 mm (4.0") 0.5, 2.0, 4.0 A 0.1-1.0 s Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe (SE-105) Fail-safe only (SE-107) Standard feature Local and remote Isolated Form A CSA certified, UL Listed (E340889), C-Tick (Australian) Standard feature 5 years Surface (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Ground-Conductor Monitoring SE-134C / SE-135 SERIES Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor Description The SE-134C/SE-135 is a microprocessor-based, combination ground-wire monitor and ground-fault relay for resistancegrounded or solidly grounded systems. It continuously monitors the integrity of the ground conductor to protect portable equipment from hazardous voltages caused by ground faults. The SE-134C/SE-135 is field proven in monitoring trailing cables on large mobile equipment such as drag-lines, mining shovels, shore-to-ship power cables, dock-side cranes, stackerreclaimers, submersible pumps, and portable conveyors. Features & Benefits FEATURES Adjustable pickup (0.5 - 12.5 A for SE-CS10) (2 - 50 A for SE-CS40) Adjustable time delay (0.1 - 2.5 s) Simplified Circuit Diagram CT A GROUNDED SUPPLY A B M C GC G TERMINATION DEVICE SE-134C SERIES SE-135 SERIES L1 L2 (Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor) B Ground-check LED indication CT-loop monitoring High-induced-ac rejection DFT (Harmonic) filter Zener-characteristic termination assembly Provides reliable ground-check loop verification Fail-safe circuits Ensures ground-check and ground-fault circuits remain safe even in the event of equipment failure Additional coating protects circuit boards against harsh environment Increases maximum cable length for groundcheck monitoring (10 km typical) Conformal coating XGC option Accessories Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER OPTION SE-134C Blank or XGC SE-135 Blank or XGC A POWER SUPPLY 0=120/240 Vac/Vdc 1=24/48 Vdc (1) COMM 0=None 0=120/240 Vac/Vdc 0=None 1=24/48 Vdc 3=Ethernet (1) (1) (2) ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT SE-CS10 Series Required SE-CS40 Series (for SE-135) Optional SE-TA6A Series (for SE-134C) Required SE-TA12A/SE-TA12B Combination (for SE-134C) Optional SE-TA12A Series (for SE-135) Required SE-IP65CVR-G Optional RK-132 Optional PPI-600V Optional B SE-CS10 or SE-CS40 Series Ground-Fault Current Transformer Required zero-sequence current transformer detects ground-fault current. SE-TA6A Series, SE-TA12A Series Termination Assembly Required termination assembly; temperature compensated. Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Input Voltage Dimensions Trip Level Settings Trip Time Settings Contact Operating Mode Harmonic Filtering Test Button Reset Button Output Contacts Approvals Conformally Coated Warranty Mounting GC Trip Resistance (1) CE/C-Tick not available. (2) Not available with Ethernet option 3. (3) See ordering information. See Current Transformer Selection Guide and Accessory Information. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Unit can be used on a wide variety of trailing cable applications Adjustable trip delay for quick protection and system coordination Separate annunciation of ground-fault and groundcheck faults Indication of open or short ground-check wire makes it easier to find faults Alarms when CT is not connected Makes unit suitable for applications with high voltages and long cables Prevents false operation Output contacts TRAILING CABLE BENEFITS 59 Checking or Interlocking Relay (3GC), Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) 65-265 Vac; 85-275 Vdc; 18-72 Vdc H 213 mm (8.4"); W 99 mm (3.9"); D 132 mm (5.2") 0.5 -12.5 A for SE-CS10, 2 - 50 A for SE-CS40 0.1-2.5 s Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe Standard feature Standard feature Standard feature Isolated Form A and Form B, Two Form C CSA certified, UL Listed (E340889), C-Tick (Australia) (3), CE (3) Standard feature 5 years Panel, Surface 28 (Standard), 45 (XGC Option) www.littelfuse.com/se-134c, www.littelfuse.com/se-135 Protection Relays www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 60 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING Continuously monitor the integrity of the ground conductor to protect portable equipment from hazardous voltages caused by ground faults SE-325 Series Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor .................. 62 SE-330 / SE-330HV Series Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor .................. 63 SE-330AU Series Neutral-Earthing-Resistor Monitor ..................... 65 NGR Series Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Packages ................ 66 NGRM-ENC Series Enclosed Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor ... 67 Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Sizing Chart System Voltage (Line-to-line) For More Information... and to download our White Paper Why NGRs Need Contiuous Monitoring, visit Time Rating 208 V 5 A / 24 Ohms Continuous 480 V 5 A / 55 Ohms Continuous 600 V 5 A / 69 Ohms Continuous 2,400 V 5 A / 277 Ohms or 10 A / 139 Ohms Continuous or 10 sec 4,160 V 5 A / 480 Ohms or 10 A / 240 Ohms Continuous or 10 sec 13,800 V 10 A / 798 Ohms or 200 A / 40 Ohms 10 seconds 25,000 V 200 A / 72 Ohms or 400 A / 36 Ohms 10 seconds 34,500 V 200 A / 100 Ohms or 400 A / 50 Ohms 10 seconds Note: The values shown are for any size transformer and are typical. Note: The above table is for illustrative purposes only. Actual values may differ based on a variety of individual system considerations, such as capacitive charging current and co-ordination study results. Littelfuse.com/TechnicalCenter (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls NGR Let-Through Current and Resistance 61 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Sizing Chart ............................................ 61 3 Protection Relays Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitoring SE-325 SERIES (PGM-8325) Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor Description The SE-325 Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor is used on resistance-grounded systems up to 25 kV to monitor the integrity of the neutral-to-ground path and to detect ground faults. It measures current and voltage in a transformer or generator neutral-to-ground connection and continuity of the neutral-grounding resistor (NGR). The SE-325 coordinates these three measurements to detect a loose connection, corrosion, ground fault, or NGR failure, and provides one alarm or trip output contact. RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Features & Benefits FEATURES Continuous NGR monitoring Ground-fault Detection Adjustable pickup (0.5 - 4 A) Adjustable time delay (0.1 - 2 s) Output contacts Simplified Circuit Diagram Selectable contact operating mode BENEFITS Detects resistor failure within seconds, reduces transient-overvoltage risk, removes risk of groundfault-detection failure Main or backup protection to detect a ground fault anywhere on the monitored system Select greatest sensitivity without false operation Adjustable trip delay allows system coordination Form A output contact Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating modes allows connection to shunt or undervoltage breaker coil or alarm system Accessories CT B ER SERIES A ER Series Sensing Resistor Required interface between the power system and the SE-325. Eliminates hazardous voltage levels at the monitor. B CT200 Series Current Transformer Required CT detects ground-fault current. SE-325 SERIES (Sensing Resistor) (NGR Monitor) NGR L1 L2 A RK Series Remote Indication and Reset Optional panel-mounted remote indication and reset assemblies. Available in NEMA 1 or NEMA 4 configurations. Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER SE-325 120 Vac SE-325D 120 Vac/Vdc SE-325E 240 Vac Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Input Voltage Dimensions GF Trip Level Settings GF Trip Time Settings RF Trip-Level Settings Consult manual online for additional ordering options. ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT CT200 Series Required ER Series Required SE-MRE-600 Optional RK-325, RK-325I, RK-302 Optional RK-13 Optional NGRM-ENC Optional www.littelfuse.com/se-325 Contact Operating Mode Reset Button Output Contacts Approvals Conformally coated Warranty Mounting 62 Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N), Overvoltage (59N), Lockout Relay (86), Checking Relay (3) See ordering information H 150 mm (5.9"); W 109 mm (4.3"); D 100 mm (4.0") 0.5-4.0 A 0.1-2.0 s 20-400 Vac (5 kV systems) 100-2,000 Vac (>5 kV systems) Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe Standard feature Form A CSA certified, UL Listed (E340889), C-Tick (Australian) Standard feature 5 years Surface (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitoring SE-330, SE-330HV SERIES Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor Description Simplified Circuit Diagram Resistor Monitoring The SE-330 combines the measured values of resistance, current, and voltage to continuously determine that an NGR is intact. It is able to detect a resistor failure with or without a ground fault present. Sensing resistors are matched to the system voltage and are used to monitor NGRs on systems up to 72 kV. B CT ER SERIES SE-330 SERIES (Sensing Resistor) NGR A L1 L2 (NGR Monitor) Ground-Fault Monitoring The SE-330 uses an application-appropriate current transformer to reliably detect ground-fault currents as small as 100 mA. DFT filtering ensures that false trips due to harmonic noise from adjustable-speed drives do not occur. Should the resistor open and a ground fault subsequently occur, the SE-330 will detect the fault through voltage measurement, while other current-only sensing relays would be ineffective. For detailed wiring diagram, see adjacent page. Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER SE-330 POWER SUPPLY - SE-330 for all apps. 35 kV or less SE-330HV for 72 kV apps. X K4 UNIT HEALTHY CONTACT COMM X - 0 0=USB Only 1=DeviceNet 3=EtherNet (Dual RJ45) 0=120/240 4=EtherNet (SC Fiber & RJ45) Vac/Vdc 5=EtherNet 2=48 Vdc (Dual SC Fiber) 6=IEC61850 Dual RJ45) 7=IEC61850 (SC Fiber & RJ45) 8=IEC61850 (Dual SC Fiber) X Pulsing Ground-Fault Location The SE-330 is capable of controlling a pulsing contactor, which is used to switch the NGR resistance in a pulsing-compatible NGR package. The resulting ground-fault current is distinguishable from charging currents and noise and will only appear upstream of the ground fault, making fault location fast and easy, even without isolating feeders or interrupting loads. 0=Normally Open 1=Normally Closed Accessories A ER Series Sensing Resistor Required interface between the power system and the SE-330/SE-330HV. Eliminates hazardous voltage levels at the relay. B EFCT Series Ground-Fault Current Transformer Sensitive ground-fault current detection (5 A primary). NOTE: For Australian applications, see the SE-330AU. ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT ER Series Sensing Resistor Current Transformer SE-IP65CVR-G SE-MRE-600 RK-332 NGRM-ENC PGA-0520 SE-330-SMA Required Required Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional SE-CS30 Series Ground-Fault Current Transformer Sensitive ground-fault current detection (30 A primary). Other Current Transformer For low-resistance NGRs choose a CT primary approximately equal to the NGR rating. Inputs are provided for 1- and 5- A- secondary CTs. SE-IP65CVR-G Hinged Transparent Cover Watertight cover, tamper resistant, IP65 protection. Littelfuse reserves the right to make product changes, without notice. Material in this document is as accurate as known at the time of publication. Visit Littelfuse.com for the most up-to-date information. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 63 www.littelfuse.com/se-330, www.littelfuse.com/se-330hv 3 RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING The SE-330 Series is an advanced ground-fault and neutralgrounding-resistor monitoring relay. It measures neutral current, neutral-to-ground voltage, and neutral-to-ground resistance. It provides continuous monitoring of the neutral-to-ground path to verify that the neutral-grounding resistor (NGR) is intact. This is of utmost importance--an open NGR renders current-sensing ground-fault protection inoperative and could result in a false belief that the system is functioning properly. The SE-330 can be used with low- and medium-voltage transformers and generators with low- or high-resistance grounding used in processing, manufacturing, chemical, pulp and paper, petroleum, and watertreatment facilities. For high-voltage applications, use the SE-330HV Series. For applications that require conformance to Australian standard AS/NZS 2081.3:2002, see the SE-330AU Series. Protection Relays Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitoring SE-330, SE-330HV SERIES Features & Benefits FEATURES IEEE # 3 Continuous NGR monitoring 50G/N, 51G/N, 59N Ground-fault detection RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 BENEFITS Detects resistor failure within seconds, reduces transient-overvoltage risk, removes risk of ground-fault-detection failure Main or backup protection to detect a ground fault anywhere on the monitored system Adjustable pickup (2-100%) Select greatest sensitivity without false operation, adjustable in 1% increments (MEM setting) Adjustable time delay (0.1-10 s) Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection and system coordination Universal CT compatibility Allows the use of a CT that gives required ground-fault settings Output contacts Two Form C (Ground Fault, Resistor Fault), Two Form A (Trip/Pulse, Healthy) Analog output (4 - 20 mA) Connect an optional PGA-0520 meter or control system Pulsing output (SE-330 only) Control the operation of a pulsing ground-fault-location circuit Trip records On-board 100-event (with date and time) recorder helps with system diagnostics Harmonic filtering (DFT) Eliminate false trips due to harmonic noise from ASDs Local communications Mini USB port to view measured values, configure settings, and check event records Data Logging On-board microSD card (included) can be used for long-term data logging Network communications Remotely view measured values and event records, reset trips, and cause a remote trip Available Protocol Options: IEC 61850 - with dual RJ45, SC Fiber and RJ45, or Dual SC Fiber Interface Modbus TCP and Ethernet/IP - with dual RJ45, SC Fiber and RJ45, or Dual SC Fiber Interface DeviceNet - with CAN interface Software Selectable contact operating mode Selectable reset mode PC-interface software (SE-MON330) is available at Littelfuse.com/RelaySoftware Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating modes allows connection to shunt or undervoltage breaker coil or alarm circuit (Trip, Ground Fault, Resistor Fault relays) Selectable latching or auto-reset operation Calibrate push button Ensures resistor-failure sensitivity is correct Unit-healthy output Verifies SE-330 is operating correctly Conformal coating Internal circuits are conformally coated to protect against corrosion and moisture Typical Values NEUTRAL-GROUNDING RESISTOR SYSTEM VOLTAGE (VOLTS) SENSING RESISTOR CURRENT (AMPERES) RESISTANCE (OHMS) MODEL RESISTANCE (SWITCH S5 SETTING) GROUND-FAULT PICKUP LEVEL (AMPERES) VN PICKUP LEVEL (VOLTS) 5 5 5 5 10 15 55 69 277 480 416 554 ER-600VC ER-600VC ER-5KV ER-5KV ER-15KV ER-15KV 20 k 20 k 20 k 20 k 100 k 100 k 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 2 3 170 200 800 1,700 170 x 5 = 850 340 x 5 = 1,700 480 600 2,400 4,160 7,200 14,400 DISCLAIMER: The above table is for illustrative purposes only. Actual values may differ based on a variety of individual system considerations, such as capacitive charging current and coordination study results. Wiring Diagram CONTROL POWER UNIT HEALTHY 1 2 RESET 15 NEUTRAL-GROUNDINGRESISTOR MONITOR SE-330 SERIES SENSING RESISTOR ER SERIES (required) G 12 13 3 POWER SYSTEM NEUTRAL (X0) N Specifications R 6 R A 7 G 16 17 +24 Vdc 18 ANALOG OUTPUT 4-20 mA PULSE (SE-330 ONLY) ENABLE + 19 20 0 V 21 TRIP OR PULSING 22 23 (K1) IEEE Device Numbers Input Voltage Dimensions GF Trip-Level Settings GF Trip-Time Settings Vn Trip-Level Settings Contact Operating Mode Harmonic Filtering Reset Button Output Contacts Pulsing Circuit Approvals CURRENT TRANSFORMER EFCT FAMILY (required) B 8 EFCT 9 1A 10 5A 11 COMMON 24 GROUND FAULT 25 (K2) 26 27 RESISTOR FAULT 28 (K3) 29 Communications Analog Output Conformally Coated Warranty Mounting Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N, 59N), Checking Relay (3), Lockout Relay (86) See ordering information H 213 mm (8.4"); W 98 mm (3.9"); D 132 mm (5.2") 2-100% of CT-Primary Rating in 1% increments 0.1-10 s 20-2,000 Vac (5 kV systems) 100-10,000 Vac (>5 kV systems) Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe (K1, K2, K3) Standard feature Standard feature Two Form A and two Form C 1.0-3.0 s in 0.2 s increments (SE-330 only) CSA certified, UL Listed (E340889), CE (European Union), C-Tick (Australian) Mini USB (standard); DeviceNet (optional), IEC 61850 (optional), Modbus TCP and EtherNet/IP (optional) 4-20 mA, self or loop powered Standard feature 5 years Panel and Surface (optional) Littelfuse reserves the right to make product changes, without notice. Material in this document is as accurate as known at the time of publication. Visit Littelfuse.com for the most up-to-date information. www.littelfuse.com/se-330, www.littelfuse.com/se-330hv 64 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Neutral-Earthing-Resistor Monitoring SE-330AU SERIES Neutral-Earthing-Resistor Monitor Description Resistor Monitoring The SE-330AU combines the measured values of resistance, current, and voltage to continuously determine that the NER is intact. It is able to detect a resistor failure with or without an earth fault present. Sensing resistors are matched to the system voltage and are used to monitor NGRs on systems up to 35 kV. Simplified Circuit Diagram Earth-Fault Monitoring The SE-330AU uses a 5- or 30-A-primary current transformer to provide a pickup-setting range of 0.125 to 5 A or 0.75 to 30 A to comply with AS/NZS 2081.3:2002. DFT filtering ensures that false trips due to harmonic noise from adjustable-speed drives do not occur. Open-CT detection is provided. B CT ER SERIES SE-330AU SERIES (Sensing Resistor) NER A L1 L2 (NER Monitor) Accessories A Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER SE-330AU SE-330AU for all apps. 35 kV or less SE-330HV for 72 kV apps. POWER SUPPLY - X K4 UNIT HEALTHY CONTACT COMM X 0=USB Only 1=DeviceNet 3=EtherNet (Dual RJ45) - 0 X B ER Series Sensing Resistor Required interface between the power system and the SE-330AU. Eliminates hazardous voltage levels at the relay. EFCT Series Earth-Fault Current Transformer Sensitive earth-fault current detection (5 A primary). SE-CS30 Series Earth-Fault Current Transformer Sensitive earth-fault current detection (30 A primary). 4=EtherNet 0=120/240 (SC Fiber & RJ45) Vac/Vdc 5=EtherNet (Dual SC Fiber) 2=48 Vdc 6=IEC61850 (Dual RJ45) 7=IEC61850 (SC Fiber & RJ45) 8=IEC61850 (Dual SC Fiber) ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT ER Series Sensing Resistor Required Current Transformer Required SE-IP65CVR-G Optional SE-MRE-600 Optional RK-332 Optional (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 0=Normally Open 1=Normally Closed Specifications Input Voltage Dimensions GF Trip-Level Settings GF Trip-Time Settings Vn Trip-Level Settings Output Contacts Operating Mode Harmonic Filtering Reset Approvals Communications Analog Output Conformal Coating Warranty Mounting 65 See ordering information H 213 mm (8.4"); W 98 mm (3.9"); D 132 mm (5.2") 0.125 to 30 A 0.1 to 0.5 s 20-2,000 Vac (5 kV systems) 100-10,000 Vac (>5 kV systems) Two Form A, Two Form C Fail-Safe Standard feature Front panel push button and remote input C-Tick (Australian), CE Mini USB (standard); DeviceNet (optional), IEC 61850 (optional), Modbus TCP and EtherNet/IP (optional) 4-20 mA, self or loop powered Standard feature 5 years Panel, Surface (optional) www.littelfuse.com/se-330au 3 RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING The SE-330AU Series is an advanced earth-fault and earthingresistor monitoring relay for low- and medium-voltage transformers and generators. It monitors neutral current, neutral-to-earth voltage, and neutral-to-earth resistance. It provides continuous monitoring of the neutral-to-earth path to verify that the neutral-earthing resistor (NER) is intact. This is of utmost importance--an open NER renders current-sensing earth-fault protection inoperative and could result in a false belief that the system is functioning properly. The SE-330AU earth-fault function complies with AS/NZS 2081.3:2002. Outputs include four relay outputs, and an analog output. A mini USB port is included to view measured values, configure settings, and check event records. An on-board micro SD card can be used for long-term data logging. Network communications options are available. For non-AS/NZS 2081 applications, see the SE-330 or SE-330HV Series. Protection Relays Neutral-Grounding-Resistor System NGR SERIES Neutral-Grounding-Resistor System Description Neutral-Grounding Resistors (NGRs) are used to ground power systems by inserting a resistor between the system neutral and ground. This reduces the prospective ground-fault current to a predetermined value. A properly designed resistance-grounded system provides benefits over both ungrounded and solidly grounded systems. Because the system is grounded, transient overvoltages do not occur and ground-fault current can flow allowing it to be detected and measured. They also significantly reduce damage caused by ground faults on solidly grounded systems. Limiting ground-fault current eliminates the arcflash hazards associated with the first ground fault. The hazards associated with phase-to-phase electrical faults must still be mitigated by using arc-flash relays, feeder-protection relays, current-limiting fuses, and other methods. Groundfault relays (such as the SE-701) can be used on feeders to provide selective coordination and the ability to quickly locate or isolate the fault. Pulsing systems are also available as they are another popular fault-location method. RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Applications Resistance grounding is typically applied on transformers and generators where safety and continuity of service are paramount. A faulted feeder may remain in operation until it is safe to repair the fault, where allowed by the local electrical code. Benefits g g g g g For information about the NGRM-ENC NGR Monitor Control Panel, see Accessories. Features g Ordering Information g For information regarding a tailored NGR package, please fill out and submit the form at www.littelfuse.com/NGR-Quote g g g www.littelfuse.com/ngr Eliminate phase-to-ground arc-flash incidents Eliminate transient overvoltages Reduced point-of-fault damage Can provide continuity of service during a ground fault Optional pulsing ground-fault current to aid in fault location 66 ER-series Sensing Resistor and Current Transformer required for NGR monitoring come pre-installed inside the enclosure Can be packaged with a zigzag transformer to resistance ground an ungrounded delta system, a system bus fed by generators, or a system with an inaccessible neutral SE-325 or SE-330 NGR Monitor can provide continuous NGR monitoring and ground-fault protection; NGR failure will render all downstream current-sensing ground-fault protection inoperative Stainless steel resistor elements prevent corrosion Short-time and continuous-rated duty resistors are available (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitoring NGRM-ENC SERIES NGRM-ENC Description The NGRM-ENC Enclosed Neutral-Grounding-Resistor (NGR) Monitor series is a Type 4X enclosure housing a Littelfuse Startco SE-325 or SE-330 Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor and optional accessories that include a 480/600-V control power transformer (CPT), faulted-phase indication (FPI; implemented with an EL3100 Ground-Fault & Phase-Voltage Indicator), earth-leakage panel meter, pulse-enable control, and mounting options. Appropriate fusing is included and field wiring is to terminal blocks. SE-325 Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor Measures current and voltage in a transformer or generator neutral-to-ground connection and continuity of the neutral-grounding resistor. Simplified Circuit Diagram SE-330 Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor Advanced ground-fault and neutral-grounding resistor monitoring relay that measures neutral current, neutral-to-ground voltage, and neutral-toground resistance. EL3100 Ground-Fault & Phase-Voltage Indicator Three panel-mounted LEDs indicate the ground-faulted phase. CT SE-330 SERIES ER SERIES (Sensing Resistor) EL3100 (NGR Monitor) NGR DN DA Panel Meter Panel-mounted meter displays earth leakage current as a percentage of the ground-faultCT-primary rating. DB L1 L2 DC NGRM-ENC NGR Assembly (ordered separately) (SE-330 with voltage indication shown) RK-332/RK-302 Remote Indication and Reset Panel-mounted remote indication and reset assemblies are included with SE-325 and surface-mounted SE-330 configurations. Ordering Information The following options are available with a faster shipping time: ORDERING NUMBER PROTECTION RELAY OPTION NGR MONITOR MOUNTING OPTION AMMETER & PULSE CONTROL OPTION COMMS NGRM-ENC-000-01 SE-325 Surface mounted None None CPT NGRM-ENC-200-01 SE-330 (K4=NO) Surface mounted None None CPT NGRM-ENC-201-01 SE-330 (K4=NO) Panel mounted None None CPT NGRM-ENC-201-11 SE-330 (K4=NO) Panel mounted Ammeter None CPT NGRM-ENC-230-01 SE-330 (K4=NO) Surface mounted None Ethernet/2 RJ45 ports CPT NGRM-ENC-231-01 SE-330 (K4=NO) Panel mounted None Ethernet/2 RJ45 ports CPT (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 67 CONTROL-POWER TRANSFORMER OPTION www.littelfuse.com/ngrm-enc RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING Options 3 Protection Relays Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitoring NGRM-ENC SERIES Ordering Information PROTECTION RELAY OPTION NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS OPTION NGR MONITOR MOUNTING OPTION X X X NGRM-ENC- 0=SE-325 1=SE-325 & voltage indication(1) 2=SE-330 (N.O. K4) 3=SE-330 (N.O. K4) & voltage indication(1) 4=SE-330 (N.C. K4) 5=SE-330 (N.C. K4) & voltage indication(1) 6=SE-330HV (N.O. K4) 7=SE-330HV (N.O. K4) & voltage indication(1) 8=SE-330HV (N.C. K4) 9=SE-330HV (N.C. K4) & voltage indication(1) RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 0=No network communications 1=DeviceNet (2) 3=Ethernet, dual RJ45 (2) 4=Ethernet, 1 RJ45 & 1 fiber (2) 5=Ethernet, dual fiber (2) 6=IEC 61850, dual RJ45 (2) 7=IEC 61850, 1 RJ45 & 1 fiber (2) 8=IEC 61850, dual fiber (2) - AMMETER & PULSE CONTROL OPTION CONTROL-POWER TRANSFORMER OPTION X X 0=No ammeter 0=Surface-mounted NGR monitor (4) 1=Panel-mounted NGR monitor (5) 1=Earth-leakage panel 0=No CPT meter (2) (1) 2=Earth-leakage panel 1=480/600-V CPT meter & pulse-enable switch(3) Note (1) - Includes fuses, (2) - SE-330 models only, (3) - SE-330 models only, excluding SE-330HV models, (4) - Includes panel-mounted indication & reset, and USB connector for SE-330 models, (5) - SE-330 models only; includes IP65 hinged transparent cover Specifications Enclosure Dimensions Approvals Warranty www.littelfuse.com/ngrm-enc Polyester, Lockable. SE-330 panel-mount options are rated to IP65. All other options are rated to Type 4X. H 454 mm (17.9"); W 406 mm (16"); D 264 mm (10.4") Clearance required to open SE-IP65CVR-G 112 mm (4.4") C CSA US 1 year 68 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays FEEDER PROTECTION Protect feeder circuits from overcurrents, earth faults, phase loss and other detrimental conditions in critical applications and processes.They provide essential data for predictive and preventive maintenance, extending the life of equipment, enhancing safety and maximizing efficiency. Feeder Protection Unit ........................................... 70 FPS Series Feeder Protection System ...................................... 71 For More Information... and to download datasheets and manuals on our Feeder Protection Relays, click Technical Resources at Littelfuse.com/FeederProtection (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 69 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 4 FEEDER PROTECTION FPU-32 Series Protection Relays Feeder Protection-Standard FPU-32 SERIES (PGR-7200) Feeder Protection Unit Description The FPU-32 Feeder Protection Unit provides integrated protection, metering, and data-logging functions. It is an excellent choice for retrofitting and upgrading older relays because of its compact size and ability to use existing CTs. The FPU-32 is used to protect distribution feeders in processing, manufacturing, petroleum, chemical, and wastewater treatment facilities. Features & Benefits FEATURES IEC & IEEE overcurrent protection curves RFEEDER PROTECTION 4 Data logging BENEFITS Definite and inverse time settings for system coordination; prevents catastrophic failures Create distinctive settings for maintenance or for two different loads Maintenance mode setting to reduce the risk of arc-flash hazards On-board 100-event recorder and remote data logging helps with system diagnostics Overload Thermal protection for connected load Phase loss/Phase reverse (current) Unbalance (current) Detects unhealthy supply conditions Two setpoint groups NOTE: The FPU-32 consists of the Feeder Protection Unit (pictured above) and the MPU-CIM Current Input Module (not pictured). Reduced overcurrent mode Simplified Circuit Diagram PHASE CT A GF CT B PHASE CT PHASE CT Communications Prevents overheating due to unbalanced phases Remotely view measured values, event records & reset trips Accessories MPU-CIM A (Current Input Module) B FPU-32 L1 (Feeder Protection Unit) L2 Phase Current Transformers Phase CTs are required to detect phase currents. Ground-Fault Transformer Zero-sequence current transformer detects ground-fault current. Available with 5-A and 30-A primary ratings for low-level pickup. Specifications Protective Functions (IEEE #) Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER COMMUNICATIONS FPU-32-00-00 TIA-232 FPU-32-01-00 TIA-232 & RS-485 FPU-32-02-00 TIA-232 & DeviceNetTM FPU-32-04-00 TIA-232 & Ethernet Input Voltage Power-Up Time Ride-Through Time 24-Vdc Source AC Measurements Frequency Output Contacts Approvals Communications Analog Output Conformally Coated Warranty Mounting (Control Unit) NOTE: One of the following is required: MPU-CIM-00-00 Current Input Module, or MPU-CTI-RT-00 Current Input Module with ring-tonque terminals. ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT Phase CTs Recommended Ground-Fault CT Optional MPU-16A-Y92A-96N Optional www.littelfuse.com/fpu-32 Overload (49, 51) Definite-time overcurrent (50, 51) Phase sequence (46) Inverse-time overcurrent (50, 51) Unbalance (46) Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Phase loss (46) RTD/PTC temperature (49) 65-265 Vac, 30 VA; 80-275 Vdc, 25 W 800 ms at 120 vac 100 ms minimum 400 mA maximum True RMS and DFT, Peak 32 samples/cycle and positive and negative sequence of fundamental 50, 60 Hz Three Form C CSA certified, CE, C-Tick (Australian), UL Recognized TIA-232 (standard); TIA-485, DeviceNetTM, Ethernet (optional) 4-20 mA, programmable Standard feature 10 years Panel (standard) Surface (with MPU-32-SMK converter kit) (Current Input Module) DIN, Surface 70 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Feeder Protection-Advanced FPS SERIES Feeder Protection System Description The FPS Feeder Protection System monitors voltage and current to provide a comprehensive package of 17 protective functions. The FPS is a modular system with integrated protection, breaker control, metering, and data-logging functions. 1 1 Operator Interface (FPS-OPI) Large, bright, 4 x 20 vacuum-fluorescent display Display metered values Access set points Powered by Control Unit Panel mount or attach directly to Control Unit Remote mounting (1.2 km or 4000 ft maximum loop length) 1/2 DIN size Hazardous-location certified g g g g g g g 2 Control Unit (FPS-CTU) Current inputs--5-A or 1-A secondary phase current transformers Voltage inputs--up to 600 V without PTs Earth-leakage input--5-A or 1-A secondary or sensitive transformer 8 digital inputs, 5 relay outputs, 1 analog input and output 24-Vdc supply for OPI and RTD modules, and for digital inputs IRIG-B time-code input 1/2 DIN size, surface mount RS-485 network communications (Standard) DeviceNetTM, Profibus(R), or Ethernet communications available g 2 g g g Simplified Circuit Diagram g g A B PHASE CT GF CT g PHASE CT g g PHASE CT Accessories FPS-CTU L1 L2 (Control Unit) A Phase Current Transformers Phase CTs are required to detect phase currents. B Ground-Fault Current Transformer Zero-sequence current transformer detects ground-fault current. Available with 5-A and 30-A primary ratings for low-level pickup. C MPS-RTD Temperature Input Module Optional module provides 8 inputs to connect Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, and Cu10 RTDs. 2 1 FPS-OPI (Operator Interface) Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER COMMUNICATIONS FPS-CTU-01-00 RS-485 FPS-CTU-02-00 RS-485 & DeviceNetTM FPS-CTU-03-00 RS-485 & Profibus FPS-CTU-04-00 RS-485 & Ethernet ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT FPS-OPI-01-00 Recommended SE-IP65CVR-M Optional Phase CTs Required Ground-Fault CT Recommended MPS-RTD-01-00 Optional (R) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls SE-IP65CVR-M Cover Optional gasketed, transparent cover for limited access and IP65 protection for an Operator Interface Module. 71 www.littelfuse.com/fps FEEDER PROTECTION g 4 Protection Relays Feeder Protection-Advanced FPS SERIES Feeder Protection System Features & Benefits FEATURES RFEEDER PROTECTION 4 IEEE # BENEFITS 49, 51 50, 51 50, 51 Overload Inverse-time overcurrent Definite-time overcurrent Current unbalance/ Phase loss/Phase reverse Ground fault RTD temperature Overvoltage Undervoltage Voltage unbalance Two setting groups Breaker control Metering Data logging Communications Conformal coating Long-time overcurrent provides thermal protection for feeder or load Coordination using IEEE and IEC Curves Instantaneous overcurrent to detect catastrophic failure 46 Detects an open or high-impedance phase 50G/N, 51G/N 38, 49 59 27 47 Inverse and definite time. Early insulation-failure detection. Optional protection (MPS-RTD module) for load-temperature monitoring Limits stress to insulation Detects a damaging brown-out condition Detects unhealthy supply voltage Minimizes Arc-Flash hazards during maintenance Allows local and remote operation; reduces component count Displays the measured and calculated parameters On-board 64-event recorder helps with system diagnosis Remotely view measured values, event records, & reset trips Internal circuits are conformally coated to protect against corrosion and moisture Wiring Diagram Specifications Unbalance (current) (46) Protective Functions Overload (49, 51) (IEEE Device Numbers) Phase reverse (current) (46) Phase loss (voltage) (47) Overfrequency (81) Overvoltage (59) Overcurrent (50, 51) Phase loss (current) (46) Underfrequency (81) Undervoltage (27) Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Phase reverse (voltage) (47) Unbalance (voltage) (47) Power factor (55) RTD temperature (38, 49) Input Voltage 65-265 Vac, 25 VA; 80-275 Vdc, 25 W Power-Up Time 800 ms at 120 Vac Ride-Through Time 100 ms minimum 24-Vdc Source 100 mA maximum AC Measurements True RMS and DFT, Peak, 16 samples/cycle, and positive and negative sequence of fundamental Frequency 50 or 60 Hz Inputs Phase current, Earth-leakage current, Phase voltage, 7 digital, 1 analog Output Contacts 5 contacts -- See Product Manual Approvals CSA certified, C-Tick (Australian) Communications Allen-Bradley (R) DFI and Modbus(R) RTU (Standard); DeviceNetTM, Profibus(R), Ethernet (Optional) Conformal Coating Standard feature Warranty 10 years Mounting: Control Unit Surface Operator Interface Panel, Control-Unit mounted OPERATOR INTERFACE PHASE CURRENT TRANFORMERS FPS-OPI GROUND-FAULT CURRENT TRANSFORMER (required) (recommended) (recommended) A 1 B RTD MODULE MPS-RTD PHASE VOLTAGES 33 22 30 29 27 26 23 22 20 ...... (optional) C 17 60 56 53 + I/0 MODULE 52 4-20 mA ANALOG INPUT CONTROL UNIT FPS-CTU RELAY OUTPUTS 1 2 5 ...... 16 RS-485 35 ...... 37 ANALOG OUTPUT 4-20 mA + 39 40 DIGITAL INPUTS 43 ...... 51 2 CONTROL POWER www.littelfuse.com/fps 72 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays ARC-FLASH PROTECTION Rapidly detects developing Arc-Flash incidents and sends a trip signal to interrupt power before significant damage occurs. Arc Detection Unit ........................................... 74 PGR-8800 Series Arc-Flash Relay ................................................ 75 AF0500 Series Arc-Flash Relay ................................................ 77 AF0100 Series Arc-Flash Relay ................................................ 79 A0220 Series Light Sensor ..................................................... 80 PGA-1100 Diode Logic....................................................... 81 For More Information... and to download our White Paper on Key Considerations for Selecting an Arc-Flash Relay or our Arc-Flash Energy Reduction Workbook, visit Littelfuse.com/ArcFlash (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 73 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 5 ARC-FLASH PROTECTION D0920 Protection Relays Arc-Flash Monitoring D0920 ARC DETECTION UNIT Arc Detection Unit Description The D0920 Arc-Flash relay provides a simple and cost effective solution for Arc-Flash monitoring. Two light sensors can be connected directly to one relay. Light Sensors react to light and have a 180 detection zone. Sensors are supplied with 10 or 15 m of cable. 1-2 sensors are recommended per cubicle or drawer. Installation Diagram Features & Benefits ARC-FLASH PROTECTION 5 FEATURES Compact module Fits into wide range of Arc-Flash applications BENEFITS Trip time <1 ms Limits Arc-Flash damage and risk of injury Two optical sensor cable lengths Point sensors with 10 or 15 m of cable Inputs for two sensors Single Arc-Flash relay can monitor 2 sensors Adjustable light sensitivity Allows operation in bright environments and maximum sensitivity in dark environments Service mode Allows relay and sensor test without tripping system Accessories Install sensors in line of sight to possible arc faults. A Ordering Information A0220 Light Sensors Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as small as 3 kA within a 2-m half-sphere. Available with 10 or 15 m cable. PGA-1100/D1100 Diode Logic Unit ORDERING NUMBER DESCRIPTION D0920.0060 230 V AC +15, -30%, remains powered on after trip, slide switch instead of key switch, electronic reset button instead of mechanical reset button, CCC approved For tripping one circuit breaker with multiple D0920 Relays Specifications ACCESSORIES A0033.0010 Detector cable 2 x 0.25 mm2 w/screen. 100 m A0220.0010 Arc Detector V-Type; 10 m cable A0220.0020 Arc Detector V-Type; 15 m cable PGA-1100/D1100 Diode Logic Unit www.littelfuse.com/d0920 REQUIREMENT Supply Voltage Thyristor Output Optional Sensitivity Number of Sensors Response Time Power Consumption Ambient Temperature Dimensions Certification Required: At least one sensor per monitored zone Optional 74 230 V AC +15,-30% 325 V DC from charged capacitor, nominal energy 3.5 J Adjustable 2 - 24 klux Max. 2 Less than 1 ms 3.5 VA -25C to 70C H 90 mm (3.5"); W 105 mm (4.1"); D 61 mm (2.4") CE, CCC (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Arc-Flash Monitoring PGR-8800 SERIES (D1000) Arc-Flash Relay Description The PGR-8800 Series is a microprocessor-based relay that limits arc-fault damage by detecting the light from an arc flash and rapidly tripping. Phase-current-transformer inputs are provided for current-constrained arc-flash protection and, when so equipped, a programmable definite-time overcurrent function can be enabled. An optical sensor on the PGR-8800 and adjustable trip level reduce the chance of nuisance tripping by setting a threshold for ambient light. Sensors, inputs, and connections are monitored to ensure fail-safe operation. A secondary solid-state trip circuit provides a redundant trip path. A USB port is used for configuration and access to event logs and graphs. Simplified Circuit Diagram Optical Sensors 5-A-SECONDARY PHASE CT's (Recommended) B C Sensor Placement PGA-LS10 (Point Sensor) PGR-8800 (Arc-Flash Protection Relay) L1 L2 The PGR-8800 Arc-Flash Relay and sensors are easily installed in retrofit projects and new switchgear with little or no re-configuration. Even elaborate systems with multiple power sources take minutes to configure using the relay's built-in USB interface software. A PGA-LS20/ B PGA-LS30 (Fiber-Optic Sensor) Generally, it is recommended to mount 1 or 2 sensors per cubicle to cover all horizontal and vertical bus bars, breaker compartments, drawers, and anywhere that there is potential for an arc-fault. Threading a fiber-optic sensor through the cabinets and in areas where point-sensor coverage is uncertain results in complete coverage and an added level of redundancy. Even if policy is to only work on de-energized systems, all maintenance areas should be monitored to prevent potential damage and additional cost. At least one sensor should have visibility of an arc fault if a person blocks the other sensor(s). Trip 24 Vdc Battery Backup (Optional) PGA-1100 C (Diode Logic Unit) (Optional) For detailed wiring diagram, see adjacent page. Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER DESCRIPTION PGR-8800-00 (UL, CE, CSA, RCM) Arc-Flash Relay PGR-8800-00-CC (UL, CE, CSA, RCM) Arc-Flash Relay, Conformally Coated ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT PGA-LS10 Required* PGA-LS20, PGA-LS30 Required* PGA-1100 Optional Current Transformer Recommended Local Circuit Br eaker DD D *At least one sensor is required. However, the exact number of sensors for proper coverage depends on the application. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 75 www.littelfuse.com/pgr-8800 5 ARC-FLASH PROTECTION The PGR-8800 accepts both PGA-LS10 and PGA-LS20/ PGA-LS30 optical sensors, designed to collect light over a wide angle and with high sensitivity. For fast fault location, front-panel and sensor LED's indicate sensor health and which sensor detected an arc fault. D A Protection Relays Arc-Flash Monitoring PGR-8800 SERIES (D1000) Features & Benefits BENEFITS Limits arc-flash damage and risk of injury Single module can monitor 6 sensors. Up to 4 PGR-8800 units can be linked into one system Continuous monitoring of optical sensors and inputs ensures protection Solid-state backup arc-detection circuit adds a second layer of safety Allows for operation in bright environments and maximum sensitivity in dark environments 18 LEDs provide at-a glance status for module and I/O state Phase-CT inputs provide overcurrent protection and prevent nuisance trips Point and fiber-optic sensors provide wide detection area with sensor health trip indication Two each: remote trip, inhibit, and reset inputs Allows for system test without tripping Solid-state 24-300 Vdc/24-300 Vac IGBT Form C and status outputs Data logging and configuration software uses a USB interface with no drivers or software installation Can be used in single-sensor systems, as a seventh sensor, and for calibration 100-240 Vac, 14-48 Vdc, or 110-250 Vdc supply accepted. Ability to charge and run off an external, user-supplied 24 Vdc battery On-board event recorder helps with system diagnostics Remotely view measured values, event records & reset trips Ability to trip upstream device if the local breaker fails to clear the fault Wiring Diagram ARC-FLASH RELAY PGR-8800 ARC-FLASH RELAY PGR-8800 (optional) ARC-FLASH RELAY PGR-8800 (optional) DIODE LOGIC UNIT PGA-1100 (optional) (optional) 37 38 39 ............. 45 - 31 ..................... 36 + ARC-FLASH PROTECTION 5 FEATURES Arc-Flash trip time <1 ms Multiple sensors (up to 24) Fail-safe system Redundant trip circuit Adjustable light sensitivity LED indication (on unit and each sensor) Current detection Optical detection Digital inputs (6) Service mode Trip coil contact Indication contacts USB interface Built-in sensor Universal power supply/Battery backup Data logging Modbus Upstream Tripping LINK CONTROL POWER and BATTERY 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 STATUS 53 54 55 56 STATUS 57 59 60 STATUS DIGITAL INPUTS ONLINE SERVICE TRIPPED TRIP COIL ARC-FLASH RELAY PGR-8800 SERIES 1 ........ 4 5 ........ 8 9 ........ 12 13 16 ........ 17 20 ........ 21 24 ........ PGA-LS10 PGA-LS20 PGA-LS10 PGA-LS20 PGA-LS10 PGA-LS20 PGA-LS10 PGA-LS20 PGA-LS10 PGA-LS20 PGA-LS10 PGA-LS20 PGA-LS30 PGA-LS30 PGA-LS30 PGA-LS30 PGA-LS30 PGA-LS30 OPTICAL SENSOR OPTICAL SENSOR OPTICAL SENSOR OPTICAL SENSOR OPTICAL SENSOR OPTICAL SENSOR or or or or or or B C D 26 27 28 PHASE CT PHASE CT (recommended) (recommended) 29 30 PHASE CT (recommended) Specifications Accessories A 25 IEEE Device Numbers Input Voltage Dimensions Optical Trip Settings Current Trip Setting (A) Indication Contact Mode Trip Coil Voltage(1) Trip Coil Contact Mode Redundant Trip Circuit Input Monitoring USB Interface Trip, Reset, Service Buttons Expandable System Warranty Mounting Approvals PGA-LS10 Point Sensor Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as small as 3 kA within a 2-m half-sphere. Sensor health and trip indication. Dimensions: See PGR-8800 Manual PGA-LS20/PGA-LS30 Fiber-Optic Sensor 360 light sensor for tricky installations with many shadows or to run along bus bars. Sensor health and trip indication. Dimensions: See PGR-8800 Manual PGA-1100 Diode Logic Unit This module allows multiple PGR-8800 relays to trip the same breaker, for example an upstream or a tie-breaker. Dimensions: H 80mm (3.15"); W 20mm (0.79"); D 70mm (2.76") Current Transformers Eliminate nuisance arc-flash trips and use for overcurrent protection. Overcurrent (50), Arc Flash (AFD) 100-240 Vac, 14-48 Vdc, and 110-250 Vdc H 130 mm (5.1"); W 200 mm (7.9"); D 54 mm (2.1") 9-25 klux, 800 s-20 s Programmable Fail-safe 24-300 Vdc, 24-300 Vac Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe Standard feature Standard feature Standard feature Standard feature Link up to 4 PGR-8800 units 5 years Surface, DIN (with D0050 adapter clips) UL, CE, CSA, RCM, FCC, DNV type approval, ABS type approval NOTE (1) - Contact Littelfuse for trip coil voltages higher than 300 Vdc/Vac. Littelfuse reserves the right to make product changes, without notice. Material in this document is as accurate as known at the time of publication. Visit Littelfuse.com for the most up-to-date information. www.littelfuse.com/pgr-8800 76 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Arc-Flash Monitoring AF0500 SERIES Arc-Flash Relay Description The AF0500 is a microprocessor-based arc-flash relay that limits arc-fault damage by detecting the light from an arc flash and rapidly tripping the feeder breaker. The unit is well suited for switchgear, transformer and power converter applications. Sensors, inputs, and connections are health monitored to ensure fail-safe operation. A secondary solid-state trip circuit provides a redundant trip path. A USB port is used for configuration and access to event logs. AF0500 includes an Ethernet interface and supports Modbus(R) TCP communication. Zone tripping, upstream breaker tripping and tie breaker tripping applications can be easily configured. A number of control inputs allows interconnection of multiple AF0500 units to form a system. Features & Benefits BENEFITS Optical Sensors 4 arc sensor inputs Supports both point and fiber sensors Arc-Flash trip time <1ms Limits arc-flash damage and risk of injury 2 IGBT high speed trip outputs Supports applications such as upstream breaker tripping or tie breaker tripping The AF0500 accepts both PGA-LS10 point sensors and PGA-LS20/PGA-LS30 fiber-optical sensors. Thus any combination of fiber or point sensors is supported. Universal Power Supply 100-240 Vac, 24-48 Vdc, or 110-250 Vdc supply Fail-safe system Continuous monitoring of optical sensors and inputs ensures protection LED indication (on unit and each sensor) Trip and sensor status indicated both on relay and sensors Discrete wire networking Multiple AF0500 units can be interconnected to form a system USB interface Data logging and configuration software uses a USB interface with no drivers or software installation Data logging On-board event recorder for system diagnostics (2048 log lines) Ethernet interface Modbus(R) TCP communication For fast fault location, front-panel and sensor LEDs indicate sensor health and which sensor detected an arc fault. Sensor Placement The AF0500 Arc-Flash Relay and sensors are easily installed in retrofit projects and new switchgear with little or no re-configuration. Simple applications work straight out of the box with no need of PC configuration. More complex systems with multiple power sources are configured using the relay's built-in USB interface software. Generally, it is recommended to mount 1 or 2 sensors per cubicle to cover all horizontal and vertical bus bars, breaker compartments, drawers, and anywhere that there is a risk for an arc fault. Threading a fiber-optic sensor through the cabinets and in areas where point-sensor coverage is uncertain results in complete coverage and an added level of redundancy. Even if policy is to only work on de-energized systems, all maintenance areas should be monitored to prevent potential damage and additional cost. Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER DESCRIPTION AF0500-00 Arc-Flash Relay AF0500-00-CC Arc-Flash Relay, Conformally Coated ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT PGA-LS10 Required* PGA-LS20, PGA-LS30 Required* PGA-1100 Optional (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Arc Flash Fiber-Optic Sensor Point Sensors 77 www.littelfuse.com/af0500 ARC-FLASH PROTECTION FEATURES 5 Protection Relays Arc-Flash Monitoring AF0500 SERIES Applications Tie Breaker Tripping In case of an arc in one section of the switchboard, the AF0500 can trip both the incoming feeder and the tie breaker simultaneously. Thus the affected part of the switchboard is isolated from the non-affected part. Zone Tripping AF0500 can trip 2 separate zones. Sensors can be assigned to the zones individually through PC configuration. Zone 1 Zone 2 Sensor Sensor Incoming Feeder Incoming Feeder Bus Tie Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Upstream Breaker Tripping In case of failure of the local circuit breaker to open, another trip command is sent after a short delay to an upstream breaker to clear the fault. Incoming Feeder Upstream Breaker Accessories PGA-LS10 Point Sensor Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as small as 3 kA within a 2-m half-sphere. Includes Sensor health and trip indication. Local Breaker PGA-1100 Diode Logic Unit This module allows multiple arc-flash relays to trip a common breaker, for example a tie-breaker. Sensor Sensor Sensor PGA-LS20/PGA-LS30 Fiber-Optic Sensor 360 light sensor to run along bus bars. Sensor health and trip indication. Sensor ARC-FLASH PROTECTION 5 Sensor Specifications Power Supply Universal Low Voltage Sensor Inputs Trip Outputs UL Rating Communication 100 to 240 Vac (+10%, -15%) 50/60 Hz, 20 VA, 110 to 250 Vdc (+10%, -20%) 8 W 24 to 48 Vdc (+10%, -20%), 4 W 4 light sensor inputs for PGA-LS10, PGA-LS20 and PGA-LS30 sensors 2 IGBT switches 120/240 Vac, 1800 VA, 0.75 A maximum continuous, 125/250 Vdc, 138 VA, 0.75 A maximum continuous Dimensions Shipping Weight Operating Temp. Approvals Warranty Mounting Ethernet, 2 ports with internal Ethernet switch, Modbus(R) TCP H 130 mm (5.1"); W 200 mm (7.9"); D 54 mm (2.1") 0.9 kg (2 lb) -40C to +70C (-40F to 158F) UL Listed (UL508), CE, RCM, FCC, CSA 5 years Surface, DIN (with optional D0050 adapter clips) Supplemental Rating Make/Carry 30 A for 0.2s Voltage Rating 24 to 300 Vac, 24 to 300 Vdc Current Rating 20 A for 2 s, 10 A for 5 s www.littelfuse.com/af0500 78 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Arc-Flash Monitoring AF0100 SERIES Arc-Flash Relay Description The AF0100 Series arc-flash relay is a cost-effective solution that reduces arc-fault damage by detecting the light from an arc flash and rapidly tripping. Two remote light sensors can be connected to one relay and multiple AF0100 and/or AF0500 relays can be connected to monitor additional sensors, providing complete coverage for a wide range of applications. The compact, DIN-rail or surface-mountable body makes this an ideal solution for equipment manufacturers. Two isolated Form-C contacts are provided for applications with multiple devices that must be tripped. This is especially useful for generator applications where the generator and breaker need to be tripped in case of an arc flash. Simplified Circuit Diagram Digital I/O Connection to other AF0100 or AF0500 24-48 Vdc Supply Front-panel and sensor LEDs indicate sensor health and fault location. PGA-LS10 (Point Sensor) + - A Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Compact Fits into a wide range of arc-flash applications Two optical sensor types Point sensors or fiber-optic sensors can be used in any combination for coverage flexibility 100-240 Vac/Vdc Supply Dual sensor inputs One relay can monitor two arc-flash sensors Adjustable light sensitivity Allows for operation in bright environments and maximum sensitivity in dark environments For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 510, Figure 11. Discrete wire networking Multiple AF0100 or AF0500 units can be interconnected to form a system Fail-safe system Continuous monitoring of optical sensors and inputs ensures protection USB interface Configuration software is easy to use with no drivers or software installation Unit health Ensures continuous protection with self diagnostic and remote unit-healthy indication LED Indication Trip and sensor status indication both on relay and sensors AF0100 or L1 L2 PGA-LS20/ B PGA-LS30 (Fiber-Optic Sensor) (Arc-Flash Protection Relay) Unit Healthy Trip 1 Trip 2 Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER DESCRIPTION AF0100-00 Arc-Flash Relay, Universal Supply AF0100-10 Arc-Flash Relay, 24-48 Vdc Specifications Input Voltage AF0100-00 AF0100-10 Dimensions Trip, Error Relays Sensitivity Mounting Operating Temperature Shipping Weight Certifications Warranty Accessories 100-240 Vac/Vdc, 24-48 Vdc 24-48 Vdc H 90 mm (3.5"); W 128 mm (5.0"); D 60 mm (2.4") Form C, 250 Vac/30 Vdc, 6 A resistive 10-25 klux programmable Surface, DIN rail -40C to +70C (-40F to 158F) 1.0 kg (2.2 lb) Contact factory 2 years (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 79 A PGA-LS10 Point Sensor Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as small as 3 kA within a 2-m half-sphere. Includes sensor health and trip indication. B PGA-LS20/PGA-LS30 Fiber-Optic Sensor 360 light sensor to run along bus bars. Includes sensor health and trip indication. www.littelfuse.com/af0100 5 ARC-FLASH PROTECTION The AF0100 accepts PGA-LS10 point sensors and PGA-LS20/ PGA-LS30 fiber-optic sensors in any combination. Sensor health is continuously monitored to ensure fail-safe operation. A solid-state redundant trip circuit provides an internal fail-safe mechanism and fast arc-flash response during power up. Protection Relays Arc Detectors A0220 SERIES Arc Detecting Point Sensor Description The A0220 Arc Detector is a photo electric sensor. It has a sensitive area of 180. Sensor signal is a mA current signal of 0.5 mA/klux. The sensor includes 10 m of shielded two-wire electrical cable which can easily be shortened or extended to a maximum of 50 m. Use Belden 85240 or equivalent cable (2 x 0.50 mm2). The sensor is compatible with the D0920, D1000 and PGR-8800 Littelfuse Arc Flash Relays. A0220 Sensor Installation ARC-FLASH PROTECTION 5 The sensors include an adhesivebacked drill template for easy surface or panel-mount installation. All dimensions are shown in millimetres. Detection range for a 3kA fault 2m A0220 Drill guide Affix the drill template where the sensor is to be mounted. Either M4 or M5 screws or pop rivets (4 mm or 5 mm) can be used. 2m 2m 4 x o3.5 Mounting screws are M4 for the top holes. This template matches the mounting dimensions for the A1000 or PGA-LS10 sensor. Ordering Information The bottom mounting holes are either for 5mm self-drilling screws (3.5mm drill) or for M5 (4.2 mm drill). This template matches the mounting dimensions for the A0200 and A0300 sensors. ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER A0220.0010 Arc Detector type V, 10 m A0220.0020 Arc Detector type V, 15 m A0220.0030 Arc Detector type V, 10 m, CCC approved A0220.0040 Arc Detector type V, 15 m, CCC approved o9 For placement of sensors please refer to the relay manual. Specifications Sensitivity Range for D0920 Range for PGR-8800 Ambient temperature Degree of protection Connection to D0920 relay SENSOR WIRE TERMINAL Red 1 Green 2 Screen 3 0.5 mA/ klux 2 klux to 30 klux 10 klux to 30 klux -25C to +70C IP65 Type Selection Table: A0220 Arc Detector includes 10m cable Connection to PGR-8800 relay SENSOR WIRE SENSOR 1 TERMINAL SENSOR 2 TERMINAL SENSOR 3 TERMINAL SENSOR 4 TERMINAL SENSOR 5 TERMINAL SENSOR 6 TERMINAL Green 4 8 12 16 20 24 Red 3 7 11 15 19 23 Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis Screen www.littelfuse.com/a0220 80 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Accessory for Arc-Flash Relays PGA-1100 (D1100) Diode Logic Description The PGA-1100 Diode Logic module is an optional accessory for the Littelfuse Arc-Flash Relays. It is used in installations with more than one breaker and more than one Arc-Flash Relay. Purpose of the unit is to separate the trip paths, so the breakers can be tripped independently from each other. Typical applications are a switchboards with two incoming feeders and one tie breaker or switchboards with several protected zones and tripping of a common upstream circuit breaker. Simplified Circuit Diagram 1 2 3 4 For more application information please refer to the arc-flash relay manuals. 8 5 6 Specifications Diodes 1000V reverse voltage, 3A continuous, 25A for 1 second Certification CE Dimensions H 70 mm (2.76"); W 20 mm (0.79"); D 80 mm (3.15") 7 Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER DESCRIPTION PGA-1100.0010 Diode logic unit (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 81 www.littelfuse.com/pga1100 5 ARC-FLASH PROTECTION The unit has three input diodes to handle the outputs of three Arc-Flash relays and three output diodes to handle the trip coils of three circuit breakers. If more than three relays/ circuit breakers are needed, more units can be added by connecting terminal 8 of one box to terminal 4 of the next one, thus increasing the number of inputs and outputs with multiples of three. Protection Relays www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 82 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS Simple controls perform a specific function such as changing lamp intensity; vary the speed of a motor; or manage temperature of a heater. PHS Series Phase Control................................................................. 84 SIR Series Solid-State Relay - Isolated .......................................... 86 SLR Series Solid-State Relay - Non-Isolated ................................. 88 TCR9C Temperature Controller ................................................. 90 6 SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 83 Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls PHS SERIES Phase Control Description The PHS Series is an ideal method of changing lamp intensity, varying the speed of a fan/motor, or controlling the temperature of a heater. The effective output voltage is adjusted with an accessory external potentiometer suitable for line voltage applications. Operation Upon application of input voltage, effective output voltage can be varied by changing the external resistance value. As the external resistance increases, the effective output voltage decreases. The inverse is also true. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS 6 L1 N/L2 FEATURES BENEFITS External adjustment - 230VAC rated potentiometer Allows control of heavy loads directly, solid state design will provide long life Up to 20A steady state - 200A inrush Allows control of heavy loads directly, solid state design will provide long life Single hole surface mounting Provides quick and easy installation Accessories P1004-174 (100k 1W), P1004-175 (200k 2W) Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. Triac Output Device V = Voltage L = Load RT = External Adjustment P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE RATING PHS120A10 120VAC 10A PHS120A20 120VAC 20A PHS120A6 120VAC 6A PHS230A10 230VAC 10A PHS230A20 230VAC 20A PHS230A6 230VAC 6A If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/phs 84 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls PHS SERIES Specifications Output Type Rating Minimum Load Current Voltage Drop Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Protection Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting * Dimensions External Adjustment Potentiometer 120VAC 230VAC Variable voltage phase angle control Steady State (at 100% On) Inrush* 1A 10A 6A 60A 10A 100A 20A 200A 100mA 2.0V at rated current 120 or 230VAC 20% 50/60Hz 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100M 6 Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 38.4 mm (1.51") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Typical Output Waveform -20 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 1A: 2.4 oz (68 g) 6, 10, & 20A: 3.9 oz (111 g) 100K rated at 1W 200K rated at 2W Must have insulation resistance suitable for line voltage applications. *Units rated 6A must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 85 www.littelfuse.com/phs Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls SIR SERIES Solid-State Relay - Isolated Description SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS 6 The SIR Series is designed for industrial applications requiring rugged reliable operation. Provides an optically isolated, high capacity, solid-state output, with power switching capability up to 20A steady state, 200A inrush. Zero voltage switching SIR2 extends the life of an incandescent lamp up to 10 times. Random switching SIR1 is ideal for inductive loads. When fully insulated female terminals are used on the connection wires, the system meets the requirements for touch-proof connections. Operation The solid-state output is located between terminals 1 and 3, and is normally open or normally closed without control voltage applied to terminals 4 and 5. When control voltage is applied to terminals 4 and 5, the solid-state output opens or closes respectively. Reset: Removing control voltage resets the output. The unit is also reset if output voltage is removed. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage CV = Control Voltage L = Load Load may be connected to terminal 3 or 1. Note: Normally open output is shown. Normally closed output is also available. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. FEATURES BENEFITS Compact design measures 2 in. (50.8mm) square Perfect for OEM applications where space is limited Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration and humidity Up to 20A, 200A inrush output rating Provides direct control of heavy inductive, incandescent or resistive loads Switching output is optically isolated from the control input Provides the ability to interface between 2 different electrical circuits SIR1 models provide random switching Designed for use with resistive and incandescent loads, extending lamp life up to 10 times SIR2 models provide zero voltage switching Perfect for resistive and incandescent loads Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Ordering Information MODEL SWITCHING CONTROL VOLTAGE RATING OUTPUT FORM SIR1A1A4 Random 9 to 30VAC or DC 3A Normally open OUTPUT VOLTAGE 120VAC SIR1A20A4 Random 9 to 30VAC or DC 20A Normally open 120VAC SIR1B6B4 Random 90 to 150VAC or DC 6A Normally closed 120VAC SIR1C20B6 Random 190 to 290VAC or DC 20A Normally closed 230VAC SIR2A20A4 Zero voltage 9 to 30VAC or DC 20A Normally open 120VAC SIR2B20A4 Zero voltage 90 to 150VAC or DC 20A Normally open 120VAC SIR2B20B4 Zero voltage 90 to 150VAC or DC 20A Normally closed 120VAC If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/sir 86 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls SIR SERIES Accessories Specifications P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Output Type Form Voltage Tolerance Ratings P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Function Diagram V = Voltage CV = Control Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact R = Reset = Undefined Time *Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 87 www.littelfuse.com/sir 6 SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS Optical isolation, totally solid state SPST, NO or NC 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% Steady State Inrush* Output Device 3A 30A Triac 6A 60A Triac 10A 100A Triac 20A 200A Triac Minimum Load Current 50mA Voltage Drop 2.0V at rated current Leakage Current (Open State) 6mA Input Type Optical isolation LED/photo transistor Control Voltage 9 to 290VAC/DC in 3 ranges Power Consumption 0.5W Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance 100 M Mechanical Mounting* Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 38.4 mm (1.51") Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40 to 60C / -55 to 85C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight 3.9 oz (111 g) Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls SLR SERIES Solid-State Relay - Non-Isolated Description The SLR Series has no isolation between the control switch input and the solid-state output. Select the SLR for applications where the control switch is the same voltage source as the load. Provides the noiseless, reliability and long life of a solid-state relay, without the cost of isolation circuitry. The SLR Series offers random switching and is normally used for inductive loads. When fully insulated female terminals are used on the connection wires, the system meets the requirements for touch-proof connections. Operation The solid-state output is located between terminals 1 and 2 and can be ordered as either normally open or normally closed, when voltage is applied and S1 is open. When S1 is closed, the solid-state output between terminals 1 and 2 closes (or opens). If S1 is opened, the solid-state output will open (or close). Reset: Opening S1 resets the output to its original state. Reset is also accomplished by removing input voltage. SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS 6 Wiring Diagram L1 Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load Compact design measures 2 in. (50.8mm) square Perfect for OEM applications where space is limited Note: Normally open output is shown. Normally closed output is also available. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Up to 20A steady, 200A inrush output rating Provides direct control of heavy inductive, resistive, or incandescent loads Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications N/L2 Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. Ordering Information MODEL SWITCHING INPUT VOLTAGE OUTPUT RATING OUTPUT FORM SLR1420A Random 120VAC 20A Normally open SLR1610A Random 230VAC 10A Normally open P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/slr 88 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls SLR SERIES Specifications Output (Contact) Type Form Voltage Tolerance Ratings Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Non-isolated solid state SPST, NO or NC 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% Steady State Inrush* 1A 10A 6A 10A 20A 50mA 60A 100A 200A V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact R = Reset = Undefined Time Output Device SCR & Bridge Rectifier Triac Triac Triac 2.0V - 6, 10, & 20A units; 2.5V - 1A units 5mA Same as the output voltage 0.5W 6 Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100M SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS Minimum Load Current Voltage Drop (at Rated Current) Leakage Current (Open State) Initiate Switch Voltage Power Consumption Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting* Dimensions Function Diagram Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 38.4 mm (1.51") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -20 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 1A units: 2.4 oz (68 g); 6, 10, 20A units: 3.9 oz (111 g) *Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 89 www.littelfuse.com/slr Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls TCR9C Temperature Controller Description The TCR9C of solid-state temperature control is a low cost modular approach to accurate control of temperature. The high power output is available in 20 amperes and provides setpoint temperature control. The efficient mounting surface allows for utilization of equipment as the heat sink. Designed for use with resistive loads. Operation Setpoint Control: TCR9C is a single setpoint temperature controller. When the thermistor resistance is high (above the setpoint), the solid-state output is ON. When the thermistor resistance decreases (temperature increases) to setpoint or below, the output turns OFF. It must be recognized that temperature differential (under and overshoot) is largely due to the system as a whole. The mass of the system, size of the heaters and sensor all play an important part. Single setpoint control is best when there is little or no lag time between heater and sensor, and when the heater is not oversized. SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS 6 Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram gJ NTC thermistor sensing for low cost setpoint control gJ Solid-state output to control resistive heaters gJ External adjustment of the setpoint gJ Small package, encapsulated, single-screw mounting gJ Metal mounting surface utilizes equipment as heat sink Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. V = Voltage L = Load Caution: NTC Thermistor must be electrically insulated, 1500 volts RMS minimum. Specifications RT Set Point Adjust 5 K Control Type NTC Thermistor Sensor Type Caution: NTCdrawing Thermistor must page be 512, Figure 19. For dimensional see: Appendix, electrically insulated, 1500 volts RMS minimum. Adjustment Accuracy Setpoint vs. Ambient Temperature and Operating Voltage Reset Time Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency www.littelfuse.com/tcr9c 90 Single setpoint, negative temperature coefficient resistance sensing Thermistor, negative temperature coefficient (customer supplied) Electrically insulated for 1500V RMS min. Temperature setpoint selected by means of an external resistance 5% of the setpoint resistance Add the tolerance of the NTC thermistor and the drift of the adj. pot over temp. range 5% of setpoint resistance 150ms 120 - 240VAC 15% 50/60 Hz (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls TCR9C Minimum Load Current Voltage Drop Off State Leakage Current Protection Dielectric Breakdown Isolation Voltage Circuitry Mechanical Mounting Dimensions 2000 volts terminals to mounting surface 100m Encapsulated V = Voltage L = Load SP = Setpoint NTC = Negative Temperature Coefficient Thermistor Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0 .8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 38.4 mm (1.51") 0.25 in. (6.35mm) male quick connect terminals Adjustment vs. Thermistor Resistance 20.0 18.0 16.0 -40 to 60C / -40to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2 .7 oz (77 g) 14.0 12.0 10.0 8.0 6.0 4.0 2.0 0.0 * Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90C. Inrush: non-repetitive for 16ms. 6 Load ON Load OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 RT (kOhms) Note: If RT value exceeds 13kOhms, the Note: output If R T value 13kOhms, the output will willexceeds not energize. not energize. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 91 www.littelfuse.com/tcr9c SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Function Diagram Solid state Non-isolated, single pole, zero voltage switching Model Steady State Inrush* C 20A 200A* 100mA 2V at rated current 5mA @ 230VAC NTC (kOhms) Output Type Form Rating Protection Relays www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 92 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Prevent damage to motors caused by overloads, jams, phase loss or unbalance, heat from non-electric sources, heavy start-ups and excessive operational cycles. Dynamic thermal curves, as well as integrated protection, metering, and data-logging functions extend motor life and maximize process efficiency. PGR-6100 Series Motor Ground-Fault & Insulation Relay ...... 94 PGR-6101-120 Motor Ground-Fault & Insulation Relay ...... 95 MPU-32 Series Motor Protection Unit .................................. 96 MPS Series Motor Protection System ............................ 98 Motor Protection Relay Retrofit Kit ........... 100 MPS-469X Series Motor Protection Relay Retrofit Kit ........... 100 111-Insider-P / 231-Insider-P Single-Phase Pump Monitor ...................... 101 232-Insider Single-Phase Pump Monitor ...................... 104 111P / 233P / 233P-1.5 Series Single-Phase Pump Monitor ...................... 106 234-P Single-Phase Pump Monitor ..................... 108 235P Single-Phase Pump Monitor ...................... 110 MP8000 Series Bluetooth(R) Current & Voltage Monitor ..... 112 777 Series 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor .......... 114 777 / 77C Series Single-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor.. 118 777-KW/HP-P2 Series 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor .......... 120 777-AccuPower 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor .......... 123 77C-KW/HP Series Single-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor.. 125 SIO-RTD-02-00 Temperature Input Monitor ....................... 128 For More Information... and to download our Motor Protection Brochure or White Paper, click on Technical Resources at Littelfuse.com/MotorProtection (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 93 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION MPU-32-X69X Series Protection Relays Ground-Fault Protection - Grounded AC Systems PGR-6100 SERIES (GFR4000) Ground-Fault & Insulation Monitor Description The PGR-6100 combines the features of a ground-fault protection relay and insulation monitor into one unit. It protects against ground faults by monitoring insulation resistance when the motor is de-energized and by monitoring ground-fault current when the motor is energized. The PGR-6100 features two separate analog outputs for optional current and ohm meters, and two separate alarm relays. It operates on one- or threephase solidly grounded, resistance-grounded and ungrounded systems up to 6 kV. Features & Benefits FEATURES Adjustable GF pickup (10 mA - 3 A) Adjustable insulation pickup (250 k - 2 M) Adjustable time delay (50 ms - 1.0 s) Simplified Circuit Diagram CT A A Analog outputs (0 - 1 mA) CT-Loop monitoring B C MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 GROUNDED SUPPLY Output contacts Selectable contact operating mode B BENEFITS Trip setting provides a wide range of low-level protection and system coordination Customizable insulation resistance setpoints for maximum protection Adjustable trip delay for quick protection and system coordination Two Form C output contacts for ground fault and insulation-resistance fault Two analog outputs indicate insulation resistance and ground-fault current Alarms when CT is not connected Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating modes allows connection to shunt or undervoltage breaker coil Accessories PGR-6100 SERIES A SE-CS30 Series Ground-Fault CTs Required zero-sequence current transformer specifically designed for low level detection. Flux conditioner is included to prevent saturation. B PGH Family High Tension Couplers Required (for systems >1,300 V) PGH Family hightension coupler must be connected between the phase conductor and the PGR-6100. (Ground-Fault & Insulation Monitor) L1 L2 PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter PGA-0510 Analog Ohm Meter Optional panel-mounted meters display ground-fault current as a percentage of the set-point and insulation resistance. Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER PGR-6100-120 120 Vac PGR-6100-240 240 Vac (1) (1) ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT SE-CS30 Series Required PGH Family Required >1300 V PGA-0500 Optional PGA-0510 Optional Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Input Voltage Dimensions Response delay Contact Operating Mode Harmonic Filtering Test Button Reset Button CT-Loop Monitoring Output Contacts Analog Output Approvals Warranty Mounting Note (1) - PGR-6100-240 ordering option is not UL Listed. For optional conformal coating please consult factory. www.littelfuse.com/pgr-6100 94 Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N), Ground detector (64), Alarm Relay (74) See ordering information H 75 mm (3"); W 100 mm (3.9"); D 115 mm (4.5") < 50 ms Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe Standard feature Standard feature Standard feature Standard feature Two Form C 0-1 mA UL Listed (E183688) (1) 5 years DIN, Surface (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Ground-Fault Protection - Grounded AC Systems PGR-6101-120 (GFR4001) Ground-Fault & Insulation Monitor Description The PGR-6101-120 combines the features of a ground-fault protection relay and insulation monitor into one unit. It protects against ground faults by monitoring insulation resistance when the motor is de-energized and by monitoring ground-fault current when the motor is energized. The PGR-6101-120 features two separate analog outputs for optional current and ohm meters, and two separate alarm relays. It operates on one- or threephase solidly grounded, resistance grounded and ungrounded systems up to 6 kV. Features & Benefits FEATURES Adjustable GF pickup (30-200 mA) Adjustable insulation pickup (60-600 k ) Adjustable time delay (50-250 ms ) Simplified Circuit Diagram CT A A GROUNDED SUPPLY Output contacts B Analog outputs (0 - 1 mA) CT-Loop monitoring C Accessories PGR-6101 SERIES (Ground-Fault & Insulation Monitor) L1 A SE-CS30 Series Ground-Fault Transformers Required zero-sequence current transformer specifically designed for low level detection. Flux conditioner is included to prevent saturation. B PGH Family High Tension Couplers Required (for systems >1,300 V) PGH Family hightension coupler must be connected between the phase conductor and the PGR-6101-120. L2 PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter PGA-0510 Analog Ohm Meter Optional panel-mounted meters display ground-fault current as a percentage of the set-point and insulation resistance. Ordering Information ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT SE-CS30 Series Required PGH Family Required >1300 V PGA-0500 Optional PGA-0510 Optional Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Input Voltage Dimensions Response delay Contact Operating Mode Harmonic Filtering Test Button Reset Button CT-Loop Monitoring Output Contacts Analog Output Approvals Warranty Mounting For optional conformal coating please consult factory. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 95 Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N), Ground detector (64), Alarm Relay (74) 120 Vac H 75 mm (3"); W 100 mm (3.9"); D 115 mm (4.5") < 50 ms Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe Standard feature Standard feature Standard feature Standard feature Two Form C 0-1 mA UL Listed (E183688) 5 years DIN, Surface www.littelfuse.com/pgr-6101-120 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Selectable contact operating mode B BENEFITS Trip setting provides a wide range of low-level protection and system coordination Customizable insulation resistance setpoints for maximum protection Adjustable trip delay for quick protection and system coordination Two Form C output contacts for ground fault and insulation-resistance fault Two analog outputs indicate insulation resistance and ground-fault current Alarms when CT is not connected Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating modes allows connection to shunt or undervoltage breaker coil Protection Relays Motor Protection - Advanced MPU-32 SERIES (PGR-6200) Motor Protection Unit Description The MPU-32 Motor Protection Unit is used to provide currentand temperature-based protection, metering, and data logging for three-phase low-voltage medium-horsepower induction motors. This relay is ideal for retrofitting and upgrading obsolete or aging motor protection using existing CTs. See the PMA Family of Panel Mount Adapter Kits to replace common obsolete relays. 1 1 Motor Protection Unit Three ac-current inputs Earth-leakage-CT input Programmable digital input 24-Vdc source for digital input Programmable 4-20-mA analog output On-board temperature-sensor input, 100--Platinum RTD or PTC Three programmable output relays Local RS-232 communications, optional Network Communications PC-interface software (SE-Comm-RIS) 4 line x 20 character backlit LCD display Keypad for programming and display selection 4 LEDs; 1 user programmable gJ gJ g g g g g 2 g g 7 g Simplified Circuit Diagram MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION A PHASE CT GF CT g g B PHASE CT g M PHASE CT 2 RTD x 8 MPU-CIM (Current Input Module) MPU-32 (Motor Protection Relay) L1 The MPU-CIM Current Input Module is the interface between the MPU-32 relay and the 5-A-secondary, 1-A-secondary, and sensitive current transformers. The MPU-CIM is ordered separately from the MPU-32 and can be surface or DIN-rail mounted. Wire-clamping terminals are standard, but the MPU-CTI is available for those who require ring-tongue terminals. MPS-RTD (Temperature Input Module) 2 C 1 Current Input Module (MPU-CIM) L2 Accessories A Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER COMMUNICATION MPU-32-00-00 TIA-232 MPU-32-01-00 TIA-232 & TIA-485 MPU-32-02-00 TIA-232 & DeviceNetTM PHASE CT MPU-32-04-00 Phase Current Transformers Phase CTs are required to detect phase currents. For upgrade applications, existing CTs can be used. B Ground-Fault Current Transformer Optional zero-sequence current transformer detects ground-fault current. Available with 5-A and 30-A primary ratings for low-level pickup. C MPS-RTD Temperature Input Module Optional module provides 8 inputs to connect Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, and Cu10 RTDs. D MPS-DIF Differential Current Module Optional motor differential protection, compatible with core balance and summation current transformer connections. GF CT TIA-232 & EtherNet/IPTM & Modbus(R) TCP PHASE CT NOTE: One of the following is required: MPU-CIM-00-00 Current Input Module, or M MPU-CTI-RT-00 Current Input PHASE CTModule with ring-tonque terminals. ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT Phase CTs Required MPS-CTU MPS-RTD-01-00 L1 (Control Unit) L2 MPS-DIF-01-00 Optional Optional MPU-32-SMK Optional CA-945 Optional MPS-OPI (Operator Interface) MPU-16A-Y92A-96N www.littelfuse.com/mpu-32 RTD x 8 MPS-RTD (Temperature Input Module) Optional 96 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Motor Protection - Advanced MPU-32 SERIES (PGR-6200) Features & Benefits FEATURES IEEE # Overload 49, 51 BENEFITS Extends motor life and prevents insulation failures and fires Dynamic thermal model Provides protection through starting, running, and cooling cycles Communications Remotely view measured values and event records, reset trips, and access setpoints 50G/N, 51G/N Ground fault Current unbalance/ Phase loss/Phase reverse Prevents catastrophic failures and fires 46 Prevents overheating due to unbalanced phases 38, 49 46 50, 51 RTD temperature protection (MPS-RTD module) for high-ambient or loss-of-ventilation protection Detects unhealthy supply conditions Prevents catastrophic failures and fires; extends motor life Prevents motor damage by detecting mechanical jams or excessive loading Detects low level or no-load conditions Overtemperature (PTC) protection for high-ambient or loss-of-ventilation detection Limits the motor starts per hour to prevent overheating Optional MPS-DIF module for sensitive winding-fault protection Minimizes arc-flash hazards during maintenance View measured and calculated parameters with on-board display Separate current input module to reduce risk of open-CT hazard and for convenient installation Provides means for metering selectable parameters On-board 100-event recorder for data logging Internal circuits are conformally coated to protect against corrosion and moisture 37 49 66 87 Wiring Diagram PHASE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS Specifications Protective Functions Overload (49, 51) RTD temperature (38, 49) (IEEE Device Numbers) Phase reverse (current) (46) Unbalance (current) (46) Overcurrent (50, 51) Starts per hour (66) Jam Differential (87) Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Phase loss (current) (46) PTC overtemperature (49 Undercurrent (37) Input Voltage 65-265 Vac, 25 VA; 80-275 Vdc, 25 W Power-Up Time 800 ms at 120 Vac Ride-Through Time 100 ms minimum 24-Vdc Source 100 mA maximum AC Measurements True RMS and DFT, Peak, 16 samples/cycle, and positive and negative sequence of fundamental Frequency 50, 60 Hz or ASD Output Contacts Three Form C programmables Communications TIA-232 (standard); TIA-485, DeviceNetTM, Ethernet (optional) Analog Output 4-20 mA, programmable Conformally Coated Standard feature Warranty 10 years Mounting (Control Unit) Panel (standard) Surface (with MPU-32-SMK converter kit) (Current Input Module) DIN, Surface Approvals CSA certified, CE (European Union), UL Recognized, C-Tick (Australian) GROUND-FAULT CURRENT TRANSFORMER (required) (recommended) A MPS-RTD B INPUT MODULE (optional) C MPU-CIM MPS-DIF CURRENT INPUT MODULE DIFFERENTIAL MODULE 2 (optional) D TEMPERATURE INPUT 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 CIM 21 26 22 23 + 24 27 31 ...... I/0 MODULE 4-20 mA ANALOG OUTPUT 25 DIG IN MOTOR PROTECTION UNIT MPU-32 RELAY 3 RELAY 2 12 11 RELAY 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 CONTROL POWER (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 97 www.littelfuse.com/mpu-32 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION RTD temperature Phase loss/Phase reverse (current) Overcurrent Jam Undercurrent PTC overtemperature Starts per hour Differential Reduced overcurrent mode Metering MPU-CIM Analog output Data logging Conformal coating Protection Relays Motor Protection - Advanced MPS SERIES (PGR-6300) Motor Protection System Description PHASE CT The MPS Motor Protection System monitors voltage, current, and temperature to provide a comprehensive package of 22 protective functions. The MPS is a modular system with integrated protection, motor control, metering, and data-logging functions. This system is typically used to provide protection for three-phase low- and medium-voltage, medium- to highhorsepower induction motors. 1 Operator Interface (MPS-OPI) GF CT PHASE CT M PHASE CT RTD x 8 1 MPU-CIM MPS-RTD (Current Input Module) (Temperature Input Module) g MPU-32 g (Motor Protection Relay) L1 g L2 g g g g g 2 2 Control Unit (MPS-CTU) g MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Simplified Circuit Diagram A B PHASE CT g g GF CT PHASE CT M PHASE CT g g RTD x 8 g g MPS-RTD MPS-CTU L1 L2 (Control Unit) C 2 g (Temperature Input Module) Large, bright, 4 x 20 vacuum-fluorescent display Display metered values Access set points Powered by Control Unit Panel mount or attach directly to Control Unit Remote mounting (1.2 km or 4000 ft maximum loop length) 1/2 DIN size Hazardous-location certified g g Current inputs--5-A or 1-A secondary phase current transformers Voltage inputs--up to 600 V without PTs Earth-leakage input--5-A or 1-A secondary or sensitive transformer Tachometer (high-speed pulse) input 8 digital inputs, 5 relay outputs, 1 analog input and output 24-Vdc supply for OPI and RTD modules, and for digital inputs IRIG-B time-code input 1/2 DIN size, surface mount RS-485 network communications (Standard) DeviceNetTM, Profibus(R), or Ethernet communications available Accessories 1 MPS-OPI (Operator Interface) A Phase Current Transformers Phase CTs are required to detect phase currents. B Ground-Fault Current Transformer Required zero-sequence current transformer detects ground-fault current. Available with 5-A and 30-A primary ratings for low-level pickup. C MPS-RTD Temperature Input Module Optional module provides 8 inputs to connect Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, and Cu10 RTDs. D MPS-DIF Differential Current Module Optional motor differential protection, compatible with core balance and summation current transformer connections. Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER COMMUNICATIONS MPS-CTU-01-00 RS-485 MPS-CTU-02-00 RS-485 & DeviceNet MPS-CTU-03-00 RS-485 & Profibus(R) MPS-CTU-04-00 RS-485 & EtherNet/IPTM & Modbus(R) TCP TM ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT MPS-OPI-01-00 Recommended Phase CTs Required Ground-Fault CT Recommended MPS-RTD-01-00 Optional MPS-DIF-01-00 Optional SE-IP65CVR-M Optional www.littelfuse.com/mps 98 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Motor Protection - Advanced MPS SERIES (PGR-6300) Features & Benefits FEATURES IEEE # Overload 49, 51 Current unbalance/ Phase loss/Phase reverse Overcurrent/Jam BENEFITS Extends motor life and prevents insulation failures and fires 46 Prevents overheating and extends motor life 50, 51 Prevents catastrophic failures and fires and extends motor life Undercurrent 37 Ground fault 50g/N, 51G/N Detects low-level or no-load conditions Overvoltage 59 Prevents catastrophic failures and fires Optional RTD temperature protection (MPS-RTD module) for high ambient or loss of ventilation protection Prevents stress to insulation Undervoltage 27 Prevents a start attempt when it will damage the motor Voltage unbalance 47 Detects unhealthy supply voltage Phase differential 87 Provides sensitive protection for high-resistance winding faults 38, 49 RTD temperature Dynamic thermal mode Provides protection through starting, running, overload, and cooling cycles Reduced overcurrent mode Minimizes Arc-Flash hazards during maintenance Starter control Simplifies the installation by reducing component count Metering Displays the measured and calculated motor parameters Data logging On-board 64-event recorder helps with system diagnosis Communications Remotely view measured values, event records & reset trips Conformal coating Internal circuits are conformally coated to protect against corrosion and moisture Protective Functions Overload (49, 51) Unbalance (current) (46) (IEEE Device Numbers) Phase reverse (current) (46) Underspeed (14) Overfrequency (81) Starts per hour (66) Overcurrent (50, 51) Phase loss (voltage) (47) Jam Overvoltage (59) Underfrequency (81) Differential (87) Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Phase loss (current) (46) Undercurrent (37) Undervoltage (27) Unbalance (voltage) (47) Phase reverse Failure to accelerate (voltage) (47) RTD temperature (38, 49) Power factor (55) Input Voltage 65-265 Vac, 25 VA; 80-275 Vdc, 25 W Power-Up Time 800 ms at 120 Vac Ride-Through Time 100 ms minimum 24-Vdc Source 100 mA maximum AC Measurements True RMS and DFT, Peak, 16 samples/cycle, and positive and negative sequence of fundamental Frequency 50, 60 Hz or ASD Inputs Phase current, Earth-leakage current, Phase voltage, 7 digital, tachometer, 1 analog Output Contacts 5 contacts -- See Product Manual Approvals CSA Certified, RCM (Australian), UL Recognized Communications Allen-Bradley (R) DFI and Modbus(R) RTU (Standard); DeviceNetTM, Profibus(R), Ethernet (Optional) Conformally Coated Standard feature Warranty 10 years Mounting (Control Unit) Surface (Operator Interface) Panel, Control-Unit mounted MPS-OPI OPERATOR INTERFACE (recommended) 1 GROUND-FAULT CURRENT TRANSFORMER PHASE CURRENT TRANFORMERS MPS-RTD RTD MODULE (optional) (required) (required) A B C MPS-DIF DIFFERENTIAL MODULE (optional) PHASE VOLTAGES D 22 30 29 27 26 23 22 20 ...... 17 60 56 53 + I/0 MODULE 52 4-20 mA ANALOG INPUT MPS-CTU CONTROL UNIT RELAY OUTPUTS 1 2 5 ...... 16 RS-485 35 ...... 37 ANALOG OUTPUT 4-20 mA + 39 40 DIGITAL INPUTS 43 ...... 51 2 CONTROL POWER (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 99 www.littelfuse.com/mps MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Specifications Wiring Diagram 33 7 Protection Relays Motor Protection Relay Retrofits MPU-32-X69X (PGR-6210) SERIES / MPS-469X (PGR-6310) SERIES Motor Protection Retrofit Kits 1 Description MPU-32-X69X Front 2 Littelfuse Startco retrofit kits are an excellent choice for upgrading motor protection, providing current- and temperature-based protection, metering, and data logging. 1 MPU-32-X69X The MPU-32-X69X Motor Protection Retrofit Kit is designed to replace GE Multilin 169, 269, and 369 relays. It includes the MPU-32 Motor Protection Relay, MPU-CIM Current Input Module, and optional MPS-RTD Temperature Input Modules, which are pre-wired on a panel. The kit fits in the existing space and typically can utilize existing current transformers and wiring to simplify the upgrade procedure. 2 MPS-469X The MPS-469X Motor Protection Retrofit Kit replaces the GE Multilin 469 relay. It includes the MPS Motor Protection System and optional RTD and differential modules mounted on a panel that can be installed in the existing 469 cutout. Existing current transformer and wiring can be utilized, simplifying the upgrade procedure. Back MPS-469X Features & Benefits FEATURES Mounting 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Quick installation Factory tested Communications BENEFITS Fits in existing mounting holes and panel openings Existing CTs and RTDs can be used to reduce installation time 100% factory-tested, pre-assembled components ensure reliability Add communications capability to older switchgear and improve system performance Microprocessor No calibration required saves on maintenance cost based Reduced overcurrent Maintenance mode setting to reduce the risk of mode Arc-Flash Hazards Front Conformal coating Back Protects circuit boards against corrosion and moisture protective functions, including dynamic thermal Additional protection Additional model and ability to match existing overcurrent curves MPU-32-X69X Ordering Information RTD INPUTS MPU-32-X69X - X MPU-32 COMMUNICATIONS GROUND-FAULT CT FUTURE OPTIONS 00 X X 0 = One Platinum 100 0 = TIA232 0 = Wired for Sensitive Ground-Fault CT (50 mA Secondary) 1 = One Platinum 100 and 8-input MPS-RTD Module 1 = TIA232 & TIA485 1 = Wired for 1- or 5-A Secondary Ground-Fault CT 2 = TIA232 & DeviceNet 4 = TIA232 & Ethernet MPS-469X Ordering Information MPS-469X - MODULE CONFIGURATION MPS COMMUNICATIONS FUTURE OPTIONS X X 000 0 = None 1 = One MPS-RTD Module 2 = Two MPS-RTD Modules 3 = One MPS-DIF Module 4 = One MPS-RTD Module and One MPS-DIF Module 1 = RS485 2 = RS485 & DeviceNet 3 = RS485 & Profibus 4 = RS485 & Ethernet www.littelfuse.com/mpu-32-X69X, www.littelfuse.com/mps-469X 100 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection 111-INSIDER-P / 231-INSIDER-P Single-Phase Pump Monitor Description The Littelfuse 111-Insider-P single-phase products fit inside and 1/2, 115V control boxes and the 231-Insider-P fits inside 1/2, 3/4, and 1 hp, 230V control boxes. Both models are designed to protect single-phase pumps from dry-well, dead-head, jammed impeller, rapid-cycle, overvoltage, and undervoltage conditions. A calibration adjustment allows the Insider to be calibrated to your specific pumping applications, thereby reducing the possibility of false or nuisance tripping. A unique microcontroller-based voltage and current-sensing circuit constantly monitors the incoming power for fluctuations, overcurrent, and undercurrent. When an abnormality, such as loss of suction is detected, the product deactivates its output relay and directly disconnects the pump motor. The unit then begins its user-selectable restart delay (dry-well recovery) timer. When the timer counts to zero or power is removed and reapplied, the unit reactivates its output relay and turns the pump back on. By leaving the restart delay knob in the reset position, the unit will operate in manual reset mode. Wiring Diagrams See next page. NOTE: The 111/231-Insider-P models have a sensitivity adjustment for the dry-well trip point. After calibration is done, you can adjust the sensitivity for the dry-well/dead-head trip point from 70-90% of the full load. This makes the unit even more adaptable to varying pumping applications. If you have a very low producing well, you increase the sensitivity closer to the 90% mark, or if you have a very heavy producing well, you would decrease the sensitivity around the 70% mark. Accessories Informer A hand-held diagnostic tool that uses an infrared receiver to access information which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system. Includes the Informer IR Kit-12 Features & Benefits Informer IR Kit-12 12" infrared adapter cable attaches to the face of the unit to provide remote diagnostics without opening the panel. Included with the Informer Ordering Information FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage and current protects pumps from dry-well, dead-head, jammed impeller, rapid cycling, and voltage faults Onboard sensitivity adjustment Allows user to adjust the current sensitivity for the dry-well / dead-head trip point from 70% - 90% of the full load. Adjustable restart delay Allows user to select well recovery time delay after a dry-well condition occurs, or to select manual reset MODEL VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 111-Insider-P 115VAC - 1/2 hp, includes IR Kit-12 Built in IR communications link Used with the Informer, allows user to see stored faults, run time, and also troubleshoot the pump while it's running 231-Insider-P 230VAC - 1 hp, includes IR Kit-12 LED indication Provides status and diagnostics for troubleshooting (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 101 www.littelfuse.com/111insiderp-231insiderp 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION The Insider communicates with a hand-held diagnostics tool called the Informer (sold separately). The Informer displays parameters including calibration points, trip points, run time and last faults. An IR Kit-12 (12" fiber optic kit) is included with each Insider, allowing the Informer to access these parameters even when the Insider is enclosed in a control box. This is valuable for troubleshooting the pump while it is running. Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection 111-INSIDER-P / 231-INSIDER-P Specifications Functional Specifications Adjustments/Settings Overcurrent Underload (dry-well) Overvoltage 111-Insider-P 231-Insider-P Undervoltage 111-Insider-P 231-Insider-P Number of restarts allowed in a 60-sec. period (rapid-cycling) Trip Delay Times Overcurrent Dry-well Restart Delay Times Over/Undervoltage All other faults 125% of calibration point Adjustable (70 to 90% of calibrated run power) 132.5VAC 265VAC 95VAC 190VAC 4 5 seconds 4 seconds 2 seconds Manual, 2-225 minutes 115VAC 230VAC - 1/2 hp - 1 hp 50*/60Hz 1/2hp@120VAC (17 amps max.) 1hp@ 240VAC (17 amps max.) -40 to 60 C (-40 to 140 F) 5W UL508, C22.2 No. 14 10 oz. Inside a Pentek(R), FranklinTM, CentriProTM, Flint and WallingTM, and Grundfos(R)*** control box *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20% 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Input Characteristics Supply Voltage 111-Insider-P 231-Insider-P Load Range 111-Insider-P 231-Insider-P Frequency Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating-SPST 111-Insider-P 231-Insider-P General Characteristics Operating Temperature Maximum Input Power Safety Marks cUR** Weight Mounting Methods **The 111-Insider-P and 231-Insider-P are approved by UL for use in the FranklinTM, Pentek (R), and CentriProTM type 3R control boxes when installed as described in the installation instructions. The 111-Insider-P and 231-Insider-P are not intended to provide overload protection, and should be used with thermally or impedance protected motors only. ***Grundfos control boxes manufactured after mid 2014. Wiring Diagrams PENTEK(R) CONTROL BOX WIRING DIAGRAM FRANKLINTM CONTROL BOX WIRING DIAGRAM BLUE MODEL 231/111 INSIDER-P ORANGE BLUE 111/231 INSIDER-P SOLID-STATE SWITCH BLK RED B(MAIN) (R) (R) FIGURE 5: Pentek Control Box with the PumpSaver Plus Installed www.littelfuse.com/111insiderp-231insiderp 102 Y(COMM) YEL R(START) L2 L1 111-Insider-P/231-Insider-P (c)2017 Littelfuse in FranklinTM Control BoxProtection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection 111-INSIDER-P / 231-INSIDER-P CENTRIPROTM CONTROL BOX WIRING DIAGRAM FLINT AND WALLINGTM CONTROL BOX WIRING DIAGRAM ORANGE CAPACITOR ORANGE BLUE BLUE 231/111 INSIDER-P BLACK VOLTAGE RELAY VOLTAGE RELAY 5 231/111 INSIDER-P YELLOW BLACK YELLOW RED 1 YELLOW 2 YELLOW B(MAIN) R(START) Y(COMM) L2 7 RED L1 (R) TM FIGURE 7: CentriPro Control Box with the PumpSaver Plus Installed Y(COMM) R(START) L2 L1 FIGURE 9: Flint and WallingTM Control Box with the PumpSaver(R)Plus Installed For installation instructions see the Fresh Water Pumping Catalog at www.Littelfuse.com/PumpProtection GRUNDFOS(R) CONTROL BOX* WIRING DIAGRAM ORANGE CAPACITOR BLUE BLACK MODEL 231/111 INSIDER-P YELLOW 5 2 VOLTAGE RELAY 1 RED BLACK B(MAIN) Y(COMM) YELLOW R(START) L2 L1 * For boxes manufactured in mid 2014 or later. (R) (R) Grundfos Control Box for with themanufactured PumpSaver Plus Installed See 232-INSIDER on next page boxes prior to mid 2014. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 103 www.littelfuse.com/111insiderp-231insiderp MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION B(MAIN) Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection 232-INSIDER Single-Phase Pump Monitor Description The Model 232-Insider single-phase PumpSaver(R) fits inside /3, 1/2, 3/4, and 1hp, 230V Grundfos control boxes manufactured prior to mid 2014. The PumpSaver(R) Model 232-Insider is a pump monitor designed to protect single-phase pumps from dry-well, deadhead, jammed impeller, overvoltage and undervoltage conditions. Typical applications include residential water wells, commercial water wells, irrigation wells, and golf course systems. A calibration adjustment allows the 232-Insider to be calibrated to your specific pumping application, thereby reducing the possibility of false or nuisance tripping. A unique microcontrollerbased voltage and current-sensing circuit constantly monitors the incoming power for fluctuations, overcurrent, and undercurrent. When an abnormality, such as loss of suction is detected, the 232-Insider deactivates its output relay and directly disconnects the pump motor. The 232-Insider then begins its user-selectable restart delay (dry-well recovery) timer. When the timer counts to zero or power is removed and reapplied, the 232-Insider reactivates its output relay and turns the pump back on. By leaving the restart delay knob in the reset position, the 232-Insider will operate in manual reset mode. Wiring Diagram MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 232-INSIDER CONNECTIONS IN GRUNDFOS(R) CONTROL BOX The Insider communicates with a hand-held diagnostics tool called the Informer (sold separately). The Informer displays parameters including calibration points, trip points, run time and last faults. This is valuable for troubleshooting the pump while it is running. CAPACITOR 232-Insider ORANGE 1/3 to 1hp @ 230VAC BLK Note: The use of flow restrictors or unusually high head pressures at the time of calibration may interfere with the detection of dead-head conditions. Contact Littelfuse for information on a product to fit these applications. RELAY RESTART DELAY/CAL. (MINS.) 800-843-8848 MADE INUSA Features & Benefits E68520 MODEL 232-INSIDER RED YEL BLK YEL L1 L2* Y R B FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage and current protects pumps from dry-well, dead-head, jammed impeller, and voltage faults Adjustable restart delay Allows user to select well recovery time delay after a dry-well condition occurs, or to select manual reset Built in IR communications link Used with the Informer, allows user to see stored faults, run time, and also troubleshoot the pump while it's running LED indication Provides status and diagnostics for troubleshooting *Note: Move short yellow wire from the 90 terminal on L2 to the 45 terminal on L2. For installation instructions see the Install Bulletin. Accessories Informer A hand-held diagnostic tool that uses an infrared receiver to access information which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system. www.littelfuse.com/232insider 104 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection 232-INSIDER Specifications 125% of calibration point Approx. 80% of calibration point Approx. 87% of calibration point 265VAC 190VAC 5 seconds 4 seconds 2 seconds Manual, 2-225 minutes 230VAC 3 - 1 hp 50*/60Hz 1hp@240VAC (17 amps max.) 7 -40 to 60 C (-40 to 140 F) 5W MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Functional Adjustments/Settings Overcurrent Underload (dry-well) Underload (dry well) with high sensitivity jumper removed Overvoltage Undervoltage Trip Delay Times Overcurrent Dry-well Restart Delay Times Over/undervoltage All other faults (dry-well recovery timer) Input Characteristics Supply Voltage Load Range Frequency Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating-SPST General Characteristics Operating Temperature Maximum Input Power Safety Marks UL CSA Weight Mounting Methods UL508 C22.2 No. 14 10 oz. Grundfos(R) Control Box manufactured prior to mid 2014 *Note: 50 Hz will increase all delay timers by 20% (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 105 www.littelfuse.com/232insider Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection 111P / 233P / 233P-1.5 SERIES Single-Phase PumpSaver(R) Description The Littelfuse Models 111P (115 volt, to 1hp); 233P-1.5 (230 volt, to 1.5hp); and 233P (230 volt, to 3hp) protect pumps from dry-well, dead-head, jammed impeller, overvoltage/ undervoltage conditions and now rapid-cycle protection whether the pressure switch is mounted before or after our unit. A calibration adjustment allows the unit to be calibrated to your specific pumping applications, thereby reducing the possibility of false or nuisance tripping. A unique microcontroller-based voltage and current-sensing circuit constantly monitors the incoming power for fluctuations, overcurrent, and undercurrent. When an abnormality, such as loss of suction is detected, the unit deactivates its output relay and directly disconnects the pump motor. The unit then begins its user-selectable restart delay (dry-well recovery) timer. When the timer counts to zero or power is removed and reapplied, the unit reactivates its output relay and turns the pump back on. Wiring Diagram The infrared LED communicates with a hand-held diagnostics tool called the Informer (sold separately). The Informer displays parameters including calibration points, trip points, run time and last faults. 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Special considerations for pump cables larger than #10 AWG: In some cases where larger motors are installed with deep set pumps, pump cables are used that exceed the relay's terminal size. In these conditions, a short splice of #10 AWG or #12 AWG may be a solution at the control box. Note: All local, state and national electric codes should be followed when applying this solution. NOTE: The 111P/233P/233P-1.5 models have a sensitivity adjustment for the dry-well trip point. After calibration is done, you can adjust the sensitivity for the dry-well/dead-head trip point from 70-90% of the full load. This makes the unit even more adaptable to varying pumping applications. If you have a very low producing well, you increase the sensitivity closer to the 90% mark, or if you have a very heavy producing well, you would decrease the sensitivity around the 70% mark. Features & Benefits For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 511, Figure 15. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 111P 115VAC Load Range: - 1hp 111P-ENCL 115VAC 111P with NEMA3R enclosure 233P 230VAC Load Range: - 3hp 233P-ENCL 230VAC 233P with NEMA3R enclosure 233P-1.5 230VAC Load Range: - 1.5hp 233P-1.5-ENCL 230VAC 233P-1.5 with NEMA3R enclosure www.littelfuse.com/111p-233p FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage, power factor, current for reliable pump protection Onboard calibration process Calibrates unit to your specific individual pumping application and reduces nuisance tripping Onboard sensitivity adjustment User adjustable sensitivity knob makes the unit more adaptable to varying pumping applications Accessories Informer A hand-held diagnostic tool that uses an infrared receiver to access information which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system. 106 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection 111P / 233P / 233P-1.5 SERIES Specifications Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating-SPST 111P 233P-1.5 233P General Characteristics Operating Temperature Maximum Input Power Wire Gauge Terminal Torque Safety Marks cUL Listed Dimensions 125% of calibration point Adjustable (70 to 90% of calibrated run power) 132.5VAC 265VAC 95VAC 190VAC 4 Weight Mounting Methods 5 seconds 4 seconds 1hp@120VAC (16 amps max.) 1.5hp@240VAC (10 amps max.) 3hp@240VAC (17 amps max.) -40 to 60 C (-40 to 140 F) 5W Solid or Stranded 10 - 22AWG 13 in.-lbs. UL508, C22.2 No. 14 H 73.66 mm (2.9"); W 133.35 mm (5.25"); D 73.99 mm (2.913") 14 oz. #8 screws *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20% 2 seconds Manual, 2-225 Minutes 7 115VAC 230VAC MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Functional Specifications Adjustments/Settings Overcurrent Underload (dry-well) Overvoltage 111P 233P, 233P-1.5 Undervoltage 111P 233P, 233P-1.5 Number of restarts allowed in a 60-sec. period (rapid-cycling) Trip Delay Times Overcurrent Dry-well Restart Delay Times Over/undervoltage All other faults Input Characteristics Supply Voltage 111P 233P-1.5, 233P Load Range: 111P 233P-1.5 233P Frequency - 1 hp - 1.5 hp - 3 hp 50*/60Hz (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 107 www.littelfuse.com/111p-233p Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection 234-P Single-Phase Pump Monitor Description The PumpSaver(R) Model 234-P is designed to be mounted inside a Grundfos(R) control box to protect /3 - 3hp, 2- or 3-wire, 230V pumps. The Model 234-P protects single-phase pumps from dry-well, dead-head, rapid-cycle, jammed-impeller, and over/undervoltage conditions. Typical applications include residential waterwells, commercial waterwells, irrigation wells, and golf course and other sprinkler systems. A calibration adjustment allows the 234-P to be calibrated to your specific pumping applications, thereby reducing the possibility of false or nuisance tripping. A unique microcontrollerbased voltage and current-sensing circuit constantly monitors the incoming power for fluctuations, overcurrent, and undercurrent. When an abnormality, such as loss of suction is detected, the 234-P deactivates its output relay and directly disconnects the pump motor. The 234-P then begins its userselectable restart delay (dry-well recovery) timer. When the timer counts to zero or power is removed and reapplied, the 234-P reactivates its output relay and turns the pump back on. By leaving the restart delay knob in the reset position, the 234-P will operate in manual reset mode. Wiring Diagram 234-P CONNECTIONS IN GRUNDFOS(R) CONTROL BOX 7 IR LINK RESTART DELAY/ MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION _ The 234-P communicates with a hand-held diagnostics tool called the Informer (sold separately). The Informer displays parameters including calibration points, trip points, run time and last faults. An IR Kit-12 (12" fiber optic kit) allows the Informer to access these parameters even when the 234-P is enclosed in a control box. This is valuable for troubleshooting the pump while it is running. + 1.5 to 3hp at 230VAC BLUE BLK YELLOW NOTE: The PumpSaver (R) models have a sensitivity adjustment for the dry-well trip point. After calibration is done, you can adjust the sensitivity for the dry-well/dead-head trip point from 7090% of the full load. This makes the unit even more adaptable to varying pumping applications. If you have a very low producing well, you increase the sensitivity closer to the 90% mark, or if you have a very heavy producing well, you would decrease the sensitivity around the 70% mark. ORANGE START CAPACITOR BLACK REL AY RUN CAPACITOR The Model 234-P is not recommended for use with the Grundfos (R) Deluxe Control Box. YELLOW SW L1 L2 YEL RED RED Features & Benefits BLACK BLK For installation instructions see the Install Bulletin. www.littelfuse.com/234p 108 FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage and current protects pumps from dry-well, dead-head, jammed impeller, rapid cycling, and voltage faults Onboard sensitivity adjustment Allows user to adjust the current sensitivity for the dry-well / dead-head trip point from 70% - 90% of the full load. Adjustable restart delay Allows user to select well recovery time delay after a dry-well condition occurs, or to select manual reset Built in IR communications link Used with the Informer, allows user to see stored faults, run time, and also troubleshoot the pump while it's running LED indication Provides status and diagnostics for troubleshooting (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection 234-P Specifications Accessories Informer IR Kit-12 12" infrared adapter cable attaches to the face of the unit to provide remote diagnostics without opening the panel. Included with the Informer 125% of calibration point Adjustable (70 - 90% of calibrated run power) 265VAC 190VAC 4 5 seconds 4 seconds 2 seconds Manual, 2-225 Minutes 230VAC 3 - 3 hp 50*/60Hz 3 hp @ 240VAC (17 amps max.) -40 to 60 C (-40 to 140 F) 5W Fitted to Grundfos(R) Control Box 14 oz. Grundfos(R) Control Box IEC 61000-4-2, Level 2, 4kV contact, 6kV air *Note: 50 Hz will increase all delay timers by 20% (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 109 www.littelfuse.com/234p 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Functional Specifications Adjustments/Settings Overcurrent Underload (dry-well) Overvoltage Undervoltage Number of restarts allowed in a 60-second period (rapid-cycling) Trip Delay Times Overcurrent Dry-well Restart Delay Times Over/undervoltage All other faults (dry-well recovery timer) Input Characteristics Supply Voltage Load Range Frequency Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPST) General Characteristics Operating Temperature Maximum Input Power Dimensions Weight Mounting Methods Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Informer A hand-held diagnostic tool that uses an infrared receiver to access information which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system. Includes the Informer IR Kit-12 Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection 235P Single-Phase Pump Monitor Description The Littelfuse 235P is designed to protect 5-15hp, 230V, single-phase pumps from dry-well, dead-head, jammed impeller and overvoltage and undervoltage conditions. A calibration adjustment allows the 235P to be calibrated to your specific pumping applications, thereby reducing the possibility of false or nuisance tripping. A unique microcontrollerbased voltage and current-sensing circuit constantly monitors the incoming power for fluctuations causing overcurrent and undercurrent. When an abnormality, such as loss of suction is detected, the 235P deactivates its output relay and directly disconnects the pump motor. The unit then begins its userselectable restart delay (dry-well recovery) timer. When the timer counts to zero or power is removed and reapplied, the unit reactivates its output relay and turns the pump back on. The 235P communicates with a hand-held diagnostics tool called the Informer (sold separately). The Informer displays parameters including calibration points, trip points, run time and last faults. Wiring Diagram 7 An external current transformer is required for operation (sold separately). Shows Internal Connection MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Special considerations for pump cables larger than #10 AWG: In some cases where larger motors are installed with deep set pumps, pump cables are used that exceed the relay's terminal size. In these conditions, a short splice of #10 AWG or #12 AWG may be a solution at the control box. Note: All local, state and national electric codes should be followed when applying this solution. NOTE: The 235P model has a sensitivity adjustment for the dry-well trip point. After calibration is done, you can adjust the sensitivity for the dry-well/dead-head trip point from 70-90% of the full load. This makes the unit even more adaptable to varying pumping applications. If you have a very low producing well, you increase the sensitivity closer to the 90% mark, or if you have a very heavy producing well, you would decrease the sensitivity around the 70% mark. Model 235P For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 511, Figure 15. Features & Benefits Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 235P 230VAC 5 - 15hp 235P-ENCL 230VAC 233P with NEMA3R enclosure PART* SIZE CURRENT (A) CT CURRENT RATIO CT-0050-D10 5 - 7.5hp 27.5 - 42.1 50:5 CT-0075-D10 10hp 51 75:5 CT-0100-D10 15hp 75 100:5 FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage and current protects pumps from dry-well, dead-head, jammed impeller, rapid cycling, and voltage faults Onboard sensitivity adjustment Allows user to adjust the current sensitivity for the dry-well / dead-head trip point from 70% - 90% of the full load. Adjustable restart delay Allows user to select well recovery time delay after a dry-well condition occurs, or to select manual reset Built in IR communications link Used with the Informer, allows user to see stored faults, run time, and also troubleshoot the pump while it's running LED indication Provides status and diagnostics for troubleshooting * Current transformer sold separately www.littelfuse.com/235p 110 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection 235P Accessories Input Characteristics Supply Voltage Load Range Frequency Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating-SPST General Characteristics Operating Temperature Maximum Input Power Wire Gauge Terminal Torque Safety Marks cUL Listed Dimensions Informer A hand-held diagnostic tool that uses an infrared receiver to access information which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system. Includes the Informer IR Kit-12 Specifications 125% of calibration point Adjustable (70 to 90% of calibrated run power) 265VAC 190VAC Weight Mounting Methods -40 to 60 C (-40 to 140 F) 5W Solid or Stranded 10 - 22AWG 13 in.-lbs. UL508, C22.2 No. 14 H 73.66 mm (2.9"); W 133.35 mm (5.25"); D 73.99 mm (2.913") 14 oz. #8 screws *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%) 4 Dimensions 5 seconds 4 seconds Weight Mounting Methods 2 seconds Manual, 2-225 Minutes (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls A300, 720A @240VAC (10 amps max.) H 73.66 mm (2.9"); W 133.35 mm (5.25"); D 73.99 mm (2.913") 14 oz. #8 screws 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Functional Specifications Adjustments/Settings Overcurrent Underload (dry-well) Overvoltage Undervoltage Number of restarts allowed in a 60-sec. period (rapid-cycling) Trip Delay Times Overcurrent Dry-well Restart Delay Times Over/undervoltage All other faults 230VAC 5 - 15 hp 50*/60Hz 111 www.littelfuse.com/235p Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection - 3-Phase Motor Protection MP8000 SERIES Bluetooth(R) 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor Description The MP8000/MP8100 are advanced motor protection electronic overload relays, fully programmable via Bluetooth(R) using an iPhone(R) or AndroidTM smartphone or tablet with the Littelfuse App. It is easy to use and arc-flash safety is increased because the app allows settings to be modified and real-time operational information viewed. Viewing operational information and faults on the app does not require the user to open the control panel. The MP8000 protects any motor drawing 0.5-1,000 full load Amps (external CTs are required above 100 Amps). It is designed for single or 3-phase systems with operating voltages of 90-690 VAC (use of external potential transformers can extend upper voltage range above 690 VAC). Common applications include conveyor systems, HVAC equipment, saws and grinders, fan motors, and almost any pumping application. Protection is unsurpassed by combining overload, voltage, phase loss and reversal, voltage and current unbalance, power monitoring, and underload in one package. For standalone applications, the Bluetooth(R) interface can be used when paired with a smartphone or tablet. The units also feature an Ethernet communications port that can be used to form an Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP network. Units can be remotely monitored and controlled from a PC, or SCADA system, and data logging through a PC with the optional Solutions software or other software program using the MP8000 memory map. This capability allows for a simple cost-effective way to further enhance arc-flash safety. Wiring Diagram PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C FROM A1 C AUX VOLTAGE SUPPLY 100 - 250 VAC 85 - 260 VDC L1 L2 A A1/N L3 B A2/L START C PILOT STOP HAND C (95) OFF AUTO NO (96) NC (14) C (13) NO (15) Features & Benefits MP8000 C PE Z1 Z2 T2 T1 I.2 . MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 FEATURES BENEFITS Bluetooth(R) interface Visual indication for programming, viewing real-time voltage or current, and last fault information (date and time stamped) Programmable voltage and current settings Allows usage on wide range of systems 3 selectable restart options Choose from automatic, semi-automatic, or manual to best meet individual application needs 4 programmable delay timers Program separate delay times for power up, rapid cycle protection, motor cool down, and underload restarting Flexible reset Reset can be done through pushbutton on panel, remotely via the network Network communications capability Compatible with Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP I.1 RESET PTC (OPTIONAL) ZERO SEQUENCE CURRENT TRANSFORMER (OPTIONAL) FROM A2 M For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 516, Figure 50. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE MOTOR FULL AMP RANGE DESCRIPTION MP8000 90-690VAC (use of external potential transformers can extend upper voltage range above 690VAC) 0.5-1,000A (external CTs required above 100A) Provides remote wired communication via Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP MP8100 90-690VAC (use of external potential transformers can extend upper voltage range above 690VAC) 0.5-1,000A (external CTs required above 100A) Provides remote wired communication via Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP, RS485, and CAN bus www.littelfuse.com/mp8000 112 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection - 3-Phase Motor Protection MP8000 SERIES Advanced Features Overload (Overpower) Underload (Underpower) Overcurrent/Jam Undercurrent Current Unbalance Phase Loss Phase Reversal Overvoltage Undervoltage Voltage Unbalance Rapid Cycling/Jog Contactor Failure Zero-Sequence Ground Fault PTC Motor Overtemperature Specifications Littelfuse Mobile App MP8000 Littelfuse App icon FCC Rating Real Time Configuration Short Circuit Withstand Rating Hi-Potential Test Safety Marks cULus CE Maximum Conductor Size (with insulation) Dimensions Fault Weight Mounting Method (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 113 50/60Hz Trip class 02-60 or linear SPST - Form A SPDT - Form C B300 5A @ 240VAC -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) -55 to 80C (-67 to 176F) 1% 2% (2 to 100 amps direct) 2% 0.5 seconds 5% 0.5% 1% (2 to 100 amps direct) 5W 3 (conformal coating standard) IP20 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 5.5 in.-lbs. 7.9 in.-lbs. IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3 10V/m IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 2kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground Part 15.107 for emissions, Part 15.247 for intentional radiators 100kA symmetrical at 690VAC Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 minute) UL60947, UL1053, C22.2 (File #E68520) IEC 60947 Edition 5.2, IEC 60947-8 0.63" H 73.91 mm (2.91"); W 103.63 mm (4.08"); D 121.67 mm (4.79") 0.85 lbs (13.6 oz, 385.6 g) Surface mount (4 - #8 screws) or DIN-rail mount www.littelfuse.com/mp8000 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Functional Characteristics Frequency TC- Overcurrent Trip Class Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating Control relay Auxiliary relay Pilot Duty Rating General Purpose General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating Storage Accuracy Voltage Current Timing GF Current Repeatability Voltage Current Maximum Input Power Pollution Degree Class of Protection Relative Humidity Terminal Torque (depluggable terminal blocks) Terminal Torque (Earth Ground) Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Conducted Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Radiated Fast Transient Burst Surge Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection - 3-Phase Motor Protection 777 SERIES 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor Description The 777 is a fully programmable electronic overload relay designed to protect any motor drawing 2-800 full load amps (external CTs are required above 90 amps). The 777 (family of products) is for 3-phase 200-480VAC applications, with several specialized units for other voltage ranges and unique applications. Common applications include conveyor systems, HVAC equipment, saws and grinders, fan motors, and almost any pumping application. Some unique applications include use with a Subtrol(R) equipped Franklin submersible motor to detect high motor temperatures and applications where a fast linear trip is required. All of the overload relays provide unsurpassed protection by combining overload, voltage, phase loss and reversal, voltage and current unbalance, power monitoring, and underload based on current in one package. For standalone applications, the units incorporate a 3-digit LED display that is used for programming, providing real-time operational information and displaying diagnostic codes to aid in troubleshooting a fault condition. The units also feature a communications port that can be used with communication modules listed in the 777 accessories section to form a Modbus, DeviceNetTM, Profibus, or Ethernet network. Up to 99 units can be remotely monitored and controlled from a PC, PLC, or SCADA system, and data logging through a PC with the optional Solutions software. This capability allows for a simple, cost-effective way to meet new requirements for arc-flash safety. Wiring Diagram TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 777 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM MODEL 777 (2 to 90 amps) (20 TO FOR 90 amps) MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Features & Benefits CURRENT TRANSFORMER WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 777 (80 to 800 amps) LITTELFUSE RECOMMENDS USING CTs WITH TERMINALS TO SIMPLIFY INSTALLATION. 12 - 16 AWG STRANDED WIRE FEATURES BENEFITS Built-in display Visual indication for programming, viewing real-time voltage or current, and last fault code Programmable voltage and current settings Allows usage on wide range of systems 3 selectable restart options Choose from automatic, semi-automatic, or manual to best meet individual application needs 3 programmable restart delay timers Program separate restart delay time for rapid cycle protection, motor cool down, and dry-well recovery Remote display compatibility Increases safety through remote display of real-time data and fault history, without the need to open the cabinet. Aids with arc flash safety regulations Flexible reset Reset can be done through pushbutton on relay or remotely with optional 777-MRSW or OL-RESET remote reset kit Network communications capability Compatible with Modbus, DeviceNetTM, Profibus, or Ethernet using optional communications module Ordering Information See next page. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 507, Figure 1. www.littelfuse.com/com/777 114 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection - 3-Phase Motor Protection 777 SERIES Ordering Information LINE VOLTAGE MOTOR FULL AMP RANGE DESCRIPTION 777-P2 200-480VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts 777-LR-P2 200-480VAC 1-800A (external CTs required above 9A) Protects low range motors when wired directly or with 10-800 FLA with use of external CTs 777-HVR-P2 340-480VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 470VA @ 600VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Required when a control power transformer (CPT) is not used with a 480V system 777-HVR-LR-P2 340-480VAC 1-800A (external CTs required above 9A) Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 470VA @ 600VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Required when a control power transformer (CPT) is not used with a 480V system 777-575-P2 500-600VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Used in Canada and NE USA where 575V utility power services are common 777-575-LR-P2 500-600VAC 1-800A (external CTs required above 9A) Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Used in Canada and NE USA where 575V utility power services are common 777-MV-P2 100-240VAC 10-800A with external CTs Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Designed for Medium Voltage applications where both PTs and CTs are used. Has built in multipliers for 25.5, 50.5, 100.5 CTs. The voltage unbalance, single-phase and reverse phase protection can be disabled for applications where only the PTs are used 777-HRG-P2 200-480VAC 2-90A only Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Designed for high resistance grounding systems that incorporate an external zero-sequence CT that correspond with the built in multipliers to detect ground faults 777-LR-HRG-P2 200-480VAC 10-800A (external CTs Overload relays designed for high resistance grounding systems that incorporate an external required, external zero-sequence CTs that correspond with the built in multipliers to detect ground faults 777-575-HRG-P2 777-575-LR-HRG-P2 500-600VAC 2-90A only Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Used in Canada and NE USA where 575V utility power services are common. Designed for high resistance grounding systems that incorporate an external zero-sequence CT that correspond with the built in multipliers to detect ground faults 500-600VAC 10-800A with external CTs Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Used in Canada and NE USA where 575V utility power services are common. Designed for high resistance grounding systems that incorporate an external zero-sequence CT that correspond with the built in multipliers to detect ground faults 777-FT 200-480VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides linear overcurrent trip and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Also known as shock relay, it is designed for fast linear trip applications. Overcurrent trip delay can be set ranging from less than 500ms - 70 seconds. Low trip delay is ideal in chain drive and drive linkage applications to prevent breaking in overload or jam situations. Other applications include sewage clarifiers, mixers, augers, and conveyors. Longer trip delay is ideal for motor test panels in rewind shops. Also includes adjustable motor acceleration time and overcurrent trip delay time when the faster linear trip mode is used 777-TS 200-480VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. For use with Subtrol(R) equipped Franklin submersible motors to detect high motor temperatures 777-LR-TS 200-480VAC 1-9A only Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. For use with Subtrol(R) equipped Franklin submersible motors to detect high motor temperatures 777-575-TS 500-600VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. For use with Subtrol(R) equipped Franklin submersible motors with nominal 500-600VAC range to detect high motor temperatures 777VA-02 200-480VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Has restart delay 1 setpoints of 2-500 minutes and undercurrent trip delay setpoints of 2-60 minutes. 200-480VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. For use with static and rotary single to 3-phase converters. High and low voltage trip feature only applies to the utility supplied power. Works well with unloaded phase converters because the relay ignores severely unbalanced voltages 777VA-03 * Network programmable only (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 115 www.littelfuse.com/777 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION MODEL Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection - 3-Phase Motor Protection 777 SERIES Accessories RS485MS-2W Communication Module Required to enable the Modbus communications function on Model 77X-type products. CIO-MB/CIO-120-MB Communication Module Modbus-RTU interfaces capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of an overload relay over a Modbus network. CIO-DN-P/CIO-120-DN-P Communication Module DeviceNetTM interfaces capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a DeviceNetTM network. CIO-777-PR Communication Module Profibus interface capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a Profibus network. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 CIO-EN (non-POE) Communication Module Modbus-TCP and Modbus-RTU interface capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of an overload relay over a Modbus network. Communication Adapters * RS485-RS232-Converter with cable & plug * RS485-USB-Converter with cable & plug * RS232-USB-Converter Specifications match industry standard. RM1000 Remote Monitor The RM1000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring for up to 16 devices. RM2000 Remote Monitor The RM2000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring with event storage and real-time clock for date and time stamp. Solutions Software: Solutions-M Software features include data logging, real-time data monitoring and fault and event monitoring. Specifications Functional Characteristics Frequency TC- Overcurrent Trip Class (777 Plus Series units) TC- Overcurrent Trip Class (77C, 777 non-Plus Series units) Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT - Form C) Pilot duty rating General purpose Pilot duty rating for HVR models General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating Storage Accuracy Voltage Current GF Current Timing (777 Plus Series units) Timing (77C, 777 non-Plus Series units) Repeatability Voltage Current Maximum Input Power Pollution Degree Class of Protection Relative Humidity Terminal Torque Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Conducted Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Radiated Fast Transient Burst Short Circuit Surge IEC ANSI/IEEE 777-MRSW Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver(R) and PumpSaver(R) products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. OL-RESET Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver(R) and PumpSaver(R) products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. www.littelfuse.com/777 Hi-potential Test Vibration Shock 116 50/60Hz 02-60, J02-J60, L00-L60 or Off 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 (J prefix enables jam protection feature) 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 10A @ 240VAC 470VA @ 600VAC, B600 -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 1% 3%(<100 amps direct) 15% 0.5 second 5% +1 second 0.5% of nominal voltage 1% (<100 amps direct) 10 W 3 IP20 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 7 in.-lbs. IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3 10V/m IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power 100kA 61000-4-5, Level 3, 2kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 minute) IEC 68-2-6, 10-55Hz, 1mm peak-to-peak, 2 hours, 3 axis IEC 68-2-27, 30g, 3 axis, 11ms duration, half-sine pulse (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection - 3-Phase Motor Protection 777 SERIES Safety Marks UL CE CSA Maximum Conductor Size (with insulation) through 777/77C Dimensions Weight Mounting Method UL508, UL1053 (File #E68520) IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1 C22.2 No. 14 0.65" H 77.47 mm (3.05"); W 97.79 mm (3.85"); D 128.27 mm (5.05") 1.56 lbs. (24.96 oz., 707.6 g) Surface mount (4 - #8 screws) or DIN rail mount 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 117 www.littelfuse.com/777 Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection - Single-Phase Motor Protection 777 / 77C SERIES Single-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor Description The 777/ 77C Series is a fully programmable electronic overload relay designed to protect any motor drawing 2-800 full load amps (external CTs are required above 90 amps). Common applications include conveyor systems, HVAC equipment, saws and grinders, fan motors, and almost any pumping application. All of the overload relays provide unsurpassed protection by combining overload, underload, and voltage in one package. For standalone applications, the units incorporate a 3-digit LED display that is used for programming, providing real-time operational information and displaying diagnostic codes to aid in troubleshooting a fault condition. The units also feature a communications port that can be used with communication modules listed in the 777 accessories section to form a Modbus, DeviceNetTM, Profibus, or Ethernet network. Up to 99 units can be remotely monitored and controlled from a PC, PLC, or SCADA system, and data logging through a PC with the optional Solutions software. This capability allows for a simple, cost-effective way to meet new requirements for arc-flash safety. Wiring Diagram TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 77C WITH MOTOR CONTROL 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Features & Benefits TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 77C WITH EXTERNAL CT LITTELFUSE RECOMMENDS USING CTs THAT HAVE TERMINALS TO AID CONVENIENCE WHEN INSTALLING CTs. FEATURES BENEFITS Built-in display Visual indication for programming, viewing real-time voltage or current, and last fault code Programmable voltage and current settings Allows usage on wide range of systems 3 selectable restart options Choose from automatic, semi-automatic, or manual to best meet individual application needs 3 programmable restart delay timers Program separate restart delay time for rapid cycle protection, motor cool down, and dry-well recovery Remote display compatibility Increases safety through remote display of real-time data and fault history, without the need to open the cabinet. Aids with arc flash safety regulations Flexible reset Reset can be done through pushbutton on relay or remotely with optional 777-MRSW or OL-RESET remote reset kit Network communications capability Compatible with Modbus, DeviceNetTM, Profibus, or Ethernet using optional communications module Ordering Information A B C MODEL LINE VOLTAGE MOTOR FULL AMP RANGE DESCRIPTION 77C 100-240VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts 77C-LR 100-240VAC 1-9A only Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts 340-480VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides 470VA @ 600VAC output SPDT relay contacts. For systems with no control power transformer 777HVR-SP NOTE: PHASES A & C ARE INACTIVE. USE PHASE B FOR ALL ACTIVE CURRENT MEASUREMENTS. CT SECONDARY MUST MAKE FIVE PASSES THROUGH THE PHASE B CONDUCTOR WINDOW. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 507, Figure 1. www.littelfuse.com/777-77c 118 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection - Single-Phase Motor Protection 777 / 77C SERIES Specifications Accessories Frequency Functional Characteristics TC- Overcurrent Trip Class (77C, 777 non-Plus Series units) RS485MS-2W Communication Module Required to enable the Modbus communications function on Model 77X-type products. Communication Adapters * RS485-RS232-Converter with cable & plug * RS485-USB-Converter with cable & plug * RS232-USB-Converter Specifications match industry standard. RM1000 Remote Monitor The RM1000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring for up to 16 devices. RM2000 Remote Monitor The RM2000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring with event storage and real-time clock for date and time stamp. Solutions Software: Solutions-M Software features include data logging, real-time data monitoring and fault and event monitoring. 777-MRSW Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver(R) and PumpSaver(R) products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. OL-RESET Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver(R) and PumpSaver(R) products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. ANSI/IEEE Hi-potential Test Vibration Shock Safety Marks UL CE CSA Maximum Conductor Size (with insulation) through 777/77C Dimensions Weight Mounting Method (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 119 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 (J prefix enables jam protection feature) 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 10A @ 240VAC 470VA @ 600VAC, B600 -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 1% 3%(<100 amps direct) 15% 7 5% +1 second 0.5% of nominal voltage 1% (<100 amps direct) 10 W 3 IP20 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 7 in.-lbs. IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3 10V/m IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power 100kA 61000-4-5, Level 3, 2kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 minute) IEC 68-2-6, 10-55Hz, 1mm peak-to-peak, 2 hours, 3 axis IEC 68-2-27, 30g, 3 axis, 11ms duration, half-sine pulse UL508, UL1053 (File #E68520) IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1 C22.2 0.65" H 77.47 mm (3.05"); W 97.79 mm (3.85"); D 128.27 mm (5.05") 1.56 lbs. (24.96 oz., 707.6 g) Surface mount (4 - #8 screws) or DIN rail mount www.littelfuse.com/777-77c MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT - Form C) Pilot duty rating General purpose Pilot duty rating for HVR models General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating Storage Accuracy Voltage Current GF Current Timing (77C, 777 non-Plus Series units) Repeatability Voltage Current Maximum Input Power Pollution Degree Class of Protection Relative Humidity Terminal Torque Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Conducted Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Radiated Fast Transient Burst Short Circuit Surge IEC 50/60Hz Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection - 3-Phase Pump Protection 777-KW/HP-P2 SERIES 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor Description The 777-KW/HP-P2 Series has the overload, voltage, phase loss and reversal, voltage and current unbalance, current and power monitoring*, and underload trip based on power in one package. The underpower trip feature is desirable anytime the current vs. load characteristic is non-linear or has little change. In general terms, smaller motors and slow-speed motors have little change in current over the normal load range. Larger motors that are running light loads will also show small current changes over the operating load range. For standalone applications, the units incorporate a 3-digit LED display that is used for programming, providing real-time operational information and displaying diagnostic codes to aid in troubleshooting a fault condition. Wiring Diagram TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR 777-KW/HP-P2 SERIES 2 3 Power COIL CONTACTOR CONTROL POWER 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Current is not linear, low sensitivity for low loads and high sensitivity for high loads. Current Power is Linear, equal sensitivity at both low and high loads. A B No Load C START Full Load No Load Full Load The units also feature a communications port that can be used with communication modules listed in the 777 accessories section to form a Modbus, DeviceNetTM, Profibus, or Ethernet network. Up to 99 units can be remotely monitored and controlled from a PC, PLC, or SCADA system, and data logging through a PC with the optional Solutions software. STOP M AUTO TO MOTOR Figure 1: Typical Wiring Diagram * Low current trip and high power trip are network programmable only CURRENT TRANSFORMER WIRING DIAGRAM FOR 777-KW/HP-P2 SERIES Features & Benefits LITTELFUSE RECOMMENDS USING CTs WITH TERMINALS TO SIMPLIFY INSTALLATION. 12 - 16 AWG STRANDED WIRE All CTs must face the same direction, and all CT secondaries must be wired identically, i.e. all X1 terminals enter the main (round) window and return to H1 terminal after exiting the loop conductor window (rectangle). Every CT secondary must make 5 passes through the corresponding main conductor window. FEATURES BENEFITS Low and High Power Protection Increases reliability for non-linear motors where the load characteristic has little change Built-in Display Visual indication for programming, viewing real-time voltage, current, kilowatts, or horsepower, and last fault code Programmable voltage and current settings Allows usage on wide range of systems 3 selectable restart options Choose from automatic, semi-automatic, or manual to best meet individual application needs 3 programmable restart delay timers Program separate restart delay time for rapid cycle protection, motor cool down, and dry-well recovery Remote display compatibility Increases safety through remote display of real-time data and fault history, without the need to open the cabinet. Aids with arc flash safety regulations Flexible reset Reset can be done through pushbutton on relay or remotely with optional 777-MRSW or OL-RESET remote reset kit Network communications capability Compatible with Modbus, DeviceNetTM, Profibus, or Ethernet using optional communications module For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 507, Figure 1. www.littelfuse.com/777kwhpp2 120 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection - 3-Phase Pump Protection 777-KW/HP-P2 SERIES Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE MOTOR FULL AMP RANGE DESCRIPTION 777-KW/HP-P2 200-480VAC (3-phase) 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts 777-LR-KW/HP-P2 200-480VAC (3-phase) 1-800A (external CTs required above 9A) Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts 777-HVR-KW/HP-P2 340-480VAC (3-phase) 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides 470VA @ 600VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Required when a CPT (control power transformer) is not used on a 480V system. Commonly used in pumping applications to save the cost and extra wiring associated with a CPT 777-575-KW/HP-P2 500-600VAC (3-phase) 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Used in Canada and NE USA where 575V utility power services are common 777-MLR-KW/HP-P2 200-480VAC (3-phase) 0.5-21A and 40-740A with external CTs Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. It is wired directly without the need to loop conductors for 5-21 amps (under 5 amps requires looping of conductors), and can be used with external CTs for 40-740 amps Accessories RM1000 Remote Monitor The RM1000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring for up to 16 devices. RS485MS-2W Communication Module Required to enable the Modbus communications function on Model 77X-type products. RM2000 Remote Monitor The RM2000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring with event storage and real-time clock for date and time stamp. CIO-DN-P/CIO-120-DN-P Communication Module DeviceNetTM interfaces capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a DeviceNetTM network. Solutions Software: Solutions-M Software features include data logging, real-time data monitoring and fault and event monitoring. CIO-777-PR Communication Module Profibus interface capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a Profibus network. 777-MRSW Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver(R) and PumpSaver(R) products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. CIO-EN (non-POE) Communication Module Modbus-TCP and Modbus-RTU interface capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of an overload relay over a Modbus network. OL-RESET Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver(R) and PumpSaver(R) products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. Communication Adapters * RS485-RS232-Converter with cable & plug * RS485-USB-Converter with cable & plug * RS232-USB-Converter Specifications match industry standard. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 121 www.littelfuse.com/777kwhpp2 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION CIO-MB/CIO-120-MB Communication Module Modbus-RTU interfaces capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of an overload relay over a Modbus network. Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection - 3-Phase Pump Protection 777-KW/HP-P2 SERIES Specifications MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Frequency Functional Characteristics TC-Overcurrent Trip Class Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT - Form C) Pilot duty rating General purpose Pilot duty rating for HVR model General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating Storage Accuracy Voltage Current Power GF Current Timing Repeatability Voltage Current Power Maximum Input Power Pollution Degree Class of Protection Relative Humidity Terminal Torque Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Conducted Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Radiated Fast Transient Burst Short Circuit Rating www.littelfuse.com/777kwhpp2 50/60Hz Surge IEC 02-60, J02-J60, L00-L60 or OFF ANSI/IEEE Hi-potential Test Vibration 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 10A @ 240VAC Shock 470VA @ 600VAC, B600 Safety Marks UL CE CSA Maximum Conductor Size (with insulation) through 777 Dimensions -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 1% 3% (<100 amps direct) 4% (<100 amps direct) 15% 0.5 second Weight Mounting Method 0.5% of nominal voltage 1% (<100 amps direct) 2% 10 W 3 IP20 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 7 in.-lbs. 61000-4-5, Level 3, 2kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 minute) IEC 68-2-6, 10-55Hz, 1mm peak-to-peak, 2 hours, 3 axis IEC 68-2-27, 30g, 3 axis, 11ms duration, half-sine pulse UL508, UL1053 (File #E68520) IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1 C22.2 No. 14 0.65" H 77.47 mm (3.05"); W 97.79 mm (3.85"); D 128.27 mm (5.05") 1.56 lbs. (24.96 oz., 707.6 g) Surface mount (4 - #8 screws) or DIN rail mount IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3 10V/m IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5 kV input power 100kA 122 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection - 3-Phase Pump Protection 777-ACCUPOWER 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor Description The 777-AccuPower is a fully-programmable 3-phase motor and pump protection relay. It allows motor hp rating, full load amps, efficiency and power factor to be entered and will accurately calculate motor output power. This is most useful with mag-drive pumps or process applications where the process power is desired over the utility power. Voltage, current and power measurements can be displayed as well as fault information and setpoints. The built-in display simplifies troubleshooting and allows the user to easily and precisely configure setpoints. The 777-AccuPower can be used with the optional COM 4-20 output module to give an analog signal proportional to output shaft power, the RS485MS-2W (for limited Modbus capabilities, and for use with the RM1000/RM2000) remote displays listed in the 777 accessories section. Wiring Diagram TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 777-ACCUPOWER 2 3 Features & Benefits COIL CONTACTOR CONTROL POWER A B C STOP M AUTO TO MOTOR Figure 1: Typical Wiring Diagram CURRENT TRANSFORMER WIRING DIAGRAM OR MODEL 777-ACCUPOWER BENEFITS Motor output power measurement Allows use of process power over utility power 3 programmable restart delay timers Program separate restart delay time for rapid cycle protection, motor cool down, and dry-well recovery Built-in Display Visual indication for programming, viewing real-time voltage or current, and last fault code Remote display compatibility Increases safety through remote display of run-hour meter, last four fault codes, without the need to open the cabinet. Aids with arc flash safety regulations Network communications capability Limited Modbus capabilities using RS485MS-2W communication module Accessories RS485MS-2W Communication Module Required to enable the Modbus communications function on Model 77X-type products. COM 4-20 Output Communication Module This module allows communication to a PLC with an analog input and no Modbus input. LITTELFUSE RECOMMENDS USING CTs WITH TERMINALS TO SIMPLIFY INSTALLATION. RM1000 Remote Monitor The RM1000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring for up to 16 devices. 12 - 16 AWG STRANDED WIRE RM2000 Remote Monitor The RM2000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring with event storage and real-time clock for date and time stamp. All CTs must face the same direction, and all CT secondaries must be wired identically, i.e. all X1 terminals enter the main (round) window and return to H1 terminal after exiting the loop conductor window (rectangle). Every CT secondary must make 5 passes through the corresponding main conductor window. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 507, Figure 1. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 123 www.littelfuse.com/777accupower 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION START FEATURES Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection - 3-Phase Pump Protection 777-ACCUPOWER Specifications Input Characteristics Line Voltage Frequency Motor Full Load Amp Range Functional Characteristics TC- Overcurrent Trip Class MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT - Form C) Pilot duty General Purpose General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating Storage Accuracy Measured Horsepower/ Kilowatt Typical Voltage Current GF Current Timing Repeatability Voltage Current Maximum Input Power Pollution Degree Class of Protection Relative Humidity Terminal Torque www.littelfuse.com/777accupower Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Conducted Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Radiated Fast Transient Burst Short Circuit Rating Surge IEC 200-480VAC 50/60Hz 2-800A (external CTs required over 90A) 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 (J prefix enables jam protection feature) 480VA @ 240VAC 10A @ 240VAC ANSI/IEEE Hi-Potential Test Vibration -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Shock Safety Marks UL CE CSA Max. Conductor Size through 777 Dimensions 3%* 1% 3%(<100 amps direct) 15% 5% 1 second 0.5% of nominal voltage 1% (<100 amps direct) 10 W 3 IP20, NEMA 1 (finger safe) 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 7 in.-lbs. Weight Mounting Method IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3 10V/m IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5 kV input power 100kA 61000-4-5 Level 3, 2kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 min.) IEC 68-2-6, 10-55Hz, 1mm peak-to-peak, 2 hrs, 3 axis IEC 68-2-27, 30g, 3 axis, 11ms duration, half-sine pulse UL508, UL1053 IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1 C22.2 0.65" with insulation H 77.47 mm (3.05"); W 97.79 mm (3.85"); D 128.27 mm (5.05") 1.3 lbs. (20.8 oz., 589.67 g) Surface mount (4 - #8 screws) or DIN rail mount *On a well balanced system within recommended current range. 124 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection - Single-Phase Pump Protection 77C-KW/HP SERIES Single-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor Description The 77C-KW/HP and 77C-LR-KW/HP are fully programmable pump protection relays which will monitor the voltage and current for high or low voltage, overload and underload conditions based on power, in one package. The underpower trip feature is desirable anytime the current vs.load characteristic is non-linear or has little change. In general terms, smaller motors and slow-speed motors have little change in current over the normal load range. Larger motors that are running light loads will also show small current changes over the operating load range. Common uses include pumping applications where motors run slower than around 3400 rpm and usually have small current vs load changes; such as slow speed mixer or agitator motors up to 50 hp, and magdrive or can pumps. Power is Linear, equal sensitivity at both low and high loads. TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 77C-KW/HP WITH MOTOR CONTROL L2 Power L1 COIL No Load CONTACTOR B C 240 VAC OR LESS NOTE: PHASES A & C ARE INACTIVE. START OFF TO MOTOR TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 77C-KW/HP WITH EXTERNAL CT LITTELFUSE RECOMMENDS USING CTs THAT HAVE TERMINALS TO AID B CONVENIENCE WHEN INSTALLING CTs. 10 - 12 AWG STRANDED WIRE A 120-240VAC 1O 50/60 HZ B Full Load Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Underload protection Increases reliability for non-linear motors where the load characteristic has little change Built-in display Visual indication for programming, viewing real-time voltage, current, kilowatts or horsepower, and last fault code 15 programmable criteria settings Allows user flexibility to fine-tune the relay for maximum protection in any application. Last fault memory Provides instant troubleshooting diagnostics Remote display compatibility Increases safety through remote display of real-time data and fault history, without the need to open the cabinet. Aids with arc flash safety regulations. Flexible reset Reset options: automatic, manual using pushbutton on relay, or remotely with optional 777-MRSW or OL-RESET remote reset kit. Network communications capability Compatible with Modbus using optional communications module (RS485MS-2W) PILOT AUTO A No Load The Littelfuse PumpSaver relay provides the high sensivity of a power monitor to protect pump motors from dry run and deadhead conditions. STOP HAND M Full Load C PILOT DUTY RATING 480VA AT 240VAC Ordering Information 1O MOTOR NOTE: PHASES A & C ARE INACTIVE. USE PHASE B FOR ALL ACTIVE CURRENT MEASUREMENTS. CT SECONDARY MUST MAKE FIVE PASSES THROUGH THE PHASE B CONDUCTOR WINDOW. NOTE: OTHER NECESSARY CONNECTIONS ARE NOT SHOWN For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 507, Figure 1. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 125 MODEL LINE VOLTAGE MOTOR FULL AMP RANGE DESCRIPTION 77C-KW/HP 100-240VAC 2-90A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT (Form C) relay contacts 77C-LR-KW/HP 100-240VAC 1-9A (external CTs required above 9A) Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT (Form C) relay contacts www.littelfuse.com/77ckwhp 7 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION CONTROL POWER A Current is not linear, low sensitivity for low loads and high sensitivity for high loads. Current Wiring Diagram Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection - Single-Phase Pump Protection 77C-KW/HP SERIES Accessories Specifications Input Characteristics Supplt Voltage Frequency Motor Full Load Amp Range 77C-KW/HP RS485MS-2W Communication Module Required to enable the Modbus communications function on Model 77X-type products. Communication Adapters * RS485-RS232-Converter with cable & plug * RS485-USB-Converter with cable & plug * RS232-USB-Converter Specifications match industry standard. 77C-LR-KW/HP Short Circuit Withstand Rating Power Consumption Output Contact Rating SPDT (Form C) RM1000 Remote Monitor The RM1000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring for up to 16 devices. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 RM2000 Remote Monitor The RM2000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring with event storage and real-time clock for date and time stamp. Expected Life Mechanical Electrical Accuracy at 25 C (77 F) Voltage Current Timing Repeatability Voltage Current Safety Marks UL CE CSA Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Conducted Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Radiated Fast Transient Burst Surge IEC Solutions Software: Solutions-M Software features include data logging, real-time data monitoring and fault and event monitoring. 777-MRSW Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver(R) and PumpSaver(R) products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. OL-RESET Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver(R) and PumpSaver(R) products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. ANSI/IEEE Hi-potential Test Vibration Shock Mechanical Dimensions Maximum conductor size through holes Terminal Torque Enclosure Material Weight Mounting Methods www.littelfuse.com/77ckwhp 126 100-240 VAC, 1O 50-60 Hz 2-25 Amps (Loops Required) 26-90 Amps (Direct) 91-800 Amps (External CT's) 1.0 Amps - 2.0 Amps (additional Loop) 2.0 Amps - 9.0 Amps (Direct) 100kA per UL and CSA 5W (Maximum) Pilot duty rating: 480 VA @ 240 VAC General purpose: 10A @ 240 VAC 1 x 10 6 operations 1 x 105 operations at rated load 1% 3% (Direct, No External CTs) 5% 1 second 0.5% of nominal voltage 1% (Direct, No External CTs) UL508, UL1053 IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1 C22.2 No. 14 IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3 10V/m IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 2kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 min.) IEC 68-2-6, 10-55Hz, 1mm peak-to-peak, 2 hours, 3 axis IEC 68-2-27, 30g, 3 axis, 11ms duration, half-sine pulse H 77.47 mm (3.05"); W 97.79 mm (3.85"); D 128.27 mm (5.05") 0.65" (with insulation) 7 in.-lbs. polycarbonate 1.2 lbs 35mm DIN rail or surface mount (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection - Single-Phase Pump Protection 77C-KW/HP SERIES Environmental Temperature Range Ambient Operating Ambient Storage Pollution Degree Class of Protection Relative Humidity Programmable Operating Points LV- Low Voltage Threshold HV- High Voltage Threshold MULT- # of Conductors or CT Ratio (XXX:5) 77C: 77C-LR: OC- Overcurrent Threshold TC- Overcurrent Trip Class * LP/PWS (PWS = LP Range) Range 85V - HV Setting LV Setting - 264V 1-10 Conductors or 100-800 Ratio 1 or 2 (20-100A) / MULT or 80-120% of CT Primary 5, J5, 10, J10, 15, J15, 20, J20, 30, J30, or LIn (linear) 0, 2 - 500 Seconds 7 2 - 500 Minutes/Seconds 2 - 500 Minutes/Seconds MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION RD1- Rapid Cycle Timer RD2- Restart Delay After All Faults Except Undercurrent (motor cool down timer)** RD3- Restart Delay After Undercurrent (dry well recovery timer) #RU- Number of Restarts After Undercurrent ADDR- RS485 Address #RO-Number of Restarts After Overcurrent -20 - 70 C (-4 - 158F) -40 - 80 C (-40 - 176F) 3 IP20, NEMA 1 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, A (Automatic) A01- A99 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, A (Automatic) 1 = 0.01 - 0.99 KW 2 = 1.00 - 9.95 KW 3 = 10.0 - 99.5 KW 4 = 100 - 650 KW 5 = 0.01 - 1.30 HP 6 = 1.34 - 13.3 HP 8 = 13.4 - 133 HP 9 = 134 - 871 HP * If J Prefix is displayed in trip class setting, jam protection is enabled. If programmed to Lln position, overcurrent trip delays are fixed linear-type delays set in OPT1 position. ** RD2 & RD3 can be changed from minutes to seconds under program position OPT2. SETTING 0 1 RD2 Minutes Minutes RD3 Minutes Seconds (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls SETTING 2 3 RD2 Seconds Seconds RD3 Minutes Seconds 127 www.littelfuse.com/77ckwhp Protection Relays Motor and Pump Protection - Temperature Monitoring SIO-RTD-02-00 Temperature Input Monitor Description The SIO-RTD is a microprocessor-based data-acquisition system for measuring temperatures accurately with resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) and for monitoring 4-20 mA analog-output devices in industrial environments. RTD inputs are noise-filtered and automatically calibrated for lead-length compensation, ambient temperature, and other factors providing accurate readings through the specified temperature range for several types of RTD devices. Features & Benefits 3-WIRE RTD CONNECTION tO tO 1 2 3 4 5 C D R S C D R C D R S C D R S H H P G I NP 7 INP 8 INP 6 INP 5 2 3 4 5 PWR 6 OPEN ALTERNATE 2-WIRE RTD CONNECTION RTD R D C ALTERNATE 4-20 mA CONNECTION RTD S H D R C S IO- RT D INPUT MODULE COMM PWR + COMM 2 INP 2 INP 3 INP 4 S S 0 4 R D C H R D C R D C H R D C V - + V INP 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 S H 47.5 1% tO tO tO tO 4-20 mA tO RED GREEN WHITE - +24 VDC POWER SUPPLY WHITE BLACK GREEN BLACK + CSA Class 1 Zone 2 Hazardous-location Certified Can be mounted in hazardous areas Individually-selectable input type Flexible; can be used with Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, Cu10 RTD or 4-20 mA inputs Conformal coating Protects circuit boards against corrosion and moisture Remote monitoring Up to 1.2 km away from network master Notch filter Rejects noise from motor monitoring applications Input Voltage RTD Types RTD Range Analog Range Accuracy (Pt100, Ni100, Ni120) (Cu10) (4-20 mA) Lead Compensation Communications Conformally Coated Approvals Dimensions 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 OPEN 1 Single module can collect multiple data points Specifications 6 ADDRESS 01 SELECTED SEE TABLE 1 BENEFITS 8 inputs tO tO ADDRESS SELECTION SWITCHES RED MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Wiring Diagram FEATURES INTERCONNECT CABLE BELDEN 3124A SHOWN +/B TO NEXT SIO-RTD Warranty Mounting 18 to 32 Vdc, 2W Pt100 (default), Ni100, Ni120, Cu10 -40 to 200 C with open and short detection 4-20 mA 1 C 3 C 0.1 mA Up to 20 Modbus RTU(R) Standard feature cCSAus H 87 mm (3.43"); W 112.5 mm (4.43"); D 56 mm (2.2") 5 years DIN, Surface -/A TIA-485 MODBUS MASTER For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 515, Figure 49. www.littelfuse.com/sio-rtd 128 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS Protect and disablea pump if a hazardous condition arises. PumpSaver(R) offers a wide variety of controls for both single phase and three phase applications. Intrinsically safe relays are specifically designed to interface between hazardous and non-hazardous areas. ACBC-120 Series Alarm Controller/Battery Charging Unit .... 130 PC-102 Series Dual Channel Switch ................................. 132 PC-105 5-Channel Pump Controller ....................... 133 PC-XXX-LLC-CZ Series Liquid Level Control Relays ....................... 134 PC-XXX-LLC-GM Series Liquid Level Control Relays ...................... 134 Single-Channel Seal-Leak Detector .......... 136 460-15-100-LLS Single-Channel Liquid Level Sensor .......... 137 460-15-100-SLD Single-Channel Seal-Leak Detector .......... 139 LLC1 Series Open Board Liquid Level Control ............... 141 LLC2 Series Open Board Liquid Level Control ............... 143 LLC4 Series Octal Plug-In Liquid Level Control ............ 145 LLC5 Series Liquid Level Control .................................. 147 LLC6 Series Low Level Cutoff Liquid Level Control ...... 149 LLC8 Series Low Level Cutoff Liquid Level Control ...... 151 Alternating Relays ALT Series 8-pin Plug-in Alternating Relays ............... 153 ALT-XXX-1-SW / ALT-XXX-3-SW Series Alternating Relays ..................................... 155 ARP Series Alternating Relays ..................................... 157 50R-400-ALT Alternating Relay ....................................... 159 Intrinsically Safe Relays ISS-100 For More Information... and to download our Fresh Water Pumping Catalog, visit Intrinsically Safe Switch ........................... 160 ISS-101 Intrinsically Safe Switch ........................... 161 ISS-102 Series Two-Channel Intrinsically Safe Switch ..... 163 ISS-105 Series Five-Channel Intrinsically Safe Switch ..... 165 Littelfuse.com/PumpProtection (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 129 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 8 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 201-100-SLD Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls ACBC-120 SERIES Alarm Controller and Battery Charger for pump control panels Description The ACBC-120 Series is a dual purpose alarm controller/battery charging unit. When there is a loss of 120VAC power, the ACBC-120's primary function as an alarm controller activates. When this power loss occurs, input power is switched to a 12VDC, lead-acid, rechargeable backup battery and a 12VDC alarm consisting of a strobe light and/or a horn is activated. The horn follows a 2 second on/2 second off pattern with a "horn silence" option to turn the sound off. An LED indicator on the unit also signals that the device has entered the alarm mode. When 120VAC input is present the alarm circuit can be tested and the unit's secondary function as a 12VDC backup battery charger is activated. In fast charge mode, the unit has the capability to source up to 100mA of charging current. However, the device normally charges at a current of 14mA in maintenance mode. The alarm circuit can be tested by pressing the "test" button located on the front of the unit or by activating an external switch via the "alarm contact" pin. The device has the ability to signal low battery voltage if the voltage drops below 10.5VDC. The device can also detect if no battery is present or if the battery is connected backwards. In either of these cases, the ACBC-120 will signal a battery error and will not attempt to charge. Wiring Diagram PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 Must use Model SD12-PC socket for UL Rating! *Note: Manufacturer's recommended screw terminal torque for the SD Series Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. Features & Benefits For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION ACBC-120 120VAC Does not include SD12-PC socket for mounting ACBC-120-SD 120VAC Includes SD12-PC socket for mounting www.littelfuse.com/acbc120 FEATURES BENEFITS Controls 12VDC alarm circuit Activates strobe and/or horn when power loss occurs Selectable fast charge mode Unit sources higher charging current up to 100mA (normal mode is 14mA) Trip delay timer Prevents nuisance tripping Battery fault detection and reverse polarity protection Signals if battery voltage drops below 10.5VDC and can detect if no battery is present or if the battery is connected backwards LED indication Visual indication of unit status or trip Test button Preventative maintenance check of the alarm circuit by pressing the test button on the unit or externally through alarm contact connection Accessories SD12-PC 12-pin Rectangle Socket Rectangle Socket for the ACBC-120. 12-pin surface mountable. 130 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls ACBC-120 SERIES Specifications Input Characteristics Supply Voltage AC Input Voltage Frequency AC Input Current AC Input Power Functional Characteristics Battery Charging Characteristics Acceptable Battery Type Fast Charge Current Maintenance Charge Current Low Battery Alert Level Output Characteristics Strobe Light Alarm Output Horn Alarm Output General Characteristics Temperature Range Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency, Radiated 150MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 4, 4kV input lines; 4kV signal lines Safety Marks UL (SD12-PC socket required) UL508 (File #E68520) Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75"); W 60.325 mm (2.375"); D 104.775 mm (4.125") (with socket) Weight 0.7 lb. (11.2 oz., 317.51 g) Mounting Method Surface mount with #8 or #10 screws (plug into SD12-PC socket) Socket Available Model SD12-PC (UL Rating 600V) The 600V socket can be surface mounted 120V +/-10% 50/60Hz 0.018A (max.) 0.003 (typical) 2.4W (max.) fast charge current 0.4W (typical) maint. charge current 12V lead-acid rechargeable 100mA +/-10% 14mA +/-50% 10.5V 12VDC@1A (max.) 12VDC@1A (max.) -40 to 60C (-40 to 140F) 8 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 131 www.littelfuse.com/acbc120 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls PC-102 SERIES Dual Seal-Leak Detector or Seal-Leak & Over-Temperature Detector Description The PC-102 is a dual-channel switch that provides dual protection against seal failures and over-temperature in submersible pumping applications. Both units have two form-C isolated output relays and two LEDs, which illuminate when each associated output relay is energized. The sensitivity adjustment (4.7k-100kOhms) allows you to define the input impedance at which the output relays will change state. The sensitivity for the over-temperature detector can be set to 4k Ohms with use of the DIP switches. This unit may not be compatible with Flygt pumps. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram PC-102CICI-DL PC-102CICI-LT BENEFITS Finger-safe terminals Meets IEC 61000 safety requirements Compact design for DIN rail or surface mount Allows flexiblility in panel installation LED Status Indicator Visual indication of relay engagement Two input channels Flexibility for pump-up/pump-down or two-channel switch applications Specifications 8 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS FEATURES Input Characteristics Frequency Functional Characteristics Probe Sense Voltage Sensitivity Sensitivity (for temp) Input Logic Debounce Time Delay Output Characteristics Relay Output Rating (2 Form C isolated) Pilot Duty General Purpose General Characteristics Temperature Range Maximum Input Power Depluggable Connector Output Relay Status Indicators Terminal Torque Wire range Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) Fast Transients For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 10. Ordering Information MODEL PC-102CICI-DL PC-102CICI-LT LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 120VAC nominal Dual seal-leak detector uses inputs to sense seal failures and energize the output relay. Input logic direct or inverted is DIP switch selectable 120VAC nominal Seal-leak and over-temperature detector uses one input to sense seal failures and the temperature input to detect motor overheating. Configurable to suit various probes. Seal input logic direct or inverted, plus over-temperature trip reset automatic or manual, is DIP switch selectable www.littelfuse.com/pc102 Safety Marks UL Dimensions Weight Mounting Method 132 50/60Hz 5vdc pulsed 4.7k-100k Selectable 4k with DIP switches Direct or inverted 0.5 or 2 seconds 180VA @ 120VAC, C150 5A @ 240VAC -20 to 55C (-4 to 131F) 2W Phoenix Contact-Series MSTB plugs LEDs 4.5 in.-lbs. 12-20 AWG IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air. IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power 2kV inputs/outputs UL508 (File #E68520) H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 52.93 mm (2.08"); D 59.69 mm (2.35") 0.9 lb. (14.4 oz., 408.23 g) 35mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls PC-105 Pump controller with duplex, triplex or quadplex functionality or 5-channel relay Description The PC-105 is a 5-channel pump controller designed to handle multiple pump applications. Alternatively, it can operate as a 5-channel switch. The PC-105's control functions support all of the popular industrystandard multi-pump, pump-up and pump-down configurations. It can indicate low, high and out-of-sequence alarms and use alternating and non-alternating pump control. The non-alternating pump can be used as a jockey pump or emergency pump. Using the built-in DIP switches, individual pumps can be disabled when taken out of service for repair or maintenance. Features g Wiring Diagram Load 1 Load 2 Load 3 Load 4 Load 5 120 VAC #2 #3 #4 #5 OUTPUT OUTPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 COMMON IC g Duplex SPS (separate pump stop) pump control g Duplex, triplex or quadplex pump control g Pump-up or pump-down functions g External silence, reset and alternation configuration g Five-channel relay configuration g DIN rail or surface mountable Input Characteristics Supply Voltage Frequency Functional Characteristics Probe Sense Voltage Output Characteristics Relay Output Rating: Pilot Duty General Purpose General Characteristics Temperature Range Maximum Input Power Wire range Terminal Torque Pump In-rush delay Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) Fast Transients TIME DELAY OUTPUT INPUT Variable time delay/lag pump delay from 2-255 seconds 8 Specifications INPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT Low, high and out-of-sequence alarms g 1-800-843-8848 www.pumpsaver.com Figure 11: Typical Wiring for 5-channel Relay - Mode 0 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 511, Figure 12. Safety Marks UL Dimensions Weight Mounting Method 120VAC 50*/60Hz 5vdc continuous 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 7A @ 240VAC -20 to 55C (-4 to 131F) 4W 12 to 20 AWG 4.5 in.-lbs. (max.) 2 seconds IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air. IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power 2kV inputs/outputs UL508 (File #E68520) H 94.06 mm (3.703"); W 127.64 mm (5.025"); D 59.69 mm (2.35") 1.2 lbs. (19.2 oz., 544.31 g) 35 mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 133 www.littelfuse.com/pc105 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS #1 Compact design g Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls PC-XXX-LLC-CZ / PC-XXX-LLC-GM SERIES Liquid Level Control Description Wiring Diagram TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR PC-XXX-LLC-CZ The PC-xxx-LLC-CZ and PC-xxx-LLC-GM Series are liquid level control relays used to control conductive liquid pumping operations in a pump-up or pump-down application. The units come in two different voltage ranges (see specs below). The units have an adjustable sensitivity knob (4.7k to 100k ohms) that is set according to the resistance level at which you want the probes (sold separately) to sense the conductive liquid. The units have a built-in debounce time delay that prevents the relay from energizing if the probe resistance momentarily goes above or below the sensitivity setpoint (due to liquid splashing in the tank). The units operate their internal relay based on inputs from a high and low probe and a common reference (when a conductive tank is used) or common probe (when a non-conductive tank is used). PC-xxx-LLC-CZ Compatible with Crouzet's PNR & PNRU series liquid level control PC-xxx-LLC-GM g g Must use Model OT08PC or P1011-6 socket for UL Rating! Note: Manufacturer's recommended screw terminal torque for the OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. 8 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS Compatible with Gems' Series 16M general purpose control Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Debounce time delay (2 seconds) Prevents rapid cycling of the pump due to turbulance in the tank Adjustable sensitivity (4.7 to 100Kohms) Allows user to fine tune the sensing resistance to prevent false tripping due to foam or debris Dual probe design (plus a common) Allows user the ability to set the level differential required Ordering Information TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR PC-XXX-LLC-GM MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION PC-100-LLC-CZ 95-120VAC Compatible with Crouzet's PNR & PNRU Series liquid level control PC-200-LLC-CZ 190-240VAC Compatible with Crouzet's PNR & PNRU Series liquid level control PC-100-LLC-GM 95-120VAC Compatible with Gems' Series 16M liquid level control PC-200-LLC-GM 190-240VAC Compatible with Gems' Series 16M liquid level control For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. www.littelfuse.com/pcxxxllccz-pcxxxllcgm 134 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls PC-XXX-LLC-CZ / PC-XXX-LLC-GM SERIES Accessories General Characteristics Temperature Range Maximum Input Power Sandards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) Fast Transients OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10A @ 600VAC. Specifications Input Characteristics Supply Voltage PC-100-LLC-CZ PC-100-LLC-GM PC-200-LLC-CZ PC-200-LLC-GM Frequency Functional Characteristics Probe Sense Voltage Debounce Time Delay Probe Sensitivity Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating Pilot Duty General Purpose Safety Marks UL (OT08PC octal socket required) CE Dimensions (when installed in socket base) 95-120VAC 95-120VAC 190-240VAC 190-240VAC 50/60Hz Weight Mounting Method 5VDC pulsed 2 seconds 4.7k to 100k Adjustable Socket Available -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) 5W IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air. 150MHz, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 2kV input power and controls UL508 (File #E68520) IEC60947-6-2 H 44.45 mm (1.75"); W 60.33 mm (2.375"); D 104.78 mm (4.125") 0.65 lb. (10.4 oz., 294.84 g) DIN rail or surface mount (plug into OT08PC socket) Model OT08PC (UL Rating 600V) The 600V socket can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail. 480VA @ 240VAC 10A @240VAC 8 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 135 www.littelfuse.com/pcxxxllccz-pcxxxllcgm Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls 201-100-SLD Single-Channel Seal-Leak Detector * UL listed when used in combination with OT08PC socket only. Description The model 201-100-SLD is an 8-pin plug-in style seal-leak detector to sense seal failures on submersible pumps. A microcontroller-based relay that monitors the shaft seal of a submersible pump motor. A resistive probe is installed in the seal cavity. If water leaks into the pump, the resistance measured by the probe decreases. When the resistance drops below the sensitivity setpoint, the unit will trip and the relay contacts will change state. The unit will automatically reset when a fault is cleared. Features & Benefits g LED status indicator g Compact plug-in design g DIN rail or surface mountable via octal base Accessories OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10A @ 600VAC. Specifications Wiring Diagram Control Voltage Frequency Sensitivity Probe Sense Voltage Output contact Rating Pilot Duty General Purpose Operating Temperature Storage Maximum Input Power Relative Humidity Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated Fast Transient Burst PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 IEC ANSI/IEEE Hi-Potential Test UL* CE Enclosure Dimensions For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. Weight Mounting Method Socket Available Approvals Note: Manufacturer's recommended screw terminal torque for the RB Series and OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. www.littelfuse.com/201100SLD 110/120VAC nominal 50/60Hz 4.7k-100k 5vdc pulsed SPDT 480VA @ 240VAC 10A @ 240VAC -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 5W 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air 150MHz, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power and controls IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 4kV line-to-line; level 4, 4kV line-to-ground C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 min.) UL508 (File #E68520) IEC 60947-6-2 Polycarbonate H 44.45 mm (1.75"); W 60.325 mm (2.375"); D (with socket) 104.78 mm (4.125") 0.7 lb. (11.2 oz., 317.51 g) DIN rail or surface mount (plug into OT08PC socket) Model OT08PC (UL Rating 600V) UL, CE *Must use Model OT08PC socket for UL Rating! The 600V socket can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail. 136 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls 460-15-100-LLS Single-Channel Liquid Level Sensor Description The 460-15-100-LLS is a liquid level sensor to detect the presence of conductive liquids. A probe is mounted at the desired tank level and connected to the PumpSaver(R). When the probe is submersed, the relay's output contacts will change state as soon as the debounce time expires. The adjustable debounce timer is intended to prevent nuisance actuating due to waves or splashing in the tank. Relay logic can be inverted so the relay's output contacts change state when the probe is no longer submersed. This makes the unit versatile for use in pump-up and pump-down applications. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram FEATURES BENEFITS Unique Probe Protection Probes are protected from scale build up through pulsed DC signal between the probes Invertible relay logic Allows flexibility to be used in pump-up and pump-down applications Adjustable debounce timer Prevents nuisance actuating caused by waves or splashing in the tank LED status indicators Provides visual indication of the relay status 8 Specifications Sensitivity Functional Characteristics Probe Sense Voltage Debounce Time Delay Output Characteristics Output contact Rating - (Two Form A - SPST) Pilot Duty General Purpose General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating Storage Maximum Input Power Class of Protection Relative Humidity Terminal Torque Wire Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated Fast Transient Burst For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 10. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 137 110/120VAC nominal 50/60Hz (Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%) 100k 5vdc pulsed 2-60 seconds 360VA @ 240VAC 8A @ 240VAC -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 2W IP20, NEMA 1 (finger safe) 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 4.5 in.-lbs. 12-20 AWG IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air 150MHz, 10 V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power and controls www.littelfuse.com/46015100LLS PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS Input Characteristics Control Voltage Frequency Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls 460-15-100-LLS Surge IEC ANSI/IEEE Hi-Potential Test Safety Marks UL CE Enclosure Dimensions Weight Mounting Method IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 4kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000 V for 1 min.) UL508 (File #E68520) IEC 60947 Polycarbonate H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 52.93 mm (2.08"); D 59.69mm (2.35") 1 lb. (16 oz., 453.59 g) 35mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 www.littelfuse.com/46015100LLS 138 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls 460-15-100-SLD Single-Channel Seal-Leak Detector Description The 460-15-100-SLD is a seal-leak detector to sense seal failures on submersible pumps. A microcontroller-based relay monitors the shaft seal of a submersible pump motor. A resistive probe is installed in the seal cavity. If water leaks into the pump, the resistance measured by the probe decreases. When the resistance drops below the sensitivity setpoint, the unit will trip and the relay contacts will change state. Output relay logic can be reversed by removing an external jumper. The unit will automatically reset when a fault is cleared. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram FEATURES BENEFITS Unique probe protection logic Probes are protected from scale build up through pulsed DC signal between the probes Invertible relay logic Allows flexibility to be used in pump-up and pump-down applications LED status indicators Provides visual indication of the relay status 2 relay contacts Control independent loads on different circuits Specifications Input Characteristics Control Voltage Frequency For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 10. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 139 4.7k-100k 5vdc pulsed 360VA @ 240VAC 8A @ 240VAC -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 2W IP20, NEMA 1 (finger safe) 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 4.5 in.-lbs. AWG 12-20 AWG IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air 150MHz, 10 V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power and controls www.littelfuse.com/46015100SLD 8 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS Functional Characteristics Sensitivity Probe Sense Voltage Output Characteristics Output contact Rating - (Two Form A - SPST) Pilot Duty General Purpose General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating Storage Maximum Input Power Class of Protection Relative Humidity Terminal Torque Wire Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated Fast Transient Burst 110/120VAC nominal 50/60Hz (Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%) Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls 460-15-100-SLD Surge IEC ANSI/IEEE Hi-Potential Test Safety Marks UL CE Enclosure Dimensions Weight Mounting Method IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 4kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000 V for 1 min.) UL508 (File #E68520) IEC 60947 Polycarbonate H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 52.93 mm (2.08"); D 59.69 mm (2.35") 1 lb. (16 oz., 453.59 g) 35mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 www.littelfuse.com/46015100SLD 140 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls LLC1 SERIES Open Board Liquid Level Controls Description Wiring Diagram P = Probe L = Load V = Voltage S = Sensitivity Adjustment C Metal Tank or use additional Probe Contacts A, B & C are isolated. Connect common to conductive tank or an additional probe as required. L1 N/L2 Features & Benefits For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 40. FEATURES BENEFITS Isolated AC voltage on probe Prevents scale buildup on the probe Open PCB design Cost effective design for OEM equipment and commercial appliances Conformally coated PCB Protects against moisture and corrosion Sensitivity adjustment Provides accurate level sensing while ignoring foam or floating debris Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE OPERATION TIME DELAY SENSE RESISTANCE MOUNTING LLC14A1AX 120VAC Drain 1s Adjustable 0.5 in nylon standoffs (3) LLC14A5AX 120VAC Drain 5s Adjustable 0.5 in nylon standoffs (3) LLC14B15AX 120VAC Fill 15s Adjustable 0.5 in nylon standoffs (3) LLC14B1AX 120VAC Fill 1s Adjustable 0.5 in nylon standoffs (3) LLC14B60AX 120VAC Fill 60s Adjustable 0.5 in nylon standoffs (3) LLC16A25AX 230VAC Drain 25s Adjustable 0.5 in nylon standoffs (3) LLC16A3AX 230VAC Drain 3s Adjustable 0.5 in nylon standoffs (3) If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 141 www.littelfuse.com/LLC1 8 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS The LLC1 Series is a single probe conductive liquid level control designed for OEM equipment and commercial appliances. This unit may be ordered with fixed fill or fixed drain operation. A time delay (1-60s) prevents rapid cycling of the output relay. On adjustable units, the sensitivity adjustment allows accurate level sensing while ignoring foaming agents and floating debris. Isolated AC voltage is provided at the probe to prevent electrolysis. A trickle current of less than 1mA determines the presence or absence of liquid between the probe and common. The LLC1 Series printed circuit board is conformal coated to resist moisture and corrosion. Operation Drain (Pump-Down Mode): When the liquid level rises and touches the probe, a fixed time delay begins. This time delay prevents rapid cycling of the output relay and its load. At the end of the time delay, the output relay energizes and remains energized until the liquid level falls below the probe. The output relay then de-energizes and remains de-energized until the liquid again touches the probe. Fill (Pump-Up Mode): When the liquid level falls below the probe, a fixed time delay begins. This time delay prevents rapid cycling of the output relay and its load. At the end of the time delay, the output relay energizes and remains energized until the liquid level rises and touches the probe. The output relay then de-energizes and remains de-energized until the liquid level again falls below the probe. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls LLC1 SERIES Accessories Specifications Control Type P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Sense Voltage Sense Resistance Sense Resistance Tolerance P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Time Delay Range Input Voltage Tolerance 24VAC 120 & 230VAC AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Rating PHST-38QTN Electrode Designed for a maximum steam pressure of 240 PSI; 400 F. UL353 Recognized. LLP-24 Threaded Probe (24") Threaded stainless steel probe measuring 24" (61 cm) long. For use with PHST-38QTN liquid level control electrodes. Life Protection Surge Isolation Voltage Mechanical Mounting PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 Termination Dimensions (Open Board) Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Coating Weight www.littelfuse.com/LLC1 142 ON/OFF (single level) resistance sensor with built-in time delay to prevent rapid cycling Low voltage AC between probe & common. Isolated from input & output. Fixed or adjustable to 250K Adjustable - guaranteed range Factory fixed 10% Fixed 1 - 60s in 1s increments 24, 120, or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz Electromechanical relay Non-isolated, SPST & Isolated, SPDT contacts 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 105 IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A 1500V RMS between input, output & probe Surface mount to probe common with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws or 0.50 in. (12.7 mm) nylon standoffs with three #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws (use Terminal 5 for probe common) 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 69.9 mm (2.75"); D 50.8 mm (2.0") -20 to 55C/-40 to 80C Printed circuit board is conformal coated to resist moisture and corrosion 8.7 oz (247 g) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls LLC2 SERIES Open Board Liquid Level Controls Description The LLC2 Series is a dual-probe conductive liquid level control designed for OEM equipment and commercial appliance applications. Models are available for fill or drain operation. Transformer isolated 12VAC is provided at the probes to prevent electrolysis. A trickle current of less than 1mA determines the presence or absence of liquid between the probes and common. On adjustable units, the sensitivity adjustment allows accurate level sensing while ignoring foaming agents and floating debris. The LLC2 Series printed circuit board is conformal coated to resist moisture and corrosion. Operation Drain (Pump-Down Mode): When the liquid level rises and touches the high probe, the output relay energizes and remains energized until the liquid level falls below the low probe. The output relay then de-energizes and remains de-energized until the liquid again touches the high probe. Fill (Pump-Up Mode): When the liquid level falls below the low probe, the output relay energizes and remains energized until the liquid level rises and touches the high probe. The output relay then de-energizes and remains de-energized until the liquid level again falls below the low probe. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Features & Benefits Connect common to conductive tank. Additional probe is necessary for non-conductive or insulated tanks. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 41. 8 FEATURES BENEFITS Isolated 12VAC probes Prevents scale buildup on the probes Open PCB design Cost effective design for OEM equipment and commercial appliances Conformally coated PCB Protects against moisture and corrosion Sensitivity adjustment Provides accurate level sensing while ignoring foam or floating debris Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE OPERATION TERMINATION SENSE RESISTANCE LLC24A2AN 120VAC Drain Terminal block Adjustable to 100k LLC24A2F50N 120VAC Drain Terminal block Fixed 50k LLC24B1AC 120VAC Fill 0.25" Quick connect Adjustable to 100k LLC24B1F26C 120VAC Fill 0.25" Quick connect Fixed 26k LLC24B2F50N 120VAC Fill Terminal block Fixed 50k LLC26A1F25C 230VAC Drain 0.25" Quick connect Fixed 25k P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. PHST-38QTN Electrode Designed for a maximum steam pressure of 240 PSI; 400 F. UL353 Recognized. LLP-24 Threaded Probe (24") Threaded stainless steel probe measuring 24" (61 cm) long. For use with PHST-38QTN liquid level control electrodes. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 143 www.littelfuse.com/LLC2 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS Metal Tank or use additional Probe V = Voltage L = Low Probe H = High Probe C = Probe Common P = Probe S = Sensitivity Adjustment NC = Normally Closed NO = Normally Open Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls LLC2 SERIES Specifications Control Type Sense Voltage Sense Resistance Sense Resistance Tolerance Input Voltage Tolerance 24VAC 120 & 230VAC AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Rating PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 Life Protection Isolation Voltage Mechanical Mounting Termination Dimensions (Open Board) Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Coating Weight www.littelfuse.com/LLC2 Mounting Dimensions 0.163 (4.14) Resistance sensing for high & low level detection of conductive liquids 12VAC at probe terminals Fixed or adjustable to 100K Adjustable: guaranteed range Fixed: 10% DIAGRAM KEY 4.0 (101.6) 24, 120, or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz Electromechanical relay Isolated, SPDT 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 105 3.0 (76.2) 0.5 (12.7) 2.0 (50.8) MODEL NUMBERS ENDING IN: N C W 0.440" (11.176 mm) 0.250" (6.350 mm) X 3.620" (91.948 mm) 3.500" (88.900 mm) Y 2.120" (53.848 mm) 2.500" (63.500 mm) Z 0.190" (4.826 mm) 0.250" (6.350 mm) 0.44 (11.35) 0.25 (6.35) 3.62 (91.9) 3.5 (88.9) 2.12 (53.8) 2.5 (63.5) 0.19 (4.83) 0.25 (6.35) 1500V RMS between input, output, & probe Surface mount with two or four #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) duplex male quick connect terminals. Terminal blocks for up to #14 AWG 2.5 mm2) wire H 101.6 mm (4.0"); W 76.2 mm (3.0"); D 50.8 mm (2.0") -20 to 55C / -40 to 80C Printed circuit board is conformal coated to resist moisture and corrosion 9 oz (255 g) 144 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls LLC4 SERIES Octal Plug-In Liquid Level Controls Description 8-PIN Wiring Diagram P = Probe C = Probe Common V = Voltage Relay contacts are isolated. Metal Tank or use additional Probe L1 N/L2 Connect common to conductive tank. Additional probe is necessary for non-conductive or insulated tanks. Features & Benefits For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 33. FEATURES BENEFITS Isolated 12VAC probes Prevents scale buildup on probe Industry standard 8-pin octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors Sensitivity adjustment Provides accurate level sensing while ignoring foam or floating debris Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE OPERATION TIME DELAY SENSE RESISTANCE MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE OPERATION LLC42A10A 24VAC Drain 10s Adjustable 1 - 250k LLC44B1A 24VAC Fill LLC42A1A 24VAC Drain 1s Adjustable 1 - 250k LLC44A60A 120VAC Drain 60s Adjustable 1 - 250k LLC42B15A 24VAC Fill 15s Adjustable 1 - 250k LLC44B20A 120VAC Fill 20s Adjustable 1 - 250k LLC44A10A 120VAC Drain 10s Adjustable 1 - 250k LLC44B2A 120VAC Fill 2s Adjustable 1 - 250k LLC44A15A 120VAC Drain 15s Adjustable 1 - 250k LLC44B30A 120VAC Fill 30s Adjustable 1 - 250k LLC44A1A 120VAC Drain 1s Adjustable 1 - 250k LLC44B4A 120VAC Fill 4s Adjustable 1 - 250k LLC44A2A 120VAC Drain 2s Adjustable 1 - 250k LLC44B5A 120VAC Fill 5s Adjustable 1 - 250k LLC44A4A 120VAC Drain 4s Adjustable 1 - 250k LLC44B5F100 120VAC Fill 5s Fixed 100k LLC44A5A 120VAC Drain 5s Adjustable 1 - 250k TIME SENSE RESISTANCE DELAY Adjustable 1 - 250k If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 145 www.littelfuse.com/LLC4 8 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS The LLC4 combines resistance sensing circuitry with solid-state timing to provide single probe level maintenance. On adjustable units, the sensitivity adjustment allows accurate level sensing while ignoring foaming agents and floating debris. Isolated 12VAC is provided at the probe to prevent electrolysis. A trickle current of less than 1mA determines the presence or absence of conductive liquid between the probe and common. The LLC4 Series can be used with many types of low voltage (resistance changing) transducers to perform other control functions like temperature limit control, photo limit control, condensation sensing, and ice sensing. Operation Drain (Pump-Down Mode): When the liquid level rises and touches the probe, the time delay begins. This time delay prevents rapid cycling of the output relay and its load. At the end of the time delay, the output relay energize and remain energized until the liquid level falls below the probe level. The output relay de-energize and remain de-energized until the liquid rises and touches the probe. Fill (Pump-Up Mode): When the liquid level falls below the probe, the time delay begins. This time delay prevents rapid cycling of the output relay and its load. At the end of the time delay, the output relay energize and remain energized until the liquid level rises and touches the probe. The output relay then de-energize and remain de-energized until the liquid level again falls below the probe level. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls LLC4 SERIES Accessories Specifications Control Type BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. Sensing Voltage Sensing Resistance Sensing Resistance Tolerance NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 holddown clips. Input Voltage Tolerance 24VAC 120 & 230VAC AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Rating PSC8 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use with NDS-8 Octal Socket. Sold in pairs. PHST-38QTN Electrode Designed for a maximum steam pressure of 240 PSI; 400 F. UL353 Recognized. Protection Surge Isolation Voltage Mechanical Mounting Termination Dimensions PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 LLP-24 Threaded Probe (24") Threaded stainless steel probe measuring 24" (61 cm) long. For use with PHST-38QTN liquid level control electrodes. Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight www.littelfuse.com/LLC4 146 ON/OFF (single level) resistance sensor with built-in time delay to prevent rapid cycling 12VAC Fixed or adjustable to 250K Adjustable: 1K 500 at low end; 250K 25% at high end Factory fixed: 10% or 500, whichever is greater 24, 120, or 230VAC -15%, +20% -20%, +10% 50/60 Hz Electromechanical relay Isolated, SPDT 4A resistive @ 240VAC; 1/10 hp @ 240VAC IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A 1500V RMS between input, output & probe Plug-in socket Octal 8-pin plug-in H 73.9 mm (2.91"); W 60.7 mm (2.39"); D 45.2 mm (1.78") -20 to 60C/-40 to 80C 6 oz (170 g) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls LLC5 SERIES Liquid Level Controls Description The LLC5 provides dual probe conductive liquid level control in a convenient octal plug-in package. Models are available for fixed fill or drain operation. Isolated, pulsed DC voltage on the probes prevents electrolytic plating. Less than 1 mA of current is used to sense the presence of conductive liquid between the probes and common. On adjustable units, the sensitivity adjustment eliminates false tripping caused by floating debris and foaming agents. Operation Drain (Pump-Down Mode): When the liquid level rises and touches the high level probe, the output relay and LED energize and remain energized until the liquid level falls below the low level probe. The output relay and LED de-energize and remain de-energized until the liquid rises and touches the high level probe. Fill (Pump-Up Mode): When the liquid level falls below the low level probe, the output relay and LED energize and remain energized until the liquid level rises and touches the high level probe. The output relay and LED de-energize and remain de-energized until the liquid level again falls below the low level probe. 8-PIN Wiring Diagram HP = HIGH LEVEL PROBE LP = LOW LEVEL PROBE C = PROBE COMMON V = VOLTAGE Metal Tank or use additional Probe L1 N/L2 Relay contacts are isolated. Connect common to conductive tank. Additional probe is necessary for nonconductive or insulated tanks. Features & Benefits Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION LLC52AA 24VAC For Drain (pump-down) operation with adjustable sense resistance LLC52BA 24VAC For Fill (pump-up) operation with adjustable sense resistance LLC54AA 120VAC For Drain (pump-down) operation with adjustable sense resistance LLC54AAS 120VAC For Drain (pump-down) operation with adjustable sense resistance and reverse connection (#8 low, #6 high) LLC54AF10 120VAC For Drain (pump-down) operation with fixed sense resistance of 10 k LLC54BA 120VAC For Fill (pump-up) operation with adjustable sense resistance LLC54BAS 120VAC For Fill (pump-up) operation with adjustable sense resistance and reverse connection (#8 low, #6 high) LLC56AA 230 VAC For Drain (pump-down) operation with adjustable sense resistance BENEFITS Unique Probe Protection logic Probes are protected from scale build up through pulsed DC signal between the probes. LED status indicatior Visual indication of relay engagement in pump-up or pump-down activity Isolated 5A SPDT contacts Allows control of loads for AC voltage Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. PSC8 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use with NDS-8 Octal Socket. Sold in pairs. Note: use of the PSC8 clips partley covers the LED window of the LLC5 unit. Use of alternative socket base P1011-6 with its corresponding hold down clips PSCRB8 do not cover up the LED window, but the socket base is not DIN rail mountable. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 147 www.littelfuse.com/LLC5 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 43. 8 FEATURES Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls LLC5 SERIES Specifications Accessories Control Type PHST-38QTN Electrode Designed for a maximum steam pressure of 240 PSI; 400 F. UL353 Recognized. Sensing Voltage Sensing Resistance Sensing Resistance Tolerance LLP-24 Threaded Probe (24") Threaded stainless steel probe measuring 24" (61 cm) long. For use with PHST-38QTN liquid level control electrodes. Response Time Input Tolerance 24VAC 120 & 230VAC AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Rating Protection Isolation Voltage Mechanical Mounting Dimensions PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight www.littelfuse.com/LLC5 148 Resistance sensing for high & low level detection of conductive liquids Pulsed DC at probe terminals Factory fixed or adjustable to 100K Adjustable: 1K 500 at low end; 100K 25%, 0% at high end Factory fixed: 10% or 500 whichever is greater Debounce time delay <1s -15%, +20% -20%, +10% 50/60 Hz Electromechanical relay Isolated, SPDT 5A resistive @ 240VAC, 1/10 hp @ 240VAC 1500V RMS between input, output, & probe Plug-in socket H 60.7 mm (2.39"); W 45.2 mm (1.78"); D 76.5 mm (3.01") Octal 8-pin plug-in -20 to 60C / -40 to 80C 6 oz (170 g) approx. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls LLC6 SERIES Low Level Cutoff Liquid Level Controls Description 11-PIN Wiring Diagram PC = Probe Common P = Probe V = Voltage R = Optional NC Reset Switch N/L2 L1 Metal Tank or use additional Probe Connect common to conductive tank. Additional probe is necessary for non-conductive or insulated tanks. Features & Benefits For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 33. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE TIME DELAY (FIXED) SENSE RESISTANCE FEATURES BENEFITS Isolated 12VAC on probe Prevents electrolysis Industry standard 11-pin octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors LED indication Visual indication output relay is energized Power outage protection (see ordering table for models) Automatically resets the unit when power is restored and the water level is acceptable RESET LLC6210F10M 24VAC 10s 10k Manual/Automatic LLC6410F10M 120VAC 10s 10k Manual/Automatic LLC643F26M 120VAC 3s 26k Manual/Automatic LLC6610F5P 230VAC 10s 5k Power Outage Manual Reset If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 149 www.littelfuse.com/LLC6 8 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS The LLC6 Series is a plug-in, single-probe conductive liquid level control designed for low liquid level cutoff protection. It offers a factory fixed time delay of 1 - 60s and is available in input voltages of 24, 120, or 230VAC. LED indicator illuminates whenever the LLC6's 10A, SPDT output relay is energized. Available with automatic/manual reset or a special manual reset with power outage feature, which auto resets the unit when power is restored and the water level is acceptable. 24VAC and 120VAC units are recognized as limit switches under UL353 (230VAC units are UL508) and CSA certified under Standard 14. Operation Automatic Reset (Reset terminals not connected): When liquid rises to the low level cutoff probe, the output relay and the LED indicator energize. When the liquid falls below low level cutoff probe, the output relay and the LED indicator de-energize after a fixed time delay. Manual Reset (Reset switch connected): When the liquid level falls below the low level probe, the output relay and LED de-energize after a fixed time delay. When the liquid level rises to the low level probe, the output relay and LED indicator remain de-energized until the manual reset switch is opened; then they energize immediately. Power Outage Manual Reset (Reset switch connected): A power outage causes the output relay and LED indicator to de-energize. Upon restoration of power, if the liquid level is above the low level probe, the output relay and LED indicator will re-energize. If the liquid level is below the low level probe, the output relay and LED indicator remain de-energized until the Normally Closed (NC) reset switch is opened. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls LLC6 SERIES Accessories Specifications Control Type BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. Sense Voltage Sense Resistance Sense Resistance Tolerance Time Delay Range Tolerance Repeat Accuracy Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Power Outage Reset Delay Input Voltage Tolerance 24VAC 120 or 230VAC AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Rating NDS-11 11-pin Socket 11-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC11 holddown clips. PSC11 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use with NDS-11 Socket. Sold in pairs. PHST-38QTN Electrode Designed for a maximum steam pressure of 240 PSI; 400 F. UL353 Recognized. Protection Surge Isolation Voltage PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 LLP-24 Threaded Probe (24") Threaded stainless steel probe measuring 24" (61 cm) long. For use with PHST-38QTN liquid level control electrodes. Mechanical Mounting Termination Dimensions Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight www.littelfuse.com/LLC6 150 ON/OFF (single level) resistance sensor with built-in time delay to prevent rapid cycling 12VAC nominal at probe terminals Fixed 5K - 250K Fixed 10% 1 - 60s in 1s increments 20% 10% 10% 1s 24, 120, or 230VAC +20% to -15% +10% to -20% 50/60 Hz Electromechanical relay Non-isolated, SPDT 10A resistive @ 240VAC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A 2500V RMS between input & output terminals Plug-in socket 11-pin relay type H 73.9 mm (2.91"); W 60.7 mm (2.39"); D 45.2 mm (1.78") -40 to 60C / -40 to 80C 95% relative, non-condensing 7.3 oz (207 g) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls LLC8 SERIES Low Level Cutoff Liquid Level Controls Description Ordering Information Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram Metal Tank or use additional Probe V = Voltage LLCO = Low Level Probe G, CP = Ground or Common (Reference) Probe R = Optional NC Reset Switch (not included) NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed C = Common or Transfer Contact Relay contacts are isolated. Connect common to conductive tank. Additional probe is necessary for non-conductive or insulated tanks. TIME DELAY (FIXED) SENSE RESISTANCE LLC825F5M 24VAC LLC842F103M 120VAC LLC843F10M 120VAC 5s 2s 3s 5k 10k 10k LLC843F10P 120VAC 3s 10k LLC843F26M 120VAC 3s 26k LLC843F26P 120VAC 3s 26k LLC845F25P 120VAC 5s 25k LLC8430F250P 120VAC 30s 250k LLC8430F26P 120VAC 30s 26k LLC8610F12M 230VAC 10s 12k LLC863F26P 3s 26k MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE 230VAC RESET Manual/automatic Manual/automatic Manual/automatic Power outage manual reset Manual/automatic Power outage manual reset Power outage manual reset Power outage manual reset Power outage manual reset Manual/automatic Power outage manual reset FEATURES BENEFITS Isolated 12VAC probes Prevents scale buildup on probe Open PCB design Cost effective design for OEM low liquid level cutoff protection Conformally coated PCB Protects against moisture and corrosion LED indication Visual indication output relay is energized Power outage protection (see ordering table for models) Automatically resets the unit when power is restored and the water level is acceptable 24VAC & 120VAC models meet UL353 Required for use as a low level limit switch If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 151 www.littelfuse.com/LLC8 8 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 42. The LLC8 Series is a low cost, single-probe conductive liquid level control designed for low liquid level cutoff protection. It offers a factory fixed time delay of 1 - 60s and is available for input voltages of 24, 120, or 230VAC. LED indicator illuminates whenever the LLC8's isolated, 10A, SPDT output relay is energized. Sense resistance is fixed from 5K - 250K. Available with manual/automatic reset or a special manual reset with a power outage feature that auto resets the unit when power is restored and the water level is acceptable. 24 and 120VAC units are UL recognized as limit switches under UL353 (230VAC units are UL 508) and CSA certified under Standard 14. Operation Automatic Reset (Reset switch not connected): When liquid rises to low level cutoff probe, output relay and LED indicator energize. When liquid falls below the low level cutoff probe, the output relay and LED indicator de-energize after a fixed time delay. Manual Reset (Reset switch connected): When the liquid level falls below low level probe, the output relay and LED de-energize after a fixed time delay. When the liquid level rises to low level probe, the output relay and LED indicator remain de-energized until the NC manual reset switch is opened; then they energize immediately. Power Outage Manual Reset (Reset switch connected): A power outage causes the output relay and LED indicator to de-energize. Upon restoration of power, if the liquid is touching the low level probe, the output relay and LED indicator will re-energize. If the liquid level is below the low level probe, the output relay and LED indicator remain de-energized until the NC reset switch is opened. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls LLC8 SERIES Specifications Accessories Control Type P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Resistance sensing for conductive liquids with time delay Sense Voltage 12VAC nominal at probe terminals Sense Resistance Fixed 5K - 250K Sense Resistance Tolerance 10% Time Delay Tolerance 20% Repeat Accuracy 10% Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage 10% Power Outage Reset Delay 1s Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 24VAC -15% - 20% 120 or 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated SPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Isolation Voltage 2500V RMS input to output terminals Mechanical Mounting 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) x .187 (4.76 mm) dia. nylon standoffs (3) Termination Dimensions H 63.5 mm (2.5"); W 55.6 mm (2.19"); D 47.8 mm (1.88") Electrical 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Reset Switch & Probe(s) 0.187 x 0.03 in. (4.75 x 0.76 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40 to 60C / -40 to 80C Coating Printed circuit board is conformal coated to resist moisture & corrosion Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight 5 oz (141.7 g) P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. PHST-38QTN Electrode Designed for a maximum steam pressure of 240 PSI; 400 F. UL353 Recognized. LLP-24 Threaded Probe (24") Threaded stainless steel probe measuring 24" (61 cm) long. For use with PHST-38QTN liquid level control electrodes. PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 www.littelfuse.com/LLC8 152 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls - Alternating Relays ALT SERIES 8-pin Plug-in Alternating Relay Description The ALT alternating relays are used to alternate between two loads. The ALT is commonly used in duplex pumping applications to balance the runtime of both pumps. The ALT-S is used in single high-level float applications. When the float switch opens, the alternating relay changes state, forcing the other pump to run the next time the float closes. All ALT relays have a built-in debounce feature that prevents the relay from changing state if the switch or float contact bounces momentarily. The ALT-X has an internal cross-connected relay and is used in dual high-level float applications. These floats are commonly referred to as lead and lag floats. The pumps alternate as in the ALT-S version but the crossconnected relay configuration allows both pumps to run simultaneously when both the lead and lag floats are closed. These relays are also available with a built-in switch (SW option) that is used to manually force one of the pumps to run every time the float switch is closed. This is helpful when a pump has been removed for repair or for test purposes. In the case of the ALT-X-SW, the switch essentially forces one pump to be the lead pump, while still allowing the second to run when both floats are closed. Wiring Diagram TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR THE ALT-S Must use the OT08PC socket for UL Rating! *Note: Manufacturer's recommended screw terminal torque for the OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR THE ALT-X (CROSS CONNECTED) Features & Benefits F1 1 8 S2 2 3 7 6 L1 4 F2 L2 5 F1 - F2: 1-2A TYPICAL SIZE FOR CONTACTOR COILS F3 PUMP #1 F4 MAGNETIC CONTACTORS F3 - F6: F6 Debounce time delay Prevents nuisance actuating causes by waves or spashing in the tank Built-in manual/ auto switch Force lead pump operation when a pump is removed for repair or testing (on select models) MODEL LINE VOLTAGE ALT024-S 20-26VAC or VDC For single high-level float applications ALT024-S-SW 20-26VAC or VDC ALT115-S 95-125VAC ALT115-S-SW 95-125VAC ALT115-X 95-125VAC ALT115-X-SW 95-125VAC ALT230-S 195-250VAC ALT230-S-SW 195-250VAC ALT230-X 195-250VAC ALT230-X-SW 195-250VAC L1 L2 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. Accessories OT08PC Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 600VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls BENEFITS Ordering Information L2 SIZE FOR INDIVIDUAL PUMP APPLICATION F5 PUMP #2 L1 FEATURES 153 DESCRIPTION For single high-level float applications with built in manual switch For single high-level float applications For single high-level float applications with built in manual switch For dual high-level (lead and lag) float applications For dual high-level (lead and lag) float applications with built in manual switch For single high-level float applications For single high-level float applications with built in manual switch For dual high-level (lead and lag) float applications For dual high-level (lead and lag) float applications with built in manual switch www.littelfuse.com/alt PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS ALTERNATING RELAY S1 8 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls - Alternating Relays ALT SERIES Specifications Input Characteristics Supply Current Functional Characteristics Debounce Time Delay Control Input Impedance (min) 24 115 230 Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating General Characteristics Temperature Range Maximum Input Power Safety Marks UL (OT08PC octal socket required) CSA Dimensions (with socket) 40mA 0.5 second 10k 56k 100k Weight Mounting Method 480VA @ 240VAC Socket Available -40 to 50C (-40 to 122F) 5W UL508 (File #E68520) C22.2 No. 14 (File #46510) H 44.45 mm (1.75"); W 60.33 mm (2.375"); D 104.78 mm (4.125") 0.38 lb. (6.08 oz., 172.67 g) DIN rail or surface mount (plug into OT08PC socket) OT08PC (UL Rating 600V) The 600V socket can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail. PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 www.littelfuse.com/alt 154 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls - Alternating Relays ALT-XXX-1-SW / ALT-XXX-3-SW SERIES Alternating Relay Description The ALT-xxx-1-SW/ALT-xxx-3-SW Series are used to alternate between two loads and are commonly used in duplex pump-up and pump-down applications to balance the runtime of both pumps. The ALT relays have a built-in debounce time delay that prevents the relay from changing state if the float momentarily bounces, and they have a built-in switch to manually force a specific load (pump) to operate each time the input float closes. This is helpful when performing periodic maintenance or pump repair. Must use the OT08PC socket for the 8-pin models, and the OT11PC socket for the 11-pin models, for UL Rating! *Note: Manufacturer's recommended screw terminal torque for the OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR ALT-XXX-1-SW FEATURES BENEFITS Debounce time delay Prevents rapid cycling caused by waves or splashing in the tank LED indicators Visual indication of load operation in duplex application Built-in manual switch to force load operation Helpful to control load operation when performing periodic maintenance or pump repair ALT-xxx-3-SW offers duplexing Allows lag pump to energize if lead pump can't handle current demand OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10A @ 600VAC. OT11PC 11-pin Magnal Socket 11-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10A @ 300VAC TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR ALT-XXX-3-SW Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE MOUNTING DESCRIPTION ALT-100-1-SW 95-120VAC 11-pin magnal Single float input, two isolated Form C relays (DPDT), 2 LEDs for load indication ALT-100-3-SW 95-120VAC 8-pin octal Three float inputs (lead, lag, stop floats), actuating latching relays on lead/lag floats, 2 LEDs for load indication 8-pin octal Three float inputs (lead, lag, stop floats), actuating latching relays on lead/lag floats, 2 LEDs for load indication ALT-200-3-SW 190-240VAC For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 155 www.littelfuse.com/altxxx1sw-altxxx3sw PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS Accessories 8 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls - Alternating Relays ALT-XXX-1-SW / ALT-XXX-3-SW SERIES Specifications Input Characteristics Supply Voltage ALT-100-1-SW, ALT-100-3-SW ALT-200-3-SW Frequency Functional Characteristics Debounce Time Delay ALT-100-1-SW, ALT-100-3-SW, ALT-200-3-SW Output Characteristics Output Relay (DPDT) Pilot Duty General Purpose General Characteristics Temperature Range Maximum Input Power Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency, Radiated 150MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power and controls Safety Marks UL (OT08PC or OT11PC octal socket required) UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75"); W 60.33 mm (2.375"); D 104.78 mm (4.125") (with socket) Weight 0.65 lb. (10.4 oz., 294.84 g) Mounting Method DIN rail or surface mount (plug into OT08PC or OT11PC socket) Sockets Available Model OT08PC UL Rating 600V Model OT11PC UL Rating 300V 95-120VAC 190-240VAC 50/60Hz 1 second 5 seconds 480VA @ 240VAC 10A @ 240VAC -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) 5W The sockets can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail. PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 www.littelfuse.com/altxxx1sw-altxxx3sw 156 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls - Alternating Relays ARP SERIES Alternating Relay Description The ARP Series is used in systems where equal run time for two motors is desirable. The selector switch allows selection of alternation or for continuous operation of either load. LED's indicate the status of the output relay. This versatile series may be front panel mounted (BZ1 accessory required) or 35 mm DIN rail mounted with an accessory socket. Operation Alternating: When the rotary switch is in the "alternate" position, alternating operation of Load A and Load B occurs upon the opening of the control switch S1. To terminate alternating operation and cause only the selected load to operate, rotate the switch to position "A" to lock Load A or position "B" to lock Load B. The LEDs indicate the status of the internal relay and which load is selected to operate. Note: Input voltage must be applied at all times for proper alternation. The use of a solid-state control switch for S1 may not initiate alternation correctly. S1 voltage must be from the same supply as the unit's input voltage (see connection diagrams). Loss of input voltage resets the unit; Load A becomes the lead load for the next operation. Duplexing (Cross Wired): Duplexing models operate the same as alternating relays and when both the Control (S1) and Lag Load (S2) Switches are closed, Load A and Load B energize simultaneously. 8-PIN 11-PIN Wiring Diagram SPDT 8-PIN DPDT 11-PIN L1 L1 N/L2 N/L2 Features & Benefits V = VOLTAGE LA = LOAD A LB = LOAD B S1 = PRIMARY CONTROL SWITCH S2 = LAG LOAD SWITCH For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 46. Ordering Information BENEFITS Alternating or electrically locked operation Flexibility to run unit alternating between the two loads as normal or lock the relay to one specific load. Low profile selector switch Prevents accidental actuation LED status indication Visual indication of which load is engaged Industry standard base connection Flexibility to use in many applications OUTPUT FORM DESCRIPTION AR120A-3095 120VAC SPDT 8 pin for alternating applications. Rotary switch allows user to lock internal relay to one specific load. ARP23S 24VAC DPDT 8 pin cross wired for duplexing applications. Rotary switch allows user to lock internal relay to one specific load. ARP41 120VAC SPDT 8 pin for alternating applications. ARP41S 120VAC SPDT 8 pin for alternating applications. Rotary switch allows user to lock internal relay to one specific load. ARP42S 120VAC DPDT 11 pin for alternating applications. Rotary switch allows user to lock internal relay to one specific load. ARP43 120VAC DPDT 8 pin cross wired for duplexing applications. ARP43S 120VAC DPDT 8 pin cross wired for duplexing applications. Rotary switch allows user to lock internal relay to one specific load. ARP61S 230VAC SPDT 8 pin for alternating applications. Rotary switch allows user to lock internal relay to one specific load. ARP62S 230VAC DPDT 8 pin cross wired for duplexing applications. Rotary switch allows user to lock internal relay to one specific load. ARP63S 230VAC DPDT 8 pin cross wired for duplexing applications. Rotary switch allows user to lock internal relay to one specific load. MODEL LINE VOLTAGE FEATURES If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 157 www.littelfuse.com/arp 8 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS The DPDT 8-pin, cross-wired option, allows extra system load capacity through simultaneous operation of both motors when needed. Relay contacts are not isolated. Relay contacts in above are isolated. DPDT 8-PIN CROSS WIRED L1 N/L2 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls - Alternating Relays ARP SERIES Accessories Specifications Input Tolerance 24VAC 120 & 230VAC AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Rating BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. Maximum Voltage Life Protection Isolation Voltage Mechanical Mounting Dimensions NDS-11 11-pin Socket 1-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC11 hold-down clips. PSC8 or PSC11 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use PSC8 with NDS-8 Octal Socket or PSC11 with NDS-11 Socket. Sold in pairs. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Electromechanical relay SPDT, DPDT, or cross wired DPDT 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28 VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC 250VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 10 6 1500V RMS input to output Plug-in socket H 81.3 mm (3.2"); W 60.7 mm (2.39"); D 45.2 mm (1.78") Octal 8-pin or magnal 11-pin -20 to 60C / -30 to 85C 5.6 oz (159 g) approx. NOTE: Unit does not have debounce time delay. PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight -15% to 20% -20% to 10% 50/60Hz www.littelfuse.com/arp 158 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls - Alternating Relays 50R-400-ALT 480VAC Application, Panel Mount Description The 50R-400-ALT alternating relays are used to alternate between two loads, most commonly in duplex pumping and compressor applications to balance the runtime of both loads. When used in single float applications, the alternating relay changes state after the float switch opens*, forcing the other pump to run the next time the float closes. When used in dual float applications, the alternating relay will allow both pumps to run simultaneously when the lead and lag floats are both closed. An adjustment knob provides the option to force one pump to run every time the float switch is closed. This is helpful when one pump has been removed for repair or for test purposes. A built-in debounce feature prevents the alternating relay from changing state if the float contact bounces momentarily. *The alternating relay will not switch states while current is flowing. Switching will only occur after current has been sensed, followed by loss of current for the duration of the debounce time delay. Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits BENEFITS Debounce time delay Prevents rapid cycling caused by waves or splashing in the tank LED indicators Visual indication of load operation in duplex application Built-in manual switch to force load operation Helpful to control load operation when performing periodic maintenance or pump repair Operates from 380 - 480VAC No transformer required to provide 120 - 240V for control circuit Specifications For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 6. Input Characteristics Supply Voltage Supply Current Functional Characteristics Control Input Impedance (min) Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating Pilot Duty General Purpose Debounce Time Delay General Characteristics Maximum Input Power Terminal Torque Wire Size Safety Marks UL CE Dimensions Weight Mounting Method (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 159 380-480VAC 40mA 1M 470VA @ 600VAC 10A 1 second 5W 7 in.-lbs. 12-18AWG UL508 (File #E68520) IEC 60947 H 74.4 mm (2.93"); W 133.9 mm (5.27"); D 74.9 mm (2.95") 0.98 lb. (15.68 oz., 444.52 g) #8 screws www.littelfuse.com/50r400alt 8 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS FEATURES Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls - Intrinsically Safe Relays ISS-100 Single-Channel Intrinsically Safe Switch Description The ISS-100 switches are UL 913 listed as an associated apparatus for interfacing between hazardous and non-hazardous areas. These units must be installed in a non-hazardous area. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Finger-safe terminals Meets IEC 61000 safety requirements Compact design for DIN rail or surface mount Allows flexiblility in panel installation LED Status Indicator Visual indication of relay engagement Isolated output relay Allows connection to PLC or control voltage Specifications Input Characteristics Supply Voltage Functional Characteristics Probe Sense Voltage Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating Pilot Duty General Purpose Relay Contact Life (Electrical) Relay Contact Life (Mechanical) General Characteristics Temperature Range Maximum Input Power Wire range Terminal Torque Provides Intrinsically-Safe Circuits in the following locations: Wiring Diagram 115 VAC INPUT PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 LOAD ISS-100 OUTPUT ENERGIZED 1. Maximum distance between unit and switch contact is 10,000 feet. 2. All non-intrinsically safe wiring shall be separated from intrinsically safe wiring. Description of special wiring methods can be found in the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70, Article 504 Intrinsically Safe Systems. Check your state and local codes for additional requirements. Entity Parameters 3. All switch contacts shall be non-energy storing, containing no inductance or capacitance. Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) Fast Transients Safety Mark UL Dimensions See Notes 1 & 2 Weight Mounting Method See Note 3 90-120VAC 5vdc continuous 180VA @120VAC, C300 8A @120VAC 100,000 cycles min. @ rated load 10,000,000 cycles -20 to 55C (-4 to 131F) 1.5 W 12 to 20 AWG 3.5 to 4.5 in.-lbs. (max. 4.5 in.-lbs.) Division 1 and 2 Class I, Groups A,B,C,D; Class II, Groups E,F,G; and Class III Voc = 16.8V Po=Voc*Isc Isc = 1.2mA 4 L a = 100mH C a = 0.39uF IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power UL913 Sixth Edition (File #E233355) H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 52.93 mm (2.08"); D 59.69 mm (2.35") 0.5 lb. (8 oz., 226.8 g) 35mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 10. www.littelfuse.com/iss100 160 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls - Intrinsically Safe Relays ISS-101 Single-Channel Intrinsically Safe Switch Description The ISS-101 switches are UL 913 listed as an associated apparatus for interfacing between hazardous and non-hazardous areas. These units must be installed in a non-hazardous area. Must use Model OT08PC socket for UL Rating! Note: Manufacturer's recommended screw terminal torque for the OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram FEATURES BENEFITS Compact design for DIN rail or surface mount via octal base Allows flexibility in panel installation LED status indicator Visual indication of relay engagement Isolated output relay Allows connection to PLC or control voltage Standard 8-pin socket Pop-in replacement for other manufacturers' parts Accessories (included) CONTROL DRAWING ISS-101 OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10A @ 600VAC. 115 VAC INPUT LOAD Input Characteristics Supply Voltage Functional Characteristics Probe Sense Voltage Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating Pilot Duty General Purpose Relay Contact Life (Electrical) Relay Contact Life (Mechanical) General Characteristics Temperature Range Maximum Input Power Wire range Terminal Torque Provides Intrinsically-Safe Circuits in the following locations: See Install Bulletin for full instructions and Hazardous Location information. See Notes 1 & 2 See Note 3 Entity Parameters For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 161 90-120VAC 5VDC continuous 180VA @120VAC, C300 8A @120VAC 100,000 cycles min. @ rated load 10,000,000 cycles -20 to 55C (-4 to 131F) 1.5 W 12 to 20 AWG 3.5 to 4.5 in.-lbs. (max. 4.5 in.-lbs.) Division 1 and 2 Class I, Groups A,B,C,D; Class II, Groups E,F,G; and Class III Voc = 16.8V Po=Voc*Isc Isc = 1.2mA 4 L a = 100mH Ca = 0.39uF www.littelfuse.com/iss101 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS Specifications NOTES: 1. Maximum distance between unit and switch contact is 10,000 feet. 2. All non-intrinsically safe wiring shall be separated from intrinsically safe wiring. Description of special wiring methods can be found in the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70, Article 504 Intrinsically Safe Systems. Check your state and local codes for additional requirements. 3. All switch contacts shall be non-energy storing, containing no inductance or capacitance. 8 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls - Intrinsically Safe Relays ISS-101 Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) Fast Transients Safety Mark UL Dimensions Weight Mounting Method IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power UL913 Sixth Edition (File #E233355) H 44.45 mm (1.75"); W 60.33 mm (2.375"); D 104.78 mm (4.125") 0.5 lb. (8 oz., 226.8 g) DIN rail or surface mount (plug into OT08PC socket) PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 www.littelfuse.com/iss101 162 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls - Intrinsically Safe Relays ISS-102 SERIES Two-Channel Intrinsically Safe Switch Description The ISS-102 is a two-channel, intrinsically-safe switch designed for multiple uses including a pump-up/pump-down (latching) controller or two-channel switch. LEDs indicate the state of the intrinsically-safe inputs and output relays and user-selectable options are available including a variable resistance threshold for float inputs. The ISS-102 enclosure is surface or DIN rail mountable. -LC Each input channel is active when the corresponding switch is closed. When the lag input (CH2) is activated, the output closes. Applying latching logic, the output contact remains closed until the lead (CH1) and the lag (CH2) inputs are deactivated. Sensitivity is fixed at 100kOhms with a debounce time delay of 2 seconds. -DCS This dual-channel switch has two Form A output relays. Two LEDs illuminate the output state of their respective Form A relay. Resistance probes or switches can be used on its inputs. Sensitivity is fixed at 100kOhms with a debounce time delay of 0.5 seconds. -MC By selecting the proper functionality through the DIP switches, you can define a pump-up or pump-down, single or dual channel non-latching switch. The sensitivity adjustment (4.7k-100kOhms) allows you to define the input impedance at which the output relays (one Form A & one Form C) will change state, with a debounce time delay of 0.5 or 2 seconds. Wiring Diagrams 120VAC 120VAC LOAD LOAD 1 1 2 3 1 LOAD 2 9 2 3 FORM A ISS-102A CH1 Com 4 5 ISS-102AA CH2 7 6 CH1 Com 4 See Notes 1&2 See Note 3 5 CH2 7 6 FEATURES BENEFITS Finger-safe terminals Meets IEC 61000 safety requirements Compact design for DIN rail or surface mount Allows flexiblility in panel installation LED status indicator Visual indication of relay engagement Two input channels Flexibility for pump up/pump down latching controller or two-channel switch applications Ordering Information See Notes 1&2 See Note 3 MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION ISS-102A-LC 120VAC Latching Controller ISS-102AA-DCS 120VAC Dual Channel Switch ISS-102ACI-MC 120VAC Multi-function Controller ISS-102C-M-LC 120VAC MSHA* evaluated ISS-102CCI-M-MC 120VAC MSHA* evaluated * Mine Safety and Health Administration For more wiring diagrams and notes, see next page. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 10. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 163 www.littelfuse.com/iss102 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS Features & Benefits FORM A 8 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls - Intrinsically Safe Relays ISS-102 SERIES Wiring Diagrams (continued) 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC MAX LOAD 2 LOAD 1 1 2 120VAC MAX. LOA D 1 3 LOAD 3 1 LOAD 2 LOAD 2 LOAD 1 8 2 3 LOAD 4 1 8 2 3 LOAD 3 FORM A FOR M C FORM C 10 11 12 10 11 12 ISS-102C-M FORM C CH1 Com 4 5 ISS-102CCI-M CH2 7 NOTES: 1. Maximum distance between unit and switch contact is 10,000 feet. FOR M C ISS-102ACI 4 5 7 4 6 5 7 6 6 2. All non-intrinsically-safe wiring shall be separated from intrinsically-safe wiring. Description of special wiring methods can be found in the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70, Article 504 Intrinsically-Safe Systems. Check your state and local codes for additional requirements. 3. All switch contacts shall be non-energy storing, containing no inductance or capacitance. See Notes 1&2 See Notes 1& 2 See Notes 1&2 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 See Note 3 See Note 3 See Note 3 Specifications Functional Characteristics Debounce Time Probe Sense Voltage Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating Pilot Duty General Purpose Relay Contact Life (Electrical) Relay Contact Life (Mechanical) Output Relay Type ISS-102A-LC ISS-102AA-DCS ISS-102ACI-MC ISS-102C-M-LC ISS-102CCI-M-MC General Characteristics Temperature Range Maximum Input Power Wire Range Terminal Torque Provides Intrinsically-Safe Circuits in the following locations: 0.5 or 2 seconds 5vdc pulsed 180VA @120VAC, C150 5A @120VAC 100,000 cycles min. @ rated load 10,000,000 cycles Entity Parameters Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) Fast Transients Safety Mark UL One Form A Two Form A One Form A & One isolated Form C One Form C Two Form C (one isolated) -20 to 55C (-4 to 131F) 2W 12 to 20 AWG 3.5 to 4.5 in.-lbs. (max. 4.5 in.-lbs.) Dimensions Weight Mounting Method www.littelfuse.com/iss102 164 Division 1 and 2 Class I, Groups A,B,C,D; Class II, Groups E,F,G; Class III Voc = 16.8V Po=Voc*Isc Isc = 1.2mA 4 L a = 100mH C a = 0.39uF IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air. IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power UL913 Sixth Edition (File #E233355) (except Models ISS-102C-M-LC & ISS-102CCI-M-MC which have been evaluated by MSHA) H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 52.93 mm (2.08"); D 59.69 mm (2.35") 0.7 lb. (11.2 oz., 317.51 g) 35mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls - Intrinsically Safe Relays ISS-105 SERIES Five-Channel Intrinsically Safe Switch Description The ISS-105 is a "smart" five-channel intrinsically safe relay and pump controller. The ISS-105 can be configured for pump-up or pump-down applications or as a five-channel relay covering a wide variety of applications. The ISS-105 has a long list of features that are needed for multiple pump applications and can indicate low, high and out-of-sequence alarms. If an out-of-sequence alarm occurs, the skipped pump(s) will be started as intended. The Model ISS-105 can be set-up to do non-alternating control, alternating control and alternating control with one non-alternating pump. The non-alternating pump is intended for use with an emergency or jockey pump. The ISS-105 can start an emergency pump once every 50 cycles to keep it working freely. Using the built-in DIP switches, individual pumps can be disabled when taken out of service for repair or maintenance. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram Typical APPLICATION: Application: TYPICAL DuplexPump-Down Pump Down andAlarms Low Alarms. Duplex withwith HighHigh and Low Audible Alarm High Alarm g 5 intrinsically-safe input channels meeting UL913 Sixth Edition g 4 normally open output relays and 1 SPDT output relay g Field selectable pump control options g Low Alarm 120 VAC g Pump 2 g High Alarm Float g #1 #2 PUMP #1 PUMP #2 #3 #4 #5 LOW HIGH ALARM ALARM Lag 1 Float INPUT 120 VAC AUDIBLE ALARM g MODE 1 DUPLEXER PUMP DOWN Lead Float IS Super Cell MODEL ISS-105 LOW ALARM INTRINSICALLY SAFE INPUTS OFF LEAD LAG1 HIGH ALARM COMMON Stop Float #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 g C g Low Alarm Float g PUMP Many other configurations are possible. See users manual for more details. g g For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 511, Figure 12. g Meets IEC EMC standards for Electrical Fast Transients (EFT), Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) and Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) DIN rail or surface mountable allows flexibility in panel installation User-selectable alternator/non-alternator option Non-alternating pump option for emergency or jockey applications Pump disable switches make it easy to disable individual pumps when they are out for service or repair Adjustable lag pump delay for all pumping modes Adjustable delay-on-make/break timer in five-channel relay mode Finger-safe terminals meet IEC 61000 safety requirements Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION ISS-105 120VAC Intrinsically-Safe & Pump Controller ISS-105-ISO 120VAC Intrinsically-Safe Only ISS-105-ISO-3 120VAC 3-Channel Intrinsically-Safe Only ISS-105-ISO-4 120VAC 4-Channel Intrinsically-Safe Only ISS-105-ISO-F 120VAC ISO with Fast Trip Relays (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 165 www.littelfuse.com/iss105 8 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS Pump 1 Monitors float sequencing and sends signal to alarm if out-of-sequence condition occurs High and/or low alarm options depending on the number of pumps and settings Output contacts for audible alarm Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls - Intrinsically Safe Relays ISS-105 Specifications Input Characteristics Supply Voltage Frequency Functional Characteristics Probe Sense Voltage Output Characteristics Relay Output Rating Pilot Duty General Purpose Relay Contact Life (Electrical) Relay Contact Life (Mechanical) General Characteristics Temperature Range Maximum Input Power Wire range Recommended Terminal Torque Provides Intrinsically-Safe Circuits in the following locations: Entity Parameters 120VAC 50*/60Hz Safety Marks UL Dimensions 5vdc continuous 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 7A @ 240VAC 100,000 cycles min. @ rated load 10,000,000 cycles Weight Mounting Method -40 to 55C (-40 to 131F) 5W 12 to 20 AWG 3.5 to 4.5 in.-lbs. (max. 4.5 in.-lbs.) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air. IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power 2kV inputs/outputs UL913 Sixth Edition (File #E233355) H 59.69 mm (2.35"); W 94.06 mm (3.703"); D 27.64 mm (5.025") 1.2 lbs. (19.2 oz., 544.31 g) 35 mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%. Division 1 and 2 Class I, Groups A,B,C,D; Class II, Groups E,F,G; and Class III Voc = 16.8V Po=Voc*Isc Isc = 1.2mA 4 L a = 100mH C a = 0.39uF PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) Fast Transients www.littelfuse.com/iss105 166 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Current monitors provide protection against both supply line and load side faults when the motor is running. They protect against single-phasing and current unbalance problems that can be caused by voltage supply problems, bad contactors, loose wiring, bad wires, or damaged motors. They also provide very reliable overload and underload protection. Littelfuse voltage monitors are microcontroller based and factory calibrated for highly accurate and precise voltage measurements providing high sensitivity while minimizing nuisance tripping. This precise operation can detect a single-phase condition or voltage unbalance even with regenerated voltages present. Voltage Monitoring Relays CP5 Series Single-Phase Current Monitor ................... 168 50R Series .......................................................................................... 188 LSR-0 Load Sensor, Low Cost Relay ................... 169 201-XXX-SP Series ............................................................................. 190 LSR-XXX Series Load Sensors ............................................. 170 201-XXX-SP-DPDT Series................................................................... 192 LSRU Series Load Sensors ............................................. 171 202-200-SP Series.............................................................................. 194 LSRX / LSRX-C Series Load Sensors, Low Cost Relays ................ 173 460-XXX-SP Series ............................................................................. 196 ECS Series Current Sensors ........................................ 175 102A Series ........................................................................................ 198 ECSW Series Current Sensors ........................................ 178 201A Series ........................................................................................ 200 TCS Series Current Sensors ........................................ 181 201A-AU Series.................................................................................. 202 TCSA Series Current Transducers .................................. 183 201-XXX-DPDT Series ........................................................................ 204 DCSA Series Current Transducers .................................. 185 202 Series .......................................................................................... 206 LCS10T12 / LPM Series Current Indicators ..................................... 187 250A Series ........................................................................................ 208 350 Series .......................................................................................... 210 355 Series .......................................................................................... 212 455 Series .......................................................................................... 214 460 Series .......................................................................................... 216 601 Series .......................................................................................... 218 601-CS-D-P1 ....................................................................................... 220 WVM Series ....................................................................................... 222 DLMU Series ...................................................................................... 224 HLMU Series ...................................................................................... 227 PLMU11 .............................................................................................. 229 PLM Series ......................................................................................... 231 TVW Series ........................................................................................ 233 TVM Series......................................................................................... 235 PLR Series .......................................................................................... 237 PLS Series .......................................................................................... 239 For More Information... on common faults and how to fix them, visit HLVA6I23 ............................................................................................ 241 KVM Series ....................................................................................... 243 Littelfuse.com/MotorProtection (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 167 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers CP5 SERIES Single-Phase Current Monitor Description The CP5 Series are undercurrent monitors designed to monitor one leg of a 3-phase system. It is commonly used as a tower monitor on center pivot irrigation systems to detect stalled or jammed towers to prevent over watering. The CP5 Series has both an adjustable trip level and an adjustable trip delay timer. When the current is sensed, the CP5 Series activates its output relay, thus starting the motor/pump. When the current in the monitored power line falls below the user-selectable trip point, the unit goes through a trip delay timer and then deactivates the output relay if the monitored current does not recover first. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram FEATURES BENEFITS Adjustable trip level (0-5A) Provides ability to precisely set the current trip point for any application Adjustable trip delay (0-10m) Prevents nuisance tripping due to power line fluctuations 600V rated relay contacts available on CP5-460 model Eliminates the need for a control transformer to step voltage down to 120 - 240V for a control circuit Specifications Input Characteristics Nominal Input Voltage CP5115 CP5460 Frequency Functional Characteristics Operating Points Trip Level Trip Delay Restart Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty CP5115 CP5460 General Characteristics Terminal Torque Wire Size Safety Marks UL Dimensions AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 509, Figure 6. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE CP5115 115VAC CP5460 460VAC Weight Mounting Method 115VAC 460VAC 50*/60Hz 0-5 Amps 0-10 minutes 1 second 480VA @ 240VAC 470VA @ 600VAC 7 in.-lbs. 12-18AWG UL508 (File #E68520) H 74.4 mm (2.93"); W 133.9 mm (5.27"); D 74.9 mm (2.95") 1 lb. (16 oz., 453.59 g) #8 screws *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20% www.littelfuse.com/cp5 168 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers LSR-0 Self-Powered Load Sensor/Low-Cost Proof Relay Description The LSR-0 is a self-powered load sensor intended for use as a proof relay. It is used to verify that current is flowing as intended. It has a guaranteed 15A pull-in current and 2.5A drop-out current. Proof relays are typically used to interlock fans, compressors, motors, heating elements and other devices. The LSR-0 is self-powered, that is, it draws its power from the wire being monitored so it does not require separate control power wiring. Features Wiring Diagram TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR REFRIGERATION AND OIL FAILURE CONTROL g Self-powered g Low cost proof relay g Can monitor up to 135A loads Specifications TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR BUILDING AUTOMATION TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR BUILDING AUTOMATION Weight Mounting Method 135A continuous Fixed, 15A (max.)* 2.5A (min.) Induced from conductor 600VAC rms 9 480VA @ 240VAC 10A -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) #12-24AWG 0.725" diameter 7 in.-lbs. (File #46510) H 42.42 mm (1.67"); W 58.42 mm (2.3"); D 90.43 mm (3.56") 0.35 lb. (5.6 oz., 158.76 g) Four #6 screws 3/4" in length *Conductors may be looped for smaller motor applications. Caution: This product should not be relied upon solely for safety of life or safety applications. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 511, Figure 14. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 169 www.littelfuse.com/lsr0 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Max Current Ratings Functional Characteristics Turn-on Threshold Turn-off Threshold Power Isolation Output Characteristics Relay Output Rating: Pilot Duty General Purpose General Characteristics Temperature Range Wire Size Hole Size Terminal Torque Safety Marks CSA, CSA-NRTL/C CE Dimensions Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers LSR-XXX SERIES Load Sensor Description The LSR-xxx Series load sensors use current levels to determine feed rates, tool wear, loss of prime on pumps, mixer viscosity and all types of overload and underload conditions. They may also be used to stage pump motors, chillers and other machinery. These devices combine a current transformer (CT) with Form C (SPDT) relay contacts to switch alarm circuits, contactors or any resistive or inductive load. One simple screwdriver adjustment will calibrate the sensor for all singlephase or 3-phase applications up to 100hp. Features Wiring Diagram Can monitor current of motors up to 100Hp g Fine adjustment with 20-turn pot g Status LEDs Specifications TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR LOAD LOSS DETECTION Functional Characteristics Isolation Current Adjustment Range (Typical) Current Adjustment Range (Min-Max) Trip Setpoint Input Characteristics Control Power: LSR-24 LSR-115 LSR-230 Max Current Ratings Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT): Pilot Duty General Purpose General Characteristics Temperature Range Wire Size Hole Size Terminal Torque Safety Marks CSA, CSA-NRTL/C CE Dimensions 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS g TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR OVERLOAD DETECTION 600VAC rms 2-100A 0.5-135A Adjustable to 1% range 24VAC 115VAC 230VAC 135A max. continuous 480VA @ 240VAC 10A -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) #12-24AWG 0.725" diameter 7 in.-lbs. (File #46510) IEC 60947 H 42.42 mm (1.67"); W 58.42 mm (2.3"); D 90.43 mm (3.56") 0.4 lb. (6.4 oz., 181.44 g) Four #6 screws 3/4" in length For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 511, Figure 14. Weight Mounting Method Ordering Information Caution: This product should not be relied upon solely for safety of life or safety applications. MODEL LINE VOTAGE LSR-24 24VAC LSR-115 115VAC LSR-230 230VAC www.littelfuse.com/lsrxxx 170 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers LSRU SERIES Load Sensor Description The LSRU Series is a microcontroller-based family of load sensors. The LSRU family of products employ three basic types of control logic: motor control logic, alarm logic and feed control logic. Motor Control Logic Several combinations of functions are available in the LSRU, including overcurrent and undercurrent or either overcurrent or undercurrent with variable trip, restart or extended restart delay settings. These various versions of the LSRU trip on the respective fault and then automatically reset after the restart delay expires, in preparation for the next motor start. LSRUs do not trip on undercurrent when the load turns off, this is recognized as a normal condition. Alarm Logic The LSRU-AL simply indicates whether the current is between the setpoints or outside of the setpoints. This product is best used with a PLC or other controller where status indication is desired. Feed Control The LSRU-FC is a load monitor intended to control feeder mechanisms in a variety of applications. It stops the feeder when the grinder, chipper, saw, auger, etc. nears overload. When the load is reduced to a preset level, the feeder is restarted. Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits BENEFITS LED indicator Visual indication of relay status Built in current sensor Eliminates the need for a stand alone current transformer and also provides isolation between the monitored and control circuits Adjustable current sensing range Provides ability to precisely set the current trip point for any application Ordering Information See next page. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 171 www.littelfuse.com/lsru AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 511, Figure 14. 9 FEATURES Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers LSRU SERIES Ordering Information AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 MODEL LINE VOTAGE CURRENT RANGE DESCRIPTION LSRU-024-AL-2 24VAC 5-25A Alarm logic LSRU-024-AL-3 24VAC 25-100A Alarm logic LSRU-115-AL-1.5 115VAC 0-10A Alarm logic LSRU-115-AL-2 115VAC 5-25A Alarm logic LSRU-115-AL-3 115VAC 25-100A Alarm logic LSRU-115-FC-1.5 115VAC 0-10A Feed control logic LSRU-115-OT-1.5 115VAC 0-10A Motor control logic with overcurrent trip, adj trip delay (0.5-60s) LSRU-115-OT-2 115VAC 5-25A Motor control logic with overcurrent trip, adj trip delay (0.5-60s) LSRU-115-OT-3 115VAC 25-100A Motor control logic with overcurrent trip, adj trip delay (0.5-60s) LSRU-115-OR-1.5 115VAC 0-10A Motor control logic with overcurrent trip, adj restart delay (0.5-300s, manual) LSRU-115-OR-2 115VAC 5-25A Motor control logic with overcurrent trip, adj restart delay (0.5-300s, manual) LSRU-115-UE-2 115VAC 5-25A Motor control logic with undercurrent trip, adj ext restart delay (2-300m, manual) LSRU-115-UT-2 115VAC 5-25A Motor control logic with undercurrent trip, adj trip delay (0.5-60s) LSRU-115-UT-3 115VAC 25-100A Motor control logic with undercurrent trip, adj trip delay (0.5-60s) LSRU-115-UR-2 115VAC 5-25A Motor control logic with undercurrent trip, adj restart delay (0.5-300s, manual) LSRU-115-OU-1.5 115VAC 0-10A Motor control logic with overcurrent and undercurrent trip LSRU-115-OU-2 115VAC 5-25A Motor control logic with overcurrent and undercurrent trip LSRU-115-OU-3 115VAC 25-100A Motor control logic with overcurrent and undercurrent trip PART # KEY O = Overcurrent Trip U = Undercurrent Trip T = Adj. Trip Delay (0.5-60 seconds) R = Adj. Restart Delay (0.5-300 seconds, Manual) E = Adj. Extended Restart Delay (2-300 minutes, Manual) 1.5 = 0-10 Amps 2 = 5-25 Amps 3 = 25-100 Amps Specifications Functional Characteristics Isolation Power Motor Acceleration Time When not selected as an option: Fixed Trip Delay (-AL, -FC) Fixed Restart Delay (-AL only) (-FC only) Input Characteristics Control Power Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty General Purpose www.littelfuse.com/lsru General Characteristics Temperature Range Wire Size Hole Size Terminal Torque Safety Marks CSA, CSA-NRTL/C CE Dimensions 600VAC rms 2 Watts 2 seconds 0.5 second 1 second 1 second as soon as current is within limits 0.5 second Weight Mounting Method -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) #12-24AWG 0.725" diameter 7 in.-lbs. (File #46510) H 42.42 mm (1.67"); W 58.42 mm (2.3"); D 90.43 mm (3.56") 0.5 lb. (8 oz., 226.8 g) Four #6 screws 3/4" in length 24VAC or 115VAC Caution: This product should not be relied upon solely for safety of life or safety applications. 480VA @ 240VAC 10A @ 240VAC 172 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers LSRX / LSRX-C SERIES Self-Powered Load Sensor, Low-Cost Proof Relay Description The LSRX/LSRX-C Series are AC current sensors designed to energize the output contact whenever 4.5 Amps or greater is present. The LSRX/LSRX-C Series is used commonly as an AC current proof relay to indicate if a motor is operating. It can also be used to interlock fans, compressors and motors; to indicate equipment status such as feed rates, tool wear, loss of prime on pumps, mixer viscosity and all types of current sensing conditions or to stage pump motors, chillers, or other machinery. This device combines a current transformer (CT), transducer and high current output relay together to switch alarm circuits, contactors and most resistive or inductive loads. The LSRX/ LSRX-C Series can perform the function of an auxiliary contact, yet has the advantages of universal application and isolation. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram MOTOR INDICATOR LIGHT LSRX-C LSRX-C Depluggable screw terminals LSRX-OEM Fast-on terminals, 10 pack (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Saves time at installation LED indication Visual indication of relay status Built in current sensor will monitor up to 200A loads Eliminates the need for a stand alone current transformer and also provides isolation between the monitored and control circuits Input Characteristics Operating Current Minimum Pull-in Current Power Output Characteristics Relay Output Rating (SPST - Form A) Pilot Duty General Purpose Electrical Life Mechanical Life Maximum Conductor Diameter Output Terminals LSRX LSRX-C Torque Rating Ordering Information DESCRIPTION Quick-connect terminals 9 Specifications For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 511, Figure 13. Fast-on terminal Eliminates need for separate control voltage. Draws power from wire being monitored Informer IR Kit-36 (36" infrared adapter cable) Attaches to the face of the unit to provide remote diagnostics without opening the panel. Figure 1: Typical Wiring Diagram LSRX Self-powered Accessories CONTROL VOLTAGE MODEL BENEFITS 173 5-200A Continuous 4.5A (typical), 7.0A (max)* Induced from AC conductor 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 5A @ 240VAC 1x105 1x107 0.7 in. 0.25" quick-connect fast-ons depluggable screw terminals 3.0 in.-lbs. www.littelfuse.com/lsrx-lsrxc AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS L1 L2 L3 INPUT POWER FEATURES Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers LSRX / LSRX-C SERIES General Characteristics Temperature Range: Operating Storage Hole Size Wire Size Output Relay Status Indicator Relative Humidity Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Fast Transient Burst Surge IEC Safety Marks UL CE Dimensions Weight Mounting Method -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 0.72" diameter 12-26 AWG LED 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 IEC 61000-4-2, Level 2, 4kV contact, 4kV air IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 2kV power, 1kV input/output 61000-4-5, Level 3, 2kV line-to-line; 2kV line-to-ground UL508 Recognized (File #E68520) IEC 60947 H 68.58 mm (2.7"); W 28.7 mm (1.13"); D 63.5 mm (2.5") 0.3 lb. (4.8 oz., 136.08 g) Surface Mount *Conductors may be looped for smaller motor applications. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 www.littelfuse.com/lsrx-lsrxc 174 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers ECS SERIES Current Sensors Description The ECS Series of single-phase AC current sensors is a universal, overcurrent or undercurrent sensing control. Its built-in toroidal sensor eliminates the inconvenience of installing a stand-alone current transformer. Includes onboard adjustments for current sensing mode, trip point, and trip delay. Detects over or undercurrent events like locked rotor, loss of load, an open heater or lamp load, or proves an operation is taking place or has ended. Operation Input voltage must be supplied at all times for proper operation. When a fault is sensed throughout the trip delay, the output relay is energized. When the current returns to the normal run condition or zero, the output and the delay are reset. If a fault is sensed and then corrected before the trip delay is completed, the relay will not energize and the trip delay is reset to zero. Adjustment Select the desired function, over or under current sensing. Set the trip point and trip delay to approximate settings. Apply power to the ECS and the monitored load. Turn adjustment and watch the LED. LED will light; turn slightly in opposite direction until LED is off. Adjustment can be done while connected to the control circuitry if the trip delay is set at maximum. To increase sensitivity, multiple turns may be made through the ECS's toroidal sensor. The trip point range is divided by the number of turns through the toroidal sensor to create a new range. When using an external CT, select a 2VA, 0-5A output CT rated for the current to be monitored. Select ECS adjustment range 0. Pass one secondary wire lead through the ECS toroid and connect the secondary leads together. Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits Relay contacts are isolated. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 34. Ordering Information FEATURES BENEFITS Built-in toroidal current sensing Eliminates need to install stand alone current transformer and provides isolation from monitored circuit Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Adjustable mode, trip point and trip delay Provides flexibility for use in many applications 10A, SPDT isolated relay output Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages See next page. Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 175 www.littelfuse.com/ecs 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS V = Voltage I> = Overcurrent I< = Undercurrent W = Insulated Wire Carrying Monitored Current Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers ECS SERIES Ordering Information AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 MODEL SENSING INPUT VOLTAGE TRIP POINT ADJUSTABLE TRIP DELAY ECS20BC ECS21BC ECS2HBC ECS30AC ECS40A ECS40AC ECS40BC ECS41A ECS41AC ECS41BC ECS41BD ECS41BH ECS4HBC ECS4HBH ECS60AH ECS60BC ECS61BC ECS6HAH ECSH21F2.5C ECSH30AC ECSH31AD ECSH31F.08D ECSH3HF0.08D ECSH34F.08C ECSH40A ECSH40AC ECSH40AD ECSH41AC ECSH41AD ECSH41BC ECSH41F.08D ECSH4HAD ECSH4HF.08D ECSH61AD ECSL31A ECSL40AC ECSL40B ECSL40BH ECSL41A ECSL41AD ECSH4HAD ECSL41AH ECSL4HAC ECSL4HBH ECSL61AH ECSL6HAC Selectable, over or undercurrent Selectable, over or undercurrent Selectable, over or undercurrent Selectable, over or undercurrent Selectable, over or undercurrent Selectable, over or undercurrent Selectable, over or undercurrent Selectable, over or undercurrent Selectable, over or undercurrent Selectable, over or undercurrent Selectable, over or undercurrent Selectable, over or undercurrent Selectable, over or undercurrent Selectable, over or undercurrent Selectable, over or undercurrent Selectable, over or undercurrent Selectable, over or undercurrent Selectable, over or undercurrent Overcurrent Overcurrent Overcurrent Overcurrent Overcurrent Overcurrent Overcurrent Overcurrent Overcurrent Overcurrent Overcurrent Overcurrent Overcurrent Overcurrent Overcurrent Overcurrent Undercurrent Undercurrent Undercurrent Undercurrent Undercurrent Undercurrent Overcurrent Undercurrent Undercurrent Undercurrent Undercurrent Undercurrent 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VDC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 230VAC 230VAC 230VAC 230VAC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 230VAC 24VDC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 230VAC 230VAC 0.5 - 5A 2 - 20A 5 - 50A 0.5 - 5A 0.5 - 5A 0.5 - 5A 0.5 - 5A 2 - 20A 2 - 20A 2 - 20A 2 - 20A 2 - 20A 5 - 50A 5 - 50A 0.5 - 5A 0.5 - 5A 2 - 20A 5 - 50A 2 - 20A 0.5 - 5A 2 - 20A 2 - 20A 5 - 50A 4A non-adjustable 0.5 - 5A 0.5 - 5A 0.5 - 5A 2 - 20A 2 - 20A 2 - 20A 2 - 20A 5 - 50A 5 - 50A 2 - 20A 2 - 20A 0.5 - 5A 0.5 - 5A 0.5 - 5A 2 - 20A 2 - 20A 5 - 50A 2 - 20A 5 - 50A 5 - 50A 2 - 20A 5 - 50A 0.5 - 50s 0.5 - 50s 0.5 - 50s 0.150 - 7s 0.150 - 7s 0.150 - 7s 0.5 - 50s 0.150 - 7s 0.150 - 7s 0.5 - 50s 0.5 - 50s 0.5 - 50s 0.5 - 50s 0.5 - 50s 0.150 - 7s 0.5 - 50s 0.5 - 50s 0.150 - 7s 2.5s 0.150 - 7s 0.150 - 7s 0.08s 0.08s 0.08s 0.150 - 7s 0.150 - 7s 0.150 - 7s 0.150 - 7s 0.150 - 7s 0.5 - 50s 0.08s 0.150 - 7s 0.08s 0.150 - 7s 0.150 - 7s 0.150 - 7s 0.5 - 50s 0.5 - 50s 0.150 - 7s 0.150 - 7s 0.150 - 7s 0.150 - 7s 0.150 - 7s 0.5 - 50s 0.150 - 7s 0.150 - 7s SENSING DELAY ON STARTUP 1s 1s 1s 1s 0s 1s 1s 0s 1s 1s 2s 6s 1s 6s 6s 1s 1s 6s 1s 1s 2s 2s 2s 1s 0s 1s 2s 1s 2s 1s 2s 2s 2s 2s 0s 1s 0s 6s 0s 2s 2s 6s 1s 6s 6s 1s If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/ecs 176 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers ECS SERIES Specifications Sensor Type Mode Trip Point Range Tolerance Adjustable Fixed Function Diagram Toroidal through hole wiring Over or undercurrent, switch selectable on the unit or factory fixed 0.5 - 50A in 3 adjustable ranges or fixed (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 177 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Guaranteed range 0.5 - 25A: 0.5A or 5% whichever is less; 26 - 50A: 2.5% Maximum Allowable Current Steady - 50A turns; Inrush - 300A turns for 10s Trip Point Hysteresis 5% Trip Point vs. Temperature 5% Response Time 75ms Frequency 45/500 Hz Type of Detection Peak detection Trip Delay Type Analog Range Adjustable 0.150 - 7s; 0.5 - 50s (guaranteed ranges) Factory Fixed +/- 10% Delay vs. Temperature 15% Sensing Delay on Startup Factory fixed 0 - 6s: +40%, -0% Input Voltage 24 , 120, or 230VAC; 12 or 24VDC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC -15 - 20% 120 & 230VAC -20 - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated, SPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 240VAC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 10 6 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Isolation Voltage 2500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance 100 M Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 63.5 mm (2.5"); D 44.5 mm (1.75") Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals (5) Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight 6.4 oz (181 g) NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact A = Sensing Delay On Start Up TD = Trip Delay TP = Trip Point R = Reset OC = Monitored Current www.littelfuse.com/ecs Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers ECSW SERIES Current Sensors Description The ECSW Series of single-phase, AC window, current sensors includes adjustable overcurrent and undercurrent trip points. Detects locked rotor, jam, loss of load, an open heater or lamp load, a broken belt, or loss of suction. LED's aid in trip point adjustment and provide fault indication. The built-in toroidal sensor eliminates the need for an external current transformer. The output can be electrically latched after a fault, or automatically reset. Remote resetting of a latched output by removing input voltage. The unit includes switch selectable zero current detection and normally de-energized or energized output operation. Time delays are included to improve operation and eliminate nuisance tripping. Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits L1 N/L2 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 MC = Motor Contactor M = Motor F = Fuses OL = Overload RSW = Reset Switch FSW = Fan or Float Contacts CR = Control Relay CS = Current Sensor MCC = Motor Contactor Coil FEATURES BENEFITS Built-in toroidal current sensing Eliminates need to install stand alone current transformer and provides isolation from monitored circuit Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity LED indication Visual indication for trip point adjustment and fault indication Multiple switch selectable features User selectable zero current detection, latched, normally de-energized, or energized output adds application flexibility Adjustable trip delay Eliminates nuisance tripping and prevents rapid cycling Isolated 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Operation When the input voltage is applied, sensing delay on startup begins and the output transfers (if normally energized is selected). Upon completion of the startup delay, sensing of the monitored current begins. As long as current is above undercurrent trip point and below the overcurrent trip point (inside the window), the output relay remains in its normal operating condition and both red LED's are OFF. The green LED glows when the output is energized. If current varies outside the window, the associated red LED glows, and the trip delay begins. If the current remains outside the window for the full V = Voltage I> = Adjustable Overcurrent I< = Adjustable Undercurrent W = Monitored Wire T - Adjustable Trip Delay For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 34. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE TRIP POINT ADJUST. TRIP DELAY ECSW3LABT 24VDC 0.5 - 5A 0.150 - 7s SENSING DELAY ON STARTUP 0.1s Terminal blocks CONNECT. ECSW4HBHT 120VAC 5 - 50A 0.5 - 50s 6s Terminal blocks ECSW4LADT 120VAC 0.5 - 5A 0.150 - 7s 2s Terminal blocks ECSW4LBHT 120VAC 0.5 - 5A 0.5 - 50s 6s Terminal blocks ECSW4MACT 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.150 - 7s 1s Terminal blocks ECSW4MBHT 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.5 - 50s 6s Terminal blocks ECSW4MBGT 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.5 - 50s 5s Terminal blocks ECSW6MBHT 230VAC 2 - 20A 0.5 - 50s 6s Terminal blocks If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/ecsw 178 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers ECSW SERIES trip delay, the relay transfers to fault condition state. If the current returns to normal levels (inside the window) during the trip delay, the red LED goes OFF, the trip delay is reset, and the output remains in the normal condition. Reset: Remove input voltage or open latch switch. If zero current detection is selected, the unit will reset as soon as zero current is detected. Operation With Zero Current Detection Enabled: If the current decreases to zero within the trip delay period, then zero current is viewed as an acceptable current level. The unit's output remains in its normal operating state. This allows the monitored load to cycle ON and OFF without nuisance tripping the ECSW. Zero current is defined as current flow of less than 250 milliamp-turns. Note: When zero current detect is selected, the latching operation of switch SW2 is canceled; the output will not latch after a fault trip. Notes on Operation 1. There is no hysteresis on the trip points. The overcurrent and undercurrent trip points should be adjusted to provide adequate protection against short cycling. 2. If the upper setpoint is set below the lower setpoint, both red LED's will glow indicating a setting error. for the full trip delay, the normally open (NO) contact will close, energizing the control relay (CR) coil. The CR normally closed contact (CR1) opens and the MCC de-energizes and CR latches on through its normally open contacts (CR2). Reset is accomplished by momentarily opening the normally closed reset switch (RSW). Note: If the current falls to zero within the trip delay, the ECSW remains de-energized. The sensing delay on startup occurs when input voltage is applied therefore trip delay must be longer than the duration of the motor's inrush current. The external latching relay CR2 is required in this system to prevent rapid cycling. A timer can be added to provide an automatic reset. Selector Switch ON SW1 SW2 SW3 Not Used Latched Zero I Output - Normally Energized 179 www.littelfuse.com/ecsw 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Mode Selection Switches SW1 = Latched or Auto reset selector OFF - Automatic reset after a fault ON - Output relay latches after a fault trips the unit SW2 = Zero current detection (below 250 mA) OFF - Zero current detection disabled ON - Zero current detection enabled SW3 = Output during normal operation OFF - Output relay de-energized ON - Output relay energized 3. If zero current detection is selected (SW2 ON), and the system is wired to disconnect the monitored load, the system may short cycle. After the unit trips, the load deenergizes, and zero current is detected. The ECSW resets, and the load energizes again immediately and may be short cycled. 4. The sensing delay on start up only occurs when input voltage is applied. When zero current detection is selected, the trip delay must be longer than the duration of the inrush current or the unit will trip on the inrush current. Typical Pump or Fan Protection Circuit Operation Window Current Sensing: With the ECSW connected as shown in the diagram, a load may be monitored and controlled for over and undercurrent. The ECSW Series' on board CT (CS) may be placed on the line or load side of the contactor. The ECSW selection switches are set for zero current sensing (see Selector Switch SW2) and the output selection is normally deenergized (see Selector Switch SW3). The input voltage (V) is applied to the ECSW continually. As the control switch (FSW) is closed, the input voltage (V) is applied to the motor contactor coil (MCC), and the motor (M) energizes. As long as the current remains below the overcurrent and above the undercurrent trip points, the ECSW's output contacts remain de-energized. If the load current should rise above or fall below a trip point, (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls OFF Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers ECSW SERIES Specifications Protection Surge Circuitry Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Sensor Type AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 Toroid, through hole wiring for up to #4 AWG (21.1 mm2) THHN wire Mode Over & undercurrent trip points (window current sensing) Trip Point Range 0.5 - 50A in 3 adjustable ranges Tolerance Guaranteed range Maximum Allowable Current Steady - 50A turns; Inrush - 300A turns for 10s Time Point vs Temp. & Voltage 5% Response Time 75ms Frequency 45/500 Hz Type of Detection Peak detection Zero Current Detection < 250mA turns typical Time Delay Range 0.15 - 50s in 2 adjustable ranges or 0.1 - 50s fixed Tolerance Adjustable: guaranteed range; Fixed: 10% Sensing Delay On Start Up Fixed 0.1 - 6s in 1s increments Tolerance +40% -0% Delay vs. Temp. & Voltage 15% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC; 12 or 24VDC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC -15% - 20% 120 & 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Electromechanical relay Mode: Switch Selectable ON Energized during normal operation, de-energized after a fault OFF De-energized during normal operation, energizes during a fault Form Isolated, SPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 240VAC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 10 6; Electrical - 1 x 105 Latch Type Electrical Reset Remove input voltage Function Switch selectable latching function www.littelfuse.com/ecsw Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 180 IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Encapsulated 2500V RMS input to output 100 M Surface mount with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 63.5 mm (2.5"); D 44.5 mm (1.75") 0.197 in. (5 mm) terminal blocks for up to #12 (3.2 mm2) AWG wire -40 to 60 C/-40 to 85 C 95% relative, non-condensing 6.4 oz (181 g) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers TCS SERIES Current Sensor Description The TCS Series is a low cost method of go/no go current detection. It includes a solid-state output to sink or source current when connected directly to a standard PLC digital input module. Its normally open or normally closed output can also be used to control relays, lamps, valves, and small heaters rated up to 1A steady, 10A inrush. The TCS is self-powered (no external power required to operate the unit) and available with an adjustable actuation range of 2 - 20A or factory fixed actuation points from 2 - 45A. Operation Normally Open: When a current equal to or greater than the actuate current is passed through the toroidal sensor, the output closes. When the current is reduced to 95% of the actuate current or less, the output opens. Normally Closed: When the current through the toroid is equal to or greater than the actuate current, the output opens. When the current is reduced below 95% of the actuate current, the output closes. To increase sensitivity, multiple turns may be made through the TCS's toroidal sensor. The trip point range is divided by the number of turns through the toroidal sensor to create a new range. When using an external CT, select a 2VA, 0-20A output CT rated for the current to be monitored. Select TCS adjustment range 0. Pass one secondary wire lead through the TCS' toroid and connect the secondary leads together. Wiring Diagram NEGATIVE SWITCHING POSITIVE SWITCHING L1 L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 SINKING N/L2 L1 Features & Benefits = Load V = Voltage PS = Power Supply PLC = PLC Digital Input Module SOURCING Monitored AC conductor must be insulated. BENEFITS Self powered No control voltage is required to operate the unit Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Can connect directly to PLC Solid state output to sink or source current can be connected directly to a standard PLC digital input module 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Complete isolation between sensed current and control circuit Allows you to monitor a load in a separate lectrical system For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 35. Ordering Information MODEL OUTPUT VOLTAGE ACTUATE CURRENT OUTPUT FORM MODEL OUTPUT VOLTAGE ACTUATE CURRENT OUTPUT FORM TCSG2A 3 to 50VDC Fixed, 2A Normally open TCSH2B 24 to 240VAC Fixed, 2A Normally closed TCSGAA 3 to 50VDC 2-20A adjustable Normally open TCSH5B 24 to 240VAC Fixed, 5A Normally closed TCSGAB 3 to 50VDC 2-20A adjustable Normally closed TCSHAA 24 to 240VAC 2-20A adjustable Normally open TCSH2A 24 to 240VAC Fixed, 2A Normally open TCSHAB 24 to 240VAC 2-20A adjustable Normally closed If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 181 www.littelfuse.com/tcs AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS L N/L2 9 FEATURES Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers TCS SERIES Accessories Specifications P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Function Diagram 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS TP = Trip Point OC = Monitored Current NO = Normally Open Output NC = Normally Closed Output R = Reset www.littelfuse.com/tcs Sensor Type Toroid, through hole wiring, alternating current, monitored wire must be properly insulated Current to Actuate Adjustable: - 2 - 20A, guaranteed range Fixed: - 2 - 45A, +0/-20% Reset Current 95% of the actuate current Maximum Allowable Current Steady - 50A turns Inrush - 300A turns for 10s Actuate Current vs. Temp. & Voltage 5% Response Times Overcurrent - 200ms Undercurrent - 1s Burden < 0.5VA Output Type Solid state Form NO or NC Rating 1A steady, 10A inrush Voltage AC - 24 to 240VAC +10/-20% DC - 3 to 50VDC Voltage Drop AC NO & NC - 2.5V DC NO & NC - 1.2V Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance 100 M Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 44.5 mm (1.75") Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals (2) Sensor Hole 0.36 in. (9.14 mm) for up to #4 AWG (21.1 mm2) THHN wire Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20 to 60C / -40 to 85C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight 2.6 oz (74 g) 182 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers TCSA SERIES Current Transducers Description Wiring Diagram PS PS = Power Supply Z = Zero Adjust S = Span Adjust W = Insulated Wire Carrying Monitored Current PLC = PLC Analog Input or Meter Input The TCSA Series is a loop-powered, linear output current transducer that provides an output that is directly proportional to the RMS AC current passing through the onboard toroid. The TCSA provides a 4 - 20mA output over a power supply range of 10 - 30VDC. Each unit is factory calibrated for monitoring in one of four ranges; 0-5, 0-10, 0-20, or 0-50A. The 0 - 5A range allows the use of external current transformers so loads up to 1200AC amps can be monitored. Operation The TCSA varies the effective resistance of its output in direct proportion to the current flowing in the monitored conductor. The unit is factory calibrated so that 0 amps provides a 4mA output and full span provides a 20mA output. Zero and span adjustments are provided for minor calibration adjustments in the field (if required). Using an External Current Transformer (CT) Select a 2VA, 0 to 5A output CT, rated for the current to be monitored. Select TCSA5. Pass one of the CT's secondary wire leads through the TCSA's toroid. Connect the CT's secondary leads together. 20 18 16 9 14 10 8 6 4 Ordering Information 0 1 2 4 10 2 4 8 20 3 6 12 30 4 8 16 40 5 10 20 50 MODEL CURRENT RANGE TCSA5 0-5A TCSA10 0-10A TCSA20 0-20A Features TCSA50 0-50A gJ Monitors 0 - 50A in 4 ranges gJ Loop powered from 10 to 30VDC gJ Linear output from 4 - 20mA gJ Zero & span adjustments gJ Complete isolation between sensed current & control circuit If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 183 www.littelfuse.com/tcsa AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 12 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 35. Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers TCSA SERIES Accessories Specifications Sensor Type P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. Toroid, through hole wiring, alternating current, monitored conductor must be properly insulated 0 - 50A Monitored AC Current Ranges 4 Factory Calibrated Ranges 0 - 5A, 0 - 10A, 0 - 20A, or 0 - 50A Factory Calibration 2% of full scale Maximum Allowable Current Steady - 50A turns; Inrush - 300A turns for 10s Repeat Accuracy 0.25% of full scale under fixed conditions Response Time 300ms Burden 0.5VA AC Line Frequency 0 - 20A / 21 - 50A 20 - 100Hz / 30 - 100Hz Temperature Coefficient 0.05%/C Output Type: Series Connection Current directly proportional to monitored current Range 4 - 20mA Sensor Supply Voltage* 10 to 30VDC Momentary Voltage 40VDC for 1m Zero Adjust 3.75 - 4.25mA Span Adjust 18mA - 22mA Adjustment Mini-screw, 25-turn potentiometer Protection Dielectric Breakdown 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance 100 M Polarity Units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 44.5 mm (1.75") Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Sensor Hole 0.36 in. (9.14 mm) for up to #4 AWG (21.1 mm2) THHN wire Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -30 to 60C/-40 to 85C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight 2.4 oz (68 g) P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 *Minimum loop-power supply voltage equals the minimum sensor voltage 10VDC plus the voltage drop developed across all the other loop devices at 20mA. www.littelfuse.com/tcsa 184 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers DCSA SERIES Current Transducers Description The DCSA Series is a loop-powered, linear output current transducer that provides an output that is directly proportional to the RMS AC current passing through the LCSC10T12 sensor. The DCSA Series provides either an analog current or voltage: 4-20 mA, 1 to 5VDC, or 2 to 10VDC. Each unit is factory calibrated for monitoring (with the LCSC10T12 connected) in one of four ranges; 0-5, 0-10, 0-20, or 0-50A. Zero and span adjustments allow field calibration if needed. The DCSA Series mounts on both DIN 1 and DIN 3 rails. Operation The DCSA Series varies the effective resistance of its output in direct proportion to the current flowing in the conductor monitored by the LCSC10T12. Connecting the power supply to terminals C & D provides a 4 to 20mA DC current. Connect the power supply to terminals C & A to get 1 to 5VDC at terminal D. Connect the power supply to terminals C & B to get 2 to 10VDC at terminal D. Wiring Diagram CONNECTION FOR 4 - 20 MA LOOP Connection for Connection for 4-20mA Loop 4-20mA Loop Features LCSC10T12 Current Sensor LCSC10T12 LCSC10T12 Current Sensor Current Sensor DCSA50 Connect One: A = 1 to 5VDC Current B = 2measuring to 10VDC Mounts on DIN 1 or DIN 3 rail gJ 0-50A in 4 ranges using LCSC10T12 sensor gJ Loop powered from 10 to 30VDC gJ Linear output from 4-20mA, 1-10VDC gJ Zero & span adjustments gJ Separate sensor & control unit Accessories LCSC10T12 Toroidal Current Sensor Remote monitoring of currents up to 50A. AD = Instrument, Meter, or PLC Input PS = Power Supply To LCSC10T12 To LCSC10T12 Current Sensor To LCSC10T12 Current Sensor Current Sensor DCSA50 9 Jumper used when Jumpersource used when current is not Jumper used when current current source is not LCSC10T12 source is not LCSC10T12 LCSC10T12 C C Connection for Connection for FOR Analog Voltage Output CONNECTION ANALOG Analog Voltage Output VOLTAGE OUTPUT D D Connect One: A = 1measuring to 5VDC Voltage Voltage B =device 2measuring to 10VDC A A device B B DCSA DCSA Ordering Information CURRENT RANGE WITH LCSC10T12 INPUT RANGE (F TO E) 0-5A 0-5mA AC DCSA20 0-20A 0-20mA AC 249 249 DCSA50 0-50A 0-50mA AC MODEL 249 249DCSA5 If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 AD = Instrument, Meter, or PLC Input PS = Power Supply Connect One: Connect One: V DA = 1 to 5VDC =1 VDA 2 to 5VDC 10VDC DB VDB = 2 to 10VDC For dimensional see: Appendix, page input 513, Figure 36. AD = drawing Instrument, meter or PLC AD Instrument, meter or PLC input PS = Power Supply PS = Power Supply (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 185 www.littelfuse.com/dcsa AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Current measuring device device gJ Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers DCSA SERIES Specifications AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 Input Ranges (without LCSC10T12 connected) 4 factory calibrated ranges in mA AC Factory calibration Repeat Accuracy Response Time Temperature Coefficient Input to Output Output Type Analog Range Supply Voltage* Momentary Voltage Zero Adjust Span Adjust Adjustment Protection Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Termination Wire clamp Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight www.littelfuse.com/dcsa 0 - 5mA, 0 - 10mA, 0 - 20mA, or 0 - 50mA AC 0.5% of full scale 0.25% of full scale under fixed conditions 300ms 0.05%/C Not isolated Current directly proportional to input current 4 - 20mA, or 1 to 5VDC or 2 to 10VDC 10 to 30VDC 40VDC for 1m 3.75 - 4.25mA 18mA - 22mA Mini-screw, multi-turn potentiometer Accessory - LCSC10T12 Toroidal Sensor Number of Turns 1000 Nominal Output Current Full Range 0 - 50 mA Maximum Allowable Current Steady 50A turns; Inrush 300A turns for 10s Burden 0.5 VA Frequency 0 - 20A / 21 - 50A 20/100 Hz / 30/100 Hz Sensor Hole 0.36 in. (9.14 mm) for up to #4 AWG (21.1 mm2) THHN wire Weight 1 oz (28.3 g) *Minimum loop-power supply voltage equals the minimum sensor voltage 10VDC plus the voltage drop developed across all the other loop devices at 20mA. Monitored Monitored Current Amps Diagram Current Amps 50, 20, 10, 5 2500V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Units are reverse polarity protected 25, 10, 5, 2.5 A DIN 1 & DIN 3 rail mounting 0 For 22 - 14AWG (.336 mm2 ... 2.5 mm2) mA 4 VDC 2 Output 1 12 6 3 20 10 5 -30 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 1.6 oz (45.4 g) 186 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers LCS10T12 / LPM SERIES Current Indicators Description Wiring Diagram Wire Length: 500 ft. (152.4m) max. (Customer Supplied) CAUTION: The LCS10T12 must be connected to the LPM12 or LPMG12 before current flows to prevent damage or shock hazard. Monitored wires must be properly insulated. The LCS10T12 connected to the LPM12 or LPMG12 indicator is a low cost, easy to use, go/no-go indication system for the remote monitoring of current flow. The LCS10T12 is installed on an adequately insulated wire of the monitored load. Its 12in. (30.4cm) leads are connected to the LPM12 or LPMG12 panel mount indicator directly or via customer supplied wires up to 500 feet (152.4m) long. Operation When the monitored current is 5A turns, the panel mount LPM indicator will glow. The LCS10T12 is designed to maximize the light output of the panel mount indicator. It can be used to monitor current flow of less than 5A by passing the monitored conductor 2 or more times through the sensor. CAUTION: The LCS10T12 must be connected to the LPM12 or LPMG12 before current flows to prevent damage or a shock hazard. Monitored wires must be properly insulated. Panel mount indicator designed to match the output of the LCS10T12. The LPM12 and LPMG12 come with 12 in. (30.4 cm) wires and a one piece mounting clip. Both devices install quickly in a 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) hole in panels from 0.031 - 0.062 in. (0.79 - 1.6 mm) thick. Features Low cost go/no go indication gJ May be connected to wires up to 500 feet (152.4 m) long gJ Remote monitoring of currents up to 50A gJ Green or red LED indicator available Specifications For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 37 and 38. Ordering Information MODEL DESCRIPTION LCS10T12 AC Current Sensor LPM12 Red LED Indicator LPMG12 Green LED Indicator If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Monitored Current Current Range 2 - 50A AC Wire Passes Min. Current Max. Current Max. Inrush Max. Wire Dia. 1 5A 50A 120A 0.355 in. (9.0 mm) 2 2.5A 25A 60A 0.187 in. (4.7 mm) 3 1.7A 16.6A 40A 0.15 in. (3.8 mm) 4 1.3A 12.5A 30A 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) 5 5/X 50/X 120/X Maximum Current 50A turns continuous AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz DC Resistance of Current Limiter 65 Mechanical Sensor Hole 0.36 in. (9.14 mm) for up to #4 AWG (21.1 mm2) THHN wire Termination 12 in. (30.4 cm) wire leads Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40 to 60C/-40 to 85C Weight LCS: 0.8 oz (23 g) LPM: 0.2 oz (6 g) 187 www.littelfuse.com/lcs-lpm 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS gJ Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 50R SERIES Single-Phase Voltage Monitor Description The 50R Series single-phase voltage monitor has a voltagesensing circuit which constantly monitors the single-phase power for a low voltage condition. Single-phase motors on fans, compressors, air conditioners, heat pumps, well pumps, sump pumps and small conveyor motors are all applicable to the 50R Series. When a harmful condition is detected, the MotorSaver's output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level and a specified amount of time has elapsed (restart delay). The trip delay prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram 50R AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary voltage sensing circuitry Constant monitoring of single-phase power for a low voltage condition Adjustable trip delay (-3 models) and restart delay (-2 models) settings Prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions and allows staggered start up of multiple motors, after a fault, to prevent a low voltage condition High voltage detection (-9 models) Trips and resets at a fixed percentage of the setpoint: trip 110%, reset 107%. 600V rated relay contacts available on some models Eliminates the need for a control transformer to step voltage down to 120 - 240V for a control circuit For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 509, Figure 6. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION 50R-100 95-120VAC Fixed trip and restart delay 50R-100-2 95-120VAC Fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 50R200 190-240VAC Fixed trip and restart delay 50R2002 190-240VAC Fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 50R2003 190-240VAC Fixed restart and variable trip delay (2-30s) 50R20029 190-240VAC Fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) plus high voltage detection 50R400 380-480VAC Fixed trip and restart delay 50R4002 380-480VAC Fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 50R4003 380-480VAC Fixed restart and variable trip delay (2-30s) 50R40029 380-480VAC Fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) plus high voltage detection www.littelfuse.com/50r 188 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 50R SERIES Specifications Transient Protection (Internal) Safety Marks UL CE Dimensions Weight Mounting Method Special Options Opt. 2: Variable Restart Delay Opt. 3: Variable Trip Delay Opt. 9: High Voltage Detection Operating Points Trip (% of Setpoint) Reset (% of Setpoint) 95-120VAC 190-240VAC 380-480VAC 50*/60Hz Manual, 2-300 seconds 2-30 seconds 110% 107% *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20% 90% 93% 4 seconds 2 seconds 2 seconds 480VA @ 240VAC 10A @ 240VAC 470VA @ 600VAC -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 5W 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 9 7 in.-lbs. 12-18AWG IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power and controls AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Input Characteristics Line Voltage 50R-100 50R200 50R400 Frequency Functional Characteristics Low Voltage: Trip (% of setpoint) Reset (% of setpoint) Delay Time (Nominal) Trip Restart (low voltage) Restart (complete power loss) Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT - 1 Form C) 50R-100, 50R200 Pilot Duty General Purpose 50R400 Pilot Duty General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating Storage Maximum Input Power Relative Humidity Terminal Torque Wire Size Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-5; 1995 6kV UL508 (File #E68520) IEC 60947-6-2 H 74.4 mm (2.93"); W 133.9 mm (5.27"); D 74.9 mm (2.95") 0.98 lb. (15.68 oz., 444.52 g) #8 screws (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 189 www.littelfuse.com/50r Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 201-XXX-SP SERIES Single-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor Description The 201-xxx-SP Series is an 8-pin octal-base, plug-in voltage monitor designed to protect single-phase motors regardless of size. The 201-100-SP is used on 95-120VAC, 50/60Hz motors to prevent damage caused by low voltage. The 201-200-SP is used on 190-240VAC, 50/60Hz motors. The 201-200-SP-T-9 is a pin-forpin replacement for a Time Mark(R) #260 Series voltage monitor. High voltage protection is included in the 201-200-SP-T-9. The unique microcontroller-based voltage and voltage-sensing circuit constantly monitors the voltage to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the MotorSaver's output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level and a specified amount of time has elapsed (restart delay). The trip delay prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 201-SP Wiring Diagram WITH MOTOR CONTROL Must use Model OT08PC socket for UL Rating! Note: Manufacturer's recommended screw terminal torque for the RB Series and OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. Features & Benefits AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage to detect harmful power line conditions, even before the motor starts Fixed trip delay 4s Prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions Advanced LED indication Provides diagnostics which can be used for troubleshooting and to determine relay status Compact design for 8-pin; Allows flexibility in panel installation DIN rail or surface mount Accessories OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10A @ 600VAC. PIN-OUT 1 (201-XXX-SP) (view of socket) PIN-OUT 2 (201-200-SP-T-9) (view of socket) For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION 201-100-SP 95-120VAC SPDT, protects single phase motors 201-200-SP 190-240VAC SPDT, protects single phase motors 201-200-SP-T-9 190-240VAC SPDT, direct replacement for Time Mark(R) #260 series www.littelfuse.com/201xxxsp 190 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 201-XXX-SP SERIES Specifications Input Characteristics Line Voltage: 201-100-SP 201-200-SP, 201-200-SP-T-9 Frequency Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset For 201-200-SP-T-9 only: High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset Trip Delay Time: High/Low Voltage Fault Restart Delay Time: After a Fault After a Complete Power Loss Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty General Purpose General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating Storage Maximum Input Power Transient Protection (Internal) Safety Marks UL (OT08PC octal socket required) CE Dimensions 95-120VAC 190-240VAC 50/60Hz 90% 93% -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 5W 2500V for 10 ms UL508 (File #E68520) IEC 60947-6-2 H 44.45 mm (1.75"); W 60.325 mm (2.375"); D 104.775 mm (4.125") (with socket) 0.8 lb. (12.8 oz., 362.87 g) DIN rail or surface mount (plug in to OT08PC socket) Model OT08PC (UL Rating 600V) 110% 107% Weight Mounting Method 4 seconds Socket Available 2 seconds 2 seconds The 600V socket can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail. 480VA @ 240VAC 10A @ 240VAC 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 191 www.littelfuse.com/201xxxsp Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 201-XXX-SP-DPDT SERIES Single-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor Description The 201-xxx-SP-DPDT Series is an 8-pin octal-base, plug-in voltage monitor designed to protect single-phase motors regardless of size. The 201-100-SP-DPDT is used on 95-120VAC, 50/60Hz motors to prevent damage caused by low voltage. The 201-200-SP-DPDT is used on 190-240VAC, 50/60Hz motors. The units feature two isolated sets of contacts that are ideal for use with two control circuits with different voltages. The unique microcontroller-based voltage and voltage-sensing circuit constantly monitors the voltage to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the MotorSaver's output relays are deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relays reactivate after power line conditions return to an acceptable level and a specified amount of time has elapsed (restart delay). The trip delay prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. Must use Model OT08PC socket for UL Rating! Note: Manufacturer's recommended screw terminal torque for the RB Series and OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. Wiring Diagram 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage to detect harmful power line conditions, even before the motor starts Fixed trip delay 4s Prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions Advanced LED indication Provides diagnostics which can be used for troubleshooting and to determine relay status Compact design for 8-pin; Allows flexibility in panel installation DIN rail or surface mount Accessories OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10A @ 600VAC. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOTAGE DESCRIPTION 201-100-SP-DPDT 95-120VAC Two isolated Form C relays 201-200-SP-DPDT 190-240VAC Two isolated Form C relays www.littelfuse.com/201xxxspdpdt 192 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 201-XXX-SP-DPDT SERIES Specifications Input Characteristics Line Voltage: 201-100-SP-DPDT 201-200-SP-DPDT Frequency Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint): Trip Reset Trip Delay Times: Low Voltage Restart Delay Times: After a Fault or Complete Power Loss Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (DPDT) Pilot Duty General Purpose General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range: Operating Storage Maximum Input Power Relative Humidity Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated 150MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power and controls Safety Marks UL (OT08PC octal socket required) UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75"); W 60.325 mm (2.375"); D 104.775 mm (4.125") (with socket) Weight 0.65 lb. (10.4 oz., 294.84 g) Mounting Method DIN rail or surface mount (plug in to OT08PC socket) Socket Available Model OT08PC (UL Rating 600V) 95-120VAC 190-240VAC 50/60Hz 90% +/-1% 93% +/-1% 4 seconds 2 seconds The 600V socket can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail 480VA @ 240VAC 10A @ 240VAC -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 5W 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 193 www.littelfuse.com/201xxxspdpdt Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 202-200-SP SERIES Single-Phase Voltage Monitor Description The 202-200-SP Series voltage monitor is designed to protect single-phase motors regardless of size. It can be used with 190V-240VAC, 50/60Hz motors to prevent damage caused by incoming power problems. A unique microcontroller-based voltage-sensing circuit constantly monitors the voltage to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the MotorSaver's output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level and a specified amount of time has elapsed (restart delay). The trip delay prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 202-200-SP WITH MOTOR CONTROL AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage to detect harmful power line conditions, even before a motor starts Fixed trip delay 4s Prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions Adjustable restart delay (Manual, 2-300s) Allows staggered start up of multiple motors, after a fault, to prevent a low voltage condition Advanced LED indication Provides diagnostics which can be used for troubleshooting and to determine relay status One screw mounting and standard 1/4" quick connect terminals Fast installation and compact size perfect for panel assembly or OEM applications Ordering Information TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 202-200-SP WITH ALARM CONTROL MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION 202-200-SP 190-240VAC SPDT, high and low voltage protection 202-200-SP-NHV 190-240VAC SPDT, low voltage protection only For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 7. www.littelfuse.com/202200sp 194 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 202-200-SP SERIES Specifications General Characteristics Temperature Range Trip & Reset Accuracy Repeatability Input to Output Dielectric Termination Maximum Input Power Relative Humidity Transient Protection Safety Marks UL, UL Recognized Dimensions Input Characteristics Line Voltage: 202-200-SP, 202-200-SP-NHV 190-240VAC Frequency 50*/60Hz Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 90% Reset 93% High Voltage (% of setpoint) (not available on -NHV model) Trip 110% Reset 107% Trip Delay Time: High and Low Voltage 4 seconds Restart Delay Time: After a Fault or Complete Power Loss Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC Weight Mounting Method -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) 1% 0.5% 1480 Vrms (min.) 0.25" male quick connect 5W 95%, non-condensing IEC 61000-4-5, 4kV UL508 (File #E68520) H 63.5 mm (2.5"); W 63.5 mm (2.5"); D 35.56 mm (1.4") 0.5 lb. (8 oz., 226.8 g) 1/4" socket head cap screw (customer supplied) *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%. 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 195 www.littelfuse.com/202200sp Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 460-XXX-SP SERIES Single-Phase Voltage Monitor Description The 460-100-SP is used on 95-120VAC, 50*/60Hz single-phase motors and the 460-200-SP is used on 190-240VAC, 50*/60Hz single-phase motors to protect them from damaging high and low voltage conditions. An adjustment knob allows the user to set a 1-500 second restart delay. The variable restart delay is also a power-up delay and can be utilized to stagger-start motors on the same system. A unique microcontroller-based, voltage-sensing circuit constantly monitors the voltage to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the MotorSaver's output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level and a specified amount of time has elapsed (restart delay). The trip delay prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage to detect harmful power line conditions, even before a motor starts Fixed trip delay 4s Prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions Adjustable restart delay (1-500s) Allows staggered start up of multiple motors on the same system to prevent a low voltage condition Advanced LED indication Provides diagnostics which can be used for troubleshooting and to determine relay status DIN rail or surface mountable Allows flexibility for panel assembly Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE 460-100-SP 95-120VAC 460-200-SP 190-240VAC For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 10. www.littelfuse.com/460xxxsp 196 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 460-XXX-SP SERIES Specifications 95-120VAC 190-240VAC 50*/60Hz 90% 1% 93% 1% 110% 1% 107% 1% 4 seconds fixed 1-500 seconds adjustable 1-500 seconds adjustable 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 10A @ 240VAC *Note: 50 Hz will increase all delay timers by 20% -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 6W IP20, NEMA 1 (finger safe) 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 4.5 in.-lbs. Stranded or solid 12-20 AWG, one per terminal (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Input Characteristics Line Voltage 460-100-SP 460-200-SP Frequency Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint): Trip Reset High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset Trip Delay Time Low or High Voltage Restart Delay Time After a Fault After a Complete Power Loss Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (1 Form C) Pilot Duty General Purpose General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating Storage Maximum Input Power Class of Protection Relative Humidity Terminal Torque Wire Type Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated 150 MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5 kV input power and controls Surge IEC IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 4kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Hi-potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 min) Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Enclosure Polycarbonate Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 52.93 mm (2.084"); D 59.69 mm (2.35") Weight 0.9 lb. (14.4 oz., 408.23 g) Mounting Method 35mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) 197 www.littelfuse.com/460xxxsp Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 102A SERIES 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor Description The 102A is a 3-phase, auto-ranging, dual-range voltage monitor that protects 190-400VAC, 50/60Hz motors regardless of size. The product provides a user selectable nominal voltage setpoint and the voltage monitor automatically selects between the 200V and 400V range. A unique microcontroller-based voltage and phase-sensing circuit constantly monitors the 3-phase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to acceptable levels. The Model 102A includes advanced single LED diagnostics. Five different light patterns distinguish between faults and normal conditions. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram 102 WITH MOTOR CONTROL AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of single-phase, low voltage, high voltage (102A-9), voltage unbalance, phase reversal, harmful power line conditions. Auto-sensing wide voltage range Automatically senses system voltage between 190 - 480VAC. Saves setup time. Advanced LED diagnostics Quick visual indicator for cause of trip. LED indications include: normal operation, power-up restart delay, reverse-phase trip, unbalance/ single-phase trip, high or low voltage trip Adjustable trip delay (102A2) Prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. Ordering Information 102 WITH ALARM CONTROL MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 102A 190-480VAC Fixed low voltage trip delay (4 sec), fixed restart delay (2 sec) 102A2 190-480VAC Has variable restart delay (manual or adjustable 2-300 seconds) 102A3 190-480VAC Has adjustable trip delay at 2-30 seconds (unbalance and phasing trip delays remain at 2 seconds). 102A-9 190-480VAC Has high voltage protection. High Voltage Trip is 110% of setpoint, Reset is 107% of setpoint. 102600 475-600VAC Fixed low voltage trip delay (4 sec), fixed restart delay (2 sec) For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 509, Figure 6. www.littelfuse.com/102a 198 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 102A SERIES Specifications Frequency Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip Reset Trip Delay Time Low/High Voltage Unbalance & Phasing Faults Restart Delay Time After a Fault After a Complete Power Loss Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT - 1 Form C) Pilot Duty General Purpose 50*/60Hz 90% 93% 6% 4.5% 4 seconds (standard) 2 seconds 2 seconds (standard) 2 seconds (standard) 480VA @ 240VAC 10A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating Storage Trip & Reset Accuracy Maximum Input Power Terminal Torque Wire Size Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Fast Transient Burst Transient Protection (Internal) Safety Marks UL CSA CE Dimensions Weight Mounting Method -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 1% 5W 7 in.-lbs. 12-18AWG IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input, 2kV input/output IEC 61000-4-5; 1995 6kV UL508 (File #E68520) 22.2 No. 14 (File #46510) IEC 60947-6-2 H 74.4 mm (2.93"); W 133.9 mm (5.27"); D 74.9 mm (2.95") 1.05 lbs. (16.8 oz., 476.27 g) #8 screws *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%. 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 199 www.littelfuse.com/102a Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 201A SERIES 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor Description The 201A is a 3-phase, auto-ranging, dual-range voltage monitor that protects 190-480VAC, 50/60Hz motors regardless of size. The product provides a user selectable nominal voltage setpoint and the voltage monitor automatically selects between the 200V and 400V range. The 201A includes advanced single LED diagnostics, where color and light patterns distinguish between faults and normal conditions. This unique microcontroller-based voltage and phase-sensing device constantly monitors the 3-phase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the 201A's output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to acceptable levels for a specified restart delay time. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram 201A WITH MOTOR CONTROL FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of single-phase, low voltage, voltage unbalance, phase reversal, harmful power line conditions. High voltage monitoring optional. Compact design for 8-pin; Allows flexiblility in panel installation DIN rail or surface mount AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 Auto-sensing wide voltage range Automatically senses system voltage between 190 - 480VAC. Saves setup time. Advanced LED diagnostics Quick visual indicator for cause of trip. LED indications include: normal operation, power-up restart delay, reverse-phase trip, unbalance/ single-phase trip, high/low voltage trip Accessories OT08PC Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 600VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. 201A WITH ALARM CONTROL Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 201A 190-480VAC DIN rail or surface mountable 201A-9 190-480VAC Includes high voltage detection. DIN rail or surface mountable For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. www.littelfuse.com/201a 200 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 201A SERIES Specifications 50/60Hz 90% 1% 93% 1% 6% 4.5% 110% 1% 107% 1% 4 seconds 2 seconds 2 seconds 2 seconds 480VA @ 240VAC 10A @ 240VAC -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) 1% 5W 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 12 in.-lbs. (for OT08-PC socket) 12-22 AWG solid or stranded Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Radiated Fast Transient Burst Surge Immunity IEC ANSI/IEEE Hi-potential Test Safety Marks UL (OT08PC octal socket required) CE Dimensions Weight Mounting Method Socket Available IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air 150MHz, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power & controls IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 4kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 min.) UL508 (File #E68520) IEC 60947-6-2 H 44.45 mm (1.75"); W 60.33 mm (2.38"); D (with socket) 104.78 mm (4.13") 0.7 lbs. (11.2 oz., 317.51 g) DIN rail or surface mount (plug in to OT08PC socket) Model OT08PC (UL Rating 600V) The 600V socket can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail. Note: Manufacturer's recommended screw terminal torque for the OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. Must use Model OT08PC socket for UL Rating! 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Frequency Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip Reset Optional High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset Trip Delay Time High/Low Voltage Fault Unbalance & Phasing Faults Restart Delay Time After a Fault After a Complete Power Loss Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty General Purpose General Characteristics Temperature Range Trip & Reset Accuracy Maximum Input Power Relative Humidity Terminal Torque Wire Gauge Transient Protection (Internal) 2500V for 10 ms (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 201 www.littelfuse.com/201a Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 201A-AU SERIES 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor Description TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 201A-AU WITH MOTOR CONTROL The 201A-AU is a 3-phase, auto-ranging, dual-range voltage monitor that protects 190-480VAC, 50/60Hz motors regardless of size. The product provides a user selectable nominal voltage setpoint and the voltage monitor automatically selects between the 200V and 400V range. Additional adjustment knobs allow the user to set a 1-30 second trip delay, a manual restart or 1-500 second restart delay and a 2-8% voltage unbalance trip point. The Model 201A-AU includes advanced single LED diagnostics, where color and light patterns distinguish between faults and normal conditions. This unique microcontroller-based voltage and phase-sensing device constantly monitors the 3-phase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the 201A-AU's output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to acceptable levels for a specified amount or restart delay time (or manual reset). TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 201A-AU Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 L2 201A-AU WITH MOTOR CONTROL WITH MOTOR CONTROL FEATURES L3 BENEFITS Constant monitoring of loss of any phase, low voltage, high voltage, voltage unbalance, phase reversal, rapid cycling, harmful power line conditions Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry L1 L2 L3 Compact design for 8-pin; Allows flexiblility in panel installation DIN rail or surface mount AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 201A-AU Auto-sensing wide voltage range Automatically senses system voltage between 190 - 480VAC. Saves setup time. Advanced LED diagnostics Quick visual indicator for cause of trip. Adjustable voltage unbalance trip setting Allows compatibility with a variety of motors and reduces nuisance tripping. Adjustable trip & restart delay settings Prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. Accessories WITH ALARM CONTROL 201A-AU WITH ALARM CONTROL OT08PC Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 600VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 201A-AU WITH ALARM CONTROL L2 L1 L3 L1 L2 L3 Ordering Information LIGHT LIGHT HORN HORN MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 201A-AU 190-480VAC DIN rail or surface mountable 201575-AU 475-600VAC DIN rail or surface mountable 201A-AU-OT 190-480VAC Sold with OT08PC socket 201-575-AU-OT 475-600VAC Sold with OT08PC socket For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. www.littelfuse.com/201aau 202 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 201A-AU SERIES Specifications Frequency Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip Reset 90% 1% 93% 1% 110% 1% 107% 1% 2-8% adjustable Trip Setting Minus 1% (5-8%) Trip Setting Minus 0.5% (2-4%) 1-30 seconds adjustable 1 second fixed Manual, 1-500 seconds adj. Manual, 1-500 seconds adj. Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated Fast Transient Burst Surge IEC ANSI/IEEE Hi-potential Test Safety Marks UL (OT08PC octal socket required) CE Enclosure Dimensions Weight Mounting Method Socket Available 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 10A @ 240VAC IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air 150 MHz, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power and controls IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 4kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 min.) UL508 (File #E68520) IEC 60947-6-2 Polycarbonate H 44.45 mm (1.75"); W 60.325 mm (2.375"); D 104.775 mm (4.125") (with socket) 0.7 lb. (11.2 oz., 317.51 g) DIN rail or surface mount (plug in to OT08PC socket) OT08PC (UL Rating 600V) The 600V socket can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail. Note: Manufacturer's recommended screw terminal torque for the OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. Must use Model OT08PC socket for UL Rating! -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 1% 5W 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 12 in.-lbs. (for OT08-PC socket) 12-22 AWG solid or stranded (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Trip Delay Time High, Low and Unbalanced Voltage Single-Phasing Faults Restart Delay Time After a Fault After a Complete Power Loss Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (1-Form C) Pilot Duty General Purpose General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating Storage Trip & Reset Accuracy Maximum Input Power Relative Humidity Terminal Torque Wire Gauge 50/60Hz 203 www.littelfuse.com/201aau Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 201-XXX-DPDT SERIES 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor Description The 201-xxx-DPDT Series is an 11-pin octal base plug-in voltage monitor designed to protect 3-phase motors regardless of size. The 201-100-DPDT is used on 95-120VAC, 50/60Hz motors and the 201-200-DPDT is used on 190-240VAC, 50/60Hz motors to prevent damage caused by incoming voltage problems. The units feature two isolated sets of contacts that are ideal for use with two control circuits with different voltages. The unique microcontroller-based voltage and phase-sensing circuit constantly monitors the voltages to detect harmful power line conditions When a harmful condition is detected, the MotorSaver's output relays are deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relays reactivate after power line conditions return to an acceptable level and a specified amount of time has elapsed (restart delay). The trip delay prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. This unit is also available with a shorter trip delay and faster restart delay. The 201-xxx-DPDT-60mS has a trip delay of 0.5 seconds and a restart delay of 60 milliseconds. INPUT POWER Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits L3 L2 L1 6 7 8 9 9 8 7 9 10 10 11 1 2 2 3 1 BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constantly monitors 3 phase voltage to protect against harmful line conditions, even before the motor is started Compact design for 11-pin; DIN rail or surface mount Allows flexibility in panel installation Advanced LED indication Provides diagnostics which can be used for troubleshooting and to determine relay status Two isolated Form C relays (DPDT) Ideal for use in systems which have two control circuits with different voltages CONTROL POWER LIGHT Accessories OT11PC Octal Socket 11-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10A @ 300VAC STOP CONTROL POWER AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 4 4 3 11 HORN 5 6 5 FEATURES For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION 201-100-DPDT 95-120VAC Fixed unbalance, trip delay 4s for low voltage fault and 2s for unbalance and phase loss, restart delay 2s 201-200-DPDT 190-240VAC Fixed unbalance, trip delay 4s for low voltage fault and 2s for unbalance and phase loss, restart delay 2s 201-100-DPDT-60mS 95-120VAC Fixed unbalance, trip delay 0.5s, restart delay 60mS www.littelfuse.com/201xxxdpdt 204 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 201-XXX-DPDT SERIES Specifications Input Characteristics Line Voltage 201-100-DPDT, 201-100-DPDT-60mS 201-200-DPDT, 201-200-DPDT-60mS Frequency Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset Voltage Unbalance Trip Reset. Trip Delay Times Low Voltage Unbalance, Phasing Faults Models with -60ms option Restart Delay Times After a Fault or Complete Power Loss Models with -60mS option Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (DPDT) Pilot Duty General Purpose 95-120VAC 190-240VAC 50/60Hz 90% +/-1% 93% +/-1% 6% 4.5% 4 seconds 2 seconds 0.5 second General Characteristics Temperature Range Maximum Input Power Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated Fast Transient Burst Safety Marks UL (OT11PC octal socket required) CE Dimensions Weight Mounting Method Socket Available -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) 5W IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air 150MHz, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 2.5kV input power UL508 (File #E68520) IEC 60947-6-2 H 44.45 mm (1.75"); W 60.33 mm (2.38"); D 104.78 mm (4.125") 0.65 lb. (10.4 oz., 294.84 g) DIN rail or surface mount (plug in to OT11PC socket) Model OT11PC (UL Rated 300V) The 300V socket can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail. Must use Model OT11PC socket for UL Rating! 2 seconds 60 milliseconds *Note: Manufacturer's recommended screw terminal torque for the RB Series and OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. 480VA @ 240VAC 10A @ 240VAC 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 205 www.littelfuse.com/201xxxdpdt Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 202 SERIES 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor Description The 202 Series is a 3-phase, auto-ranging, dual-range voltage monitor that protects 190-480VAC, 50*/60Hz motors regardless of size. The 202-RP (and the 202-575-RP for 475-600VAC) monitors the phase rotation of 3-phase systems and trips on reverse-phase only. Critical applications include fan motors, scroll compressors, grinders, conveyor systems, elevators and escalators. Both products provide a user selectable nominal voltage setpoint and automatically select between the 200V and 400V range. This unique microcontroller-based voltage and phase-sensing device constantly monitors the 3-phase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the MotorSaver's output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to acceptable levels for a specified amount of restart delay time (or a manual reset). The 202 Series includes advanced single LED diagnostics. Five different light patterns distinguish between faults and normal conditions. The status light turns green and the relay is activated when rotation is correct. Wiring Diagram 202 WITH MOTOR CONTROL MOTOR AUTO M M OL OL OL M STOP M M Features & Benefits CONTROL VOLTAGE 240 VAC MAX. HAND OL 9 NC L3 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS OFF START L2 NO COM 202 L1 L1 L2 L3 INPUT POWER FEATURES BENEFITS Compact, quick mounting design 1-screw mounting saves time and space. Small footprint ideal for assembly into panels. Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of single-phase, low voltage, high voltage, voltage unbalance, phase reversal, harmful power line conditions. Auto-sensing wide voltage range (202 & 202-RP Automatically senses system voltage between 90 - 480VAC. Saves setup time. Advanced LED diagnostics Quick visual indicator for cause of trip. LED indications include: normal operation, restart delay, reverse-phase trip, fault Adjustable trip delay (202) Prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. 202 WITH ALARM CIRCUIT MOTOR OL OL OL M Ordering Information ALARM POWER 240 VAC MAX. ALARM MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 202 190-480VAC Standard protection with low/high voltage trip, voltage unbalance 202-RP 190-480VAC Trips on reverse-phase only 202-575-RP 475-600VAC Designed for higher voltage systems and trips on reverse-phase only M M NC L3 L2 NO COM 202 L1 L1 L2 L3 INPUT POWER For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 7. www.littelfuse.com/202 206 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 202 SERIES Specifications Frequency Functional Characteristics Phase Sequence Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip Reset Trip Delay Time High and Low Voltage Unbalance & Phasing Faults Restart Delay Time After a Fault After a Complete Power Loss 50*/60Hz ABC 90% 93% 110% 107% 6% 4.5% 4 seconds 2 seconds Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty General Purpose General Characteristics Temperature Range Trip & Reset Accuracy Repeatability Maximum Input Power Relative Humidity Transient Protection Hi-potential Test Termination Safety Marks UL Recognized Dimensions Weight Mounting Method 480VA @ 240VAC 10A @ 240VAC -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) 1% 0.5% 5W 95%, non-condensing IEC 61000-4-5, 4kV Meets UL508 (2x rated V+1000V for 1 minute) 0.25" male quick connect UL508 (File #E68520) H 63.5 mm (2.5"); W 63.5 mm (2.5"); D 35.56 mm (1.4") 0.5 lb. (8 oz., 226.8 g) 1/4" socket head cap screw (customer supplied) *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%. CE Pending 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 207 www.littelfuse.com/202 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 250A SERIES 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor Description The 250A is a 3-phase, auto-ranging, dual-range voltage monitor that protects 190-480VAC, 50/60Hz motors regardless of size from low and high voltage, unbalance/single-phase, and reversephase. The product provides a user selectable nominal voltage setpoint and the voltage monitor automatically selects between the 200V and 400V range. The 250A also features adjustable or manual restart delay. This unique microcontroller-based voltage and phase-sensing device constantly monitors the 3-phase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to acceptable levels. The Model 250A includes advanced single LED diagnostics. Five different light patterns distinguish between faults and normal conditions. Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of single-phase, low voltage, voltage unbalance, phase reversal, harmful power line conditions. Auto-sensing wide voltage range Automatically senses system voltage between 190 - 480VAC. Saves setup time. Advanced LED diagnostics Quick visual indicator for cause of trip. LED indications include: normal operation, power-up restart delay, reverse-phase trip, unbalance/ single-phase trip, high or low voltage trip DPDT relay output Allows for versitility to meet wide application needs Manual Reset Allows for inspection of equipment before system is re-energized MODEL 250 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 509, Figure 6. Ordering Information % OF SETPOINT MODEL LINE VOLTAGE 250A 250600 250A-MET 250-100-MET LOW VOLTAGE TRIP LOW VOLTAGE RESET HIGH VOLTAGE TRIP HIGH VOLTAGE RESET DESCRIPTION 190-480VAC 90% 93% 110% 107% Provides high and low voltage protection at fixed percentage of nominal voltage. 475-600VAC 90% 93% 110% 107% Provides high and low voltage protection at fixed percentage of nominal voltage. N/A Designed for use with Fire Control Panels. Has 2 Form C contacts that operate independently. Left Form C energizes when voltage conditions are good and de-energize when a fault condition is detected. Right Form C only energizes during a reverse-phase condition. No high voltage protection. N/A Designed for use with Fire Control Panels. Has 2 Form C contacts that operate independently. Left Form C energizes when voltage conditions are good and de-energize when a fault condition is detected. Right Form C only energizes during a reverse-phase condition. No high voltage protection. 190-480VAC 95-120VAC www.littelfuse.com/250a 85% 85% 88% 88% N/A N/A 208 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 250A SERIES Specifications Frequency Functional Characteristics Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip Reset Trip Delay Time Low Voltage, High Voltage Unbalance, Phasing Faults Restart Delay Time After a Fault or Complete Power Loss Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (DPDT - 2 Form C) Pilot Duty General Purpose Temperature Range Trip & Reset Accuracy Maximum Input Power Relative Humidity Terminal Torque Wire Size Transient Protection (Internal) Approvals UL CSA CE Dimensions 6% 4.5% 4 seconds 2 seconds Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. 480VA @ 240VAC 10A @ 240VAC -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) 1% 5W Up to 95% non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 7 in.-lbs. 12-18AWG IEC 61000-4-5;1995 6kV UL508 (File #E68520) CSA 22.2 No. 14 (File#46510) CE IEC 60947-6-2 H 74.4 mm (2.93"); W 133.9 mm (5.27"); D 74.9 mm (2.95") 1.02 lb. (16.32 oz., 462.66 g) #8 screws 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Weight Mounting Method 50*/60Hz Low Voltage *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 209 www.littelfuse.com/250a Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 350 SERIES 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor Description The 350 Series is a heavy-duty voltage monitor. This product should be used when high current relays or dual contacts are required, or 480V controls are used. Since the 350 Series uses heavy-duty relays, it comes in fixed voltage range models rather than a dual auto-ranging version like the Model 250. The 350200 has a 15A general purpose contact. The 350400 provides a SPDT (Form C) relay rated to switch up to 600V, allowing the use of 480V controls, eliminating the need for a control power transformer to step the voltage down to 120-240V. Several DPDT (two Form C contacts) relay models are also available. The 350 microcontroller-based family of products are low cost yet highly advanced solutions to heavy-duty problems. The 350 includes advanced single LED diagnostics. Five different light patterns distinguish faults and normal operating conditions. Other options such as high voltage trip and adjustable restart delay are available. Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constantly monitors 3 phase voltage to protect against harmful line conditions, even before the motor is started Advanced LED indication Provides diagnostics which can be used for troubleshooting and to determine relay status Adjustable restart delay (-2 models) settings Allows staggered start up of multiple motors, after a fault, to prevent a low voltage condition 600V rated relay contacts available on some models Eliminates the need for a control transformer to step voltage down to 120 - 240V for a control circuit For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 509, Figure 6. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION 350200 190-240VAC SPDT, fixed trip and restart delay 35040026 380-480VAC DPDT, 2 relays (1)10a. (1) 15A; fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 3502002 190-240VAC SPDT, fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 35040028** 380-480VAC DPDT, 2 relays 15A; variable restart delay (no manual reset) 35020026 190-240VAC DPDT, 2 relays (1)10a. (1) 15A; fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 35040029 380-480VAC SPDT, fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s), plus high voltage detection 35020028** 190-240VAC DPDT, 2 relays 15A; variable restart delay (no manual reset) 350600 475-600VAC SPDT, fixed trip and restart delay 35020029 190-240VAC SPDT, fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s), plus high voltage detection 3506002 475-600VAC SPDT, fixed trip and restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 350400 380-480VAC SPDT, fixed trip and restart delay 35060026 475-600VAC DPDT, 2 relays (1)10a. (1) 15A; fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 3504002 380-480VAC SPDT, fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 35060028** 475-600VAC DPDT, 2 relays 15A; variable restart delay (no manual reset) 35040025 380-480VAC DPDT, fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 35060029 475-600VAC SPDT, fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s), plus high voltage detection ** These units are not equipped with Manual Reset. www.littelfuse.com/350 210 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 350 SERIES Specifications Input Characteristics Line Voltage 350200 350400 350600 Frequency Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip Reset Trip Delay Time: Low Voltage Unbalance & Phasing Faults Restart Delay Time After a Fault After a Complete Power Loss Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating SPDT (350200) Pilot Duty General Purpose SPDT (350-400, 350-600) DPDT (-6 Option) 190-240VAC 380-480VAC 475-600VAC 50*/60Hz 90% 93% 6% 4.5% 4 seconds 2 seconds 7 in.-lbs. 12-18AWG IEC 61000-4-5;1995 6kV UL508 (File #E68520) 22.2 No. 14 (File #46510) IEC 60947-6-2 H 74.42 mm (2.93"); W 133.86 mm (5.27"); D 74.93 mm (2.95") 1.05 lbs. (16.8 oz., 476.27 g) #8 screws Weight Mounting Method Special Options Opt. 2: Variable Restart Delay Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. Opt. 5: DPDT Relay Opt. 6: 2 Relays (1) 10A, (1) 15A Opt. 8: 2 Relays (2) 15A Opt. 9: High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 110% Reset 107% 2 seconds 2 seconds 480VA @ 240VAC 15A 470VA @ 600VAC 1-10A General Purpose 480VA @ 240VAC Pilot Duty 1-15A General Purpose 480VA @ 240VAC Pilot Duty 1hp @ 240VAC 2-15A General Purpose 480VA @ 240VAC Pilot Duty 1hp @ 240VAC (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 1% 5W 9 *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS DPDT (-8 Option) General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating Storage Trip & Reset Accuracy Maximum Input Power Terminal Torque Wire Size Transient Protection (Internal) Safety Marks UL CSA CE Dimensions 211 www.littelfuse.com/350 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 355 SERIES 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor Description The 355 Series is a 3-phase voltage monitor with adjustable trip and restart delay, adjustable voltage unbalance and multiple diagnostic lights. It is perfect for heavy-duty applications that need both protection and simple user-friendly diagnostics. Applications include pump panels, commercial HVAC, oil rigs and others. The 355 Series uses microcontroller technology to monitor incoming voltage and de-energize its output relay if power problems exist. The 355 Series can protect motors from damage caused by single-phasing, high and low voltage, phase reversal and voltage unbalance. It has four diagnostic LEDs that clearly show overvoltage, undervoltage, voltage unbalance, reversephase and normal conditions. The 355200 is equipped with a heavy-duty 10A general purpose SPDT relay. The 355400 and 355600 are equipped with a 470VA @ 600VAC pilot duty SPDT relay. A high voltage (600V) DPDT relay output option is available with the 400V model. Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 355 WITH MOTOR CONTROL AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constantly monitors 3 phase voltage to protect against harmful line conditions, even before the motor is started Advanced LED indication Provides diagnostics which can be used for troubleshooting and to determine relay status Adjustable trip and restart delay settings Prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions and allows staggered start up of multiple motors, after a fault, to prevent a low voltage condition Combines protection and diagnostics Perfect for heavy duty applications: pump panels, commercial HVAC, and oil rigs 600V rated relay contacts available on some models Eliminates the need for a control transformer to step voltage down to 120 - 240V for a control circuit Ordering Information TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 355 WITH ALARM CONTROL MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION 355200 190-240VAC SPDT 355400 380-480VAC SPDT 3554005 380-480VAC DPDT 355600 475-600VAC SPDT For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 509, Figure 6. www.littelfuse.com/355 212 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 355 SERIES Specifications General Characteristics Temperature Range Operating Storage Repeat Accuracy Fixed Conditions Maximum Input Power Terminal Torque Wire Size Transient Protection (Internal) Safety Marks UL Dimensions 190-240VAC 380-480VAC 475-600VAC 50*/60Hz 90% 1% 93% 1% 110% 1% 107% 1% Weight Mounting Method Special Options Option 5 - DPDT Relay 2-8% adjustable Trip setting minus 1% 2-30 seconds adjustable -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 0.1% 6W 7 in.-lbs. 12-18AWG 2500V for 10 ms UL508 (File #E68520) H 74.42 mm (2.93"); W 133.86 mm (5.27"); D 74.93 mm (2.95") 0.94 lb. (15.04 oz., 426.38 g) #8 screws *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay times by 20%. 2 seconds Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. 9 480VA at 240VAC 10A AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Input Characteristics Line Voltage 355200 355400 355600 (Specify voltage range) Frequency Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip Reset Trip Delay Time: Low & High Voltage and Unbalance Single-phasing Faults (>25% UB) Restart Delay Time After a Fault or Power Loss Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating SPDT (355200) Pilot Duty General Purpose SPDT (355400, 355600) Pilot Duty DPDT (-5 Option) Pilot Duty 470VA @ 600VAC 470VA @ 600VAC (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 213 www.littelfuse.com/355 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 455 SERIES 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor Description The 455 Series are 3-phase voltage monitors that combine load and line side monitoring to offer complete protection. Monitoring the load side will alert the user of contactor failure or impending contactor failure. Line side monitoring will also protect the motor from damaging fault conditions that may be present prior to the motor starting. With other line/load side monitors, the motor must be started before a voltage fault is detected. With the 455, your motor is fully protected at all times. The 455 Series are 3-phase, dual range voltage monitors that protect 190-480VAC, 50*/60Hz motors, regardless of their size. It automatically selects between the 200V and 400V range when the user selects the nominal voltage setpoint. Other adjustments include a 2-30 second trip delay, a 2-300 second restart delay (and manual restart) and a voltage unbalance trip point of 2-8%. The voltage monitor's circuitry is powered through the line side connections, so there is no need for separate control power, making it easy to install. Equipped with an infrared LED, the 455 Sereies can communicate to the optional hand-held diagnostic tool, Informer-MS to obtain valuable information such as real-time voltage, voltage unbalance on both line and load sides, motor run hours, last 20 faults, last 32 motor starts, high and low voltage trip points, voltage unbalance trip point, restart and trip delay settings, LED status and more. Wiring Diagram MODEL 455 WITH MOTOR CONTROL USING A 3-POLE CONTACTOR Features & Benefits AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 MODEL 455 WITH MOTOR CONTROL USING A 2-POLE CONTACTOR FEATURES BENEFITS Load side monitoring of contactor Protects motor from contactor failure or worn contacts. Monitors contactor or starter Prevents rapid cycling Infrared LED Capable Increases personnel safety line of sight monitoring using optional Informer-MS Accessories Informer-MS A hand-held diagnostic tool designed for use with Littelfuse(R) 455 equipped with an infrared LED transmitter Informer IR Kit-36 36" infrared adapter cable attaches to the face of the unit to provide remote diagnostics without opening the panel. Ordering Information For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 509, Figure 6. www.littelfuse.com/455 214 MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 455 190-480VAC Universal line and load side monitor 455480R 380-480VAC Used in high voltage applications with pilot duty 470VA @ 600VAC 455575 475-600VAC For use in Canada or NE USA where 575V utility power services are common. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 455 SERIES Specifications Frequency Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip Reset Trip Delay Time Low & High Voltage and Unbalance Single-phasing Faults (>25% UB) Restart Delay Time After a Fault After a Complete Power Loss After a Motor Shut-down Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty General Purpose High Voltage Relay (-480R) Pilot Duty General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating Storage Repeat Accuracy Fixed Conditions Maximum Input Power Terminal Torque Wire Size Transient Protection (Internal) Safety Marks UL CSA CE Dimensions 50*/60Hz 90% 1% 93% 1% 110% 1% 107% 1% 2-8% adjustable Trip setting minus 1% 2-30 seconds adjustable 2 seconds fixed Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. Weight Mounting Method -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 0.1% 6W 7 in.-lbs. 12-18AWG IEC 61000-4-5;1995 6kV UL508 (File #E68520) C22.2 No. 14 (File #46510) IEC 60947-6-2 H 74.4 mm (2.93"); W 133.9 mm (5.27"); D 74.9 mm (2.95") 1.1 lbs. (17.6 oz., 498.95 g) #8 screws *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay times by 20%. 480VA @ 240VAC 10A 470VA @ 600VAC 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 215 www.littelfuse.com/455 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 460 SERIES 3-Phase Voltage Monitor Description The 460 is a 3-phase voltage monitor that protects 190-480VAC or 475-600V, 50/60Hz motors regardless of size. The product provides a user selectable nominal voltage setpoint and the voltage monitor automatically senses line voltage. This unique microcontroller-based voltage and phase-sensing device constantly monitors the 3-phase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions such as low, high, and unbalanced voltage, loss of any phase, and phase reversal. When a harmful condition is detected, the MotorSaver(R) output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level for a specified amount of time (restart delay). The trip and restart delays prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. All 460 models feature adjustable 1-30 second trip delay, 1-500 second restart delay, 2-8% voltage unbalance trip point, and one form C contact except where noted below. Wiring Diagram TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 460 WITH MOTOR CONTROL Features & Benefits AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 FEATURES BENEFITS Auto-sensing wide voltage range Automatically senses system voltage between 190 - 480VAC or 475-600VAC. Saves set-up time Adjustable trip & restart delay settings Prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions Microcontroller based circuitry Improved accuracy and higher reliability Advanced LED diagnostics Quick visual indicator for cause of trip and relay status Adjustable voltage unbalance trip setting Provides reliable protection when regenerative voltage is present For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 10. Ordering Information MODEL VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 460 190-480VAC Automatically senses line voltage, adjustable 1-30 second trip delay, 1-500 second restart delay, and 2-8% voltage unbalance trip point 460-L 190-480VAC Fixed 4 second trip delay and 1 second for single-phase faults, and fixed 6% voltage unbalance trip point 460-14 190-480VAC 460-575 475-600VAC Commonly used in Eastern Canada and on generator units that generate 600 VAC power Equipped with 2 sets of contacts: Form A (NO) and Form B (NC). Used for applications requiring 2 different voltages such as 5VDC for a PLC input and 115VAC for an alarm 460-575-14 475-600VAC Commonly used in Eastern Canada and on generator units that generate 600 VAC power. Equipped with 2 sets of contacts: Form A and Form B 460-15 190-480VAC Equipped with 2 sets of Form A (NO) contacts. Used on applications where two different units are to be controlled at once such as a unit that has separate contacts for a compressor and a fan 460-MR 190-480VAC Equipped with a 2-prong connection for a normally open push button mounted outside the panel. Used in applications requiring an external manual reset button 460-VBM 190-480VAC Fixed 6% voltage unbalance trip point. User adjustable low and high voltage trip points 460-400HZ 190-480VAC For use with 400Hz power supply 460-OEM 190-480VAC Bulk package of 460, 20 units 460L-OEM 190-480VAC Bulk package of 460-L, 20 units www.littelfuse.com/460 216 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 460 SERIES Specifications Frequency Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip Reset Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip Reset 460L Trip Delay Time Low, High and Unbalanced Voltage 460L Single-Phase Faults (>25% UB) Restart Delay Time After a Fault After a Complete Power Loss Output Contact Rating Form C Pilot Duty General Purpose Form A & Form B Pilot Duty General Purpose Ambient Temperature Range Operating Storage Maximum Input Power Class of Protection Relative Humidity Terminal Torque Wire Type Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) RFI, Radiated Fast Transient Burst 50/60Hz 90% 1% 93% 1% 110% 1% 107% 1% 2-8% adjustable Trip setting minus 1% (5-8%) Trip setting minus 0.5% (2-4%) 6% UB fixed (4.5% reset) Surge IEC 1-30 seconds adjustable 4 seconds fixed ANSI/IEEE Hi-potential Test Safety Marks UL CE Enclosure Dimensions 1 second fixed 1-500 seconds adjustable 1-500 seconds adjustable 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 10A @ 240VAC Weight Mounting Method 360VA @ 240VAC, B300 8A @ 240VAC 460-MR (manual reset) -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 6W IP20, NEMA 1 (finger safe) 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 4.5 in.-lbs. Stranded or solid 12-20 AWG, one per terminal IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air 150 MHz, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power and controls IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 4kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 minute) UL508 (File #E68520) IEC 60947-6-2 Polycarbonate H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 52.9 mm (2.08"); D 59.69 mm (2.35") 0.7 lb. (11.2 oz., 317.51 g) 35 mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) External NO pushbutton required. 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 217 www.littelfuse.com/460 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 601 SERIES 3-Phase Voltage & Frequency Monitor Description The Model 601 is a fully-programmable voltage monitor designed to protect 3-phase motors from loss of any phase (single-phasing), phase reversal, low or high voltage, voltage unbalance, low or high frequency, and rapid cycling. It can be used as a stand-alone product or networked with an RM1000, RM2000, PLC, computer or SCADA system. When a harmful condition is detected, the 601's output relay is deactivated after the specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level for the programmed restart delay (RD2). Eleven (11) setpoints are viewable with the 3-digit LED display or from a networked device: low voltage trip delay for single-phase faults gJ Wiring Diagram MODEL 601 WITH MOTOR CONTROL gJ gJ high voltage gJ rapid-cycle timer (RD1) gJ voltage unbalance gJ restart delay after all faults (RD2) gJ low frequency gJ gJ high frequency gJ RS485 address gJ type of restart after all faults (manual or automatic) trip delay for voltage/ frequency faults Six (6) parameters are viewable while the motor is running: AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 gJ L1-L2 voltage gJ average voltage gJ L2-L3 voltage gJ voltage unbalance (%) gJ L1-L3 voltage gJ frequency When used with the RS485MS-2W communications module, the 601 can communicate with most Modbus RTU master devices. Voltage conditions can be monitored and setpoints can be changed remotely using Solutions software, an RM1000, RM2000 or other device. Features & Benefits For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 507, Figure 1. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 601 190-480VAC Universal 3-Phase Voltage & Frequency Monitor 601575 500-600VAC Used primarily in Canada and NE USA where 575V utility power services are common www.littelfuse.com/601 218 FEATURES BENEFITS Built-in display Provides real time information and diagnostics to help with troubleshooting Programmable voltage and frequency settings Allows usage on wide range of systems 2 programmable restart delay timers Program separate restart delay time for rapid cycle protection and motor cool down 2 programmable trip delay timers 1 trip delay specifically for Phase Loss/Single-Phase fault condition, 1 trip delay for all other fault conditions Programmable restart control Choose between an adjustable automatic or manual restart to best meet individual application needs Flexible reset Reset options include pushbutton on relay or remote reset with optional 777-MRSW or OL-RESET remote reset kit Remote display compatibility Increases safety through remote display of real-time data and fault history, without the need to open the cabinet. Aids with arc flash safety regulations Network communications capability Compatible with RS-485 Modbus communications module (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 601 SERIES Accessories RS485MS-2W Communication Module (for limited Modbus capabilities) Required to enable the Modbus communications function on Model 77X-type products. RM1000 Remote Monitor The RM1000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring for up to 16 devices. RM2000 Remote Monitor The RM2000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring with event storage and real-time clock for date and time stamp. 777-MRSW Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver(R) and PumpSaver(R) products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. OL-RESET Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver(R) and PumpSaver(R) products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. Specifications Weight Mounting Method 50/60Hz 170V (450V*) - HV Setting LV Setting - 528V (660V*) 2-15% or off 35Hz - HF Setting LF Setting - 75Hz 1-50 seconds 1-50 seconds 0, 2-500 seconds 2-500 seconds Manual or Automatic A01-A99 97% of HV Setting 103% of LV Setting UB Setting -1% LF Setting +0.6Hz HF Setting -0.6Hz 9 480VA @ 240VAC -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) 1% 5% 1 second 0.5% 5W 2500 V for 10 ms UL508 (File #E68520) C22.2 No. 14 (File #46510) IEC 60947-6-2 H 77.47 mm (3.05"); W 97.79 mm (3.85"); D 128.27 mm (5.05") 1.2 lbs. (19.2 oz., 544.31 g) Surface mount (4 - #8 screws) or DIN rail mount The 601 can be preprogrammed prior to installation by applying at least 120V to the L1 and L2 terminals. *575V Model (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 219 www.littelfuse.com/601 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Input Characteristics Frequency Functional Characteristics Programmable Operating Points LV - Low Voltage Threshold HV- High Voltage Threshold VUB - Voltage Unbalance Threshold LF - Low Frequency Threshold HF - High Frequency Threshold TD1 - Trip Delay for Voltage/Unbalance/ Frequency Faults TD2 - Trip Delay for Single-Phase Faults RD1 - Rapid-Cycle Timer RD2 - Restart Delay After All Faults #RF - Type of Restart ADDR - RS-485 Address Fixed Reset Points Overvoltage Reset Low Voltage Reset Voltage Unbalance Reset Low Frequency Reset High Frequency Reset Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating Pilot Duty General Characteristics Temperature Range Accuracy Voltage Timing Repeatability Voltage Maximum Input Power Transient Protection (Internal) Safety Marks UL CSA CE Dimensions Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 601-CS-D-P1 3-Phase Power Monitor Description The 601-CS-D-P1 3-phase power monitor is a fully programmable electronic power monitor designed to monitor 3-phase systems. The 601-CS-D-P1 has a single relay that can be configured as a general purpose network output or to trip on ground faults. The 601-CS-D-P1 monitors ground fault current, phase currents, phase voltages, power factor and frequency. The RS485MS-2W communications module allows the 601-CS-D-P1 to communicate using the Modbus RTU protocol. The Modbus connection can be used to monitor power parameters, setup the device or control the fault relay. A DeviceNetTM communications I/O module (CIO-601CS-DN-P1) is available as well. This CIO module only works with the 601-CS-D-P1 unit. It is used for sending the information from the 601-CS-D-P1 over a DeviceNetTM network. It also provides I/O capabilities and the ability to set the parameters of the 601-CS-D-P1. Note: This product must be used with an external Zero-Sequence CT for proper operation (not included). Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 FEATURES BENEFITS Built-in display Visual indication for programming and viewing real-time parameters for nominal voltage, voltage unbalance, current, current unbalance, ground fault warning, ground fault trip, and ground fault motor acceleration 15 Programmable parameters to control the device operation Allows the user to customize the protection required for their system 2 programmable trip delay timers Program separate trip delay time for motor acceleration and ground fault Network communications capability Compatible with Modbus RTU and DeviceNetTM protocols with the use of separate communications module Accessories CIO-601CS-DN-P1 Module Convenient, cost-effective DeviceNetTM interface device capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a DeviceNetTM network. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 507, Figure 1. www.littelfuse.com/601csdp1 220 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 601-CS-D-P1 Specifications Input Characteristics Line Voltage Frequency Motor Full Load Amp Range Input Ground Fault Current Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty General Purpose Expected Life Mechanical Electrical General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating Storage Accuracy at 25 C (77 F) Voltage Current GF Current Repeatability Voltage Current Maximum Input Power Pollution Degree Class of Protection Relative Humidity Terminal Torque 200-480VAC 50/60Hz 0.5-175A (direct) 176-800A (CTs required) 0.5-10A 480VA @ 240VAC 10A @ 240VAC 1 x 10 6 operations 1 x 105 operations at rated load -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) +/-1% +/-3% (<175A direct) +/-3% +/-0.5% of nominal voltage +/-1% (<175A direct) 10 W 3 IP20 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 7in.-lbs. Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity, Conducted Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated Fast Transient Burst Short Circuit Rating Surge Immunity IEC ANSI/IEEE High Potential Test Safety Marks UL CE Max Conductor Size (with insulation) Dimensions Weight Mounting Method IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3 10V IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3, 10 V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power 100kA rms, SYM, 600VAC max. IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 2kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 minute) UL508 (File #E68520) IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1 0.65" H 77.47 mm (3.05"); W 97.79 mm (3.85"); D 128.27 mm (5.05") 1.2 lbs. (19.2 oz., 544.31 g) Surface mount (4 - #8 screws) or DIN rail mount 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 221 www.littelfuse.com/601csdp1 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays WVM SERIES Description The WVM Series provides protection against premature equipment (motor) failure caused by voltage faults on the 3-phase line. The WVM's microcontroller design provides reliable protection even if regenerated voltages are present. It combines dependable fault sensing with a 10 fault memory and a 6 LED status display. Part instrument, part control, the WVM protects your equipment when you're not there and displays what happened when you return. The WVM is fully adjustable and includes time delays to prevent nuisance tripping and improve system operation. Time delays include a 0.25 to 30s adjustable trip delay, an adjustable 0.25 to 64m (in 3 ranges) restart delay, plus a unique 3 to 15s true random start delay. The random start delay prevents voltage sags caused by simultaneous restarting of numerous motor loads after a power outage. Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits F = Fuses NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed RS = Optional Remote Reset Switch Relay contacts are isolated. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 CAUTION: 2 amp max fast acting fuses must be installed externally in series with each input. (3) FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring to protect against phase loss, phase reversal, over voltage, under voltage, unbalance, and short cycling Fault memory Stores the 10 most recent faults, which provides diagnostics for troubleshooting LED indication Provides visual indictation of existing relay/fault status or faults stored in memory. Switch selectable automatic restart, delayed automatic restart, and manual reset Allows user adjustment to handle unique application requirements Random start delay Prevents voltage sags caused by simultaneous restarting of multiple motor loads after a power outage Operation The output relay is energized when all conditions are acceptable and the WVM is reset. A restart and/or random start delay may occur before the output relay is energized. Field Adjustment: Select the line voltage listed on the motor's name plate. This automatically sets the over and undervoltage trip points. No further adjustment should be required to achieve maximum equipment protection. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 29. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE UNBALANCE TRIP DELAY SWITCH SELECTABLE RESET METHOD RESTART DELAY WVM011AL WVM611AH WVM611AL WVM611RL WVM811AH WVM811RL WVM911AH WVM911AL WVM911AL-60 WVM911AN WVM911RH WVM911RL WVM911RN-60 500 to 600VAC 200 to 240VAC 200 to 240VAC 200 to 240VAC 355 to 425VAC 355 to 425VAC 400 to 480VAC 400 to 480VAC 400 to 480VAC 400 to 480VAC 400 to 480VAC 400 to 480VAC 400 to 480VAC 2 - 10% 2 - 10% 2 - 10% 2 - 10% 2 - 10% 2 - 10% 2 - 10% 2 - 10% 2 - 10% 2 - 10% 2 - 10% 2 - 10% 2 - 10% 0.25 - 30s 0.25 - 30s 0.25 - 30s 0.25 - 30s 0.25 - 30s 0.25 - 30s 0.25 - 30s 0.25 - 30s 0.25 - 30s 0.25 - 30s 0.25 - 30s 0.25 - 30s 0.25 - 30s Auto restart upon fault trip Auto restart upon fault trip Auto restart upon fault trip Auto restart upon fault correction Auto restart upon fault trip Auto restart upon fault correction Auto restart upon fault trip Auto restart upon fault trip Auto restart upon fault trip Auto restart upon fault trip Auto restart upon fault correction Auto restart upon fault correction Auto restart upon fault correction 0.25 - 64s 0.25 - 64m 0.25 - 64s 0.25 - 64s 0.25 - 64m 0.25 - 64s 0.25 - 64m 0.25 - 64s 0.25 - 64s, no random start delay 6 - 300s 0.25 - 64m 0.25 - 64s 6 - 300s, no random start delay If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/wvm 222 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays WVM SERIES Accessories LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 Vac/500 Vdc C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Specifications Line Voltage Type Operating Voltage AC Line Frequency Overvoltage, Undervoltage, & Voltage Unbalance Overvoltage Trip Point Reset Voltage Undervoltage Trip Point Reset Voltage Voltage Unbalance Trip Delay Phase Loss Response Time Random Start Delay Range Reset (Restart) Delay Low Range Normal Range High Range Fault Memory Type Capacity Status Indicators Output Type Form Rating Life Protection Phase Reversal/Failure Motors and Generators Surge Isolation Voltage Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral Model Adj. Line Voltage Range 240 200-240VAC 380 355-425VAC 480 400-480VAC 600 500-600VAC 50/60 Hz 109-113% of adjusted voltage -2% of trip point 88-92% of adjusted voltage +2% of trip point Adjustable from 2-10%* Adjustable from 0.25 - 30s 15% 15% unbalance 200 ms 3 - 15s 0.25-64s 15% 6-300s 15% 0.25-64m 15% Nonvolatile RAM Stores last 10 faults 6 LEDs provide existing status & memory readout Note: 50% of operating line voltage must be applied to L1 & L2 for operation of status indicators Electromechanical relay Isolated, SPDT 10A resistive @ 250VAC; 6A inductive (0.4 PF) @ 250VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107 ASME A17.1 Rule 210.6 NEMA MG1 14:30, 14:35 IEEE 62.41-1991 Level B 2500V RMS input to output Surface with 2 or 4 #8 (M4 x 0.7) screws H 175.3 mm (6.9"); W 111.8 mm (4.4"); D 61.0 mm (2.4") Screw terminals with captive wire clamps for up to #12 AWG ( 3.2 mm2) wire -40 to 65C / -40 to 85C 25 oz ( 709 g) * Unbalance reset is 90% of the unbalance setting (i.e. VUB at 5% reset is 4.5%) 223 www.littelfuse.com/wvm 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Read Memory: Fault(s) stored in the memory are indicated when the yellow LED is flashing, up to 10 faults are noted. Memory Reset: To clear the memory of all faults stored, rotate selector to Clear Memory for 5 seconds. The yellow LED will turn off. Memory Overload: Only the 10 most recent faults are retained. Random Start Delay: A new 3 to 15s random start delay is selected by the microcontroller when a fault is corrected and when the operating voltage (L1, L2, L3) is applied to the WVM. A random start delay does not occur when the reset is manual. Automatic Restart: Upon fault correction, the output will re-energize after a random start delay. Automatic Restart Upon Fault Trip: When a fault is sensed for the full trip delay, the output de- energizes and a restart delay is initiated. This delay locks out the output for the delay period. Should the fault be corrected by the end of the restart delay, the output will re-energize after a random start delay. A restart delay will also occur when operating voltage (L1, L2, L3) is applied to the WVM. Manual Reset: After a fault condition is corrected, the WVM can be manually reset. There are two methods; a customer supplied remote switch, or the onboard selector switch. Manual Reset (Onboard): Rotate selector switch from the Manual Reset position to Auto Restart w/ Delay then back again to Manual Reset within 3 seconds. The output will immediately energize. Remote Reset: Reset (Restart) is accomplished by a momentary contact closure across terminals 1 & 2. The output will immediately energize. Remote switch requirements are 10mA @ 20VDC and the reset terminals are not isolated from line voltage. A resistance of 20K across terminals 1 & 2 will cause immediate automatic restart. Automatic Restart Upon Fault Correction: (P/N includes an R) When a fault is sensed for the full trip delay, the output relay de-energizes. Upon correction of the fault, a restart delay begins. At the end of this delay, the output will re-energize after a random start delay. If a fault occurs during restart timing, the restart time delay will be reset to zero, and the output will not energize until the restart delay is completed. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays DLMU SERIES Description The DLMU Series is a universal voltage, 3-phase voltage monitor. It continuously measures the voltage of each of the three phases with microcontroller accuracy and compares the value to preset trip points. It separately senses phase reversal and loss; over, under and unbalanced voltages; and over or under frequency. Protection is assured during periods of large average voltage fluctuations or when regenerated voltages are present. The unit trips within 200ms when phase loss is detected. Adjustable time delays are included to prevent nuisance tripping and short cycling of sensitive equipment. The isolated, 10A, SPDT and 2A alarm output relay contacts trip when a phase voltage exceeds the trip limits for the trip delay. Nominal line voltage, voltage unbalance, and time delays are knob adjustable. The phase loss setpoint and the acceptable frequency range are fixed. Both delta and wye systems can be monitored; no connection to neutral is required. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 L1, L2, L3 = Line Voltage Input NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact C = Common, Transfer Contact ! FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring to protect against phase loss, phase reversal, over voltage, under voltage, unbalance, short cycling and over/under frequency Universal line voltage range Flexibility to work in 200 to 480VAC or 500 to 600VAC applications DIN rail (35mm) or surface mounting Installation flexibility LED indication Provides diagnostics of relay, fault and time delay status User adjustable time delays Prevents nuisance tripping and short cycling of sensitive equipment Accessories CAUTION: 2 amp max. fast acting fuses are recommended to protect the equipment`s wiring. They are not required to protect the DLMU. LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC ! = Select alarm contact connection as N.O. or N.C. when ordering; N.O. Shown. 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 Vac/500 Vdc For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 30. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE OUTPUT RESTART FUNCTION VOLTAGE UNBALANCE TRIP DELAY RESTART DELAY DLMHBRAAA 500 to 600VAC SPDT & NO Staggered restart Adjustable 2 - 10% Adjustable 1 - 30s Adjustable 0.6 - 300S DLMUBLAAA 200 to 480VAC SPDT & NO Lockout, min off time Adjustable 2 - 10% Adjustable 1 - 30s Adjustable 0.6 - 300S DLMUBNAAN 200 to 480VAC SPDT & NO No restart delay Adjustable 2 - 10% Adjustable 1 - 30s None DLMUBRAAA 200 to 480VAC SPDT & NO Staggered restart Adjustable 2 - 10% Adjustable 1 - 30s Adjustable 0.6 - 300S If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/dlmu 224 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays DLMU SERIES Specifications Line Voltage Type Operating Voltage 200-480VAC 600VAC AC Line Frequency Phase Loss Response Time Undervoltage & Voltage Unbalance Type Overvoltage TripVoltage Reset Voltage Undervoltage Trip Voltage Reset Voltage Voltage Unbalance Reset on balance Trip Delay Active On Range Tolerance Restart Delay Range Tolerance Over/Under Frequency Phase Sequence Response Time -Phase Reversal & Phase Loss Reset Output Type Form C Form C Rating Form A Form A Rating Life (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 225 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral Range Voltage Adj.Range 240 380 480 600 200-240VAC 340-420VAC 400-480VAC 500-600VAC Line Line Voltage Frequency Max. 50/60Hz 50Hz 60Hz 50/60Hz 550VAC 600VAC 50/60 Hz automatically detected 25% unbalance 200ms Voltage detection with delayed trip & automatic reset 109 - 113% of the adjusted line voltage -3% of the trip voltage 88 - 92% of the adjusted line voltage +3% of the trip voltage Adjustable 2 - 10% or specify fixed unbalance of 2 - 10% in 1% increments -0.7% unbalance Over/undervoltage, voltage unbalance, over/ under frequency Adjustable from 1 - 30s or specify fixed delay 1 - 30s in 1s increments 15% Adjustable from 0.6 - 300s; if no restart delay is selected a 0.6s initialization delay applies 15% 4%; Reset 3%; 50/60 Hz A, B, C, L1, L2, L3 200 ms Automatic Isolated Electromechanical Relay Isolated, SPDT 10A resistive @ 240VAC; 8A resistive @ 277VAC; NO-1/4 hp @ 120VAC; 1/3 hp @ 240VAC Isolated, NO, SPST 2A @ 277VAC Mechanical - 1 x 10 6; Electrical - 1 x 30 3 www.littelfuse.com/dlmu 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Operation Upon application of line voltage, the output is de-energized and the restart delay begins. If all the 3-phase voltages are within the acceptable range, the output energizes at the end of the restart delay. The microcontroller circuitry automatically senses the voltage range, and selects the correct operating frequency (50 or 60Hz). The over and undervoltage trip points are set automatically. When the measured value of any phase voltage exceeds the acceptable range limits (lower or upper) the trip delay begins. At the end of the trip delay the output relay de-energizes. If the phase voltage returns to an acceptable value before the trip delay expires, the trip delay is reset and the output remains energized. Under, over, and unbalanced voltages plus over or under frequency must be sensed for the complete trip delay before the unit trips. The unit trips in 200ms when phase loss or reversal are sensed. The unit will not energize if a fault is sensed as the line voltage is applied. Reset: Reset is automatic upon correction of the voltage or frequency fault or phase sequence. Restart Delay Options L = Lockout or minimum OFF time. The restart delay begins when the output trips. The unit cannot be re-energized until the restart delay is complete. This provides a minimum off time or lockout time to allow equipment sensitive to short cycling, time to reset. If the fault is corrected after the restart delay is complete the output energizes immediately. The restart delay also occurs when line voltage is applied/reapplied. R = Restart Delay on fault correction. The restart delay begins when line voltage is reapplied or when a voltage fault is corrected. This option is normally selected when staggered restarting of multiple motors on a power system is required. N = No Restart Delay. 0.6 second initialization delay on application of line voltage applies. Restart Notes: All restart options remain reset when the following conditions are detected: 1. Phase loss (phase unbalance greater than 25%) 2. Average line voltage less than 120VAC 3. Phase reversal The restart delay begins when the condition is corrected. LED Operation The LED flashes green during the restart delay, then glows green when the output energizes. It flashes red during the trip delay then glows red when the output de-energizes. It flashes red/green if phase reversal is sensed. If a fault is sensed during the restart delay, the LED will glow red during that portion or the full restart delay. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays DLMU SERIES Protection Phase Reversal/Failure Motors and Generators Surge Isolation Voltage Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Terminal Torque Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight ASME A17.1 Rule 210.6 NEMA MG1 14:30, 14:35 IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B 2500V RMS input to output Surface mount with 2 #8 (M4 x 0.7) screw or snap on 35mm DIN Rail Note: 0.25 in.(6.35 mm) spacing between units or other devices is required H 110 mm (4.33"); W 75 mm (2.95"); D 50 mm (1.97") Screw terminals with captive wire clamps for up to #14 AWG (2.5 mm2) wire 4.4 in.-lbs. -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 8.6 oz (244 g) AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 www.littelfuse.com/dlmu 226 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays HLMU SERIES Description The HLMU Series is a universal voltage, encapsulated, 3-phase voltage monitor. It continuously measures the voltage of each of the three phases with microcontroller accuracy and compares the value to preset trip points. It separately senses phase reversal and loss; over, under and unbalanced voltages; and over or under frequency. Protection is assured during periods of large average voltage fluctuations, or when regenerated voltages are present. The unit trips within 200ms when phase loss is detected. Adjustable time delays are included to prevent nuisance tripping and short cycling of sensitive equipment. The isolated, 10A, DPDT relay contacts trip when a phase voltage exceeds the trip limits for the trip delay. Nominal line voltage, voltage unbalance, and time delays are knob adjustable. The phase loss setpoint and the acceptable frequency range are fixed. Both delta and wye systems can be monitored; no connection to neutral is required. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1, L2, L3 = Line Voltage Input NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact C = Common, Transfer Contact CAUTION: 2 amp max. fast acting fuses are recommended to protect the equipment`s wiring. They are not required to protect the HLMU. BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring to protect against phase loss, phase reversal; over, under, and unbalanced voltage; over and under frequency Universal line voltage range Flexibility to work in 200 to 480VAC applications DIN rail (35mm) or surface mounting Installation flexibility LED indication Provides diagnostics of relay, fault and time delay status Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Finger-safe terminal blocks Meets IEC 61000 safety requirements Accessories LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 31. Ordering Information VOLTAGE UNBALANCE TRIP DELAY RESTART DELAY 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 VAC/500 VDC MODEL OUTPUT RESTART FUNCTION HLMUDLAAA DPDT Lockout, min off time Adjust. 2 - 10% Adjust. 1 - 30s Adjust. 0.6 - 300s C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. HLMUDN0405N DPDT No restart delay Fixed, 4% Fixed, 5s None HLMUDNAAN DPDT No restart delay Adjust. 2 - 10% Adjust. 1 - 30s None P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. HLMUDRAAA DPDT Staggered restart Adjust. 2 - 10% Adjust. 1 - 30s Adjust. 0.6 - 300s If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 227 www.littelfuse.com/hlmu 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS NOTE: Relay contacts are isolated, 277VAC max. FEATURES Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays HLMU SERIES AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 Phase Loss Response Time Undervoltage & Voltage Unbalance Type Operation Upon application of line voltage, the output is de-energized and the restart delay begins. If all the three-phase voltages are within the acceptable range, the output energizes at the end of the restart delay. The microcontroller circuitry automatically senses the voltage range, and selects the correct operating frequency (50 or 60Hz). The over and under voltage trip points are set at 10% of the adjusted line voltage. When the measured value of any phase voltage exceeds the acceptable range limits (lower or upper) the trip delay begins. At the end of the trip delay the output relay de-energizes. If the phase voltage returns to an acceptable value before the trip delay expires, the trip delay is reset and the output remains energized. Under, over, and unbalanced voltages plus over or under frequency must be sensed for the complete trip delay before the unit trips. The unit trips in 200ms when phase loss or reversal are sensed. The unit will not energize if a fault is sensed as the line voltage is applied. Reset: Reset is automatic upon correction of the voltage or frequency fault or phase sequence. Restart Delay Options L = Lockout or minimum OFF time. The restart delay begins when the output trips. The unit cannot be re-energized until the restart delay is complete. This provides a minimum off time or lockout time to allow equipment sensitive to short cycling, time to reset. If the fault is corrected after the restart delay is complete, the output energizes immediately. The restart delay also occurs when line voltage is applied/reapplied. R = Restart Delay on fault correction. The restart delay begins when line voltage is reapplied or when a voltage fault is corrected. This option is normally selected when staggered restarting of multiple motors on a power system is required. N = No Restart Delay. 0.6 second initialization delay on application of line voltage applies. Restart Notes: All restart options remain reset when the following conditions are detected: 1. Phase loss (phase unbalance greater than 25%) 2. Average line voltage less than 120VAC 3. Phase reversal The restart delay begins when the condition is corrected. LED Operation The LED flashes green during the restart delay, then glows green when the output energizes. It flashes red during the trip delay then glows red when the output de-energizes. It flashes red/green if phase reversal is sensed. If a fault is sensed during the restart delay, the LED will glow red during that portion or the full restart delay. Protection Phase Reversal/Failure Motors and Generators Surge Isolation Voltage Circuitry Mechanical Mounting Specifications Dimensions Line Voltage Type Operating Voltage 200 - 480VAC Line Voltage Max. AC Line Frequency www.littelfuse.com/hlmu 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral Range Voltage Adj. Range Frequency 240 200-240VAC 50 or 60Hz 380 340-420VAC 50Hz 480 400-480VAC 60Hz 550VAC 50/60 Hz automatically detected Overvoltage Trip Voltage Reset Voltage Undervoltage Trip Voltage Reset Voltage Voltage Unbalance Trip Setpoint Reset on Balance Trip Delay Active On Range Tolerance Restart Delay Range Tolerance Over/Under Frequency Phase Sequence Response Time-Phase Reversal & Phase Loss Reset Output Type Form Rating Life Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 228 25% unbalance 200ms Voltage detection with delayed trip & automatic reset 109 - 113% of the adjusted line voltage -3% of the trip voltage 88 - 92% of the adjusted line voltage +3% of the trip voltage Adjustable 2 - 10% or specify fixed unbalance of 2 - 10% in 1% increments -0.7% unbalance Over/undervoltage, voltage unbalance, over/under frequency Adjustable from 1 - 30s or specify fixed delay 1 - 30s in 1s increments 15% Adjustable from 0.6 - 300s; if no restart delay is selected a 0.6s initialization delay applies 15% 4%; Reset 3%; 50/60 Hz A, B, C, L1, L2, L3 200 ms Automatic Isolated Electromechanical Relay DPDT 10A resistive @ 240VAC; 8A resistive @ 277VAC; NO-1/4 hp @ 120VAC; 1/3 hp @ 240VAC Mechanical - 1 x 10 6 Electrical (at 10A) - DPDT - 1 x 30 3 ASME A17.1 Rule 210.6 NEMA MG1 14:30, 14:35 IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B 2500V RMS input to output Encapsulated Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.7) screw Note: 0.25 in.(6.35 mm) spacing between units or other devices is required H 76.7 mm (3.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 41.7 mm (1.64") Screw terminal connection up to 12 AWG (3.3 mm2) wire -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 3.9 oz (111 g) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays PLMU11 Voltage Monitor Description 8-PIN Wiring Diagram The PLMU11 continuously measures the voltage of each of the three phases to provide protection for 3-phase motors and sensitive loads. Its microcontroller senses under and overvoltage, voltage unbalance, phase loss, and phase reversal. Protection is provided even when regenerated voltages are present. Universal voltage operation and standard base connection allows the PLMU11 to replace hundreds of competitive part numbers. Operation Upon application of power, a 0.6s random start delay begins and the PLMU11 measures the voltage levels and line frequency and selects the voltage range. The output relay is energized and the LED glows green when all voltages are acceptable and the phase sequence is correct. LED flashes green during trip delay, glows red when output de-energizes. Undervoltage, overvoltage, and voltage unbalance must be sensed for continuous trip delay before the relay de-energizes. Re-energization is automatic upon fault correction. The output relay will not energize if a fault condition is sensed as 3-phase input voltage is applied. The LED alternately flashes red/green when phase reversal is sensed. Line voltage is selected with the knob, setting the over and under voltage trip points. Voltage range is automatically selected by the microcontroller. LED Indicator Energized Steady Red De-engergized (tripped on fault) Flashing Green Trip Delay Alternate Flashing Red/Green Phase Reversal 2A fast acting fuses recommended for safety (not required). Relay contacts are isolated Steady Green Features & Benefits For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 32. FEATURES BENEFITS Quick octal 8-pin mounting Small footprint with universal mounting: ideal replacement for hundreds of competitive part numbers. Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of single-phase, low voltage, high voltage, voltage unbalance, phase reversal. LED diagnostics Quick visual indicator for cause of trip. LED indications include: normal operation, trip delay, phase reversal, fault Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC voltages Simple 3-wire connection Allows flexibility across wide range of systems for delta or wye systems (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 229 ASME A17.1 Rule 210.6 Complies with safety codes for elevators, escalators, moving walkways NEMA MG1 14:30, 14:35 Complies with safety codes for motors and generators IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B Complies with safety codes for surge and voltage protection www.littelfuse.com/plmu11 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS F = Fuses OA = Phase A = L1 OB = Phase B = L2 OC = Phase C = L3 NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays PLMU11 Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8-pin or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. OT08PC Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 600VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 Vac/500 Vdc C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 Specifications Line Voltage Type 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral 200 to 480VAC 15%, 50/60 Hz 2 Hz Line Voltage Adjustable Voltage Ranges (Automatic Range Selection) 200 to 240VAC, 50/60 Hz 340 to 420VAC, 50 Hz 400 to 480VAC, 60 Hz Maximum Voltage 552VAC Phase Sequence ABC Power Consumption 5W Overvoltage, Undervoltage, & Voltage Unbalance Type Voltage detection with delayed trip and automatic reset Overvoltage & Undervoltage Undervoltage Trip Point 88 - 92% of adjusted line voltage Reset Voltage +2% of trip voltage Overvoltage Trip Point 109 - 113% of adjusted line voltage Reset Voltage -2% of trip voltage Voltage Unbalance Trip Point Adjustable from 2 - 10% Reset on Balance (%) Selected Unbalance 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Reset 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.4 6.3 7.2 8.1 9 Trip Delay Range Adjustable from 0.25 - 30s Severe Unbalance 2X Selected Unbalance 0.25 - 2s; disabled when the trip delay is less than 2s Random Start Delay 0.6s Phase Reversal & Phase Loss Trip Time 150ms Phase Loss Setpoint 15% unbalance Reset Type Automatic Output Type Energized when voltages are acceptable Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated, SPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 240VAC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/3 hp @ 250VAC; max. 277VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 10 6 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B Isolation Voltage 2500V RMS input to output Mechanical Mounting* Plug-in socket rated 600VAC Termination Octal 8-pin plug-in Dimensions H 77.0 mm (3.03"); W 60.7 mm (2.39"); D 45.2 mm (1.78") Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C Weight 8.6 oz (244 g) *CAUTION: Select an octal socket rated for 600VAC operation. www.littelfuse.com/plmu11 230 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays PLM SERIES Voltage Monitor Description The PLM Series is a 3-phase voltage monitor that continuously monitors each of the three phases. Monitors both delta and wye systems and no connection to neutral is required. The microcontroller circuit design protects against undervoltage, voltage unbalance, phase loss and phase reversal. Protection is assured when regenerated voltages are present. Operation The output relay is energized and the LED glows green when all voltages are acceptable and the phase sequence is correct. Under and unbalanced voltages must be sensed for a continuous trip delay period before the relay de-energizes. Reset is automatic upon correction of the fault condition. The output relay will not energize if a fault condition is sensed as power is applied. The LED flashes red during the trip delay, then glows red when the output de-energizes. The LED flashes green/red if phase reversal is sensed. Field Adjustment Set voltage adjustment knob at the desired operating line voltage for the equipment. This adjustment automatically sets the undervoltage trip point. Apply power. If the PLM fails to energize, (LED glows red) check wiring of all three phases, voltage, and phase sequence. If phase sequence is incorrect, the LED flashes green/red. To correct this, swap any two line voltage connections at the mounting socket. No further adjustment should be required. 8-PIN Wiring Diagram F = Fuses OA = Phase A = L1 OB = Phase B = L2 OC = Phase C = L3 NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed 2A fast acting fuses recommended for safety (not required). For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 23. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE PLM6405 240VAC 4% 5 sec PLM6502 240VAC 5% 2 sec PLM6805 240VAC 8% 5 sec PLM8405 380VAC 4% 5 sec PLM9405 480VAC 4% 5 sec PLM9502 480VAC 5% 2 sec PLM9805 480VAC 8% 5 sec FEATURES BENEFITS Quick octal 8-pin mounting Small footprint with universal mounting: ideal replacement for hundreds of competitive part numbers. Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of single-phase, low voltage, high voltage, voltage unbalance, phase reversal. LED diagnostics Quick visual indicator for trip versus normal operation. Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC voltages Adjustable nominal voltage set point Allows setting for specific application voltage to optimize protection Simple 3-wire connection Allows flexibility across wide range of systems for delta or wye systems ASME A17.1 Rule 210.6 Complies with safety codes for elevators, escalators, moving walkways NEMA MG1 14:30, 14:35 Complies with safety codes for motors and generators IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B Complies with safety codes for surge and voltage protection If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 231 www.littelfuse.com/plm AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Relay contacts are isolated VOLTAGE TRIP DELAY (FIXED) UNBALANCE (FIXED) 9 Features & Benefits Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays PLM SERIES Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- pin or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. Specifications Line Voltage Type Operating Voltage Model OT08PC Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 600VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 Vac/500 Vdc C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral 240 380 480 AC Line Frequency Phase Sequence Power Consumption Adj. Line Voltage Range 200-240VAC 360-430VAC 400-480VAC Line Voltage Max 270VAC 480VAC 530VAC 50/100 Hz ABC 2W for 240V units 3W for 380 - 480V units Low Voltage & Voltage Unbalance Type Low Voltage Trip Reset Voltage Voltage Unbalance Trip Reset on Balance Trip Delay Range Tolerance Phase Reversal & Phase Loss Response Time Phase Loss Reset Output Type Form Rating Life Protection Surge Isolation Voltage Mechanical Mounting* Dimensions Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight Voltage detection with delayed trip & automatic reset 88 - 92% of adjusted line voltage Plus 3% of trip voltage Factory fixed from 4 - 8% -0.7% unbalance typical Factory fixed from 2 - 20s 15% 200ms > 35% unbalance Automatic Electromechanical relay Isolated, SPDT 10A resistive @ 240VAC, 277VAC max; 1/2 Hp @ 240VAC; 1/4 Hp @ 120VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 105 IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B 2500V RMS input to output 8-pin plug-in socket rated 600VAC H 81.3 mm (3.2"); W 60.7 mm (2.39"); D 45.2 mm (1.78") -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 4.4 oz (125 g) *CAUTION: Select an octal socket rated for 600VAC operation. www.littelfuse.com/plm 232 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays TVW SERIES Description The TVW Series Provides protection for motors and other sensitive loads. Continuously measures the voltage of each of the three phases using a microcontroller circuit design that senses under and overvoltage, voltage unbalance, phase loss, and phase reversal. Protection is provided even when regenerated voltages are present. Includes a trip delay to prevent nuisance tripping and a restart delay to prevent short cycling after a momentary power outage. Operation Upon application of line voltage, the restart delay begins. The output is de-energized during restart delay. Under normal conditions, the output energizes after the restart delay. Undervoltage, overvoltage, and voltage unbalance must be sensed for the complete trip delay period before the output de-energizes. The restart delay begins as soon as the output de-energizes. If the restart delay is completed when a fault is corrected, the output energizes immediately. The output will not energize if a fault is sensed as the input voltage is applied. If the voltage selector is set between two voltage marks (i.e. between 220 and 230V), the LED will flash red rapidly. The TVW provides fault protection at the lower of the two line voltages (i.e. 220V). Reset: Reset is automatic upon correction of a fault. LED Operation The LED flashes green during the restart delay, then glows green when the output energizes. It flashes red during the trip delay then glows red when the output de-energizes. It flashes red/green if phase reversal is sensed. If the voltage selector knob is between settings, it rapidly flashes red. Wiring Diagram L1 = Phase A L2 = Phase B L3 = Phase C NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed C = Common, Transfer Contact Relay contacts are isolated. F = 2A Fast acting fuses are recommended, but not required Features & Benefits Ordering Information VOLTAGE UNBALANCE TRIP DELAY RESTART DELAY TVW5103S5S 208 to 240VAC Fixed, 10% Selectable Fixed, 3s Fixed, 5s TVW575S1M 208 to 240VAC Fixed, 7% Selectable Fixed, 5s Fixed, 1m TVW6510S0.4S 208, 220, 230, 240VAC Fixed, 5% Fixed, 10s Fixed, 0.4s TVW8510S0.4S 380, 400 & 415VAC Fixed, 5% Fixed, 10s Fixed, 0.4s TVW9510S0.4S 430, 440, 460, 480VAC Fixed, 5% Fixed, 10s Fixed, 0.4s MODEL LINE VOLTAGE FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring to protect against phase loss, phase reversal; over, under, and unbalanced voltage; short cycling Compact design measures 2 in. (50.8mm) square Perfect for OEM applications where cost, size and ease of installation are important LED indication Provides diagnostics of relay, fault and time delay status Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration and humidity If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 233 www.littelfuse.com/tvw AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 44. 9 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays TVW SERIES Accessories LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 Vac/500 Vdc P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 VRM6048 Voltage Reduction Module Allows the voltage monitor to monitor a 3-phase 550 to 600VAC Line. www.littelfuse.com/tvw Specifications Line Voltage Type Input Voltage/Tolerance AC Line Frequency Phase Sequence Power Consumption 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral 208 to 480VAC in 4 ranges/-30% - 20% 50 - 100 Hz ABC Approx. 2W for 240V units Approx. 3W for 480V units Overvoltage, Undervoltage, & Voltage Unbalance Overvoltage & Undervoltage Voltage detection with delay trip & automatic reset Undervoltage Trip Point 88 - 92% of the selected line voltage Reset Voltage +3% of trip voltage Overvoltage Trip Point 109 - 113% of the selected line voltage Reset Voltage -3% of trip voltage Trip Variation vs Temperature 2% Voltage Unbalance Factory fixed, from 4 - 10% Reset On Balance -0.7% unbalance Trip Delay Range Fixed from 0.2 - 100s 15% or 0.1s, whichever is greater Restart Delay Range Fixed from 0.4s - 999m 15% or 0.2s, whichever is greater Phase Reversal & Phase Loss Response 200ms; automatic reset Phase Loss 25% unbalance Output Type Isolated, SPDT Rating 208 to 240VAC (55C) 10A resistive @ 125VAC, 5A @ 250VAC, 1/4 hp @ 125VAC 380 to 480VAC 10A resistive @ 240VAC, 1/4 hp @ 125VAC, 1/3 hp @ 250VAC, max. voltage 277VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 10 6; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Phase Reversal/Failure ASME A17.1 Rule 210.6 Motors and Generators NEMA MG1 14:30, 14:35 Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B Dielectric Breakdown 208 to 240VAC 1500V RMS input to output terminals 380 to 480VAC 2500V RMS input to output terminals Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #8 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 31.75 mm (1.25") Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40 to 55C / -40 to 85C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight 2.8 oz (79 g) 234 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays TVM SERIES Description Wiring Diagram L1 = Phase A L2 = Phase B L3 = Phase C NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed C = Common, Transfer Contact Relay contacts are isolated. Features & Benefits For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 44. Ordering Information FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring to protect against phase loss, phase reversal; over, under, and unbalanced voltage; short cycling Compact design measures 2 in. (50.8mm) square Perfect for OEM applications where cost, size and ease of installation are important MODEL LINE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE UNBALANCE TRIP DELAY RESTART DELAY LED indication Provides diagnostics of relay, fault and time delay status TVM208A100.5S3S 208VAC 10% 0.5s 3s Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration and humidity TVM230A101S1S 230VAC 10% 1s 1s TVM460A41S5M 460VAC 4% 1s 5m TVM460A75S2M 460VAC 7% 5s 2m TVM480A45S5S 480VAC 4% 5s 5s TVM480A100.5S3S 480VAC 10% 0.5s 3s If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 235 www.littelfuse.com/tvm 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS F = 2A Fast acting fuses are recommended, but not required The TVM Series Provides protection for motors and other sensitive loads. Continuously measures the voltage of each of the three phases using a microcomputer circuit design that senses under and overvoltage, voltage unbalance, phase loss, and phase reversal. Protection is provided even when regenerated voltages are present. Includes a trip delay to prevent nuisance tripping and a restart delay to prevent short cycling after a momentary power outage. Operation Upon application of line voltage, the restart delay begins. The output relay is de-energized during restart delay. Under normal conditions, the output energizes after restart delay. Undervoltage, overvoltage, and voltage unbalance must be sensed for continuous trip delay period before the output is de-energized. The output will not de-energize if a fault is corrected during the trip delay. The restart delay begins as soon as the output relay de-energizes. If the restart delay is completed when the fault is corrected, the output relay will energize immediately. The output relay will not energize if a fault or phase reversal is sensed as 3-phase input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset is automatic upon correction of a fault. LED Operation The LED flashes green during the restart delay, then glows green when the output energizes. It flashes red during the trip delay then glows red when the output de-energizes. It flashes red/green if phase reversal is sensed. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays TVM SERIES Accessories LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 Vac/500 Vdc P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. VRM6048 Voltage Reduction Module Allows the voltage monitor to monitor a 3-phase 550 to 600VAC Line. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 www.littelfuse.com/tvm Specifications Line Voltage Type Input Voltage AC Line Frequency Phase Sequence Power Consumption 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral 208 to 480VAC 50 - 100 Hz ABC Approx. 2W for 240V units Approx. 3W for 480V units Overvoltage, Undervoltage, & Voltage Unbalance Overvoltage & Undervoltage Voltage detection with delay trip & automatic reset Undervoltage Trip Point 88 - 92% of the selected line voltage Reset Voltage +3% of trip voltage Overvoltage Trip Point 109 - 113% of the selected line voltage Reset Voltage -3% of trip voltage Trip Variation vs Temperature 2% Voltage Unbalance Factory fixed from 4 - 10% Reset On Balance -0.7% unbalance Trip Delay Range Fixed from 0.2 - 100s 15% or 0.1s, whichever is greater Restart Delay Range Fixed from 0.5s - 999m 15% or 0.2s, whichever is greater Phase Reversal & Phase Loss Response 200ms; automatic reset Phase Loss 25% unbalance Output Type Isolated SPDT relay contacts Rating 208 to 240VAC (55C) 10A resistive @ 125VAC, 5A @ 250VAC, 1/4 hp @ 125VAC 380 to 480VAC 10A resistive @ 240VAC, 1/4 hp @ 125VAC, 1/3 hp @ 250VAC, max. voltage 277VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 10 6; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Phase Reversal/Failure ASME A17.1 Rule 210.6 Motors and Generators NEMA MG1 14:30, 14:35 Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B Dielectric Breakdown 208 to 240VAC 1500V RMS input to output terminals 380 to 480VAC 2500V RMS input to output terminals Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #8 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 31.75 mm (1.25") Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40 to 55C / -40 to 85C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight 2.8 oz (79 g) 236 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays PLR SERIES Description The PLR Series provides a cost effective means of preventing 3-phase motor startup during adverse voltage conditions. Proper A-B-C sequence must occur in order for the PLR's output contacts to energize. In addition, the relay will not energize when an undervoltage or phase loss condition is present. The PLR Series protects a motor against undervoltage operation. The adjustment knob sets the undervoltage trip point. Operation The output relay is energized and the LED glows when all voltages are acceptable and the phase sequence is correct. Undervoltage must be sensed for a continuous dropout delay period before the relay de-energizes. Reset is automatic upon correction of the fault condition. The output relay will not energize if a fault condition is sensed as power is applied. Field Adjustment: Turn the adjustment knob fully counterclockwise and apply three-phase power. The LED should be ON. Increase adjustment until the LED goes OFF. Decrease adjustment until LED glows again. If nuisance tripping occurs, decrease the adjustment slightly. 8-PIN Wiring Diagram F = Fuses OA = Phase A = L1 OB = Phase B = L2 OC = Phase C = L3 NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed NOTE: When properly adjusted and operating in an average system, a voltage unbalance of 10% or more is required for phase loss detection. When a phase is lost while the motor is running, a voltage will be induced into the open phase nearly equal in magnitude to the normal phase-tophase voltage. This condition is known as regeneration. When regenerated voltages are present, the voltage unbalance during single phasing may not exceed 10% for some motors. The PLR Series may not provide protection under this condition. For systems that require superior phase loss protection, select the PLMU Series. Relay contacts are isolated For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 23. FEATURES BENEFITS Continuous monitoring Prevents 3-phase motor startup when undervoltage or phase loss condition is present Industry standard 8-pin octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors LED indication Quick visual indication of output status and correct phase sequence Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE PLR120A 95 to 140VAC PLR240A 190 to 270VAC PLR380A 340 to 450VAC PLR480A 380 to 500VAC If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 237 www.littelfuse.com/plr AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Features & Benefits 2A fast acting fuses recommended for safety (not required). 9 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays PLR SERIES Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. OT08PC Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 600VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 Vac/500 Vdc C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 Specifications Line Voltage Type Nominal Voltage 120VAC 240VAC 380VAC 480VAC AC Line Frequency Phase Sequence Response Times Pull-in Drop-out Hysterisis Pull-in/Drop-out Output Type Form Rating Maximum Voltage Protection Phase Reversal/Failure Motors and Generators Surge Isolation Voltage 120 & 240VAC 380 & 480VAC Mechanical Dimensions Mounting* Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral Undervoltage Dropout Adj. Range Line Voltage Max. 85 to 130VAC 143VAC 170 to 240VAC 270VAC 310 to 410VAC 480VAC 350 to 480VAC 530VAC 50/60Hz ABC 400ms 100ms 2% Electromechanical relay, energized when all voltages are acceptable SPDT 5A resistive @ 240VAC, 1/4 Hp @ 120VAC 250VAC ASME A17.1 Rule 210.6 NEMA MG1 14:30, 14:35 IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B 1500V RMS input to output 2500V RMS input to output H 81.3 mm (3.2"); W 60.7 mm (2.39"); D 45.2 mm (1.78") Plug-in socket Octal 8-pin, plug-in 0 to 55C / -40 to 85C 6 oz (170 g) *CAUTION: Select an octal socket rated for 600VAC operation. www.littelfuse.com/plr 238 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays PLS SERIES Description The PLS Series is a low cost phase sensitive control that provides an isolated contact closure when the proper A-B-C phase sequence is applied. Protects sensitive 3-phase equipment and equipment operators from reverse rotation. Designed to be compatible with motor overloads or other 3-phase equipment protection devices. Protection for equipment control centers where frequent reconnection or electrical code makes reverse rotation protection essential. Examples include: mobile refrigerated containers, construction equipment, hoists, pumps, conveyors, elevators and escalators. Operation The internal relay and LED are energized when the phase sequence is correct. The output relay will not energize if the phases are reversed. Reset is automatic upon correction of the fault. 8-PIN Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits F = Fuses OA = Phase A = L1 OB = Phase B = L2 OC = Phase C = L3 NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed FEATURES BENEFITS Continuous monitoring Cost effective protection of 3-phase equipment and operators from reverse rotation. Meets reverse rotation protection code requirements. Universal motor compatibility Designed to be compatible with motor overloads or other 3-phase equipment protection devices Relay contacts are isolated Industry standard 8-pin octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors 2A fast acting fuses recommended for safety (not required). Factory calibrated Easy to install. No field adjustment needed LED indicator Provides visual indication of relay status BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 33. Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 6 00VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE PLS120A 120VAC PLS240A 208/240VAC PLS480A 440/480VAC LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 Vac/500 Vdc If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 239 www.littelfuse.com/pls AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Accessories 9 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays PLS SERIES Specifications Line Voltage Type AC Line Frequency Phase Sequence Response Times Pull-in Drop-out Output Type Form Rating 120 & 240VAC 380 & 480VAC Maximum Voltage 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral Nominal Minimum Maximum Voltage Voltage Voltage 120VAC 95VAC 135VAC 208/240VAC 175VAC 255VAC 380/415VAC 310VAC 430VAC 440/480VAC 380VAC 500VAC 50/60Hz ABC 300ms 50ms Protection Isolation Voltage 120 & 240VAC 380 & 480VAC Mechanical Mounting* Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight 1500V RMS input to output 2500V RMS input to output Plug-in socket H 81.3 mm (3.2"); W 60.7 mm (2.39"); D 45.2 mm (1.78") Octal 8-pin plug-in -40to 55C / -40 to 85C 6 oz (170 g) *CAUTION: Select an octal socket rated for 600VAC operation. Electromechanical relay, energized when the phase sequence is correct Isolated SPDT 10A resistive @ 240VAC 8A resistive @ 240VAC 250VAC AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 www.littelfuse.com/pls 240 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays HLVA6I23 Single-Phase Monitor Description The HLVA6I23 is a single-phase undervoltage monitor designed to protect sensitive equipment from brownout or undervoltage conditions. Time delays are included to prevent nuisance tripping and short cycling. The 30A, 1hp rated, SPDT relay contacts allow direct control of motors, solenoids and valves. The output relay can be ordered with isolated SPDT contact to allow monitoring of one voltage and switching a separate voltage. Two undervoltage trip point ranges allow monitoring of 110 to 120VAC or 208 to 240VAC systems. Operation Upon application of input voltage the output relay remains de-energized. When the input voltage value is above the pull-in voltage, the restart delay begins. At the end of the restart delay, the output relay energizes. When the input voltage falls below the trip point, the trip delay begins. If the input voltage remains below the pull-in voltage for the entire trip delay the relay deenergizes. If the input voltage returns to a value above the pull-in voltage, during the trip delay, the trip delay is reset and the relay remains energized. If the input voltage falls below the trip point voltage during the restart delay, the delay is reset and the relay remains de-energized. Reset is automatic upon correction of an undervoltage fault. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output relay and the time delays. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed C = Common T1 = Undervoltage Trip Point T2 = Restart Delay Features 9 30A, SPDT, NO output contacts gJ 100 to 240VAC input voltage gJ 70 to 220VAC adjustable undervoltage trip point in 2 ranges gJ Restart delays from 3 - 300s gJ Trip delay 1 - 20s fixed gJ Isolated or non-isolated relay contacts For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 241 www.littelfuse.com/hlva6i23 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS gJ Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays HLVA6I23 Specifications Input Min & Max RMS Voltage AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Undervoltage Sensing Type Ranges (4) (6) Pull-In Voltage Trip Point Accuracy Time Delay Restart Delays Trip Delay Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Time Delay vs. Temp. & Voltage Output Type Form Ratings General Purpose Resistive AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 Motor Load Life Protection Surge Circuitry Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight www.littelfuse.com/hlva6i23 Function Diagram PI TP V C-NO C-NC 70 to 264VAC 50/60 Hz AC 4VA Peak voltage sensing IV 70 to 120VAC 170 to 220VAC 105% or trip point voltage 3% of trip point tr = Restart Delay td = Trip Delay PI = Pull-in 105% or trip point TP = Trip Point V = Monitored Voltage IV = Input voltage C-NO = Normally Open Contacts C-NC = Normally Closed Contacts 3 - 300s adjustable 1 - 20s fixed in 1s increments 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms 10% Electromechanical relay SPDT SPDT-NO SPDT-NC 125/240VAC 30A 15A 125/240VAC 30A 15A 28VDC 20A 10A 125VAC 1 hp* 1/4 hp** 240VAC 2 hp** 1 hp** Mechanical - 1 x 10 6 Electrical - 1 x 105, *3 x10 4, **6,000 IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Encapsulated 1500V RMS input to output; isolated units 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 76.7 mm (3"); W 51.3 mm (2"); D 38.1 mm (1.5") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connects -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 3.9 oz (111 g) 242 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays KVM SERIES Description The KVM Series is a single-phase undervoltage monitor designed to protect sensitive equipment against brownout undervoltage conditions. The compact design and encapsulated construction make the KVM Series an excellent choice for OEM equipment. Operation The output relay is energized and the LED glows green when the input voltage is above the reset voltage threshold. If the input voltage drops below the undervoltage setpoint, the output relay and LED will de-energize. The output relay will remain de-energized as long as the input voltage is below the reset voltage. Reset is automatic when the input voltage returns to a normal range. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = LED S = Undervoltage Setpoint NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed C = Common, Transfer Contact FEATURES BENEFITS Continuous monitoring Low cost single-phase undervoltage (brownout) protection Compact design measures 2 in. (50.8mm) square Perfect for OEM applications where, cost, size and ease of installation are important LED indication Quick visual indication of output status Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Ordering Information MODEL MAXIMUM LINE VOLTAGE UNDERVOLTAGE SETPOINT KVM4 132VAC Adjustable, 78 to 99VAC KVM6 264VAC Adjustable, 156 to 199VAC If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 243 www.littelfuse.com/kvm 9 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays KVM SERIES Specifications Line Voltage Type Input Voltage AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Power Off Reset Time Undervoltage Detection Undervoltage Setpoint KVM4 KVM6 Undervoltage Reset Point KVM4 KVM6 Repeatability AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 Voltage Sensing Accuracy Output Type Form Rating Life LED Indicator Protection Surge Circuitry Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating /Storage Temperature Humidity Weight www.littelfuse.com/kvm Function Diagram Single phase 110 to 120VAC or 220 to 240VAC 50/60 Hz 2.5W @ 132VAC; 4.5W @ 264VAC 150ms TP = Undervoltage Setpoint R = Reset Point 78 to 99VAC 156 to 199VAC Fixed at 104VAC Fixed at 209VAC 0.5% under fixed conditions 1% over temperature range 2% at 25C Electromechanical relay SPDT 8A resistive @ 120VAC, 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1 x 10 6; Electrical - 1x105 Glows green when output is energized IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Encapsulated 1500V RMS input to output 100 M minimum Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -25 to 55C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.6 oz (74 g) 244 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING Improve safety for service and operations personnel by allowing control and monitoring of the relay without opening the electrical cabinet. RM1000 Series Remote Monitor ................................................. 246 RM2000 Series Remote Monitor ................................................. 248 Informer Remote Diagnostics Tool .................................... 250 Informer-MS Remote Diagnostics Tool .................................... 252 10 REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 245 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Protection Relays Remote Indication and Monitoring RM1000 SERIES Remote Monitor Description The RM1000 Series is a motor-monitoring device to be used in conjunction with the 777 family of products (excluding the P1 Series), 77C family of products and the 601 voltage monitors, via Modbus protocol with a communications module. The RM1000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring. The RM1000 Series can monitor up to 16 MotorSaver(R) and/or PumpSaver(R) units through an RS-485 network using Modbus RTU protocol. A second communication port allows monitoring and control of up to 99 MotorSaver(R) and/or PumpSaver(R) units from a computer, PLC, DCS or SCADA system and can be accessed from the host computer or PLC with the RM1000 acting as a repeater for any of its motor protectors. In addition to the monitoring functions, the RM1000 can be used to reset a tripped MotorSaver(R) or PumpSaver(R). Wiring Diagram REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING 10 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 508, Figure 4. Ordering Information MODEL DESCRIPTION RM1000 NEMA 3R and/or UL Type 12 RM1000-3R NEMA 3R RM1000 NEMA 4 NEMA 4X www.littelfuse.com/rm1000 The RM1000 Series is easily mounted remotely and improves safety for service and operations personnel by allowing them to control and monitor the device without opening the electrical cabinet. Using the RM1000 is a simple, cost-effective method for aiding compliance with arc flash safety regulations. The enclosure and keypad assembly is water and ultraviolet light resistant. The enclosure is NEMA 3R or NEMA 4X (optional) rated. The RM1000 and RM1000 NEMA 4 also carry a UL Type 12 rating, whereas the RM1000-3R does not carry the UL Type 12 rating due to added weep holes. The added weep holes in the RM1000-3R make it suitable for applications subjected to condensing moisture/humidity. 246 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Remote Indication and Monitoring RM1000 SERIES Features Specifications Displays: Input Characteristics Control Power Functional Characteristics Communication Baud Rate Setup g Individual line currents and average current g Current and voltage unbalance g Individual phase voltages and average voltage g Displays last four faults, trip reason, and restart timer status g MotorSaver(R) and/or PumpSaver(R) setpoints g Run-hours on each motor Warning of pending (imminent) faults Controls: Reset run-hour meter g Reset MotorSaver(R) or PumpSaver(R) Change setpoints from the RM1000 Convenience: g g Power from RS485MS-2W communications module g Monitor up to 16 777s with one display g NEMA 3R outdoor rated g Secondary steel enclosure available Accessories RS485-RS232 Converter with cable & plug Allows RS485 devices to be connected to a PC via the RS232 (serial) port. Provides convenient terminal blocks for making signal and DC power supply connections. Pre-wired. RS485-USB Converter with cable & plug/RS232:USB Allows RS485 devices to be connected to a PC via the USB port. Provides convenient terminal blocks for making signal and DC power supply connections. Pre-wired. RM1000 ENCL Steel enclosure for protecting the RM1000 remote communications monitor from adverse affects of weather and vandalism, while allowing normal communications connections to the RM1000 unit. Solutions Software: Solutions-M Software features include data logging, real-time data monitoring and fault and event monitoring. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 247 www.littelfuse.com/rm1000 10 REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING Port #1 for 777(s) Port #2 for PC, PLC, etc. 1200-28800 1200-28800 None, Odd, or None, Odd, or Even Parity Even Parity 1 or 2 Stop Bits 1 or 2 Stop Bits Protocol Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Serial Interface RS-485 RS-485 Available Addresses 1-99 addresses Responds to all port #1 (max 16 per RM1000) Mechanical Life 100,000 actuations Overlay Material Polyester UV Exposure w/o degradation 2000 hrs Terminal Torque (depluggable terminal block) 3 in.-lbs. Panel Thickness 0.03" min, 0.12" max General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) Storage -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Maximum Input Power 100mA Class of Protection RM1000, RM1000 NEMA 4 NEMA 3R and/or UL Type12, NEMA 4X (optional) RM1000-3R NEMA 3R only Relative Humidity Up to 85%, non-condensing Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CSA 22.2 No. 14 (File #46510) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Enclosure Material Black polycarbonate Display Liquid Crystal with extended temp. range Size 2 rows x 16 characters Keypad Six 0.5" stainless steel dome buttons for tactile feedback Dimensions H 91.92 mm (3.62"); W 115.42 mm (4.54"); D 22.86 mm (0.9") Weight 1.5 lbs. (24 oz., 680.39 g) Mounting Method Surface mountable on backplane using 4 screws g g 12-24VDC (Supplied by RS485MS-2W) Protection Relays Remote Indication and Monitoring RM2000 SERIES Remote Monitor Description Wiring Diagram The RM2000 Series is a motor-monitoring device to be used in conjunction with the 777 family of products (excluding the P1 Series), 77C family of products and the Model 601 voltage monitors, via Modbus protocol with a communications module. The RM2000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, userfriendly, motor monitoring. The RM2000 has membrane keypad controls which allow both monitoring and control of a 777 MotorSaver(R) through an RS-485 network using Modbus RTU protocol. A second communication port allows monitoring and control of up to 99 RM2000 devices from a PLC, DCS, or SCADA system or a PC with Solutions software installed. The RM2000 will act as a repeater for its motor protector when accessed from the host computer or PLC. In addition to the monitoring functions, the RM2000 can be used to reset a tripped MotorSaver(R) or PumpSaver(R). The RM2000 is easily mounted remotely and improves safety for service and operations personnel by allowing them to control and monitor the device without opening the electrical cabinet. Using the RM2000 is a simple, cost-effective method for aiding compliance with arc flash safety regulations. The enclosure and keypad assembly is water and ultraviolet light resistant. REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING 10 Ordering Information For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 508, Figure 5. www.littelfuse.com/rm2000 248 MODEL DESCRIPTION RM2000 Remote display monitor for 777 family relays RM2000-CBM+ Coal Bed Methane Special. Optimizes gas production from coal bed methane wells while protecting submersible pump RM2000-RTDW Includes additional input for ground-fault module (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Remote Indication and Monitoring RM2000 SERIES Features Specifications Displays: Input Characteristics Control Voltage Transient Protection (Internal) Functional Characteristics Communication Baud Rate Setup g Average current, individual line currents and current unbalance g Current to ground g Average voltage, line-line voltages and voltage unbalance g Instantaneous power g Power factor g Last four faults g All parameters programmed into 777 MotorSaver(R) Protocol Serial Interface Available Addresses Real-time Clock Battery Back-up Life Last fault memory Remaining restart delay times Controls: g g Start and stop buttons g Key lock input to prevent setpoint changes Change 777 setpoints from keypad The RM2000 is also equipped with a real-time clock, which allows access to the following motor management information (most readings can be reset): Total motor run-time g Configuration g Time and date of last four faults, along with voltage and current at time of trip Time and date of last 10 motor starts g Total number of motor restarts g Minimum time between any two starts with time and date g Run-time since last start g kWh consumed g kVARs consumed Port #1 for 777 1200-28800 Even Parity 1 Stop Bit Modbus RTU RS-485 01 Port #2 for PC, PLC, etc. 1200-28800 None, Odd, or Even Parity 1 or 2 Stop Bits Modbus RTU RS-485 A01-A99 10 years @ 25C without external power Stores up to 4 faults with time and date stamp, includes voltages and currents at time of trip Two independent electro-mechanical Form C (SPDT) Silver/Tin Oxide RS485-RS232 Converter with cable & plug Allows RS485 devices to be connected to a PC via the RS232 (serial) port. Provides convenient terminal blocks for making signal and DC power supply connections. Pre-wired. RS485-USB Converter with cable & plug/RS232:USB Allows RS485 devices to be connected to a PC via the USB port. Provides convenient terminal blocks for making signal and DC power supply connections. Pre-wired. Solutions Software: Solutions-M Software features include data logging, real-time data monitoring and fault and event monitoring. 249 www.littelfuse.com/rm2000 10 REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING Accessories (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 2500V for 10ms Contact Material Output Characteristics (RM2000-RTDW version only) Pilot Duty Rating 240VA @ 120VAC General Purpose Rating 5A @ 120VAC General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) Storage -30 to 70C (-22 to 158F) Maximum Input Power 3W Class of Protection NEMA 3R and/or UL Type 12 Relative Humidity Up to 85%, non-condensing Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CSA C22.2 No. 14 (File #46510) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Enclosure Material Black polycarbonate Display Liquid crystal with extended temp. range Size 2 rows x 20 characters Lighting LED Backlight Keypad Eight 0.5" stainless steel dome buttons for tactile feedback Mechanical Life 100,000 actuations Overlay Material Polyester UV Exposure w/o degradation 2000 hrs. Terminal Torque (depluggable terminal block) 3 in.-lbs. Dimensions H 162.56 mm (6.4"); W 154.94 mm (6.1"); D 27.94mm (1.1") Weight 1.2 lbs. (19.2 oz., 544.31 g) Mounting Method Surface mountable on backplane using 4 screws g g 115VAC 10%; 50/60Hz Protection Relays Remote Indication and Monitoring INFORMER Remote Diagnostic Tool for use with Single-Phase Pump Relays Description The Informer is a hand-held diagnostic tool designed for use with single-phase models equipped with infrared LED transmitters (111-Insider-P; 231-Insider-P; 232-Insider; 111P; 233P; 233P-1.5; 234-P and 235P). The Informer uses an infrared receiver to access information sent from the relay which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system. Each Littelfuse single-phase model listed above is equipped with an infrared LED that transmits valuable information from the device. To retrieve this information, the Informer's receiver must be directed toward the unit's LED transmitter and be within 8 feet of the unit. The green COMM STATUS light indicates when the Informer is receiving data from the unit. If communication is lost, the Informer will display the last values it received. The Informer will automatically shut off after 2 minutes of non-use. An infrared adapter (IR Kit-12) is included with all new and updated Informers. This adapter allows communication with the unit without opening the panel door (for select models). Features & Benefits For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 9. The Informer displays: REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING 10 gJ Model number gJ Real-time voltage, current, and power gJ Drywell and overload trip points gJ Calibration voltage gJ Restart delay setpoint and restart delay time remaining gJ CT size (if applicable) gJ Number of pump starts gJ Total run-time gJ Fault history for last 20, most recent, faults gJ gJ Voltage, current, power, and run-time for each fault at time of the fault Highest and lowest voltage and current since last calibration Accessories Informer IR Kit-12 12" infrared adapter cable attaches to the face of the unit to provide remote diagnostics without opening the panel. Included with the Informer www.littelfuse.com/informer 250 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Remote Indication and Monitoring INFORMER Specifications Functional Characteristics Power Input Auto Shut-off Communication Signal Range Data Update General Characteristics Temperature Range Accuracy Voltage Current Power Maximum Input Resolution Voltage Display Size Keypad Mechanical Life Overlay Material Enclosure Dimensions Weight Material 9 Volts DC (requires one 9-volt alkaline battery) 2 minutes Infrared 1-8 ft. (approx. 0.25 ft. when using IR Kit) 4 seconds 0 to 60C (32 to 140F) 2% 2% 4% 0.25 W 1.0VAC Liquid crystal 2 rows x 16 characters Three 0.5" diameter buttons 100,000 actuations min. Polyester H 139.70 mm (5.50"); W 91.44 mm (3.60"); D 28.70 mm (1.13") 0.375 lb. (6 oz., 170.10 g) (w/out battery); 0.70 lb. (11.2 oz., 317.51 g) (total package) Black ABS 94HB 10 REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 251 www.littelfuse.com/informer Protection Relays Remote Indication and Monitoring INFORMER-MS Remote Diagnostic Tool for use with the 455 3-Phase, Dual-Range Voltage Monitor Description The Informer-MS is a hand-held diagnostic tool designed for use with the Littelfuse 455.* The Informer-MS uses an infrared receiver to read valuable information transmitted from the 455*, which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system. A green communication status light indicates the Informer-MS is receiving data from the 455. If communication is lost, the Informer-MS will display the last values it received. *Model 455s manufactured after 03/01/06 are equipped with the infrared LED transmitter. Models manufactured prior to this date are not compatible with the Informer-MS. An infrared adapter (IR Kit-36) can be purchased to allow communication with the Model 455 without opening the panel door. Features The Informer-MS displays: For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 9. Specifications Functional Characteristics Power Input REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING 10 Consumption Auto Shut-off Communication Signal Range Data Update General Characteristics Temperature Range Accuracy Voltage Maximum Input Resolution Voltage Voltage Unbalance Time Trip Delay Restart Delay Display (liquid crystal) Size Keypad (three 0.5" dia. buttons) Mechanical Life Overlay Material Enclosure Dimensions Weight Material www.littelfuse.com/informerms 9 Volts DC (requires one 9-volt alkaline battery) 0.25 Watt (max.) 2 minutes Infrared 1-8 ft. (approx. 0.25 ft. when using IR Kit) 4 seconds gJ Real-time, line and load side voltage gJ Real-time, line and load side voltage unbalance gJ Motor run hours gJ Last 20 faults gJ Last 32 motor starts gJ High and low voltage trip points gJ Voltage unbalance trip point gJ Restart and trip delay settings gJ Voltage at last fault gJ Communication status LED gJ Auto shut off gJ Last fault with trip conditions 0 to 60C (32 to 140F) Accessories 2% 0.25 W Informer IR Kit-36 36" infrared adapter cable attaches to the face of the model 455 to provide remote diagnostics without opening the panel. 1.0VAC 1% 1 minute increments 2 second increments 2 second increments 2 rows x 16 characters 100,000 actuations min. Polyester H 139.70 mm (5.50"); W 91.44 mm (3.60"); D 28.70 mm (1.13") 0.375 lb. (6 oz., 170.10 g) (w/out battery); 0.70 lb. (11.2 oz., 317.51 g) (total package) Black ABS 94HB 252 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays COMMUNICATION MODULES RS485MS-2W Communication Module ................................. 254 CIO-MB/CIO-120-MB Communication Module ................................ 255 CIO-DN-P/ CIO-120-DN-P DevicenetTM Interface .................................... 257 CIO-777-PR Profibus Interface ........................................... 259 CIO-EN Modbus-TCP and Modbus-RTU Interface ...... 260 COM 4-20 Output Module for use with Model 777-AccuPower .................................. 261 11 COMMUNICATION MODULES (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 253 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Protection Relays Communication Modules RS485MS-2W Communication Module Description The RS485MS-2W is required to enable the Modbus communications function on Model 77x-type products. This module is required when the RM1000, RM2000 or other Modbus capable device is used with 77x-type products. Features Wiring Diagram Typical RS-485 Network TYPICAL RS485 NETWORK Modbus Master with RS-485 Port 9-Pin SUB-D Connector 120 Ohm g Optical isolation from line potentials g Powered by the 77x product g RS-485 compliant bus drive capability g Remote reset input connection g Power connection for the Model RM1000 Accessories Up to a Max Distance of 4000 ft, use 18 - 24 AWG Shielded Twisted Pair 120 Ohm A A A B B B S 100 Ohm A B RS485-RS232 Converter with cable & plug Allows RS485 devices to be connected to a PC via the RS232 (serial) port. Provides convenient terminal blocks for making signal and DC power supply connections. Pre-wired. Model 777, 77C, 601 S RS485MS-2W Module RS485-USB Converter with cable & plug/RS232:USB Allows RS485 devices to be connected to a PC via the USB port. Provides convenient terminal blocks for making signal and DC power supply connections. Pre-wired. S A B S Model 777, 77C, 601 Model 777, 77C, 601 RS485MS-2W Module RS485MS-2W Module Figure 1: Typical RS-485 Network Refer to the manual for basic and extended network diagrams. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 507, Figure 2. COMMUNICATION MODULES 11 Specifications Functional Specifications Remote Reset (for optional use with 777 Series) General Characteristics Ambient Operating Temperature Terminal (depluggable terminal block) Torque Wire AWG Class of Protection Relative Humidity Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated Fast Transient Burst Hi-Potential Test www.littelfuse.com/rs485ms2w Normally open pushbutton rated 24VDC, 10mA (min.) -20 to 50C (-4 to 122F) 3 in.-lbs. (max.) 12-20 AWG IP20 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Surge Input Power Inputs/Data Lines Safety Marks UL CE Enclosure Dimensions Weight Mounting Method IEC 61000-4-5, Level 1 IEC 61000-4-5, Level 2 UL508 (File #E68520) IEC 60947 Polycarbonate H 52.83 mm (2.08"); W 73.66 mm (2.9"); D 19.56 mm (.77") 0.26 lb. (4.16oz., 117.93 g) 9-pin D-Sub connector on the side of a 777-Series IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air 150 MHz, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 min) 254 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Communication Modules CIO-MB / CIO-120-MB Communication Link to PLC/SCADA/ Monitoring Systems Description The CIO-MB/CIO-120-MB Modules are convenient and cost-effective Modbus-RTU interfaces capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of an overload relay over a Modbus network. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram TYPICAL WIRING FOR CIO-MB FEATURES BENEFITS Compact size 3.46" H x 1.0" W x 5.0" D Easily adapts to existing as well as new applications Flexible addressing standard allows function as stand-alone interface or in conjunction with 777 series overload relay Provides flexibility for control and monitoring Remote reset option Additional remote reset input allows user to reset 777 series relays without opening the panel DIN rail or surface mountable Allows installation flexibility Unpluggable terminal block connections Allows user to wire terminal blocks before installing the module and reduces field wiring Specifications Functional Specifications Remote Reset (for use with optional 777 Series) FIGURE 1: Typical Wiring Diagram (CIO-MB) TYPICAL WIRING FOR CIO-120-MB FIGURE 2: Typical Wiring Diagram (CIO-120-MB) For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 507, Figure 3. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE CIO-MB 12 to 24VDC CIO-120-MB 90 to 130VAC (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 255 24VDC +10% 95mA (max.) 70mA (typical) 2.28 W (max.) 1.7 W (typical) IEEE 802.3 10Base-T 12-24VDC 90-130VAC 2mA (typical) 480VA & 240VAC, B300 5A @ 240VAC -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) 3 in.-lbs. (max.) 12-20 AWG IP20, NEMA 1 (finger safe) 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 www.littelfuse.com/ciomb-cio120mb 11 COMMUNICATION MODULES Power Requirements: Voltage Current Power Ethernet Controller Capability Input Characteristics General Purpose (4) Voltage Range: CIO-MB CIO-120-MB Current Output Characteristics SPDT (1), SPST (1) Pilot Duty General Purpose General Characteristics Ambient Operating Temperature Terminal (depluggable terminal block) Torque Wire AWG Class of Protection Relative Humidity Normally open pushbutton rated 24VDC, 10mA (min.) Protection Relays Communication Modules CIO-MB / CIO-120-MB Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated Fast Transient Burst Hi-Potential Test Surge Input Power Inputs/Data Lines Safety Marks UL CSA CE Enclosure Dimensions Weight Mounting Methods IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air 150 MHz, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 min) IEC 61000-4-5, Level 1 IEC 61000-4-5, Level 2 UL508 (File #E68520) C22.2 (File #46510) IEC 60947-6-2 Polycarbonate H 86.36 mm (3.40"); W 25.40 mm (1.00"); D 138.68 mm (5.46") (w/depluggable connectors) 0.25 lb. (4 oz., 113.4 g) DIN Rail or surface mount (w/two #8 screws) COMMUNICATION MODULES 11 www.littelfuse.com/ciomb-cio120mb 256 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Communication Modules CIO-DN-P / CIO-120-DN-P Communication Link to PLC/SCADA/ Monitoring Systems Description The CIO-DN-P/CIO-120-DN-P are convenient and cost-effective DevicenetTM interfaces capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a DevicenetTM network. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram TYPICAL WIRING FOR CIO-DN-P DIGITAL INPUTS REMOTE RESET OUTPUT A OUTPUT B DEPLUGGABLE TERMINAL BLOCKS R DEVICENET MODULE/NETWORK S TATUS R C I1 I2 I3 REMOTE RESET V+ 1 I4 OVERLOAD COMM. S TATUS DIGITAL INPUTS CAN L CIO-DN 4 Easily adapts to existing as well as new applications Flexible addressing standard allows function as stand-alone interface or in conjunction with 777 series overload relay Provides flexibility for control and monitoring Remote reset option Additional remote reset input allows user to reset 777 series relays without opening the panel DIN rail or surface mountable Allows installation flexibility Unpluggable terminal block connections Allows user to wire terminal blocks before installing the module and reduces field wiring 5 OUTPUT B IND . CON T. EQ. DeviceNet Communication and I/O (R) 784X SHEILD 3 BENEFITS Compact size 3.4" H x 1.0" W x 5.46" D PILOT D UTY RATING 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 5A @ 240VAC GENERAL PURPOSE CAN H DEVICENET NETWORK 2 OUTPUT A FEATURES SCREW TORQUE RATING 0.5 Nm (5 in.-l bs.) LISTED V- FIGURE 1: Typical Wiring Diagram (CIO-DN-Px, CIO-601CS-DN-P1) REMOTE RESET DEVICENE T MODULE/NETWORK STATUS R R C I1 I2 I3 I4 1 3 4 LINE VOTAGE CIO-DN-P 12 to 24VAC CIO-120-DN-P 90 to 130VAC 5 INPUTS 1-4 115VAC OVERLOAD COMM. STATUS REMOTE RESET AC COMMON OUTPUT A OUTPUT B PILOT DUTY RATING 480VA @ 240 VAC, B300 5A @ 240 VAC GENERAL PURPOSE CAN H SHEILD IND. CONT. EQ . CAN L 784X DEVICENET NETWORK 2 MODEL SCR EW T ORQUE RATING 0.5 Nm (5 in-lbs.) V- (R) LISTED FIGURE 2: Typical Wiring Diagram (CIO-120-DN-Px) For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 507, Figure 3. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 257 www.littelfuse.com/ciodnp-cio120dnp COMMUNICATION MODULES OUTPUT OUTPUT A B 115VAC DEPLUGGABLE TERMINAL BLOCKS V+ 11 Ordering Information TYPICAL WIRING FOR CIO-120-DN-P Protection Relays Communication Modules CIO-DN-P / CIO-120-DN-P Specifications Input Characteristics Power Requirements Voltage (nominal) Current Power Digital Inputs Voltage Range CIO-DN-P CIO-120-DN-P Frequency Maximum Current Remote Reset Output Characteristics Form A & Form C Contactors Pilot Duty General Purpose General Characteristics Temperature Range Relative Humidity Wire Gauge Terminal Torque Hi-Potential Test (relays to other circuits) 24VDC 137mA (max.) 3.28 W (max.) 12-24 VAC 90-130VAC 50/60Hz 2mA (typical) 24VDC, 10mA (min.), NO pushbutton EMC Standards Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated Fast Transient Burst Safety Marks UL, ULC Listed, CSA Enclosure Dimensions Weight Mounting Methods IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air 150 MHz, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power UL508 (File #E68520), C22.2 (File #46510) Polycarbonate H 86.36 mm (3.4"); W 25.4 mm (1.0"); D 138.68 mm (5.46") (w/depluggable connectors) 0.25 lb. (4 oz., 113.4 g) (w/depluggable connectors) DIN Rail or surface mount (w/two #8 screws) 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 5A @ 240VAC -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) 10-95%, non-condensing Solid or stranded, 12-20 AWG 3 in.-lbs. (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 minute) COMMUNICATION MODULES 11 www.littelfuse.com/ciodnp-cio120dnp 258 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Communication Modules CIO-777-PR Communication Link to PLC/SCADA/ Monitoring Systems Description The CIO-777-PR Module is a convenient and cost-effective Profibus interface capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a Profibus network. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram DEPLUGGABLE TERMINAL BLOCK PROFIBUS SUB-D CONNEC TOR PROFIBUS NETWORK S TATUS OVERLOAD COMM. S TATUS VA SHIELD CIO-E777-PR PROFIBUS Communication B SCREW TORQUE RATING 0.5 Nm ( 5.0 in.-lbs.) V+ BENEFITS Compact size 3.4" H x 1.0" W x 5.46" D Easily adapts to existing as well as new applications Flexible addressing standard allows function as stand-alone interface or in conjunction with 777 series overload relay Provides flexibility for control and monitoring Remote reset option Additional remote reset input allows user to reset 777 series relays without opening the panel DIN rail or surface mountable Allows installation flexibility Built in sub-D connector Provides a quick and easy connection to a network and reduces field wiring IN D. C ON T. E Q . 784X PROFIBUS NETWORK FEATURES L I ST E D For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 507, Figure 3. FIGURE 1: Typical Wiring Diagram Specifications 12-24VDC 150mA (max.) 3.6 W (max.) 12-24VAC 2mA (typical) 24VDC, 10mA, (min.), NO pushbutton 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 5A @ 240VAC EMC Standards Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated Fast Transient Burst Safety Marks UL, ULC Listed CSA Enclosure Dimensions Weight Mounting Methods IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air 150 MHz, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power UL508 (File #E68520) C22.2 (File #46510) Polycarbonate H 86.36 mm (3.4"); W 25.4 mm (1.0"); D 138.68 mm (5.46") (w/depluggable connectors) 0.25 lb. (4 oz., 113.4 g) (w/depluggable connectors) DIN Rail or surface mount (w/ two #8 screws) -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Solid or stranded, 12-20 AWG 3 in.-lbs. Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 min.) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 259 www.littelfuse.com/cio777pr 11 COMMUNICATION MODULES Input Characteristics Power Requirements Voltage (nominal) Current Power Digital Inputs Voltage Range Maximum Current Remote Reset Output Characteristics Form A & Form C Contactors Pilot Duty General Purpose General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating Storage Relative Humidity Wire Gauge Terminal Torque Hi-Potential Test (relays to other circuits) Protection Relays Communication Modules CIO-EN Communication Link to PLC/SCADA/ Monitoring Systems Description The CIO-EN Module (non-POE) is a convenient and costeffective Modbus-TCP and Modbus-RTU interface capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of an overload relay over a Modbus network. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram FEATURES BENEFITS Compact size 3.4" H x 1.0" W x 5.46" D Easily adapts to existing as well as new applications Flexible addressing standard allows function as stand-alone interface or in conjunction with 777 series overload relay Provides flexibility for control and monitoring Remote reset option Additional remote reset input allows user to reset 777 series relays without opening the panel DIN rail or surface mountable Allows installation flexibility Built in Ethernet jack Reduces field wiring For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 507, Figure 3. Specifications COMMUNICATION MODULES 11 Input Characteristics Power Requirements: Voltage Current Power Digital Inputs General Purpose (4) Voltage Range Current Functional Specifications Remote Reset (for use with optional 777 Series) Ethernet Controller Capability Output Characteristics SPDT (1), SPST (1) Pilot Duty General Purpose General Characteristics Ambient Operating Temperature 24VDC +10% 95mA (max.) 70mA (typical) 2.28 W (max.) 1.7 W (typical) 12-24VDC 2mA (typical) Normally open pushbutton rated 24VDC, 10mA (min.) IEEE 802.3 10Base-T 480VA & 240VAC, B300 5A @ 240VAC Terminal (depluggable terminal block) Torque Wire AWG Class of Protection Relative Humidity Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated Fast Transient Burst Hi-Potential Test Surge Input Power Inputs/Data Lines Safety Marks UL CSA CE Enclosure Dimensions -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) Weight Mounting Methods www.littelfuse.com/cioen 260 3 in.-lbs. (max.) 12-20 AWG IP20, NEMA 1 (finger safe) 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air 150 MHz, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 min) IEC 61000-4-5, Level 1 IEC 61000-4-5, Level 2 UL508 (File #E68520) C22.2 (File #46510) IEC 60947-6-2 Polycarbonate H 86.36 mm (3.4"); W 25.4 mm (1.0"); D 138.68 mm (5.46") 0.25 lb. (4 oz., 113.4 g) DIN Rail or surface mount (w/two #8 screws) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Protection Relays Communication Modules COM 4-20 Communication Link to PLC/SCADA/ Monitoring Systems Description The COM 4-20 Output Module is intended for use with ONLY the Model 777-AccuPower output power monitor. The module will send a 4-20mA signal proportional to the output power. It can also be used to send the input power by setting the efficiency setting on the 777-AccuPower monitor to one. This module allows communication to a PLC with an analog input and no Modbus input. Features g Powered by the 777-AccuPower g Scalable 4-20mA output proportional to Hp or kW g Signal can be used for displays, controllers, or PLCs Wiring Diagram 4-20mA OUTPUT MODULE Figure 6. 4-20mA Output Module Wiring Diagram For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 507, Figure 2. 11 Output Characteristics Current General Characteristics Temperature Range Terminal (depluggable terminal block) Torque Wire AWG Class of Protection Relative Humidity Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated Fast Transient Burst Hi-Potential Test Surge Input Power Inputs/Data Lines Safety Marks UL CE Enclosure Dimensions 4-20mA -20 to 50C (-4 to 122F) 3 in.-lbs. (max.) 12-20 AWG IP20 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Weight Mounting Method IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air IEC 61000-4-5, Level 1 IEC 61000-4-5, Level 2 UL508 (File #E68520) IEC 60947 Polycarbonate H 52.83 mm (2.08"); W 73.66 mm (2.9"); D 19.56 mm (0.77") 0.25 lb. (4 oz., 113.4 g) #8 screws; mount to side of 777-AccuPower unit 150 MHz, 10V/m IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 min) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 261 www.littelfuse.com/com420 COMMUNICATION MODULES Specifications Time Delay Relays TIME DELAY RELAYS The largest selection of time delay relays known since 1968 for its reliable designs that provide long service lives with low maintenance costs. Versatile multifunction time delay relays give you the option of choosing among functions and time delay ranges to ensure that you receive the perfect timer to fit your needs. Electromechanical relay-output time delay relays are available with a number of different functions and assure isolation between input and output, as well as no voltage drop across output contact. Solid-state time delay relays have no moving parts to arc and wear out over time, giving them a lifespan of up to 100x that of a relay-output timer. In addition, all solid state time delay relays are fully encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, humidity, etc. Timer Function Guide ......................................................................... 264 Delay-on-Make, Normally Closed TS441165 ........................................................................................... 313 Multifunction Delay-on-Break TRDU Series ....................................................................................... 265 HRDB Series ....................................................................................... 315 TRU Series.......................................................................................... 268 HRPS / HRIS Series ............................................................................ 317 ASQU / ASTU Series .......................................................................... 270 KRDB Series ....................................................................................... 319 DSQU / DSTU Series .......................................................................... 272 KSDB Series ....................................................................................... 321 ORB Series ......................................................................................... 323 Dedicated TDB / TDBH / TDBL Series ................................................................. 325 On Delay TDUB Series ....................................................................................... 327 T10 SERIES ......................................................................................... 274 THDB Series ....................................................................................... 329 Delay-on-Make ERDM Series ...................................................................................... 275 HRDM Series...................................................................................... 277 KRDM Series ...................................................................................... 279 KRPS Series........................................................................................ 281 TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 KSD1 Series ....................................................................................... 284 KSDU Series ....................................................................................... 286 KSPS Series........................................................................................ 288 TRB Series .......................................................................................... 331 TSB Series .......................................................................................... 333 TSDB Series ....................................................................................... 335 HRDS Series ....................................................................................... 337 HSPZA22SL ........................................................................................ 339 KRDS Series ....................................................................................... 341 KSDS Series ....................................................................................... 343 ORS Series ......................................................................................... 345 MSM Series ....................................................................................... 291 Single Shot ORM Series ........................................................................................ 293 PRS65 ................................................................................................. 347 PRLM Series ....................................................................................... 295 TDS / TDSH / TDSL Series ................................................................. 348 TDM / TDMH / TDML Series ............................................................. 297 TDUS Series ....................................................................................... 350 TDU / TDUH / TDUL Series ................................................................ 299 THC / THS Series ............................................................................... 352 TH1 Series .......................................................................................... 301 THDS Series ....................................................................................... 354 THD1B410.5S ..................................................................................... 303 TRS Series .......................................................................................... 356 TMV8000 / TSU2000 Series .............................................................. 305 TSDS Series ....................................................................................... 358 TRM Series......................................................................................... 307 TSS Series .......................................................................................... 360 TS1 Series .......................................................................................... 309 TSD1 Series........................................................................................ 311 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 262 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Interval Percentage ERDI Series......................................................................................... 362 PTHF4900DK....................................................................................... 418 HRDI Series ........................................................................................ 364 Dual Function KRDI Series ........................................................................................ 366 TDMB Series ...................................................................................... 420 KSD2 Series ....................................................................................... 368 ESD52233 ........................................................................................... 422 KSPU Series ....................................................................................... 370 KRPD Series ....................................................................................... 424 TDI / TDIH / TDIL Series..................................................................... 372 TDUI / TDUIH / TDUIL Series ............................................................. 374 THD2 Series ....................................................................................... 376 THD7 Series ....................................................................................... 378 TS2 / TS6 Series ................................................................................ 380 TSD2 Series........................................................................................ 382 TSD6 Series........................................................................................ 384 TSD7 Series........................................................................................ 386 Retriggerable Single Shot KRD9 Series ....................................................................................... 388 HVAC CT Series ............................................................................................ 426 T2D120A15M ..................................................................................... 428 TA Series ............................................................................................ 430 TAC1 Series ........................................................................................ 432 TL Series............................................................................................. 434 TSA141300 ......................................................................................... 436 Coin Vending HRV Series ......................................................................................... 437 TSD94110SB ...................................................................................... 390 12 Recyle ERD3425A .......................................................................................... 391 TIME DELAY RELAYS ESDR Series ....................................................................................... 393 HRDR Series ....................................................................................... 396 KRD3 Series ....................................................................................... 398 KRDR Series ....................................................................................... 400 KSD3 Series ....................................................................................... 402 KSDR Series ....................................................................................... 404 KSPD Series ....................................................................................... 406 RS Series ............................................................................................ 408 For More Information... and to download our HVAC Timer Application Guide, visit TDR Series.......................................................................................... 410 THD3C42A0 ........................................................................................ 412 Littelfuse.com/timedelayrelays TSD3411S........................................................................................... 414 TSDR Series ....................................................................................... 416 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 263 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Time Delay Relays TIMER FUNCTION GUIDE Selecting a Timer's Function Selecting one of the five most common timing functions can be as easy as answering three questions on the chart below. If you have trouble answering these questions, try drawing a connection diagram that shows how the timer and load are connected. Time diagrams and written descriptions of the five most popular functions, plus other common functions. Instantaneous contacts, accumulation, pause timing functions, and flashing LED's are included in some units to expand the versatility of the timer. These expanded operations are explained on the product's catalog page. Time diagrams are used on these pages along with text and international symbols for functions. Function Selection Guide THE FIVE MOST USED FUNCTIONS Selection Questions 1) The timing starts when the initiate (starting) contacts are: A) Closed B) Opened 2) What is the status of the output (or load) during timing? A) On B) Off C) On/Off 3) Will the load de-energize (or remain de-energized) if the initiate (starting) contacts are opened during timing? A) Yes B) No Understanding Time Diagrams TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Time diagrams are used to show the relative operation of switches, controls, and loads as time progresses. Time begins at the first vertical boundary. There may be a line indicating the start of the operation or it may just begin with the transition of the device that starts the operation. Each row in the time diagram represents a separate component. These rows will be labeled with the name of the device or its terminal connection numbers. In a bistable or digital system, the switches, controls, or loads can only be ON or OFF. The time lines are drawn to represent these two possible conditions. Vertical lines are used to define important starting or ending points in the operation. The example to the right is the most common type of time diagram in use in North America. It shows the energizing of loads, and the closing of switches and contacts by an ascending vertical transition of the time line. Opening switches or contacts or de-energizing loads are represented by descending vertical transitions. TIME DIAGRAM Example: DELAY-ON-BREAK (RELEASE) Input Applied Off Initiate Switch Closed Open Output (Normally Open) Energized De-energized V = Voltage R = Reset S1 = Initiate Switch TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay L = Load = Undefined Time International Timing Function Symbols = Delay-on-Make; ON-delay = Flasher - OFF Time First; Recycling Equal Times - OFF First = Delay-on-Break; OFF-delay = Recycling - Unequal Times; Pulse Generator = Delay-on-Make and Break; ON and OFF-delay = Recycling - Unequal Times Starting with ON or OFF = Interval; Impulse-ON = Delay-on-Make and Interval; Single Pulse Generator = Trailing Edge Interval; Impulse-OFF = Single Shot; Pulse Former = Flasher - ON Time First; Recycling Equal Times - ON First www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 264 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Multifunction TRDU SERIES Description 8-PIN 11-PIN Wiring Diagram L1 L1 L1 Features & Benefits N/L2 N/L2 L1 8-PIN DPDT L1 N/L2 The TRDU Series is a versatile universal time delay relay with 21 selectable single and dual functions. The dual functions replace up to three timers required to accomplish the same function. Both the function and the timing range are selectable with switches located on the face of the unit. Two LED's indicate input voltage and output status. This device offers full 10A isolated relay output contacts in either SPDT or DPDT. The TRDU replaces hundreds of part numbers, thereby, reducing your stock inventory requirements. 21 Functions Five switches are provided to set one of 10 single or 11 dual modes of operation. N/L2 8-PIN SPDT N/L2 FEATURES BENEFITS : 21 timing functions Replace hundreds of parts and reduce stocking requirements Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1% User selectable time delay Timing settings are switch selectable 0.1s - 1,705h in eight ranges for added flexibility Isolated 10A, SPDT or DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages LED indicators Provides visual indication of input voltage and relay status Accessories V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 L1 BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. N/L2 NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. 11-PIN DPDT For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 20. MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE BASE CONNECTION TRDU120A1 120VAC 8-pin, DPDT* TRDU120A2 120VAC 8-pin, SPDT TRDU120A3 120VAC 11-pin, DPDT TRDU12D1 12VDC 8-pin, DPDT* TRDU12D2 12VDC 8-pin, SPDT TRDU230A2 230VAC 8-pin, SPDT TRDU24A1 24VAC/DC 8-pin, DPDT* TRDU24A2 24VAC/DC 8-pin, SPDT TRDU24A3 24VAC/DC 11-pin, DPDT PSC8 or PSC11 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use PSC8 with NDS-8 Octal Socket or PSC11 with NDS-11 Socket. Sold in sets of two. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 *Limited to 9 operating functions in 8-pin DPDT units. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 265 www.littelfuse.com/trdu TIME DELAY RELAYS NDS-11 11-pin Socket 11-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC11 hold-down clips. Ordering Information L1 N/L2 12 Time Delay Relays Multifunction TRDU SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller Range: Switch Selectable** Single Functions: 0.1s - 1,705h in 8 ranges Dual Functions: 0.1s - 3,100m each in 8 ranges Adjustments Multiplier: 3 position DIP switches select 0.1, 1, 10, or 100 in s or m Setting Accuracy 1% or 50ms, whichever is greater Repeat Accuracy 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater Timing Functions Five switches are provided to set one of twenty-one single or dual functions Reset Time 50ms Initiate Time 120VAC: 75ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage 1% Indication Two LEDs indicate 1) Input voltage applied 2) Output relay status Input Voltage 12VDC, 24VAC/DC, 120VAC, or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VAC/DC -15% - 20% 120 & 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Power Consumption 24 to 230V 3W; 12VDC 2W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form SPDT or DPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28 VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 10 6 Protection Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight 1500V RMS input to output 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Plug-in socket H 76.7 mm (3.1"); W 60.7 mm (2.39"); D 45.2 mm (1.78") Octal 8-pin plug-in or magnal 11-pin plug-in -20 to 65C / -40 to 85C 5.8 oz (164 g) **For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. Function Diagrams Single Functions Dual Functions DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) 12 * TIME DELAY RELAYS DELAY-ON-BREAK V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time RECYCLE (ON TIME FIRST, EQUAL DELAYS) * DELAY-ON-MAKE / RECYCLE * (ON TIME FIRST) DELAY-ON-MAKE/INTERVAL SINGLE SHOT www.littelfuse.com/trdu DELAY-ON-MAKE/DELAY-ON-BREAK * DELAY-ON-MAKE / SINGLE SHOT 266 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Multifunction TRDU SERIES Single Functions Dual Functions INTERVAL* INTERVAL / RECYCLE (ON TIME FIRST) TRAILING EDGE SINGLE SHOT (IMPULSE-OFF) * DELAY-ON-BREAK / RECYCLE (ON TIME FIRST) SINGLE SHOT / RECYCLE (ON TIME FIRST) INVERTED SINGLE SHOT US INVERTED DELAY-ON-BREAK RECYCLE (ON TIME FIRST) * Both Times Adjustable RETRIGGERABLE SINGLE SHOT (MOTION DETECTOR) (PSD) ACCUMULATIVE DELAY-ON-MAKE V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact t = Incomplete Time Delay TD = Time Delay R = Reset RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) * Both Times Adjustable V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Con NC = Normally Closed Co TD1, TD2 = Tim R = Reset INTERVAL / DELAY-ON-MAKE * ACCUMULATIVE DELAY-ON-MAKE / INTERVAL LEGEND 5 Switches for Function Selection 3 Switches for Time Delay Range V = Voltage R = Reset S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD,TD1,TD2 = Complete Time Delay t = Partial Time Delay DOM = Delay-on-Make DOB = Delay-on-Break REC = Recycle SS = Single Shot INT = Interval M = Minutes S = Seconds = Undefined time TIME DELAY RELAYS KEY * 9 Functions included in the 8 pin DPDT models NOTE: The time delay range is the same for both functions when dual functions are selected. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 12 267 www.littelfuse.com/trdu Time Delay Relays Multifunction TRU SERIES Knob Adjustable Universal Time Delay Relay Description The TRU Series is a multifunction, knob adjustable, Universal Time Delay Relay. It includes six of the most popular timing functions selected by a slide switch. The time delay is knob adjustable and the time delay range is switch selectable. The repeat accuracy is + 0.1%. Both function and time range can be selected on the top face of the unit. In addition to multifunctioning and multiple time ranges, the TRU Series features universal input voltage; 19 to 264VAC and 19 to 30VDC and full 10A output relay. The TRU Series can directly replace up to 1000 competitive time delay relay models. Operation A six position slide switch selects delay-on-make, interval, single shot, recycling (ON time first, equal recycle delays), delay-on-break, and retriggerable single shot. 8-pin DPDT base wiring is limited to delay-on-make, interval, and recycling functions. All six functions are available in the 8-pin SPDT and 11-pin DPDT versions. 8-PIN 11-PIN Wiring Diagram 8-PIN DPDT Delay-on-Make Interval Recycling L1 N/L2 8-PIN SPDT L1 N/L2 Delay-on-Make Interval Single Shot Recycling (ON Time First, Equal Recycle Delays) Delay-on-Break Retriggerable Single Shot V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch Relay contacts are isolated Features & Benefits 11-PIN DPDT TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 L1 N/L2 Delay-on-Make Interval Single Shot Recycling (ON Time First, Equal Recycle Delays) Delay-on-Break Retriggerable Single Shot For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 21. FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1% or + / - 20ms, whichever is greater 6 time ranges (0.1s to 1,000m) Broad range will satisfy most requirements Knob adjustable time delay Allows user to fine tune time delay based on application needs Universal input voltage Makes it versatile for use in most applications Multifunction Provides the most common standard timing functions LED Indicators Provide visual indication of input voltage and relay status 10A isolated output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE BASE WIRING FUNCTIONS TRU1 19 to 264VAC; 19 to 30VDC 8-pin DPDT 3 TRU2 19 to 264VAC; 19 to 30VDC 8-pin SPDT 6 TRU3 19 to 264VAC; 19 to 30VDC 11-pin DPDT 6 If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/tru 268 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Multifunction TRU SERIES Accessories Specifications BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. Time Delay Type Range Switch Selectable* NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. NDS-11 11-pin Socket 11-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC11 hold-down clips. PSC8 or PSC11 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use PSC8 with NDS-8 Octal Socket or PSC11 with NDS-11 Socket. Sold in pairs. Function Diagram RETRIGGERABLE SINGLE SHOT (MOTION DETECTOR) (PSD) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact t = Incomplete Time Delay TD = Time Delay R = Reset Adjustments Multiplier Time Setting Two LEDs indicate Repeat Accuracy Reset Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage - Universal Input Range AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Rating Life Protection Transient Isolation Voltage Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions 0.1s - 1000m in 6 ranges: 1) 0.1 - 10s 2) 1 - 100s 3) 10 - 1000s 4) 0.1 - 10m 5) 1 - 100m 6) 10 - 1000m 4 position DIP switch selects x0.1, x1, x10, and sec. or min. Onboard knob adjustment with 1 - 100 reference dial 1) Input voltage applied 2) Output relay status 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 300ms 2% 19 to 264VAC and 19 to 30VDC 50/60Hz Electromechanical relay SPDT or DPDT, isolated 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 10 6 38 joules 1500V RMS input to output DC units are reversed polarity protected Plug-in socket H 87.3 mm (3.44"); W 60.7 mm (2.39"); D 45.2 mm (1.78") Octal 8-pin plug-in or magnal 11-pin plug-in -20 to 65C / -30 to 85C 6 oz (170 g) * For CE approved applications, power must be removed when a switch position is changed. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 269 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight Digital integrated circuitry www.littelfuse.com/tru Time Delay Relays Multifunction ASQU / ASTU SERIES Description The ASQU and ASTU Series of 17.5 mm, knob adjustable, universal solid-state timers offer multiple functions, voltages, and time delay ranges. Choose one of 5 functions and 4 time delay ranges via 4 selection switches located on face of the unit. Adjustment through the time range is accomplished by an onboard knob. The ASQU Series has quick connect terminals and the ASTU Series has terminal blocks. Features & Benefits ASQU ASTU Wiring & Adjustment Diagrams DELAY-ON-MAKE & RECYCLING L1 L1 N/L2 N/L2 ADJUSTMENTS DOM A B A SS B A B R DOB A B L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 SINGLE SHOT, INTERVAL & DELAY-ON-BREAK TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 0.1-10s X1s 1-100s X10s C D E F 10-1000s X100s C D E F C D E F X10m Universal AC or DC voltage Choose from 24 to 240VAC or 9 to 110VDC models Compact 17.5mm size Allows for high rail density Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / -1% Multifunction: 5 timing functions Reduce stocking requirements Knob Adjustable Time Delay Field adjustable delay ranging from 0.1s - 100m 0.7A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Mounting fasteners Iincluded Each unit ships with both surface and DIN rail quick mount adapters Watchdog circuitry Self monitoring and self correcting for improved performance P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. S C D 1-100m V = Voltage L = Load J= Wire Required for Interval Operation S1= Initiate Switch UTL = Optional Untimed Load M BENEFITS Accessories DOM = Delay-on-Make SS = Single Shot/Interval R = Recycling DOB = Delay-on-Break R FEATURES E F P0500-178 Surface Mount Adapter P0500-179 DIN Rail Mount Adapter For use with the ASxx/DSxx Series timers. Ordering Information R = Range M = Multiplier S = Setting For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 22. MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE CONNECTION ASQUA3 24 to 240VAC Quick Connects ASQUD3 9 to 110VDC Quick Connects ASTUA3 24 to 240VAC Terminal Blocks ASTUD3 9 to 110VDC Terminal Blocks If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/asqu-astu 270 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Multifunction ASQU / ASTU SERIES Mounting Diagrams Specifications Time Delay Type Adjustment Range* Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage P0500-178 SURFACE MOUNT Inches (Millimeters) Microcontroller based with ceramic resonator and watchdog circuitry Knob with dial; 2 switches select DIN Rail Mount 1 of 4 multipliers 0.1 - 10s, 1 - 100s, 10 - 1000s, 1 - 100m 1% or 50ms, whicheer is greater .38 (9.65 Surface Mount .235 DIA (5.97) 35mm DIN 3 2% or 50ms, whichever is greater 32MM DIN 1 300ms Single Shot & Delay-on-Break: 32ms 3.00 (76.2) P0500-179 DIN RAIL MOUNT Inches (Millimeters) .185 (4.70) Quick Mount Fastner(2) [Drill . 187 (4.75) diameter hole] Surface .23 (5 3.00 (76.2) 32MM DIN 1 .69 (17.52) .815 (20.70) Quick Mo Fastner(2 [Drill . 18 diameter .640 (16.26) Inches (Millimeters) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS AC: 24 to 240VAC; -20% - 10% DC: 9 to 110VDC; -0% - 20% @ -25C Inches (Millimeters) 9.4 to 110VDC; -0% - 20% @ -40C AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60Hz / 10% Output Type Solid state Form NO Rating 0.7A steady state, 10A inrush Voltage Drop AC 2.5V @ 0.7A; DC 1.5V @ 0.7A Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Two base adaptors are available DIN Rail Snap on to 32 mm DIN 1 & 35 mm DIN 3 rail Surface Two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws or quick mount fasteners Dimensions H 76.2 mm (3.0"); W 17.52 mm (0.69"); D 61.2 mm (2.41") Termination ASQU 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals ASTU 0.197 in. (5 mm) push-on terminal blocks for up to #14 AWG (2.5 mm2) wire Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight 4 oz (113 g) .640 (16.26) .38 (9.65 35mm DIN 3 2.41 (61.2) 2%, or 50ms, whichever is greater .815 (20.70) DIN Rail Mount *For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 271 www.littelfuse.com/asqu-astu Time Delay Relays Multifunction DSQU / DSTU SERIES Description The DSQU and DSTU Series of 17.5 mm, DIP switch adjustable, universal solid-state timers offer multiple functions, voltages, and time delay ranges. Choose one of 5 functions and 4 time delay ranges via 4 selection switches located on face of the unit. Six switches adjust the time delay through the selected range. The DSQU Series has quick connect terminals and the DSTU Series has terminal blocks. Features & Benefits DSQU DSTU Wiring & Adjustment Diagrams DELAY-ON-MAKE & RECYCLING L1 L1 N/L2 N/L2 ADJUSTMENTS DOM A B A SS B A B R DOB A B L1 N/L2 SINGLE SHOT, INTERVAL & DELAY-ON-BREAK L1 DOM = Delay-on-Make SS = Single Shot/Interval R = Recycling DOB = Delay-on-Break BENEFITS Universal AC or DC voltage Choose from 24 to 240VAC or 9 to 110VDC models Compact 17.5mm size Allows for high rail density Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / -1% Multifunction: 5 timing functions Reduce stocking requirements DIP switch adjustable time delay Field adjustable delay ranging from 0.1s - 63m 0.7A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Mounting fasteners included Each unit ships with both surface and DIN rail quick mount adapters Watchdog circuitry Self monitoring and self correcting for improved performance Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. N/L2 R 0.1-6.3s 12 V = Voltage L = Load J= Wire Required for Interval Operation S1= Initiate Switch UTL = Optional Untimed Load M S E X0.1s C D F I 0.1s C D E F 1s 10-630s X10s C D E F 10s 1-63m X1m C D E F 1m X1s 1-63s TIME DELAY RELAYS FEATURES R = Range M = Multiplier S = Setting I = Increments of time P0500-178 Surface Mount Adapter P0500-179 DIN Rail Mount Adapter For use with the ASxx/DSxx Series timers. Ordering Information ON 1 2 4 8 16 32 Add switches in ON position TD = 2+8+16=26 MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE CONNECTION DSQUA3 24 - 240VAC Quick Connects DSQUD3 9 - 110VDC Quick Connects DSTUA3 24 - 240VAC Terminal Blocks DSTUD3 9 - 110VDC Terminal Blocks If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 22. www.littelfuse.com/dsqu-dstu 272 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Multifunction DSQU / DSTU SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Adjustment Range* Repeat Accuracy Setting Accuracy Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Mounting Diagrams Microcontroller based with ceramic resonator and watchdog circuitry 6 switches adjust the time delay; DIN Rail Mount 2 switches select 1 of 4 multipliers x0.1s = 0.1 - 6.3s in 0.1s increments x1s = 1 - 63s in 1s increments 35mm DIN 3 x10s = 10 - 630s in 10s increments x1m = 1 - 63m in 1m increments 32MM DIN 1 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 2% or 50ms, whichever is greater 300ms Single Shot & Delay-on-Break: 32ms 2% or 50ms, whichever is greater .815 (20.70) Inches (Millimeters) AC: 24 to 240VAC; -20% - 10% DC: 9 to 110VDC; -0% - 20% @ -25C 9.4 to 110VDC; -0% - 20% @ -40C AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60Hz / 10% Output Type Solid state Form NO Rating 0.7A steady state, 10A inrush Voltage Drop AC 2.5V @ 0.7A; DC 1.5V @ 0.7A Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Two base adaptors are available DIN Rail Snap on to 32 mm DIN 1 & 35 mm DIN 3 rail Surface Two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws or quick mount fasteners Dimensions H 76.2 mm (3.0"); W 17.52 mm (0.69"); D 61.2 mm (2.41") Termination DSQU 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals DSTU 0.197 in. (5 mm) push-on terminal blocks for up to #14 AWG (2.5 mm2) wire Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight 4.2 oz (119 g) P0500-178 SURFACE MOUNT Inches (Millimeters) .38 (9.65 3.00 (76.2) Surface Mount .235 DIA (5.97) P0500-179 DIN RAIL MOUNT Inches (Millimeters) .185 (4.70) .38 (9.65 Surface .23 (5 35mm DIN 3 2.41 (61.2) Quick Mount Fastner(2) [Drill . 187 (4.75) diameter hole] .640 (16.26) DIN Rail Mount 3.00 (76.2) 32MM DIN 1 .69 (17.52) .815 (20.70) Quick Mo Fastner(2 [Drill . 18 diameter .640 (16.26) Inches (Millimeters) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS *For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 273 www.littelfuse.com/dsqu-dstu Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- On Delay T10 SERIES Solid-State On-Delay Timer Description The T10 Series on-delay timer is a solid-state electronic device that provides accurate and reliable timing for control circuits up to 460VAC. The T10 features a user-selectable time delay from 6 seconds to 10 minutes (0.5 to 12 seconds on the T10S400 model) and SPDT output contacts. When power is applied to the T10, it immediately begins its timing cycle. During this time, the indicator LED alternates between red and green and the output contacts remain inactive. When the timing cycle is complete, the indicator LED turns solid green and the output contacts are activated. The output contacts will remain activated until power is removed from the T10. The SPDT contact ratings are 480V @ 240VAC on the 115V and 230V models, and 470VA @ 600VAC on the 460V model. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram g Status LED g 600V control relay on 460V models Specifications Input Characteristics Frequency Functional Characteristics Timing Range T10100, T10200, T10400 T10S400 Repeat Accuracy Fixed Condition Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty T10100, T10200 T10400, T10S400 General Characteristics Maximum Input Power Terminal Torque Wire Size Safety Marks UL Dimensions TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 509, Figure 6. Weight Mounting Method Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION T10120 115VAC 0.1 to 10 minute range, 240 VAC rated output contacts T10200 230VAC 0.1 to 10 minute range, 240 VAC rated output contacts T10400 460VAC 0.1 to 10 minute range, 600 VAC rated output contacts T10S400 460VAC 0.5 to 12 second range, 600 VAC rated output contacts www.littelfuse.com/t10 50*/60Hz 6 seconds to 10 minutes 0.5 seconds to 12 seconds 1% 480VA @ 240VAC 470VA @ 600VAC 5W 7 in.-lbs. 12-18AWG UL508 (File #E68520) H 74.4 mm (2.93"); W 133.9 mm (5.27"); D 74.9 mm (2.95") 0.94 lb. (15.04 oz., 426.38 g) #8 screws *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%. 274 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make ERDM SERIES Description The ERDM Series is a combination of digital electronics and a reliable electromechanical relay. These devices offer a DPDT relay output for relay logic circuits, and isolation of input to output voltages. Cost effective for OEM applications, such as random starting, sequencing ON, switch de-bouncing, anti-short cycling, and other common delay-on-make applications. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage A knob, or terminals 9 & 10 are only included on adjustable units. Relay contacts are isolated. FEATURES BENEFITS Digital integrated circuitry with electromechanical relay Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Isolated 10A, DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-16, P1004-16-XVersa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 25. MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY ERDM123 12VDC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s ERDM422 120VAC Onboard knob 0.1 - 5s ERDM126 12VDC Onboard knob 0.6 - 60s ERDM423 120VAC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s ERDM128 12VDC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10m ERDM425 120VAC Onboard knob 0.3 - 30s ERDM222 24VAC Onboard knob 0.1 - 5s ERDM427 120VAC Onboard knob 0.1 - 5m ERDM4130S 120VAC Fixed 30s ERDM429 120VAC Onboard knob 0.2 - 15m ERDM4210 120VAC Onboard knob 1 - 100m If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 275 www.littelfuse.com/erdm TIME DELAY RELAYS Ordering Information 12 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make ERDM SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Range Adjustment Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 120VAC/DC & 230VAC AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Rating Life Protection Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Digital integrated circuitry 0.1s - 500m in 11 adjustable ranges or 0.1s - 1000m fixed Fixed, onboard or external adjust 0.5% 10% 150ms 2% 12, 24, or 120VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz Isolated relay contacts DPDT 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Full Load - 1 x 10 6 1500V RMS input to output 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 63.5 mm (2.5"); D 43.2 mm (1.7") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Function Diagram -40 to 65C / -40 to 85C 5.7 oz (162 g) TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight Selection Guides www.littelfuse.com/erdm 276 DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make HRDM SERIES Delay-on-Make Timer Description The HRDM Series combines an electromechanical relay output with microcontroller timing circuitry. It offers 12 to 230V operation in five ranges and factory fixed, onboard, or external adjustable time delays with a repeat accuracy of 0.5%. The output contact rating allows for direct operation of heavy loads, such as compressors, pumps, blower motors, heaters, etc. This series is ideal for OEM applications where cost is a factor. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output relay energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 NO = Normally Open L = Load C = Common, Transfer Contact FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Isolated, 30A, SPDT, NO output contacts Allows direct operation of heavy loads: compressors, pumps, blower moters, heaters. Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories NOTE: A knob, or terminals 4 & 5 are only included on adjustable units. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Relay contacts are not isolated. P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY HRDM120 12VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s HRDM3112S 24VDC Fixed 12s HRDM413M 120VAC Fixed 3m HRDM415M 120VAC Fixed 5m P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 277 www.littelfuse.com/hrdm TIME DELAY RELAYS P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. 12 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make HRDM SERIES External Resistance vs. Time Delay Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 www.littelfuse.com/hrdm V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller circuitry Range 0.1s - 100m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy 0.5% or 20 ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) 1%, 5% Reset Time 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage 2% Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC -15% - 20% 24 to 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption AC 4VA; DC 2W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Non-isolated, SPDT Ratings SPDT-NO SPDT-NC General Purpose 125/240VAC 30A 15A Resistive 125/240VAC 30A 15A 28VDC 20A 10A Motor Load 125VAC 1 hp* 1/4 hp** 240VAC 2 hp** 1 hp** Life Mechanical - 1 x 10 6; Electrical - 1 x 105, *3 x 10 4, **6,000 Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance 100 M Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions 3 x 2 x 1.5 in. (76.7 x 51.3 x 38.1mm) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight 3.9 oz (111 g) 278 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make KRDM SERIES Description The KRDM Series is a compact time delay relay measuring only 2 in. (50.8 mm) square. Its solid-state timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KRDM Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, reliability, and long life. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output relay energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage C = Common, Transfer Contact NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed A knob is supplied for adjustable units, or RT terminals 4 & 5 for external adjust. See external adjustment vs time delay chart. Relay contacts are isolated. FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY KRDM1110S 12VDC Fixed 10s KRDM4110M 120VAC Fixed 10m KRDM1130S 12VDC Fixed 30s KRDM4110S 120VAC Fixed 10s KRDM120 12VDC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s KRDM4145S 120VAC Fixed 45s KRDM121 12VDC Onboard knob 1 - 100s KRDM420 120VAC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s KRDM2110M 24VAC/DC Fixed 10m KRDM421 120VAC Onboard knob 1 - 100s KRDM215M 24VAC/DC Fixed 5m KRDM424 120VAC Onboard knob 1 - 100m KRDM220 24VAC/DC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s KRDM430 120VAC External 0.1 - 10s KRDM221 24VAC/DC Onboard knob 1 - 100s KRDM433 120VAC External 0.1 - 10m KRDM223 24VAC/DC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10m KRDM6115M 230VAC Fixed 15m KRDM310.2S 24VDC Fixed 0.2s If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 279 www.littelfuse.com/krdm TIME DELAY RELAYS Ordering Information 12 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make KRDM SERIES Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay Specifications Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance Factory Calibration) Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VAC/DC 110VDC 120 & 230VAC AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating (at 40C) Max. Switching Voltage Life (Operations) Protection Circuitry Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Output Current/Ambient Temperature 0.1s - 100m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms 5% 12, 24 or 110VDC; 24, 120 or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz / 10% AC 2VA; DC 2W Isolated relay contacts SPDT 10A resistive @ 125VAC; 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC 250VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 105 Encapsulated 1500V RMS input to output 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -20 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.6 oz (74 g) Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) www.littelfuse.com/krdm 280 V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make KRPS SERIES Description The KRPS Series is a factory programmed time delay relay available with 1 of 15 functions and measures only 2 inches square. The KRPS offers a wide range of fixed, onboard, or externally adjustable time delays. The output relay contacts offer a full 10A rating with complete isolation. Its microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KRPS Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, accuracy, and long life. Special time ranges and functions are available. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage C = Common, Transfer Contact NC = Normally Closed NO = Normally Open S1 = Initiate Switch UTL = Untimed Load KRPS4160MM 120VAC Fixed 60m Delay-on-Make KRPS913MB 230VAC Fixed 3m Delay-on-Break KRPSA10.1SFT 24 - 240VAC/DC Fixed 0.1s Alternating KRPSA21RE 24 - 240VAC/DC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Recycling, On Time First KRPSA22B 24 - 240VAC/DC Onboard 1 - 100s Delay-on-Break KRPSA24M 24 - 240VAC/DC Onboard 0.1 - 10m Delay-on-Make KRPSD10.1SF 12 to 48VDC Fixed 0.1s Leading Edge Flip-Flop KRPSD21B 12 to 48VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Delay-on-Break KRPSD21M 12 to 48VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Delay-on-Make KRPSD22M 12 to 48VDC Onboard 1 - 100s Delay-on-Make KRPSD22S 12 to 48VDC Onboard 1 - 100s Single Shot KRPSD25S 12 to 48VDC Onboard 1 - 100m Single Shot Allows flexibility for OEM applications Isolated, SPDT, 10A output Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 281 www.littelfuse.com/krps 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS FUNCTION Compact design P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. Ordering Information TIME DELAY Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUST. BENEFITS Microcontroller based Accessories A knob is supplied for adjustable units, or RT terminals 4 & 5 for external adjust. See external adjustment vs. time delay chart. The untimed load is optional. S1 is not used for some functions. MODEL FEATURES Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make KRPS SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 12 to 48VDC 24 to 240VAC/DC AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating (at 40C) Max. Switching Voltage Life (Operations) Protection Circuitry Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Microcontroller circuitry 0.1s - 1000h in 9 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 2% 150ms 40ms; 750 operations per minute Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 2% 12 to 48VDC; 24 to 240VAC/DC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60Hz / 10% AC 2VA; DC 2W Encapsulated 1500V RMS input to output 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mt. with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connects -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.6 oz (74 g) Output Current/Ambient Temperature Isolated relay contacts SPDT 10A resistive @ 125VAC 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC 1/4 hp @ 125VAC 250VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 105 Timer Functions TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of the input voltage, the dime delay begins. The output relay is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the put energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output relay energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened. The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Re-closing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Recycling) Upon application of input voltage, the output relay energizes and the ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output deenergizes and the OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the first delay. www.littelfuse.com/krps 282 DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined V = Voltage Time NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset RECYCLING (ON FIRST) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make KRPS SERIES Operation (Alternating) Input voltage must be applied at all times for proper operation. The operation begins with the output relay de-energized. Closing S1 enables the next alternating operation. When S1 opens (trailing edge triggered), the time delay begins. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until S1 is (re-closed and) re-opened. Then the output relay de-energizes and remains until S1 opens again. Each time S1 opens the time delay occurs and the output transfers. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the time delay. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch, the output (relay or solid state) energizes and the time delay begins. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or re-closing the initiate switch during timing has no effect on the time delay. Note (for most single shot timers): If the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied, the output energizes and the time delay begins. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Retriggerable Single Shot, Motion Detector) Input voltage must be applied prior to and during timing. The output relay is de-energized. When the initiate switch S1 closes momentarily or maintained, the output energizes and the time delay begins. Upon completion of the delay, the output de-energizes. ALTERNATING RELAY (TRAILING EDGE FLIP-FLOP) SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contac TD = Time Delay R = Reset RETRIGGERABLE SINGLE SHOT (MOTION DETECTOR) (PSD) Reset: Re-closing S1 resets the time delay and restarts timing. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Trailing Edge Single Shot, Impulse-OFF) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. When the initiate switch S1 opens, the output relay energizes. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. Re-closing and opening S1 during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will not energize if S1 is open when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and S1 is closed. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contac t = Incomplete Time Delay TD = Time Delay R = Reset TRAILING EDGE SINGLE SHOT (IMPULSE-OFF) 12 V = Voltage R = Reset T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls NC = Normally Closed Contact t = Incomplete Time Delay TD, TD1, TD2 = Time Delay 283 C = Count P = Pulse Duration = Undefined Time www.littelfuse.com/krps TIME DELAY RELAYS LEGEND Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make KSD1 SERIES Delay-on-Make Timer Description The KSD1 Series features two-terminal, series-connection with the load. The KSD1 Series is an ideal choice for delay-onmake timing applications. This series is designed for general purpose commercial and industrial applications where a small, cost effective, reliable solid-state timer is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 5% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the selected time delay. This series is designed for popular AC and DC voltages. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available in 6 ranges. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Wiring Diagram L1 Features & Benefits N/L2 Load may be connected to terminal 3 or 1. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, + / -5% time delay accuracy Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A Steady solid-state output, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS FEATURES P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY KSD11120S 12VDC Fixed 20s KSD1123 12VDC External 0.1 - 10m KSD1230 24VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s KSD1320 24VDC External 0.1 - 10s KSD1412S 120VAC Fixed 2s KSD14130S 120VAC Fixed 30s KSD1420 120VAC External 0.1 - 10s KSD16130S 230VAC Fixed 30s P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/ksd1 284 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make KSD1 SERIES Specifications Accessories C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Recycle Time Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Minimum Holding Current OFF State Leakage Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms 10% 24, 120, or 230VAC; 12 or 24VDC 20% 50/60 Hz Solid state NO, open during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 40mA 7mA @ 230VAC 2.5V @ 1A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 Function Diagram (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls TIME DELAY RELAYS DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 285 www.littelfuse.com/ksd1 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make KSDU SERIES Description The KSDU Series are encapsulated solid-state, delay-on-make timers that combine digital timing circuitry with universal voltage operation. The KSDU Series is factory fixed from 0.1s to 10,230s and does not include the DIP switch. These series are excellent choices for process control systems and OEM equipment. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load Load may be connected to terminal 3 or 1. BENEFITS Universal Voltage 24 to 240VAC/DC in 2 ranges Digital Integrated Circuitry Repeat accuracy + / - 5% 1A Steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity 2 terminal design Provides series connection for easy installation Accessories KSDU is fixed. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS FEATURES P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE KSDU8120 24 to 120VAC/DC Fixed ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY 20s KSDU811200 24 to 120VAC/DC Fixed 1200s P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/ksdu 286 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make KSDU SERIES Function Diagram Specifications Time Delay Type Range* Fixed Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage AC Line Frequency Tolerance Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Minimum Holding Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) Digital integrated circuitry Fixed from 0.1s - 10230s 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 10% 150ms V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 5% 24 to 120VAC/DC; 100 to 240VAC/DC 50/60 Hz 20% Solid state NO, open during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 40mA 2.5V @ 1A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) * For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 287 www.littelfuse.com/ksdu Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make KSPS SERIES Description The KSPS Series is a factory programmed module available in any 1 of 14 standard functions. The KSPS Series offers a single, fixed, externally or onboard adjustable time delay. The 1A steady, 10A inrush rated solid-state output provides 100 million operations typical. Its microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KSPS Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size and solid state reliability. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 (Positive Switching) (Negative Switching) FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. L = Load UTL = Untimed Load V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY FUNCTION KSPS2180SB 24VAC Fixed 80s Delay-on-Break KSPSA21FT 24 - 240VAC, positive switching Onboard 0.1 - 10s Recycling, On Time First KSPSN13MI 12 - 120VDC, negative switching Fixed 3m Interval KSPSN21B 12 - 120VDC, negative switching Onboard 0.1 - 10s Delay-on-Break KSPSP145SM 12 - 120VDC, positive switching Fixed 45s Delay-on-Make KSPSP22B 12 - 120VDC, positive switching Onboard 1 - 100s Delay-on-Break KSPSP35PSD 12 - 120VDC, positive switching External 1 - 100m Retriggerable Single Shot If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/ksps 288 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make KSPS SERIES Accessories Output Type Rating Voltage Drop OFF State Leakage Current Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Specifications Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Microcontroller circuitry 0.1s - 1000h in 9 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 2% 150ms 20ms; 1500 operations per minute Solid-state output 1A steady, 10A inrush for 16ms AC 2.5V @ 1A; DC 1V @ 1A AC 5mA @ 240VAC, DC 1mA Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mt. with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connects -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) 2% 12 to 120VDC; 24 to 240VAC 15% 50/60Hz / 10% AC 2VA; DC 1W Timer Functions (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 289 DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contac TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) RECYCLING (ON FIRST) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset www.littelfuse.com/ksps TIME DELAY RELAYS Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of the input voltage, the dime delay begins. The output relay is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the put energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output relay energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened. The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Re-closing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Recycling) Upon application of input voltage, the output relay energizes and the ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the first delay. Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make KSPS SERIES TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Operation (Alternating) Input voltage must be applied at all times for proper operation. The operation begins with the output relay de-energized. Closing S1 enables the next alternating operation. When S1 opens (trailing edge triggered), the time delay begins. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until S1 is (re-closed and) re-opened. Then the output relay de-energizes and remains until S1 opens again. Each time S1 opens the time delay occurs and the output transfers. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the time delay. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch, the output (relay or solid state) energizes and the time delay begins. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or re-closing the initiate switch during timing has no effect on the time delay. Note (for most single shot timers): If the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied, the output energizes and the time delay begins. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Trailing Edge Single Shot, Impulse-OFF) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. When the initiate switch S1 opens, the output relay energizes. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. Re-closing and opening S1 during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will not energize if S1 is open when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and S1 is closed. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Inverted Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch S1, the output relay de-energizes. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes. Opening or re-closing S1 during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will remain de-energized if S1 is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and S1 is open. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output (relay or solid state) energizes during the time delay. At the end of time delay the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. ALTERNATING RELAY (TRAILING EDGE FLIP-FLOP) SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset TRAILING EDGE SINGLE SHOT (IMPULSE-OFF) INVERTED SINGLE SHOT INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time LEGEND V = Voltage R = Reset T1 = ON Time www.littelfuse.com/ksps T2 = OFF Time S1 =Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact t = Incomplete Time Delay TD, TD1, TD2 = Time Delay 290 C = Count P = Pulse Duration = Undefined Time (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make MSM SERIES Description The MSM Series replaces bi-metal type timing with reliable solid-state circuitry. There are no moving parts to arc or wear. It is a cost effective solution for OEM designers. It is available for printed circuit board mounting or surface mounting with a removable bracket and wire leads. The MSM Series offers immediate reset on removal of power. Operation (Delay-on-Make) The time delay begins upon application of input voltage. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. MSM210P3 MSM10.5W6 Wiring Diagram L1 Features & Benefits N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load R = Red Wire B = Black Wire FEATURES BENEFITS Analog circuitry Repeat Accuracy + / - 5%, Factory calibration + / - 15% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Long life No moving parts to arc or wear PCB or wire harness Offers design and installation flexibility Immediate reset Occurs on removal of power Totally Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration and humidity For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 39. Ordering Information INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY WIRE TYPE WIRE LENGTH inches (mm) MSM10.5W6 MSM10.7W6 MSM11W6 MSM110W6 MSM130W9 MSM190W6 MSM20.15W9 MSM210P3 MSM25W9 MSM30.7W6 MSM42W6 MSM43W6 MSM420W6 MSM450W6 12VDC 12VDC 12VDC 12VDC 12VDC 12VDC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VDC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed 0.5s 0.7s 1s 10s 30s 90s 0.15s 10s 5s 0.7s 2s 3s 20s 50s Standard Lead Standard Lead Standard Lead Standard Lead Standard Lead Standard Lead Standard Lead PC Mount Standard Lead Standard Lead Standard Lead Standard Lead Standard Lead Standard Lead 6.0 (152.4) 6.0 (152.4) 6.0 (152.4) 6.0 (152.4) 9.0 (228.6) 6.0 (152.4) 9.0 (228.6) 0.5 (12.7) 9.0 (228.6) 6.0 (152.4) 6.0 (152.4) 6.0 (152.4) 6.0 (152.4) 6.0 (152.4) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS MODEL If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 291 www.littelfuse.com/msm Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make MSM SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Minimum Holding Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Environmental Operation/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) Analog Circuitry 0.05 - 180s fixed 5% 15% 75ms 15% V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC 10% 50/60 Hz Solid State NO, open during timing 0.5A steady state 25C; 0.25A steady state 60C 40mA 2.5V @ 0.5A Encapsulated 2000V RMS input to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected A.) PC mount 14 AWG (2.087mm2) wires (Can be inserted in AMP Miniature Spring Socket #645980-1) B.) Stranded 18 AWG wire leads (0.933 mm2) with mounting bracket -20 to 60C / -30 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing P: 1.1 oz (31.2 g) W: 1.2 oz (34 g) TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 www.littelfuse.com/msm 292 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make ORM SERIES Description The ORM Series features open PC board construction for reduced cost. It has isolated, 10A, DPDT relay contacts and all connections are 0.25 in (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. The time delay may be ordered as factory fixed, onboard knob, or external adjustment. Time delays from 0.05 - 300 seconds. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 FEATURES BENEFITS Analog circuitry with electromechanical relay Repeat Accuracy + / - 2% Isolated 10A, DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Open PCB contruction Reduces cost for OEM applications Accessories V = Voltage P1004-12, P1004-12-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Relay contacts are isolated. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY ORM120A17 120VAC Fixed 7s ORM120A25 120VAC Onboard knob 3 - 300s ORM230A17 230VAC Fixed 7s ORM24D13.5 24VDC/28VDC Fixed 3.5s ORM24D22 24VDC Onboard knob 0.5 - 30s If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 293 www.littelfuse.com/orm 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 26. Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make ORM SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 24VDC/AC 110 to 230VAC/DC AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating Life Protection Polarity Isolation Voltage Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight Selection Guide Analog circuitry 0.05 - 300s in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed 2% or 20ms, whichever is greater Adjustable: guaranteed range Fixed: 10% After timing - 16ms; During timing - 0.1% of max. time delay or 75ms, whichever is greater 10% 24 or 110VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Function Diagram -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz 2.25W DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) Electromechanical relay DPDT, Isolated 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1x107; Electrical - 1x10 6 V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time DC units are reverse polarity protected 1500V RMS input to output Surface mount with four #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws H 53.8 mm (2.12"); W 93.7 mm (3.69"); D 47.8 mm (1.88") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -20 to 65C / -30 to 85C 2.7 oz (77 g) TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 www.littelfuse.com/orm 294 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make PRLM SERIES Description 8-PIN The PRLM Series is designed for use in non-critical timing applications. It offers low cost, knob adjustable timing control, full 10A relay output, and onboard LED indication. The knob adjustment provides a guaranteed time range of up to 10 minutes in 6 ranges. The onboard LED indicates whether or not the unit is timing (flashing LED) as well as the status of the output. Operation (Delay-on-Make) The time delay is initiated when input voltage is applied. LED flashes during timing. At the end of the delay period, the output contacts energize. LED is on steady after the unit times out. Reset: Reset is accomplished by removal of input voltage. There is no false output when reset during timing. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram 8-pin octal DPDT FEATURES BENEFITS Electronic circuitry with electromechanical relay Repeat Accuracy + / - 2% Knob adjustable time delay Guaranteed time range of up to 10 mins in 6 ranges Isolated 10A, DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages LED indication Provides relay status both during and after timing Industry standard octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors Accessories L1 BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. N/L2 NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix B, page 512, Figure 24 Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY PRLM41180 120VAC Fixed 180s PRLM423 120VAC Adjustable 1 - 60s C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 295 www.littelfuse.com/prlm TIME DELAY RELAYS PSC8 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use with NDS-8 Octal Socket. Sold in pairs. 12 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make PRLM SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance Reset Time Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 110 to 240VAC/DC AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating Life Protection Surge Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Polarity Indication Type Operation TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight www.littelfuse.com/prlm Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) Analog circuitry 0.05 - 600s in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 2% or 20ms, whichever is greater Knob adjust: guaranteed range Fixed: 10% 50ms After timing: 20ms During timing: 0.1% of max. time delay or 75ms, whichever is greater V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 10% 12, 24, or 110VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz 2.25W Electromechanical relay Isolated, DPDT 10A resistive @ 28VDC; 10A resistive @ 240VAC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1x107; Electrical - 1x10 6 IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A 1500V RMS input to output 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected LED During timing - flashing Output energized - on steady Plug-in socket H 91.6 mm (3.62"); W 60.7 mm (2.39"); D 45.2 mm (1.78") Octal 8-pin plug-in -20 to 65C / -30 to 85C 6 oz (170 g) 296 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make TDM / TDMH / TDML SERIES Delay-on-Make Timer * *8-pin models UL listed when used in combination with P1011-6 socket only. Description 8-PIN The TDM/TDMH/TDML Series is a delay-on-make timer that combines accurate digital circuitry with isolated, DPDT relay contacts in an industry standard 8-pin plug-in package. DIP switch adjustment allows precise selection of the time delay over the full time delay range. The TDM/TDMH/TDML Series is the product of choice for custom control panel and OEM designers. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output relay energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram Relay contacts are isolated. L1 N/L2 FEATURES BENEFITS Wide delay range (0.1s to 2.8h) User selectable via DIP switches for fine tuning to individual applications. Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1% DIP switch adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy of +/-2% Setting accuracy +/-2% Provides flexibility for use in most applications LED indication Provides visual indication of time delay status Isolated 10A, DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 23. NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. Ordering Information INPUT VOLTAGE DELAY RANGE TDM120AL 120VAC 1 - 1023s in 1s increments TDM12DL 12VDC 1 - 1023s in 1s increments TDM230AL 230VAC 1 - 1023s in 1s increments TDM24AL 24VAC 1 - 1023s in 1s increments TDM24DL 24VDC/28VDC 1 - 1023s in 1s increments TDMH120AL 120VAC 10 - 10230s in 10s increments TDMH24AL 24VAC 10 - 10230s in 10s increments TDML110DL 110VDC 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments TDML120AL 120VAC 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments TDML12DL 12VDC 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments TDML24DL 24VDC/28VDC 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments PSC8 or PSC11 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use PSC8 with NDS-8 Octal Socket or PSC11 with NDS-11 Socket. Sold in sets of two. P1011-6 Octal Socket for UL listing* 8-pin surface mount socket with binder head screw terminals. Rated 10A @ 600VAC. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 297 www.littelfuse.com/tdm-tdmh-tdml 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS MODEL Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make TDM / TDMH / TDML SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Range* Repeat Accuracy Setting Accuracy Reset Time Recycle Time Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage Indicator Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 110VAC/DC to 230VAC AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating Life Protection Polarity Isolation Voltage Mechanical Mounting Dimensions TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight Binary Switch Operation Digital integrated circuitry 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 10 - 10,230s in 10s increments 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 2% or 50ms, whichever is greater 50ms During Timing - TDMH: 500ms TDM, TDML: 300ms 2% LED glows during timing; relay is de-energized 12, 24, or 110 VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz 2.25W Electromechanical relay DPDT 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1 x107; Electrical - 1 x 10 6 V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time DC units are reverse polarity protected 1500V RMS input to output Plug-in socket H 81.3 mm (3.2"); W 60.7 mm (2.39"); D 45.2 mm (1.78") Octal 8-pin plug-in -20 to 65C / -30 to 85C 6 oz (170 g) *For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. www.littelfuse.com/tdm-tdmh-tdml 298 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make TDU / TDUH / TDUL SERIES Encapsulated Solid-State, Delay-on-Make Timers Description The TDU Series are encapsulated solid-state, delay-on-make timers that combine digital timing circuitry with universal voltage operation. The TDU offers DIP switch adjustment allowing accurate selection of the time delay over the full time delay range. This series is an excellent choice for process control systems and OEM equipment. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Load may be connected to terminal 3 or 1. FEATURES BENEFITS Universal input voltage Meets wide application needs Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy +/- 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time, and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity 3 time ranges available (0.1s to 2.8h) Makes it versatile for use in many applications DIP switch adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. TIME RANGE (SEC) TDUL3000A 24 to 120VAC/DC 0.1-102.3 TDUL3001A 100 to 240VAC/DC 0.1-102.3 TDU3000A 24 to 120VAC/DC 1-1023 TDU3001A 100 to 240VAC/DC 1-1023 TDU3003A 120 to 277VC/DC 1-1023 TDUH3000A 24 to 120VAC/DC 10-10230 TDUH3001A 100 to 240VAC/DC 10-10230 C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 299 www.littelfuse.com/tdu-tduh-tdul TIME DELAY RELAYS Ordering Information 12 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make TDU / TDUH / TDUL SERIES Binary Switch Operation Specifications Time Delay Type Range* Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage AC Line Frequency Tolerance Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Minimum Holding Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Digital integrated circuitry 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1,023s in 1s increments 10 - 10,230s in 10s increments 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 10% 150ms 5% 24 to 120VAC/DC; 100 to 240VAC/DC 50/60 Hz 20% *For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. Solid state NO, open during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 40mA 2.5V @ 1A Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 www.littelfuse.com/tdu-tduh-tdul 300 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make TH1 SERIES Description The TH1 Series is a solid-state relay and timer combined into one compact, easy-to-use control. This highly reliable device eliminates the need for a separate solid-state relay. When mounted to a metal surface, it can switch load currents up to 20A steady state, and 200A inrush. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Optional Low Current Initiate Switch L = Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 2%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and component costs High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of motors, lamps, and heaters directly without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer for high current applications Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. Ordering Information MODEL OUTPUT RATING INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY TH1B633 10A 230VAC Onboard 2 - 180s TH1C415 20A 120VAC Fixed 5s TH1C621 20A 230VAC External 0.1 - 3s P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 301 www.littelfuse.com/th1 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make TH1 SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Recycle Time Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Maximum Load Currents Minimum Load Current Voltage Drop OFF State Leakage Current Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting ** Dimensions TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Selection Guide 0.1 - 600s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed 2% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 10% 150ms 24, 120, or 230VAC 15% 50/60 Hz 2VA Solid state NO, open during timing Output Steady State A 6A B 10A C 20A 100mA 2.5V at rated current 5mA @ 230VAC Inrush** 60A 100A 200A Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 38.4 mm (1.51") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -20 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 3.9 oz (111 g) **Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. www.littelfuse.com/th1 302 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make THD1B410.5S Description The THD1B410.5S combines accurate timing circuitry with high power solid-state switching. It can switch motors, lamps, and heaters directly without a contactor. You can reduce labor, component cost, and increase reliability with these small, easy-to-use, timers. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Optional Low Current Initiate Switch L = Load FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 1% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and component costs High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of motors, lamps, and heaters directly without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer for high current applications Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 303 www.littelfuse.com/thd1b4105s 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make THD1B410.5S Specifications Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Minimum Load Current Voltage Drop OFF State Leakage Current Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting ** Dimensions TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight External Resistance vs. Time Delay 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 1% 150ms 2% 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz 2VA Solid state NO, open during timing Output Steady State A 6A B 10A C 20A 100mA 2.5V @ rated current 5mA @ 230VAC Inrush** 60A 100A 200A This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 38.4 mm (1.51") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 3.9 oz (111 g) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time **Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. www.littelfuse.com/thd1b4105s 304 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make TMV8000 / TSU2000 SERIES Universal Voltage Delay-on-Make Timer Description The TMV and TSU Series are universal voltage delay-on-make timers. Two models cover all the popular voltages and time delays. Available with knob or external adjust time delay. Its simple two terminals can easily be connected in series with a relay coil, contactor coil, solenoid, lamps, small motor, etc., to delay their energization, prevent short cycling or to sequence on various loads. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. TMV8000 TSU2000 Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Load may be connected to terminal 3 or 1. TMV has knob adjustment. TSU has external adjustment terminals 4 & 5. FEATURES BENEFITS Universal AC/DC operating voltage Provides flexibility for use in all systems Totally solid-state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Two terminal series connection with the load Provides quick and easy installation for new or existing systems 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY TMV8000 24 to 240VAC/DC Onboard 0.1 - 8m TSU2000 24 to 240VAC/DC External 5 - 480s P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 305 www.littelfuse.com/tmv8000-tsu2000 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make TMV8000 / TSU2000 SERIES Accessories Specifications C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Time Delay Type Range P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Input Voltage AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Minimum Holding Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Selection Guide Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) 10% 100ms 24 to 240VAC/DC 20% 50/60 Hz Solid State NO, open during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 55C 40mA 2.5V @ 1A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -20 to 70C / -30 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Analog circuitry 5 - 480s (TSU2000) 0.1 - 8m (TMV8000) 2% www.littelfuse.com/tmv8000-tsu2000 306 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make TRM SERIES * *8-pin models UL listed when used in combination with P1011-6 socket only. Description 8-PIN 11-PIN Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits 8-pin octal DPDT L1 The TRM Series is a combination of analog electronic circuitry and electromechanical relay output. It provides input to output isolation with a wide variety of input voltages and time ranges. Standard plug-in base wiring, fast reset, rugged enclosure, and good repeat accuracy make the TRM a select choice in any OEM application. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output relay energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. N/L2 FEATURES BENEFITS Electronic circuitry with electromechanical relay Repeat Accuracy + / - 2% Isolated 10A, SPDT or DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages. Accessories 8-pin octal SPDT BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. V = Voltage L1 RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Relay contacts are isolated. N/L2 NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. 11-pin DPDT NDS-11 11-pin Socket 11-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC11 hold-down clips. PSC8 or PSC11 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use PSC8 with NDS-8 Octal Socket or PSC11 with NDS-11 Socket. Sold in sets of two. N/L2 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 24. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT OUTPUT TIME TOLERANCE TIME DELAY TRM120A2X30 120VAC Knob Octal, DPDT +/- 20% 1 - 30s TRM120A2Y120 120VAC Knob Octal, DPDT +/- 10% 2 - 120s TRM120A2Y180 120VAC Knob Octal, DPDT +/- 10% 2 - 180s TRM24A8Y5 24VAC External Octal, SPDT without potentiometer +/- 10% 0.1 - 5s TRM24D1X10 24VDC/28VDC Fixed Octal, DPDT +/- 20% 10s TRM24D1X2 24VDC/28VDC Fixed Octal, DPDT +/- 20% 2s If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 307 www.littelfuse.com/trm TIME DELAY RELAYS L1 12 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make TRM SERIES Specifications Accessories P1011-6 Octal Socket for UL listing* 8-pin surface mount socket with binder head screw terminals. Rated 10A @ 600VAC. P1004-13, P1004-13-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. Selection Guides External RT P/N Selection Table 12 VALUE PART NUMBER 1M ohm 1.5M ohm 2M ohm 3M ohm 5M ohm 1M ohm 1.5M ohm 2M ohm 3M ohm 5M ohm P1004-16 P1004-15 P1004-14 P1004-12 P1004-13 P1004-16-X P1004-15-X P1004-14-X P1004-12-X P1004-13-X Function Diagram TIME DELAY RELAYS DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) www.littelfuse.com/trm V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Fixed Time Tolerance & Setting Accuracy Reset Time Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 24VDC/AC 110 to 230VAC/DC AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating Life Protection Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight 308 Analog circuitry 50ms - 10m in 15 adjustable ranges or fixed 2% or 20 ms, whichever is greater 5, 10, or 20% 50ms After timing: 20ms During timing: 0.1% of max. time delay or 75ms, whichever is greater 10% 24 or 110VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz 2.25W Electromechanical relay Isolated DPDT or SPDT 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 10 6 1500V RMS between input & output terminals 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Plug-in socket H 91.6 mm (3.62"); W 60.7 mm (2.39"); D 45.2 mm (1.78") Octal 8-pin or 11-pin plug-in -20 to 65C / -30 to 85C 6 oz (170 g) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make TS1 SERIES Delay-on-Make Timer Description The TS1 Series offers proven reliability and performance with years of use in OEM equipment and commercial applications. This encapsulated general use timing module is capable of controlling load currents ranging from 5mA to 1A. May be connected in series with contactors, relays, valves, solenoids, small motors, and lamps. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Load may be connected to terminal 3 or 1. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. FEATURES BENEFITS Analog circuitry Repeat Accuracy + / - 2% Fixed or external adjustable time delay External time delay settings are adjustable from 0.05s - 10m in 8 ranges for added flexibility 5mA to 1A load current range Minimum holding current of 5mA ensures proper operation with the lightest of loads Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Two terminal series load connections Allows connection in series with contactors, relays, valves, solenoids, small motors and lamps. Provides quick and easy installation for new or existing systems For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. Ordering Information INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY TS1211.5 24VAC Fixed 1.5s TS1412 120VAC Fixed 2s TS121150 24VAC Fixed 150s TS14120 120VAC Fixed 20s TS12130 24VAC Fixed 30s TS14130 120VAC Fixed 30s TS1214 24VAC Fixed 4s TS1415 120VAC Fixed 5s TS12190 24VAC Fixed 90s TS1416 120VAC Fixed 6s TS1221 24VAC External 0.05 - 3s TS1421 120VAC External 0.05 - 3s TS1222 24VAC External 0.5 - 60s TS1422 120VAC External 0.5 - 60s TS1224 24VAC External 5 - 600S TS1423 120VAC External 2 - 180s TS13115 24VDC Fixed 15s TS1424 120VAC External 5 - 600s TS1321 24VDC External 0.05 - 3s TS1612 230VAC Fixed 2s TS1410.25 120VAC Fixed 0.25s TS1615 230VAC Fixed 5s TS14110 120VAC Fixed 10s TS1621 230VAC External 0.05 - 3s TS141180 120VAC Fixed 180s TS1622 230VAC External 0.5 - 60s If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 309 www.littelfuse.com/ts1 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS MODEL Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make TS1 SERIES Accessories Specifications P1004-XX, P1004-XX-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. VTP(X)(X) Plug-on Adjustment Module Mounts on modules with in-line adjustment terminals. Rated at 0.25W at 55C. Available in resistance values from 5K to 5M. Selection Table for VTP Plug-on Adjustment Accessory All Other Voltages TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 12VDC Time Delay VTP P/N Time Delay VTP P/N 1 - 0.05-3s VTP4B 1 - 0.05-1s VTP2A 2 - 0.5-60s VTP4F 2 - 0.5-20s VTP2E 3 - 2-180s VTP4J 3 - 2-60s VTP2F 4 - 5-600s VTP5N 4 - 5-120s VTP2H Time Delay Type Range 12VDC Other Voltages Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Recycle Time Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Minimum Holding Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Analog circuitry 0.05 - 120s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed (1 M max. R T ) 0.05 - 600s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed 2% or 20ms, whichever is greater 10% After timing - 16ms During timing - 0.1% of time delay or 75ms, whichever is greater 10% 12, 24 or 120VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz Solid state NO, open during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 5mA 2.5V @ 1A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 80C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) Selection Chart Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) www.littelfuse.com/ts1 V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 310 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make TSD1 SERIES Delay-on-Make Timer Description The TSD1 Series is designed for more demanding commercial and industrial applications where small size and accurate performance is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 1% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.1% of the time delay. The TSD1 Series is rated to operate over an extended temperature range. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 100 hours are available. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Load may be connected to terminal 3 or 1. FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1%, + / -1% time delay accuracy Extended temperature range Rated to 75C operating temperature to withstand high heat applications. Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A Steady solid-state output, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TSD1311.2S 24VDC Fixed TIME DELAY 1.2s TSD1321 24VDC External 1 - 100s TSD1424 120VAC External 1 - 100m P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 311 www.littelfuse.com/tsd1 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make TSD1 SERIES Specifications Accessories C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Recycle Time Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Minimum Holding Current Off State Leakage Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 12 0.1s - 100h in 7 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 1% 150ms 1% 12, 24, 120VDC; 24, 120, 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz Solid state NO, open during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 40mA 7mA @ 230VAC 2.5V @ 1A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 75C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) Function Diagram TIME DELAY RELAYS DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) www.littelfuse.com/tsd1 V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 312 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make, Normally Closed TS441165 Description The TS441165 is an analog delay-on-make timer with a normally closed solid-state output. Unlike an interval timer, the load is energized prior to and during the time delay period. It can be used as a faster starting interval time delay when S1 is closed upon application of input voltage. Operation (Delay-on-Make NC) Upon application of input voltage, the load is energized immediately. When the initiate switch is closed, the time delay begins. At the end of the time delay, the load de-energizes. Reset: When the initiate switch is reopened, the load again energizes and the time delay is reset. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load FEATURES BENEFITS Analog circuitry Repeat Accuracy + / - 2% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Load energized prior to and during time delay Faster operation Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Normally closed output Can be used as a faster starting interval time delay Accessories P1004-XX, P1004-XX-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 313 www.littelfuse.com/ts441165 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. 12 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Make, Normally Closed TS441165 Accessories Specifications P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. VTP(X)(X) Plug-on Adjustment Module Mounts on modules with in-line adjustment terminals. Rated at 0.25W at 55C. Available in resistance values from 5K to 5M. Selection Table for VTP Plug-on Adjustment Accessory Time Delay VTP P/N 1 - 0.05-3s 2 - 0.5-60s 3 - 2-180s 4 - 5-600s VTP4B VTP4F VTP4J VTP5N Selection Guide Time Delay Type Range Adjustment Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Recycle Time Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 10% 10% 150ms 120VAC 20% 50/60 Hz Solid state NC, closed during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 2.5V @ 1A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 75C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (NORMALLY CLOSED) TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Analog circuitry 165s Fixed 2% or 20ms, whichever is greater; under fixed conditions www.littelfuse.com/ts441165 V = Voltage S1 =Initiate Switch L = Load TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 314 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break HRDB SERIES Delay-on-Break Timer Description The HRDB Series combines an electromechanical, relay output with microcontroller timing circuitry. The HRDB offers 12 to 230V operation in five options and factory fixed, external, or onboard adjustable time delays with a repeat accuracy of 0.5%. The isolated output contact rating allows for direct operation of heavy loads, such as compressors, pumps, blower motors, heaters, etc. The HRDB is ideal for OEM applications where cost is a factor. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output relay energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened. The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Timed Load UTL = Untimed Load (optional) NO = Normally Open C = Common, Transfer Contact N/L2 NOTE: A knob, or terminals 4 & 5 are only included on adjustable units. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Relay contacts are isolated. Dashed lines are internal connections. The untimed load is optional. FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Isolated, 30A, SPDT, NO output contacts Allows direct operation of heavy loads: compressors, pumps, blower moters, heaters. Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME TOLERANCE TIME DELAY MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME TOLERANCE TIME DELAY HRDB1110M 12VDC Fixed + / -5% 10m HRDB223 24VAC Onboard + / -5% 0.1 - 10m HRDB117S 12VDC Fixed + / -5% 7s HRDB321 24VDC Onboard + / -5% 1 - 100s HRDB120 12VDC Onboard + / -5% 0.1 - 10s HRDB324 24VDC Onboard + / -5% 1 - 100m HRDB121 12VDC Onboard + / -5% 1 - 100s HRDB423 120VAC Onboard + / -5% 0.1 - 10m HRDB124 12VDC Onboard + / -5% 1 - 100m HRDB623 230VAC Onboard + / -5% 0.1 - 10m HRDB21A65M 24VAC Fixed + / -1% 65m If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 315 www.littelfuse.com/hrdb 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break HRDB SERIES Specifications Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC 24 to 230VAC AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Ratings General Purpose Resistive Motor Load Life Protection Surge Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) www.littelfuse.com/hrdb Microcontroller circuitry 0.1s - 100m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5 % or 20ms, whichever is greater 1%, 5% 150ms 20ms 2% 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz AC 4VA; DC 2W Electromechanical relay Isolated, SPDT SPDT-NO SPDT-NC 125/240VAC 30A 15A 125/240VAC 30A 15A 28VDC 20A 10A 125VAC 1 hp* 1/4 hp** 240VAC 2 hp** 1 hp** Mechanical - 1 x 10 6; Electrical - 1 x 105, *3 x 10 4, **6,000 IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 38.1 mm (1.51") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 3.9 oz (111 g) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 316 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break HRPS / HRIS SERIES Description The HRPS/HRIS Series combines an electromechanical relay output with microcontroller timing circuitry. It is a factory programmed module available in any 1 of 13 standard functions. It offers 12 to 240V operation in two universal ranges and factory fixed, onboard, or external adjustable time delays with a repeat accuracy of 0.5%. The output contact rating allows for direct operation of heavy loads, such as compressors, pumps, blower motors, heaters, etc. This series is ideal for OEM applications where cost is a factor. The HRPS has non-isolated SPDT relay contacts, and the HRIS has isolated SPDT relay contacts. Both offer the most popular timer functions in the industry. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output (relay or solid state) energizes during the time delay. At the end of time delay the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Features & Benefits HRPS Relay contacts are non-isolated. S1 = Initiate Switch UTL = Untimed Load (optional) NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed C = Common FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% , factory calibration +/- 2% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 30A, SPDT, Normally Open output contacts Allows for direct operation of heavy loads Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity A knob, or terminals 4 & 5 are only included on adjustable units. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. L1 N/L2 HRIS Relay contacts are isolated. Ordering Information A knob, or terminals 4 & 5 are only included on adjustable units. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUST. HRISW21FT 24 - 240VAC/24 - 110VDC Onboard 12 FUNCTION 0.1 - 10s Alternating HRISW27I 24 - 240VAC/24 - 110VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10h Interval HRPSD12HI 12 - 48VDC 2h Interval HRISW25B 24 - 240VAC/24 - 110VDC Onboard 1 - 100m Delay on break Fixed If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 317 www.littelfuse.com/hrdb TIME DELAY RELAYS MODEL S1 = Initiate Switch UTL = Untimed Load (optional) NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed C = Common TIME DELAY Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break HRPS / HRIS SERIES Accessories Specifications Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 12 to 48VDC 24 to 110VDC/240VAC AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Ratings General Purpose 125/240VAC Resistive 125/240VAC 28VDC Motor Load 125VAC 240VAC Life P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-13 (AWG 10/12) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Function Diagrams INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 ALTERNATING RELAY (TRAILING EDGE FLIP-FLOP) www.littelfuse.com/hrps-hris Protection Surge Circuitry Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined V = Voltage TimeSwitch S1 = Initiate NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 318 Microcontroller circuitry 0.1s - 1000h in 9 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 2% 150ms 20ms 2% 12 to 48VDC; 24 to 240VAC/24 to 110VDC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60Hz AC 4VA; DC 2W Electromechanical relay SPDT SPDT-NO SPDT-NC 30A 15A 30A 20A 15A 10A 1 hp* 1/4 hp** 2 hp** 1 hp** Mechanical - 1 x 10 6 Electrical - 1 x 105, *3 x 10 4, **6,000 IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Encapsulated 1500V RMS input to output; isolated units 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mt. with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 76.2 mm (3.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 38.1 mm (1.5") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connects -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 3.9 oz (111 g) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break KRDB SERIES Description The KRDB Series is a compact time delay relay measuring only 2 in. (50.8 mm) square. Its microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KRDB Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, reliability, and long life. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output relay energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened. The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch C = Common, Transfer Contact NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed UTL = Untimed Load (optional) A knob is supplied for adjustable units. The untimed load is optional. Relay contacts are isolated. FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated To protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Allows flexibility for OEM applications Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY KRDB110.1S 12VDC Fixed 0.1s KRDB31120S 24VDC Fixed 20s KRDB112.5S 12VDC Fixed 2.5s KRDB415S 120VAC Fixed 5s KRDB1120M 12VDC Fixed 20m KRDB4160S 120VAC Fixed 60s KRDB115M 12VDC Fixed 5m KRDB420 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s KRDB120 12VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s KRDB421 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100s KRDB124 12VDC Onboard 1 - 100m KRDB422 120VAC Onboard 10 - 1000s KRDB21180S 24VAC/DC Fixed 180s KRDB423 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10m KRDB217S 24VAC/DC Fixed 7s KRDB424 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100m If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 319 www.littelfuse.com/krdb TIME DELAY RELAYS P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. 12 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break KRDB SERIES Accessories P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay Specifications Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Recycle Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 110VDC, 120 or 230VAC AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating (at 40C) Max. Switching Voltage Life (Operations) Protection Circuitry Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Output Current/Ambient Temperature Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Microcontroller with watchdog circuitry 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms 40ms 5% 12, 24, 110VDC; 24, 120 or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz / 10% AC 2VA; DC 2W Isolated relay contacts SPDT 10A resistive @ 125VAC; 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC 250VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 105 Encapsulated 1500V RMS input to output 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.6 oz (74 g) Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) www.littelfuse.com/krdb 320 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break KSDB SERIES Description The KSDB Series is designed for general purpose commercial and industrial applications where a small, cost effective, reliable solid-state timer is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 5% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the selected time delay. This series is designed for popular AC and DC voltages. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available in 6 ranges. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened. The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output energizes if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 (Positive Switching) (Negative Switching) V = Voltage UTL = Optional Untimed Load L = Load S1 = Initiate Switch Features & Benefits RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% 1A Steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY SWITCHING MODE MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY SWITCHING MODE 12VDC Fixed 10m Positive KSDB314SP 24VDC Fixed 4s Positive 12VDC Fixed 15s Positive KSDB315SP 24VDC Fixed 5s Positive KSDB1120SP 12VDC Fixed 20s Positive KSDB324N 24VDC External 1 - 100m Negative KSDB113MP 12VDC Fixed 3m Positive KSDB330N 24VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Negative KSDB113SP 12VDC Fixed 3s Positive KSDB4120M 120VAC Fixed 20m n/a KSDB120P 12VDC External 0.1 - 10s Positive KSDB4160S 120VAC Fixed 60s n/a KSDB134P 12VDC Onboard 1 - 100m Positive KSDB4190M 120VAC Fixed 90m n/a KSDB2115S 24VAC Fixed 15s n/a KSDB431 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100s n/a KSDB220 24VAC External 0.1 - 10s n/a KSDB61150S 230VAC Fixed 150s n/a KSDB231 24VAC Onboard 1 - 100s n/a KSDB631 230VAC Onboard 1 - 100s n/a If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 321 www.littelfuse.com/ksdb TIME DELAY RELAYS KSDB1110MP KSDB1115SP 12 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break KSDB SERIES Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay 12 Specifications Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance Power Consumption AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Output Type Form Maximum Load Current OFF State Leakage Current Voltage Drop DC Operation Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5 % or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms 20ms 10% 12, 24, or 120VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% AC 2VA; DC 2W 50/60 Hz / 10 % Solid state NO, closed before & during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C AC 5mA @ 230VAC; DC 1mA AC 2.5V @ 1A; DC 1V @ 1A Positive or negative switching Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 60C / -40 to 80C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) TIME DELAY RELAYS Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. www.littelfuse.com/ksdb 322 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break ORB SERIES Description The ORB Series' open PCB construction offers the user good economy without sacrificing performance and reliability. The output relay is available in isolated, 10A, DPDT or SPDT forms. The time delay may be ordered as factory fixed, onboard knob, or external adjustment. All connections are 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output relay energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened (trailing edge triggered). The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 SPDT Features & Benefits L1 N/L2 DPDT V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch Relay contacts are isolated. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. FEATURES BENEFITS Open PCB construction Reduces cost for OEM applications Analog circuitry Repeat accuracy + / - 2%, Factory calibration + / - 10% Isolated, 10A, SPDT or DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Line voltage initiation Separate control voltage is not required for operation Accessories P1004-12, P1004-12-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. Ordering Information P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY OUTPUT FORM ORB120A160 120VAC Fixed 60s SPDT ORB120A25 120VAC Onboard 3 - 300s SPDT ORB24A11D 24VAC Fixed 1s DPDT ORB24A21D 24VAC Onboard 0.05 - 3s DPDT ORB24A25 24VAC Onboard 3 - 300s SPDT P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 323 www.littelfuse.com/orb 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 26. Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break ORB SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 24VAC 120 & 230VAC AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating Life Protection Isolation Voltage Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight Selection Guides Analog circuitry 0.05 - 300s in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed 2% or 20ms, whichever is greater Adjustable: guaranteed range Fixed: 10% 50ms 70ms 10% 24, 120, or 230VAC Function Diagram -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz 2.25W DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) Electromechanical relay Isolated, SPDT or DPDT 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1x107; Electrical - 1x10 6 1500V RMS input to output Surface mount with four #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws H 53.8 mm (2.12"); W 93.7 mm (3.69"); D 47.8 mm (1.88") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time -20 to 65C / -30to 85C 2.7 oz (77 g) TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 www.littelfuse.com/orb 324 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break TDB / TDBH / TDBL SERIES Relay Output, Delay-on-Break * *8-pin models UL listed when used in combination with P1011-6 socket only. Description 8-PIN Wiring Diagram 11-PIN 8-PIN OCTAL SPDT L1 N/L2 The TDB Series combines accurate digital circuitry with isolated, 10A, DPDT or SPDT contacts in an 8-pin or 11-pin plug-in package. The TDB Series features DIP switch selectable time delays ranging from 0.1-10,230 seconds in three ranges. The TDB Series is the product of choice for custom control panel and OEM designers. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied to the input before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output relay is energized. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened (trailing edge triggered). The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits S1 = Initiate Switch Relay contacts are isolated 11-PIN DPDT L1 FEATURES BENEFITS 3 time ranges available (0.1s to 2.8h) Makes it versatile for use in many applications Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater; Setting Accuracy + / - 2% or 50ms, whichever is greater LED indication (select models) Provides visual indication of relay status DIP switch adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy Isolated output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages N/L2 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 23. 12 Ordering Information INPUT VOLTAGE DELAY RANGE (SEC) LED TYPE PLUG/OUTPUT FORM TDB120AL 120VAC 1-1023 in 1s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDB120ALD 120VAC 1-1023 in 1s increments X 11-pin plug, DPDT TDB12D 12VDC 1-1023 in 1s increments TDB230AL 230VAC 1-1023 in 1s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDB24AL 24VAC 1-1023 in 1s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDB24DL 24VDC/ 28VDC 1-1023 in 1s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDBH120AL 120VAC 10-10230 in 10s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDBH120ALD 120VAC 10-10230 in 10s increments X 11-pin plug, DPDT TDBL120AL 120VAC 0.1-102.3 in 0.1s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDBL120ALD 120VAC 0.1-102.3 in 0.1s increments X 11-pin plug, DPDT TDBL24DL 24VDC/ 28VDC 0.1-102.3 in 0.1s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TIME DELAY RELAYS MODEL Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 325 www.littelfuse.com/tdb-tdbh-tdbl Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break TDB / TDBH / TDBL SERIES Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. NDS-11 11-pin Socket 11-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC11 hold-down clips. PSC8 or PSC11 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use PSC8 with NDS-8 Octal Socket or PSC11 with NDS-11 Socket. Sold in pairs. PSCRB8 Hold-down Brackets Designed for use with P1011-6 socket. Securely mounts 8-pin plug-in controls in any position, and provides protection against vibration. Sold in pairs. P1011-6 Octal Socket for UL listing 8-pin surface mount socket with binder head screw terminals. Rated 10A @ 600VAC. Combination is UL Listed when used with TDB Series timers. Use PSCRB8 Hold-down brackets. Digi-Set Binary Switch Operation TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Specifications Time Delay Type Range** Repeat Accuracy Setting Accuracy Reset Time Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Indicator Initiate Time Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 110 to 230VAC/DC AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating Life Protection Isolation Voltage Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight Digital integrated circuitry 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 10 - 10,230s in 10s increments 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 2% or 50ms, whichever is greater 50ms 150ms 5% LED indicates relay is energized 60ms 12, 24/28, or 110VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz 3.25W Electromechanical relay SPDT or DPDT 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 10 6 1500V RMS input to output DC units reverse polarity protected Plug-in socket H 81.3 mm (3.2"); W 60.7 mm (2.4"); D 45.2 mm (1.8") Octal 8-pin plug-in or 11-pin plug-in -20 to 65C / -30 to 85C 6 oz (170 g) Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) ** For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. www.littelfuse.com/tdb-tdbh-tdbl 326 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break TDUB SERIES Delay-on-Break Timer Description The TDUB Series combines digital timing circuitry with universal voltage operation. Voltages of 24 to 240VAC and 12 to 24VDC are available in three ranges. The TDUB Series offers DIP switch selectable time delays ranging from 0.1 seconds to 102.3 minutes in three ranges. Its 1A rated output, ability to operate on multiple voltages, and wide range of switch selectable time delays make the TDUB Series an excellent choice for process control systems and OEM equipment. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened (trailing edge triggered). The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Features & Benefits V = Voltage UTL = Optional Untimed Load S1 = Initiate Switch L = Timed Load FEATURES BENEFITS DIP switch timing adjustment Provides setting accuracy of +/-2% User selectable time delay Timing settings are switch selectable 0.1s - 102.3m in three ranges for added flexibility 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity. Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE TIME RANGE TDUB3000A 24 to 120VAC 1-1023s TDUB3002A 12 to 24VDC 1-1023s TDUBH3002A 12 to 24VDC 0.1-102.3m TDUBH3001A 100 to 240VAC 0.1-102.3m TDUBL3002A 12 to 24VDC 0.1-102.3s C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 327 www.littelfuse.com/tdub TIME DELAY RELAYS P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. 12 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break TDUB SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range* Repeat Accuracy Setting Accuracy Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage Input Voltage/Tolerance AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating Voltage Drop Off State Leakage Current Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Adjustment Switch Operation 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 2% or 20ms, whichever is greater 150ms 20ms 5% 24 to 240VAC, 12 to 24VDC /20% 50/60 Hz / 10% AC 2VA; DC 1W Solid state NO, closed before and during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C AC 2.5V @ 1A; DC 1V @ 1A AC 5mA @ 230VAC; DC 1mA Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Add the value of switches in the ON position for the total time delay. Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 60C /-40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time *For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Adjustment Switch Operation www.littelfuse.com/tdub 328 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break THDB SERIES Description The THDB Series combines accurate timing circuitry with high power, solid-state switching. It can switch motors, lamps, and heaters directly without a contactor. You can reduce labor, component cost, and increase reliability with these small, easy-to-use, timers. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened. The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output energizes if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Wiring Diagram L1 Features & Benefits N/L2 V = Voltage UTL = Optional Untimed Load L = Timed Load S1 = Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 1% High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of motors, lamps and heaters without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and components costs Accessories For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. Ordering Information INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY OUTPUT RATING THDB421A 120VAC External 1 - 100s 6A THDB434C 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100m 20A P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 329 www.littelfuse.com/thdb 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS MODEL Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break THDB SERIES External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) 12 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Specifications Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Voltage Drop Off State Leakage Current Minimum Load Current Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting ** Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 1% 150ms 20ms 2% 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz 2VA Solid state NO, closed before & during timing Output Steady State A 6A B 10A C 20A 2.5V @ rated current 5mA @ 230VAC 100mA Inrush** 60A 100A 200A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 38.4 mm (1.51") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 3.9 oz (111 g) TIME DELAY RELAYS **Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum surface temperature is 90C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. www.littelfuse.com/thdb 330 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break TRB SERIES * *8-pin models UL listed when used in combination with P1011-6 socket only. Description The TRB Series combines an isolated, 10A electromechanical relay output with analog timing circuitry. False trigger of the TRB by a transient is unlikely because of the complete isolation of the circuit from the line prior to initiation. The initiate contact is common to one side of the line and may be utilized to operate other loads. Installation is easy due to the TRB's industry standard 8- or 11-pin plug-in base wiring. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output relay energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened (trailing edge triggered). The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. 8-PIN 11-PIN Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits 8-pin octal SPDT L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch 11-pin SPDT L1 Relay contacts are isolated. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. FEATURES BENEFITS Complete isolation of circuit from line No false trip due to transients Industry standard 8 or 11-pin connection Provides easy installation and field replacement Isolated, 10A, SPDT or DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Analog circuitry Repeat accuracy + /- 2% Accessories N/L2 P1004-XX, P1004-XX-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. 11-pin DPDT N/L2 BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 24. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT OUTPUT FORM TIME TOLERANCE TIME DELAY TRB120A2Y30 120VAC Onboard Octal, SPDT (AC only) + /- 10% 1 - 30s TRB120A3X600 120VAC Lock shaft Octal, SPDT (AC only) + /- 20% 7 - 600s TRB120A4Y120 120VAC Onboard 11-pin, DPDT + /- 10% 2 - 120s TRB24D10Y10 24VDC/28VDC Fixed 11-pin, DPDT + /- 10% 10s If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 331 www.littelfuse.com/trb 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS L1 P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break TRB SERIES Accessories Specifications NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. NDS-11 11-pin Socket 11-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC11 hold-down clips. P1011-6 Octal Socket for UL listing* 8-pin surface mount socket with binder head screw terminals. Rated 10A @ 600VAC. Tolerance 24VDC/AC 10 to 230VAC/DC AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating Selection Guides External RT P/N Selection Table VALUE PART NUMBER 1M ohm 1.5M ohm 2M ohm 3M ohm 5M ohm 1M ohm 1.5M ohm 2M ohm 3M ohm 5M ohm P1004-16 P1004-15 P1004-14 P1004-12 P1004-13 P1004-16-X P1004-15-X P1004-14-X P1004-12-X P1004-13-X Life Protection Insulation Resistance Isolation Voltage Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Fixed Time Tolerance & Setting Accuracy Initiate Time Reset Time Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Analog circuitry 50ms - 10m in 15 adjustable ranges or fixed 2% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5, 10, or 20% 70ms 75ms 250ms 10% 24/28 or 110VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC (DC voltages on DPDT output models only) -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz 3.25W Electromechanical relay Isolated SPDT or DPDT 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 10 6 100 M 1500V RMS between input to output DC units are reverse polarity protected Plug-in socket H 91.6 mm (3.62"); W 60.7 mm (2.39"); D 45.2 mm (1.78") Octal 8-pin plug-in or 11-pin plug-in -20 to 65C / -30 to 85C 6 oz (170 g) Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) www.littelfuse.com/trb V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 332 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break TSB SERIES Description The TSB Series is a totally solid-state, delay-on-break timing module. The TSB Series is available with a fixed, external, or onboard adjustable time delay. Time Delays from 0.05 to 600 seconds, in 4 standard ranges, cover over 90% of all OEM and commercial appliance timing applications. The repeat accuracy is 2%. Operating voltages of 24, 120, or 230VAC are available. The TSB's 1A steady state, 10A rated, solid-state output is perfect for direct control of solenoids, contactors, relays, lamps, buzzers, and small heaters. The TSB Series can be surface mounted with a single screw, or snapped on a 35 mm DIN rail using the P1023-20 adaptor. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch opens. The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the output and the time delay. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Features & Benefits V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch UTL = Optional Untimed Load L = Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. FEATURES BENEFITS Analog circuitry Repeat accuracy + / - 2%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Wide time delay range Meets almost all OEM and commercial appliance timing applications 1A steady, 10A inrush solid state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Accessories For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY TSB2190 24VAC Fixed 90s TSB434 120VAC Onboard 5 - 600s TSB222 24VAC External 0.5 - 60s TSB632 230VAC Onboard 0.5 - 60s TSB41300 120VAC Fixed 300s TSB634 230VAC Onboard 5 - 600s TSB422 120VAC External 0.5 - 60s If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 333 www.littelfuse.com/tsb 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break TSB SERIES Accessories Specifications P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Selection Guide Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance Factory Calibration) Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Reset Time Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Off State Leakage Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 0.05s - 600s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed 2% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 10% 150ms 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz 2VA Solid state NO, closed before & during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 5mA @ 230VAC 2.5V @ 1A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 75C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) www.littelfuse.com/tsb V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 334 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break TSDB SERIES Description Wiring Diagram (Positive Switching) L1 N/L2 V = Voltage UTL = Optional Untimed Load L = Timed Load S1 = Initiate Switch The TSDB Series is designed for more demanding commercial and industrial applications where small size, and accurate performance are required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 1% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the time delay. The TSDB Series is rated to operate over an extended temperature range. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened. The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 1% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A Steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Wide temperature range: -40 to 75C Reliable in demanding commercial and industrial applications Accessories Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY SWITCHING MODE TSDB320P 24VDC External 0.1 - 10s Positive TSDB421 120VAC External 1 - 100s n/a TSDB431 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100s n/a P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 335 www.littelfuse.com/tsdb 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS P1004-13, P1004-13-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Delay-on-Break TSDB SERIES Accessories Specifications P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance Power Consumption AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Off State Leakage Current Voltage Drop DC Operation Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5 % or 20ms, whichever is greater 1% 150ms 20ms 2% 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC 15% AC 2VA; DC 1W 50/60 Hz / 10 % Solid state NO, closed before & during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 5mA @ 230VAC; DC 1mA AC 2.5V @ 1A; DC 1V @ 1A Positive or negative switching Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 75F / -40 to 85F 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) www.littelfuse.com/tsdb V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 336 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot HRDS SERIES Single Shot Timer Description The HRDS Series combines an electromechanical relay output with microcontroller timing circuitry. It offers 12 to 230V operation in five options and factory fixed, onboard or external adjustable time delays with a repeat accuracy of 0.5%. The output contact rating allows for direct operation of heavy loads, such as compressors, pumps, blower motors, heaters, etc. This series is ideal for OEM applications where cost is a factor. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch, the output relay energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Wiring Diagram L1 Features & Benefits N/L2 NO = Normally Open S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load C = Common, Transfer Contact NOTE: A knob, or terminals 4 & 5 are only included on adjustable units. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Relay contacts are not isolated. FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Isolated, 30A, SPDT, NO output contacts Allows direct operation of heavy loads: compressors, pumps, blower moters, heaters. Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY HRDS120 12VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s HRDS313M 24VDC Fixed 3m HRDS321 24VDC Onboard 1 - 100s HRDS421 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100s HRDS430 120VAC External 0.1 - 10s P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 337 www.littelfuse.com/hrds 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot HRDS SERIES Accessories Specifications C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 www.littelfuse.com/hrds V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset Time Delay Type Microcontroller circuitry Range 0.1s - 100m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy 0.5% or 20 ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) 1%, 5% Reset Time 150ms Initiate Time 20ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage 2% Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC -15% - 20% 24 to 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption AC 4VA; DC 2W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form SPDT, non-isolated Ratings SPDT-NO SPDT-NC General Purpose 125/240VAC 30A 15A Resistive 125/240VAC 30A 15A 28VDC 20A 10A Motor Load 125VAC 1 hp* 1/4 hp** 240VAC 2 hp** 1 hp** Life Mechanical - 1 x 10 6; Electrical - 1 x 105, *3 x 10 4, **6,000 Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance 100 M Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 76.7 mm (3"); W 51.3 mm (2"); D 38.1 mm (1.5") Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40 to 60C/-40 to 85C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight 3.9 oz (111 g) 338 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot HSPZA22SL Description The HSPZA22SL is a factory programmed module available in any 1 of 13 standard functions. The HSPZA22SL offers dual switch adjustable timer or counter functions. Switch adjustment allows accurate selection of the time delay or number of counts the first time and every time. The 1A steady, 10A inrush rated solid-state output provides 100 million operations, typical. Its microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The HSPZA22SL is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, solid state reliability, and accurate switch adjustment. Operation (Single Shot Lockout) Upon application of input voltage and momentary or maintained closure of S1, the output relay energizes and TD1 single shot time delay begins. The output relay de-energizes at the end of TD1 and the TD2 lockout time delay begins. During TD2 (and TD1) closing switch S1 has no effect on the operation. After TD2 is complete, closing S1 starts another operation. If S1 is closed when input voltage is applied, the output energizes and the TD1 time delay begins. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delays and the output and returns the cycle to the first delay. Wiring Diagram (Positive Switching) (Negative Switching) L1 Features & Benefits N/L2 S1 = Initiate Switch UTL = Optional Untimed Load L = Load V = Voltage FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1% User selectable time delay Timing settings are switch selectable 0.1s - 1023h in a dual switch timer function for added flexibility 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid-state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 18. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 339 www.littelfuse.com/hspza22sl 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot HSPZA22SL Switch Adjustment Specifications Function Diagrams SINGLE SHOT / LOCKOUT V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1,TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Setting Accuracy Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Count Range Count Rate Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency/ DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Rating Voltage Drop OFF State Leakage Current Counter Output Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 2% 1 - 1023 in 2 ranges 25 counts per second 24 to 240VAC 15% 50/60Hz / 10% AC 2VA; DC 1W Solid-state output 1A steady, 10A inrush for 16ms AC 2.5V @ 1A; DC 1V @ 1A AC 5mA @ 240VAC; DC 1mA Output pulse width: 300ms 20% Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 76.2 mm (3.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 38.1 mm (1.5") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connects -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 3.9 oz (111 g) TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Microcontroller circuitry 1-1023s, m or h in 1s, m or h increments 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 150ms 20ms www.littelfuse.com/hspza22sl 340 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot KRDS SERIES Single Shot Description The KRDS Series is a compact time delay relay measuring only 2 in. (50.8 mm) square. Its microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KRDS Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, reliability, and long life. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch, the output relay energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Wiring Diagram L1 Features & Benefits N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch C = Common, Transfer Contact NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed UTL = Untimed Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. A knob is supplied for adjustable units. The untimed load is optional. Relay contacts are isolated. FEATURES BENEFITS Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Allows flexibility for OEM applications Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / -0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated To protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY KRDS1135M 12VDC Fixed 35m KRDS120 12VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s KRDS221 24VAC/DC Onboard 1 - 100s KRDS420 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s KRDS421 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100s KRDS424 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100m KRDS430 120VAC External 0.1 - 10s P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. If desired part number is not listed, please call us to see if it is technically possible to build. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 341 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot KRDS SERIES Accessories C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Output Current/Ambient Temperature TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Specifications Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 110VDC, 120VAC or 230VAC AC Line Frequency /DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating (at 40C) Life (Operations) Protection Circuitry Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Microcontroller with watchdog circuitry 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms 40ms 5% 12, 24 or 110VDC; 24, 120 or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20%- 10% 50/60 Hz / 10% AC 2VA; DC 2W Isolated relay contacts SPDT 10A resistive @ 125VAC; 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 105 Encapsulated 1500V RMS input to output 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 60C/-40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.6 oz (74 g) Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) www.littelfuse.com/krds 342 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot KSDS SERIES Description Wiring Diagram (Positive Switching) (Negative Switching) L1 N/L2 V = Voltage UTL = Optional Untimed Load L = Timed Load S1 = Initiate Switch The KSDS Series is ideal for applications that require momentary start interval timing including dispensing, exposure timing, or pulse shaping. This series is available for both AC and DC voltages. This series is designed for general purpose commercial and industrial applications where a small, cost effective, reliable solid-state timer is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 5% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the selected time delay. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available in 6 ranges. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch (leading edge triggered), the output energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will not energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration +/- 5% 1A Steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 12 Accessories INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY SWITCHING MODE KSDS1115SP 12VDC Fixed 15s Positive KSDS230 24VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s n/a KSDS320P 24VAC External 0.1 - 10s Positive KSDS415M 120VAC Fixed 5m n/a KSDS420 120VAC External 0.1 - 10s n/a P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 343 www.littelfuse.com/ksds TIME DELAY RELAYS Ordering Information MODEL FEATURES Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot KSDS SERIES Specifications Accessories P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Form Maximum Load Current OFF State Leakage Current Voltage Drop DC Operation Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5 % or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms 20ms 10% 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz / 10 % AC 2VA; DC 1W Solid state NO, closed during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C AC 5mA @ 230VAC; DC 1mA AC 2.5V @ 1A; DC 1V @ 1A Positive or negative switching Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) www.littelfuse.com/ksds V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset 344 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot ORS SERIES Description The ORS Series' open PCB construction offers the user good economy without sacrificing performance and reliability. The output relay is available in isolated, 10A, DPDT or SPDT forms. The time delay may be ordered as factory fixed, onboard knob, or external adjustment. All connections are 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch (leading edge triggered), the output relay energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch Relay contacts are isolated. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. SPDT FEATURES BENEFITS Open PCB construction Reduces cost without sacrificing performance and reliability Analog circuitry Repeat accuracy + / - 2%, Factory calibration + / - 10% Isolated, 10A, SPDT or DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Line voltage initiation Separate control voltage is not required for operation Accessories P1004-12, P1004-12-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. DPDT P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY OUTPUT FORM ORS120A150SD 120VAC Fixed 50s DPDT ORS230A150SD 230VAC Fixed 50s DPDT P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 345 www.littelfuse.com/ors 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 26. Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot ORS SERIES Selection Guide Specifications Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 24VAC 120 & 230VAC AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating Life Protection Isolation Voltage Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight Analog circuitry 0.05 - 300s in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed 2% or 20ms, whichever is greater Adjustable: guaranteed range Fixed: 10% 50ms 70ms 10% 24, 120, or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz 2.25W Electromechanical relay Isolated, SPDT or DPDT 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1x107; Electrical - 1x10 6 1500V RMS input to output Surface mount with four #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws H 53.8 mm (2.12"); W 93.7 mm (3.69"); D 47.8 mm (1.88") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -20 to 65C / -30 to 85C 2.7 oz (77 g) TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 www.littelfuse.com/ors 346 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot PRS65 Single Shot Timer Description The PRS65 is a single shot time delay relay for use on noncritical timing applications. The knob adjustable time delay carries a guaranteed time range of up to 8 minutes. Operation Power must be applied to the input at all times prior to and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch (momentary or maintained) the output contacts transfer and the time delay is initiated. At the end of the delay interval, the output contacts revert to their original position. If the initiate switch is reclosed during timing, the time delay will not be affected. 8-PIN Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram INITIATE g Electronic Circuit with Electromechanical Relay g Popular Operating Voltages g Octal Plug-in g Hold Down Clamps Available Accessories 3 4 5 2 1 8 BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. 6 7 INPUT VOLTAGE NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 holddown clips. OCTAL, SPDT For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 515, Figure 48. Specifications Time Delay vs. Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Rating Protection Transient Dielectric Breakdown Analog circuitry 7 to 480 seconds 2% under fixed conditions Knob adjustable: guaranteed range 80ms max. Mechanical Mounting Termination Dimensions 16ms max. 0.1% of max. time delay or 75ms, whichever is greater Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 15% max. 230VAC, nominal 15% of nominal 50/60 Hz 1500 volts for 150 microseconds 1500 V rms min. at 60 Hz between input and output terminals Plug in (hold-down clips for panel mounting also available) Standard Octal Plug-in H 92.2 mm (3.63"); W 60.45 mm (2.38"); D 44.45 mm (1.75") -20 to 65C / -30 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing Approx. 6 oz (170 g) Relay Single Pole, Double Throw 10 amperes resistive at 240VAC (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 347 www.littelfuse.com/prs65 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance Reset Time Recycle Time After Timing During Timing Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot TDS / TDSH / TDSL SERIES Relay Output, Single Shot Time Delay Relay * *8-pin models UL listed when used in combination with P1011-6 socket only. Description 8-PIN 11-PIN Wiring Diagram The TDS Series combines accurate digital circuitry with isolated, 10A rated, DPDT or SPDT relay contacts in an 8-pin or 11-pin plug-in package. The TDS Series features DIP switch selectable time delays ranging from 0.1s to 10,230s in three ranges. The TDS Series is the product of choice for custom control panel and OEM designers. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied to the input before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch (leading edge triggered), the output relay energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits 8-PIN OCTAL SPDT L1 N/L2 S1 = Initiate Switch Relay contacts are isolated. 11-PIN DPDT L1 TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 FEATURES BENEFITS 3 time ranges available (0.1s to 2.8h) Makes it versatile for use in many applications Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater; Setting Accuracy + / - 2% or 50ms, whichever is greater LED indication (select models) Provides visual indication of relay status DIP switch adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy Isolated output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages N/L2 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 23. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE DELAY RANGE (SEC) LED PLUG TYPE/OUTPUT FORM TDS120AL 120VAC 1-1023 in 1s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDS120ALD 120VAC 1-1023 in 1s increments X 11-pin plug, DPDT TDS12D 12VDC 1-1023 in 1s increments TDS230AL 230VAC 1-1023 in 1s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDS24AL 24VAC 1-1023 in 1s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDSH120AL 120VAC 10-10230 in 10s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDSL120AL 120VAC 0.1-102.3 in 0.1s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDSL12D 12VDC 0.1-102.3 in 0.1s increments Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/tds-tdsh-tdsl 348 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot TDS / TDSH / TDSL SERIES Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. NDS-11 11-pin Socket 11-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC11 hold-down clips. PSC8 or PSC11 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use PSC8 with NDS-8 Octal Socket or PSC11 with NDS-11 Socket. Sold in pairs. PSCRB8 Hold-down Brackets Designed for use with P1011-6 socket. Securely mounts 8-pin plug-in controls in any position, and provides protection against vibration. Sold in pairs. P1011-6 Octal Socket for UL listing* 8-pin surface mount socket with binder head screw terminals. Rated 10A @ 600VAC. Uses PSCBR8 Hold-down Brackets. *8-pin models UL listed when used in combination with P1011-6 socket only. Digi-Set Binary Switch Operation Specifications Time Delay Type Range** Repeat Accuracy Setting Accuracy Reset Time Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Indicator Initiate Time Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 110 to 230VAC/DC AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating Life Protection Isolation Voltage Polarity Mechanical Mounting Termination Dimensions Digital integrated circuitry 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 10 - 10,230s in 10s increments 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 2% or 50ms, whichever is greater 50ms 150ms 5% LED glows during timing; relay is energized 60ms 12, 24/28, or 110VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz 3.25W Electromechanical relay SPDT or DPDT 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 10 6 1500V RMS input to output DC units are reverse polarity protected Plug-in socket Octal 8-pin plug-in or 11-pin plug-in H 81.3 mm (3.2"); W 60.7 mm (2.39"); D 45.2 mm (1.78") Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight -20 to 65C/-30 to 85C 6 oz (170 g) SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) **For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 349 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset www.littelfuse.com/tds-tdsh-tds TIME DELAY RELAYS Function Diagram 12 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot TDUS SERIES Single Shot Timer Description The TDUS Series combines digital timing circuitry with universal voltage operation. Voltages of 24 to 240VAC and 12 to 24VDC are available in three ranges. The TDUS Series offers DIP switch selectable time delays ranging from 0.1 seconds to 102.3 minutes in three ranges. Its 1A rated output, ability to operate on multiple voltages, and wide range of switch selectable time delays make the TDUS Series an excellent choice for process control systems and OEM equipment. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch (leading edge triggered), the output energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage UTL = Optional Untimed Load S1 = Initiate Switch L = Timed Load Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE TIME RANGE TDUS3000A 24 to 120VAC 1 - 1023s TDUS3001A 100 to 240VAC 1 - 1023s TDUS3002A 12 to 24VDC 1 - 1023s TDUSH3001A 100 to 240VAC 0.1 - 102.3m TDUSL3000A 24 to 120VAC 0.1 - 102.3s P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/tdus 350 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot TDUS SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range* Repeat Accuracy Setting Accuracy Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage Input Voltage/Tolerance AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating Voltage Drop Off State Leakage Current Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Adjustment Switch Operation 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments 0.5% or 20 ms, whichever is greater 2% or 20 ms, whichever is greater 150ms 20ms Adjustment Switch Operation 5% 24 to 240VAC, 12 to 24VDC /20% 50/60 Hz / 10% AC 2VA; DC 1W Solid state NO, closed during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C AC 2.5V @ 1A; DC 1V @ 1A AC 5mA @ 230VAC; DC 1 mA Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) *For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 351 www.littelfuse.com/tdus Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot THC / THS SERIES Description The THC/THS Series is a solid-state relay and timer combined into one compact, easy-to-use control. When mounted to a metal surface, the THC/THS Series may be used to directly control lamp or heater loads of up to 20A steady, 200A inrush. Its single shot function can perform dispensing and pulse shaping operations. The initiate switch can be a momentary or maintained type of switch. Time delays can be selected from 0.1 - 600 seconds in 4 ranges. The THC/THS Series is used for coin vending applications where fast initiate response is required. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch (leading edge triggered), the output energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch opens. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Timed Load UTL = Optional Untimed Load Features & Benefits RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 MODEL ADJUSTMENT BENEFITS Analog circuitry Repeat accuracy + / - 2%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and component costs High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of motors, lamps, and heaters directly without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Accessories Ordering Information INPUT VOLTAGE FEATURES TIME DELAY P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. OUTPUT RATING THC421C 120VAC External 0.1 - 3s 20A THS422B 120VAC External 0.5 - 60s 10A THS422C 120VAC External 0.5 - 60s 20A P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. www.littelfuse.com/thc-ths 352 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot THC / THS SERIES Selection Guide Specifications Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Maximum Load Currents Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset Minimum Load Current Voltage Drop OFF State Leakage Current Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting ** Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 0.1 - 600s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed 2% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms 20ms 10% 24, 120, or 230VAC 15% 50/60 Hz 2VA Solid state NO, closed during timing Output Steady State A 6A B 10A C 20A 100mA 2.5V at rated current 5mA @ 230VAC Inrush** 60A 100A 200A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 38.4 mm (1.51") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -20 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 3.9 oz (111 g) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 353 www.littelfuse.com/thc-ths TIME DELAY RELAYS **Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. 12 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot THDS SERIES Description The THDS Series combines accurate timing circuitry with high power solid-state switching. It can switch motors, lamps, and heaters directly without a contactor. You can reduce labor, component cost, and increase reliability with these small, easy-to-use, timers. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch, the output energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output energizes if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Wiring Diagram L1 Features & Benefits N/L2 V = Voltage UTL = Optional Untimed Load L = Timed Load S1 = Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration +/- 1% High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of motors, lamps and heaters without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and component costs Accessories For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS FEATURES P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE THDS410.25SA 120VAC THDS431C 120VAC THDS610.25SA 230VAC ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY OUTPUT RATING Fixed 0.25s 6A Onboard 1 - 100s 20A Fixed 0.25s 6A P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. www.littelfuse.com/thds 354 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot THDS SERIES External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Voltage Drop Off State Leakage Current Minimum Load Current Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting ** Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 1% 150ms 20ms 2% 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz 2VA Solid state NO, closed during timing Output Steady State A 6A B 10A C 20A 2.5V @ rated current 5mA @ 230VAC 100mA Inrush** 60A 100A 200A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 38.4 mm (1.51") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 3.9 oz (111 g) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 355 www.littelfuse.com/thds TIME DELAY RELAYS **Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. 12 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot TRS SERIES * *8-pin models UL listed when used in combination with P1011-6 socket only. Description 8-PIN 11-PIN Wiring Diagram 8-PIN OCTAL SPDT L1 The TRS Series combines an isolated, 10A electromechanical, relay output with analog timing circuitry. False trigger of the TRS Series by a transient is unlikely because of the complete isolation of the circuit from the line prior to initiation. The initiate contact is common to one side of the line and may be utilized to operate other loads. Installation is easy due to the TRS's industry standard 8 or 11-pin plug-in base wiring. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied to the input before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch (leading edge triggered), the output energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. Applying input voltage with the initiate switch closed will energize the load and begin the time delay. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits N/L2 11-PIN SPDT L1 FEATURES BENEFITS Complete isolation of circuit from line No false trip due to transients Industry standard octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors Isolated, 10A, SPDT or DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Analog circuitry Repeat accuracy + / - 2% N/L2 11-PIN DPDT TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 L1 N/L2 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 24. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT OUTPUT FORM TRS120A2X30 120VAC Knob Octal, SPDT + / - 20% 1 - 30s TRS120A2X300 120VAC Knob Octal, SPDT (AC only) + / - 20% 7 - 300s TRS120A2Y10 120VAC Knob Octal, SPDT + / - 10% 0.1 - 10s 120A2Y30 120VAC Knob Octal, SPDT + / - 20% 1 - 30s External 11-Pin, SPDT no potentiometer + / - 5% 0.1 - 10s TRS24D7Z10 24VDC/28VDC TIME TOLERANCE TIME DELAY If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/trs 356 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot TRS SERIES Specifications Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. NDS-11 11-pin Socket 11-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC11 hold-down clips. PSC8 or PSC11 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use PSC8 with NDS-8 Octal Socket or PSC11 with NDS-11 Socket. Sold in sets of two. P1011-6 Octal Socket for UL listing* 8-pin surface mount socket with binder head screw terminals. Rated 10A @ 600VAC. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. *8-pin models UL listed when used in combination with P1011-6 socket only. Selection Guides External RT P/N Selection Table Part Number 1M ohm 1.5M ohm 2M ohm 3M ohm 5M ohm 1M ohm 1.5M ohm 2M ohm 3M ohm 5M ohm P1004-16 P1004-15 P1004-14 P1004-12 P1004-13 P1004-16-X P1004-15-X P1004-14-X P1004-12-X P1004-13-X (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Tolerance 24VDC/AC 110 to 230VAC/DC AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating Life Protection Insulation Resistance Isolation Voltage Polarity Mechanical Mounting Termination Dimensions Termination EnvironmentaL Operating/Storage Temperature Weight Analog circuitry 0.05s - 10m in 15 adjustable ranges or fixed 2% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5, 10, or 20% 70ms 75ms 250ms 10% 24/28 or 110VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC (DC voltages on DPDT output models only) -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz 3.25W Electromechanical relay Isolated SPDT or DPDT 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 10 6 100 M 1500V RMS between input & output terminals DC units are reverse polarity protected Plug-in socket Octal 8-pin plug-in or 11-pin plug-in H 91.6 mm (3.62"); W 60.7 mm (2.39"); D 45.2 mm (1.78") Octal 8-pin plug-in or 11-pin plug-in -20 to 65C/-30 to 85C 6 oz (170 g) Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) 357 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset www.littelfuse.com/trs 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Value Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Fixed Time Tolerance & Setting Accuracy Initiate Time Reset Time Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot TSDS SERIES Description The TSDS Series is designed for more demanding commercial and industrial applications where small size and accurate performance are required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 1% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the time delay. The TSDS Series is rated to operate over an extended temperature range. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. This product is suitable for many applications, including dispensing, welding, and exposure timing. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch, the output energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will not energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Wiring Diagram (Positive Switching) (Negative Switching) L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Timed Load UTL = Optional Untimed Load S1 = Initiate Switch Features & Benefits RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 BENEFITS Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Allows flexibility for OEM applications Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 1% 1A Steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Wide temperature range: -40 to 75C Reliable in demanding commercial and industrial applications Accessories Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY SWITCHING MODE TSDS2110S 24VAC Fixed 10s n/a TSDS320N 24VDC External 0.1 - 10s Negative TSDS321P 24VDC External 1 - 100s Positive TSDS421 120VAC External 1 - 100s n/a P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/tsds FEATURES P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. 358 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot TSDS SERIES Accessories Specifications P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance Power Consumption AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Voltage Drop Off State Leakage Current DC Operation Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 1% 150ms 20ms 2% 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC 15% AC 2VA; DC 1W 50/60 Hz / 10% Solid state NO, closed during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C AC 2.5V @ 1A; DC 1V @ 1A AC 5mA @ 230VAC; DC 1mA Positive or negative switching Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 75C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset 359 www.littelfuse.com/tsds Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot TSS SERIES Description The TSS Series is a totally solid-state timing module. Its 1A rated, solid-state output provides an excellent method of time control for exposures, dispensing, or for increasing or decreasing a switch closure. Time delays from 0.05 to 600 seconds, in 4 ranges, cover 90% of all OEM applications. Factory calibration of fixed delays is 5% and the repeat accuracy is 2%. The TSS Series can be surface mounted with a single screw, or snapped on a 35mm DIN rail using the P1023-20 accessory adaptor. Operation (Single Shot) Voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch, the output energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch opens. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Timed Load UTL = Optional Untimed Load Features & Benefits RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. FEATURES BENEFITS Analog circuitry Repeat accuracy + / - 2%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Surface or DIN rail mounting Provides flexibility for installation Accessories TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. TIME DELAY TSS410.5 120VAC Fixed 0.5s TSS421 120VAC External 0.05 - 3s TSS422 120VAC External 0.5 - 60s TSS424 120VAC External 5 - 600s TSS622 230VAC External 0.5 - 60s TSS624 230VAC External 5 - 600s P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. If desired part number is not listed, please call us to see if it is technically possible to build. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. www.littelfuse.com/tss 360 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Single Shot TSS SERIES Accessories Specifications P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Selection Guide Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 0.05s - 600s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed 2% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms 20ms 10% 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz 2VA Solid state NO, closed during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 5mA @ 230VAC 2.5V @ 1A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals - 40 to 75C / - 40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Off State Leakage Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions 361 www.littelfuse.com/tss Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval ERDI SERIES Description L1 N/L2 Wiring Diagram INTERVAL L1 SINGLE SHOT N/L2 L1 N/L2 Econo-Timers are a combination of digital electronics and an electromechanical relay. DPDT relay output for relay logic circuits, and isolation of input to output voltages. For applications, such as interval on, pulse shaping, minimum run time, etc. The ERD Series is encapsulated to protect the circuitry from shock, vibration and humidity. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, time delay begins, and output relay energizes. At the end of time delay, output de-energizes until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of initiate switch, output relay energizes for time delay. At the end of the delay, output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing initiate switch during timing has no affect on time delay. Output will energize if initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when time delay is complete & initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Digital integrated circuitry Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration +/ - 10% Isolated, 10A, DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories L1 N/L2 2-3 & 7-6 are Normally Open Contacts (NO) TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 P1004-16, P1004-16-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. 2-4 & 7-5 are Normally Closed Contacts (NC) P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 25. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY ERDI436 120VAC External 0.6 - 60s ERDI6210 230VAC Onboard 1 - 100m P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/erdi 362 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval ERDI SERIES Selection Guides Specifications Time Delay Type Range Adjustment Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 120VDC/AC & 230VAC AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Rating Life Protection Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting screws Dimensions Function Diagrams INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 10% 150ms 2% 120VAC or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz Isolated relay contacts DPDT 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 10 6 1500V RMS input to output 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 63.5 mm (2.5"); D 43.2 mm (1.7") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect -40 to 65C / -40 to 85C 5.7 oz (162 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Termination terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight Digital integrated circuitry 0.1s - 500m in 11 adjustable ranges, 0.1s - 1000m fixed External adjust or onboard 0.5% V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset 363 www.littelfuse.com/erdi Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval HRDI SERIES Interval Timer Description The HRDI Series combines an electromechanical relay output with microcontroller timing circuitry. It offers 12 to 230V operation in five ranges and factory fixed, external, or onboard adjustable time delays with a repeat accuracy of 0.5%. The output contact rating allows for direct operation of heavy loads, such as compressors, pumps, blower motors, heaters, etc. This series is ideal for OEM applications where cost is a factor. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output relay is energized during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 C = Common, Transfer Contact NO = Normally Open L = Load NOTE: A knob, or terminals 4 & 5 are only included on adjustable units. RTTis used when external adjustment is ordered. Relay contacts are not isolated. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy +/- 0.5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Isolated, 30A, SPDT, NO output contacts Allows direct operation of heavy loads: compressors, pumps, blower moters, heaters. Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. TIME DELAY HRDI117S 12VDC Fixed 7s HRDI421 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100s HRDI422 120VAC Onboard 10 - 1000s C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. www.littelfuse.com/hrdi 364 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval HRDI SERIES External Resistance vs. Time Delay Function Diagram INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) Time Delay Type Microcontroller circuitry Range 0.1s - 100m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy 0.5 % or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) 1%, 5% Recycle Time 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage 2% Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC -15% - 20% 24 to 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption AC 4VA; DC 2W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form SPDT, non-isolated Ratings SPDT-NO SPDT-NC General Purpose 125/240VAC 30A 15A Resistive 125/240VAC 30A 15A 28VDC 20A 10A Motor Load 125VAC 1 hp* 1/4 hp** 240VAC 2 hp** 1 hp** Life Mechanical - 1 x 10 6; Electrical - 1 x 105, *3 x 104, **6,000 Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance 100 M Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 76.7 mm (3"); W 51.3 mm (2"); D 38.1 mm (1.5") Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight 3.9 oz (111 g) 365 www.littelfuse.com/hrdi 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Specifications Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval KRDI SERIES Description The KRDI Series is a compact time-delay relay measuring only 2 in. (50.8 mm) square. Its solid-state timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KRDI Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, reliability, and long life. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output relay energizes during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Wiring Diagram L1 Features & Benefits N/L2 V = Voltage C = Common, Transfer Contact NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed A knob is supplied for adjustable units, or RT terminals 4 & 5 for external adjust. See external adjustment vs time delay chart. Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Allows flexibility for OEM applications P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. Ordering Information INPUT VOLTAGE BENEFITS Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Accessories Relay contacts are isolated. MODEL FEATURES ADJUSTMENT P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. TIME DELAY KRDI120 12VDC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s KRDI121 12VDC Onboard knob 1 - 100s KRDI122 12VDC Onboard knob 10 - 1000s KRDI2110S 24VAC Fixed 10s KRDI2160S 24VAC Fixed 60s KRDI220 24VDC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s KRDI320 24VDC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s KRDI420 120VAC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s KRDI424 120VAC Onboard knob 1 - 100m P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/krdi 366 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval KRDI SERIES Accessories External Resistance vs. Time Delay C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Specifications Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 110VDC, 120VAC or 230VAC AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating (at 40C) Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 5% 150ms 5% 12, 24 or 110VDC; 24, 120 or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz / 10% AC 2VA; DC 2W Output Current/Ambient Temperature Isolated relay contacts SPDT 10A resistive @ 125VAC; 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC 250VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 105 Encapsulated 1500V RMS input to output 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -20 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.6 oz (74 g) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 12 Function Diagram 367 V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time www.littelfuse.com/krdi TIME DELAY RELAYS Max. Switching Voltage Life (Operations) Protection Circuitry Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions 0.1s - 100m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval KSD2 SERIES Interval Timer Description The KSD2 Series is designed for general purpose commercial and industrial applications where a small, cost effective, reliable, solid-state timer is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 5% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the selected time delay. This series is designed for input voltages of 24, 120 or 230VAC. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available in 6 ranges. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. An excellent choice for most OEM pulse shaping, maximum run time, and other process control applications. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output energizes during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Wiring Diagram L1 Features & Benefits N/L2 RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, + / -5% time delay accuracy Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A Steady solid-state output, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE VAC KSD2221 24 ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY External 1 - 100s KSD2413M 120 Fixed 3m KSD2420 120 External 0.1 - 10s P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/ksd2 368 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval KSD2 SERIES Specifications Accessories Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Maximum Load Current OFF State Leakage Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms 10% 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz 2VA Solid state NO, closed during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 5mA @ 230VAC 2.5V @ 1A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Function Diagram INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 369 www.littelfuse.com/ksd2 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval KSPU SERIES Description The KSPU Series is a factory programmed module available in any 1 of 14 standard functions. The KSPU offers a single adjustable timer or counter function. Switch adjustment allows accurate selection of the time delay or number of counts the first time and every time. The 1A steady, 10A inrush rated solid-state output provides 100 million operations, typical. Its microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KSPU Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, solid state reliability, and accurate switch adjustment. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 (Positive Switching) (Negative Switching) FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load UTL = Untimed Load TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Ordering Information TIME DELAY/COUNTS FUNCTION 24 to 240VAC 1 - 1023s Interval 24 to 240VAC 1 - 1023 counts (binary) with pulsed output Counter with pulsed output MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE KSPUA2I KSPUA8C If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/kspu 370 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval KSPU SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range* Repeat Accuracy Setting Accuracy Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage Input Voltage/Tolerance AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating Voltage Drop Off State Leakage Current Counter Output Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Adjustment Switch Operation Adjustment Switch Operation 0.1 - 102.3s, m or h in 0.1s, m or h increments 1 - 1023s, m or h in 1s, m or h increments 1 - 63s or m in 1s or m increments 0.1% or 20 ms, whichever is greater 1% or 20 ms, whichever is greater 150ms 20ms 2% * 24 to 240VAC, 12 to 120VDC/ 15% 50/60 Hz/ 10% AC 2VA; DC 1W Solid state NO, SPST-NO 1A steady state, 10A inrush for 16ms AC 2.5V @ 1A; DC 1V @ 1A AC 5mA @ 240VAC; DC 1 mA Output pulse width: 300ms 20% Time Delay/Counts Variable 7 & 8 * for selecting time in minutes or seconds Function Diagrams DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC =VNormally = Voltage Closed Contact Open NO = Normally TD = Time Delay Contact R = Reset NC = Normally Closed = Undefined Contact Time V = Voltage TD = Time Delay NO = Normally ROpen = Reset Contact = Undefined Time NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls TIME DELAY RELAYS *For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. 371 www.littelfuse.com/kspu Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval TDI / TDIH / TDIL SERIES Description The TDI Series is an interval timer that combines accurate digital circuitry with isolated, 10A rated, DPDT relay contacts in an 8-pin plug-in package. The TDI Series features DIP switch selectable time delays ranging from 0.1 to 10,230 seconds in three ranges. The TDI Series is the product of choice for custom control panel and OEM designers. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output relay is energized during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. 8-PIN Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram Relay contacts are isolated. L1 N/L2 TIME DELAY RELAYS INPUT VOLTAGE TIME DELAY LED TDI120AL 120VAC 1 - 1023s in 1s increments Yes TDI12D 12VDC 1 - 1023s in 1s increments No TDIH24AL 24VAC 10 - 10,230s in 10s increments Yes TDIL120AL 120VAC 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments Yes TDIL24DL 24VDC 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments Yes Isolated, 10A, DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages DIP switch adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy Industry standard octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors LED indication Provides visual indication of timing and output status NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 holddown clips. PSC8 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use with NDS-8 Octal Socket. Sold in pairs. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/tdi-tdih-tdil Digital circuitry BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. Ordering Information 12 BENEFITS Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1%, Setting accuracy + / - 2% Accessories For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 23. MODEL FEATURES 372 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval TDI / TDIH / TDIL SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Range** Repeat Accuracy Setting Accuracy Reset Time Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Indicator Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 110 to 230VAC/DC AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating Life Protection Polarity Isolation Voltage Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight Digi-Set Binary Switch Operation Digital integrated circuitry 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 10 - 10,230s in 10s increments 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 2% or 50ms, whichever is greater 50ms 150ms 2% LED glows during timing; relay is energized 12, 24, or 110VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Function Diagram -15% - +20% -20% - +10% 50/60 Hz 3.25W INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) Electromechanical relay DPDT 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1 x107; Electrical - 1 x 10 6 V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time DC units are reverse polarity protected 1500V RMS input to output Plug-in socket H 81.3 mm (3.2"); W 60.7 mm (2.4"); D 45.2 mm (1.8") Octal 8-pin plug-in -20 to 65C / -30 to 85C 6 oz (170 g) 12 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls TIME DELAY RELAYS ** For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. 373 www.littelfuse.com/tdi-tdih-tdil Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval TDUI / TDUIH / TDUIL SERIES Description The TDUI Series combines digital timing circuitry with universal voltage operation. Voltages of 24 to 240VAC and 12 to 24VDC are available in three ranges. The TDUI Series offers DIP switch selectable time delays ranging from 0.1 seconds to 102.3 minutes in three ranges. Its 1A rated output, ability to operate on multiple voltages, and wide range of switch selectable time delays make the TDUI Series an excellent choice for process control systems and OEM equipment. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output energizes during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Wiring Diagram L1 Features & Benefits N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Setting accuracy + / - 2% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Wide voltage ranges Flexibility to handle multiple voltages found in control systems and OEM applications DIP switch Adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS FEATURES Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE TIME DELAY TDUI3000A 24 to 120VAC 1 - 1023s TDUIH3002A 12 to 24VDC 0.1 - 102.3m TDUIL3001A 100 to 240VAC 0.1 - 102.3s TDUIL3002A 12 to 24VDC 0.1 - 102.3s P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. www.littelfuse.com/tdui-tduih-tduil 374 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval TDUI / TDUIH / TDUIL SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range* Repeat Accuracy Setting Accuracy Reset Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage AC Line Frequency Power Consumption DC Ripple Output Type Form Rating Voltage Drop OFF State Leakage Current Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Switch Operation Adjustment Switch Operation 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 2% or 20ms, whichever is greater 150ms 5% 24 to 240VAC, 12 to 24VDC 20% 50/60 Hz AC 2VA; DC 1W 10% Solid state NO, closed during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C AC 2.5V @ 1A; DC 1V @ 1A AC 5mA @ 230VAC; DC 1mA Function Diagram INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) *For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 375 www.littelfuse.com/tdui-tduih-tduil Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval THD2 SERIES Description The THD2 Series combines accurate timing circuitry with high power solid-state switching. It can switch motors, lamps, and heaters directly without a contactor. You can reduce labor, component cost, and increase reliability with these small, easy-to-use, Digi-Power timers. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output energizes during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load S1 = Optional Low Current Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 1% High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct control of motors, lamps and heaters without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and components costs Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Ordering Information MODEL OUTPUT RATING INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY THD2C420 20A 120VAC External 0.1 - 10s THD2C423 20A 120VAC External 0.1 - 10m THD2C433 20A 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10m THD2C620 20A 230VAC External 0.1 - 10s THD2C633 20A 230VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10m P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/thd2 376 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval THD2 SERIES Specifications External Resistance vs. Time Delay Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Maximum Load Current This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Minimum Load Current Voltage Drop OFF State Leakage Current Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting ** Dimensions Function Diagram INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 1% 150ms 2% 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz Solid state NO, closed during timing Output Steady State A 6A B 10A C 20A 100mA 2.5V at rated current 5mA @ 230VAC Inrush** 60A 100A 200A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 38.4 mm (1.51") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 3.9 oz (111 g) **Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 377 www.littelfuse.com/thd2 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval THD7 SERIES Description The THD7 Series utilizes only two terminals connected in series with the load. Interval timing mode is achieved by using a small portion of the AC sine wave allowing sufficient voltage for circuit operation. The THD7 Series can be used for interval or delay-onbreak timing. It is designed to operate large loads directly, such as motors, heater elements, and motor starters. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the time delay begins. The output remains energized throughout the time delay. At the end of the time delay the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until power is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Upon closure of SW1, the load energizes and the timer is reset (zero voltage across its input terminals). Opening SW1 re-applies input voltage to the timer, the load remains energized and the time delay begins. At the end of the time delay the output de-energizes. If SW1 is open when power is applied, the load will energize for the time delay then de-energize. Reset: Reclosing SW1 resets the timer. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 INTERVAL Features & Benefits V = Voltage L = Load S1 = Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. DELAY-ON-BREAK TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 FEATURES BENEFITS Digital integrated circuitry Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of motors, lamps and heaters without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and component costs Accessories For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. P1004-13, P1004-13-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY OUTPUT RATING THD7421A 120VAC External 1 - 100s 6A THD7621C 230VAC External 1 - 100s 20A P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/thd7 P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. 378 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval THD7 SERIES Specifications Accessories Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Rating P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. VTP(X)(X) Plug-on Adjustment Module Mounts on modules with in-line adjustment terminals. Rated at 0.25W at 55C. Available in resistance values from 5K to 5M. Selection Table for VTP Plug-on Adjustment Accessory Time Delay VTP P/N 1 - 1-100s 2 - 10-1000s 3 - 0.1-10m 4 - 1-100m 5 - 10-1000m VTP5G VTP5K VTP5N VTP5P VTP5R Effective Voltage Drop (VLine-VLoad) Minimum Load Current Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting ** Dimensions Selection Guide 10% After timing: 150ms; During timing: 350ms 2% 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz Solid state NO, closed during timing Output Steady State A 6A B 10A C 20A Input 24VAC 120VAC 230VAC 100mA Inrush** 60A 100A 200A Effective Drop 3V 3V 5V Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 38.4 mm (1.51") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 3.9 oz (111 g) **Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. Function Diagrams INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time DELAY-ON-BREAK L 379 S1 = Initiate Switch O = Output L = Load TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time www.littelfuse.com/thd7 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Digital integrated circuitry 1s - 1000m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval TS2 / TS6 SERIES Description The TS2 Series is designed for 24, 120 or 230VAC and the TS6 Series is designed for 12 or 24VDC. These series are capable of controlling load currents of up to 1A steady state, 10A inrush. Encapsulated circuitry and the reliability of a 2% repeat accuracy make the TS2 and TS6 ideal for cost sensitive applications. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output energizes during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. TS2 TS6 Wiring Diagram L1 Features & Benefits N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Note: TS6 is not reverse polarity protected. FEATURES BENEFITS Analog circuitry Repeat accuracy + / - 2%, Factory calibration + / - 10% Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Rated for operation up to 75C Can be used in the harshest environments Accessories B A P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS P1004-XX (fig. A), P1004-XX-X (fig. B) Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. Ordering Information INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TS22120 24VAC Fixed 20s n/a TS2424 120VAC External 5 - 600s n/a TS2223 24VAC External 2 - 180s n/a TS6116P 12VDC Fixed 6s Positive MODEL TIME DELAY SWITCHING MODE MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY SWITCHING MODE TS2412 120VAC Fixed 2s n/a TS6122P 12VDC External 0.5 - 20s Positive TS24130 120VAC Fixed 30s n/a TS6123P 12VDC External 2 - 60s Positive TS2421 120VAC External 0.05 - 3s n/a TS6321P 24VDC External 0.05 - 3s Positive TS6323P 24VDC External 2 - 180s Positive TS2422 120VAC External 0.5 - 60s n/a TS2423 120VAC External 2 - 180s n/a If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/ts2-ts6 380 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval TS2 / TS6 SERIES Accessories Selection Guide P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. VTP(X)(X) Plug-on Adjustment Module Mounts on modules with in-line adjustment terminals. Rated at 0.25W at 55C. Available in resistance values from 5K to 5M. Selection Table for VTP Plug-on Adjustment Accessory TS6 12VDC Versa-Pot (potentiometer) Time Delay VTP P/N Fig. A P/N Fig. B P/N 1 - 0.05-1s VTP2A P1004-16 P1004-16-X 2 - 0.5-20s VTP2E P1004-16 P1004-16-X 3 - 2-60s VTP2F P1004-16 P1004-16-X 4 - 5-120s VTP2H P1004-16 P1004-16-X TS2 & TS6 All Other Voltages Versa-Pot (potentiometer) Time Delay VTP P/N Fig. A P/N Fig. B P/N 1 - 0.05-3s VTP4B P1004-12 P1004-12-X 2 - 0.5-60s VTP4F P1004-12 P1004-12-X 3 - 2-180s VTP4J P1004-12 P1004-12-X 4 - 5-600s VTP5N P1004-13 P1004-13-X INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Time Delay Type Range 12VDC Other Voltages Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Reset Time Input Voltage Tolerance DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Polarity Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 381 Analog circuitry 0.05 - 120s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed (1 M max. R T ) 0.05 - 600s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed 2% or 20ms, whichever is greater 10% 10% 150ms 12 or 24VDC; 24 or20VAC 15% 10% DC 1W; AC 2VA Solid state NO, closed during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C DC 1.0V @ 1A; AC 2.5V @ 1A Encapsulated TS6 is not reverse polarity protected 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 75C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) www.littelfuse.com/ts2-ts6 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Function Diagram Specifications Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval TSD2 SERIES Interval Timer Description The TSD2 Series is designed for more demanding commercial and industrial applications where small size and accurate performance are required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 1% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.1% of the time delay. The TSD Series is rated to operate over an extended temperature range. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 100 hours are available. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is energized during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Wiring Diagram L1 Features & Benefits N/L2 RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1%, + / -1% time delay accuracy Extended temperature range Rated to 75C operating temperature to withstand high heat applications. Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A Steady solid-state output, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. TIME DELAY TSD2411S 120VAC Fixed 1s TSD24145S 120VAC Fixed 45s TSD241600S 120VAC Fixed 600s TSD2434 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100m P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/tsd2 P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. 382 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval TSD2 SERIES Accessories Specifications C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Off State Leakage Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 0.1s - 100h in 7 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 1% 150ms 1% 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz 2VA Solid state NO, closed during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 5mA @ 230VAC 2.5V @ 1A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 75C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 Function Diagaram (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time TIME DELAY RELAYS INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) 383 www.littelfuse.com/tsd2 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval TSD6 SERIES Interval Timer Description The TSD6 Series offers total solid-state, interval timing for 12 or 24VDC applications. This series provides either negative or positive switching. The TSD6 Series is designed for more demanding commercial and industrial applications where small size and accurate performance is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 1% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.1% of the time delay. The TSD6 Series is rated to operate over an extended temperature range. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 100 hours are available. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output energizes during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Wiring Diagram (Positive Switching) Features & Benefits (Negative Switching) RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1%, + / -1% time delay accuracy Extended temperature range Rated to 75C operating temperature to withstand high heat applications. Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A Steady solid-state output, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS FEATURES P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY SWITCHING MODE TSD6113SP 12VDC Fixed 3s Positive TSD61115SP 12VDC Fixed 15s Positive TSD6113SN 12VDC Fixed 3s Negative TSD6310.8SN 24VDC Fixed 0.8s Negative TSD631380SP 24VDC Fixed 380s Positive TSD6320P 24VDC External 0.1 - 10s Positive P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/tsd6 384 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval TSD6 SERIES Accessories Specifications Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Off State Leakage Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay Termination terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 0.1s - 100h in 7 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 1% 150ms 1% 12 or 24VDC 15% 10% 1W Solid state, positive or negative switching NO, closed during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 1mA 1.0V @ 1A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect -40 to 75C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Function Diagram INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 385 www.littelfuse.com/tsd6 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval TSD7 SERIES Interval/Delay-on-Break Timer Description The TSD7 Series utilizes only two terminals connected in series with the load. Interval timing mode period is achieved by using a small portion of the AC sine wave allowing sufficient voltage for circuit operation. It can be used as an interval timer to control or pulse shape the operation of contactors, solenoids, relays, and lamp loads. The TSD7 Series can be wired to delay on the break of a switch for energy saving fan delays. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the time delay begins. The output remains energized throughout the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until power is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Upon closure of SW1, the load is energized and the timer is reset (zero volts across its input terminals). Opening SW1 reapplies input voltage to the timer, the load remains energized and the time delay begins. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. If SW1 is open when power is applied, the load will energize for the time delay then de-energize. Reset: Reclosing SW1 resets the timer. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Interval Features & Benefits Delay-on- Break V = Voltage L = Load S1 = Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, + / -1% time delay accuracy Extended temperature range Rated to 75C operating temperature to withstand high heat applications Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A steady solid-state output, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Two terminal series load connections Provides quick and easy installation for new or existing systems Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY TSD7412S 120VAC Fixed 2s TSD761120S 230VAC Fixed 120s TSD7414M 120VAC Fixed 4m TSD761180S 230VAC Fixed 180s TSD7421 120VAC External 1 - 100s TSD7611S 230VAC Fixed 1s TSD7423 120VAC External 0.1 - 10m TSD7621 230VAC External 1 - 100s TSD7424 120VAC External 1 - 100m If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/tsd7 386 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Interval TSD7 SERIES Accessories Specifications P1004-13, P1004-13-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting Bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. VTP(X)(X) Plug-on Adjustment Module Mounts on modules with in-line adjustment terminals. Rated at 0.25W at 55C. Available in resistance values from 5K to 5M. Selection Table for VTP Plug-on Adjustment Accessory Time Delay VTP P/N Time Delay VTP P/N 1 - 1-100s 2 - 10-1000s 3 - 0.1-10m VTP5G VTP5K VTP5N 4 - 1-100m 5 - 10-1000m VTP5P VTP5R Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Maximum Load Current Minimum Load Current Effective Voltage Drop (VLine-VLoad) Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Digital integrated circuitry 1s - 1000m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 10% 400ms 2% 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz Solid state NO, closed during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 45C 40mA Input 24VAC 120VAC 230VAC Effective Drop 3V 4V 6V Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 75C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 Function Diagrams INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) DELAY-ON-BREAK L (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 387 V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally V = Voltage Closed Contact S1 =Initiate Switch TD = Time Delay NO = Normally Open R = Reset Contact = Undefined NC = Normally Closed Time Contact O = Output = Initiate Switch LS1 = Load O == Time Output TD Delay Load RL==Reset TD ==Time Delay Time Undefined R = Reset = Undefined Time www.littelfuse.com/tsd7 TIME DELAY RELAYS Selection Guide Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Retriggerable Single Shot KRD9 SERIES Description Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch C = Common, Transfer Contact UTL = Untimed Load (optional) A knob is supplied for adjustable units, or RT terminals 4 & 5 for external adjust. See external adjustment vs time delay chart. The untimed load is optional. Relay contacts are isolated. The KRD9 Series microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, reliability, and long life. Operation (Retriggerable Single Shot) Function Type A (Output Initially De-energized): Input voltage must be applied prior to and during timing. When the initiate switch is closed, (momentary or maintained) the output energizes and the time delay starts. On completion of the delay, the output de-energizes. The unit will time out if S1 remains in the open or closed position for the full time delay. Reclosing the initiate switch resets the time delay and restarts timing; the output remains energized. The output will not energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Function Type B (Output Initially Energized): Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the time delay starts. At the end of the time delay, the load de-energizes. The unit will time out if S1 remains in the open or closed position for the full time delay. Closing (re-closing) the initiate switch resets the time delay and restarts timing; the output remains energized. Reset: The time delay and the output are reset when input voltage is removed. Features & Benefits For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and component costs Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated circuitry Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY FUNCTION TYPE KRD9120B 12VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Energized KRD92115MA 24VAC/DC Fixed 15m De-energized KRD92115MB 24VAC/DC Fixed 15m Energized KRD9220B 24VAC/DC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Energized KRD93115MA 24VDC Fixed 15m De-energized KRD9423B 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10m Energized P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/krd9 388 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Retriggerable Single Shot KRD9 SERIES Accessories P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 110VDC, 120 or 230VAC AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating (at 40C) Max. Switching Voltage Life (Operations) Protection Circuitry Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Microcontroller based with watchdog circuitry 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms 40ms; 750 operations per minute 5% 12, 24 or 110VDC; 24, 120 or 230VAC -15% - +20% -20% - +10% 50/60 Hz / 10% AC 2VA; DC 2W Isolated relay contacts SPDT 10A resistive @ 125VAC; 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC 250VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Encapsulated 1500V RMS input to output 100 M DC units are reversed polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2.0"); W 50.8 mm (2.0"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.6 oz (74 g) Function Diagram RETRIGGERABLE SINGLE SHOT (MOTION DETECTOR) (PSD) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 389 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact t = Incomplete Time Delay TD = Time Delay R = Reset www.littelfuse.com/krd9 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Output Current/Ambient Temperature Specifications Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Retriggerable Single Shot TSD94110SB Retriggerable Single-Shot Timer Description The TSD94110SB retriggerable single-shot timer is designed for a variety of appllcations. Its digital circuit provides long or short delays with accuracy and stability over a wide voltage and temperature range. It is the ideal timer for pulse-train monitoring of programmable controllers, or any system requiring motion detection. Operation A Type Power must be applied to input at all times prior to and during timing. Upon closure of initiate switch (momentary or maintained) the load is energized and the time delay is started. On completion of the delay period the load is de-energized. Should the initiate switch be reclosed during timing, the delay will be reset to zero and restarted. Operation B Type Upon application of input power, the load is energized and a time delay is started. At the end of the time delay, the load is de-energized. Should the initiate switch be closed or reclosed during timing, the delay is reset to zero and restarted. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Timed Load UTL = Optional Untimed Load S1 = Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Features & Benefits g Excellent Pulse Train Monitor g Totally Solid State and Encapsulated g Microcontroller Circuitry g Fast Reset to Zero During Timing g Excellent Accuracy and Reliability g DC Units are Reverse Polarity Protected For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. Specifications TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Recycle Time Time Delay vs. Temp. & Voltage Initiate Timing Input Operating Voltage Tolerance Output Type Form Rating Voltage Drop Protection Transient Dielectric Insulation Resistance www.littelfuse.com/tsd94110sb Microcontroller circuitry Factory fixed 10s 0.5% 1% 300ms max. 2% 16ms max. AC 120 volts AC 15% Solid State Normally open 1 ampere steady state, 10 amperes inrush at 55C AC 2.5 volts typical at 1 ampere Mechanical Mounting Termination Surface mount with one #8 or #1O screw 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Molded housing with encapsulated circuitry H 50.80 mm (2.00"); W 50.80 mm (2.00"); D 30.70 mm (1.21") Package Dimensions Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight -40C to 60C / -40C to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing Approx. 2.4 oz (68 g) Function Diagram RETRIGGERABLE SINGLE SHOT (MOTION DETECTOR) (PSE) Protected 1500 volts RMS 100 megohms minimum 4.4 390 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact t = Incomplete Time Delay TD = Time Delay R = Reset (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle ERD3425A Description Econo-Timers are a combination of digital electronics and a reliable electromechanical relay. DPDT relay output for relay logic circuits, and isolation of input to output voltages. Cost effective for OEM applications, such as duty cycling, drying, washing, signaling, and flashing. Operation (Recycling - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output relay energizes and the T1 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output relay energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the first delay. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 FEATURES BENEFITS Digital integrated circuitry Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 10% Isolated, 10A, DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-16, P1004-16-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. A knob, or terminals 9 &10 are only included on adjustable units. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. Relay contacts are isolated. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 25. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 391 www.littelfuse.com/erd3425A 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle ERD3425A Selection Guides Specifications Time Delay Type Range Adjustment Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 120VAC/DC & 230VAC AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Rating Life Protection Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Function Diagram RECYCLING (ON FIRST) TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 www.littelfuse.com/erd3425A V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight 392 Digital integrated circuitry 0.1s - 500m in 11 adjustable ranges 0.1s - 1000m fixed Knob, external adjust, or fixed 0.5% 10% 150ms 2% 12, 24, or 120VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz Isolated relay contacts DPDT 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 10 6 1500V RMS input to output 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 63.5 mm (2.5"); D 43.2 mm (1.7") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 65C / -40 to 85C 5.7 oz (162 g) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle ESDR SERIES Description The ESDR Series offers independent time adjustment of both delay periods. Adjustment options include fixed, onboard or external adjust. The ESDR is recommended for air drying, automatic oiling, life testing, chemical metering and automatic duty cycling. This series is designed for general purpose commercial and industrial applications where a small, cost effective, reliable, solid-state timer is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is <5%. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.1% of the selected time delay. This series is designed for input voltages of 12VDC to 230VAC in five ranges. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available in six ranges. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Recycling - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1, ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2, OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the first delay. Operation (Recycling - OFF Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the T1 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the first delay. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 (Positive Switching) (Negative Switching) V = Voltage L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. A knob is supplied for adjustment on the unit; terminals for external adjustment. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. Features & Benefits P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / -0.1%, Factory calibration + / - 5% 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity ON/OFF recycling with independent adjustment of both time periods Separate on and off timing settings are knob adjustable for added flexibility Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Allows flexibility for OEM applications Ordering Information See next page. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 393 www.littelfuse.com/esdr 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. FEATURES Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle ESDR SERIES Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT T1 ON TIME FIRST DELAY T2 OFF TIME SWITCHING MODE ESDR120A0P 12VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s On time 0.1 - 10s Positive ESDR120B3P 12VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Off time 0.1 - 10m Positive ESDR123B4P 12VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10m Off time 1 - 100m Positive ESDR125A5P 12VDC Onboard 10 - 1000m On time 10 - 1000m Positive ESDR221A2 24VAC Onboard 1 - 100s On time 10 - 1000s n/a ESDR320A0P 24VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s On time 0.1 - 10s Postitive ESDR320A3P 24VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s On time 0.1 - 10m Positive ESDR420A0 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s On time 0.1 - 10s n/a ESDR420A1 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s On time 1 - 100s n/a ESDR420A4 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s On time 1 - 100m n/a ESDR420B1 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Off time 1 - 100s n/a ESDR420B4 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Off time 1 - 100m n/a ESDR421A1 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100s On time 1 - 100s n/a ESDR421A4 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100s On time 1 - 100m n/a ESDR423A3 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10m On time 0.1 - 10m n/a ESDR423A4 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10m On time 1 - 100m n/a ESDR424A1 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100m On time 1 - 100s n/a ESDR450A1 120VAC External 0.1 - 10s On time 1 - 100s n/a If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 External Resistance vs. Time Delay Function Diagrams RECYCLING (ON FIRST) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact V = Voltage TD1, = Time Open Delay NO =TD2 Normally R = Reset Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact V = Voltage TD1, = Time Delay NO =TD2 Normally R = Reset Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. www.littelfuse.com/esdr 394 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle ESDR SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Reset Time Input Voltage Tolerance Power Consumption AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Output Type Maximum Load Current OFF State Leakage Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 2% 150ms Termination Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% AC 2VA; DC 1W 50/60 Hz / 10% Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 75C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) Solid state 1A steady state , 10A inrush at 60C AC 5mA @ 230VAC; DC 1mA AC 2.5V @ 1A; DC 1V @ 1A 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 395 www.littelfuse.com/esdr Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle HRDR SERIES Recycling Timer Description The HRDR Series combines an electromechanical relay and microcontroller timing circuitry. It offers 12 to 230V operation in five ranges and factory fixed, onboard or externally adjustable time delays with a repeat accuracy of 0.5%. The high switching capacity of the output contacts allow for direct control of heavy loads like compressors, pumps, motors, heaters and lighting. A bypass/reset switch option allows operator to interrupt normal recycling sequence and energize output relay. An excellent choice for OEM applications. Operation (Recycling with Reset Switch) Upon application of input voltage, the ON time T1 begins and output relay energizes. At the end of the ON time, the output relay de-energizes and the OFF time T2 begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output relay energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Some recycling timers have the OFF time as the first delay. Reset: Removing input voltage resets output and time delays, and returns sequence to the first delay. Bypass/Reset Switch: Closing the normally open bypass/reset switch energizes the output relay and resets the time delays. Opening the switch restarts recycling operation with the first delay. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 NO = Normally Open S1 = Reset Switch C = Common, Transfer Contact L = Load Features & Benefits Terminals 4 & 5 and/or 7 & 8 are only included on externally adjustable units. Relay contacts are non-isolated. RT is included when external adjustment is ordered. Terminal 6 is included when Bypass/Reset is selected. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Isolated, 30A, SPDT, NO output contacts Allows direct operation of heavy loads: compressors, pumps, blower moters, heaters. Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Independent adjustment of On and Off delays Provides greater flexibility of timing options Bypass/Reset switch option Allows operator to interrupt the timing sequence and energize the output relay Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE EXTERNAL ADJUSTMENT T1 ON TIME OPERATING SEQUENCE T2 OFF TIME BYPASS / RESET OPTION HRDR121A4R 12VDC Both time onboard adj 1 - 100s On time first 1 - 100m Yes HRDR321A4R 24VDC Both time onboard adj 1 - 100s On time first 1 - 100m Yes HRDR322B2R 24VDC Both time onboard adj 10 - 1000S Off time first 10 - 1000S Yes HRDR330A0R 24VDC Both time external adj 0.1 - 10s On time first 0.1 - 10s Yes HRDR331A1 24VDC Both time external adj 1 - 100s On time first 1 - 100s No HRDR411SB30MR 120VAC Both times fixed 1s Off time first 30m Yes HRDR431A1R 120VAC Both times external adj 0.1 - 100s On time first 0.1 - 100s Yes If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/hrdr 396 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle HRDR SERIES Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay Specifications Function Diagram RECYCLING WITH RESET SWITCH (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 397 www.littelfuse.com/hrdr 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Time Delay Range 100ms - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) 5% Reset Time 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage 2% Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC -15% - 20% 24 to 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption AC 4VA; DC 2W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form SPDT, non-isolated Ratings SPDT-NO SPDT-NC General Purpose 125/240VAC 30A 15A Resistive 125/240VAC 30A 15A 28VDC 20A 10A Motor Load 125VAC 1 hp* 1/4 hp** 240VAC 2 hp** 1 hp** Life Mechanical - 1 x 10 6; Electrical - 1 x 105, *3 x 10 4, **6,000 Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance 100 M Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 76.7 mm (3"); W 51.3 mm (2"); D 38.1 mm (1.5") Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C Humidity 95% relative non-condensing Weight 3.9 oz (111 g) Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle KRD3 SERIES Description The KRD3 Series measures only 2 in. (50.8 mm) square.Its solid-state timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KRD3 Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, reliability, and long life. Operation (Recycling Flasher - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to T1 ON time. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage C = Common, Transfer Contact NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed A knob is supplied for adjustable units, or RT terminals 4 & 5 for external adjust. See external adjustment vs time delay chart. BENEFITS Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Provides greater flexibility for OEM applications and reduces component and labor costs Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / -0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. Relay contacts are isolated. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS FEATURES Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE KRD3420A 120VAC ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY OPERATING SEQUENCE Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s On time first KRD3421A 120VAC Onboard knob 1 - 100s On time first KRD3434A 120VAC External 1 - 100m On time first P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. www.littelfuse.com/krd3 398 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle KRD3 SERIES External Resistance vs. Time Delay Specifications Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 110VDC, 120 or 230VAC AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating (at 40C) Output Current/Ambient Temperature Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Function Diagram (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 5% 150ms 5% 12, 24 or 110VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz / 10% AC 2VA; DC 2W Isolated relay contacts SPDT 10A resistive @ 125VAC; 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC 250VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 105 Encapsulated 1500V RMS input to output 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -20 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.6 oz (74 g) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS RECYCLING (ON FIRST) Max. Switching Voltage Life (Operations) Protection Circuitry Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions 0.1s - 100m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 399 www.littelfuse.com/krd3 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle KRDR SERIES Description Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage C = Common NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed T1 = OFF Time T2 = ON Time The KRDR Series is a compact time-delay relay measuring only 2 in. (50.8 mm) square. Its solid-state timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KRDR Series is a cost effective recycling timer for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, reliability, and long life. Operation (Recycling - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output relay energizes and the T2 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T1 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output relay energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the time delays, and returns the sequence to the ON time. Operation (Recycling - OFF Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the T1 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T2 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of the ON time the load de-energizes, and the cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to the OFF time. Features & Benefits A knob is supplied for adjustable units. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. Ordering Information TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 INPUT VOLT. ADJUST. FIRST DELAY T1 OFF TIME KRDR115MB25M 12VDC Fixed 5m Off time 25m KRDR120A0 12VDC Adjustable 0.1 - 10s On time 0.1 - 10s KRDR121A1 12VDC Adjustable 1 - 100s On time 1 - 100s KRDR320B0 24VDC Adjustable 0.1 - 10s Off time 0.1 - 10s KRDR321A4 24VDC Adjustable 1 - 100s On time 1 - 100m KRDR321B4 24VDC Adjustable 1 - 100s Off time 1 - 100m KRDR420A3 120VAC Adjustable 0.1 - 10s On time 0.1 - 10m KRDR421A4 120VAC Adjustable 1 - 100s On time 1 - 100m KRDR424A0 120VAC Adjustable 1 - 100m On time 0.1 - 10s KRDR424A4 120VAC Adjustable 1 - 100m On time 1 - 100m KRDR440.5SA0 120VAC 0.5s On time 0.1 - 10s On time fixed Compact design and independent adjustment of ON and OFF times Provides greater flexibility for OEM applications and reduces component and labor costs Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/krdr BENEFITS Accessories T2 ON TIME MODEL FEATURES P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. 400 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle KRDR SERIES Output Current/Ambient Temperature Function Diagrams RECYCLING (ON FIRST) RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally V = Voltage Closed Contact NO == OFF Normally TD1 Time Open Contact TD2 = ON Time = Normally Closed RNC = Reset Contact V ==Voltage T1 OFF Time NO = Normally T2 = ON Time Open Contact R = Reset NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 110VDC & 120 or 230VAC AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating (at 40C) Max. Switching Voltage Life (Operations) Protection Circuitry Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5 % or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms 5% 12, 24 or 110VDC; 24, 120 or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz / 10% AC 2VA; DC 2W Isolated relay contacts SPDT 10A resistive @ 125VAC; 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC 250VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 105 Encapsulated 1500V RMS input to output 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -20 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.6 oz (74 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 401 www.littelfuse.com/krdr Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle KSD3 SERIES Recycling Flasher Description The KSD3 Series Digi-Timer is a cost effective approach for ON/OFF recycling applications. The on time is equal to the off time. An adjustment of the RT will change the time delays of both on and off times. This series is designed for general purpose commercial and industrial applications where a small, cost effective, reliable, solid-state timer is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 5% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the selected time delay. This series is designed for popular AC and DC voltages. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available in 6 ranges. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Recycling Flasher - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1, ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the ON time. Operation (Recycling Flasher - OFF Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of the ON time the load de-energizes, and the cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays and the sequence to the OFF time. Features & Benefits For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, + / -5% time delay accuracy Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A Steady solid-state output, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY OPERATING SEQUENCE KSD3120A 12VDC External 0.1 - 10s ON time first KSD3310.1SA 24VDC Fixed 0.1s ON time first KSD3415MA 120VAC Fixed 5m ON time first KSD3432A 120VAC Onboard 10 - 1000s ON time first P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/ksd3 FEATURES 402 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle KSD3 SERIES Accessories Specifications Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance ( Factory Calibration) Reset Time Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Maximum Load Current OFF State Leakage Current Voltage Drop DC Operation Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 5% 150ms 10% 24 or 120VAC; 12 or 24VDC 20% 50/60 Hz AC 2VA; DC 1W Solid state 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C AC 5mA @ 230VAC; DC 1mA AC 2.5V @ 1A; DC 1V @ 1A Negative switching only Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) FLASHER (ON FIRST) ON time plus OFF time equals one complete flash. FLASHER (OFF FIRST) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 12 Function Diagrams 403 V = Voltage L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 T2 R = Reset www.littelfuse.com/ksd3 TIME DELAY RELAYS This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle KSDR SERIES Description Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. The KSDR Series offers independent time adjustment of both delay periods. The KSDR Series is recommended for air drying, automatic oiling, life testing, chemical metering, and automatic duty cycling. This series is designed for general purpose commercial and industrial applications where a small, cost effective, reliable, solid-state timer is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 5% of the target delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the selected time delay. This series is designed for input voltages of 24, 120 or 230VAC. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available in 6 ranges. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Recycling - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1, ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2, OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to T1 ON time. Operation (Recycling - OFF Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of T1, T2 begins and the load de-energizes. This cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to T2 OFF time. Features & Benefits For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE T1 ON TIME FIRST DELAY T2 OFF TIME KSDR40A0 120VAC 0.1 - 10s On time 0.1 - 10s KSDR42A4 120VAC 10 - 1000s On time 1 - 100m FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / -0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Wide operating temperature range: -40 to 75C Reliable in demanding commercial and industrial applications Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Allows flexibility for OEM applications If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/ksdr 404 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle KSDR SERIES Accessories Function Diagrams P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. RECYCLING (ON FIRST) P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact V = Voltage TD1, TD2 = Time Open Delay NO = Normally R = Reset Contact RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) NC = Normally Closed V = Voltage Contact NO =TD2 Normally TD1, = Time Delay Open Contact R = Reset NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 0.1s - 1000m in 6 ranges 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms 10% 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz 2VA Solid state 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 2.5V @ 1A 5mA @ 230VAC Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 75C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 405 www.littelfuse.com/ksdr 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Rating Voltage Drop OFF State Leakage Current Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle KSPD SERIES Solid State Timer Description The KSPD Series is a factory programmed module available with 1 of 12 standard dual functions. The time delays can be factory fixed, externally or onboard adjustable, or a combination of fixed and adjustable. The 1A steady, 10A inrush rated solid-state output provides 100 million operations, typical. Its microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KSPD Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size and long life. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories (Positive Switching) (Negative Switching) P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. V = Voltage L = Load S1 = Initiate Switch UTL = Untimed Load T1 & RT1 = First Adjustment T2 & RT2 = Second Adjustment P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Terminal Location for External Adjustment. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT ADJUSTMENT 1 TIME DELAY 1 ADJUSTMENT 2 TIME DELAY 2 FUNCTION KSPDA2222RXE 24 to 240VAC Onboard 1-100s Onboard 1-100s Recycling/On Time First KSPDP110M18SRXE 12 to 120VDC positive switching Fixed 10 mins Fixed 8s Recycling/On Time First Specifications If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/kspd 406 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle KSPD SERIES Function Diagrams RECYCLING (ON FIRST) RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) Specifications V = Voltage V = Voltage NO = Normally S1 = Initiate Switch Open Contact NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Contact Closed Contact NC==Time Normally TD1, TD2 Delay Closed R = Reset Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay V = Voltage = Reset NO = R Normally Open = Contact Undefined Time NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset DELAY-ON-MAKE / SINGLE SHOT DELAY-ON-MAKE / DELAY-ON-BREAK DELAY-ON-MAKE / INTERVAL V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1,TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1,TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Rating Voltage Drop OFF State Leakage Current Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Microcontroller circuitry 0.1s - 1000h in 9 adjustable ranges or fixed (to 999) 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 2% 150ms 20ms; 1500 operations per minute 2% 12 to 120VDC; 24 to 240VAC 15% 50/60Hz / 10% AC 2VA; DC 1W Solid-state output 1A steady, 10A inrush for 16ms AC 2.5V @ 1A; DC 1V @ 1A AC 5mA @ 230VAC; DC 1mA Encapsulated 2000V rms terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mt. with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connects -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 407 www.littelfuse.com/kspd Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle RS SERIES Description The RS Series is a solid-state, encapsulated, recycling timer designed for tough industrial environments. It is used by many testing labs as a life cycle tester; by others as a cycle controller. The RS Series has separate DIP switch adjustments for the on delay and the off delay. These make accurate adjustment possible the first time, every time. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1023 hours are available in 4 ranges. Operation (Recycling - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the ON time. Operation (Recycling - OFF Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the T1 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the OFF time. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load Features & Benefits For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / -0.1%, Setting accuracy + / - 2% 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity ON and OFF time delay settings Independent adjustment provides greater timing flexibility DIP switch adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE FIRST DELAY T1 ON TIME T2 OFF TIME MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE FIRST DELAY T1 ON TIME T2 OFF TIME RS1A11 12VDC On time 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments RS4A22 120VAC On time 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments RS2B44 24VAC Off time 1 - 1023h in 1h increments 1 - 1023h in 1h increments RS4A24 120VAC On time 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments 1 - 1023h in 1h increments RS4A11 120VAC On time 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments RS4A33 120VAC On time 1 - 1023m in 1m increments 1 - 1023m in 1m increments RS4A12 120VAC On time 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments RS4B12 120VAC Off time 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments RS4A13 120VAC On time 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023m in 1m increments RS6A13 230VAC On time 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023m in 1m increments If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/rs 408 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle RS SERIES Accessories Specifications P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Adjustment Switch Operation Adjustment Switch Operation Time Delay Range* Repeat Accuracy Setting Accuracy Reset Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Maximum Load Current OFF State Leakage Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments 1 - 1023m in 1m increments 1 - 1023h in 1h increments 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 2% or 20ms, whichever is greater 150ms 2% 12, or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz / 10% AC 2VA; DC 1W Solid state 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C AC 5mA @ 230VAC; DC 1mA AC 2.5V @ 1A; DC 1V @ 1A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 76.7 mm (3"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 38.1 mm (1.5") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 75C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 3.9 oz (111 g) *For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. RECYCLING (ON FIRST) RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls TIME DELAY RELAYS Function Diagrams 12 V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally V = Voltage Closed Contact NO TD2 = Normally Open TD1, = Time Delay Contact R = Reset NC = Normally Closed Contact V = Voltage TD1,=TD2 = Time Delay NO Normally R = Reset Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset 409 www.littelfuse.com/rs Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle TDR SERIES Relay Output, Recycling Time Delay Relay Description The TDR Series of time-delay relays are comprised of digital circuitry and an isolated, 10A relay output. The ON and OFF delays are selected by means of two, ten position binary switches, which allow the setting of the desired delay to be precise every time. Operation (Recycling - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the green LED glows, the output relay is energized, the red LED glows, and the T1 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes, the red LED turns OFF and the T2, OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output relay energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the first delay. 8-PIN Operation (Recycling - OFF Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the green LED glows, the T1 OFF time begins, the load is OFF. At the end of the OFF time, the T2 ON time begins, the load energizes, and the red LED glows. At the end of the ON time the load de-energizes and the red LED turns OFF. The cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to the OFF time. Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits Relay contacts are isolated L1 N/L2 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 23. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE TDR1A22 12VDC TDR2A23 24VAC TDR4A11 120VAC TDR4A12 TDR4A13 LED FEATURES BENEFITS ON & OFF time delay settings Independent adjustment allows for greater flexibility 3 Time Ranges Available (0.1s to 2.8h) Makes it versatile for use in many applications Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1% or 20 ms, whichever is greater; Setting Accuracy + / - 2% or 50 ms, whichever is greater DIP switch adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy Isolated output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages LED indication (select models) Provides visual indication of relay status SEQUENCE ON TIME (SEC) OFF TIME (SEC) ON time first 1-1023 in 1s increments 1-1023 in 1s increments X ON time first 1-1023 in 1s increments 10-10230 in 10s increments X ON time first 0.1-102.3 in 0.1s increments 0.1-102.3 in 0.1s increments 120VAC X ON time first 0.1-102.3 in 0.1s increments 1-1023 in 1s increments 120VAC X ON time first 0.1-102.3 in 0.1s increments 10-10230 in 10s increments TDR4A22 120VAC X ON time first 1-1023 in 1s increments 1-1023 in 1s increments TDR4A23 120VAC X ON time first 1-1023 in 1s increments 10-10230 in 10s increments TDR4A33 120VAC X ON time first 10-10230 in 10s increments 10-10230 in 10s increments TDR4B22 120VAC X OFF time first 1-1023 in 1s increments 1-1023 in 1s increments TDR4B23 120VAC X OFF time first 1-1023 in 1s increments 10-10230 in 10s increments TDR6A22 230VAC X ON time first 1-1023 in 1s increments 1-1023 in 1s increments If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/tdr 410 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle TDR SERIES Accessories Specifications Time Delay Type Range** BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. Repeat Accuracy Setting Accuracy Reset Time Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 110 to 230VAC/DC AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Input LED Indicator Output Type Form Rating NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. PSC8 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use with NDS-8 Octal Socket. Sold in pairs. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Binary Switch Operation Life Max. Switching Voltage Relay LED Indicator Protection Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions ** For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. Function Diagram RECYCLING (ON FIRST) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset 411 5% 12, 24/28, or 110VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz/<=10% 3.25W Green; on when input voltage is applied Electromechanical relay DPDT 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 10 6 250VAC Red; ON when output relay energizes 1500V RMS input to output 100 M DC units reverse polarity protected Plug-in socket H 81.3 mm (3.2"); W 60.7 mm (2.39"); D 45.2 mm (1.78") Octal 8-pin plug-in 12 -20 to 65C/-30 to 85C 6 oz (170 g) www.littelfuse.com/tdr TIME DELAY RELAYS Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight Digital integrated circuitry 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 10 - 10,230s in 10s increments 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 2% or 50ms, whichever is greater 50ms 150ms Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle THD3C42A0 Description The THD3C42A0 combines accurate timing circuitry with high power, solid-state switching. It can switch motors, lamps, and heaters directly without a contactor. The THD3C42A0 has equal on and off time delays. A single RT sets both time delays. You can reduce labor, component cost, and increase reliability with these small, easy-to-use, Digi-Power timers. Operation (Recycling Flasher - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to T1 ON time. Operation (Recycling Flasher - OFF Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of T1, T2 begins and the load de-energizes. This cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to T2 OFF time. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Features & Benefits V = Voltage L = Load S1 = Optional Low Current Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / -0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 1% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and component costs High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of motors, lamps, and heaters without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Accessories TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 FEATURES P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. www.littelfuse.com/thd3c42a0 412 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle THD3C42A0 External Resistance vs. Time Delay Specifications Time Delay Range Adjustment Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Maximum Load Current This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Minimum Load Current Voltage Drop OFF State Leakage Current Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting ** Dimensions Function Diagrams RECYCLING (ON FIRST) RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 1% 150ms 2% 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz 2VA Solid state Steady State Inrush** 20A 200A 100mA 2.5V at rated current 5mA @ 230VAC Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 38.4 mm (1.51") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 3.9 oz (111 g) **Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact V = Voltage TD1, TD2 = Time Open Delay NO = Normally R = Reset Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact V = Voltage TD1, TD2 = Time Delay NO = Normally R = Reset Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Single variable resistor changes both the on & off times equally 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 413 www.littelfuse.com/www.littelfuse.com/thd3c42a0 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle TSD3411S Recycling Timer Description The TSD3411S is a solid-state ON/OFF recycling timer with the on time always equal to the off time. When time delay is changed by the RT, both the ON and the OFF periods are changed. The TSD Series is designed for more demanding commercial and industrial applications where small size, and accurate performance is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 1% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.1% of the time delay. The TSD3411S is rated to operate over an extended temperature range. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 100 hours are available. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Recycling Flasher - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1, ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the T1 ON time. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Features & Benefits RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1%, + / -1% time delay accuracy Extended temperature range Rated to 75C operating temperature to withstand high heat applications. Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A Steady solid-state output, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. www.littelfuse.com/tsd3411s 414 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle TSD3411S External Resistance vs. Time Delay Specifications Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Maximum Load Current Off State Leakage Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Function Diagram FLASHER (ON FIRST) Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight V = Voltage L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 T2 R = Reset 0.1s - 100h in 7 adjustable ranges 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 1% 150ms 1% 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz 2VA Solid state 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 5mA @ 230VAC 2.5V @ 1A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 75C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) ON time plus OFF time equals one complete flash. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 415 www.littelfuse.com/tsd3411s Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle TSDR SERIES Description The TSDR Series is an ON/OFF or OFF/ON recycling timing module designed to control metering pumps, chemical valves, flash lamps, or use in energy saving or duty cycling applications. The TSDR Series is designed for more demanding commercial and industrial applications where small size and accurate performance are required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is < 5%. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the time delay. The TSDR Series is rated to operate over an extended temperature range. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Recycling - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1, ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2, OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the T1 ON time. Operation (Recycling - OFF Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of the T1, T2 begins and the load de-energizes. This cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to T2 OFF time. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. An onboard adjustment, or terminals 4 & 5 are only included on adjustable units. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. Features & Benefits Ordering Information TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 MODEL INPUT VOLT. TSDR215SB18M TSDR415SB18M 24VAC 120VAC TSDR4412SA1 120VAC TSDR442MA2 120VAC TSDR4430SA2 120VAC TSDR610.2SA0.2S TSDR6110SA30S TSDR612.5SA4.5S TSDR615SB18M 230VAC 230VAC 230VAC 230VAC TSDR6412SA1 230VAC ADJUST. Fixed Fixed On time fixed, off external On time fixed, off external On time fixed, off external Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed On time fixed, off external T1 ON TIME FIRST DELAY T2 OFF TIME 5s 5s Off time Off time 18m 18m 12s On time 1 - 100s 2m On time 10 - 1000s 30s On time 10 - 1000s 0.2s 10s 2.5s 5s On time On time On time Off time 0.2s 30s 4.5s 18m 12s On time 1 - 100s FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat accuracy +/- 0.5%, Factory calibration +/- 5% 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Wide operating temperature range: -40 to 75C Reliable in demanding commercial and industrial applications Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Allows flexibility for OEM applications Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/tsdr 416 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Recycle TSDR SERIES Function Diagrams Accessories P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. RECYCLING (ON FIRST) P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Specifications External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 417 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms 5% 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz 2VA Solid state 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 5mA @ 230VAC 2.5V @ 1A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 75C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) www.littelfuse.com/tsdr 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Maximum Load Current Off State Leakage Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact V = Voltage TD1, = Time Delay NO TD2 = Normally Open R = Reset Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact V = Voltage TD1,=TD2 = Time Delay NO Normally R = Reset Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Percentage PTHF4900DK Description The PTHF4900DK can be used for a variety of applications from chemical metering, to temperature regulating, to energy management. The infinite adjustability from 1 to 99% provides accurate percentage on control over a wide factory fixed cycle period. When mounted on a metal surface, it can be used to drive solenoids, contactors, relays, or lamps, up to 20A steady, 200A inrush. The PTHF4900DK is the suggested replacement for the PT Series. Operation (Percentage) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Increasing the ON time decreases the OFF time. The total cycle period is equal to the ON time plus the OFF time. The total cycle period is factory fixed. ON time range is 1 to 99 percent of cycle period. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the T1 ON time. Wiring Diagram L1 Features & Benefits N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load S1 = Optional Low Current Initiate Switch T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time RT = 100 K RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat accuracy + / -0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% ON/OFF recycling percentage control 1 to 99% Accurate control over a wide factory fixed cycle period Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces component and labor costs High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of motors, lamps, and heaters without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Accessories For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 FEATURES P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. www.littelfuse.com/pthf4900dk 418 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Percentage PTHF4900DK Specifications Time Delay Type Range/External Adjustment Resistance Cycle Period Repeat Accuracy Cycle Period Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Maximum Load Currents Voltage Drop OFF State Leakage Current Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting * Dimensions External or onboard knob Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 38.4 mm (1.51") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Adjustable from 1 - 99% / R T = 100 K Fixed from 10s - 1000m 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 6, 10, 20A units: 3.9 oz (111 g) *Units rated 6A must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. 10% 120 or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz 2VA Function Diagram PERCENTAGE CP Solid state Steady State Inrush* 1A 10A 2.5V at rated current 5mA @ 230VAC L CP CP V = Input Voltage CP = Cycle Period L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time R = Reset Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 419 www.littelfuse.com/pthf4900dk Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Dual Function TDMB SERIES Delay-on-Make/Delay-on-Break Description The TDMB combines both delay-on-make and delay-on-break functions into one plug-in package. Selection of the time period is accomplished with dual switches, one for the on delay and the other for the off delay. SPDT or DPDT output options provide isolated, 10A switching capability. Operation (Delay-on-Make/Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied at all times. The output relay is de-energized. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the green LED glows and the delay-on-make time delay (T1) begins. At the end of T1, the output relay energizes and the red LED glows. When the initiate switch opens, the green LED turns OFF and the delay-on-break time delay (T2) begins. At the end of T2, the output relay de-energizes and the red LED turns OFF. Reset: Removing input voltage resets time delay and output. Opening the initiate switch during the delay-on-make delay, resets T1. Closing the initiate switch during the delay-on-break delay, resets T2. 8-PIN 11-PIN Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits 8-PIN OCTAL SPDT L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch or Thermostat Relay contacts are isolated. 11-PIN DPDT (P/N ends with D) L1 TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 FEATURES BENEFITS Digital circuitry Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1%, Setting accuracy + / - 2% Isolated, 10A, SPDT or DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages User selectable Delay-on-Make and Delay-on-Break time delay Timing settings are independently adjustable for added flexibility Industry standard octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors LED Indication Provides visual indication of initiate, timing, and relay output status DIP switch adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy N/L2 Accessories For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 23. BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT DELAY-ONVOLTAGE MAKE DELAY-ONBREAK PLUG TYPE TDMB411 120VAC 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments Octal (8-pin) SPDT TDMB413D 120VAC 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 10 - 10230s in 10s increments 11-pin DPDT TDMB422 120VAC 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments Octal (8-pin) SPDT TDMB422D 120VAC 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 11-pin DPDT TDMB622 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments Octal (8-pin) SPDT 230VAC NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. NDS-11 11-pin Socket 11-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC11 hold-down clips. PSC8 or PSC11 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use PSC8 with NDS-8 Octal Socket or PSC11 with NDS-11 Socket. Sold in sets of two. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/tdmb 420 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Dual Function TDMB SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Range** Repeat Accuracy Setting Accuracy Reset Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Control LED Indicator Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 110 to 230VAC/DC AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating Life Max. Switching Voltage Relay LED Indicator Protection Insulation Resistance Polarity Isolation Voltage Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Microcontroller circuitry 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 10 - 10,230s in 10s increments 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 2% or 50ms, whichever is greater 150ms 2% Green; on when the initiate switch is closed 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC; 24 to 240VAC/DC; 12 to 48VDC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz / 10% AC 2VA; DC 2W Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE / DELAY-ON-BREAK Electromechanical relay SPDT or DPDT 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 230VAC Mechanical - 1 x107; Electrical - 1 x 105 250VAC Red; on when output relay energizes (not included on 12VDC units) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1,TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 100M DC units are reverse polarity protected 1500V RMS input to output Plug-in socket H 81.3 mm (3.2"); W 60.7 mm (2.4"); D 45.2 mm (1.8") Octal 8-pin plug-in, magnal 11-pin plug-in 12 -20 to 60C / -30 to 85C 6 oz (170 g) TIME DELAY RELAYS Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight Digi-Set Binary Switch Operation ** For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 421 www.littelfuse.com/tdmb Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Dual Function ESD52233 Delay-on-Make/Interval Description The ESD5 Series is an accurate, solid-state, delayed interval timer. It offers a 1A steady, 10A inrush output and is available with adjustable or fixed time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes in six ranges. Input voltages of 24, 120, or 230VAC are available. Encapsulation offers protection against shock and vibration. Adjustment options are factory fixed, onboard or externally adjustable. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.1%. The factory calibration of the time delay is 5%. Operation (Delayed Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the T1 delay-on-make time delay begins and the output remains de-energized. At the end of this delay, the output energizes and the T2 interval delay begins. At the end of the interval delay period, the output de-energizes. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the time delays, and returns the sequence to the first delay. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load T1 = Delay-on-Make time T2 = Interval delay time Features & Benefits RT is the external adjustment component. Note: Terminals 4, 5 and/or 7, 8 are included when external adjustment is ordered. A knob is included when onboard adjust is ordered. FEATURES BENEFITS Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces component and labor costs Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1%, Factory calibration + / - 5% 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. www.littelfuse.com/esd52233 422 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Dual Function ESD52233 External Resistance vs. Time Delay Specifications Time Delay Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Power Consumption Output Type Rating OFF State Leakage Current Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE / INTERVAL V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1,TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms 2% 24VAC 20% 50/60 Hz 2VA Solid state 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 5mA @ 230VAC 2.5V @ 1A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 75C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 423 www.littelfuse.com/esd52233 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Dual Function KRPD SERIES Relay Output Timer Description The KRPD Series is a factory programmed time delay relay available with 1 of 12 standard dual functions. The time delays can be factory fixed, onboard or externally adjustable or a combination of fixed and adjustable. The SPDT output relay contacts offer a full 10A rating with complete isolation. Its microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KRPD Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, accuracy and long life. Features & Benefits N/L2 BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories Wiring Diagram L1 FEATURES P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. V = Voltage C = Common, Transfer Contact NC = Normally Closed NO = Normally Open S1 = Initiate Switch UTL = Untimed Load P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. A knob is supplied for adjustable units or RT terminals for external adjust. The untimed load is optional. S1 is not used for some functions. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT ADJUSTMENT 1 TIME DELAY 1 ADJUSTMENT 2 TIME DELAY 2 FUNCTION KRPD215S190SMB 24VAC Fixed 5s Fixed KRPD417M113MRXD 120VAC Fixed 7m Fixed 90s Delay-on-Make/Delay-on-Break 13m Recycling/Off Time First KRPDA175S130SMI 24 to 240VAC/DC Fixed 75s KRPDA2129RXE 24 to 240VAC/DC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Fixed 30s Delay-on-Make/Interval Onboard 10 - 1000h Recycling KRPDD2121MB 12 to 48VDC Onboard 0.1-10s Onboard 0.1-10s Delay-on-Make/Delay-on-Break Specifications If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/krpd 424 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Dual Function KRPD SERIES Output Current/Ambient Temperature Specifications Time Delay Type Range Function Diagrams DELAY-ON-MAKE / DELAY-ON-BREAK DELAY-ON-MAKE / INTERVAL V = Voltage V = Voltage S1 = Initiate S1 =Switch Initiate Switch NO = Normally NO Contact = Normally Open Open NC = NormallyContact Closed NC =Contact Normally Closed TD1,TD2 = Time Delay Contact R = Reset TD1, TD2 = Undefined = Time Delay RTime = Reset V = Voltage NO = Normally = Undefined Time Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1,TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset RECYCLING (ON FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset ACCUMULATIVE DELAY-ON-MAKE / INTERVAL Max. Switching Voltage Life (Operations) Protection Circuitry Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Polarity Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 425 2% 150ms 40ms; 750 operations per minute 2% 12 to 48VDC; 24 to 240VAC/DC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz / 10% AC 2VA; DC 2W Isolated relay contacts SPDT 10A resistive @ 125VAC 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC 1/4 hp @ 125VAC 250VAC Mechanical - 1 x 107; Electrical - 1 x 105 Encapsulated 1500V RMS input to output 100 M DC units are reverse polarity protected Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connects -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.6 oz (74 g) www.littelfuse.com/krpd 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Reset Time Initiate Time Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 12 to 48VDC 24 to 240VAC/DC AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Form Rating (at 40C) Microcontroller circuitry 0.1s - 1000h in 9 adjustable ranges or fixed (to 999) 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- HVAC CT SERIES Delay-on-Make/Delay-on-Break Timer Description The CT Series combines a delay-on-make and delay-on-break time delay into one unit and may be used to control fan delays in heating and/or cooling equipment. The CT includes bypass circuitry to allow it to operate with cooling anticipators 3000 ohms. It is designed to operate in 24VAC control circuits. Several CT modules may be combined to provide sequencing of any number of loads and sequencing off of the same loads, such as electric heating elements. Operation (Delay-on-Make/Delay-on-Break) Forced Air Heating or Air Conditioning (as shown): When the thermostat closes, the compressor relay is immediately energized. At the end of a fixed delay-on-make delay (T1), the fan relay is energized. When the thermostat opens, the compressor relay is de-energized and the delay-on-break delay is initiated. On completion of the fixed delay-on- break delay (T2) the fan relay is de-energized. If the thermostat is reclosed during the delay-on-break delay, the delay-on-break delay is reset and the fan relay remains energized. If the thermostat is closed when input voltage is applied, the delay-on-make delay (T1) begins as normal. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays. Wiring Diagram L1 N V = Voltage FR = Fan Relay FS = Fan Switch CR = Compressor Relay THMS = Wall Thermostat Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Delay-on-Make and Delay-on-Break in one unit Simplifies wiring and installation, and optimizes efficiency of heating and cooling systems Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Interconnectability with other CT modules Combine modules to provide sequencing on of a number of loads and sequencing off of the same loads For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Accessories P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Ordering Information MODEL DELAY-ON-MAKE (FIXED SECONDS) DELAY-ON-BREAK (FIXED SECONDS) CT1S30 1 30 CT1S45 1 45 CT1S8 1 8 CT1S90 1 90 CT30S1 30 1 CT45S45 45 45 CT5S300 5 300 P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/ct 426 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- HVAC CT SERIES Specifications Accessories C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE DELAY-ON-BREAK V = Voltage FS = Fan Switch FR = Fan Relay T1 = Delay-on-Make T2 = Delay-on-Break R = Reset = Undefined Time Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Recycle Time Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Rating Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Thermostat Microcontroller 1 - 600s 5% 20% 300ms 24VAC 15% 50/60 Hz Solid state NO 0.75A steady state, 5A inrush at 55C 1.25V Encapsulated 2000V rms terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 70C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) Anticipator Resistor: 3000 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 427 www.littelfuse.com/ct Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- HVAC T2D120A15M Lockout Description Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 RANDOM START PLUS LOCKOUT L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load S1 = Initiate Switch or Thermostat The T2D Series provides protection against short cycling of compressors and other motors. At the end of each operation, a lockout delay prevents restarting the compressor or motor until the delay is completed. 24VAC models can be used with thermostats that include a cooling anticipator resistor. It can be connected in series with the load for delay-on-make operation. Operation (Lockout with Random Start) Connection #1: Upon application of input voltage, a random start time delay begins. At the end of this time delay, the output is energized. Lockout Delay: Input voltage must be applied prior to and during timing. When the thermostat or initiate switch opens, the output de-energizes and the lockout time delay begins. At the end of the lockout delay, the output is energized allowing the load to immediately energize when the initiate switch or thermostat closes. Connection #2: Upon application of input voltage and closure of initiate switch, the time delay begins. At the end of the time delay, the output is energized and remains energized until power is removed. Reset: Removing power resets the output and the time delay. Features & Benefits DELAY-ON-MAKE TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. FEATURES BENEFITS Lockout delay Prevents rapid cycling of compressor Random start delay Prevents low voltage starting Analog circuitry Repeat Accuracy + / - 1% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A steady, 10A inrush output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and fully encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration and humidity Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. www.littelfuse.com/t2d120a15m 428 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- HVAC T2D120A15M Specifications Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Output Minimum Load Current Rating Voltage Drop Time Delay Initiate Time Type Lockout & Random Start Delays Function Diagram RANDOM START PLUS LOCKOUT 120/230VAC in 2 ranges 20% 50/60 Hz E 24VAC - 100mA; 120/230VAC - 40mA 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 2.5V @ 1A L DELAY-ON-MAKE E After timing - 16ms Analog circuitry V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load (CR) E = Ready TD = Time Delay R = Reset L 1s - 100m in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed Note: The lockout & random start delays are the same length. Tolerance Repeat Accuracy Reset Time Protection Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Cooling Anticipator (24VAC Units Only) Minimum Cooling Anticipator Adjustable: 30%; factory fixed: 30% 1% or 20ms, whichever is greater After timing - 16ms; During timing - 200ms 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -20 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) 3,000 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 429 www.littelfuse.com/t2d120a15m Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- HVAC TA SERIES Lockout Description The TA Series prevents rapid recycling of a compressor. A lockout delay is started when the thermostat opens, or input voltage is lost. Eliminates tripped circuit breakers or blown fuses caused by a locked rotor during short cycling. The TA will not allow the compressor to start when the line voltage is low. Chatter of the compressor relay is eliminated. Because of the fast initiate time, bounce of the thermostat will not be transmitted to the compressor relay coil. A 30 second delay provides anti-reversing protection for scroll compressors. Operation (Lockout) On initial closure of the S1, the compressor relay energizes immediately. When S1 opens or input voltage is interrupted, a lockout time delay is initiated. During this lockout time delay, the compressor relay cannot be energized. The low voltage (brownout) protection prevents energization of the compressor when the line voltage is low. Reset: The lockout time delay cannot be reset. After the time delay is completed, the unit automatically resets. Wiring Diagram L1 N Features & Benefits V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch, Contact, or Thermostat CR = Compressor Relay (Load) CA = Optional Cooling Anticipator For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. BENEFITS Lockout delay Prevents rapid cycling of compressor and eliminates nuisance service calls due to blown fuse or tripped breaker by locked rotor during short cycling Anti-reversing protection for scroll compressors Extends life of equipment Brownout protection Timer will not allow the compressor to start during low line voltage conditions Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity 1A solid state output No moving parts to arc and wear out. Provides up to 100 million operations under typical conditions Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS FEATURES P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE TIME DELAY TA12D1 12VDC 1m TA12D2 12VDC 2m TA24A0.5 24VAC 30s TA24A3 24VAC 3m TA24A5 24VAC 5m P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/ta P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. 430 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- HVAC TA SERIES Specifications Input Voltage AC Line Frequency Impedance Output Minimum Load Current Maximum Load Current Voltage Drop Time Delay Initiate Time Lockout Time Tolerance Protection Circuitry Low Voltage Protection Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance 12 or 24VDC; 24VAC 50/60 Hz 450 (anticipator by-pass) 75mA 1A at 60C 1.25V 16ms Fixed 0.5, 1, 2, 3, or 5m -15% - 35% Encapsulated 20V: 24VAC/DC; 9V: 12VDC 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Thermostat Cooling Anticipator Resistor Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 70C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) 1800 Function Diagram LOCKOUT E L V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load (CR) E = Ready TD = Time Delay R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 431 www.littelfuse.com/ta Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- HVAC TAC1 SERIES Delay-on-Make Description The TAC1 Series was designed to delay the operation of a compressor relay. It eliminates the possibility of relay chatter due to half-wave failure of the output. It connects in series with the load relay coil and provides a delay-on-make time delay each time input voltage is applied. It can be used for random start, anti-short cycling, sequencing, and many other applications. It is an excellent choice for all air conditioning and refrigeration equipment. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Analog circuitry Repeat accuracy + / - 2%, Factory calibration + / - 20% 0.5A steady state, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. V = Voltage L = Load Connects in series with load relay coil Fail-safe design eliminates contactor chatter Load may be connected to terminals 3 or 1. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Meets UL 873 UL Recognized for air conditioning and refrigeration equipment Fully encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration and humidity Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Accessories P1004-XX, P1004-XX-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY TAC1223 24VAC External 2 - 180s TAC1411 120VAC Fixed 1s TAC1412 120VAC Fixed 2s TAC1413 120VAC Fixed 3s TAC14164 120VAC Fixed 64s P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/tac1 432 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- HVAC TAC1 SERIES Accessories Specifications C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. VTP(X)(X) Plug-on Adjustment Module Mounts on modules with in-line adjustment terminals. Rated at 0.25W at 55C. Available in resistance values from 5K to 5M. Selection Table for VTP Plug-on Adjustment Accessory Time Delay VTP P/N 1 - 0.05-3s 2 - 0.5-60s 3 - 2-180s 4 - 5-600s VTP4B VTP4F VTP4J VTP5N Time Delay Type Range Repeat Accuracy Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Recycle Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Output Type Form Rating Voltage Drop Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Selection Guide Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Analog circuitry 0.05 - 600s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed 2% 20% 20ms after timing, during timing - 0.1% of time delay or 75ms, whichever is greater 10% 24, 120, or 230VAC 20% 50/60 Hz Solid state NO, open during timing 0.5A steady state, 10A inrush at 60C 120 & 230VAC: 4.2V @ 0.5A 24VAC: 2.5V @ 0.5A Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 80C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 433 www.littelfuse.com/tac1 Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- HVAC TL SERIES Lockout Description The TL Series provides protection against short cycling of a compressor. At the end of each operation, or whenever power is lost, a lockout delay is initiated. This lockout delay prevents restarting of the compressor until the head pressure has equalized. Compressor relay chatter due to thermostat bounce is eliminated by use of optional one second delay-on-make. The TL Series should not be used with cooling anticipator resistors or solid-state switches. (See the TA Series). Operation (Lockout) Lockout: On initial closure of S1, the compressor relay energizes immediately (or after an optional 1s delay). When the S1 opens or input voltage is interrupted, the output opens and remains open for the lockout time delay. During this lockout time delay period, the compressor relay cannot be re-energized. Reset: The lockout time delay cannot be reset. After the time delay is completed, the unit automatically resets. Wiring Diagram L1 Features & Benefits N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch CR = Compressor or Control Relay FEATURES BENEFITS Lockout delay Prevents rapid cycling of compressor and eliminates nuisance service calls due to blown fuse or tripped breaker by locked rotor during short cycling. One second Delay-on-Make (models ending in T) Eliminates contactor chatter due to thermostat bounce Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity 1A steady, 10A inrush, solid state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE LOCKOUT TIME DELAY-ON-MAKE TL120A5T 120VAC 5m 1s TL230A5 230VAC 5m No delay TL24A5T 24VAC 5m 1s P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. www.littelfuse.com/tl 434 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- HVAC TL SERIES Specifications Input Voltage AC Line Frequency Tolerance Output Minimum Load Current Maximum Load Current Inrush Current Voltage Drop Time Delay Initiate Time Lockout Time* Tolerance Option Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance 24, 120, or 230VAC 50/60 Hz 20% 40mA 1A @ 24VAC; 0.5A @ 120 & 230VAC at 60C 10A at 60C 24VAC - 2.5V @ 1A 120 & 230VAC - 4.2V @ 0.5A 8ms Fixed 2, 3, or 5m -15% - 35% 1s delay-on-make eliminates contactor chatter due to thermostat bounce Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight -40 to 70C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.4 oz (68 g) *Power must be applied for at least 15 s to achieve a full lockout delay. Less than 15 s will result in proportionally shorter delay periods. NOTE: Cooling anticipator resistor or leakage may cause erratic operation. See TA Series for use with 24VAC systems that include anticipator resistors or use solid-state switches. Function Diagram LOCKOUT E L V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load (CR) E = Ready TD = Time Delay R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 435 www.littelfuse.com/tl Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- HVAC TSA141300 Anti-Short Cycle, Solid State Timer Description Wiring Diagram COMPRESSOR RELAY LINE AUX CONTACT THERMOSTAT OVERLOAD R 3 2 1 The TSA141300 utilizes unique circuitry to provide random start and lockout delay in one small, rugged, inexpensive package. When connected as shown, the TSA141300 in a multiple unit situation, prevents all units from starting at one time with its random start feature. The TSA141300 also prevents the compressor from recycling rapidly which could result in a lock rotor condition. This lockout delay is initiated at the end of each operation of the compressor. A momentary loss of power would also initiate the lockout delay. Operation Random Start: With the thermostat closed, when line voltage is applied to system, a time delay is initiated. At the end of this delay, the compressor relay will be energized. (Random Start delay is equal to lockout delay.) Anti-Short Cycle: At the end of each cycle, when the thermostat opens, a lockout delay is initiated which prevents re-energization of the compressor relay during this period. If the thermostat is closed after the time delay is completed, the compressor relay will energize Immediately. Loss of Power: If there is a momentary loss of power, the lockout will again be initiated preventing the compressor relay from energizing for the duration of the delay. Features & Benefits g g For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. g g Lockout Delay--prevents rapid recycling of compressor in air conditioning, refrigeration, and heat pump equipment Random Start Delay--provides staggered start up of multiple units Fast response time All Solid State with Encapsulated Circuitry Specifications TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 Time Delay Type Repeat Accuracy Tolerance Time Delay vs. Temperature Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Output Type Maximum Load Current Voltage Drop Protection Transient Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Package Termination Factory fixed 5 minutes 5% under fixed conditions Factory calibration: 15% 10% max. Dimensions 120 volts AC 20% of nominal 50/60 Hz Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Solid State 1 ampere steady state, 10 amperes inrush at 60C 2.5 volts typical at 1 ampere -40C to +80C/-40C to +85C 95% relative, non-condensing Function Diagram RANDOM START/LOCKOUT DELAY Protected Greater than 1500 volts RMS 100 megohms min. TH CR www.littelfuse.com/tsa141300 Surface mount with one #8 or #10 screw Molded housing with encapsulated circuitry 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals H 50.80 mm (2.0"); W 50.80 mm (2.0"); D 30.70 mm (1.21") 436 V = Input Voltage TH = Thermostat CR = Compressor Relay TD = Time Delay R = Reset (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Coin Vending HRV SERIES Coin Counter Description The HRV combines the accuracy of microcontroller based circuitry with an electromechanical relay output. The HRV's switching capacity allows direct control of loads like compressors, pumps, motors, heaters, and lighting. The HRV "S" version provides a vend time after the selected number of initiate switch closures to start is reached. The HRV "A" version includes all of the "S" features and allows the total vend time to be extended for each additional initiate switch closure. The HRV is ideal for cost sensitive single coin or token vending machines. The electronic circuitry is encapsulated to protect against humidity and vibration. Operation Coin Totalizer & Vending Timer ("S" Version): Input voltage must be applied prior to & during operation. When the total number of S1 initiate switch closures equals the number to start set on the lower 3 DIP switches, the load energizes and the vending time set on the upper 7 DIP switches begins. At the end of the vending time, the load de-energizes and the vending time is reset. Closing the initiate switch during vend timing will have no affect on vend time delay. Accumulating Vending Timer ("A" Version): Input voltage must be applied prior to and during operation. When the total number of S1 initiate switch closures equals the number to start set on the lower 3 DIP switches, the load energizes and the vending time starts. For every initiate switch closure, the HRV unit adds one time per coin period, as set on the upper 7 DIP switches, to the total vending time. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 ISOLATED OUTPUT L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load UTL = Optional Untimed Load Operation Note: If S1 is closed when input voltage is applied, the output remains de-energized and the S1 counter remains at zero closures. At least one "vend time" and one "closures to start" DIP switch must be in the "ON" position for proper operation. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the vend time delay, the S1 closure counter, and de-energizes the output relay. Features & Benefits NON-ISOLATED OUTPUT Ordering Information BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat accuracy + / - 0.1%, Setting accuracy 0 - 2%, or 50ms Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity 30A , 1Hp at 125VAC, normally open contacts Allows direct control of loads like compressors, pumps, motors, and heaters without a contactor Switch selectable coin start Allows user flexibility to select the number of coins to start vending cycle Coin switch can be connected to a counter Provides user with accurate count of total number of coins collected MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE VEND TIME MODE OF OPERATION HRV11SC 12VDC 1 - 127s Coin totalizer OUTPUT FORM & RATING 30A SPDT, NO (isolated) HRV24AC 24VAC 0.25 - 31.75m Accumulating 30A SPDT, NO (isolated) HRV41AE 120VAC 1 - 127s Accumulating 30A SPDT, NO (isolated) HRV41SE 120VAC 1 - 127s Coin totalizer 30A SPDT, NO (isolated) HRV42SE 120VAC 5 - 635s Coin totalizer 30A SPDT, NO (isolated) HRV43AE 120VAC 0.1 - 12.7m Accumulating 30A SPDT, NO (isolated) HRV43AN 120VAC 0.1 - 12.7m Accumulating 30A SPDT, NO (non-isolated) HRV43SE 120VAC 0.1 - 12.7m Coin totalizer 30A SPDT, NO (isolated) If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 437 www.littelfuse.com/hrv 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. FEATURES Time Delay Relays Dedicated -- Coin Vending HRV SERIES Accessories Specifications P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Switch Adjustment Combine upper seven switches in "ON" position for vend time in minutes. Combine lower three switches in "ON" position for number of closures to start. Function Diagram COIN TOTALIZER / VENDING TIMER TIME DELAY RELAYS 12 ACCUMULATING VENDING TIMER L ACCUMULATING VENDING TIMER NO, L NO, L V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load V = Voltage TD = Time Delay S1 = Initiate Switch R = Reset NO = Normally Open Contact V = Voltage LS1 = Load = Initiate Switch TD Delay NO==Time Normally R = Reset Open Contact L = Load TD = Time Delay R = Reset Count Functions/ Switch Type Minimum Switch Closure Time Minimum Switch Open (between closures) Time Count Range to Start Maximum Counts ("A" Version) Time Delay/Range *** Adjustment Setting Accuracy Repeat Accuracy Reset Time Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 120 & 230 VAC AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple Power Consumption Output Type Form Ratings General Purpose 125/240VAC Resistive 125/240VAC 28VDC Motor Load 125VAC 240VAC Life Protection Surge Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Mechanical (counts on switch closure) 20ms 20ms 1 - 7 counts 250 Adjustable 1s - 31.75m in 4 ranges 7 of a 10 position DIP switch 0% to +2% or 50ms, whichever is greater 0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 150ms 2% 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60 Hz / 10% AC 4VA; DC 2W Electromechanical relay Isolated, SPDT or non-isolated, SPDT SPDT-NO SPDT-NC 30A 15A 30A 20A 15A 10A 1 hp* 1/4 hp** 2 hp** 1 hp** Mechanical - 1 x 10 6; Electrical - 1 x 105, *3 x 104, ** 6,000 IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Encapsulated 1500V RMS input to output on isolated units 100 M Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 76.7 mm (3"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 38.1 mm (1.5") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals -40 to 70C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 3.9 oz (111 g) ***For CE approved applications, voltage must be removed when a switch position is changed. www.littelfuse.com/hrv 438 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS Flashers for incandescent or LED lighting used with both alternating and non-alternating applications in the signaling, communications, and advertising industries. FAA approved versions for obstruction lighting control are available. Tower lighting illuminates communications towers, tall buildings, and bridges as required by FA regulation. Designs are also available for powered AM and FM towers. Flashers FSU1000 Series ............................................................................ 440 FS100 Series Low Current Flasher ........................................... 442 FS100 Series Med Power Flasher ............................................ 444 FS200 Series ............................................................................ 446 FS300 Series ............................................................................ 448 FS491 ............................................................................ 450 FS500 Series ............................................................................ 451 SC3 / SC4 Series Sequencing Controls........................................... 453 Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls FA / FS Series ............................................................................ 455 FB Series Flasher & Incandescent Beacon Alarm Relay .... 457 SCR490D Obstruction Lamp Alarm Relay ........................... 458 SCR Series Universal Lamp Alarm Relay .............................. 459 FB9L Universal Lamp Alarm Relay .............................. 461 SCR9L Universal Lamp Alarm Relay .............................. 463 PCR Series Photo Control ...................................................... 465 13 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 439 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FSU1000 SERIES Description The FSU1000 incorporates an onboard adjustable flash rate of 10 to 100 FPM and a universal input voltage in one device. Its circuitry is encapsulated and is capable of controlling loads of up to 20A. The versatility of the FSU1000 makes it ideal for applications where various flash rates and operating voltages are required. Operation When input voltage is applied to terminal 2 and the load (lamp), the load energizes steadily. When input voltage is applied to terminal 3, the output flashes. Optional Low Current Switch (S1): This low current switch could be a limit switch or contact. While open, the operator sees the load (lamp) ON and operating. When the limit switch closes, the load (lamp) flashes to attract attention. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Optional low current switch L = Load FEATURES BENEFITS Universal input voltage 24 to 240VAC Allows flexibility for a wide range of applications with one part Onboard adjustable flash rate Provides flexibility for user to select flash rate between 10 - 100 FPM Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity High output rating up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of high current loads without a contactor Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Ordering Information MODEL INRUSH RATING LOAD RATING FSU1000 10A 1A FSU1003 60A 6A FSU1004 100A 10A FSU1005 200A 20A If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/fsu1000 440 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FSU1000 SERIES Specifications Technical Data Operation Flash Rate ON/OFF Ratio Input Range/Frequency Output Load Type Maximum Load Rating Inrush Mechanical Mounting* Dimensions FSU1000 FSU1003, FSU1004 Termination Protection Circuitry Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight Flasher Function Diagram FLASHER (NC) ON/OFF recycling solid-state flasher (continuous duty) Adjustable 10 - 100 FPM 50% 24 to 240VAC / 50/60Hz V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load R = Reset T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 T2 Inductive, resistive, or incandescent 1, 6, 10, or 20A steady state 10 times steady state current Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 38.4 mm (1.51") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Encapsulated -20 to 60C (240VAC +50C) / -40 to 85C 1A units: 2.4 oz (68 g) 6A units: 3.9 oz (111 g) *Units rated > 6A must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90C. 13 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 441 www.littelfuse.com/fsu1000 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FS100 SERIES Low Current Flasher Description The FS100 Series (low current) may be used to control inductive, incandescent or resistive loads. This series offers a 1A (fullwave) or a 2A (halfwave) steady state, 10A inrush solid-state output and may be ordered with an input voltage of 24 or 120VAC. The FS100 Series offers a factory fixed flash rate of 75 FPM or may be ordered with a fixed, custom flash rate ranging from 45 to 150 FPM. Ideal for OEM applications where cost is a factor. Operation Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of T1, T2 begins and the load de-energizes. This cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to T2. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N V = Voltage L = Load R = Red Wire B = Black Wire FEATURES BENEFITS Compact Size: 38 x 23.9mm (1.5" x 0.94") Ideal for OEM applications Custom Flash Rates Available Tailor to specific application: custom rates range from 45 to 150 FPM Accessories P1023-2 "P" Clamp Mounting Bracket Alum. 15/16 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 25. Ordering Information FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 MODEL INPUT VAC OUTPUT TYPE AC LOAD TYPE FLASH RATE FS126 120 OUTPUT RATING A 1 Fullwave Incandescent & Resistive 75 FPM FS126-45 120 1 Fullwave Incandescent & Resistive 45 FPM FS126-60 120 1 Fullwave Incandescent & Resistive 60 FPM FS126RC 120 1 Fullwave Incandescent, Resistive, & Inductive 75 FPM FS126RC-45 120 1 Fullwave Incandescent, Resistive, & Inductive 45 FPM FS127 120 2 Halfwave Incandescent & Resistive 75 FPM FS146 24 1 Fullwave Incandescent & Resistive 75 FPM FS146RC 24 1 Fullwave Incandescent, Resistive, & Inductive 75 FPM If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/fs100Lowcurrent 442 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FS100 SERIES Low Current Flasher Specifications Technical Data Operation Flash Rate Custom Flash Rates Available ON/OFF Ratio Input Voltage AC Line Frequency Output Output Load Type Maximum Load Rating Inrush Mechanical Mounting Connection/Wires Dimensions Protection Circuitry Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Flasher Function Diagram FLASHER (OFF FIRST) OFF/ON solid-state flasher (continuous duty) Factory fixed at 75 FPM 20% From 45-150 FPM 20% 50% 24, 120VAC, 15% 50/60Hz V = Voltage R = Reset L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 T2 Fullwave AC or Halfwave rectified AC Incandescent, resistive, or inductive (Choose RC suffix for inductive loads) Fullwave: 1A steady state Halfwave: 2A steady state 10A Removable mounting bracket, use one #8 (M4 x 0.7) screw 18 AWG (0.82mm2) wires 6 in. (15.2cm) H 38.1 mm (1.5"); W 23.9 mm (0.94") Encapsulated -20 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 1.1 oz (31 g) 13 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 443 www.littelfuse.com/fs100Lowcurrent Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FS100 SERIES Medium Power Flasher Description The FS100 Series (medium power) may be used to control inductive, incandescent, or resistive loads. Input voltages of 24, 120, or 230VAC are available. Fixed flash rates in stock range from 30, 50, 60, and 90 FPM, with custom flash rates ranging from 10 to 300 FPM. Encapsulation provides protection against shock, vibration, and humidity. This group of solid-state flashers has proven reliability with years of use throughout the world. Operation Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of T1, T2 begins and the load de-energizes. This cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to T2. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 FEATURES BENEFITS 3A steady, 30A inrush current Provides direct control of inductive, incandescent, or resistive loads Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. V = Voltage L = Load P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT FLASH RATE FS143 24VAC 90 FPM FS152 120VAC 90 FPM FS152-30 120VAC 30 FPM FS152-60 120VAC 60 FPM FS162 230VAC 90 FPM FS162-30 230VAC 30 FPM C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 www.littelfuse.com/fs100med 444 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FS100 SERIES Medium Power Flasher Specifications Technical Data Operation Flash Rate Custom Flash Rates ON/OFF Ratio Input Voltage/Frequency Output Load Type Output Maximum Load Rating Inrush Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Protection Circuitry Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight Flasher Function Diagram OFF/ON solid-state flasher (continuous duty) Fixed at 90 FPM 10% 10 - 300 FPM 10% 50% FLASHER (OFF FIRST) 24, 120, or 230VAC 15% / 50/60 Hz V = Voltage R = Reset L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 T2 Inductive, resistive, or incandescent Fullwave AC, solid state, SPST 3A steady state 10 times steady state current Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6 .35 mm) male quick connect terminals Encapsulated -20 to 60C / -40 to 85C 2.2 oz (62 g) 13 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 445 www.littelfuse.com/fs100med Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FS200 SERIES Description The FS200 Series may be used to control inductive, incandescent, or resistive loads. Factory fixed flash rate of 45 or 90 FPM or may be ordered with a fixed custom flash rate ranging from 10 to 180 FPM. Encapsulation provides protection against shock, vibration, and humidity. Uniform performance, high inrush current capability, and low RFI, make this series ideal for general industrial applications. Operation Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of T1, T2 begins and the load de-energizes. This cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to T2. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram V = Voltage L = Load FEATURES BENEFITS 3A steady, 30A inrush, SPST output contact Provides direct control of inductive, incandescent, or resistive loads Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity High inrush current capability and low RFI Ideal for general industrial applications Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT RATING FLASH RATE FS219-45 12VDC 20% 3A 45 FPM FS224 24VDC 20% 3A 90 FPM C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. www.littelfuse.com/fs200 446 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FS200 SERIES Specifications Technical Data Operation Flash Rate Custom Flash Rate ON/OFF Ratio Input Voltage Output Load Type Maximum Load Rating OFF State Leakage Current 12 & 24VDC Inrush Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Protection Circuitry Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight Flasher Function Diagram OFF/ON solid-state flasher (continuous duty) Fixed at 90 FPM 10% 10 - 180 FPM 50% FLASHER (OFF FIRST) 12, 24, 36, 48, or 110VDC V = Voltage R = Reset L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 T2 Inductive, resistive, or incandescent 0.25 - 3A steady state 250 A 10 times steady state current Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Encapsulated -20 to 60C / -40 to 85C 2.2 oz (62 g) 13 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 447 www.littelfuse.com/fs200 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FS300 SERIES Description The FS300 Series of solid-state flashers were specifically designed to operate lamp loads. Their two-terminal series connection feature makes installation easy. The high immunity to line noise and transients makes the FS300 Series ideal for moving vehicle applications. All solid-state construction means reliability and long life. The FS300 Series offers a factory fixed flash rate of 75 FPM or may be ordered with a fixed, custom flash rate ranging from 60 to 150 FPM. Operation Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of T1, T2 begins and the load de-energizes. This cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to T2. Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits V = Voltage L = Load FEATURES BENEFITS Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity High immunity to line noise and transients Designed specifically for moving vehicle applications High surge current capability (10 times steady state) Direct operation of incandescent lamp loads Two terminal series connection Provides quick and easy installation for new or existing applications Accessories For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT MAXIMUM CURRENT LOAD FS312 12VDC 20% 2.5A FS324 24VDC 20% 1.5A P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. www.littelfuse.com/fs300 448 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FS300 SERIES Specifications Technical Data Operation Flash Rate Custom Flash Rates ON/OFF Ratio Input Voltage Output Load Type Maximum Load Rating Inrush Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Protection Circuitry Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Flasher Function Diagram FLASHER (OFF FIRST) OFF/ON recycling solid-state flasher (continuous duty) Fixed at 75 FPM 10% 60 - 150 FPM 50% V = Voltage R = Reset L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 T2 12, 24, 36, 48, 72, & 110VDC Incandescent or resistive 0.25 - 2.5A steady state 10 times steady state current Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 30.7 mm (1.21") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Encapsulated -20 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 2.2 oz (62 g) 13 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 449 www.littelfuse.com/fs300 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FS491 Description The FS491 is a low leakage AC flasher designed to control LED, or resistive loads. This product offers a solid-state output and accepts an input voltage of 120VAC to 240VAC. It offers a factory fixed flash rate of 75 FPM. The FS491 is the perfect solution for LED lamp flashing. Operation Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the flash sequence. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load R = Red Wire B = Black Wire W = White Wire For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 25. FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 Function Diagram FLASHER (ON FIRST) ON time plus OFF time equals one complete flash. www.littelfuse.com/fs491 V = Voltage R = Reset L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 T2 FEATURES BENEFITS Totally solid state No moving parts to arc and wear out, up to 100 million operations under typical conditions Fully encapsulated Protects circuitry from shock, vibration and humidity Extremely low leakage current Ideal for use in LED lighting applications Specifications Technical Data Operation Flash Rate ON/OFF Ratio Input Voltage Tolerance AC Line Frequency Output Load Type Output Maximum Load Rating 120VAC to 240VAC Max. Load Leakage Current Voltage Drop Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Protection Surge Circuitry Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight 450 ON/OFF solid-state flasher (continuous duty) Fixed at 75 FPM 20% 50% 120 - 240VAC 15% 50/60Hz LED or resistive Bridge Rectifier & FET 0.5A steady state; 5A inrush 250A 2V typical Surface mount with one #8 (M4 x 0.7) screw Dia. 23.9 mm (0.94"); L 38.1 mm (1.5") IEEE C62.41 - 1991 Level A Encapsulated -20 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 1.1 oz (31 g) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FS500 SERIES * *(some models) Description The FS500 Series flash rate is adjustable from 10 to 100 FPM. A locknut is provided to hold selected flash rate. The long-life electronic circuit combined with a quality electromechanical relay provides flexibility and reliability in most applications. Operation Upon application of input voltage, the output relay is energized and the ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output relay de-energizes and the OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output is energized and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence. 8-PIN Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram FEATURES BENEFITS Solid-state circuitry with electromechanical relay Long life circuitry at a reliable low cost Industry standard octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors Adjustable flash rate Provides flexibility for user to select flash rate between 10 - 100 FPM 10A, DPDT isolated output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages V = Voltage Accessories L1 BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. N/L2 NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 24. PSC8 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use with NDS-8 Octal Socket. Sold in pairs. Ordering Information INPUT VOLTAGE FS512 12VDC FS524 24VAC/DC FS590 120VAC/DC If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 451 www.littelfuse.com/fs500 13 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS MODEL C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FS500 SERIES Specifications Technical Data Operation Flash Rate ON/OFF Ratio Input Input Voltage Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC 120VAC/VDC & 230VAC AC Line Frequency Output Load Type Form Rating Mechanical Mounting Dimensions Termination Protection Isolation Voltage Polarity Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight Flasher Function Diagram FLASHER (ON FIRST-DPDT) ON/OFF recycling flasher with adjustable flash rate Adjustable from 10 - 100 operations per minute (guaranteed range) 50% V = Voltage R = Reset T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed 12VDC, 24VAC/DC, 120VAC/DC, 230VAC -15% - 20% -20% - 10% 50/60Hz Electromechanical relay DPDT 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/ 240VAC Plug-in socket H 91.6 mm (3.62"); W 60.7 mm (2.39"); D 45.2 mm (1.78") Octal 8-pin plug-in 1500V RMS input to output DC units are reverse polarity protected -20 to 60C / -30 to 85C 5.8 oz (164 g) FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 www.littelfuse.com/fs500 452 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Sequencing Controls SC3 / SC4 SERIES Chaser Description The SC3/SC4 Series are solid-state 3 or 4 channel chasers designed for sequential three circuit flashing of incandescent lamp loads. Unlike electromechanical chasers, there are no contacts to arc, wear, and eventually fail. Operation Sequential 3 or 4 circuit flashing of incandescent loads with equal time delays for each load. Upon application of input voltage, Load 1 is energized. At the end of the time delay, Load 1 de-energizes and Load 2 energizes. At the end of the time delay, Load 2 de-energizes and Load 3 energizes. This cycle continues until input voltage is removed. The set time delay (rate) is the timing for the whole cycle, for all 3 loads (output contacts). Reset: Removing input voltage resets the unit and cycle. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 FEATURES BENEFITS Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity 1A steady solid state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. V = Voltage L1 = Load 1 L2 = Load 2 L3 = Load 3 L4 = Load 4 P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. SC4 shown. For SC3, terminal 6 and load L4 are eliminated. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 28. 13 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE RATING CHANNEL FLASH RATE SC3120A 120VAC 1A 3 Sequential Adjustable 30 - 30FPM SC4120A 120VAC 1A 4 Sequential Adjustable 30 - 30FPM If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 453 www.littelfuse.com/sc3-sc4 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Sequencing Controls SC3 / SC4 SERIES Specifications Technical Data Operation Flasher Function Diagram FLASHER (CHASING) Sequential 3 circuit flashing of incandescent lamp loads. Fixed rate. V = Voltage R = Reset L1, L2, L3, L4 = Lamps TD = Time Delay (all are equal) For sequential 4 circuit and adjustable rates, please contact the factory. Rate Input Voltage AC Line Frequency Output Type Rating Mechanical Mounting Termination Dimensions Protection Circuitry Dielectric Breakdown Insulation Resistance Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Fixed: 30 operations per minute (10%) 120VAC 15% 50/60 Hz Solid state 1A steady state per output 4 SC4 shown. For SC3, L4 is eliminated and L1 TD begins as soon as L3 TD is completed. Surface mount with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 63.5 mm (2.5"); D 31 mm (1.22") Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M -20 to 60C / -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 5.4 oz (153 g) FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 www.littelfuse.com/sc3-sc4 454 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls FA / FS SERIES * *(FS155 & FA155 models only) Description The FA/FS Series have proven their reliability through years of use on communication towers, smoke stacks, cooling towers, tall buildings, bridges and utility towers. The highest quality components are encapsulated in a rugged plastic housing with a molded-in heat transfer plate. The flash rate, ratio, and failsafe design meet FAA regulations. Zero voltage switching can increase lamp life up to ten times. The FS155-30RF includes superior RF filtering circuitry for use in high RF installations, including AM hot towers. Operation FS Series - Flasher (OFF First) FA Series - Auxiliary Modules Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of T1, T2 begins and the load de-energizes. This cycle repeats until voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to T2. FA155 FS165-30T Wiring Diagram N/L2 L1 (H) L1 L2 FS Series N/L2 L1 Features & Benefits FA155-2 (H) L1 N/L2 FEATURES BENEFITS Zero voltage switching Delivers up to 10 times longer lamp life Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Superior RF filtering Ideal for AM hot towers and other high circuitry (RF models only) RF installations FA155 FA165 High inrush capability up to 200A FA155-2 FA165-2 Will withstand the repetitive inrush current of incandescent beacons Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. V = Voltage N = Neutral B = Beacon DL = Dummy Load for Constant Line Loading Rd = 3.3 K @ 5W for 120VAC; 8.5 K @ 5W for 230VAC F = Flasher (FS155-30T, FS155-30RF, FS165-30T) AX = Auxiliary Unit (FA155, FA155-2, FA165, FA156-2) Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE WATTAGE INRUSH RATING DESCRIPTION FA155 120VAC 2500W 200A FA155-2 120VAC 2500W 200A FA165 230VAC 5000W 200A FA165-2 230VAC 5000W 200A FS155-30RF FS155-30T FS165-30T 120VAC 120VAC 230VAC 2500W 2500W 5000W 200A 200A 200A Auxiliary unit to provide constant line loading Auxiliary unit for synchronized operating of additional beacons. Synchronized flashing of additional beacons on a 3 wire system Auxiliary unit to provide constant line loading Auxiliary unit for synchronized operating of additional beacons. Synchronized flashing of additional beacons on a 2 wire system For high RF interference locations including AM hot towers Standard beacon flasher Standard beacon flasher If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 455 www.littelfuse.com/fa-fs 13 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls FA / FS SERIES Flasher Function Diagrams Specifications Operation FLASHER (OFF FIRST) FLASHERS & AUX. MODULES V = Voltage R = Reset L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 T2 F = Flasher DL = Dummy Load AX = Auxillary Module Flash Rate (FS Series Only) ON/OFF Ratio (FS Series Only) Voltage AC Line Frequency Output Rating (Zero Voltage Switching) Inrush Current Mounting* Dimensions Termination Circuitry Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight Single & multiple beacon flashing with auxiliary modules 30 10 FPM 50 - 67% ON time; 33 - 50% OFF time 120 or 230VAC 20% 50/60Hz 2500W @ 120VAC; 5000W @ 230VAC 200A peak for 1 cycle of AC line Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw H 50.8 mm (2"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 38.4 mm (1.51") 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Encapsulated -55 to 65C / -55 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 3.9 oz (111 g) * Note: Must be mounted to metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90C. FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 www.littelfuse.com/fa-fs 456 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls FB SERIES Flasher & Incandescent Beacon Alarm Relay Description The FB Series is used to monitor the operation of one twolamp incandescent beacon and one beacon flasher (or auxiliary module). The flasher and lamps are monitored by sensing the flow of current in the circuit. If the lamp(s) or the flasher fail to operate properly, a solid-state output and an isolated SPDT relay energize. When connected to a site monitoring system, this unit provides the remote beacon monitoring protection required by the FAA/FCC. On a multiple beacon structure, one unit is required for each two-lamp incandescent beacon (one unit per beacon for LED beacons). Operation If one lamp in an incandescent beacon fails, the relay and solidstate lamp failure outputs energize after 10s. If the flasher fails in the ON or OFF condition, the relay and the solid-state flasher failure output energizes after 6s. If both failures occur, all three outputs energize after their trip delays. Note: If both incandescent lamps fail, all three outputs will energize. The relay and solid-state flasher failure output energizes after 6s, and the solid-state lamp failure output energizes after 10s. Wiring Diagram L1 V = Voltage B = Beacon F = Flasher T = Toroid BRC = Flasher Bypass Relay Contacts AR = FB Alarm Relay BR = Bypass Relay Coil FL = Flasher Failure LED LL = Lamp Failure LED AXL = Lamp Alarm Relay Coil N/L2 Features & Benefits NOTE: Flasher module may be located on either the line or load side of the toroidal sensor. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 47. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE LAMP TYPE FB120A 120VAC Incandescent Beacon FB230A 230VAC Incandescent Beacon FEATURES BENEFITS Toroidal current sensing Reliable low cost monitoring of the flasher and lamps through built-in CT and provides isolatio n from the monitored circuit Failsafe beacon monitoring Alarm monitors for failed incandescent lamps in addition to flasher function One isolated, 5A, SPDT alarm output plus two, 1A, solid-state line voltage alarm outputs When connected to a site monitoring system, it provides the remote beacon monitoring protection required by the FAA / FCC. Fixed trip delays for flasher (6s) and lamp (10s) failures Prevents nuisance alarms If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Specifications Lamp Failure Detection FB120A FB230A Trip Delays Flasher Failure Lamp Failure LEDs Lamp Failure (Red) Flasher Failure (Red) Protection Circuitry Mounting Dimensions 120VAC 15% 230VAC 15% 50/60Hz 10%; 50/60Hz 3 total - 1 relay, 2 solid state; One isolated SPDT relay rated 5A resistive Two solid-state line voltage outputs rated 0.5A steady, 5A inrush Termination Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature Weight For two 620W or 700W lamps For two 500W or 700W lamps Fixed at 6s; -0/+40% Fixed at 10s; -0/+40% (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 457 13 Glows when one or both lamps fail Glows when the flasher fails Encapsulated Surface mount with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 63.5 mm (2.5"); D 44.5 mm (1.75") 7 position barrier block for 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) to 14 AWG (2.5 mm2) wire -55 to 60C / -55 to 85C 7 oz (198 g) www.littelfuse.com/fb FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS Input Voltage FB120A FB230A AC Line Frequency Lamp Socket Voltage Alarm Outputs Type Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls SCR490D Obstruction Lamp Alarm Relay Description The SCR490D is used to provide remote monitoring of steady burning incandescent marker and obstruction lighting. Four onboard switches allow operator programming for lighting systems with two through nine lamps on a single AC circuit. The SCR490D uses a toroidal sensor and electronic circuitry to sense the failure of one or more lamps. Operation When a lamp fails, the SCR490D senses a decrease in current flow. Then, after a fixed time delay, it transfers to its alarm mode. In alarm mode, the LED indicator, the output relay (SPDT isolated contacts), and a non-isolated solid-state output are energized. Replacement of the failed lamps resets the alarm outputs and the LED indicator. To prevent false alarm signals, power must be applied to the SCR490D at the same time that lamps are energized. Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage OL = Obstruction Lamps T = Toroid SS = Selector Switch AXL = Auxiliary Load/Alarm Relay contacts are isolated. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 47. FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 FEATURES BENEFITS Toroidal current sensing Reliable low cost monitoring of incandescent marker and obstruction lighting through built-in CT which also provides isolation from the lighting circuit Monitors 2 - 9 lamps Senses failed obstruction lamps on a single AC circuit Isolated, 10A, SPDT alarm output plus one 1A, Provide alarm indication and can also be used for solid-state line voltage remote monitoring of the lighting system alarm output Fixed trip delay (6s) Specifications Operation Number of Lamps Lamp Wattage Rated Lamp Voltage Monitored Voltage Trip Delay Voltage AC Line Frequency Tolerance 120VAC Line Voltage Output (Solid State Rated) Isolated Alarm Output Mounting Dimensions Termination Circuitry Operating/Storage Temperature Humidity Weight www.littelfuse.com/scr490d Prevents nuisance alarms 458 2 - 9 (selectable) 116W, incandescent lamps 120 or 130VAC (selectable) 120VAC 3% 6s fixed 120VAC 50/60Hz - 20% - 10% 125W to operate a spare lamp or alarm 10A @ 120VAC or 30VDC resistive; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Surface mount with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 63.5 mm (2.5"); D 44.5 mm (1.75") Screws with captive clamps for up to 14 AWG (2.45 mm2) wire Encapsulated -55 to 65C / -55 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing 6.8 oz (193 g) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls SCR SERIES Universal Lamp Alarm Relay (SCR430T only) Description The SCR series is a universal lamp alarm relay designed to sense the failure of flashing or steady incandescent beacon lamps or steady side lights. The toroidal current sensor provides isolation and allows monitoring of more than one line at a time. The SCR Series energizes when one or more lamps fail. It will monitor the operation of one to four side lights and up to four beacon lamps. Operation When a lamp fails, the SCR Series senses a decrease in current flow. After a fixed time delay, the LED glows and the two alarm outputs energize. The outputs and the LED are reset when the failed lamps are replaced and the current returns to the nominal setting, or when the input voltage is removed. The SCR will sense an open flasher, it will not sense a continuously ON flasher (see FB Series). Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram BEACON LAMP CONNECTION DIAGRAM L1 N/L2 V = Voltage B = Beacon Lamps SS = Selector Switch T = Toroid F = Flasher AXL = Auxiliary Load/Alarm FEATURES BENEFITS Toroidal current sensing Provides isolation from the lighting circuit and allows monitoring of multiple lines simultaneously Monitors 1-4 side lights or up to 4 beacon lamps Senses failed incandescent flashing beacon or steady obstruction lamps Isolated, 10A, SPDT alarm output plus one 1A, Provides alarm indication and can also be used for solid-state line voltage remote monitoring of the lighting system alarm output Relay contacts are isolated. Fixed trip delay (6s) Prevents nuisance alarms Switch selectable number, voltage, and wattage of lamps User selectable to meet wide application needs with one relay Ordering Information OBSTRUCTION LAMP CONNECTION DIAGRAM L1 N/L2 INPUT LAMP TYPE SCR430T 120VAC Incandescent SCR630T 230VAC Incandescent If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Relay contacts are isolated. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 47. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 459 www.littelfuse.com/scr490d 13 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS V = Voltage SS = Selector Switch T = Toroid AXL = Auxiliary Load/Alarm OL = Obstruction Lamps MODEL Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls SCR SERIES Selection Range Specifications SCR430T a. 620 W b. 120 V a. 620 W c.b. 120 V c. Operation Lamp Monitoring Capacity (in lamps) SCR430T 120VAC Lamps SCR630T 230VAC Lamps Time Delay Trip Delay Input Input Voltage/Tolerance SCR630T 116 W 130 V SCR430T a. 4L 116 W 3L 130 V 2L 4L 1L 3L 2L 1L 700 W a. c. 700 W c. 116 W SCR630T 4L 116 W 3L 2L 4L 1L 3L 2L 1L a. Lamp Wattage - Select the lamp wattage of the lamps in use. b. Lamp Voltage - Select the lamp voltage shown on the lamp (SCR430T) c. Lamps ON - Select the number of lamps on during normal operation. Only one lamp switch at a time may be transferred to the right. AC Line Frequency Output Line Voltage Output (Solid-state Rated) 100W 4 n/a 116W 4 4 620W 4 n/a 700W n/a 4 Factory fixed 6s SCR430T - 120VAC 10% SCR630T - 230VAC 10% 50/60Hz To operate a spare lamp or alarm 125W @ 120VAC 250W @ 240VAC Isolated Alarm Output (SPDT) 10A @ 240VAC or 30VDC resistive; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Mechanical Mounting Two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5"); W 63.5 mm (2.5"); D 44.5 mm (1.75") Termination Screws with captive clamps for up to 14 AWG (2.45 mm2) wire Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Environmental Operating Temperature -55 to 65C Weight 6.8 oz (193 g) Programming Example 1. 1. 2. 2. Example Shown: SCR430T-620 watts at 120 VAC lamps, two lamps are ON during normal operation. STEP 1. Select lamp wattage: 116 or 620 watts 2. Select the number of lamps ON (1 thru 4) during normal operation. Only one lamp switch may be ON (RIGHT) at any time. FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 www.littelfuse.com/scr 460 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls FB9L Universal Lamp Alarm Relay Description The FB9L is a universal lamp alarm relay designed to sense the failure of flashing LED beacon lamps. It will monitor the operation of one to eight beacons connected to a single flasher and/or auxiliary modules and the operation of the flasher. The FB9L output relay energizes when one or more lamps fail. All monitored lamps must be the same wattage and voltage. The 0.5A solid-state output energizes when a flasher failure is sensed. Operation When a LED beacon lamp fails, the FB9L senses a decrease in current flow. After a 10s lamp failure trip delay, the isolated SPDT (4-5-6) and non-isolated SPNO (3-1) relay contacts energize. These contacts are used to indicate a beacon failure has occurred. The "L" onboard LED indicator flashes green during the trip delay and glows red after the output relay energizes. Connected to a site monitoring system, it provides remote beacon monitoring required by FAA-AC No: 150/5345-43E. The FB9L also monitors the operation of the flasher. If the flasher remains in the ON or OFF condition for more than 6s the solidstate output energizes and the "F" flasher failure, onboard LED glows red. This output is normally used to energize an external flasher bypass relay. The contacts of the bypass relay are used to route voltage around the failed flasher and to indicate an alarm condition. Note: In a single flasher, single beacon system, if the beacon lamp fails, zero current flow is detected. This will cause the flasher failure output to energize after 6s and then the beacon failure outputs after 10s. This is normal operation and can be expected anytime zero current is flowing through the monitored conductor. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Features & Benefits BENEFITS Self calibrating Saves time at installation. No fine adjustment required. Failsafe beacon monitoring Alarm monitors for failed LED lamps in addition to flasher function Number of beacons monitored is switch selectable for up to 8 User selection allows quick set up and easy adaption to multiple applications Universal voltage 120 to 230VAC Meets wide application requirements Isolated, 10A, SPDT alarm output contacts Provides remote beacon monitoring when connected to a site monitoring system, which is required by the FAA Accessories NOTE: Flasher module may be located on either the line or load side of the toroidal sensor. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 31. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 461 www.littelfuse.com/fb9L 13 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS V = Voltage B = Beacon F = Flasher BRC = Flasher Bypass Relay Contacts T = Toroid AR = FB Alarm Relay BR = Bypass Relay Coil FL = Flasher Failure LED LL = Lamp Failure LED AXL = Lamp Alarm Relay Coil FEATURES Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls FB9L Specifications Sensors Calibration Range (total all Lamps) Absolute Max Current (total all Lamps) Single Lamp Current Trip Delay Flasher Failure Lamp Failure Input Input Voltage/Tolerance AC Line Frequency Output Line Voltage Output (SPNO) Indicator Table 150mA - 8.0A 15A max. (may not calibrate above 8A) 150mA - 8.0A (total all lamps 8.0A) Fixed at 6s; -0/+40% Fixed at 10s; -0/+40% L Green Input ON & Calibrated L Green Flashing Trip Delay L Red Lamp Failure L Red/Green Flashing Calibrating L Red Flashing Not Calibrated F Red Flasher Failure 120 to 230VAC / 15% 50/60Hz To operate a spare lamp or alarm 5A @ 240VAC or 30VDC resistive; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Isolated Alarm Output (SPDT) 10A @ 240VAC or 30VDC resistive; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Solid-State Line Voltage Output (F) 0.5A steady; 5A inrush Mechanical Mounting One #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 76.7 mm (3"); W 50.8 mm (2"); D 41.7 mm (1.64") Termination IP20 screw terminals for up to 14 AWG (2.45 mm2) wire or two 16 AWG (1.3 mm2 ) wires LEDs Power/Timing/Lamp Failure (Bi-color) Glows red when one or more lamps fail Flasher Failure (Red) Glows red when the flasher fails Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40 to 60C / -40 to 85C Weight 3.9 oz (111 g) FAA-AC No. 150/5345-43E FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 www.littelfuse.com/fb9L 462 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls SCR9L Universal Lamp Alarm Relay Description The SCR9L is a universal lamp alarm relay designed to sense the failure of flashing or steady LED beacon lamps or obstruction lamps. The SCR9L energizes when one or more lamps fail. It will monitor the operation of one to eight beacon or obstruction lamps. All monitored lamps must be the same wattage and voltage. When connected to a site monitoring system, it provides the remote lamp monitoring protection required by the FAA-AC No: 150/5345-43E. Operation When a lamp fails, the SCR9L senses a decrease in current flow. After a 10s trip delay, the onboard LED glows and the two alarm outputs energize. The outputs and the LED are reset when the failed lamps are replaced and the unit is recalibrated. The SCR9L will sense an open flasher, it will not sense a continuously ON flasher (see FB Series). Removing input voltage de-energizes the output and the LED`s. It does not change the calibration. Wiring Diagram Features & Benefits BEACON LAMP CONNECTION DIAGRAM L1 N/L2 OBSTRUCTION LAMP CONNECTION DIAGRAM L1 N/L2 V = Voltage B = Beacon Lamps SS = Selector Switch L = LED Indicator F = Flasher AXL = Auxiliary Load/Alarm OL = Obstruction Lamps SI = Sensor Input H = "3" Spare AC Hot Connection (2A max.) FEATURES BENEFITS Self calibrating Designed for use with all types of LED beacon and obstruction lamps Failsafe beacon monitoring Relay will also provide an alarm signal on a failed flasher (open) Number of lamps monitored is switch selectable up to 8 User selection allows quick set up and easy adaption to multiple applications Universal voltage 120 to 230VAC Designed for use in most applications Isolated, 10A, SPDT alarm output contacts Provides remote beacon monitoring when connected to a site monitoring system, as is required by the FAA LED indication Provides visual relay status of operation, alarm, trip delay, and calibration Fully encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 31. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 463 www.littelfuse.com/scr9L FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. 13 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls SCR9L Calibration Indicator Table Alarm relays must be calibrated at initial installation and when LED lamps are replaced. Due to LED lamp aging, recalibration is recommended every 12 months. 1. Remove input voltage 2. Move calibration switch to off position 3. Re-apply input voltage 4. LED will flash red to indicate the unit is ready for calibration 5. Visually inspect structure's lighting to make sure all lamps and flashers (if used) are operating properly 6. Remove input voltage 7. Adjust lamp selector switches for the correct number of lamps to be monitored (see adjustment diagram below) 8. Re-apply input voltage 9. LED should flash red 10. Move calibrate switch to ON position 11. The LED will alternate flashing red and green 12. LED will glow steady green within 30 secs. Calibration is complete Calibration Failed If the LED double blinks red, calibration failed. Remove input voltage and repeat steps 6-8. Notes: a. Monitoring a mixture of LED beacons and LED obstruction lamps is not possible with the SCR9L. b. This alarm relay is not designed to monitor incandescent lamps. c. Applying input voltage when the calibrate switch is in the OFF position, erases the previous calibration settings. The LED will flash Red. The output relays are OFF and the unit will not sense lamp failures. d. Only one temperature compensated LED beacon can be monitored with this product. A combination of temperature compensated and standard LED beacons cannot be monitored. FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 Adjustment Example L Green Input ON & Calibrated L Green Flashing Trip Delay L Red Lamp Failure L Red/Green Flashing Calibrating L Red Flashing Not Calibrated Specifications Sensors Calibration Range (total all Lamps) Absolute Max Current (total all Lamps) Single Lamp Current Time Delay Trip Delay Input Input Voltage/Tolerance AC Line Frequency Output Line Voltage Output (SPNO) 150mA - 8.0A 15A max. (may not calibrate above 8A) 150mA - 8.0A (total all lamps < 8.0A) Factory fixed 10s 120 to 230VAC 15% 50/60Hz To operate a spare lamp or alarm 5A @ 240VAC or 30VDC resistive; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Isolated Alarm Output (SPDT) 10A @ 240VAC or 30VDC resistive; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Auxilliary Input Voltage (H) 2A @ 230VAC Mechanical Mounting One #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 76.7 mm (3"); W 51.3 mm (2.02"); D 41.7 mm (1.64") Termination IP20 screw terminals for up to 14 AWG (2.45 mm2) wire or two 16 AWG (1.3 mm2) wires Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Environmental Operating / Storage Temperature -40 to 60C / - 40 to 85C Weight 3.9 oz (111 g) SCR9L 7. OFF ON Example Shown: SCR9L two lamps are ON during normal operation. www.littelfuse.com/scr9L 464 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls ions. Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls PCR SERIES Photo Control Description The PCR Series of photo controls is a combination of precision electronic circuitry, electromechanical output, and unique molded plastic housing. Designed and built to meet the demands of the most rigorous requirement of tower and obstruction lighting control, each unit is factory calibrated to meet FAA and FCC specifications. Electronic circuit, output contactor, and terminal block are all contained within front plastic housing. Edge support molded into the bottom edge of housing allows easy wiring of new and existing installations. Available with or without cast aluminum junction box. Operation When the amount of light sensed falls below the actuation level for energization, the output relay energizes. Conversely, when the amount rises above the actuation level for de-energization, the output relay de-energizes. Wiring Diagram Dashed lines are internal connections. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS ABS plastic housing with gasket seal Withstands outdoor environmental hazards and protects circuitry from moisture damage Two 20A relay contacts Allows direct control of a lighting circuit without a separate contactor Fixed time delay Eliminates contact chatter Reliable photo sensor Provides automatic lighting circuit operation from dusk to dawn Ordering Information REPLACES Dashed lines are internal connections. Dashed lines are internal connections. MODEL INPUT DESCRIPTION PCR10 120VAC PCR11 Hughey & Phillips Crouse Hinds Photo Control without aluminum box n/a n/a 120VAC Photo Control without aluminum box PC800 120V PEC52010 PCR12 230VAC Photo Control with aluminum box n/a n/a PCR13 230VAC Photo Control with aluminum box PC800 240V PEC52010-1 If you don't find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 *Customer Supplied Jumper For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 45. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 465 www.littelfuse.com/pcr 13 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS ons. Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls PCR SERIES Specifications Indication Light Actuation Levels (Factory Calibrated) Voltage AC Line Frequency Tolerance 120 & 230VAC Output Rating Termination Dimensions Mounting Operating/Storage Temperature LED indicates power is applied Energized: 35 fc De-energized: 60 fc 120VAC or 230VAC 50/60Hz -20% - 10% Two SPST NO 20A contacts 1 hp @ 120VAC 2.5 hp @ 240VAC Screw terminals for up to #8 (M4 x 0.7) AWG wire H 159.51 mm (6.28"); W 127 mm (5.0"); D 131.75 mm (5.19") ABS plastic housing with gasket seal. Multiple knockout holes for optional mounting to Crouse Hinds or Hughey & Phillips cast aluminum electrical boxes. -40 to 60C / -55 to 85C FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 www.littelfuse.com/pcr 466 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Accessories ACCESSORIES Software............................................................................................. 468 Electrical............................................................................................. 469 Ground Reference Modules, High-Tension Couplers, & Relay Testers .................................................................................. 472 Remote Indication .............................................................................. 473 Communication Adapters & Modules................................................ 476 Terminations & Adapters ................................................................... 477 Liquid Level Control............................................................................ 478 Current Transformers (CTs) CT Selection Guide............................................................................. 479 Current Transformers ......................................................................... 480 Instrumentation & Metering Transformers ........................................ 481 Current Transformer Sizing Chart....................................................... 482 Mounting Adapters and Enclosures Panel-Mount Adapters ....................................................................... 483 DIN-Rail & Mounting Adapters.......................................................... 485 Brackets & Clips ................................................................................. 486 Enclosures & Watertight Covers........................................................ 487 Sockets ............................................................................................... 488 14 ACCESSORIES For More Information... on Retrofits, Panel Mount Adapters and more accessories, visit Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 467 www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories Accessories Software SOFTWARE Protection Relays and Alarm Systems are supplied with free software. The software simplifies programming and allows the user to save setpoint files and reuse them for similar applications. The software gives the ability to change parameters and see the impact on the protection time current curves. It also allows another device curve to be entered to view simple coordination. SOFTWARE Product Solutions-M Relay Interface Software RS485 TCP/IP networks MotorSaver and PumpSaver Devices FPU-32 MPS FPS MPU-32 Firmware Update Utility Used to update relay firmware to add new features. FPU-32 MPS EL731 FPS MPU-32 SE-MON330 Used to receive data from the SE-330. It displays relay set points and measured values, and features data logging of information at a selectable interval. SE-330 SE-330HV SE-330AU Relay Interface Software SE-FLASH Relay Interface Software VMPU Virtual Motor Protection Relay ACCESSORIES Provides the ability to configure and monitor Modbus networks. The features include data logging, real-time data monitoring and fault and event monitoring. Devices can be added and configured manually or the software can scan an existing network to identify devices which can be used as is or reconfigured by the user. Setpoints for each device can be uploaded and downloaded for easy monitoring and reconfiguration. Accessory For Provides remote access to metering, control, data logging, and programming features. Setpoints can be accessed individually, downloaded as a file, and protective curves can be plotted. Metered data can be observed or logged for later study. SE-COMM-RIS 14 Features VMPS Virtual Motor Protection System VFPU Virtual Feeder Protection Relay MPU-32 Tutorial MPU-32 Online Self-Training Tutorial www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories Allows the user to scroll through the MPU-32 Motor Protection Relay menu. MPU-32 Allows the user to scroll through the MPS Motor Protection System menu. MPS Allows the user to scroll through the FPU-32 Feeder Protection Relay menu. FPU-32 Online Self-Training tutorial for MPU-32 programming. MPU-32 468 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Accessories Electrical ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES Product Features Used in installations with more than one breaker and more than one Littelfuse Arc-Flash Relay. It separates the trip paths, so the breakers can be tripped independently from each other. PGA-1100.0010 Diode Logic Unit For datasheet, pg. 81information available at Full full datasheet and see ordering www.littelfuse.com/pga1100 P1004-XX-(X) Versa-Pot PART NUMBER WITH WIRE LEADS VALUE P1004-199 50k P1004-174 100K P1004-175 200K P1004-95 P1004-95-X 100k P1004-16-X 1M P1004-17 P1004-16 500k P1004-15 1.5M P1004-14 2M P1004-12 P1004-12-X P1004-13 3M Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. The shaft is slotted for screwdriver adjustment and serrated for slip-proof finger adjustment. Accepts Versa-Knob or Lock Shaft. May be ordered with two 8 in. (20.3 cm) wires soldered to pot (clockwise increase) and female quick connect terminals on other ends by adding suffix -X to end of part number. Specifications Rating Taper Shaft Rotation Tolerance 0.25W at 55C Linear 300 5 10% 5M P0700-7 Versa-Knob P0700-8 Lock Shaft P1004-9 P1004-10 P1004-31 Mini-Pot VALUE P1004-9 500k P1004-10 1M P1004-31 3M P0700-21 Mini-Knob (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls AF0500 D1000 D0920 P1004-95 & P1004-95-X: Consult individual datasheet for compatibility P1004-174 & P1004-175: PHS Series P1004-16 & P1004-16-X: Series: ERDM ERDI ERD3 TRB TRS TS1 TS6 P1004-XX-(X) Fits 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) potentiometer shafts. Locks by tightening nut onto four tapered/slotted fingers. Pressure on the shaft locks control against mis-adjustment. Nickel plated brass finish. P1004-XX-(X) Specifications Rating Taper Shaft Rotation Tolerance TRM P1004-15, P1004-14, P1004-13, P1004-12, & P1004-12-X: Series: ORB ORM ORS TAC1 THD7 TRB TRM TRS TS1 TS2 TS4 TS6 TSD7 TSU2000 Versa-Knob is designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. A high quality, industrial potentiometer for remote time delay adjustment. The shaft extends through the timer's center hole for easy panel mounting. Use mini-mount bracket for standup mounting of timer. Adjustment by screwdriver or mini-knob. May be ordered with two 3 in. (7.6 cm) wires soldered to pot (clockwise increase) and female quick connect terminals on other ends by adding suffix -X to end of part number. PGR-8800 Series: TAC1 TS1 TS4 TS6 TSU2000 TS2 TSD7 0.25W at 55C Linear 300 5 10% Versa-Knob is designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. 469 14 ACCESSORIES PART NUMBER Accessory For P1004-XX-(X) www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories Accessories Electrical ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES Product Features P0200-19 Heat Sink Compound 2 grams P0200-20 Heat Sink Compound 100 grams P1015-18 Quick Connect Screw Adaptor P1015-13 P1015-64 P1015-14 Female Quick Connect Terminals Accessory For Single package/container of heat sink compound consisting of primarily zinc oxide and having a 12 month shelf life (EOD date on the label). P0200-19 mounts one high current, plated 2 x 2 in. (50.8 x 50.8 mm) timer or flasher. P0200-20 mounts 50+ units. Any 2 x 2 in. (50.8 x 50.8 mm) plated timer or flasher. Screw adaptor terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Screw terminal accepts ring or spade terminals. Modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Consult the individual datasheet to determine compatibility. These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Consult individual datasheet to determine compatibility. Dials for use with remote Versa-Pot and panel mounted Mini-Pot. Reverse screen printed on clear plastic to avoid damage to printed image. P1004-9 P1004-13 P1004-95 P1004-10 P1004-16 Series: TAC1 TS2 THD7 TS4 P0400 Time Adjustment Dials PART NUMBER RANGE INCREMENTS P0400-12 0.05 - 1s 0.1s P0400-86 0.1 - 10m 1m P0400-82 0.1 - 10s 1s P0400-17 1 - 30s 5s P0400-83 1 - 60s 10s P0400-27 0 - 10 MRD* P1004-12 P1004-31 *Multiplier Reference Dial VTPXX The VTP Series mounts on modules with in-line adjustment terminals. Rated at 0.25W at 55C. Available in resistance values from 5K to 5M VTP ACCESSORIES 14 PART NUMBER RT VALUE RANGE PART NUMBER RT VALUE RANGE VTP0E 250k 0.5 - 20s VTP3L 2M 0.1 - 4m VTP1B 0.5M 0.05 - 3s VTP4B 3M 0.05 - 3s VTP1C 0.5M 0.1 - 10s VTP4F 3M 0.5 - 60s VTP1D 0.5M 0.5 - 10s VTP4J 3M 2 - 180s VTP2A 1M 0.05 - 1s VTP4P 3M 1 - 100m VTP2C 1M 0.1 - 10s VTP5G 5M 1 - 100s VTP2E 1M 0.5 - 20s VTP5K 5M 10 - 1000s VTP2F 1M 0.5 - 60s VTP5N 5M 0.1 - 10m VTP2J 1M 2 - 180s VTP5P 5M 1 - 100m VTP2P 1M 1 - 100m VTPDF 50K 0.5 - 60s VTP3B 2M 0.05 - 3s www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories 470 THDM TS6 TS1 TSD7 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Accessories Electrical ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES Product Features LPSM003ZXID Accessory For Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC Indicating Fuse Holder LPSM003Z Series: DLMU PLMU TVM HLMU PLR TVW PLM PLS WVM Non-indicating Fuse Holder 0KLK002.T 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 VAC/500 VDC Midget Fuse (2 Amp) FH3P LPSM003ZXID LPSM003Z The VRM6048 accessory module allows the voltage monitor to monitor a 3-phase 550 to 600VAC Line. Adjustment Package VRM6048 Mounting Voltage Monitor Accessory Module 575VAC VRM Module 460VAC Voltage Monitor Termination Operating Storage Humidity Voltage If the measured line voltage is 575VAC, connect as shown and adjust/select the voltage monitor for 460VAC operation. Molded housing with encapsulated circuitry Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) plastic screw. May be DIN Rail mounted using P1023-20 Adaptor. Screw terminals with captive wire clamps for up to No.12 AWG wire. -40 to 70C -40 to 85C 95% relative, non-condensing Input Output* 600VAC 480VAC 575VAC 460VAC 550VAC 440VAC Series: PLM PLR PLS TVM TVW (manufactured after December 2003) *The VRM6048 must be connected as shown. If the voltage monitor is disconnected, the VRM output voltage equals the input voltage. The V150LA10AP, a transient voltage surge suppressor, is a radial leaded varistors (MOVs) that is designed to be operated continuously across AC power lines. This UL recognized varistor requires very little mounting space. V150LA10AP LA Varistor MAX. OPERATING VOLTAGE V150LA10AP AC (V) DC (V) 150 200 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls MAX IMPULSE CURRENT 80.20 s CURRENT WAVE VARISTOR VOLTAGE AT 1MA DC TEST CURRENT PEAK CLAMPING VOLTAGE WITH 80.20 s WAVE (A) MIN. (V) MAX. (V) VC (V) 1PK (A) 4500 216 264 395 50 471 CAPACITANCE DISC DIAMETER SIZE (MM) 800 14 www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories 14 ACCESSORIES PRODUCT Any of our products that operate below 150 VAC or 200 VDC. Accessories Ground Reference Modules, High-Tension Couplers, & Relay Testers GR MODULES, HIGH-TENSION COUPLERS, & RELAY TESTERS GROUND-REFERENCE MODULES Product SE-GRM024 Ground Reference Module SE-GRM048 Ground Reference Module SE-GRM125 Ground Reference Module SE-GRM250 Ground Reference Module SE-GRM500 Ground Reference Module SE-GRM780 Ground Reference Module SE-GRM1000 Ground Reference Module Features Accessory For Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 24 Vdc bus. SE-601 Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 48 Vdc bus. SE-601 Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 125 Vdc bus. SE-601 Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 250 Vdc bus. SE-601 Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 500 Vdc bus. SE-601 Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 780 Vdc bus. SE-601 Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 1000 Vdc bus. SE-601 HIGH-TENSION COUPLERS Product PGH-5000 High Tension Couplers PGH-6000 High Tension Couplers ACCESSORIES 14 Features Accessory For Allows 5-kV systems to be connected to relay. PGR-6100 PGR-3200 Allows 6-kV systems to be connected to relay. PGR-6100 PGR-3200 PROTECTION RELAY TESTERS Product SE-100T Ground-Fault Relay Tester SE-400 Ground-Fault-Relay Test Unit www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories Features Accessory For Tests the current pickup level ground-fault protection. Tests the entire ground-fault circuit. Any Relay on Substations, MCCs, Central Distribution Panels, Switchboards, and Test Benches Tests the current pickup level, time delay and coordination of ground-fault protection. Tests the entire ground-fault circuit. Any Relay on Substations, MCCs, Central Distribution Panels, Switchboards, and Test Benches 472 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Accessories Remote Indication INPUT MODULES & METERS INPUT MODULES Product MPS-RTD Features Accessory For Provides 8 programmable inputs to connect Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, and Cu10 RTDs. MPU-32 MPS Adds motor differential protection, compatible with core balance and summation current transformer connections. MPU-32 MPS Interface between current transformers and MPU-32 or FPU-32 series relays. Reduces potential for open CT hazard. MPU-32 FPU-32 Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as small as 3 kA within a 2-m half-sphere. Local LED continually displays sensor health or trip state. PGR-8800 AF0500 Used to detect light and coordinate with current detection to eliminate nuisance tripping. 8 m (26.2 ft) active; 10 m (32.8 ft) total. PGR-8800 AF0500 Used to detect light and coordinate with current detection to eliminate nuisance tripping. 18 m (59 ft) active; 20 m (66 ft) total PGR-8800 AF0500 Light Sensor Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as small as 3 kA within a 2-m halfsphere. Available in both 180 and 360. D0920 A0220 Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as small as 3 kA within a 2-m half-sphere. Available with 10 or 15 m cable. Temperature Input Module MPS-DIF Differential Current Module MPU-CIM Current Input Module PGA-LS10 Point Sensor PGA-LS20 Fiber-Optic Sensor PGA-LS30 Fiber-Optic Sensor A0200/A0300 Arc Detecting Point Sensor LCSC10T12 Toroidal Current Sensor For datasheet ordering information, see pg.at80 Full full datasheet andand ordering information available www.littelfuse.com/a0220 Remote monitoring of currents up to 50A. Inner diameter 9.14 mm (0.36") AF0500 PGR-8800 D0920 D1000 DCSA Series REMOTE INDICATION & METERS Product RK-105 Remote Indication and Reset Assembly RK-105I Remote Indication Assembly RK-102 RK-132 Industrial Remote Indication and Reset Kit RK-325 Remote Indication and Reset Assembly (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Accessory For Panel-mounted remote indication and reset with NEMA 1 rating. SE-105 SE-107 Panel-mounted remote indication with NEMA 1 rating. SE-105 SE-107 Panel-mounted remote indication and reset, standard 22 mm mounting, with NEMA 4 and NEMA 13 rating. SE-105 SE-107 Panel-mounted remote indication and reset, standard 22 mm mounting, with NEMA 4 and NEMA 13 rating. SE-134C SE-135 SE-145 Panel-mounted remote indication and reset with NEMA 1 rating. SE-325 473 www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories 14 ACCESSORIES Industrial Remote Indication and Reset Kit Features Accessories Remote Indication METERS & SENSING RESISTORS REMOTE INDICATION & METERS Product RK-325I Remote Indication Assembly RK-302 Remote Indication and Reset Kit RK-332 Remote Indication and Reset Kit PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter PGA-0510 Analog Ohm Meter Features Accessory For Panel-mounted remote indication with NEMA 1 rating. SE-325 Panel-mounted remote indication and reset, standard 22 mm mounting with NEMA 4 and NEMA 13 rating. SE-325 Panel-mounted remote indication and reset, standard 22 mm mounting with NEMA 4 and NEMA 13 rating. SE-330 SE-330HV SE-330AU Panel-mounted analog meter displays ground-fault current as a percentage of the set point. SE-601 PGR-4300 PGR-6100 SE-701 SE-703 SE-704 Panel-mounted analog ohmmeter displays insulation resistance from 0 to infinity. PGR-3200 PGR-6101-120 PGR-6100 SENSING RESISTORS Product ER-600VC (PGE-600V) Sensing Resistor SE-MRE-600 Enclosure ER-5KV (PGE-05KV) Sensing Resistor ER-5WP (PGE-05WV) Sensing Resistor ER-15KV (PGE-15KV) Sensing Resistor ER-25KV (PGE-25KV) ACCESSORIES 14 Sensing Resistor ER-35KV (PGE-35KV) Sensing Resistor ER-72KV (PGE-72KV) Sensing Resistor www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories Features Used on systems up to 1 kV. (Continuous duty) Used in outdoor enclosures. (ER-600VC ordered separately) Accessory For SE-330 SE-330AU SE-325 ER-600VC Used on systems up to 5 kV. (Continuous duty) SE-330 SE-330AU SE-325 Used on systems up to 5 kV, includes weather-protected terminals for use in outdoor enclosures. (Continuous duty) SE-330 SE-330AU SE-325 Used on systems up to 15 kV. (Non-continuous duty) SE-330 SE-330AU SE-325 SE-330HV Used on systems up to 25 kV. (Non-continuous duty) SE-330 SE-330AU SE-325 SE-330HV Used on systems up to 35 kV. (Non-continuous duty) SE-330 SE-330HV SE-330AU Used on systems up to 72 kV. (Non-continuous duty) 474 SE-330HV (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Accessories Remote Indication REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING REMOTE INDICATORS & MONITORS Product RM1000 RM1000-3R RM1000 NEMA 4 Motor-monitoring Device Features Accessory For Motor-monitoring device to be used in conjunction with the 777 family of products (excluding the P1 Series), 77C family of products, and the 601 voltage monitors, via Modbus protocol with a communications module. The RM1000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring. 777 Series 77C Series 601 Series For datasheet, see pg.at246 Fullfull datasheet available www.littelfuse.com/rm1000 RM2000 RM2000CBM+ RM2000-RTDW Motor-monitoring Device Motor-monitoring device to be used in conjunction with the 777 family of products (excluding the P1 Series), 77C family of products and the Model 601 voltage monitors, via Modbus protocol with a communications module. The RM2000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring. 777 Series 77C Series 601 Series For full datasheet, see pg. Full datasheet available at248 www.littelfuse.com/rm2000 INFORMER Remote diagnostic tool Hand-held diagnostic tool designed for use with single-phase pump relays. The Informer uses an infrared receiver to access information sent from the relay which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system. Comes with IR Kit-12 (12" long). For full datasheet, see pg. Full datasheet available at250 www.littelfuse.com/informer IR Kit-36 (36" long) Informer Fiber Optic Kit INFORMER-MS Remote diagnostic tool Use with the Informer. Simply attaches to the face of the unit to provide remote diagnostics without opening the panel. Hand-held diagnostic tool designed for use with the Littelfuse 455 Series. The Informer-MS uses an infrared receiver to read valuable information transmitted from the 455, which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system 111P 111P-ENCL 232-Insider 233P-ENCL 234-P 235P-ENCL LSRX1 LSRX-C 111-Insider-P 231-Insider-P 233P-1.5 233P-1.5-ENCL 235P 111-Insider-P 231-Insider-P 455 455 Series For full datasheet, see pg. Full datasheet available at252 www.littelfuse.com/informer-ms OL-RESET Remote Reset Module 777-MRSW Manual Remote Reset Kit (24" long) Electronic Megohmmeter (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 777 Series Allows the 777 line of motor and pump relay products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. Simply connect the 9-pin adapter to the 777 communication port and mount the push-button switch in a convenient location. 777 Series 14 Automatic, portable, battery-powered insulation tester. This unit is specifically designed as an inexpensive alternative to costly swing needle megohmmeters. The M500 measures insulation resistance values of motors, generators and transformers up to 1000 megohms at 500VAC, indicating the condition of insulation on the zone scale. Its compact design and ease of use makes the M500 a great diagnostic tool for motor rewind shops, electrical maintenance personnel and pump installers. 475 www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories ACCESSORIES M500 Allows the 777 line of motor and pump relay products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. Simply connect the module to the 777 communication port, connect a wire to each of the two applicable pins on the OL-RESET and to a normally-open push-button switch (sold separately). Mount the push-button switch in a convenient location. Accessories Communication COMMUNICATION ADAPTERS & MODULES COMMUNICATION ADAPTERS Product RS485-RS232 Converter with cable & plug RS485-USB Converter with cable & plug/RS232:USB AC700-CUA Communications Adapter Features Accessory For Allows RS485 devices to be connected to a PC via the RS232 (serial) port. The converter provides convenient terminal blocks for making signal and DC power supply connections. An optional power supply may be required for laptops or other computers with low power serial ports, or for very large networks. Pre-wired for easy installation on the RS485MS-2W module. RS485MS-2W Allows RS485 devices to be connected to a PC via the USB port. The converter provides convenient terminal blocks for making signal and DC power supply connections. An optional power supply may be required for laptops or other computers with low power serial ports, or for very large networks. Pre-wired for easy installation on the RS485MS-2W module. RS485MS-2W Optical network-interface and firmware-upgrade communication adapter. Field-installed. EL731 COMMUNICATION MODULES Product RS485MS-2W Communication Module CIO-DN-P CIO-120-DN-P Communication link to PLC/ SCADA/monitoring systems CIO-EN Communication link to PLC/ SCADA/monitoring systems CIO-MB CIO-120-MB Communication link to PLC/ SCADA/monitoring systems CIO-777-PR ACCESSORIES 14 Communication link to PLC/ SCADA/monitoring systems Features This module is required when the RM1000, RM2000 or other Modbus capable device is used with 77X-type products. For full datasheet, see pg. Full datasheet available at254 www.littelfuse.com/rs485ms2w Convenient and cost-effective DevicenetTM interfaces capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a DevicenetTM network. Series: RM1000 RM2000 77X 777 Series For full datasheet, see pg. 257 Full datasheet available at www.littelfuse.com/ciodnp-cio120dnp The CIO-EN Module (non-POE) is a convenient and costeffective Modbus-TCP and Modbus-RTU interface capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of an overload relay over a Modbus network. 777 Series For full datasheet, see pg. 260 Full datasheet available at www.littelfuse.com/cioen Convenient and cost-effective Modbus-RTU interfaces capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of an overload relay over a Modbus network. 777 Series For full datasheet, see pg. Full datasheet available at255 www.littelfuse.com/ciomb-cio120mb Convenient and cost-effective Profibus interface capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a Profibus network. 777 Series ending in P, -P, or -P2 For full datasheet, see pg. Full datasheet available at259 www.littelfuse.com/cio777pr CIO-601CS-DN-P1 Convenient and cost-effective DeviceNetTM device capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a DeviceNetTM network. COM 4-20 Send a 4-20mA signal proportional to the output power. It can also be used to send the input power by setting the efficiency setting on the 777-AccuPower monitor to one. This module allows communication to a PLC with an analog input and no Modbus input. Communication link to PLC/ SCADA/monitoring systems Accessory For 601-CS-D-P1 777-AccuPower For full datasheet, see pg.at261 Full datasheet available www.littelfuse.com/com420 www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories 476 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Accessories Terminations & Adapters TERMINATIONS & ADAPTERS TERMINATIONS & ADAPTERS Product 1N5339B Features Accessory For 5 W axial-lead ground-check termination. Included with SE-105 and SE-107. SE-105 SE-107 50 W ground-check termination that is robust and compact for submersible pumps. Wire lead simplifies installation. (Replacement for 1N4553B) SE-105 SE-107 50 W ground-check termination with convenient mounting holes and screw terminals. SE-105 SE-107 Temperature compensated 50 W ground-check termination with convenient mounting holes and screw terminals. SE-105 SE-107 SE-134C Temperature compensated 50 W ground-check termination with convenient mounting holes and screw terminals. SE-105 SE-107 SE-134C Temperature compensated 12 W ground-check termination, ideal for use in cable-coupler end caps and submersible pumps. Mounting holes and wire leads. SE-105 SE-107 SE-134C Temperature compensated 50 W ground-check termination with convenient mounting holes and screw terminals. SE-135 SE-145 Temperature compensated 12 W ground-check termination, ideal for use in cable-coupler end caps and submersible pumps. Mounting holes and wire leads. SE-135 SE-145 Termination Assembly Temperature compensated 50 W ground-check termination with convenient mounting holes and screw terminals. SE-135 SE-145 SE-TA12A SE-TA12B Used together to allow an SE-134C to monitor a splitter box and two cables. SE-134C Termination Device SE-TA6-SM Stud-Mount Termination Assembly SE-TA6 Termination Assembly SE-TA6A (PGA-0T6A) Termination Assembly SE-TA6A-WL Termination Assembly SE-TA6ASF-WL Small-Format Termination Assembly with Wire Leads SE-TA12A Termination Assembly SE-TA12ASF-WL Small-Format Termination Assembly with Wire Leads SE-TA12A-WL Termination Assemblies PPI-600V Parallel Path Isolator RK-13 Relay Interface Module SE-485-DIN SE-485-PP Port-Powered Serial Converter CA-945 Serial Connector Adapter Kit SE-ICUSB232 USB to RS-232 Converter (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls SE-105 SE-134C Separate ground-fault and ground-check indication contacts for the SE-105, and separate ground-fault and resistor-fault contacts for the SE-325. Used to provide output to a PLC and operate standard pilot lights. Complete with conformally coated circuit boards. SE-107 SE-135 SE-105 SE-107 SE-325 Converts an RS-485 signal to an RS-232 signal. Used for set-point programming and updating flash memory. 115.2 kbit/s maximum transfer rate. Connects an RJ45 to a 9-pin serial connector. Includes 1.5 m cable and plug-in adapter. Connects a 9-pin serial cable to a USB port. 477 14 MPS FPS Industrial network quality RS-485 to RS-233 serial converter. DIN-rail mounted, 24 Vdc required. MPU-32 FPU-32 MPS FPS MPU-32 FPU-32 SE-330 SE-330AU SE-485-PP CA-945 SE-330HV SE-485-DIN www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories ACCESSORIES Industrial RS-485 to RS-232 Converter Parallel ground-path rejection for ground-check monitors. Eliminates intermachine arcing and prevents stray DC currents from flowing in a monitored ground wire. Accessories Liquid Level Control LIQUID LEVEL PROBES & PROBE HOLDERS LIQUID LEVEL CONTROL ELECTRODES Product Features Threaded stainless steel probe measuring 24 in. (61 cm) long. Designed for use with PHST-38QTN liquid level control electrodes. LLP-24 Liquid Level Probe Accessory For PHST-38QTN PHST-38QTN Probe Holder P0700-409 Protective Boot 8-32 NC-2 THD H 0.81 (20.57) 1.53 (38.9) A = 3/8-18 PTF-SAE Short Dryseal H = Hexagonal X = Full Thread <3.34 (84.8) Designed for use with all conductive liquid level controls. Composed of insulators and metal parts made of number 300 series stainless steel. These internally conductive probe holders are designed for a maximum steam pressure of 240 PSI; 400 F maximum. Maximum voltage from electrode to ground. PHST-38QTN is UL 353 Recognized. Series: LLC1 LLC2 LLC4 LLC5 LLC6 LLC8 PC-XXX-LLC-CZ PC-XXX-LLC-GM 460-15-100-LLS <0.51 (12.95) A X 0.25 (6.35) 1/4-20 NC -2THD Inches (Millimeters) Inches (Millimeters) ACCESSORIES 14 www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories 478 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Accessories Current Transformers (CTs) CT SELECTION GUIDE RESISTANCE GROUNDING GROUNDCONDUCTOR MONITORING GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION PRODUCT PHASE CTS PAGE # No CTs required 1-20 mA N/A - PGR-3100 No CTs required Indication only N/A - PGR-3200 No CTs required Warnings at 30 k & 50 k, Alarm at 10 k N/A - CT200 Series 10-198 A EFCT Series 50 mA-4.95 A SE-CS30 Series 300 mA-29.7 A SE-704 SE-CS30 Series 10 mA-5 A N/A 480 EL731 EFCT Series 30-5,000 mA AC and DC N/A 480 SE-105/SE-107 CT200 Series 0.5-4 A N/A 480 SE-134C/SE-135 SE-CS10 Series 0.5-12.5 A N/A 480 CT200 Series 12-200 A EFCT Series 100 mA-5 A SE-CS30 Series 600 mA-30 A CT200 Series 0.5-4 A CT200 Series 10-200 A EFCT Series 50 mA-5 A SE-CS30 Series 300 mA-30 A 480 CT200 10-200 A 480 EFCT Series (5-A Primary) 50 mA-5 A SE-CS30 Series (30-A Primary) 300 mA-30 A SE-701/SE-703 SE-330 MPU-32* MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION GROUND-FAULT TRIP LEVEL (or insulation level) SE-601 SE-325 MPS* 480 N/A 480 480 480 N/A 480 480 N/A 480 480 N/A 480 1-A, 5-A Secondary CTs 480 480 MPU-32-X69X-PMA16 Existing CTs can be used or same as MPU-32. 480 MPS-469X-PMA24 Existing CTs can be used or same as MPS. 480 FEEDER PROTECTION FPU-32* PGR-8800 CT200 Series 10-200 A 480 EFCT Series 50 mA-5 A SE-CS30 Series 300 mA-30 A 480 CT200 10-200 A 480 EFCT Series (5-A Primary) 50 mA-5 A SE-CS30 Series (30-A Primary) 300 mA-30 A N/A N/A 1-A, 5-A Secondary CTs 1-A, 5-A Secondary CTs 480 480 480 5-A Secondary CTs (optional) 480 Note: See page 502 for additional information on CT selection. See page 482 for CT sizing chart. *Phase CTs should be selected with a primary rating of 100-300% of rated current to maintain specified accuracy. Select a CT with a primary rating approximately equal to the system's rated current. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 479 www.littelfuse.com/relayct 14 ACCESSORIES FPS* ARC-FLASH PROTECTION GROUND-FAULT CT Accessories Current Transformers (CTs) CURRENT TRANSFORMERS CURRENT TRANSFORMERS Product CT200 (PGC-2056) Current Transformer CT200L (PGC-2089) Current Transformer EFCT-26 (PGC-3026) Ground-Fault Current Transformer EFCT-1 (PGC-3082) Ground-Fault Current Transformer EFCT-2 (PGC-3140) Ground-Fault Current Transformer EFCT-1FC (PGC-31FC) Flux Conditioner SE-CS10-2.5 (PGC-4064) Current Sensor SE-CS10-4 (PGC-4108) Current Sensor SE-CS10-6 (PGC-4160) Current Sensor SE-CS10-8 (PGC-4210) Current Sensor SE-CS30-26 (PGC-5025) Ground-Fault Current Transformer SE-CS30-70 (PGC-5060) Ground-Fault Current Transformer ACCESSORIES 14 SE-CS30-4 (PGC-5095) Ground-Fault Current Transformer SE-CS30-5 (PGC-5130) Ground-Fault Current Transformer SE-CS30-8 (PGC-5200) Ground-Fault Current Transformer SE-CS40-6 Current Sensor Features Inner Diameter Accessory For Detects phase current or ground-fault current (200-A primary) 56 mm (2.20") FPS MPU-32 SE-330 FPU-32 PGR-8800 SE-325 MPS SE-105/107 SE-701 Detects phase current or ground-fault current (200-A primary) 89 mm (3.50") FPS MPU-32 SE-107 FPU-32 PGR-8800 SE-701 MPS SE-105 Sensitive current transformer used to detect ground-fault current (5-A primary) 26 mm (1.02") EL731 MPS SE-701 FPS MPU-32 FPU-32 SE-330 Sensitive current transformer used to detect ground-fault current (5-A primary) 82 mm (3.23") EL731 MPS SE-701 FPS MPU-32 FPU-32 SE-330 Sensitive current transformer used to detect ground-fault current (5-A primary) 140 mm (5.50") EL731 MPS FPS MPU-32 FPU-32 SE-701 Fits in the EFCT-1 window to reduce saturation and prevent false operation due to large surge currents 70 mm (2.75") Detects ground-fault current 64 mm (2.50") SE-134C SE-135 SE-145 Detects ground-fault current 108 mm (4.25") SE-134C SE-135 SE-145 Detects ground-fault current 160 mm (6.31") SE-134C SE-135 SE-145 Detects ground-fault current 210 mm (8.25") SE-134C SE-135 SE-145 Current Transformer for low-level ground faults, flux conditioner is standard (30-A primary) 25 mm (0.98") FPS MPU-32 SE-330 FPU-32 MPS PGR-6100 PGR-6101 SE-701 SE-704 Current Transformer for low-level ground faults, flux conditioner is standard (30-A primary) 60 mm (2.36") FPS MPU-32 SE-330 FPU-32 MPS PGR-6100 PGR-6101 SE-701 SE-704 Current Transformer for low-level ground faults, flux conditioner is standard (30-A primary) 95 mm (3.74") FPS MPU-32 SE-330 FPU-32 MPS PGR-6100 PGR-6101 SE-701 SE-704 Current Transformer for low-level ground faults, flux conditioner is standard (30-A primary) 130 mm (5.12") FPS MPU-32 SE-330 FPU-32 MPS PGR-6100 PGR-6101 SE-701 SE-704 Current Transformer for low-level ground faults, flux conditioner is standard (30-A primary) 200 mm (7.87") FPS MPU-32 SE-330 FPU-32 MPS PGR-6100 PGR-6101 SE-701 SE-704 Detects ground-fault current 160 mm (6.31") SE-135 SE-145 EFCT-1 NOTE: Contact factory for additional CT offerings. www.littelfuse.com/relayct 480 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Accessories Current Transformers (CTs) INSTRUMENTATION & METERING TRANSFORMERS Description Littelfuse offers a wide array of instrument rated current transformers in 1-3 inch diameter opening. Voltage class: 600V BIL rating: 10kV Dimensional Drawing DONUT STYLE Donut Style Foot Mounted 2RL 56RL 76RL Ordering Information WINDOW CURRENT RATIO CT-0050-D10 1.0" 50:5 CT-0075-D10 1.0" 75:5 CT-0100-D10 1.0" 100:5 CT-0150-D10 1.0" 150:5 CT-0200-D10 1.0" 200:5 CT-0300-D10 1.0" 300:5 CT-0200-D20 2.0" 200:5 CT-0300-D20 2.0" 300:5 CT-0400-D20 2.0" 400:5 CT-0500-D20 2.0" 500:5 FOOTED MODEL WINDOW CURRENT RATIO CT-0050-F10 1.0" 50:5 CT-0100-F10 1.0" 100:5 CT-0150-F10 1.0" 150:5 CT-0200-F10 1.0" 200:5 CT-0300-F10 1.0" 300:5 CT-1200-F15 1.5" 1200:5 CT-0150-F20 2.0" 150:5 CT-0200-F20 2.0" 200:5 CT-0300-F20 2.0" 300:5 CT-0400-F20 2.0" 400:5 CT-0600-F20 2.0" 600:5 CT-0400-F30 3.0" 400:5 CT-0800-F30 3.0" 800:5 FOOT MOUNTED WITH BRASS TERMINALS 2SFT 56SFT 76SFT 14 Part Numbering System CT - xxx - D10 Window Size Series Current Ratio xxx:5 current ratio Style 10 = 1.0 inch 15 = 1.5 inches 20 = 2.0 inches 30 = 3.0 inches D = Donut Style F = Footed Style (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 481 www.littelfuse.com/relayct ACCESSORIES DONUT MODEL Accessories Current Transformers (CTs) INSTRUMENTATION & METERING TRANSFORMERS INSTRUMENTATION AND METERING TRANSFORMERS Product Features Inner Diameter Littelfuse offers a wide array of instrument rated current transformers in 1-3 inch diameter opening. CT-XXXX-DXX Series Donut Style Transformer For full datasheet ordering information, Full datasheet andand ordering information see page 481. available at www.littelfuse.com/ctxxxxdxx Littelfuse offers a wide array of instrument rated current transformers in 1-3 inch diameter opening. CT-XXXX-FXX Series Footed Style Transformer For full datasheet ordering information, Full datasheet andand ordering information see page 481. available at www.littelfuse.com/ctxxxxfxx Accessory For 25.4 - 76.2 mm (1 - 3") Series: 777 ECSW LSRU TCSA DCSA ECS LSR-0 LSR-XX LSRX TCS LCSC10T12 25.4 - 76.2 mm (1 - 3") Series: 777 ECSW LSRU TCSA DCSA ECS LSR-0 LSR-XX LSRX TCS LCSC10T12 Current Transformer Sizing Chart Conductor Size (AWG/kcmil) ACCESSORIES 14 Minimum CT Window Size (Inner Diameter in mm) Number of Conductors 1 3 4 6 8 12 12 4 8 9 11 13 15 10 6 10 11 14 16 19 8 7 12 14 17 20 24 6 9 15 18 22 25 31 4 11 19 22 28 32 39 3 13 22 25 31 36 44 2 14 25 28 35 40 49 1 16 28 32 39 45 55 1/0 18 31 36 44 51 62 2/0 20 35 40 49 57 69 3/0 23 39 45 55 64 78 4/0 25 44 51 62 72 88 250 28 48 55 67 78 95 350 33 56 65 80 92 113 500 39 67 78 95 110 135 750 48 82 95 117 135 165 1000 55 95 110 135 156 191 www.littelfuse.com/relayct 482 Installation Instructions: When installing the Zero-Sequence CTs, ensure the following: 1. Only the load carrying conductors pass through the center of the CT. This means L1 + N for 1-phase and L1+ L2 + L3 for 3-phase. 2. The power conductors pass through the center of the CT and are preferably bound together to keep the conductors uniformly spaced. 3. The power conductors pass perpendicular to the CT and, where practical, continue perpendicular to the CT on both sides of the CT for 3". 4. The power conductors should not be installed in a way that allows them to run along the side edges of the CT. 5. Where practical, locate the CT away from noise-generating devices such as transformers, frequency converters, etc. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Accessories Mounting Adapters and Enclosures PMA SERIES Panel Mount Adapters -- Retrofits Example Shown: PMA-3 Description A variety of protection relay retrofit adapter plates are available for the products listed below. These adapter plates simplify the process of updating electromechanical or poorly functioning existing relays. Consult factory if you have a specific product to replace that is not featured. Adapters are available in either plate style for panel mounting or drawout style depending on the relay being replaced. Motor, feeder and ground-fault protection upgrades are available for electromechanical or solid state relays that are nearing the end of their life. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Mounting Fits in existing mounting holes and panel openings Plate style or drawout style adapters are available to fit various outdated relays Multiple adapter sizes Adapter Plates RELAY TO REPLACE AB BULLETIN 1406 Example of a panel mount adapter (PMA-3). Relay is for illustrative purposes only and must be purchased separately from adapter plate. For more information on our complete offering of panel mount adapters see the following page. PANEL MOUNT NEW RELAY PMA-14 MPS FPL-GFRM PMA-6 SE-701/SE-704 GE S1 PMA-9 MPU-32/FPU-32 GE LODTRAK III PMA-10 MPU-32 GE MULTILIN 169, 269, or 369 PMA-13 MPS PMA-16 MPU-32 PMA-16 FPU-32 GE MULTILIN 469 PMA-24 MPS GE MULTILIN P4A PMA-15 MPU-32/FPU-32 GEC/MCGG PMA-3 SE-701/SE-704 GE & WESTINGHOUSE FT-11 PMA-12 MPU-32 P&B GOLDS Contact Factory FPU-32 WESTINGHOUSE CO9 & CO11 Contact Factory FPU-32 14 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 483 www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories ACCESSORIES For a complete list of the Littelfuse Panel Mount Adapter Plates please see next page. Accessories Mounting Adapters and Enclosures PANEL-MOUNT ADAPTERS PANEL MOUNT ADAPTERS Product Used when replacing the AB Bulletin 1406. PMA-3 Adapter Plate Used when replacing GEC/MCGG ground-fault relays. Requires PMA-55 or PMA-60. PMA-4 Used when replacing the Multilin 139/239. MPU-32 PMA-6 Adapter Plate Used when replacing FPL-GFRM ground-fault relays. Requires PMA-55 or PMA-60. SE-701 PMA-7 Used when replacing the GE Lodtrak II. MPU-32 PMA-8 Used when replacing an Atkinson Omser II with an SE-130-Series Monitor. SE-134C SE-135 PMA-9 Adapter Plate Used when replacing relays in the GE S1 Case. Requires PMA-55 or PMA-60. MPU-32 FPU-32 PMA-10 Used when replacing the GE Lodtrak III. MPU-32 PMA-12 Used when replacing GE and Westinghouse FT-11 relays. MPU-32 PMA-13 Used when replacing the GE Multilin 169, 269, or 369. MPS PMA-14 Used for rough cutouts and when replacing the AB Bulletin 1406. MPS PMA-15 Used for rough cutouts and when replacing the GE Multilin P4A. MPU-32 FPU-32 PMA-16-RTDB The PMA-16 mounting plate is used when replacing the GE Multilin 169, 269, and 369 relays. The PMA-16-RTDB is a mounting bracket for the optional MPS-RTD Temperature Input Module. MPU-32 FPU-32 PMA-17 Used when replacing Sprecher & Schuh Cet 4. MPU-32 PMA-18 Used when replacing Sprecher & Schuh Cet 3. MPU-32 PMA-21 Used when replacing an ABB RACIF. FPU-32 PMA-23 Custom mounting plate for FPU-32 to replace 3 Westinghouse C0 relays. FPU-32 PMA-24 Used when replacing the GE Multilin 469. PMA-55 Used to panel mount the SE-601 and SE-701. SE-601 PGR-4300 SE-701 SE-704 PMA-60 Used to panel mount the relay; IP 53 and NEMA 3 rating, tamper resistant. SE-601 PGR-4300 SE-701 SE-704 MPU-32-SMK Used to surface mount the MPU-32 or FPU-32. MPU-32 FPU-32 Adapter Plate Adapter Plate Adapter Plate Adapter Plate Adapter Plate Adapter Plate Adapter Plate Adapter Plate PMA-16 Adapter Plate Mounting Bracket Adapter Plate Adapter Plate Adapter Plate Adapter Plate Adapter Plate ACCESSORIES Accessory For PMA-2 Adapter Plate 14 Features Adapter Plate Adapter Plate Surface-Mount Kit MPU-32 SE-704 SE-701 MPS Note: Relays are not included with the PMA-Series Panel Mount Adapters. www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories 484 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Accessories Mounting Adapters and Enclosures DIN-RAIL & MOUNTING ADAPTERS DIN RAIL & MOUNTING ADAPTERS Product Features Industry standard 35 mm aluminum or steel DIN rail. C103PM aluminum rail is available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. C103PM (Al) DIN Rail AC700-SMK DIN-rail and Surface-mount adapter for back-plane mounting. Mount Adapter D0050 Plastic clip allowing DIN-rail mounting of the PGR-8800 and AF0500 Arc-Flash Relay. DIN-Rail Adapter Clip Allows any 2 x 2 in. (50.8 x 50.8 mm) or 2 x 3 in. (50.8 x 76.2 mm) module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail. Comes complete with mounting hardware (one #10 - 24 x 1.00 screw and one #10 - 24 x 1.25 screw) for 0.75 in. (19 mm) and 1 in. (25.4 mm) thick modules. P1023-20 DIN Rail Mount Adaptor Accessory For Can be used with all DIN-rail compatible units. EL731 AF0500 PGR-8800 Consult the individual datasheet to determine part compatibility. P0500-178 Surface Mount Adapter P0500-178 is surface mountable with 2 Quick Mount Fasteners. ASXX/DSXX Series Timers P0500-179 snaps onto DIN Rail. ASXX/DSXX Series Timers Inches (Millimeters) P0500-179 DIN Rail Mount Adapter Inches (Millimeters) 14 ACCESSORIES (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 485 www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories Accessories Mounting Adapters and Enclosures BRACKETS & CLIPS BRACKETS & CLIPS Product Features Accessory For BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8-pin or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. May be mounted in panels up to 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) thick. Includes two clamps and two screws. 1.9 +/-.02 (48.3 +/-.5) 2.6 +/-.02 (66.0 +/-.5) PANEL OPENING P1023-6 P1023-7 Mounting Brackets 0.56 (14.3) 1.5 (38.1) 0.47 (11.9) d FS500 PLMU TDBH TDM TDS TRM LLC4 PLR TDBL TDMB TDSH TRS LLC5 PLS TDI TDMH TDSL TRU LLC6 PRLM TDIH TDML TRB Illustrates panel opening size required to mount BZ1. Inches (Millimeters) 0.19 (4.8) Series: ARP PLM TDB TDIL TDR TRDU 1.25 (31.8) Provides a convenient method of mounting modules. The 90 orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. Made from steel with a cadmium surface finish. PART NUMBER MOUNTING HOLE SIZE MOUNTING METHOD P1023-6 0.19 in. (4.8 mm) #8 (M4 x 0.7) screw P1023-7 0.25 in (6.35 mm) Mini-Pot Used on many 2" x 2" timers. Refer to individual series datasheet to determine if this accessory is compatible. 2.1 (53.3) Inches (Millimeters) PSCRB8 Hold-down Brackets PSC8 PSC11 Hold-down Clips P1023-2 P Clamp Designed for use with P1011-6 socket. Securely mounts 8-pin plug-in controls in any position, and provides protection against vibration. Sold in pairs. Securely mounts plug in controls in any position. Also provides protection against vibration. Select the PSC8 for use with NDS-8, or the PSC11 for use with NDS-11 sockets. Sold in pairs. Removable P clamp bracket for mounting MSM Series timers and FS100 and FS400 Series flashers. P1011-6 NDS-8 Socket Timers Series: Flasher Series: NDS-11 Socket MSM FS100 FS400 ACCESSORIES 14 www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories 486 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Accessories Mounting Adapters and Enclosures ENCLOSURES & WATERTIGHT COVERS ENCLOSURES Product NGRM-ENC NGR Monitor Control Panel Features NEMA 4 painted steel control panel, complete with the SE-325 or SE-330, and a fused 600/480:120 V PT for relay control power. Suitable for indoor or outdoor mounting, CSA certified. When NGR Monitor is back-plane mounted, 22-mm NEMA 4 indicators and reset button are included. Please contact factory for additional information. Accessory For SE-325 SE-330 For full datasheet and ordering information, see pg. 67 www.littelfuse.com/ngrm-enc NEMA-3R-L A Enclosure RM-1000-ENCL Enclosure Metal NEMA-3R electrical box with lenses for viewing the single-phase PumpSaver(R) status lights. H 6.0" x W 6.0" x D 4.0" Single-Phase PumpSaver(R) Steel enclosure for protecting the RM1000 from weather and vandalism. Protects from UV, hail, and it seals to keep rain from contacting the RM1000 connections. The enclosure also features a built-in padlock tab (padlock not included). H 6.4" x W 6.3" x D 1.7" RM1000 WATERTIGHT COVERS Product MPU-16A-Y92A-96N Watertight Cover SE-IP65CVR-G Watertight Cover SE-IP65CVR-M Watertight Cover SE-MRE-600 Moisture-Resistant Enclosure Kit Features Watertight cover for outdoor applications. Watertight cover. Tamper-resistant. IP65 protection. Watertight cover. Tamper-resistant. IP65 protection. Protects the connection terminals from snow and rain in outdoor applications. Accessory For MPU-32 FPU-32 SE-134C SE-330 SE-330HV SE-135 SE-330AU SE-400 MPS FPS ER-600VC ER-1000HV 14 ACCESSORIES (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 487 www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories Accessories Mounting Adapters and Enclosures SOCKETS SOCKETS Product OT08PC Octal Socket 8-Pin NDS-8 Octal Socket 8-Pin Screw terminals with captive wire clamps P1011-6 Octal Socket 8-Pin OT11PC Magnal Socket 11-Pin SD12-PC Rectangle Socket 12-pin NDS-11 11-pin Magnal Socket Screw terminals with captive wire clamps Features Accessory For 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount octal socket. Rated at 10A @ 600VAC and has pressure clamp terminals. AWG 12 to 22 (3.2 to 0.33 mm) wire sizes. Consult individual datasheet for compatibility 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount octal socket. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. A spring mechanism allows easy removal. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. Up to two #14 AWG (2.45 mm) wire size Series: ARP FS500 LLC4 PRLM TDB TDBH TDI TDIH TDIL TDMB TDMH TDML TDS TDSH TDSL TRM TRS TRU 8-pin surface mount socket with binder head screw terminals. Rated at 10A @ 600VAC. UL Listed combination when used with TDM, TDB, TDS Series timers. Uses PSCRB8 hold-down brackets. Series: ARP PRLM TDR TRM Magnal Sockets are for plug-in units 11-pin Plug-in units Series: ARP LLC6 TDB TDBL TDMB TDS TDSL TRB TRDU TRS TRU 12-pin surface Rectangle Socket. 11 pin 35 mm DIN rail or surface mount socket. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. A spring mechanism allows easy removal. Uses PSC11 hold-down clips. FS500 TDB TDS TRS LLC4 TDM TRB TRU LLC5 TDBL TDM TDR TRDU LLC5 TDMB TRDU TDBH TDSH TRM ACBC-120 AWG 12 to 22 (3.2 to 0.33 mm) wire sizes Series: ARP LLC6 TDB TDBH TDBL TDMB TDS TDSH TDSL TRB TRDU TRM TRS TRU ACCESSORIES 14 www.littelfuse.com/relayaccessories 488 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Overview OVERVIEW Glossary of Terms............................................................................... 490 Introduction ........................................................................................ 493 I. Introduction to Protection Relays ............................................ 493 II. Relay Application.................................................................... 494 III. CT Application ....................................................................... 502 IV. Resistance-Grounding Conversion ........................................ 503 IEEE/ANSI Device Numbers ............................................................... 506 Typical Suffixes .................................................................................. 506 15 PROTECTION OVERVIEW For More Information... and to download our Protection Relay Overview, visit www.littelfuse.com/TechnicalCenter (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 489 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Overview Glossary of Terms Active Power-Measured in kW. In a diesel generator application, it is the power produced by the engine. Alarm Level-A setting on a protection relay at which an LED or output contact operates. Alarm Relay Contact-An output of a relay that acts as a switch and is typically connected to a visual or audible alarm. Analog Output-A discrete, continually variable 0-1 mA, 4-20 mA, or 0-5 Vdc signal from a protection relay used to pass information to a device or controller. CT Local Saturation-A condition where the magnetic flux is not evenly distributed throughout the CT. A resulting secondary current could be induced when no ground fault is present; it may lead to the false operation of a protective relay. This could occur if conductors are not centered in a CT window. Apparent Power-The vector sum of the active and Arc Flash Hazard-A dangerous condition associated with the Data Logging-Collecting and storing information in a format that can be reviewed for trending, troubleshooting, and reporting. possible release of energy caused by an electric arc. Arc Flash Risk Assessment-A study investigating a worker's potential exposure to arc flash energy, conducted for the purpose of injury prevention and to determine safe work practices, arc flash boundary, and the necessary types of personal protective equipment (PPE). Arc Flash Suit-A complete arc-ratedclothing and equipment system covering the entire body, except for hands and feet. Arc Flash Boundary-When an arc flash hazard exists, the boundary is an approach limit at a distance from a prospective arc source within which a person could receive a second degree burn if an electrical arc flash were to occur. Arc Rating-The value attributed to materials that describes their performance to exposure to an electrical arc discharge. The arc rating is expressed in cal/cm2 and is derived from the determined value of the arc thermal performance value (ATPV) or energy of break open threshold (EBT) (Should a material system exhibit a break open response below the ATPV value). Arc rating is reported as either ATPV or EBT, whichever is the lower value. Asynchronous Motor-A motor in which the speed of the rotor is not the same as the connected system frequency. Charging Current-System charging current is the current that will flow into the grounding connection when one phase of an ungrounded system is faulted to ground. Although not physically connected to ground, electrical conductors and the windings of all components are capacitively connected to ground. Consequently, a small current will flow to ground from each phase. This current does not occur at any particular location; rather, it is distributed throughout the system just as the capacitance to ground is distributed throughout the system. Conformal Coating-A Silicone coating used to protect circuit boards from pollutants, corrosion, mildew, etc. PROTECTION OVERVIEW maintain a secondary current proportional to a relatively large primary current. CT Saturation Compensation-A feature in which a protective relay can recognize that a CT is saturated and compensate for the condition in order to maintain service. reactive power. 15 CT Saturation-A condition that occurs when a CT cannot Core-Balance Current Transformer -See Earth-Fault Current Transformer. Current Transformer (CT) -A transformer that produces a current in its secondary circuit in a known proportion to current in its primary circuit. CT Verification-A continuous check of CT continuity to verify connection. www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols De-energized-Free from any electrical connection to a source of potential difference and from electrical charge; not having a potential different from that of the earth. DFT-See Discrete Fourier Transform. Differential Module -An accessory for the MPU-32 Motor Protection Relay and MPS Motor Protection System to add phasedifferential protection. Digital Harmonic Filter-The use of digital signal-processing techniques such as a discrete Fourier Transform to eliminate the measurement of harmonic components. With regard to groundfault detection, this allows for a setting below the background noise level. Discrete Fourier Transform-A mathematical algorithm used to extract a single frequency, such as the fundamental frequency, from a signal. Earth Leakage -See Leakage Current. Earth-Fault Current Transformer-A current transformer used to measure low-level ground-fault current. Electrical Hazard-A dangerous condition such that contact or equipment failure can result in electric shock, arc flash burn, thermal burn, or blast. Electrical Safety-Recognizing hazards associated with the use of electrical energy and taking precautions so hazards do not cause injury or death. Electrically Safe Work Condition-An electrical conductor or circuit part has been disconnected from energized parts, locked/tagged in accordance with established standards, tested to ensure the absence of voltage, and grounded if determined necessary. Fail-Safe Mode (also known as Undervoltage or UV) - An output relay is energized during normal (not tripped) operation. If the protection relay loses supply voltage, the system will trip or alarm. (Also see Non-Fail-Safe.) Fault Current-A current that flows when a phase conductor is faulted to another phase or ground. Feeder-All circuit conductors between the service equipment or other power-supply source and the load or branch-circuit overcurrent device. 490 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Overview Glossary of Terms Feeder Protection-Overcurrent or overvoltage devices installed on a feeder circuit to interrupt the supply in the event of a fault. Flux Conditioner-A ring of magnetically permeable material inserted in an earth-fault current transformer window; used to reduce local saturation. Fundamental Frequency-In an alternating-current power system, the frequency of the generated voltage. In North America this is typically 60 Hz (60 cycles per second). Ground Check Conductor-An insulated conductor in a trailing cable used to assist in monitoring continuity of the ground conductor. Typically designed to be the smallest conductor, it is the first to break connection when cable couplers are disconnected. Ground-Check Loop -A circuit that includes a ground-check conductor, a ground-check termination device, and a ground conductor. Ground-Check Termination-A device installed at the load end of a ground-check loop. Ground-Continuity Monitor-A protection relay that continuously monitors a ground-check loop and trips if the loop opens or shorts. Ground Fault-An unintentional contact between a phase conductor and ground or equipment frame. The words "ground" and "earth" are used interchangeably. I2t (I squared t) -Thermal capacity, or used thermal capacity. With regard to motor protection, thermal capacity is used to measure and describe motor heating in terms of current (I). This method is more accurate than temperature sensing because of temperature-sensor placement and the time delay inherent in temperature measurement. IEEE Device Numbers -The devices in switching equipment are referred to by numbers, according to the functions they perform. These numbers are based on a system which has been adopted as standard for automatic switchgear by the IEEE. This numbering system is used on connection diagrams, in instruction literature, and in specifications. Incident Energy-The amount of energy impressed on a surface, a certain distance from the source, generated during an electrical arc event. One of the units used to measure incident energy is calories per centimeter squared (cal/cm2). Incident Energy Analysis -Used to predict the incident energy of an arc flash for a specified set of conditions. Insulation Monitoring-Monitoring the resistance from phase to ground to detect insulation breakdown on a system. Insulation Resistance -A measurement of the ability of an insulator, such as a cable jacket, to prevent current flow when a voltage is applied; typically measured in megaohms (M). Insulation resistance change can be monitored to predict failure. Ground-Fault Current-A current that returns to the supply neutral through a ground-fault and ground-return path. Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection-A method by which time-to-trip of a protective device, such as an overcurrent or ground-fault relay, decreases as the magnitude of the fault increases. Ground-Fault Current Transformer-See Earth-Fault Leakage Current-Low-level ground-fault current, typically Ground-Fault Relay-A protection relay designed to detect Low-Resistance Grounding-A Resistance-Grounding System that allows high currents to flow during a ground fault. Typically, 100 A and higher is considered Low-Resistance Grounding. (Also see High-Resistance Grounding.) Current Transformer. a phase-to-ground fault on a system and trip or alarm when the condition exceeds its pickup setting for longer than its time delay. Ground-Fault Protection-The use of a ground-fault relay or indication system in order to interrupt the supply or alarm personnel in the event of a ground fault. Ground Reference Module -A resistor network that limits ground-fault current and provides a system reference for a DC ground-fault relay. Harmonic Filter-A device or method to remove or ignore non-fundamental frequency components of a signal. Harmonic Frequency-Harmonic-frequency components measured in milliamperes (mA). LSIG Protection-An acronym for Long-time, Short-time, Instantaneous overcurrent, and Ground-fault protection; a term often used to describe protection required for a power-distribution feeder, or a protection relay with these functions. Motor Protection-Technology designed to ensure that a motor operates within its rated thermal capacity in order to maximize its service life. Neutral-Grounding Resistor (NGR) -A current-limiting resistor connecting the power-system neutral to ground. (voltage and current) are multiples of the fundamental frequency and, in a power system, can be considered noise. Harmonicfrequency components are often present with the use of adjustable-speed drives. that is closed when the relay is not energized. High-Resistance Grounding-Using a neutral-grounding that is open when the relay is not energized. High Tension Coupler-An accessory used to isolate system voltage from a protective relay. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls N.O. Contact (Normally Open Contact) -A relay contact Non-Fail-Safe Mode (also known as Shunt Trip or SH) - An output relay is energized and contacts change state when a trip occurs. If the protective device loses supply voltage, the system can continue to operate but will not be protected. (Also see Fail-Safe Mode.) 491 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 15 PROTECTION OVERVIEW resistor to limit the current to a low level. Typically, HighResistance Grounding limits ground-fault current to 25 A or lower. (Also see Low-Resistance Grounding.) N.C. Contact (Normally Closed Contact) -A relay contact Overview Glossary of Terms Non-Volatile Memory-Data is retained when power is removed. Nuisance Trip -A false operation of a protective relay. Phase Current-Current present in a phase conductor. Phase-Current Transformer-A current transformer installed so that current from one phase conductor flows in its primary winding. With regard to motor protection, feeder protection, and metering in a three-phase system, three current transformers are typically used to measure phase currents. Phase-Differential Protection-Protection designed to detect low-level winding-to-winding and winding-to-ground failures in an AC motor. Phase Voltage -The voltage measured between a phase conductor and ground, or another phase. Power factor (cos) -The relation between the active power [kW] and apparent power [kVA]. Primary Rating (for CTs)-The current rating of the primary side of a current transformer. For example, the first number in the ratio 500:5 is the primary rating. 500 A of primary current flowing through the CT will produce 5 A of current out of the secondary terminals. Pulsing Ground-Fault Systems -Modulating the groundfault current on a resistance-grounded system using a contactor to short out part of the NGR elements (or to open one of two NGRs connected in parallel). This technique is used to locate ground faults by tracing the pulsing ground-fault current to the source of the fault. Online or Offline Monitoring-Monitoring system parameters such as insulation integrity when the system is energized or de-energized, respectively. Open-CT Hazard-An open-circuited CT secondary which can develop a dangerously high voltage when primary current is present. Reactive Power-Measured in kVAR. The power used for magnetization of asynchronous alternators, motors and transformers, coils etc. The amount of reactive power has no effect on the torque of the prime mover (e.g. diesel engine). Therefore the reactive power has no effect on the engine. It is however very important for the alternator, as the total load on he alternator is the vector sum of active and reactive load. Relay (1) -An electrical switch that opens and closes a contact (or contacts) under the control of another circuit. Typically an electromagnet. PROTECTION OVERVIEW 15 Relay (2) -A device that receives inputs, compares them to set points, and provides outputs based upon that comparison. Relay Operating Mode -Method of operation used for Reverse Power-An active power [kW] fed into a generator that thus is working as an electric motor, turning the prime mover. As this would damage the prime mover (e.g. an internal combustion engine), reverse power relays are used in applications where generators run in parallel with each other or with the utility. These relays detect the amount and direction of the power, and in case of excessive reverse power, disconnect the generator breaker. Ride-Through Time -The amount of time a protection relay can maintain operation during a supply voltage loss. RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) -A device that experiences a linear change in resistance with a change in temperature. It is used to provide temperature metering. Common RTDs are 100 platinum, 100 nickel, 120 nickel, and 10 copper. Sensitive Ground-Fault Protection-Protection designed to accurately detect low-level ground-fault current. Shock Hazard-A dangerous condition associated with possible release of energy caused by contact or approach to energized electrical conductors or circuit parts. Solidly Grounded System-An electrical system in which the neutral point of a wye-connected supply transformer is connected directly to ground. (Also see Resistance-Grounded System, Ungrounded System.) Switchgear, Arc-Resistant-Equipment designed to withstand the effects of an internal arcing fault and that directs the internally released energy away from the employee. Time Delay-A setting on a protection relay that determines the time between the fault detection and relay operation. Trailing Cable -A power cable used to supply electrical power to mobile equipment. They typically contain three phase conductors, two ground conductors, and a pilot wire (also known as a ground-check conductor). Trip Level-A setting on a protection relay at which an LED or output contact operates. Trip Relay Contact-An output of a relay that acts as a switch and is typically connected to an undervoltage-release or shunt-trip coil of a circuit breaker. Trip State -The state of the output contact during a relay trip. True RMS -"Root-Mean-Square" calculation used to derive an average current or voltage value in a waveform. Ungrounded System-An electrical system in which no point of the system is intentionally grounded, such as a deltaconnected supply transformer. Zero-Sequence Current Transformer-See Earth-Fault Current Transformer. undervoltage or shunt-trip breakers. (Also see Fail-Safe Mode, Non-Fail-Safe Mode.) Resistance-Grounded System-An electrical system in which the transformer or generator neutral is connected to ground through a current-limiting resistor. (Also see Solidly Grounded System, Ungrounded System.) www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 492 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Overview Introduction I. INTRODUCTION TO PROTECTION RELAYS I. INTRO TO PROTECTION RELAYS What is a protection relay? Inputs and Settings Processes g Outputs What is a Protection Relay? g g A protection relay is a smart device that receives inputs, compares them to set points, and provides outputs. Inputs can include current, voltage, resistance, or temperature. Outputs can include visual feedback in the form of indicator lights and/or an alphanumeric display, communications, control warnings, alarms, and turning power off and on. A diagram is shown below. How do protection relays solve electrical problems? Stage 1 - Early stages of a failure Stage 2 - During a failure g Stage 3 - After a failure g g II. RELAY APPLICATION CURRENT VOLTAGE Ground-Fault Protection INSULATION Definition of Ground Fault g DC Systems g Ungrounded AC Systems g Solidly Grounded Systems g Resistance-Grounded Systems g System Capacitive Charging Current g Resistor Monitors g Ground-Continuity Monitors VISUAL INDICATION INPUTS g TEMPERATURE PICK-UP LEVELS PROTECTION RELAY SETTINGS OUTPUTS WARNING ALARM COMMUNICATIONS REMOVE POWER TIME FIGURE 1 Protection relays can be either electromechanical or electronic/microprocessor-based. Electromechanical relays consist of mechanical parts that require routine calibration to stay within intended tolerances. Microprocessor-based or electronic relays provide quick, reliable, accurate, and repeatable outputs. Using an electronic or microprocessorbased relay instead of an electromechanical design provides numerous advantages including improved accuracy, additional functions, reduced maintenance, smaller space requirements and lower life-cycle costs. Motor Protection Overview Common Motor Problems and Solutions g Motor Protection and the NEC(R) g g Arc-Flash Protection Overview Arc-Flash Safety Standards g Arc-Flash Mitigation g Arc-Flash Relays g Selection Criteria g g Inputs A relay needs information from the system to make a decision. These inputs can be collected in a variety of ways. In some cases, the wires in the field can be connected directly to the relay. In other applications, additional devices are needed to convert the measured parameters to a format that the relay can process. These additional devices can be current transformers, potential transformers, high-tension couplers, RTDs, or other devices. III. CT APPLICATION Current Transformers Lead Length g CT Installation g g IV. RESISTANCE GROUNDING CONVERSION Settings Many protection relays have adjustable settings. The user selects settings (pick-up levels) that allow the relay to make a decision. The relay compares the inputs to these settings and responds accordingly. 15 Processes (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 493 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols PROTECTION OVERVIEW Once the inputs are connected and the settings are made, the relay compares these values and makes a decision. Depending on the need, different types of relays are available for different functions. Overview Ground-Fault Protection Outputs an overcurrent feature. The relay measures the current (input) and allows the user to program limits (settings). The settings typically are more sensitive than the fuses or circuit breakers. Once these limits are exceeded, the relay will operate an internal switch (relay contacts). The user has the option to use the switch to turn on a light (alarm indication) or remove power (trip) before greater problems occur. The user can use the alarm indication to help identify the faulty equipment prior to the traditional fuse or circuit breaker clearing the fault. A relay can have several ways of communicating that a decision has been made. Typically the relay will operate a switch (relay contact) to indicate that an input has surpassed a setting, or the relay can provide notification through visual feedback such as a meter or LED. One advantage of many electronic or microprocessor-based relays is an ability to communicate with a network or a PLC. As an example, a thermostat can be evaluated using the diagram in Figure 1. The input that is measured is temperature and the input device is the temperature sensor. The user sets the desired temperature setting (pick-up level). The relay measures the existing air temperature and compares it to the setting. The outputs can be used to provide controls (turning an air conditioner or furnace on and off) and visual indication on the thermostat display. II. RELAY APPLICATION Ground-Fault Protection The primary purpose of grounding electrical systems is to provide protection against electrical faults. However, this was not common practice until the 1970's. Until then, most commercial and industrial systems were ungrounded. Although ungrounded systems do not cause significant damage during the first ground fault, the numerous disadvantages associated with ground faults resulted in a change to the grounding philosophy. There are other advantages for a grounded system, such as reduction of shock hazards and protection against lightning. Electrical faults can be divided into two categories: phase-tophase faults and ground faults. Studies have shown that 98% of all electrical faults are ground faults (Source: Woodham, Jack, P.E. " The Basics of Grounding Systems" May 1, 2003 <http://www.ecmweb.com/mag/electric_basics_ grounding_systems_2/index.html>). While fuses can protect against phase-to-phase faults, additional protection, such as protection relays, are typically required to protect against ground faults. How Do Protection Relays Solve Electrical Problems? PROTECTION OVERVIEW 15 Similar to how the thermostat solves the problem of automating the control of the air conditioner or furnace in a home, protection relays can solve electrical problems. The purpose of the protection relay is to detect a problem, ideally during its initial stage, and to either eliminate or significantly reduce damage to personnel and/or equipment. The following stages illustrate how an electrical problem develops: Stage 1: When conductors with good insulation are exposed to fault initiators such as moisture, dust, chemicals, persistent overloading, vibration or just normal wear, the insulation will slowly deteriorate. Such small changes will not be immediately obvious until the damage is severe enough to cause an electrical fault. Relays can detect that a problem is developing by identifying slight deviations in current, voltage, resistance, or temperature. Due to the small magnitude in change, only a sophisticated device such as a sensitive protection relay or a monitor can detect these conditions and indicate that a problem may be developing, before any further damage occurs. Stage 2: As the problem becomes more severe, further changes take place such as insulation breakdown, overheating, or overvoltage. Since the change from normal to abnormal is great, traditional devices can be used to interrupt power. Protection relays can also be used to provide additional protection by detecting the fault contributors (overheating, overvoltage, etc.) not possible with fuses and circuit breakers. Stage 3: At this point, the problem has occurred and caused damage. Different types of protection relays and monitors can reduce or eliminate damage because they detect problems in advance of traditional devices. As an example, if a facility is continually resetting circuit breakers, replacing fuses, or repairing equipment and cannot locate the problem, they may be experiencing overcurrents. If this is the case, the user can install a protection relay that has Definition of Ground Fault A ground fault is an inadvertent contact between an energized conductor and ground or the equipment frame. The return path of the fault current is through the grounding system and any equipment or personnel that becomes part of that system. Ground faults are frequently the result of insulation breakdown. It's important to note that damp, wet, and dusty environments require extra diligence in design and maintenance. Since contaminated water is conductive, it exposes degradation of insulation and increases the potential for hazards to develop. Table 1 shows the leading initiators of electrical faults. LEADING INITIATORS OF FAULTS Exposure to moisture Shorting by tools, rodents, etc. Exposure to dust Other mechanical damage Exposure to chemicals Normal deterioration from age % OF ALL FAULTS 22.5% 18.0% 14.5% 12.1% 9.0% 7.0% TABLE 1 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 494 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Overview Ground-Fault Protection Ungrounded AC Systems RECEPTACLE BLACK l FAULT 120 V WHITE Ungrounded AC systems, as shown in Figure 4, were used where continuity of power was critical. For example, chemical plants or refineries involving processes that cannot be interrupted without extensive dollar or product loss may have an ungrounded system. However, experience has proven that these systems are problematic and are being replaced with resistance grounded systems. Two major problems with ungrounded systems are transient overvoltages and difficulty locating ground faults. TOASTER 15 A GREEN FIGURE 2 PHASE C As an example, in the toaster circuit above, the black or hot wire is shorted to the metal casing of the toaster. When the circuit closes, all or part of the current is channeled through the toaster frame and then through the green ground wire. When sufficient current flows (typically 6 x 15 A = 90 A), the circuit breaker will open. A protection relay could be installed to detect currents as low as 10 mA, which would open the circuit breaker at a significantly lower level, hence, much quicker than the traditional circuit breaker. Although the example above shows a solidly grounded single-phase circuit, the philosophy is the same on threephase circuits discussed later. Relays and monitors are specifically designed to look for the leading initiators shown in Table 1 by detecting low-level changes in current, voltage, resistance or temperature. PHASE A PHASE B DISTRIBUTED SYSTEM CAPACITANCE FIGURE 4 g g DC Systems g Direct current (DC) systems have positive and negative buses. If either bus is intentionally grounded, then it is referred to as a grounded system. If neither bus is grounded, then it is referred to as an ungrounded DC system. A ground fault on a DC system may cause damage to the source as well as in the field. If the system is ungrounded, then it is possible to use a ground-fault relay by installing a ground-reference module between the two buses to establish a neutral point (see Figure 3). The ground-fault relay uses this neutral point as a reference to detect low-level ground faults. g An ungrounded system has no point in the system that is intentionally grounded (other than the normal bonding which is always present to connect the non-current-carrying metal parts to ground). Grounding occurs only through system capacitance to ground (as shown in Figure 4). Continuity of operation occurs because the system can operate with one phase faulted to ground. An intermittent or arcing fault can produce high transient overvoltages to ground. These voltages are impressed on the phase conductors throughout the system until the insulation at the weakest point breaks down. This breakdown can occur at any point in the electrical system, causing a phase-to-ground-to-phase fault. Although a ground fault can be detected or alarmed on the system, it is difficult to determine the location of the fault. There are two methods used to detect ground faults on ungrounded systems. One method is to monitor the voltages between the phases and ground. As a ground fault develops, the faulted phase will collapse to ground potential, causing an indicator light to dim. The indicator lights on the unfaulted phases become brighter. A second method to detect a ground fault is to measure the insulation resistance. As the insulation deteriorates, a relay continuously monitoring the insulation resistance can alarm at different levels for predictive maintenance. A visual indicator or meter can also be used. GROUND REFERENCE MODULE 15 PROTECTION OVERVIEW L1 L2 FIGURE 3 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 495 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Overview Ground-Fault Protection Solidly Grounded Systems Assume that this ground-fault is not a bolted fault, but an arcing fault due to an insulation breakdown or a partial reduction of clearances between the line and ground. Because of the arc resistance, fault current may be as low as 38% of the bolted-fault level. This can be in the range of a normal load or a slight overload. The fault current may be low enough that the overcurrent device (600-A circuit breaker) does not sense a fault, or may pick it up but not trip for a long time. The energy being supplied by the source is concentrated at the arc and could cause severe equipment damage very quickly. This energy release could cause a fire that in turn, could damage the premises and present an extreme hazard to personnel. Due to the problem of ungrounded systems, a shift in philosophy occurred and designs moved from ungrounded to grounded systems. In most cases, the type of grounding system chosen was solidly grounded. A solidly grounded system is a system of conductors in which at least one conductor or point is intentionally grounded (usually the neutral point of transformer or generator windings). The problem with the direct connection is that ground-fault current can be excessive, causing Arc-Flash hazards, extensive equipment damage, and possible injury to personnel. A solidly grounded system cannot continue to operate with a ground fault. g g g PHASE C Aside from converting this solidly grounded system to resistance grounding, the best way to prevent damage is to detect low-level ground leakage prior to it becoming a ground fault. In order to accomplish this, the protection relay must be able to sense a low-level ground leakage without nuisance tripping. In modern facilities, equipment often generates noise or harmonics that can interfere with a protection relay's ability to function properly. For example, the noise or harmonics may be higher than the desired ground-fault relay settings, causing the relay to falsely operate when there is no fault on the system. The protection relay must be able to filter out noise or harmonics to provide reliable protection. PHASE A NEUTRAL PHASE B GROUND FIGURE 5 g g g g In a solidly grounded system, the wye point (or neutral) of the power source is connected solidly to ground and offers a very stable system that maintains a fixed phase-to-ground voltage. The high ground-fault current is easy to detect with fuses, circuit breakers, or protection relays, allowing for selective tripping (tripping the faulted feeder and not the main feeder). When a ground fault occurs, high point-of-fault damage can quickly result since the energy available to the ground fault is only limited by the system impedance (which is typically very low). Due to excessive ground-fault current and Arc-Flash Hazards, the faulted feeder must be removed from service. This does not allow for continuous operation during a ground fault. Resistance-Grounded Systems Resistance grounding solves the problems commonly associated with both ungrounded systems and solidly grounded systems. The name is derived from the addition of a resistor between the system neutral and ground (as shown in Figure 7). The specifications of the resistor are userdetermined to achieve a desired ground-fault current, which must be greater than the system capacitive charging current (explained later in this section). PHASE C Figure 6 illustrates an example of the dangers associated with solidly grounded systems. In this example, a ground fault occurs and the overcurrent protection is set at 600 A. NEUTRAL PHASE A PHASE B 600 A / 3 P GROUND ARCING FAULT 15 FIGURE 7 PROTECTION OVERVIEW EQUIPMENT FRAME OR BARE COPPER FIGURE 6 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 496 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Overview Ground-Fault Protection g g g g g Transient overvoltages can be eliminated by correctly sizing the neutral-grounding resistor (NGR) to provide an adequate discharge path for the system capacitance. Continuity of operation with one ground fault is typically allowable when ground-fault current is <-10 A. The NGR limits the available ground-fault current. This eliminates or minimizes point-of-fault damage (Arc-Flash Hazards) and controls the ground-fault voltage. Pulsing current can be used to locate ground faults when ground-fault current is <-10 A. Pulsing current is created by using a shorting contactor to short out half of the resistance, causing the ground-fault current to double (usually one cycle per second). A hand-held zero-sequence meter is used to detect the fluctuating ground-fault current, and locate the ground fault. The only disadvantage of resistance grounding is that if the resistor fails, the system will become ungrounded. Resistor monitoring is recommended to protect against this. Even if the distributed capacitance is not balanced, the ammeter will read zero because all the current flowing through the CT window must return through the CT window. System charging current is the current that will flow into the grounding connection when one phase of an ungrounded system is faulted to ground (see Figure 9). It can be measured as shown below if appropriate precautions are taken: g g If the fault occurs on the supply side of the CT, the sum of the currents in the CT window is not zero. Ammeter A will read the sum of the capacitive currents in the unfaulted phases. This value is the charging current of all the equipment on the load side of the CT. lC lA lB x A protection relay for resistance-grounded systems is used to detect a ground fault and to monitor the neutral-to-ground connection. It can be used to provide alarms or to trip the feeder from service upon the detection of a ground fault. The relay can provide a pulsing circuit that can be used to locate the ground fault. The relay can also alarm or trip if the neutral-to-ground path fails. For systems 5 kV and less, highresistance grounding can be used. High-resistance grounding typically limits the resistor current to 10 A or less. By doing so, the ground fault can remain on the system, given that the system is rated for the voltage shift. A xC xC xC IA + IB + IC = 0 FIGURE 9 A single-line diagram of a three-feeder, resistance-grounded system with a fault on feeder 3 is shown in Figure 10. A CT (A1 and A2) on unfaulted feeders will detect the charging current of that feeder. A CT (A3) on a faulted feeder will detect the sum of the resistor current (IR) and the charging currents (I1 +I2) of the unfaulted feeders. g g For systems above 5 kV, neutral-grounding resistors are typically rated for 25 A or more, and ground-fault current is cleared within 10 s. System Capacitive Charging Current A1 Although not physically connected to ground, electrical conductors and the windings of all components are capacitively connected to ground. Consequently, a small current will flow to ground from each phase. This current does not occur at any particular location; rather, it is distributed throughout the system just as the capacitance to ground is distributed throughout the system. For analysis, it is convenient to consider the distributed capacitance as lumped capacitance, as shown in Figures 5, 6, 7, and 8. A2 l1 l2 1 2 3 lR A3 FIGURE 10 lC lA 15 lB xC xC xC IA + IB + IC = 0 PROTECTION OVERVIEW A FIGURE 8 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 497 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Overview Motor Protection Motor Protection Selective coordination in a resistance-grounded system can be achieved if the pick-up setting of each ground-fault relay is greater than the charging current of the feeder it is protecting. If the pick-up setting of a ground-fault relay is less than the charging current of the feeder it is protecting, it will trip when a ground fault occurs elsewhere in the system. This is known as sympathetic tripping. Sympathetic tripping can be avoided by choosing a relay pickup setting larger than the charging current from the largest feeder. If the relative size of the feeders can change, or if the advantage of using one operating value for all ground-fault relays in a system is recognized, then it is prudent to select a pick-up setting for all ground-fault relays that is larger than the system charging current. In order to eliminate transient overvoltages associated with an ungrounded system, it is necessary to use a grounding resistor with a let-through current equal to or larger than the system charging current. What is the minimum acceptable NGR current? Select a pickup setting for the ground-fault relays that exceeds the largest feeder charging current and multiply the operating value by an acceptable tripping ratio. Use the greater of this value or system charging current and select the next-largest available standard let-through current rating. Overview Motors are a significant investment and often run critical processes. Motor protection relays are used to protect the windings from damage due to electrical faults and thermal overloads. Adequate motor protection not only prevents motor damage, but also ensures optimal process efficiency and minimal interruption. Cost recovery for protection is achieved by extending the life of the motor, preventing motor rewinds and reducing downtime. Common Motor Problems Overload and Overtemperature Insulation breakdown is a common reason for motor failure. Windings in the motor are insulated with organic materials including epoxy and paper. Insulation degradation occurs when winding temperature exceeds its rating. The National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) states that the time-to-failure of organic insulation is halved for each 8 to 10C rise above the motor insulation-class rating. This point is illustrated in Figure 11. Solution: An I2t Thermal Model provides thermal-overload protection of motor windings during all phases of operation. By integrating the square of the current over time, a thermal model can predict motor temperature and react much quicker than embedded temperature devices. A thermal model takes into consideration the motor service factor, full-load current and class. A dynamic thermal model adjusts the time-to-trip depending on how much motor thermal capacity has been used. Figure 12 illustrates the adjustment in trip time for different current levels at different levels of used thermal capacity (I2t). Resistor Monitors As discussed in the resistance-grounded systems section, a failure in the neutral-to-ground path will lead to a dangerous situation. Some examples of failure are stolen wires, loose connections, corrosion, and broken resistor elements. The resistor monitor continuously monitors the path from system neutral to ground for a problem. When a problem occurs, the monitor provides an alarm. Ground-Continuity Monitors A dynamic thermal model allows accurate protection of a motor and allows operations to get the maximum work out of a motor without sacrificing available life. If the motor is hot (high % used thermal capacity) it will trip more rapidly during an overload than if the motor is cold (0% used thermal capacity). In the event of a stall condition, when available motor torque is lower than the torque required by the load, the motor can be de-energized before it overheats. Many old-technology electronic thermal overloads do not take into consideration the values of load current below the full-load current (FLA) pick-up value. Modern overload relays should model currents above and below the FLA pick-up current to achieve maximum output of the motor and maximum life of insulation. On larger induction motors, blockage or loss of ventilation can cause motor hot spots that current-based protection cannot detect without the use of temperature sensors. Resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) are inexpensive devices installed between the stator windings during manufacturing and may be included on motor-end bearings. Ground-check monitors are used to detect problems in equipment ground conductors. The cable powering mobile equipment typically has an extra wire, or pilot wire, routed with the phase conductors. A monitor uses this pilot wire to send a signal to a terminating device in the equipment, where the signal is sent back on the cable ground conductor to the monitor. The monitor continuously monitors this loop for open or short circuits, indicating that a problem has occurred. The monitor provides an alarm for this condition. PROTECTION OVERVIEW 15 As an example, portable loads are grounded via single or multiple conductors in a trailing cable. A ground fault on a portable load will cause fault current to flow through the ground conductors and all other ground-return paths. A hazardous touch voltage can develop when the ground conductor opens and a ground fault develops, assuming there is not enough current to trip a ground-fault relay. If the portable equipment has rubber tires or is not in good contact with earth, then a person who touches the equipment under fault conditions will become part of the ground-return path. www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 498 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Overview Motor Protection 100,000 10000 8000 -- 10 -- 7 50,000 6000 5000 4000 (YEARS) -- 5 CLASS F 10,000 2000 1000 800 -- 1 5000 600 500 400 (MONTHS) -- 5 300 200 T I ME - T O - T R I P ( S E C O ND S ) -- 1 -- 20 -- 10 -- 5 100 (DAYS) AVERAGE MOTOR LIFE (HOURS) -- 2 1000 500 -- 3 50 SERVICE FACTOR 1.00 TO 1.25 SHOWN AT 1.15 3000 TIME-TO-TRIP DECREASES AS USED I 2 t INCREASES 100 80 60 50 40 30 0% USED I 2 t (cold) 20 25% USED I 2 t 50% USED I 2 t 75% USED I 2 t 10 8 6 5 4 -- 2 3 -- 1 2 10 1 0.8 5 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 1 300 280 260 240 220 200 180 160 150 140 130 120 110 100 0.1 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 MOTOR CURRENT (%FLA) HOTTEST TEMPERATURE (C) FIGURE 11 FIGURE 12 An RTD has a linear change in resistance over its rated temperature range. Using information from an RTD, motorprotection relays can provide protection for loss-of-ventilation, loss-of-cooling, or high-ambient-temperature. The RTD temperature reading can also be used as an input to the thermal model to improve protection. When hotmotor compensation is enabled, the maximum stator-RTD temperature is used to bias the thermal model by increasing used I2t when the RTD temperature is greater than the thermal-model temperature. trip a breaker instead of a starter due to the high fault levels. Jam protection is set below overcurrent and has a slightly longer delay time. Jam protection prevents motor heating that would otherwise lead to an overload trip. Jam protection is enabled after the motor is running to avoid tripping on starting current. Undercurrent is set below full-load current to detect loss of load. Under and Overvoltage Overvoltages cause insulation stress and premature breakdown. Undervoltages, such as those caused by brownouts, can lead to increased motor heating. Torque developed by an electric motor changes as the square of the applied voltage. A 10% reduction in voltage results in a 19% reduction in torque. If the motor load is not reduced, the motor will be overloaded. Overcurrent, Jam and Undercurrent Overcurrent faults, also referred to as short circuits, can cause catastrophic motor failures and fires. Overcurrents can be caused by phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground, and phase-toground-to-phase faults. A mechanical jam, such as a failed bearing or load, can cause stalling and locked-rotor current to be drawn by the motor, resulting in overheating. Undercurrent protection is loss-of-load protection and is required by some codes as a safety measure. A water pump that cavitates can be dangerous. The water typically provides pump cooling. Without the cooling water, case temperature can reach an extremely high value. If valves are opened under these conditions and cold water is allowed to reach red-hot metal parts, the resulting steam pressures can destroy the pump and pose a serious personnel hazard. Solution: Under and overvoltage protection are features found in higher-end motor protection relays. Voltage protection can be used pro-actively to inhibit a start. Ground Faults Ground faults are the most common fault and can lead to more serious problems. Ground-fault protection, described elsewhere in this text, is an important consideration in motor loads. Solution: The motor protection relay should be able to detect low-level ground-fault current when used on a resistance-grounded system. PROTECTION OVERVIEW Solution: A multifunction motor protection relay has multiple trip and alarm settings for current protection. Overcurrent protection is typically set above locked rotor current and has a minimal delay time. Overcurrent protection may be used to (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 15 499 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Overview Arc-Flash Protection Article 430.32 (A)(4) requires the use of a protection device having embedded temperature detectors that cause current to the motor to be interrupted when the motor attains a temperature rise greater than marked on the nameplate in an ambient temperature of 40C for motors larger than 1500 hp. High-Resistance Winding Faults Winding-to-winding and winding-to-ground failures inside the motor are difficult to detect using the phase and ground-fault CTs due to low magnitudes of current. Solution: Differential protection in high-end motor protection relays use multiple CTs to compare the current entering and leaving the winding. If there is a difference in currents then leakage is occurring. This sensitive protection is used on very large or critical motors. The NEC defines minimum requirements and is intended to provide protection from fire. Protection relays can provide many enhancements above simple fire protection. Communications Current and Voltage Imbalance, Phase Loss, Phase Reverse Network communications can be added to a motor protection relay to allow remote metering of currents, voltages and temperatures. Data logging is a useful feature for troubleshooting and comparing event sequences with process stages. Analysis of information can often show operational issues. Older motor protection devices did not consider current imbalance and today it is often overlooked. Imbalance increases negative-sequence current which causes additional rotor heating. Phase loss is also referred to as single phasing. When a phase loss occurs, negative-sequence current is equal to the positive-sequence current and imbalance is 100%. In this condition, one motor winding attempts to do the work of three, inevitably leading to overheating. Arc-Flash Protection The Consequences of Arc Flash Arcing and arc flashes are uncontrolled, intense, luminous discharges of electrical energy that occur when electric current flows across what is normally an insulating medium. The most common cause of arc faults is insulation failure. These failures may be caused by defective or aging insulation material, poor or incorrect maintenance, dust, moisture, vermin, and human error (touching a test probe to the wrong surface or a tool slipping and touching live conductors). Arc-Flash events are dangerous, and potentially fatal, to personnel. According to OSHA, industrial Arc-Flash events cause about 80% of electrically-related accidents and fatalities among qualified electrical workers. Even if personnel injuries are avoided, Arc Flash can destroy equipment, resulting in costly replacement and downtime. Phase reversal causes the negative-sequence current and voltage to be greater than the positive-sequence current and voltage. Voltage-based protection is advantageous to prevent a start with incorrect sequence. In some applications attempting to spin the motor backwards will result in damage to the load. An example of this is certain impeller designs in downhole pumps. Solution: Modern motor protection relays use digital signal analysis to measure true-sequence components. These sequence components are used for thermal model calculations and take the extra heating into consideration. Voltage imbalance which drives current imbalance can be used as a start inhibit. Sequence components are also used for calculating imbalance, phase loss and phase reversal. Arc-Flash Safety Standards NFPA 70E, Handbook for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. outlines the practices and standards that companies should follow to protect workers and equipment from Arc Flash and other electrical hazards. It specifies practices designed to make sure that an electrically safe work condition exists. In Canada, CSA Z462, Workplace electrical safety, specifies safe workplace practices. There are also various provincial regulations pertaining to electrical safety. The NFPA 70E and the CSA Z462 hold both employers and their employees responsible for creating a workplace for electrical workers that is not just safe but puts in place the best possible processes and procedures that are fully understood, practiced and enforced for optimal results. Using Arc-Flash relays is one way to protect the functional reliability of the distribution board and at the same time comply with the requirements of NFPA 70E and CSA Z462. Motor Jogging NEMA-designed motors are rated for two starts from cold and one start from hot per hour. Motor jogging refers to excessive starts and can cause overheating. The motor may not get up to full speed and the forced air cooling is not effective. Solution: Since the thermal model accurately tracks the motor's used thermal capacity at all times, including during starts and between starts, the starts-per-hour feature may not be required. It is included for compatibility with protection relays that do not have dynamic thermal-modeling capability. PROTECTION OVERVIEW 15 Motor Protection and the NEC(R) The NEC(R) requires the motor to be protected by overload devices against excessive heating due to overload and failure to start (Article 430 Section III). Article 430, Section IV also specifies the use of devices to protect against overcurrents such as short circuits and grounds. Both of these NEC(R) requirements and many additional functions can be met with the use of a multifunction motor protection relay. www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 500 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Overview Arc-Flash Protection Arc-Flash Mitigation The electronic output to turn on is a function of the type of output relay used. Solid-state outputs (for example, insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs)) are much faster than electromechanical relays and can operate within 200 microseconds. NFPA 70E goes into great detail on procedures to avoid electrical shock and Arc-Flash events. Sometimes, though, it's necessary to work on live circuits. For these cases, NPFA 70E specifies approach distances and use of personal protection equipment (PPE). Trip Reliability Reliable tripping is the most important characteristic of an ArcFlash relay, because this ensures mitigation of an arcing fault. Two aspects of reliability should be considered: trip redundancy and system-health monitoring. Current limiting fuses or current-limiting circuit breakers help protect against arc flashes. They allow only a certain amount of energy to pass before they open a circuit. Because an Arc Flash can draw a fraction of bolted-fault current, circuit breakers cannot be relied upon to distinguish between the arcing current and a typical inrush current. Redundant Tripping. Arc-Flash relays should offer a redundant tripping feature, which means it has both primary and secondary trip path logic. The primary path is controlled by the internal microprocessor and its embedded software, and works by activating the coil of the primary trip relay. High-resistance grounding (HRG) is another technique for protecting against arc flashes. If a phase faults to ground, then the resistance limits current to just a few amps; not enough to cause downtime by tripping the overcurrent protection device, and not enough to allow an Arc Flash. It is important to remember that while resistance grounding prevents Arc Flash from phase-toground shorts, it has no effect on phase-to-phase shorts. The redundant path typically uses a discrete solid-state device that does not go through the microprocessor. Any failure in the primary (microprocessor) path will cause the unit to automatically switch to its redundant path, which activates a shunt-trip relay without delay when a sensor input is above the light detection threshold. Another way to mitigate the dangers of arc flashing is by redesigning the switchgear. Switchgear cabinets can be designed to contain and channel energy away from personnel during an Arc Flash. An often overlooked advantage of a solid-state trip path compared to a microprocessor-based circuit is the reaction time when the relay is first powered up. Wiring mistakes, tools left in hazardous locations, and the regular stresses of powering up all contribute to the risk of an Arc Flash on power up. A microprocessor can require 200 ms or more before it is able to start scanning the optical sensors. However, a solid-state trip path can detect an Arc and send a trip signal in as little as 2 ms. In addition, there are fail- safe features that alert operators when, for example, the microprocessor fails. Arc-Flash relays Arc-Flash relays are microprocessor-based devices that use optical sensors to detect the onset of a flash. The sensors are strategically placed in various cubicles or drawers inside the switchboard. Installing an Arc-Flash relay to rapidly detect developing arc flashes greatly reduces the total clearing time and the amount of energy released through an arcing fault. In turn, there is less damage to equipment and fewer and less severe injuries to nearby personnel. Health monitoring. Health monitoring makes sure the system is in good operating condition and should extend from the light sensors to the output of the Arc-Flash relay trip circuitry. Health monitoring starts on the sensors. A signal is sent from the relay to the light sensors, where a test light is detected by the sensor and sent back to the relay. In the case of a fiber-optic sensor, this also verifies the entire length of the fiber is not pinched or broken. On-sensor health indication is critical in preventing maintenance work on equipment where protection is not working. It also has the added benefit of providing rapid fault location. Arc-Flash Relay Selection Criteria When selecting an Arc-Flash relay, there are six important criteria: 1. Reaction time 2. Trip reliability 3. Avoidance of nuisance tripping 4. Sensor design and installation 5. Ease of use Following the path of a trip signal from the sensor, internal monitoring must also include the primary and redundant trip circuit. Low voltage across the IGBT indicates a wiring fault or an error in the trip coil, and a high voltage is a sign of an error in the IGBT switch, both of which are also reported and logged. The IGBT is also thermally protected against overloads, and will turn off if it overheats. However, the thermal protection has a 100 ms delay before acting, meaning that even a dangerously overheated coil will attempt to signal a trip before resuming thermal protection. Reaction Time Since light is the earliest detectable indication that an Arc Flash is occurring, Arc-Flash relays use optical light sensors to detect the arc that is forming. The output of the light sensor is hard-wired to the Arc-Flash relay, which trips a circuit that interrupts the energy supply in the Arc. (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 15 PROTECTION OVERVIEW The response time of an Arc-Flash relay is approximately 1-5 ms at light intensities of about 10,000 lux or higher. Within that time frame, the optical sensor output can actuate a switch or circuit breaker to cut off current feeding the arc. The overall current clearing time depends on the protection strategy used and the performance of the external switch or circuit breaker used. The breaker will typically take an additional 35-50 ms to open, depending on the type of breaker and how well it is maintained. 501 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Overview CT Application III. CT APPLICATION Avoidance of Nuisance Tripping A typical Arc-Flash Relay system has an integrated three-phase current measurement function that detects and reacts to short circuit and overcurrent conditions. Although this is not a requirement for the system to operate, this option will increase the reliability of the system (minimize unwanted tripping). Current Transformers (CTs) A current transformer is defined as a transformer that produces a current in its secondary circuit that is in proportion to current in its primary circuit. Although there are other types of CTs, only the window (or ring) type will be discussed here. Window-type CTs get their name from their design that consists of a ring-shaped core. This core is formed by a single length of strip ferromagnetic material tightly wound to form the ring-shaped core. A CT operates on a principle of flux balance, as shown in Figure 1. If the primary winding is energized with the secondary circuit open-circuited, the transformer becomes an iron-cored inductor. The primary current generates a magnetic flux in the core as shown (flux direction can be determined by the right-hand rule). When the secondary winding is connected to a burden or is short circuited, current flows through the secondary winding creating magnetic flux in the core in opposition to the magnetizing flux created by the primary current. If losses are ignored, the secondary flux balances exactly to the primary flux. This phenomenon is known as Lenz's Law. If the microprocessor logic receives an input from a light sensor, it checks for a rapidly rising input from the current transformers. Two conditions need to be fulfilled before the trip is sent to the circuit breaker: a certain current flow that exceeds the normal operating current of the system (the threshold level is adjustable from 10-1000% of the full load current) and a signal from the arc-flash sensor, implying that the sensor has reacted to a highintensity light source. Sensor Design and Installation Arc-Flash relay installations utilize multiple fixed-point light sensors near vertical and horizontal bus bars where arcing faults are apt to occur in A feeder switchgear cabinets. B Sufficient numbers of sensors should be installed C to cover all accessible areas, even if policy is to only work on de-energized systems. At least one sensor should PGR-8800 have visibility to an arc fault (Arc-Flash Protection Relay) L1 if a person blocks another L2 sensor's field of view. Light sensors may also be installed in other electrical cabinets and on panels that are subject to routine maintenance and repairs. 5-A-SECONDARY PHASE CT's CTs (Recommended) PGA-LS10 (Point Sensor) PGA-LS20/ PGA-LS25 (Fiber-Optic Sensor) T1 PRIMARY FLUX T2 SECONDARY FLUX 24 Vdc Battery Backup (Optional) SECONDARY WINDING A fiber-optic sensor, which have a 360 field of view for detecting light, allows more flexible positioning of the light sensing locations, as the fiber-optic strands can be looped throughout an enclosure or panel to cover challenging component layouts. PRIMARY WINDING FIGURE 1 Easy to Use Hardware and Software PROTECTION OVERVIEW 15 Lead Length Another important factor to consider is ease of use. Some relays may require field assembly, calibration, or advanced configuration before installing. It is critical to consider those extra steps and the capabilities of the operators who will be using the devices. Often, very complicated devices can be misused because of incorrect setup or configuration, which can defeat the purpose of the device altogether. A few Arc-Flash Relays have software that provides event logging. To make troubleshooting easier, this software should Examples of Arc-Flash Relay light sensor record the installation in switchgear. specific sensor that initiated the fault in the data records. www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols The secondary lead resistance of CTs cannot be ignored, particularly with low Volt-Amperes (VA) CTs. For example, let's look at an electronic overload relay. The relay's CT input impedance or burden (ZB) = 0.01 The maximum current (I) = 10 A The CT rating (P) = 5 VA Now let's solve for the maximum length of #14 AWG leads that will result in a rated accuracy for a 10 A secondary current. Solving for maximum total impedance (ZT): P = IZT ZT = P / I = 5 / 10 = 0.05 502 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Overview Converting to a Resistance-Grounded System IV. RESISTANCE-GROUNDING CONVERSION Solving for the maximum lead resistance (Z W): Z T= Z W +Z B Convert Ungrounded to Resistance-Grounded Systems Z W= 0.05-0.01 = 0.04 If we look up the #14 AWG resistance we find it equals 2.6 ohms/1000 ft Therefore, lead length = Z W / #14 AWG resistance Maximum lead length = (0.04 x 1000) / 2.6 = 15.4 ft Resistance grounding protects a system against transient overvoltages caused by intermittent ground faults and it provides a method to locate ground faults. (Transient overvoltages and inability to locate ground faults are the most common safety issues with ungrounded systems.) Conversion of delta-connected or wye-connected sources with inaccessible neutrals require a zigzag transformer to derive an accessible neutral for connection to a neutral grounding resistor (NGR). The neutral is only used for the NGR and not for distribution. During normal operation the only current that flows in the zigzag transformer is an extremely small magnetizing current. When one phase is grounded, the NGR and the zigzag transformer provide a path for ground-fault current to flow. CT Installation A CT should not be operated with its secondary opencircuited. If the secondary is opened when primary current is flowing, the secondary current will attempt to continue to flow so as to maintain the flux balance. As the secondary circuit impedance increases from a low value to a high value the voltage across the secondary winding will rise to the voltage required to maintain current flow. If the secondary voltage reaches the breakdown voltage of the secondary winding, the insulation will fail and the CT will be damaged. Furthermore, this situation presents a personnel shock hazard. When a ring-type CT is used to monitor a single conductor or multiple conductors, the conductors should be centered in the CT window, as shown below in Figure 2, and should be perpendicular to the CT opening. In some applications it is difficult or impossible to install the primary conductor through the CT window (example: existing bus bar structure). For these applications a split core CT is sometimes used. Performance of split core CTs may be less than that of solid core CTs. Figure 1 A A B C B B SPACER C A Design Note 1: A zigzag conversion requires a three-phase connection to the existing power system, typically at the main transformer or switchgear. See Figure 1. C Incorrect Design Note 2: The resistor let-through current must be greater than the system capacitive charging current (see Section I). Correct FIGURE 2 CT characteristics are normally specified at a single frequency such as 50 or 60 Hz. Therefore the question arises: What happens when CTs are used with variable frequency drives (VFDs)? For CTs that are linear to approximately 10x rated primary current at 60 Hz, the Volts/Hertz ratio is approximately constant. That is, for all other conditions held the same at 6 Hz, the CT will be linear to only 1x rated current and at 30 Hz the CT will be linear to 5x rated current. For a standard silicon-steel-core CT, the upper bandwidth frequency is approximately 5 kHz. 15 PROTECTION OVERVIEW (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Design Note 3: Protection, coordination, and annunciation systems depend on the integrity of the NGR. NGR monitoring with an SE-330 or SE-325 is recommended. 503 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Overview Ungrounded, Solidly Grounded and Resistance-Grounded Systems UNGROUNDED SYSTEM Advantages Disadvantages * Operation possible with one faulted phase * Ground faults are difficult to locate * Transient overvoltages damage equipment PHASE C PHASE A PHASE B DISTRIBUTED SYSTEM CAPACITANCE SOLIDLY GROUNDED SYSTEM Advantages Disadvantages * Eliminates transient overvoltages * Selective tripping possible * Costly point-of-fault damage * Cannot operate with a ground fault * Ground-fault Arc-Flash hazard * Increased Arc-Flash risk PHASE C NEUTRAL PHASE A PHASE B GROUND RESISTANCE-GROUNDED SYSTEM Advantages Disadvantages * Reduced point-of-fault damage and Arc-Flash risk * Eliminates transient overvoltages * Simplifies ground-fault location * Continuous operation with a ground fault * Selective tripping possible * No ground-fault Arc-Flash hazard PHASE C 15 NEUTRAL PROTECTION OVERVIEW * Failure of the neutral-grounding resistor renders currentsensing ground-fault protection inoperative PHASE A PHASE B GROUND www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 504 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Overview Ungrounded, Solidly Grounded and Resistance-Grounded Systems Convert Solidly Grounded to Resistance-Grounded Systems Resistance grounding protects a system against Arc-Flash Hazards caused by ground faults and provides a method for continuous operation or an orderly shutdown procedure. (Ground faults are estimated to be 98% of all electrical faults.) Since the neutral point of the power source is available, the solid connection between neutral and ground is replaced with a grounding resistor. This resistor limits ground fault current to a predetermined value, typically 5 A for 480 V systems (the system capacitive charging current is usually less than 3 A). By limiting the ground-fault current to 5 A or less, there are no Arc-Flash Hazards associated with ground faults. This allows for continuous operation during the first ground fault. During a ground fault on a resistance-grounded (RG) system, a voltage shift occurs (the same shift experienced on ungrounded systems). The faulted phase collapses to ~0 V, the non-faulted phases rise to line-to-line voltage with respect to ground, and the neutral point rises to line-to-neutral voltage with respect to ground. Figure 2 Design Note 1: An NGR conversion for a solidly grounded system requires a neutral connection to the existing power system, typically at the main transformer or switchgear. See Figure 2. Design Note 2: The voltage shift requires equipment to be fully rated at line-to-line voltage with respect to ground. This may require TVSSs, VFDs, meters, etc. to be reconfigured or replaced. Design Note 3: The voltage shift also restricts neutral distribution. The neutral typically cannot be distributed due to its potential rise during ground faults. Single-phase line-to-neutralvoltage loads must be served by a 1:1 isolation transformer or converted to line-to-line loads. Design Note 4: The resistor let-through current must be greater 15 than the system capacitive charging current (see Section I). Design Note 5: Protection, coordination, and annunciation (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls PROTECTION OVERVIEW systems depend on the integrity of the NGR. Monitoring with an SE-330 or SE-325 NGR Monitor is recommended. 505 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Overview IEEE/ANSI Device Numbers and Typical Suffixes IEEE DEVICE NUMBERS 1 - Master Element 2 - Time Delay Starting or Closing Relay 3 - Checking or Interlocking Relay 4 - Master Contactor 5 - Stopping Device 6 - Starting Circuit Breaker 7 - Rate of Change Relay 8 - Control Power Disconnecting Device 9 - Reversing Device 10 - Unit Sequence Switch 11 - Multi-function Device 12 - Overspeed Device 13 - Synchronous-speed Device 14 - Underspeed Device 15 - Speed - or Frequency, Matching Device 16 - Data Communications Device 17 - Shunting or Discharge Switch 18 - Accelerating or Decelerating Device 19 - Starting to Running Transition Contactor 20 - Electrically Operated Valve 21 - Distance Relay 22 - Equalizer Circuit Breaker 23 - Temperature Control Device 24 - Volts Per Hertz Relay 25 - Synchronizing or Synchronism-Check Device 26 - Apparatus Thermal Device 27 - Undervoltage Relay 28 - Flame Detector 29 - Isolating Contactor or Switch 30 - Annunciator Relay 31 - Separate Excitation Device 32 - Directional Power Relay 33 - Position Switch 34 - Master Sequence Device 35 - Brush-Operating or Slip-Ring Short-Circuiting Device 36 - Polarity or Polarizing Voltage Devices 37 - Undercurrent or Underpower Relay 38 - Bearing Protective Device 39 - Mechanical Condition Monitor 40 - Field (over/under excitation) Relay 41 - Field Circuit Breaker 42 - Running Circuit Breaker 43 - Manual Transfer or Selector Device 44 - Unit Sequence Starting Relay 45 - Abnormal Atmospheric Condition Monitor 46 - Reverse-phase or Phase-Balance Current Relay 47 - Phase-Sequence or Phase-Balance Voltage Relay 48 - Incomplete Sequence Relay 49 - Machine or Transformer, Thermal Relay 50 - Instantaneous Overcurrent Relay 51 - AC Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay 52 - AC Circuit Breaker 53 - Exciter or DC Generator Relay 54 - Turning Gear Engaging Device 55 - Power Factor Relay 56 - Field Application Relay 57 - Short-Circuiting or Grounding (Earthing) Device 58 - Rectification Failure Relay 59 - Overvoltage Relay 60 - Voltage or Current Balance Relay 61 - Density Switch or Sensor 62 - Time-Delay Stopping or Opening Relay 63 - Pressure Switch 64 - Ground (Earth) Detector Relay 65 - Governor 66 - Notching or Jogging Device 67 - AC Directional Overcurrent Relay 68 - Blocking or "Out-of-Step" Relay 69 - Permissive Control Device 70 - Rheostat 71 - Liquid Level Switch 72 - DC Circuit Breaker 73 - Load-Resistor Contactor 74 - Alarm Relay 75 - Position Changing Mechanism 76 - DC Overcurrent Relay 77 - Telemetering Device 78 - Phase-Angle Measuring Relay 79 - AC Reclosing Relay 80 - Flow Switch 81 - Frequency Relay 82 - DC Reclosing Relay 83 - Automatic Selective Control or Transfer Relay 84 - Operating Mechanism 85 - Communications, Carrier or Pilot-Wire Relay 86 - Lockout Relay 87 - Differential Protective Relay 88 - Auxiliary Motor or Motor Generator 89 - Line Switch 90 - Regulating Device 91 - Voltage Directional Relay 92 - Voltage and Power Directional Relay 93 - Field Changing Contactor 94 - Tripping or Trip-Free Relay HMI HST LGC MET PDC PMU - PQM RIO RTU SER TCM SOTF - ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS AFD CLK DDR DFR ENV HIZ - Arc Flash Detector Clock or Timing Source Dynamic Disturbance Recorder Digital Fault Recorder Environmental Data High Impedance Fault Detector Human Machine Interface Historian Scheme Logic Substation Metering Phasor Data Concentrator Phasor Measurement Unit Power Quality Monitor Remote Input/Output Device Remote Terminal Unit/Data Concentrator Sequence of Events Recorder Trip Circuit Monitor Switch On To Fault TYPICAL SUFFIXES PROTECTION OVERVIEW 15 AAC BBT C- Alarm/Auxiliary Power Alternating Current Battery/Blower/Bus Bus Tie Capacitor/Condenser/Compensator/ Carrier Current/Case/Compressor DC - Direct Current E - Exciter FGMNPRS- Feeder/Field/Filament/ Filter/Fan Generator/Ground* Motor/Metering Network/Neutral* Pump/Phase Comparison Reactor/Rectifier/Room Synchronizing/Secondary/Stainer/Sump/ Suction (Valve) TTH TL TT U- Transformer/Thyratron Transformer (High-voltage Side) Transformer (Low-voltage Side) Transformer (Tertiary-voltage Side) Unit Note: Descriptions per IEEE Std C37.2-1996 *Suffix N is preferred when the device is connected in the residual of a polyphase circuit, is connected across broken delta, or is internally derived from the polyphase current or voltage quantities. The suffix G is preferred where the measured quantity is in the path of ground or, in the case of ground fault detectors, is the current flowing to ground. www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 506 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Appendix Dimensional Drawings DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS Figure 2 Figure 1 0.200 [5.08] 2.650 [67.31] 2.280 3.050 [57.91] [77.47] 2.08 [52.83] 3.100 [78.74] 3.600 [91.44] 3.850 [97.79] A OPTIONAL LOOP HOLES B MAIN CONDUCTOR PASS HOLES 2.900 [73.66] 1.200 [30.48] C 0.77 [19.56] 4.700 [119.38] D. 0.650 [16.51] 5.050 [128.27] 2.16 [54.86] inches [millimeters] RS485MS-2W; COM 4-20 3.600 [91.44] 3.850 [97.79] inches [millimeters] 601; 601-CS-D-P1; 777; 777-ACCUPOWER; 777-KW/HP-P2; 77C; 77C-KW/HP Figure 3 DEPLUGGABLE TERMINAL BLOCKS MODBUS 0.830 [21.08] 10Base-T ETHERNET R R C REMOTE RESET I1 I2 I3 1 I4 DIGITAL INPUTS 4 Series B 5 3.000 [76.2] OUTPUT B 2.300 [58.42] (R) 784X ETHERNET Communication and I/O 3 PILOT DUTY RATING 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 5A @ 240VAC GENERAL PURPOSE IND. CONT. EQ. CIO-EN 2 OUTPUT A LISTED E68520 SCREW TORQUE RATING 0.5 Nm (5 in.-lbs.) REV. 00 0.350 [8.89] 3.750 [95.25] 0.700 [17.78] 4.760 [120.904] 0.635 [16.129] 0.274 [6.96] 0.294 [7.47] 0.415 [10.54] 0.159 [4.038] 0.569 [14.45] 1.00 [25.4] 2.628 [66.75] 3.000 [76.2] 2.456 [62.38] 2.882 [73.20] 0.680 [17.27] inches [millimeters] CIO-120-DN-P; CIO-DN-P; CIO-EN; CIO-MB; CIO-120-MB; CIO-777-PR (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 507 Measurements: inches (millimeters) www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols APPENDIX - DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS OVERLOAD COMM. STATUS 16 Appendix Dimensional Drawings DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS Figure 4 4.544 [115.417] 0.75 [19.05] 2.5 [63.5] 3.619 [91.922] 1.425 [36.195] 0.9 [22.86] inches [millimeters] RM1000 Figure 5 1.02 [25.98] 5.97 [151.51] 0.99 [25.15] 0.75 [19.05] APPENDIX - DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS 3.5 [88.9] 6.37 [161.67] #6 MOUNTING SCREWS PROVIDED inches [millimeters] 16 RM2000 PANEL 0.062 - 0.100 THICK [1.574 - 2.54] Measurements: inches (millimeters) www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 508 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Appendix Dimensional Drawings DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS Figure 6 Figure 7 2.663 [67.64] 1.47 37.2 2.663 [67.64] 2.93 74.4 4.50 114.3 2.663 [67.64] 0.38 9.5 5.27 133.9 2.663 [67.64] inches [millimeters] 2.17 55 Typ. inches [millimeters] 2.95 [74.9] Max 1.427 [36.245] 1.427 [36.245] 0.15 [3.8] Typ. 102A; 250A; 350; 355; 455; 50R; 50R-400-ALT; CP5; T10 Figure 8 SIDE 1.0 [25.4] 0.25 dia. 0.25 dia. mounting hole mounting hole for mounting for mounting screw screw 1.0 [25.4] 3.15 [80.01] 202; 202-200-SP 0.5 [12.7] BOTTOM 2.375 [60.331] 16 1.75 [44.45] inches [millimeters] ACBC-120; ALT; ALT-XXX-X-SW; ISS-101; PC-XXX-LLC; 201-100-SLD; 201A; 201A-AU; 201A-9; 201-XXX-SP; 201-XXX-DPDT; 201-XXX-SP-DPDT (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls APPENDIX - DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS 0.25 dia. 0.25 dia. for for indentation indentation inches [millimeters] inches screw[millimeters] screw anti-rotationanti-rotation Measurements: inches (millimeters) 509 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Appendix Dimensional Drawings DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS Figure 9 Figure 10 Informer; Informer-MS 460; 460-15-100-XXX; 460-XXX-SP; ISS-100; ISS-102; PC-102 1.391in 35.33mm 0. 2 5. 03 16 in m m 3.526in 89.56mm APPENDIX - DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS 3.015in 76.58mm 5.025in 127.64mm Figure 11 2.356in 59.84mm 3.750in 95.25mm 16 Measurements: inches (millimeters) www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols AF0100 510 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Appendix Dimensional Drawings DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS Figure 12 Figure 13 0.192 [0.488] 0.72 18.2 2.50 63.4 1.78 45.1 3.511 [89.179] 0.20 5.1 SIDE VIEW 0.621 [15.773] 3.750 [89.18] 2.70 68.5 5.025 [127.365] 2.25 57.2 1.13 28.6 C L C'BORE FOR #8 SCREW TOP VIEW LED STATUS INDICATOR inches [millimeters] LSRX; LSRX-C 2.350 [59.690] ISS-105; PC-105 Figure 15 inches [millimeters] 2.90" (73.66) 2.90" (73.66) 3.56 [90.43] 4.03" (102.36) 4.03" (102.36) 1.07 1.67 [42.42] [27.18] 4.50" (114.30) 0.375" (9.53) 4.50" (114.30) 0.375" (9.53) 5.25" (133.35) 5.25" (133.35) 3.12 [79.25] 2.913" (73.99) 2.163" (54.94) 0.725 [18.415] 2.30 [58.42] 111P / 233P / 235P DIMENSIONS 111P; 233P; 233P-1.5; 235P 111P / 233P / 235P DIMENSIONS LSR-0; LSR-XXX; LSRU (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls inches [millimeters] Measurements: inches (millimeters) 511 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols APPENDIX - DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS Figure 14 2.163" (54.94 16 Appendix Dimensional Drawings DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 HLVA6I23; HRDB; HRDI; HRDM; HRDR; HRDS; HRIS; HRPS; HRV; RS HSPZA22SL Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 FA; FS; FSU1000*; PHS*; PTHF4900DK*; SIR1; SIR2; SLR1*; TH1; THC; TCR9C; THD1B410.5S; THD2; THD3C42A0; THD7; THDB; THDS; THS TRDU TRU Figure 23 Figure 24 PLM; PLR; TDB; TDBH; TDBL; TDI; TDIH; TDIL; TDM; TDMB; TDMH; TDML; TDR; TDS; TDSH; TDSL FS500; PRLM; TRB; TRM; TRS Figure 26 Figure 27 CT; ESD52233; ESDR; FS100 (medium power); FS200; FS300; KRD3; KRD9; KRDB; KRDI; KRDM; KRDR; KRDS; KRPD; KRPS; KSD1; KSD2; KSD3; KSDB; KSDR; KSDS; KSDU; KSPD; KSPS; KSPU; KVM; T2D120A15M; TA; TAC1; TDU; TDUB; TDUI; TDUS; TL; TMV8000; TS1; TS2; TS441165; TS6; TSA141300; TSB; TSD1; TSD2; TSD3411S; TSD6; TSD7; TSD94110SB; TSDB; TSDR; TSDS; TSS; TSU2000 *If unit is rated @ 1A, see Figure 16 Figure 22 APPENDIX - DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS (snap for mounting bases) 16 ASQU; ASTU; DSQU; DSTU 3.69 (93.7) 3.00 (76.2) Figure 25 "P" clamp (P1023-2) 1.5 (38.1) 0.94 (23.88) 1.0 (25.4) 3.5 (88.9) 1.50 (38.1) 2.94 (74.7) 2.12 (53.8) 0.163 (4.14) 0.5 (12.7) 0.19 (4.83) FS100 (low current flasher); FS491 Measurements: inches (millimeters) www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 0.25 (6.35) 1.50 (38.1) 1.88 (47.8) 0.38 0.50 (12.7) (9.7) 0.8 (20.3) 1.70 (43.2) 0.25 (6.35) 0.187 (4.75) 1.94 (49.3) 2.50 (63.5) ERD3425A; ERDI; ERDM ORB; ORM; ORS 512 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Appendix Dimensional Drawings DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS Figure 28 Figure 29 3.5 (88.9) 2.94 (74.7) Figure 30 1.22 (31) 0.25 (6.35) 1.94 (49.3) 2.5 (63.5) 5.9 (149.9) 0.187 (4.75) DIA. 0.25 (6.35) 0.80 (20.32) 6.9 (175.3) SC3; SC4 DLMU Figure 31 3.3 (83.8) 0.50 (12.7) 4.4 (111.8) 0.55 (13.97) Figure 32 2.2 (55.9) 2.4 (61.0) 0.68 (17.27) PLMU11 WVM FB9L; HLMU; SCR9L Figure 33 Figure 34 0.36 (9.14) 0.187 (4.75) 3.5 (88.9) 2.94 (74.7) 0.25 (6.35) Figure 35 0.25 (6.35) DIA. 0.36 (9.14) DIA. 2.0 (50.8) 2.0 (50.8) LLC4; LLC6; PLS 1.94 (49.3) 2.5 (63.5) 1.75 (44.5) TCS; TCSA ECS; ECSW (ECS has spade connectors and ECSW has terminal board) Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 CURRENT LIMITING RESISTOR 0.28 (7.11) 2 24 AWG (0.25 mm ) UL1007 STRIPPED 0.25 (6.35) 12 1 (304.8 25.4) <_ 0.22 (5.59) 0.53 (13.46) LPM DCSA LCS10T12 Measurements: inches (millimeters) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Measurements: inches (millimeters) 513 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols APPENDIX - DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS 0.80 (20.3) 0.75 (19.05) 1.75 (44.5) 16 1.5 (38.1) 0.94 (23.88) "P" clamp (P1023-2) 1.0 (25.4) Appendix Dimensional Drawings DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS 0.19 (4.83) 0.5 (12.7) Figure 39 1.5 (38.1) 0.94 (23.88) Figure 40 Figure 41 0.163 (4.14) "P" clamp (P1023-2) 1.0 (25.4) 2.10 (53.3) 4.0 (101.6) 3.5 (88.9) 0.19 (4.83) 2.08 (52.8) 0.5 (12.7) 14AWG 0.065 (1.65) MSM 0.5 (12.7) 0.94 (23.88) 2.10 (53.3) 0.22 (5.59) 0.234 (5.94) 2.07 (52.6) Figure 42 14AWG 0.065 (1.65) 0.94 (23.9) 2.75 (69.9) 0.5 (12.7) 0.25 (6.35) 0.5 (12.7) 3.0 (76.2) 0.285 (7.24) 0.44 (11.35) 0.25 (6.35) 3.62 (91.9) 3.5 (88.9) 2.12 (53.8) 2.5 (63.5) 0.19 (4.83) 0.25 (6.35) 2.0 (50.8) 0.50 (12.7) 2.0 (50.8) LLC2 0.94 (23.88) 0.163 (4.14) N = Nylon Standoffs LLC1 LLC8 Figure 43 MODEL NUMBERS ENDING IN: KEY C W 0.440" (11.176 mm) 0.250" (6.350 mm) X 3.620" (91.948 mm) 3.500" (88.900 mm) Y 2.120" (53.848 mm) 2.500" (63.500 mm) Z 0.190" (4.826 mm) 0.250" (6.350 mm) Figure 44 Figure 45 [ ] APPENDIX - DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS [ 16 ] LLC5 Figure 46 [ [ ] ] TVM; TVW Figure 47 0.187 (4.75) 0.80 (20.3) 0.28 (7.1) 2.94 (74.7) 0.36 (9.1) 3.5 (88.9) ARP 1.94 (49.3) 0.28 (7.1) 2.5 (63.5) 1.75 (44.5) PCR FB; SCR Measurements: inches (millimeters) www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 514 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Appendix 2.31 2.0 3.0 2.5 Time Delay Relay 1.5 Seconds DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS 1.69 3.63 MAX 1.0 00.5 0.5 Dimensional Drawings 2.91 Figure 48 2.31 1.0 1.5 Seconds 2.0 3.0 2.5 Time Delay Relay 0.5 00.5 1.69 1.75 3.63 MAX 2.91 2.38 PRS65 Measurements: inches 3.63 MAX 2.91 Figure 49 1.75 CABLE-TIE EYELET 4 LOCATIONS 2.38 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 C D R S C D R C D R S C D R S H H P G INP 8 INP 6 INP 5 I NP 7 87.0 (3.43) PWR COMM S IO - RTD INPUT MODULE PWR + COMM 2 INP 3 INP 4 4 S S 0 R D C H R D C R D C H R D C V - + V INP 1 1 2 3 INP 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1.75 ADDRESS SWITCH ACCESS COVER 2.38 52.5 112.5 (4.43) (2.07) 12.5 (0.50) 56.0 (NOTE 3) (2.20) (2.36) 2. MOUNTING SCREWS: M4 OR 8-32. 3. OVERALL HEIGHT WHEN MOUNTED ON DIN EN50022 35-mm x 7.5-mm TOP-HAT RAIL. (0.57) M4 OR 8-32 TAP 14.5 APPENDIX - DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS 60.0 NOTES: 1. DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (INCHES). 6.3 100.0 6.3 (0.25) (3.94) (0.25) SIO-RTD-02-00 16 Measurements: inches (millimeters) (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 515 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Appendix Dimensional Drawings DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS Figure 50 4.79 (121.67) 2.50 (63.50) 2.93 (74.42) 3.10 (78.74) 1.25 (31.75) 2.50 (63.50) 3.10 (78.74) 0.63 (16.00) 4.08 (103.63) 1.25 (31.75) 0.63 (16.00) MP8000 APPENDIX - DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS 2.93 (74.42) 4.79 (121.67) 16 2.93 (74.42) 4.08 (103.63) 4.79 (121.67) 4.08 (103.63) Measurements: inches (millimeters) www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 516 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Index ALPHANUMERIC INDEX 102A Series pg 198 Arc-Flash Protection pg 14, 73 111-Insider-P / 231-Insider-P 101 ARP Series 157 111P / 233P / 233P-1.5 Series 106 ASQU / ASTU Series 270 201-100-SLD 136 Brackets & Clips 486 201-XXX-DPDT Series 204 CIO-777-PR 259 201-XXX-SP Series 190 CIO-DN-P / CIO-120-DN-P 257 201-XXX-SP-DPDT Series 192 CIO-EN 260 201A Series 200 CIO-MB / CIO-120-MB 255 201A-AU Series 202 COM 4-20 261 202 Series 206 Communication Adapters & Modules 202-200-SP Series 194 CP5 Series 168 232-Insider 104 CT Application 502 234-P 108 CT Selection Guide 479 235P 110 CT Series 426 250A Series 208 Current Monitoring / Load Sensing Relays 350 Series 210 Current Monitoring Relays & Transducers 167 355 Series 212 Current Transformers 480 455 Series 214 Current Transformers Sizing Chart 482 460 Series 216 D0920 460-15-100-LLS 137 DCSA Series (w / LCSC10T12) 460-15-100-SLD 139 Dedicated Timers 460-XXX-SP Series 196 Dimensional Drawings 507 50R Series 188 DIN-Rail & Mounting Adapters 485 50R-400-ALT 159 DLMU Series 224 601 Series 218 DSQU / DSTU Series 272 601-CS-D-P1 220 ECS Series 175 777 Series 114 ECSW Series 178 777-P2 114 EL3100 44 777-AccuPower 123 EL731 48 777-KW / HP-P2 Series 120 Electrical Accessories 469 777 / 77C Series 118 Enclosures & Watertight Covers 487 125 ERD3425A 391 ERDI Series 362 ERDM Series 275 77C-KW/HP Series A0220 AC / DC Earthed System 80, 473 48 253, 476 24 74 185 28, 262 ACBC-120 130 ESD52233 422 Accessories 467 ESDR Series 393 AC System Monitors / Load Sensors AF0100 AF0500 Alarm Control / Battery Charger 22, 167 FA / FS Series 455 79 FB Series 457 77 FB9L 21, 130 Feeder Protection 153 Find the Right Product for Your Application ALT-XXX-1-SW / ALT-XXX-3-SW Series 155 Flashers Alternating Relays 2 39, 439 20, 153 Flashers, Beacon Tower 41 ANSI Device Numbers 506 Flashers, Photo Control 41 Appendix - Dimensional Drawings 507 Flashers & Tower Lighting Controls (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 517 39, 439 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols INDEX ALT Series 461 14, 69 17 Index ALPHANUMERIC INDEX FPS FPU-32 pg 424 70 KRPS Series 281 442 KSD1 Series 284 FS100 (med power) Series 444 KSD2 Series 368 FS200 Series 446 KSD3 Series 402 FS300 Series 448 KSDB Series 321 FS491 450 KSDR Series 404 FS500 Series 451 KSDS Series 343 FSU1000 Series 440 KSDU Series 286 Generator Ground-Fault Relay 55 KSPD Series 406 GFA300 55 KSPS Series 288 Glossary of Terms 490 KSPU Series 370 Ground Reference Modules 472 KVM Series 243 13, 57 LCSC10T12 185, 473 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters Ground-Fault Protection 53 LCS10T12 / LPM Series 12, 43 187 Liquid Level Control 19, 129, 478 High-Tension Couplers 472 LLC1 Series 141 HLMU Series 227 LLC2 Series 143 HLVA6I23 241 LLC4 Series 145 HRDB Series 315 LLC5 Series 147 HRDI Series 364 LLC6 Series 149 HRDM Series 277 LLC8 Series 151 HRDR Series 396 Load Sensors HRDS Series 337 LSR-0 169 HRPS / HRIS Series 317 LSR-XXX Series 170 HRV Series 437 LSRU Series 171 HSPZA22SL 339 LSRX / LSRX-C Series 173 IEEE Device Numbers 506 Motor & Pump Protection Industrial Shock-Block 53 22 16, 93 Motor & Pump Protection with Bluetooth(R) 17, 112 Informer 250, 475 Mounting Adapters & Enclosures 483 Informer-MS 252, 475 MP8000 112 473 MP8100 112 Instrumentation & Metering Transformers 481 MPS Intrinsically Safe Relays/Pump Controllers 21, 160 Input Modules INDEX KRPD Series FS100 (low current) Series Ground-Conductor Monitoring 17 pg 71 98 MPS-469X 100 Introduction to Protection Relays 493 MPU-32 ISS-100 160 MPU-32-X69X 100 ISS-101 161 MSM Series 291 ISS-102 Series 163 Multifunction Timers 262 ISS-105 Series 165 Neutral-Grounding Resistor Chart 61 KRD3 Series 398 Neutral-Grounding Resistor Package 66 KRD9 Series 388 NGR KRDB Series 319 NGRM-ENC KRDI Series 366 NGR Monitoring KRDM Series 279 ORB Series 323 KRDR Series 400 ORM Series 293 KRDS Series 341 ORS Series 345 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 518 96 66 67, 487 13, 61 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Index ALPHANUMERIC INDEX Overview Panel Mount Adapters Personnel Protection pg 489 SE-134C / SE-135 483 53 pg 59 SE-325 62 SE-330 / SE-330HV 63 PC-102 Series 132 SE-330AU 65 PC-105 133 SE-601 47 PC-XXX-LLC-CZ / PC-XXX-LLC-GM 134 SE-701 50 PCR Series 465 SE-703 51 81, 469 SE-704 PGA-1100 52 PGA-LS10 473 Seal Leak Detectors PGA-LS20 473 Sequencing Controls 453 PGA-LS30 473 Sensing Resistors 474 PGR-3100 45 Shock-Block GFCI PGR-3200 46 SIO-RTD-02-00 PGR-4300 45 SIR Series 86 PGR-6100 94 SLR Series 88 PGR-6101-120 95 Sockets 488 PGR-8800 75 Software 468 PHS Series 84 Solidly-Grounded Systems PLM Series 231 Switching Relays & Controls PLMU11 229 T10 Series 274 PLR Series 237 T2D120A15M 428 PLS Series 239 TA Series 430 PRLM Series 295 TAC1 Series 432 Product Selection Guide PRS65 PTHF4900DK Pump Controls & Liquid Level Controls 11 TCR9C 18, 129 53 128 43, 504 15, 83 90 347 TCS Series 418 TCSA Series 183 TDB / T DBH / TDBL Series 325 TDI / TDIH / TDIL Series 372 TDM / TDMH / TDML Series 297 18, 129 Relay Application 494 Pump Protection 16, 98 181 Relay Software 468 TDMB Series 420 Relay Testing Equipment 472 TDR Series 410 Remote Indication & Meters 473-474 TDS / TDSH / TDSL Series 348 Remote Indication & Monitoring 245, 475 TDU / TDUH / TDUL Series 299 Resistance-Grounded Systems 62, 504 TDUB Series 327 Resistance-Grounding Conversion Resistance Grounding 503 13, 61 TDUI / TDUIH / TDUIL Series 374 TDUS Series 350 RM1000 Series 246, 475 Termination & Adapters 477 RM2000 Series 248, 475 TH1 Series 301 RS Series 408 THC / THS Series 352 RS485MS-2W 254 THD1B410.5S 303 53 THD2 Series 376 SC3 / SC4 Series 453 THD3C42A0 412 SCR Series 459 THD7 Series 378 SCR490D 458 THDB Series 329 SCR9L 463 THDS Series 354 SE-105 / SE-107 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls 58 Time Delay Relays 519 26, 262 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols INDEX SB6000 Series 17 Index ALPHANUMERIC INDEX Timer Function Guide pg 264 Timers, Factory-Programmable 26 Timers, Multifunction 27 Timing Function Symbols 264 TL Series 434 TMV8000 / TSU2000 Series Tower & Obstruction Lighting Controls Trailing Cable Protection White Papers & Technical Information An expanded Technical Application Guide, White Papers, and a library of technical information is available online at Littelfuse.com/TechnicalCenter. Littelfuse can help you address application and circuit protection challenges while achieving regulatory compliance. 305 39, 41, 439 57 TRB Series 331 TRDU Series 265 TRM Series 307 TRS Series 356 TRU Series 268 TS1 Series 309 TS2 / TS6 Series 380 TS441165 313 TSA141300 436 TSB Series 333 TSD1 Series 311 TSD2 Series 382 TSD3411S 414 Lowering the Limits for Ground-Fault Protection TSD6 Series 384 TSD7 Series 386 The Importance of Effective Motor and Motor Circuit Protection TSD94110SB 390 TSDB Series 335 TSDR Series 416 TSDS Series 358 TSS Series 360 TVM Series 235 TVW Series 233 Typical Suffixes 506 Ungrounded AC Systems 43 Ungrounded DC System 47 Ungrounded System Voltage Monitoring Relays Ground-Fault Protection with VFDs Selecting an Arc-Flash Relay Why NGRs Need Monitoring Transformer Protection Littelfuse Literature is in the App Store! 504 Our free Littelfuse Catalogs and Literature App keeps our products and technical resources at your finger tips, wherever you are. Find products and technical specifications you need, quickly and easily! 22, 167 222 INDEX WVM Series Introduction to Protection Relays and Applications 17 www.littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 520 (c)2017 Littelfuse Protection Relays & Controls Over 1000 Littelfuse MotorSaver (R), PumpSaver (R), and SSAC parts added! Local Resources for a GLOBAL Market Trollhattan Swindon Saskatoon Bellingham Rapid City Chicago Champaign Piedras Negras Muzquiz Kaunas Norwich Bremen Lake Mills Boston Noida Matamoros Wuxi Suzhou Dongguan Shenzhen Seoul Shanghai Taipei Yokohama Hong Kong Lipa City Singapore New Arc-Flash Relays AF0500 with zone protection and AF0100 with compact, cost-effective design AF0500 Arc-Flash Relay Sao Paulo AF0100 Arc-Flash Relay Fuses and Fuse Holders Catalog (PF101N) Littelfuse offers a complete circuit protection portfolio of industrial power fuses, including time-saving indication products for an instant visual blown-fuse identification. New Smart Motor Protection Relay MP8000 with Bluetooth(R) capabilities MP8000 Motor Protection Relay MP8000 Motor Protection Smartphone Application (R) POWR-GARD Solar Catalog (PF140N) POWR-GARD Solar Products are designed specifically for photovoltaic applications where issues such as heat, efficiency, longevity and global standards impact the choices in selecting circuit protection. Visit Technical Resources at Littelfuse.com Technical information is only a click away. The Littelfuse Technical Resources contains datasheets, product manuals, whitepapers, application guides, demos, on-line design tools, and more. An Extension of Your Team Technical Hotline (800-TEC-FUSE or 800-832-3873) Littelfuse engineers are a phone call away to help identify potential issues and provide product recommendations to resolve problems. Application and Field Support Our experienced product and application engineers work step-by-step with customers from design to installation to determine the best solution. PROTECTION RELAYS & CONTROLS CATALOG PROTECTION RELAYS & CONTROLS CATALOG MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Littelfuse World Headquarters 8755 West Higgins Road, Suite 500 Chicago, IL 60631, USA Technical Support: Tel: +1-800-TEC-FUSE E-mail: techline@littelfuse.com Customer Service: Tel: +1-800-227-0029 E-mail: PG_CSG@littelfuse.com Fax: +1-847-787-5190 Littelfuse SymCom 222 Disk Drive Rapid City, SD 57701, USA Technical Support: Tel: +1-800-832-3873 E-mail: techline@littelfuse.com Customer Service: Tel: +1-800-227-0029 E-mail: PG_CSG@littelfuse.com Fax: + 1-605-348-5685 Littelfuse Startco 3714 Kinnear Place Saskatoon, SK S7P 0A6 Canada Tel: +1-306-373-5505 Fax: +1-306-374-2245 E-mail: techline@littelfuse.com ARC-FLASH PROTECTION Littelfuse products are certified to many standards around the world. To check certifications on specific product please refer to the product datasheet on Littelfuse.com. Specifications, descriptions and illustrative material in this literature are as accurate as known at the time of publication, but are subject to changes without notice. Visit Littelfuse.com for the most up-to-date technical information. (c) 2017 Littelfuse, Inc. FORM PF130N Rev: 2-E-112116 GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING PUMP CONTROLLERS FEEDER PROTECTION GROUND-CONDUCTOR MONITORING AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS TOWER AND OBSTRUCTION LIGHTING CONTROL TIMERS FLASHERS